Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences

1

• I

i
if'j'f:!;;;:

jp^

M-l.' .l»'.l.

/

i

PROCEEDINGS

AMERICAN ACADEMY

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

NEW SERIES.
Vol. IX.

WHOLE SERIES.
Vol. XVII.

FROM JUNE, 1881, TO JUNE, 1882.

SELECTED FROM THE RECORDS.

BOSTON:

UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.

1882.

X

fi^

CONTENTS.

PAQE

I. Contributions from the Chemical Laboratory of Harvard College.

By Josiah Parsons Cooke 1

II. On the Spectrum of Arsenic. By Oliver W. Huntington 35

III. Thermoelectricity. — Peltier and Thomson Effects. By

Charles Bingham Penrose 39

IV. Thermoelectric Line of Copper and Nickel below 0°. By

Charles Bingham Penrose 47

V. Crystalline Form of Cryolite. By W. H. Melville ... 55
VI. Researches on the Complex Inorganic Acids. Phospho-molyb-

dates. By Wolcott Gibbs, M.D . 62

VII. An Indirect Determination of Chlorine and Bromine by Elec-
trolysis. By' Leonard P. Kixnicutt 91

VIII. Contributions from the Chemical Laboratory of Harvard Col-
lege. By Charles F. Mabery 94

IX. On Certain Substances obtained from Turmeric. — I. Curcumin. "^

By C. Loring Jackson and A. E. Menke 110

X. Contributions from the Chemical Laboratory of Harvard Col-

lege. By Henry B. Hill 125

XI. XV. — Simple Method for Calibrating T'hermometers. By

Silas W. Holman 157

XII. Contributions to North American Botany. By Asa Gray . 163

XIII. The Wedge Photometer. By Edward C. Pickering . . 231

XIV. On the Color and the Pattern of Insects. By Dr. II. A.

Hagen 234

IV CONTENTS.

PAGE

XV. On Telephoning over long Distances or through Cables.

By N. D. C. Hodges 268

XVI. On the Young Stages of some Osseous Fishes. With Plates.

By Alexander Agassiz 271

XVII. XVI. — Experiments on the Fatigue of small Spruce-Beams.

By F. E. Kidder 304

XVIII. Contributions to American Botany. By Sereno Watson 316

Proceedings 383

Memoirs : —

Richard Henry Dana 399

Ralph Waldo Emerson 403

Thomas Potts James 405

Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 406

John Amory Lowell 408

Theophilus Parsons 411

Edward Reynolds 414

Henry Charles Carey 417

Edward Desor 422

John William Draper 424

Lewis Henry Morgan 429

St. Julien Ravenel 437

Admiral John Rodgers 438

Barnas Sears . 442

."|^->hann Kaspar Bluntschli 445

Chirles Darwin 449

Joseph Decaisne 458

Theodor Schwann 460

Dean Stanley 461

List of the Fellows and Foreign Honorary Members . . 467
Index 475

PROCEEDINGS

AMERICAN ACADEMY

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

VOL. XVII.

PAPERS READ BEFORE THE ACADEMY.

I.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORA-
TORY OF HARVARD COLLEGE.

By Josiah Parsons Cooke, Director.

Presented May 11, 1881.

Introduction.

eed-
n of

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.

Received ..jLr*^.^>^^.-. /, ./~" r.^fxl.

Accession No. 6 "r+iT"

Given by ^^ ..(7.'r.r^.^..^e^t Tyh^rp'-^l^--

Place,

*»* No book OP pamphlet is to be pe moved from the liab-
OPatopy tuithout the pepmission ot the Trustees.

re-
;ctly
r as
hese
ents

un-

our
now
ided

r in

ucutai uuoci viiutfu, m cApiiiiiaLiun oi cercain precautions which we

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 1

^V CONTENTS.

PACE

XV. On Telephoning over long Distances or through Cables.

By N. D. C. IIod<;ks 268

XVI. On the Young Stages of some Osseous Fishes. "With Plates.

By Alkxandkr Agassiz . 2~\

XVII. XVI. — Experiments on the Fatigue of small Spruce-Beams.

By F. E. Kidder 304

XVIII. Contributions to American Botany. By Seuexo Watsox 316

Proceedings 383

Memoirs : —

Ricliard Henry Dana 399

Ralph Waldo Emerson 403

Thomas Potts James 405

Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 406

John Amory Lowell 408

Theophilus Parsons 411

Edward Reynolds 414

Henry Charles Carey 417

Edward Desor 400

John William Draner 404

Lewis Henry Mor . . 409

St. Julien Ravenf

Admiral John Re

Barnas Sears

-"'"'liann Kaspar I

Chirles Darwin

Joseph Decaisne

Theodor Schwai

Dean Stanley .

List of the Feli
Index ....

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AMEHICAN ACADEMY

OF

AETS AND SCIENCES.

VOL. XVII.
PAPERS READ BEFORE THE ACADEMY.

I.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORA-
TORY OF HARVARD COLLEGE.

By Josiah Parsons Cooke, Director.

Presented May 11, 1881.

Introduction.

In a paper presented to the Academy, and published in its proceed-
ings, Vol. XIII., page 1, we gave the results of our investigation of
the haloid compounds of antimony up to that time, including a re-
vision of the atomic weight of this element. We did not directly
answer the criticism which this paper called forth, except so far as
to present to the Academy, March 10, 1880, and to publish in these
Proceedings, Vol. XV., jDage 251, a preliminary notice of experiments
then in progress which furnished the best possible answer to the un-
founded assumptions of the critic. We also gave brief notices of our
work from time to time in the American Journal of Science. But now
that the work is ended for the present (or at least must be suspended
for a considerable period), we propose to bring the results together in
the present paper.

I. The Oxidation of Hydrochloric Acid Solutions of
Antimony in the Atmosphere.

In our first paper (loc. cit., page 21) we made the following inci-
dental observation, in explanation of certain precautions which we

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 1

2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

found to be necessary in order to secure the precipitation of pure an-
timoiiious sulphide : —

" The precautions here descrihed may seem unnecessary to those
who are not familiar with the fact that a solution of antimony in hy-
drochloric acid oxidizes with very great rapidity in the air, — fully as
rapidly as the solution of a ferrous salt. A solution reduced as we
have described, which has at first no action on the iodized starch paste,
will strike the blue color after it has been exposed to the air for only
a few minutes. This property of an acid solution of antimonious
chloride is mentioned by Dexter, in the paper already referred to, but
we were wholly surprised by the energy of the action. By means of
it, antimony can be dissolved in hydrochloric acid without the aid of
nitric acid, or of any other oxidizing agent save the air. if only a cer-
tain amount of antimonious chloride has once been formed. "When,
after exposure to the air, the solution is boiled over pulverized anti-
mony, the solution is reduced, and a further portion of the metal
enters into solution. After a second exposure, the same process can
be repeated, and so on indefinitely. The process is very slow and
tedious, but, in one experiment, we succeeded in bringing into solution
in this way several grammes of antimony."

On the sole basis of this language we have been represented as
asserting that such antimony solutions oxidize in the air as rapidly as
a solution of ferrous chloride^ and experiments on comparatively dilute
solutions of antimonious oxide in hydrochloric acid have been adduced
as proofs that our observation was incorrect.

As is evident from the context, the statement just quoted, although
the result of a very extended experience, was not based on quantita-
tive measurements. What we noticed was that the solutions were
very quicldy acted on by the oxygen of the atmosphere, and we freely
admit that the expression here italicized is a more accurate description
of our observation than the words originally used as quoted above.
But our meaning was not left in doubt, for we expressly say, immedi-
ately after, that the process is very slow and tedious. In regard to
the phenomenon in question, the effects are so obvious, when once
attention is called to them, that it is entirely unnecessai-y to confirm
our previous observations except so far as to add the following quan-
titative determinations, which will serve to give an accurate idea of
the extent of the action under the only conditions we have investi-
gated, or in regard to which we have written.

In order to determine the amount of oxidation caused by the action
of the atmosphere on a solution of antimony in hydi-ochloric acid, we

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 3

reduced the oxidized solution by boiling the liquid over antimony
buUets, and determined the loss in their weight. This method is fully
described in our original paper, and is based not only on the reducing
power of the metal, but also on the fact repeatedly observed, that, after
the reduction was complete, the smallest excess of the finely pulver-
ized metal would not dissolve, even after prolonged boiling, and in
the presence of a large excess of acid, if only the solution was pro-
tected from oxidation.

We began our experiments by dissolving 1.0036 grammes of pure anti-
mony (a portion of the same used in our experiments on the synthesis of
antimonious sulphide) in about 30 cubic centimetres of pure hydrochloric
acid (sp. gr. = 1.175) adding 3 cubic centimetres of very dilute nitric
acid (containing only about 5.4 per cent of HNOo). After the solu-
tion was completed we added bullets made of pure antimony (the
same that had been used in our previous experiments), and boiled the
solution in an atmosphere of cai-bonic dioxide, using the same appa-
ratus which we described in our previous paper (loc. cit.). After the
reduction was ended, the solution was transferred to a flat-bottomed
flask through a platinum tunnel, on which the bullets were retained ;
and, after washing into the flask the last traces of the solution, with
as small an amount of hydrochloric acid as possible, the tunnel was
removed, the bullets washed with water, and again weighed as at first
on the platinum tunnel. In reducing the original solution, 0.4100 of
a gramme of antimony were dissolved from the bullets. The solution
now containing 1.413G grammes of antimony was next exposed to the
air for different successive periods of time in a room having a varying
temperature of from 15° to 30°, sometimes in the shade, and at other
times on a window seat, where the sun's direct rays fell on the flask
during several hours of each clear day.

We give in the following table the weight of antimony dissolved
from the bullets after each successive exposure to the air, the amounts
in each case being determined with all the precautions described above,
and still more at length in our former paper : —

Weight of Sb originally dissolved .... 1.4136

1. Dissolved from balls after 3 days' exposure, 0.0150

2. " after 5 days 0.0295

3. « " 10 '' May 17 to May 27 . 0.0600

4. " " 23 " May 27 to June 19 . 0.1340

5. « " 37 " June 19 to July 26 . 0.2960

6. « " 120 " July 26 to Dec. 24 . 0.4481 0.9826

4 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

During these experiments the volume of the solution was gradually
increased by tlie hydrochloric acid used in washing as above described,
so that at last the volume amounted to 100 cubic centimetres.

It will be noticed that the amount of oxidation increased with the
time of exposure, and that, so long as the amount was small, it was
as nearly proportional to the time as could be expected under the
varying conditions. The increased activity shown by determination
No. 5 appeared to be due to the intensely warm weather and bright
sunshine during the period, and the last determination would seem to
indicate that, after the oxidation reached a certain limit, the process
went on more slowly, as we should naturally expect; but, with the
greatly vai-ying conditions during this long period, no certain conclu-
sion can be drawn in regard to the effect of any single cause.

The action we are discussing is entirely in harmony with the chem-
ical relations of antimony. The most striking characteristic of this
elementary substance is its tendency to form compounds of the radical
antimonyl, SbO. The oxichlorides, the oxibromides, and the oxi-
iodides, whose relations we have discussed so fully in our previous
papers, are examples in point, and we have been continually surj^rised
by the appearance of such compounds in reactions in the most unex-
pected ways. In this respect antimony closely resembles vanadium,
and with this element antimony is more closely allied than with its
familiar associate, arsenic. What the precise reaction is in the present
case we are not prepared to state. That it is not the simple conver-
sion of a terchloride into a pentachloride we are convinced ; but, in
order to elucidate the subject, further investigations are necessary.

In this connection we may appropriately add that while the above
determinations were in progress we repeated the experiment described
on page 19 of our previous paper (loc. cit.). We treated in an open
flask 5 grammes of finely powdered pure metallic antimony with 50 cu-
bic centimetres of strong and pure hydrochloric acid, to which we added
only one cubic centimetre of the very dilute nitric acid (5.4 per cent)
described above. The flask was placed in a warm, protected place
(30° C), and shaken from time to time. Soon the acid became col-
ored reddish-yellow, and the chemical action began. When it had
apparently ceased, the contents of the flask were shaken together, and
the solution became at once as colorless as water ; but, on standing in
the air, the color rapidly returned, spreading from the surface of the
liquid downward. These phenomena were repeated again and again
during four or five months, imtil the whole of the metal dissolved.
According to the reaction usually assumed to take place under these

OF ARTS AiND SCIENCES. 5

circumstances, 5 grammes of metal would have required 50 cubic cen-
timetres of acid, so that the effect was obtained with only one-fiftieth
of tlie amount required by this theory.*

II. Argexto-antimonious Tartrate (Silver Emetic).

On one occasion when analyzing antimonious chloride we noticed
the formation of " silver emetic," and the observation led us to fear
that this compound might be occluded by the argentic chloride or
bromide, precipitated from a solution containing tartaric acid and anti-
mony. This suspicion, thus excited, led us to make an investigation
of the substance in question with the following results : —

As stated by us in our former paper, this compound was originally
obtained by Wallquist by precipitating nitrate of silver with tartar-
emetic, and was analyzed both by him and by Dumas and Piria.
These chemists obtained respectively 27.31 and 28.05 per cent of
oxide of silver. They appear, however, to have prepared the sub-
stance only in an amorphous form. As stated in the pajjer just cited,
we first noticed the formation of crystals of the compound in a concen-
trated solution of antimonious chloride and tartaric acid, to which had
been added an excess of argentic nitrate, and from^the circumstances
of their formation we were led to form a somewhat erroneous infer-
ence in regard to their relation to water. We find that the substance
is far more soluble in this solvent than at first appeared. We have
found from further investigation that one part of silver emetic dis-
solves completely in one hundred parts of boiling, and in somewhat
less than five hundred parts of water at 15'^ C. In one determination
made by evajDorating, a saturated sokition, which had stood a long time
at a temperature of 15°, we found that one thousand parts of water
had dissolved 2.76 parts and in another 2.68 parts of the salt. There

* Although in our synthesis of antimonious sulphide it was our constant study
from the first to prevent the oxidation of tlie product, and althougli we most
carefully guarded every phase of the process, yet the theory was advanced that
the apparent weight of the product was increased by a partial oxidation of the
antimonious sulphide at the temperature at which the red was converted to the
gray modification. In answer to this wholly gratuitous assumption, it is only
necessary to say : 1. That the oxidation of the dried precipitate at this stage
of the process is a well-marked phenomenon, with every phase of which we are
acquainted. 2. That the oxidation is always attended with a loss of weight.
S. That the products of our determinations were always examined, and have
been in two cases preserved, and that these do not show the least signs of
oxidation.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

is obviously therefore no danger of the formation of this j^rotluct in
the precipitation of chlorine, bromine, or iodine from solutions of the
antimony compounds of these elements in tartaric acid, unless the
excess of silver nitrate is very large and the solutions very concen-
trated; and although we have most carefully looked for it in the
precipitate we have never discovered it, except under the peculiar
conditions described in our former paper, and our fear that it might be
occluded by these precipitates was wholly unfounded.

It is evident from the above experiments that the solubility of silver
emetic in water like that of cream of tartar and other salts of tartaric
acid is very greatly increased by heat, and we were easily able to
obtain good crystals of the compound in large quantities by dissolving
the precipitate, obtained as Wallquist describes, in boiling water, and
allowing the solution to cool. The crystals are colorless and have a
very brilliant, almost an adamantine, lustre.

From the reaction by which silver emetic is formed we should infer
that the composition of the salt would be expressed by the symbol

Ag, SbO,H,^OXC,HA)-H,0.

This compound would theoretically contain 2G.34 per cent of silver
and, as a mean of tJn'ee analyses, we obtained for the amount of silver
in the crystals 26.30 per cent, as previously stated.

The crystals of silver emetic rapidly blacken in the light, and are
very easily decomposed by heat. This decomposition takes place at
about 200° C. with a slight explosion. A very
fine carbon dust is blown out of the crucible,
and a residue is left behind, which under the
microscope is seen to consist of spangles of
metallic silver mixed with an amorphous
powder. Almost the whole of the powder
dissolved easily in a solution of tartaric acid,
and it evidently consisted of SbgOg. In one
experiment we weighed the silver emetic and
the product, and found that 0.8460 gramme of
the salt left 0.5304 gramme of residue. If the
residue consisted solely of silver and Sb^Og,
theory would require 0.5200 gramme, and it can be seen from this
how perfect the decomposition was. It is obvious, therefore, that were
this compound occluded as we at first feared, it would have made itself
evident on drying the precipitates.

Mr. W. II. Melville, assistant in this laboratory, has made the fol-

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. T

lowing crystallograpliic measurements of the crystals whose formation
and reactions we have described.

Angles betioeen normals.

(Ill) A (100) 70° 19J'

(111) A (TTl) 70° 17'

a:b:c = \: 1.38G : 0.571

100 A 110

I.
54° 12'

Measi

54°

ared.

19'

111 A 110

54° 51'

54°

54'

icro.

Brachy.

1

0.G94

1

0.726

1

0.7U

1

0.721

The pinacoid planes were irregular and the angles can only be
regarded as approximate.

System Trimetric with hemihedral habit.

Observed planes + K- {111} {100} {110} {Oil}?

In the following table the crystallographic ratios are compared with
those of the acid tartrates of rubidium, cresium and potassium, formerly
measured by us, and which have the same general form and hemihedral
habit.

Vertical.

Acid tartrate of csesium . . . 0.661

'• " rubidium . . . 0.695

" " potassium. . . 0.737

Silver emetic 0.412

III. Ox THE Solubility op Argentic Chlokide in "Water.

In our analyses of antimonious chloride we constantly noticed,
while washing the precij^itated chloride of silver with warm water,
that although the water first decanted from the precijsitate was per-
fectly clear it became turbid when mixed with the successive wash-
ings ; and on investigating the cause of this unexpected result we
found that it was due to the chloride silver dissolved by the pure wash
water and reprecipitated by die excess of nitrate of silver in the filtrate.
As the solvent action of tlie water used for washing the precipitate
evidently pi'oduced a marked effect on our chlorine determination, we
determined at once to investigate the extent of the influence.

This subject has already been studied by Stas, whose observations
are summed up by Dr. John Percy * in his recent volume on the
Metallurgy of Silver in the following words : —

* ^Metallurgy of Silver and Gold, Part I. p. 60.

8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

" The solubility of the chloride is greatest when in the flaky state,
as precipitated in the cold from a sufficiently dilute solution of silver ;
the solubility diminishes as the flakes shrink when left to themselves,
or as they are rendered pulverulent by long agitation with water.
Flaky or pulverulent chloride of silver,, dissolved in water, pure or
acidified by nitric acid, is precipitated by the addition of a salt of silver,
or of hydrochloric acid, or of an alkaline chloride. . . . The solution
of the chloride is wholly effected by pure or acidified water, as the case
may be, and is not caused by the soluble salt formed simultaneously
with the chloride of silver. The presence of nitric acid in the water
does not affect the solubility of flaky chloride of silver ; but it increases
the solubility of the pulverulent chloride in proportion to the quantity
of acid present. The precipitation of the dissolved chloride is the ex-
clusive result of its insolubility in the solution formed by adding an
excess either of the silver salt or of the alkaline chloride."

So also in Liebig and Kopp, Jahresbericht, 1871, 339: '"'Accord-
ing to Stas, the granular scaly and crystalline chloride is wholly insol-
uble in cold water: in boiling water the solubility is comparatively
great, but decreases rapidly with the temperature."

In our own investigation of this subject we have at once confirmed
and extended these observations of Stas, and our results may be of
interest as showing that in the very familiar method of determining
chlorine by precipitation with nitrate of silver, which is generally sup-
posed to be extremely accurate, a sensible error may arise from the
solubility of the chloride of silver in the hot distilled water used in
washing the precipitate. It would be well for every analyst to make
the following very striking experiment, which will enable him to appre-
ciate the extent of the action in question.

Take from five to ten cubic centimetres of pure hydrochloric acid,
and precipitate the chlorine in the usual way with nitrate of silver,
avoiding a large excess. After pouring off the supernatant liquid and
washing the precipitate once or twice with cold distilled water, pour
upon the white flaky chloride of silver a comparatively large volume of
boiling water. As soon as the precipitate settles, pour off the clear
hot water, dividing the solution between two precipitating jars. To
one of these add a few drops of a solution of nitrate of silver, and to
the other a few drops of hydrochloric acid. In both cases a precipi-
tate of chloride of silver will fall, and most chemists, certainly, w'ill be
surprised at the effect ; for it is not a mere turbidness that results, but
a well-defined precipitate, whose amount is easily estimated. Succes-
sive portions of boiling water poured upon the precipitate give the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 9

same reaction. In one experiment the reaction was still preceptible in
the fourteenth wash-water. lint under the action of the boiling water,
the precipitate becomes crystalline or granular and the action lessens,
until at last the water does not dissolve sufhcient chloride of silver to
cause even a cloudiness on the addition of nitrate of silver, as just
described. Mr. G. M. Hyams, a student in this laboratory, washed
two different portions of chloride of silver with boiling water until the
action ceased, and then weighed and examined the residue. In the
first experiment 1.4561 grammes of chloride of silver were washed with
66 litres of water. The chloride of silver was then collected, and
found to weigh 1.2320 grammes. Hence, 0.2241 gramme, correspond-
ing to 15.39 per cent, had passed into solution. In the second experi-
ment 60 litres of water were used, and 16.03 per cent of the cliloride
of silver originally precipitated were dissolved. These numbers, how-
ever, are only approximately accurate ; for, as the precipitate becomes
granular, it settles with less readiness, and there was necessarily some
loss in filtering off so large a volume of liquid.

In the experiments above described the boiling water produced only
a very slight decomposition of the chloride of silver. The precipitate,
granulated by the washing, readily dissolved in aqua ammonia, leaving
less than a milligramme of a black powder, which was proved to be
metallic silver.

The solvent power of water on freshly precipitated chloride of sil-
•ver did not appear to be influenced by the presence of free nitric acid,
even in large quantities. We tried the effect both of dropping the
nitric acid on the precipitate before pouring on hot water, and also of
previously adding nitric acid to the boiling wash-water. We used
amounts of nitric acid {8= 1.355) varying from five to two hundred
cubic centimetres to the litre of water, but without finding any marked
difference in the result.

The presence of a small amount of nitrate of silver in the water
entirely prevented its solvent action, so far as we could discover. In
order to determine the limit of the action, we added different quantities
of nitrate of silver to the boiling water before pouring it on to the
precipitated chloride of silver. With one centigramme of nitrate of
silver to the litre of water, there was a marked turbidness on subse-
quently adding an excess of the same reagent to the filtrate. With
two, three, or even four centigrammes to the litre, an opalescence could
still be distinguished, although constantly diminishing with the in-
creasing amount of the salt. With five centigrammes, there was
no opalescence, and we concluded that one decigramme of nitrate of

10 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

silver to the litre of boiling wash- water would certainly prevent all
action.

A few drops of hydrochloric acid added to the wash-water greatly
diminishes its solvent action on flaky chloride of silver, but does not
wliolly prevent it, as is evident from the fact shown in the table below,
that hydrochloric acid does not precipitate chloride of silver from its
solution in water nearly as effectually as nitrate of silver; and, as is
well known, hydrochloric acid, if in any considerable excess, exerts a
strong solvent action on the precipitated chloride.

As shown by Stas, the precipitation of chloride of silver, from its
solution in hot water by the reagents we have named, depends solely
on the change which the reagents produce in the solvent. That the
action is an example of simple solution is shown by the fact that a
considerable portion of the chloride of silver dissolved in boiling water
is deposited when the solvent cools. This phenomenon is a striking
one, and can easily be observed by pouring into a glass crystallizing
pan some of the clear solution obtained in the experiment described
above. As the water cools it becomes cloudy, and deposits a granular
powder, which adheres to the bottom of the glass. The grains are
usually very small ; but if the solution cools slowly the crystalline
form can readily be distinguished under the high powers of a good
microscope, and the little cubes present all the characteristics of the
native crystals of chloride of silver. It is evident, therefore, that the
granular condition of chloride of silver is a crystalline condition, and
this experiment may elucidate the manner in which the native crystals
are produced.

We have thus far only spoken of the solubility of cliloride of silver
in boiling water. As is evident fi-om the crystallization just described,
the solubility rapidly diminishes as the temperature falls ; but even at
the ordinary temperature the solubility is distinctly marked. Luke-
warm water poured on and off freshly precipitated chloride of silver,
becomes decidedly opalescent on the addition of niti-ate of silver, and
even if cold water is used the opalescence is perceptible.

In order to obtain an approximate measure of the effects we have
described, Mr. Hyams precipitated about fifteen grammes of chloride of
silver, and, after thoroughly washing it, boiled the precipitate with a
larjie volume of water in a ch^ss flask. At the end of an hour he
decanted through a filter about one litre of the boiling water, and,
having divided the filtrate into two portions, he added to one portion
nitrate of silver, and to the other, hydrochloric acid. Tlie precipitated
chloride of silver was in each case collected and weighed. At the end

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

11

of two hours' boiling, two other portions were filtered off and treated
in a similar way. These determinations were then repeated with a
fresh quantity of chloride of silver, and afterwards taking a third
quantity of chloride of silver, the boiling water was simply poured
on twice in succession, and the similar portions thus obtained treated
as before. The results in every case were nearly the same as shown
in the following table. In this table

1 and 2 are results after one hour's boiling of 1st quaptity.
3 and 4 " " " two hours' " " " "
5 and G " " " one hour's " " 2d quantity, etc.
7 and 8 " " « two hours' " " " " "
9 and 10 after simply pouring on boiling water.
10 and 12 " " " " " «

No.

"Wglit of Water.

Wght of AgCl.

Wght of AgCl
per litre.

Precipitant.

1

523.6 gram.

0.0011

0.0021

Nitrate of silver.

2

4G!).5

0.0004

0.0009

Hydrochloric acid.

3

115.0

0.0002

0.0017

Nitrate of silver.

4

402.1

0.0004

0.0010

Hydrocliloric acid.

5

225.0

0.0004

0.0018

Nitrate of silver.

6

462.0

0.0004

0.0009

Hydrochloric acid.

7

696.4

0.0014

0.0020

Nitrate of silver.

8

825.4

0.0007

0.0008

Hydrochloric acid.

9

700.4

0.0014

0.0020

Nitrate of silver.

10

747.2

0.0007

0.0009

Hydrochloric acid.

11

520.9

0.0011

0.0021

Nitrate of silver.

12

287.5

0.0003

0.0010

Hvdrocliloric acid.

If we assume that the amount of chloride of silver precipitated by
nitrate of silver under the conditions described above is a con-ect
measure of the solubility of the chloride, it appears from the above
determinations that about two milligrammes of chloride of silver are dis-
solved by each litre of boiling water, and further that only about one
half of the amount thus dissolved is precipitated by hydrochloric acid.

In making chlorine determinations, it is a very common practice to
wash with very hot water, in order to secure the jirompt settling of
the chloride of silver, or to wash away any occluded material, and it
was the chief object of this investigation to determine the extent to
which the solubility of the chloride in distilled water might affect
the result. For this purpose we made two series of determinations

12

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of the chlorine in chloride of antimony ; in both cases precipitating
with nitrate of silver the chlorine from a solution of the chloride of
antimony in tartaric acid and water with the usual precautious. But,
while in the first series the precipitated chloride of silver was washed
with boiling hot distilled water to about the xo ckT)?tt7 according to Bun-
sen's scheme ; in the second series, although hot water was also used
in washing, one decigramme of nitrate of silver per litre was added to
each successive portion of the wash-water poured upon the precipitate,
until the last two portions, which were poured on cold. By this
simple device, the advantages of washing with hot water may be
secured, while its solvent action is prevented. The results are given
in the following table : —

First Series.

No.

1
2
8
4

Weight of SbCls
taken.

2.3856 gram.
3.1300
3.4207
5.0031

Weight of AgCl
obtained.

4.4784 gram.
5.8712
6.4243
9.3790

Per cent of CI
calculated.

46.441

46.407

46.462

46.377

Mean value,

46.422

Max. diff. from mean,

0.047

Second

Series.

Weight of SbClj
talien.

Weight of AgCl
obtained.

Per cent of CI
calculated.

3.4059 gram.

6.4188 gram.

46.624

3.6603

6.9014

46.643

2.4762

4.6658

46.617

2.5557

4.8212

46.651

No.

1
2
3
4

Mean value, 46.634

Max. difif. from mean, 0.017

Difference between means of two series, 0.212

It is evident from these results that when great accuracy is required,
the solubility of chloride of silver may become a very serious source
of error in determinations of chlorine, and in our first paper on the
atomic weight of antimony, this was the chief cause of the discrepancy
between the analyses of chloride of antimony on the one hand, and
the bromide, iodide, and sulphide of antimony — analyses of which
closely agreed among themselves — on the other hand. It was shown
in the paper just referred to that, although the greatest care was taken
in purifying the material, the chloride of antimony used actually left

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 13

behind on evaporation a sufficient amount of oxicbloride to reduce the
per cent of chlorine 0.1 IG (loc. cit. page 64). The mean results
which we actually obtained from seventeen analyses of chloride of
antimony was 4G.G20 ; and when to this we add 0.212 and O.llG, the
sura is 46.948, which differs from 46.985 — the theoretical value
when Sb = 120, and CI =35.457 — by only 0.037, or if we take
CI = 35.5 by 0.072. In this estimate we leave out of the account
the known solvent action on chloride of silver of the tartaric acid
used to keep the antimony in solution. This must equally affect
botli of the series of determinations given above, and fully accounts
for the small difference that remains to be explained. This whole
discussion, however, only serves to confirm the conclusion previously
expressed, that chloride of antimony is a most unsuitable material
for the basis of an atomic weight determination ; and, having ex-
plained the anomaly to which we gave prominence in a previous
paper, we shall here take leave of the subject. We have also studied
the solubility of bromide of silver in water, but this is so small that
we found it difficult to measure the amount. In water at the ordinary
temperature, or even in tepid water, bromide of silver is practically
insoluble. In boiling water it is perceptibly soluble, but not more so
than is chloride of silver in water at the ordinary temperature. Hence
the determination of bromine does not require the same precautions,
and is susceptible of greater accuracy than that of chlorine ; and on
this account, as well as for other reasons which we have previously
discussed, the atomic weight of antimony can be deduced from the
analyses of the bromide of antimony with as great accuracy as can at
present be reached in such determinations. In the seven determina-
tions of the per cent of bromine in bromide of antimony, whose results
are given beyond (p. 18), the maximum difference from the mean value
66.6651 was only 0.0045, and Professor Mallet, in his analyses of
bromide of aluminum, has obtained with the same method a similar
degree of accuracy.*

In conclusion, we would again express our obligations to Mr. G. M.
Hyaras, who has assisted us in the work of this investigation.

IV. Additional Experiments on the Atomic "Weight op
Antimony.

In our previous j^aper on this subject, we gave our reasons for the
opinion, since fully confirmed, that the bromide of antimony is the

* Philosophical Transactions, Part III. 1880, 1022.

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

most suitable compound of this element, as yet known, for determin-
ing its atomic weight; and the results of fifteen analyses of five dif-
ferent preparations of the bromide were published, which gave for
the atomic weight in question the mean value 120.00 with an extreme
variation between 119.4 and 120.4 for all the fifteen analyses, and be-
tween 119.6 and 120.3 for the six determinations in which we placed
most confidence. The antimonious bromide used in these determina-
tions was purified first by fractional distillation, and secondly by crys-
tallization from a solution in suljihide of carbon. In the crystallized
product thus obtained, the bromine was determined gravimetrically as
bromide of silver in the usual way. Although it seemed at the time
that the results were as accordant as the analytical process would
yield under the unfavorable conditions, which the presence of a large
amount of tartaric acid in the solution of the bromide of antimony
necessarily involved ; yet it was obvious that the agreement was far
from that which was desirable in the determination of an atomic
weight, and our chief confidence in the accuracy of the mean value —
independently of its remarkable agreement with previous results —
was based on the fact that the known sources of error tended to
balance each other. Hence our conclusions were stated with great
caution, and the hope was expressed that, after a more thorough inves-
tigation of the subject, we might be able " to return to the problem
with such definite knowledge of the relations involved as will enable
us to obtain at once more sharp and decisive results than are now
possible."

In our previous paper, we described a simple apparatus which we
devised for subliming iodide of antimony ; and in a note to the paper
we stated that we were a2)j)lyi"g the same process to the preparation
of bromide of antimony, and that it promised excellent results. Our
expectations in this respect have been fully realized, and the prod-
uct leaves nothing to be desired, either as regards the beauty or the
constancy of the preparation. The fine acicular crystals are perfectly
colorless, and have a most brilliant silky lustre. With ordinary pre-
cautions, they can be kept indefinitely without change, and it is easy
therefore to determine the weight of the material analyzed to the tenth
of a milligramme.

The material used in the following determinations was first prepared
as described in our previous paper. It was then repeatedly distilled
from a small glass retort rejecting at each distillation the first and
the last portion. Lastly, it was twice sublimed in a slow current of
absolutely dry carbonic dioxide. As it was only possible to sublime a

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 15

few grammes at a time in the apparatus we used, and as the several
products were not mixed, each of the portions analyzed was the yield
of a separate sublimation, and the agreement of the results is therefore
in itself a proof of the constancy of the preparation. In the first set of
analyses, the bromine was determined gravimetrically by precipitation
with nitrate of silver, as before described. The bromide of antimony
was first dissolved in a concentrated solution of tartaric acid, using
about five grammes of the crystallized acid to a gramme of the bromide,
and the solution was then diluted with from 250 to 500 cubic centi-
metres of water. To this solution was slowly added, under constant
agitation, a solution of nitrate of silver in slight excess of the amount
required for complete precipitation. The amount of crystallized
nitrate of silver required was always carefully weighed out, allowing
one decigramme in excess of theory for every litre of the solution of
bromiile of antimony made as above described. The nitrate of silver
was then dissolved in a considerable volume of water, and the bromide
of silver was precipitated from a cold solution, care being taken to
prevent the formation of lumps which invariably result if the solu-
tions are warm or concentrated, and which greatly interfere with the
washing of the precipitate. The precipitate was washed by decanta-
tion five times, pouring on in each case a volume of lukewarm dis-
tilled water equal to that of the original solution, and after the pre-
cipitate had settled, drawing off the wash-water with the inverse filter
(see these Proceedings, Vol. XII. page 124.) Lastly, the precipitate
was transferred to a porcelain crucible, and dried at from 120° to
130°.

The bromide of silver weighed was always tested, sometimes by
dissolving the material in strong aqua ammonia, and at other times by
heating it to the melting point. Had there been the least occlusion
of silver emetic, or any other possible product, there would have been
an insoluble residue or a loss of weight ; and, since the bromide of
silver always gave a perfectly clear solution, and the loss of weight on
melting never exceeded a few tenths of a milligramme, we were as-
sured that our product was perfectly pure.

Of the five determinations whose results are given below, the first
three were made under my direction by Mr. G. De N. Hough ; the
last two were made with my own hands.

16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Analyses of Antiimoniods Bromide.
Determination of Bromine.

No.

Wt. of SbBrg ta-
ken in grammes.

Wt. of AgBr ob-
tained.

■ Per cent of Br. Difif. from

Br = 80Ag = 108. mean.

YalueofSb.

Diff.from
moau.

1.

4.1767

6.5420

66.652

— 0.016

120.08

+ 0.08

2.

2.0250

3.1734

66.685

+ 0.007 ,

119.90

— 0.10

3.

1.9999

3.1340

66.680

+ 0.012

119.93

— 0.07

4.

8.6985

5.7946

66.669

0.001

119.99

— 0.01

5.

2.8959
Mean value

4.5361

66.653
66.6679

0.015

120.08
119.996

+ 0.08

Theory Sb. 120 requires 66.667 '

The mean vahie of the percentage of bromine deduced from the
fifteen analyses previously made (see these Proceedings, Vol. XII.",
page 54) was 66.666, which differs only by an inappreciable quantity
from the mean of the above results. At the same time the results are
much sharper, the maximum difference from the mean value having
been reduced to less than one fifth of the previous amount, and to only
0.00025 of the quantity estimated, giving us with certainty the atomic
weight of antimony within one one-thousandth of its value. It must
be remembered, moreover, that, although these last results were ob-
tained with the same compound as before, the material was prepared
in a wholly different way. The material first used was purified by
repeated crystallization from sulphide of carbon, — that last used by
repeated fractional distillation and sublimation.

Hoping to reduce the limit of error to a still greater degi-ee, we *
were led to devise a volumetric method of testing the atomic weight of
antimony, which, while it had all the advantages of the gravimetric
method 23reviously employed, is free from its sources of error. The
method has also this great advantage, that it brings the question of
the atomic weight of antimony down to a definite issue.

If the atomic weight of antimony were 122.00, it would require
1.7900 grammes of pure silver to jirecipitate the bromine from a solu-
tion of 2.0000 grammes of antimony bromide, while if the atomic
weight of antimony were 120.00, it would require 1.8000 grammes of

* Since publishing our " preliminary notice," our attention has been called to
the fact that a similar process was used by Professor J. W. Mallet of the Univcr-
Bity of Virginia in his investigation of the atomic weight of lithium, as it has
since been used by him in his admirable work on the atomic weight of aluminum.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 17

silver. Now it is easy to estimate volumetrically -j-i^ of this differ-
ence with certainty, "We therefore prepared with great care a button
of pure * metallic silver, which we annealed, and rolled out to a thin
ribbon. We then weighed out from two to four grammes of bromide
of antimony, prepared by sublimation as described above, and dis-
solved this salt in an aqueous solution of tartaric acid, which we then
transferred to a litre flask, and diluted to about 500 cubic centimetres.
We next very accurately weighed out a quantity of silver slightly less
than that which calculation showed was required for complete precipi-
tation. This silver was dissolved in nitric acid, and the solution hav-
ing been evaporated to dryness over a water bath, the silver salt was
washed into the flask containing the bromide of antimony. As soon
as the supernatant liquid had cleared, the small additional amount of a
normal silver solution required to produce complete precipitation was
run in from a burette, and measured with the usual precautions. We
used no extraneous indicator, because it was important not to intro-
duce any possibly new disturbing element into the experiment, and in
the titration of bromine with silver, the normal and familiar phenom-
ena, which mark the close of the process, furnish a very sharp indica-
tion. The details of one of the determinations were as follows : ■ —

The weight of the bromide of antimony used amounted to 2.5032
grammes. To precijiitate the bromine from the solution of this material,
2.2-iOl: grammes of silver would be required if Sb = 122.00, and 2.2529

[* A quantity of silver which had been reduced from chloride and bromide of
silver, obtained as a product of previous analytical processes, was dissolved in
nitric acid, and precipitated as chloride by hydrochloric acid. The precipitate
was first boiled in aqua regia, and then thoroughly washed, after which the
chloride was reduced by boiling with caustic soda and inverted sugar, and the
precipitate, again washed, having been transferred to a porcelain crucible and
dried, was heated to a low red heat in a muffle until the grains were sintered to-
gether. The sintered mass was melted on a block of prepared coke before a gas
blow-pipe, and while cooling was covered with a reducing flame in order to
prevent the occlusion of oxygen gas. The metallic button was next rolled out
into a ribbon between steel rollers ; and, after the ribbon had been annealed in
a muffle, the surface was etched with dilute nitric acid, and afterwards scoured
with sand. The metal thus prepared was preserved under distilled water.
The oxygen occluded by the metal thus prepared must have been, if any,
exceedingly small in amount; but, even allowing the average quantity found
by Dumas in metal which had been melted in the air under ordinary circum-
stances, we calculated that this amount would only affect the third decimal
place in the atomic weight of antimon}' ; and it seemed therefore unnecessary
to take so inappreciable an effect into consideration. Moreover, the great purity
of our material was subsequently made evident.
VOL. xvii. (n. s. XI.) 2

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

if Sb = 120.00. "We weighed out, with as much accuracy as if we
were adjusting a weight, the smaller of these two quantities of metal-
lic silver, and after dissolving the pure metal in pure nitric acid, evap-
orating the solution to dryness, and redissolving in water, we gradually
added the whole of this silver solution to the litre flask containing the
solution of bromide of antimony, in the manner described above. It
was then found that 12^^^ cubic centimetres of a standard silver solution
{one gramme of silver to the litre) were required to complete the pre-
cipitation. It will be seen that the weights of the bromide of anti-
mony and silver used could be thus determined with the most absolute
precision, and we have the greatest confidence in these values to the
-jL of a milligramme. Moreover, it will be noticed that the volumet-
ric method is only used to estimate the difference in the atomic weight
which has been in question, and that, if the method were only accurate
to the ^0 of the quantity to be measured, it would give us the value
of the atomic weight within -^^ of a unit, while if, as we had reason to
believe, the process was accurate within one per cent, it would fix the
atomic weight within y^^ of a unit.

By the method just described, the following results were obtained.
The letters a and b indicate different preparations : —

Wt. of SbBr,
taken.

TotaJ Wt. of Ag
used.

Per cent of Br
Ag = 108 Br = 80.

Corresponding
value of Sb.

a

1. 2.5032

2.2528

66.6643

120.01

a

2. 2.0567

1.8509

66.6620

120.02

a

3. 2.6512

2.3860

66.6644

120.01

b

4 3.3053

2.9749

66.6696

119.98

b

5. 2.7495
Mean value.
Theory Sb.

2.4745
120 requires

66.6653

120.01

66.6651

120.01

66.6666

« Sb.

122

66.2983

The extreme variation from the mean in these determinations is
less than one ten-thousandth of the quantity directly estimated, and
corresponds to less than two ten-thousandths of the total value in
the atomic weight of antimony. We have thus reached the extreme
limit of accuracy with determinations on this scale. By using very
much larger amounts of material, it is possible that we might still fur-
Xhev diminish the limits of experimental error ; but when we consider
the further causes of error incident to handling so large an amount of

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 19

material, it seems doubtful whether any advantage would really be
gained. At all events such determinations would require an expendi-
ture of labor and skill which is not demanded in the present condition
of chemist I'y.

"While making the first three volumetric determinations, it became
obvious that the mode of experimenting was highly favorable to the
accurate estimation of the amount of bromide of silver formed ; and,
were we to repeat this investigation, we should adopt the same mode
of precipitating bi'omine in all cases. The rotatory motion given to
the liquid mass in the stoppered flask in order to hasten the " clearing
up," after each fresh addition of the silver solution, tends very greatly
to granulate and thoroughly wash the precipitate. In the last two
determinations, therefore, we collected and weighed the bromide of
silver formed, and this weight gave us a most important control over
the whole work. In the previous work we assume that the ratio of
A": Br = 108 : 80, and find that on this assumption Br: Sb = 80 :
120. But if we both determine the amount of silver required to pre-
cipitate a given weight of antimonious bromide, and also at the same
time the weight of argentic bromide formed, it is obvious that we fix
at once the ratio of three atomic weights (Ag : Br : Sb) independently
of any assumption whatsoever. This, so far as we know, is a new
feature in investigations of this kind, and evidently vastly diminishes
the possibilities of error, and enhances the value of the result. We
give in full the two determinations which were made in this way : —

No. 1.

Weight of tube and SbBrg 22.2225 grammes.

" after transfer to flask 18.9172 "

" of SbBra taken 3.3053

" of silver taken 2.9749 "

Weight of crucible and filter 44.3729 "

" with AgBr dried at 150° . . 49.5512

" " " after again heating .... 49.5512 "

" " AgBr dried at 150° 5.1783

Weight of crucible and AgBr after removing
small filter with adhering particles . . .

Weight after heating AgBr. to incipient fusion . 49.5007

Reduced weight of AgBr 5.1782

Per cent of bromine 6G.665

Atomic weight of antimony 120.01

49.5008

20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

No. 2.

"Weight of tube and SbBrj 32.4979 grammes.

after transfer to flask 29.7484 "

of SbBrg taken 2.7495 "

of silver taken 2.4745 «

of crucible and filter 44.3732 "

with AgBr dried at 150° . . 48.6810 "

" « after again heatmg .... 48.6810 "

« AgBr dried at 150° 4.3078 «

Weight of crucible and AgBr after removing ) f;".->i «

small filter with adhering particles . . . )

Weight after heating AgBr to incipient fusion . 48.5522 "

Eeduced weight of AgBr 4.3076 "

Per cent of bromine 66.667 "

Atomic weight of antimony 120.00 "

Brin^in"; now these results tocfether, we have two additional Erravi-
metric determinations of the atomic weight of antimony.

Weight of SbBrj Weight of AgBr Per cent of Bromine Corresponding

taken. determined. Ag = 108Br = 80. value of Sb.

b 6. 3.3053 5.1782 66.665 120.01

b 7. 2.7495 4.3076 66.667 120.00

Mean value, 66.666 120.00

It is now obvious that these gravimetric determinations, taken in
connection with the corresponding volumetric results, give us the most
conclusive evidence of the purity, both of the metallic silver used, and
also of the bromine in the bromide of antimony, which is the basis of
this atomic weight investigation. By comparing b 6 and b 7 with b 4
and b 5 respectively, we obtain the following data : —

1. 2.9749 grammes of silver gave 5.1782 grammes bromide of silver.

2. 2.4745 " « " 4.3076 " " "

Hence it follows that, as shown by these experiments, the propor-
tions of the silver to the bromine were respectively : —

1. 108.00 silver to 79.99 bromine.

2. 108.00 " " 80.01 «■

Mean value 108.00 " « 80.00

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 21

This is the ratio of the atomic weight of silver to that of bromine,
and corresponds to the second decimal place with the determinations
of Stas as well as with those of Dumas.

"We have now furnished as evidence of the atomic weight of anti-
mony, —

1. The mean of fifteen analyses of bromide of antimony purified by
crystallization from sulphide of carbon, with an extreme variation be-
tween 119.4 and 120.4 for all the fifteen analyses.

2. The mean of five analyses of bromide of antimony purified by
distillation and sublimation, with an extreme variation between 119.90
and 120.08.

3. The mean of five volumetric analyses of bromide of antimony,
also purified by distillation and sublimation, with an extreme variation
between 119.98 and 120.02.

4. Two gravimetric determinations of the bromine in two of the
portions of bromide of antimony used in the volumetric analyses, but
still essentially distinct determinations, which gave almost identical
results.

Bringing these several means together as of equal value, we have : —

Per cent of Br.

Value of Sb.

1.

Mean of fifteen determinations

66.666

120.00

2.

((

five

i(

66.668

119.99

3.

i(

five

a

66.665

120.01

4.

u

two

((

66.666

120.00

Final

mean

value,

66.666 +

120.00

Furthermore, we have shown by the last two determinations, that
the ratio of the atomic weight of the silver to that of the bromine,
used in our experiments, was 108.00 to 80.00, and hence that the
»"atio of the atomic weights of bromine silver and antimony must be

Ag : Br : Sb = 108.00 : 80.00 : 120.00,

with a probable error not exceeding 0.01 in any case. Of course our
experiments only serve to fix the ratio between these three quantities,
and any considerations which may lead chemists to change the value
of one of the quantities must affect the other two in the same propor-
tion. If with Stas we take Ag = 107.66, then Br r= 79.75, and Sb=:
119.63; and in this connection the fact should be recalled that the
ratio of Ag to Br, according to Stas, is essentially identical with that
given above, and the same as that found both by Dumas and by Ma-

22 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

rignac. Of all the ratios between the atomic weights, it is the one in
regard to which there is the greatest certainty; and it is with this very
well established relation that we have connected the atoir'C weight of
antimony.

Entirely in harmony with the above results are our experiments on
the synthesis of sulphide of antimony, in which we found as a mean of
thirteen experiments Sb= 119.94 when S = 32 ; and the same is
equally true of our analyses of iodide of antimony, which gave as a
mean of seven determinations Sb = 119.98 when I = 127.00. But
although these results formed important stages in our investigation,
they now add but little to the evidence of the far more accordant re-
sults since obtained. When compared with these later results they
show, however, to what a great extent error may be eliminated by the
repetitions of an imperfect process.

Lastly the anomaly which the analysis of antimonious chloride first
presented has been explained by finding, first, that the material em-
ployed contained a constant amount of oxichloride ; and, secondly, that
the water used in washing the precipitate exerted a definite solvent
action on the chloride of silver estimated.

Having thus solved the problem we undertook as flir as is at present
practicable, we must now take leave of the subject, regretting only
that our investigation should have been the occasion of any controversy.
In addition to the recognition we made in our previous paper, we
would here express our obligations to Mr. G. De N. Hough and
Mr. G. M. Hyarns, who have greatly aided us in the experimental
work during the latter part of this investigation.

V. — The Boiling Point of Iodide of Antimony, and a New
FoKM OF Air Thermometer.

In continuation of our investigations on the Haloid Compounds of
Antimony, the boiling point of antimonious iodide has been deter-
mined by Mr. W. Z. Bennett, at the time a student in this laboratory.
The observations were made with Regnault's air thermometer, but it
was found possible to simplify very greatly the details of the process
without seriously impairing the accuracy of the result. For tempera-
tures above the range of a mercury thermometer's measurements, ac-
curate to one degree centigrade, are all that the uncertain conditions
of most problems permit, and all, therefore, that the circumstances
demand. As used by Regnault, the air thermometer is capable of
measuring such temperatures accurately to the one tenth of a degree,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

23

A

and by multiplying observations possibly to the one bunflredth of a
degree. In his admirable investigation of the boiling point of sul-
phur at different temperatures, the observations of temperature are
undoubtedly accurate to this extent; but Regnault's own discussion of
these observations plainly indicates that there must have been un-
known or accidental causes influencing his experiments, which render
the results uncertain to at least one degree ; and the boiling point of
sulphur is still in doubt to this extent. It should be added, however
that there are only a very few boiling points which are
known more accurately ; for, even when within the range
of a mercury thermometer, an observation of a boiling point,
to be accurate to a tenth of a centigrade degree, requires (
an attention to circumstances which is seldom bestowed on
such observations.

The glass thermometer-bulb used in our experiments is
represented in the accompanying figure (Fig- 1) of one half
the actual size in its linear dimensions. The longer stem
was made of thermometer tube, and a shorter stem was
added to the opposite end of the bulb in order to facilitate
the cleaning, drying, filling, or emptying of the interior, all
of which was easily accomplished by the aid of a Bunsen
pump. The shorter stem was of course sealed after the
bulb had been dried and made ready for use, and before it
was immersed in the medium whose temperature was to be
measured. After an equilibrium had been established at
this unknown temperature, T'°, the protruding end of the
longer stem was sealed, and at the same time the height of
the barometer, H, was noted. The bulb was then taken to
a room of uniform temperature provided in the laboratory
for gas analysis, and, after being mounted on a convenient
support, the end of the stem was broken off under mercury,
and the apparatus left to itself for a time to secure a per-
fect equilibrium of temperature. This temperature, T°,
was then observed, by means of a standard thermometer
hanging near the bulb ; also the height, h, to which the mercury had
risen in the bulb, was measured by a cathetometer ; and in addition
the height, H', of a barometer (hanging in the same room) was noted.
Closing now the open stem with the finger, the bulb was quickly in-
verted and the containing mercury drawn out into a tarred vessel and
weighed (nipping off the extreme end of the shorter stem for the pur-
pose). This gave the weight, xo. Lastly, the bulb and stem having

\l

Fig. 1.

2-4 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

been completely filled with mercury by suction, the weight W, corre-
sponding to their total capacity was obtained in a similar way. The
required temperature could now be calculated by means of the well-
known law of Charles : —

T°' + 273°.2 = (7-°. + 273^2) ^^. -^^ [1 J^ {T^-T°') /t]

It will be noted that as the mercury columns, including the heights
of the barometer, were all measured at the same constant tempera-
ture ; and, as we are dealing with relative values only, no reductions
are necessary. Moreover, an error of one tenth of a millimetre in the

value of jj, Y would make, in determining the boiling point of sul-
phur (448°), a difference of only one eighth of a degree, so that meas-
urements of these heights are sufficiently close, if accurate, to one half
a millimetre, and might even be made with a common rule. The
most uncertain element in the formula is the expansion of glass ; but
if the bulbs are made of flint glass (lead glass) tubing, such as is used
in this neighborhood for ornamental ware, the mean coefficient of ex-
pansion will vary very little from 0.000025, if the temperature does
not exceed that at which the glass begins to soften. The rate of ex-
pansion of flint glass is not only less than that of crown, but it is also
more constant, and increases very slowly with the temperature. Flint
glass is therefore better adapted for the use we are describing. The
expansion of the glass used in our experiments was carefully deter-
mined, and found to have the value given above, within two or three
tenths of a unit in the last place. A difference of one unit in this
place would make a difference of one third of a degree in the boiling
point of sulphur.

In order to test the accuracy of this method, Mr. Bennett made
four determinations of the boiling point of sulphur under different
barometric conditions, which in the following table are compared with
the results of Regnault, reduced to the corresponding pressures : —

Boiling Point of Sulphur.

Barometer.
Height at 0°.

Bennett.

Regnault.

Diff.

758.8

447.4

447.3

+ 0.1

763.9

448.2

447.7

+ 0.5

709.6

448.2

448.1

+ 0.1

776.7 448.2 448.7 —0.5

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 25

Reguault made ei"[ht observations on the maximum tension of sul-
phur vapor at temperatures varying from 387°.64 to 554°.03, and from
a discussion of these deduced the constants of an exponential formula,
by whicli he calculated a table of maximum tensions for every ten de-
grees between the extreme limits, and also plotted a cori-esponding
curve. It so happens, however, that the only two observations
within the range of ordinary atmospheric pressure fall outside, and
on the same side, of this assumed curve. These observations are the
ones usually taken as indicating the boiling point of sulphur ; and
Victor Meyer, in one of his methods of determining the density of the
vapors of substances wliich have a high boiling point, assumes a value
for the boiling point of sulphur (at the mean atmospheric pressure at
Zurich), which he obtains by simple interpolation from the two ob-
servations just referred to.* In like manner we have calculated the
above values corresponding to the pressures at which Mr. Bennett's
results were obtained on the basis of the same two observations ; but,
instead of simply interpolating by the first differences, we have as-
sumed that tlie variation between the two observed values would fol-
low the law indicated by the general curve, which Reguault gives as
the best expression for all his observations. But according as we take
the two observations, or the whole, we obtain values for the boiling
point of suljDhur differing by more than a degree ; and hence, as we
have already said, there is still an uncertainty in regard to the boiling
point to this extent. As is evident, Mr. Bennett's observations con-
firm very closely the interpretation of Regnault's results, adopted by
both Victor Meyer and by ourselves.

After the accuracy of our method had been thus placed beyond
doubt within the limits required, Mr. Bennett made three determina-
tions of the boiling point of antimonious iodide, with the following re-
sults : —

Barometer. Height at 0°, Boiliug Point of Sb T3.

758.1 millimetres. A0O°A

758.4 " 400°.9

759.3 " 400°.9

Probably only a small part of the difference between these observa
tions depends on the variations of pressure. We only regard the
method as accurate to whole degrees, and 401° is evidently the boiling

* Fresenius's Zeitschrif t, xvi. 482.

26

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

[^

Fig. 2.

point of antimonious iodide at the normal pressure of the
air within half a degree on either side.

The method we have here described we can most con-
fidently recommend as a most efficient and accurate means
of determining high temperatures in chemical laboratories.
It requires no expensive apparatus, and no more delicate
manipulation than most processes of gas analysis. Indeed,
this method is most readily associated with Bunsen's meth-
ods of gas analysis ; and, in a laboratory provided with a
room fitted for that work, the observation of temperature
we have described can be made in a very short time.

In connection with these experiments, we were led to
devise a very simple and inexpensive form of differential air
thermometer, that can be used almost as readily as a
mercury thermometer, and which will measure either high
or low temjjeratures with all the accuracy that is usually
required. The instrument is represented by Fig. 2 of one
half its linear dimensions. The long stem is made of
"barometer tubing," a little over a millimetre in diameter,
and by careful calibration is arbitrarily divided into parts of
equal capacity, making, we will say, two hundred divisions
on the length of the stem. While the instrument is still
open at both ends it is easy to determine, first, the weight
of mercury which fills the bulb up to the first division of
the stem ; and secondly, the weight of a column of mercury
covering an observed number of divisions of the stem.
These constants being known, and the interior of the instru-
ment having been most carefully dried, for which the two
openings offer great facilities, a short column of very pure
mercury is introduced, and brought into the position repre-
sented in the figure. The two ends are now hermetically
closed with a blow-pipe, and the instrument is made. It can
be used either in a vertical or horizontal position, although
the zero point of the scale is slightly different in the two
cases, owing to the weight of the short mercury column.
Of course this column remains immovable so long as the
temperature of the two ends remains the same ; but when
the bulb is heated, the column, which we will call the index,
moves up the stem, which becomes a closed monometer. If
the instrument is to be used for measuring low tempera-
tures, the index should be placed about one third way up

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 27

the stem before closing the open ends. The theory of the instrument
is the same in either case, but in our description we will assume that
the index has been set for measuring high temperatures, as shown in
our figure.

As the instrument is a differential thermometer, its accuracy de-
pends on keeping the stem at a constant and known temperature ;
and from this constant temperature the observed temperatures are
deduced. AVhen the thermometer is held in a horizontal position, and
the stem can be protected from the neighboring sources of heat, it is
sufficient to place a standard mercury thermometer at the side of the
stem ; but it is alwa)'s better, and generally necessary, when the stem
is in a vertical position over the source of heat, to surround the stem
with a jacket, through which circulates a stream of water of known
temperature. This temperature we will call the temperature of refer-
ence, and represent by T°. In order now to determine the value in
centigrade degrees of the division of the instrument, we place it in the
position in which we propose to use it ; and when the two ends are at
the same temperature, we observe the position of the two ends of the
index on the graduate scale. AVe can now easily find from the weights
obtained before closing the instrument, first the weight of mercury
which would fill the bulb and stem up to the index, which we call W ;
and, secondly, the small weight of mercury which would fill one
division of the stem which we will call w. "We have also, by obser-
vation, the number of division on the stem above the index. This
number, which we count from the closed end of the stem, we will
represent by N'.

Assume now that the bulb and stem up to the index is immersed
in a medium which has the temperature, T'. The index moves, and
in its new position let N' represent the number of division on the stem
above the index. We can now easily deduce the following values : —

rrhrr = the ratio of the tension of the confined air at T'° and T°.

N'

^ — N' = the number of division through which the index moved.

W + (N N') IV

— — = the ratio of the volumes of the air in the bulb at

T° and T'°, independent of the expansion of the glass.
W+(N—N')w ^j _^ j-yT_ -yT,-j ^^ _ g^j^g j.^^Jq^ allowing for

expansion of glass.

Then, as we can easily deduce from the laws of Mariotte and
Charles : —

28 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

T'° + 273 = ^,{T°-\- 273) W+iN-N')w ^^ _j_ j- yo _ ^.o-j ^^

With this formula, it is now easy to compute the values for each divi-
sion of our arbitrary scale. "We cannot, however, depend absolutely
on the result, as there are several causes which will differ with each
instrument, and of which we can take no account. It is therefore best
to observe, with the instrument, two or three well-established boiling
points, which will give us fixed points by which we can correct the
table, and we shall then have an instrument whose precision is fully
equal to that of a mercury thermometer.

It is, of course, very desirable that the temperature of reference T°
should be always the same and as invariable as possible. This is best
accomplished, as above suggested, by maintaining a circulation of water
through a glass jacket surrounding the stem of the instrument and
enclosing also a small mercury thermometer, which is best tied to the
stem. By selecting the temperature of reference a little higher than
the highest temperature of the water supplied by the laboratory hy-
drants, it is easy to maintain the required temperature within a degree
by regulating the flow. The instrument may then be adjusted to the
tubulature of a retort and used in fractional distillations.

VI. Revision op the Atomic Weight of Cadmium.

By Oliver W. Huntington, of the Senior Class.

The method adopted by Professor Cooke for verifying the value of
the atomic weight of antimony, described in this volume (page 16),
proved to be so definite and conclusive, that it seemed desirable to
apply it in all other cases to which it was suited, in order not only to
verify the received values of the atomic weights, but also to test more
fully the hypothesis of Prout, an hypothesis to which recent investi-
gation and speculations have given renewed interest.*

The method of Professor Cooke is applicable to all those elements
of which a pure, stable, well-defined, and soluble bromide can be pre-

* See Revision of the Atomic Weight of Aluminum, by J. W. Mallet, Philo-
sophical Transactions, part iii. 1880 : also various papers by J. Norman Lock»
yer on the disassociation of the chemical elements in "Nature" and in the
Proceedings of Royal Society ; also Cooke's Chemical Philosophy, revised edi-
tion, page 272.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 29

pared. It consists in determining in one series of analyses the bromine
of the compound as bromide of silver by the iisual gravimetric method
with the precautions already described (page 19) ; and in another series
of experiments, or in the same analyses, when practicable, determining
the amount of silver required to precipitate the bromine. We thus
obtain not only the relation of the atomic weight sought both to that
of bromine and to that of silver ; but also the relation between the
atomic weight of bromine and that of silver ; and since all experi-
menters agree on this last ratio to within one ten-thousandth of its value
it is evident that the comparison of the two series of results gives a
sharp control of the accuracy of the work.

Professor Cooke assigned to me the atomic weight of cadmium as
my portion of the work he had planned on the revision of the atomic
weights, and this investigation was made with his aid and under his
immediate direction. Bromide of cadmium fulfils all the conditions
which the new method requires ; and, since the accepted value of the
atomic weight of cadmium is a whole number, it seemed probable that
a revision of this value by a more exact process would bring additional
evidence in support of the hypothesis of Prout.

Having found that bromide of cadmium could not readily be puri-
fied by repeated crystallizations on account of its very great solubility
in water, we sought to obtain a pure compound by preparing pure car-
bonate of cadmium on the one hand and pure hydrobromic acid on the
other.

To prepare pure carbonate of cadmium the commercial metal was
first dissolved in pure hydrochloric acid. From this solution, still
strongly acid, sulphide of cadmium was precipitated by sulphide of
hydrogen, and the precipitate thoroughly washed with hot distilled
water. The sulphide having been redissolved in hydrochloric acid,
and the resulting sulphide of hydrogen expelled by boiling, the cad-
mium was next precipitated as carbonate by carbonate of ammonia,
and the precipitate digested with a large excess of this reagent. The
white carbonate thus obtained was thoroughly washed and redissolved
in hydrochloric acid ; and the same series of precipitations repeated.
Lastly, in order to remove any possible trace of adhering chloride, the
carbonate of cadmium which had thus been twice precipitated by car-
bonate of ammonia, and twice digested with a large excess of this re-
agent, was dissolved in pure hydrobromic acid, and a third time precipi-
tated and digested with pure carbenate of ammonia.

The hydrobromic acid used in this investigation was made by the
process described by Dr. Edward R. Squibb, of Brooklyn, in the

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Transactions of the Medical Society of the State of New York.* In
order to purify the acid, it was repeatedly redistilled with a small
amount of a concentrated solution of bromide of potassium, rejecting
each time the distillate until the boiling point rose to 128°; when, as
is well known, an acid containing about 47 per cent of HBr distils
unchanged. The acid thus obtained was as colorless as water.

Meanwhile, in order to test the purity of the hydrobromic acid and
also as a basis for the rest of our investigation, we jjrepared a quantity
of pure silver by the method already fully described in a previous
part of this volume (page 17) ; and with the pure silver thus pre-
pared the following two sets of determinations were made.

For tlie first set, weighed amounts of silver were dissolved in very
carefully purified nitric acid, using only a very slight excess of this sol-
vent in any case. "We prepared for the purpose a dilute acid by mixing
one part of acid, having Sp. Gr. 1.355, with four parts of water and
of this weak acid 5. 3 c. m.^ were required for each gramme of silver.
We were thus able to estimate the amount necessary for each analysis,
and we used generally one half a cubic centimetre in excess.

The silver having been perfectly dissolved, and the solution diluted
with water to from two hundred to five hundred cubic centimetres,
according to the amount of silver used, we gradually and cautiously
precij^itated bromide of silver by adding pure hydrobromic acid, pre-
pared as just described, but greatly diluted until the acid was very
slightly in excess. For the method of washing and collecting this

* " The formula and process for making an acid of this strengtli are as
follows : —

Take of Potassium Bromide Six parts.

Sulphuric Acid, Sp. Gr. at 15°.6 C. I ^

'■ ' ' > . . . Seven parts.

1.838, at 25 ° C . 1.828 )

"Water Nine parts.

"Add to the sulphuric acid one part of the water and cool the mixture.
Then dissolve the potassium bromide in six parts of the water by means of heat,
supplying the loss of water by evaporation during the heating. Pour tlie diluted
sulphuric acid slowly into the hot solution witli constant stirring, and set the
ritixture aside for twenty-four hours, that the sulphate of potassium may cr3's-
tallize. Pour off the liquid into a retort, break up the crystalline mass, transfer
it to a funnel, and, having drained the crj'stals, drop slowly upon them two parts
of the water so as to displace and wash out the acid liquid. Add the liquid, thus
drained ofE and washed out, to that in the retort, and distil the whole nearly to
dryness, or until nothing further distils oflP by moderate heating. The distillate
will weigh about ten parts and should contain about thirty-seven per cent of
hydrobromic acid."

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 31

precipitate, we may refer to Vol. XI I. page 124, of these Proceedings.
Tlie results were as follows : —

Weight of Silver.

Weight of Bromide of Silver.

Per Cent of Silver.

1.

1,4852 grammes.

2.5855 grammes.

57.444

2.

1.4080

2.4510

57.446

3.

1.4449

2.5150 "
Mean Value

57.451

57.447

For the second set of experiments bromide of silver precipitated,
washed, and dried as described (loc. cit.), was melted in a platinum cru-
cible, and then reduced by a voltaic battery under dilute sul{)huric
acid. This process was devised and perfected by Mr. L. P. Kiunicutt,
Assistant in this Laboratory, who had the great kindness to conduct
the reduction in the followinsc determinations.

Weight of Bromide of Silver.

Weight of Silver.

Per Cent of SUver.

1.

4.1450 grammes.

2.3817 grammes.

57.444

2.

1.8172

1.0437

57.434

3.

4.9601

2.8497
Mean Value

57.449

57.442

These results show conclusively the great accuracy of Mr. Kirmi-
cutt's process, which he will describe in detail in another place. The
mean of the two sets of results gives for the per cent of silver 57.445,
the theoretical per cent (Ag = 108 and Br = 80) being 57.446. If
we throw out No. 2 of second series, which is obviously less trust-
worthy than the other two determinations of the same series, on
account of the comparatively small amount of material used, the mean
of the remaining five determinations corresponds absolutely to theory,
and the total result, therefore, leaves no doubt whatever as to the
absolute purity of the materials employed.

Bromide of cadmium was now prepared by dissolving pure carbon-
ate of cadmium in pure hydrobromic acid, and subliming the product
previously dried at 200° in a current of pure and perfectly dry carbonic
dioxide gas. The carbonic dioxide was prepared by mixing bicarbon-
ate of soda and sulphuric acid with a large volume of water in a strong
generator, and drawing off the gas under pressure through appropri-
ate washers and driers; and the apparatus used for sublimin"- the
bromide of cadmium was similar to that described in these Proceed-

3:2 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ings, Vol. XIII. page 57, using however a porcelain tube heated by
a gas furnace in place of a tube of glass. The bromide of cadmium
when thus sublimed crystallizes in pearly scales around the open
mouth of the tube.

Prepared as we have described, anhydrous bromide of cadmium is a
splendid preparation. The precise form of the highly lustrous crystals
could not be distinguished, but the scales are tabular crystals having a
single optical axis normal to the extended face of the scales and hav-
ing a high negative double refracting power. Although so soluble, the
crystals are not sensibly hygroscopic, and can be weighed on an open
watch-glass without the slightest variation of weight during the process.
They dissolve at once in water without leaving a trace of residue.

The following determinations were all made with the material we
have described, and since only a few grammes could be sublimed at a
time, the separate analyses were made with the products of nearly as
many sublimations. Some of the material was sublimed twice, and
the constancy of the composition under these circumstances is the best
proof possible of the definiteness of the compound. The results of the
analyses may be classed under two heads.

In one series of determinations, the bromide ,of antimony, whose
weight had been accurately determined, having been dissoh'ed in pure
water in a stoppered flask, a little less than the calculated amount of
silver required to precipitate the bromide was carefully weighed out
and dissolved in a measured amount of weak nitric acid allowing as
before described a slight excess. This solution jjroperly diluted was
then gradually added to the solution of bromide of cadmium under con-
stant agitation in order to avoid the aggregation of the bromide of
silver in lumps. The agitation was frequently renewed until the pre-
cipitate settled, and then a standard solution of silver (one gramme to
the litre) was cautiously added until the precipitation was complete,
and the last drops did not produce the faintest opalescence after stand-
ing. The precipitate was now washed by decantation five times suc-
cessively, using each time a volume of cold distilled water equal to the
volume of the original solution, and pouring off the water into a porce-
lain crucible, from which it was drawn by the reverse filter. Finally,
the precipitate was washed into the crucible, and after drying at from
120° to 130° weighed with the small filter.

In a second series, the determinations were conducted in the same
way as in the first, excepting that the chief attention was directed to
determining the exact point of complete precipitation. In several
cases, indicated by an asterisk, both the amount of silver required, and

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES.

33

the amount of argentic bromide formed were determined in the same
experiment ; but this was not always practicable.

First Series.

Weight of Bromide
of Cadmium.

Weight of Bromide
of Silver found. '

Value of Cd
when Ag = 108 and Br = 80

1. 1.5592 grammes.

2.1529 grammes.

112.32

2.* 3.7456

((

5.1724 «

112.28

3. 2.4267

u

3.3511 «

112.28

4.* 3.6645

(I

5.0590 "

112.36

5.* 3.7679

ii

5.2016

112.36

6. 2.7938

n

3.8583

112.27

7.* 1.9225

li

2.6552 "

112.26

8. 3.4473

(i

4.7593 "
Mean Value

Second Series.

112.34

112.31

Weight of Bromide
of Cadmium.

Weight of Silver
required.

Value of Cd when
Ag = 108 and Br = 80

1.* 3.7456 grammes.

2.9715 grammes.

112.27

2. 5.0270

a

3.9874 "

112.30

3.* 3.6645

u

2.9073 "

112.26

4.* 3.7679

a

2.9888 ' "

112.30

5.* 1,9225

a

1.5248

112.33

6. 2.9101

a

2.3079

112.35

7. 3.6510

"

2.8951

112.39

8. 3.9782

u

3.1551 "
Mean Value

112.35

112.32

As can easily be calculated according to the mean of the first series
of determinations, 1.0000 gramme of bromide of cadmium gives 1.3808
grammes of argentic bromide, and according to the mean of the second
series 1.0000 gramme of bromide of cadmium requires for complete
precipitation 0.7932 gramme of silver. Hence, as a mean of these
experiments, 0.7932 gramme of silver yields 1.3808 grammes of argen-
tic bromide and therefore corresponds to 0.5876 gramme of bromine.
Moreover, since

0.7932 : 0.5876 = 108.000 : 80.006,

34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

it follows with a very high degree of probability that

Ag : Br : Cd = 108.00 : 80.00 : 112.31,

within one ten-thousandth of the value of either quantity. It must
of course be regarded as absolutely proved that, in the material
analyzed, the proportion of bromine to the remainder of the mass,
assumed to be pure cadmium, is as 2 X 80.00 to 112.31, but it is always
conceivable that the material used contained some unknown impurity.
In the present case, however, such an assumption is highly improb-
able ; first, because such extreme care was taken in the preparation ;
secondly, because the products of the diiferent sublimations were so
constant in composition ; and, thirdly, because the presence of any of
the metals usually associated with cadmium would tend to lower and
not to raise the apparent atomic weight. If any impurity is present, it
wouM seem as if it must be some unknown element, and only on such
a bare chance as this can the evidence be invalidated which the
results of this investigation furnish against the hypothesis of Prout.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 35

Investigations on Ligut and Ueat, fdblished with an appropriation feom tub
KuMFOBD Fund.

11.

CONTRIBUTIOX FROM THE PHYSICAL LABORATORY OF
HARVARD COLLEGE.

ON THE SPECTRUM OF ARSENIC.
By Oliver W. Huxtington.

Presented by Professor Trowbridge, June 28, 1881.

It has been noticed in the case of the spectrum of nitrogen gas, that the
spectrum obtained from an electric discharge of low intensity through
a rarified atmosphere differs from that obtained when the intensity of
the discharge has been increased by a Leyden jar. In the case of the
low tension discharge, the bands of the spectrum appear fluted on the
more refrangible side ; but upon the introduction of a Leyden jar into
the circuit the fluted appearance at once vanishes, and the spectrum
breaks up into isolated bands. This diflference has been ascribed to a
difference of condensation of the molecule. Now as arsenic is allied
to nitrogen, it was thought the same difference might appear iu the
spectrum of arsenic, and we proposed to make this a subject of investi-
gation. For this purpose, we first prepared two tubes, — one an ordi-
nary Geisler tube, such as is used for showing the spectrum with
rarefied gas ; the other as shown in Fig. 1 of accompanying plate, for
the spark spectrum with Leyden jar. A small amount of pure metallic
arsenic was introduced into each tube, and they were then repeatedly
exhausted, each time replacing with hydrogen. After the final ex-
haustion, the tubes were heated, in order to fill them with the vapor
of arsenic. But, upon passing the spark through them, we could
obtain no definite or satisfactory result. The arsenic spectrum was
feeble, the hydrogen brilliant, and the fluted indefinite bands which
accompany the hydrogen spectrum wholly obscured the phenomenon.

Judging from the statements in Roscoe's spectrum analysis that
these fluted portions of the hydrogen spectrum were accidental and
due to imjiurities, we attempted to get rid of them in order to bring
out the arsenic spectrum. "We, therefore, prepared several tubes with
pure hydrogen. We arranged tubes with two outlets, in order to pass

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

a coiitiuuoiis current through the whole apparatus, iucludiug the
Sprengel pump which was connected with one of the openings. The
hydrogen was prepared from pure zinc and sulphuric acid, and most
carefully dried. "We would allow the gas to slowly pass through the
apparatus for twenty-four hours, then exhaust, and after exhaustion
heat the tube as hot as practicable under the circumstances, then pass
dry hydrogen and repeat the process several times. Notwithstanding
these precautions, we found, after a great many trials with different
tubes, that the fluted and more or less diffused spectrum always
accompanied the four principal hydrogen lines. It being then impossi-
ble to eliminate the diffused spectrum, we next tried alloying the
platinum electrodes with arsenic, and experimented with these in a
rarefied atmosphere of hydrogen, both with continuous discharge of
Rumkorff coil, and with interrupted discharge with Leyden jar. We
now obtained very definite arsenic bands, apparently the same iu both
cases ; but the effect was very momentary, and gave no opportunity
for measurement. The spectrum while it lasted was very striking ;
but, as soon as the arsenic upon the extreme point of the electrode
passed off, the characteristic spectrum disappeared.

We were by this experience led to contrive the following apparatus,
by which we obtained the desired result, and the same may be useful
in experiments on the spectra of similar volatile substances. A longi-
tudinal section of the tube, one half the original size, is shown in Fig. 2
of plate. The portions AA' and A" are of rather coarse thermometer
tubing. J]I^ ' is a tube left open at J^, and drawn to a capillary
point at JB '. The substance to be examined, after being reduced to a
powder, is introduced through the opening at J^ until the tube is
about half full. Then one end of a platinum wire is buried in the
substance, and the other end is fused into the tube at J^, thus closing
the opening. After the hydrogen has been allowed to flow through
the tube a sufhcient length of time, the opening at A is closed by a
nipper-tap, and the tube is exhausted at A ". Now upon connecting
IB with the negative electrode, and C with the positive electrode, of a
small induction coil, we have the vapor of the substance in the tube
Uli' carried in the current through the tube A' where the spectrum
may be observed.

One advantage of this particular form of tube is, that, in order to
compare the spectrum of our substance with that of hydrogen, we
have only to reverse the current, making C the negative pole, and then
all the lines except those of hydrogen at once disappear.

The arsenic spectrum thus obtained is very brilliant, and consists of

Red

Fig: 3.

6 c

O

-O

Fie:. 1

Viole L

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 37

numerous nell-marked sharply defined bands. The bands are most
numerous and brilliant in the green, and these give the prevailing
tone to the spectrum. But there is one very striking yellow band,
and there are also several bands in the blue and violet. Then in the
red there is an interesting double band, the two members of which are
the same distance apart as the two D lines. In addition, there may
be also a more or less diffused spectrum, which in some parts cannot
be distinguished from the similar diffused spectrum of hydrogen, and
it is worthy of remark in this connection, as indicating the purity of the
material used, and also that the diffused fluted spectrum above referred
to cannot come from the material of the tube, that no trace of the
sodium line was seen. No accomit was taken of the diffused spectrum,
as it only appeared when the battery was unusually strong.

In speaking of the diffused spectrum of arsenic, we do not mean
the same kind of diffused spectrum as mentioned above in connection
with nitrogen. The diffused arsenic spectrum appears to be com-
posed of innumerable faint lines, wholly independent of the other
more brilliant characteristic arsenic bands ; and we only use the term
" diffused " for convenience, to express that the lines -are very faint
and too numerous to measure.

The arsenic employed had been carefully purified by sublimation,
and preserved under distilled water. We used for measuring the
wave-lengths of the spectrum lines the spectroscope described b)
Professor J. P. Cooke [Am. Jour, of Science, Vol. XL., Nov., 1865].
In this instrument, the train of prisms can be adjusted accurately
to the angle of minimum deviation, which was observed in each case.
We used five flint prisms of 45° angle each, and to reduce the angular
measurements to wave-lengths, we employed the method described by
W. M. Watt in his " Index of Spectra."

We, in the first ijlace, measured with care the angles of minimum
deviation of the most prominent Frauenhoffer lines, and verified and
somewhat multiplied the data by measuring also the angles for char-
acteristic lines of the hydrogen, lithium, sodium, thalium, and stron-
tium spectra. These we combined with the wave-lengths of the same
lines given by Angstrom, by ordi nates and abscissas in the usual way,
and the curve drawn through the points so determined was so regular
and of such small curvature, that it was easy to interpolate with
minutes of arc to five tenth-metres of wave-length, as usually expressed.
The instrument is capable of reading to five seconds of arc, and with
the full bank of ten prisms it would give the wave lengths to tenth-
metres with perfect accuracy. With the comparatively feeble light of the

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

arsenic spectrum, as we first observed it, we did not think it advisable
to use the full power of the instrument. We therefore used five
prisms, as stated, and read to one minute of arc. We always began
each series of observations by setting the cross-wire of the micrometer
on the sodium line, after the telescope had been adjusted to the angle
of minimum deviation of this line as first observed. There was
seldom any observed difference in this angle. But when by change of
temperature, or otherwise, an alteration of two or three minutes had
taken place, we found, on readjusting the cross-wire, that the relative
position of the spectrum lines was, to the limit of accuracy of our
measurement, wholly unchanged.

We give below the table of wave-lengths of the principal lines of
the arsenic spectrum.

6023 tenth

-metres.

5230 tenth-metres.

6013

5195

li

5853

5163

it

5833

6103

a

5815

5013

u

5743

4941

''

5653

4623

a

5563

4593

i(

5498

4493

<i

[5340]

44G3

li

5323

4313

a

5245

The wave-lengths printed in heavy type denote the bands which
are most brilliant and give character to the spectrum. The other
lines are less constant and less distinct, and in some instances may be
due to accidental causes.

We were surprised to find among the bright lines, that the one
which in the table is enclosed in brackets corresponds to the green
thalium band, and upon examining the spectrum it appeared evident
that thalium must be present in the arsenic in large quantities, as the
thalium band was fully as bright as any of the arsenic bands.

The accompanying diagram (Fig. 3 of plate) will give some idea
of the general appearance of the arsenic spectrum.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 39

Investigations on Liqht and Heat, published with an appropriation from thb
RciTFOED Fund.

III.

TPIERMO-ELECTRICITY. — PELTIER AND THOMSON
EFFECTS.

By Charles Bingham Penrose.

Presented by Professor Trowbridg'e, June 8, 1881.

There are two theories regarding the cause of the thermo-electric
current. Tliat held by Le Roux, Clausius, and most French phy-
sicists is that the heat effects which cause the current take place only
at the junctions. The theory held by Sir William Thomson, Tait, and
Maxwell is that the heat effects which cause the current take place, not
only at the junctions, but along the metals themselves.

Let TT and ir^ denote the heat — measured in dynamical equivalents —
absorbed and evolved at the hot and cold junctions respectively in unit
time by unit current. Let -E be the electromotive force of a battery,
maintaining a current / in such a direction as to cause absorption of
heat at the hot junction. Then if H be the whole resistance of the
circuit, we have by Joule's law and the first law of thermodynamics : —

EI-\-iTl—7rJ=EI\ (1)

Supposing the whole energy of the current wasted in heat. Also : —

I=^±^ (2)

It appears, then, that, owing to the excess of the absorption of heat
at the hot junction over the evolution at the cold junction, there arises
an electromotive force tt-tti helping to drive the current in the direc-
tion giving heat absorption at the hot junction. "We may suppose,
and shall henceforth suppose, that ^=0, and then the current will
be maintained entirely by the electromotive force tt-ttj.

Now, apply the second law of thermodynamics. " The application
of the second law is of a more hypothetical character. Still it seems a
reasonable hypothesis to assume that the Peltier effects, and other heat

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

effects, if any, which vary as the first power of the cuiTent strength,
taken by themselves, are subject to the second law of thermodyna-
mics."

This law gives : —

ttI tt'I ^

6 and 6^ being the absolute temperatures of the hot and cold junctions.

•••:-=^ . (3)

C being a constant, depending only on the nature of the metals.

In accordance with this, the electromotive force in the circuit
=. G {6 — ^j) .*. it would be proportional to the difference between
the temperatures of the junctions.

" Now, this conclusion is wholly inconsistent with the existence of
thermo-electric inversion. We must, therefore, either deny the appli-
cability of the second law, or else seek for reversible heat effects other
than those of Peltier." This was essentially the reasoning that led
Thomson to the discovery of the Thomson effect. Before questioning
Thomson's conclusion, it is best to consider the formulge which are
deduced from his hypothesis.

Suppose we have a circuit of two metals. Let the heat absorbed by
the Thomson effect in passing from a point at temperature ^ to a point
at temperature 0 -\- d9 in one metal be cr-^dO per unit current per unit
time. Let <j^d6 be the corresponding expression for the other metal.
cTj and o-j are functions of the temperature. They depend on the nature
of the metals, but are independent of the form or magnitude of the
section of the conductors. These effects are proportional to the first
power of the current strength.

By the first law of thermodynamics : —

El + Tt/— 7r'/+ / / (o-i — (To) dQ = RP («)

J a'

7 =

i? + ^ _ ,,' -^fy^ - a-,) d6 ^^

R

If ^ = 0 we have as the electromotive force of the thermo-electric
current, by the same reasoning as before : —

= ^ _ ^/ _|_ r(^j _ ^,) dO (y)

J a'

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 41

The second law of thermodynamics gives : —

Differentiate (8)

, o-j — 0-2 d /7r\

•'• 6 ~'~ dd\e)

performing the differentiation

&'

dtv , 17
.-. cr, - cr, = - ^ + ^

Substitute in (y)

— -ll^^->

= ^_,'_(;,_^)+j'-rf^

(0

—ir--

(co)

from (rj).

If, as Tait supposes, a- is proijortional to the first power of the abso-
lute temperature, a = k6 equation (iv) becomes : —

e = — [k6' + k'e + Z:"]

.*. the thermo-electric curve is a parabola.

The basis of all the preceding is taken from the British Encyclopa?dia.
Maxwell's demonstration is essentially the same. (§§ 249-251, Vol. T.,
Maxwell's Electricity and Magnetism.)

When no current was passing from an external battery eq. (2)
became

Let

TT 7^=6 .•. I = ^

K

42 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In other words, it was SJiid that the heat 9 — the amount of heat
absorbed in unit time by unit current in crossing the hot junction
exceeding that evolved at the cold junction — was sufficient to produce
a current of strength I.

Now, when a current from an outside source is passed through
the circuit in the same direction as /, an amount of heat 9 (7 disap-
pears,— C being the strength of the external current : what becomes
of this heat? A certain amount of energy disappears : what is its
equivalent ?

If the heat 9 is sufficient to produce a curi-ent of sti'ength I, the
beat 9 0 is great enough to produce a current G times as strong as
/.•.a current of strength CI.

When the current G is passing through the circuit we should then
expect to find it increased (or decreased) by a current GI — the
equivalent of the amount of heat absorbed by G. Thus, when an
external current passes through a thermo-electric element, we should
expect to have as the total current in the circuit, C-j-/± Ci; that
is, the resultant current should be much greater (or much less) than

(7+7.

But, in several experiments that were made, it was observed that
the resultant current always equalled exactly G-\-L

Now, if the Peltier effect is the cause of the thermo-electric cur-
rent, enough heat has disappeared to create a current G times as strong
as the proper thermo-electric current ; but experiment shows that the
thermo-electric current is perceptible, while this other current is imper-
ceptible. We must, therefore, conclude that this current, which is
equivalent to an amount of heat 9 G, is not G times as great as the
proper thermo-electric current ; and hence the proper thermo-electric
current cannot be the equivalent of the amount of heat 9. In other
words, the Peltier effect cannot be the cause of the thermo-electric
current.

An unsuccessful experiment was made to prove that the Peltier
effect was not great enough to be the cause of the thermo-electric
current. The failure was due to the fact that the heat absorbed was
too small to be measured. The principle of the experiment was as
follows : —

Place the thermo-electric junction in a vessel of mercury, after
heating the mercury to a certain temperature let it cool, the circuit
being broken so that no current passes. From a thermometer placed
in the mercury read the temperatures at definite times, and construct a
curve, having the temperatures as ordiuates, and the cori-espouding

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 43

times as abscissas. Next draw a similar curve wheu tlic tlicrmo cur-
rent is passing. Let the current run through a galvanometer, and '
observe the deflection of the galvanometer every time a reading of the
thermometer is taken. This will give a third curve, giving the ther-
mo-electric current at any time, corresponding to any temperature of
the second curve. Finally, pass a current of known strength / from
an external source through the junction in the direction of the proper
thermo current, and get a fourth curve representing the fall of tem-
perature for this case.

The equations of all these curves being known, we can find from the
two first the rate at which heat is absorbed by a thermo-electric cur-
rent of any strength given by the third curve. Let h = the heat
absorbed in unit time by this thermo-electric current of strength i.
From the first and fourth carves we can find the amount of heat H
absorbed in unit time by the battery current I.

Now, if the heat H is merely the heat absorbed by the Peltier effect,
we have — as the heat of the Peltier effect is simply proportional to
the current strength : —

h :H::i:L (4)

But if, as I supposed, h was much greater than the heat absorbed by
the Peltier effect, this equation would not be satisfied.

The thermo element used was of German silver and iron. The hot
junction was shaped in the form of a ring and placed in a small vessel
of mercury, the bulb of the thermometer being placed in the centre of
the ring. The first two curves, however, were identical, though Ger-
man silver and iron constitute one of the sti'ongest thermo elements.
The thermometer fell at exactly the same rate whether the current
was passing or not.

We have not, however, considered the Thomson effect. But the
same reasoning used in the case of the Peltier effect applies also here.

From equation (y) it was seen that the proper thermo-electric current
was proportional to

[p-i — 0-2) d9
e'
Let

*J fl'

L

(o-i — 0-2) de = s

Then this current is proportional to 9 -|- *S'. That is, 9 -f- aS is
the whole heat absorbed in the circuit by unit current in unit time.

44: PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

If, now, we pass through the circuit an external current of strength
(7, the whole heat absorbed is (O -}- (S') C.

This should be enough heat to produce a current G times as strong
as the proper thermo-electric current, if the thermo-electric current is
due to the heat Q -\- S.

If, then, /be the strength of the thermo-electric current, we should
expect that the whole current in the circuit would be: —

(7+/± CI.

But experiment shows that the whole current exactly = C -\- J.
We must, then, conclude that the current which is equivalent to the
heat (9 -}- 'S') C is not (7 times as great as the proper thermo-electric
current ; consequently, the thermo-electric current cannot be the
equivalent of the heat 9 -j- z^. In other words, the thermo-electric
current cannot be the equivalent of the Thomson and Peltier effects.

All the experiments that have been made on the Peltier and Thom-
son effects have been made when these phenomena appeared as the re-
sult of a current, not when they appeared as its cause. The heat
absorbed by a thermo-electric current itself has never been measured.
All measurements of the heat effects have been made by passing an
outside current through the circuit, the heat effects due to the thermo-
electric current itself being too small to be measured. But we have no
right to suppose, a priori, that at the hot junction of a thermo element
tlie only heat absorbed in the production of the thermo-electric current
is that due to the Peltier effect. If, in the experiment that I attempted,
h had satisfied equation (4), then the heat due to the Peltier effect
would have been the only heat absorbed at the hot junction by the
thermo-electric current. But, as the experiment was a failure, there
are no grounds for this assumption. It is, therefore, not surprising that
equations (1), (2), and (3), which are based on the assumption that
the Peltier effect is the only heat effect at the hot junction which
causes the thermo-electric current, should give results inconsistent
with experiment.

The Thomson effect, even more than the Peltier effect, appears to be
the result of a current, not the cause.

All experiments on the Thomson effect are made by passing a strong
current along a bar of metal, the ends of whicli are at different tem-
peratures. It is then found that the temperatures of fixed points on
the bar are different when the current is passing from what they were
before it passed. In some metals the temperature is raised, in others
diminished, as the current passes from the hot to the cold end of the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 45

bar. Tlionison attributed tliis to the fact that in some metals the cur-
rent evolved heat in passing from hot to cold parts ; in others it
absorbed heat. And the difference between the heat absorbed in one
metal, and that evolved in the other, he supposed to be one cause of the
thermo-electric current.

Another explanation is that the current of electricity changes the
thermal conductivity of the bar, in some metals mcreasing the con-
ductivity, and diminishing it in others.

It is well known that the electric current modifies the physical
properties of metals along which it passes. It changes their cohesion,
in some cases increasing it, in others diminishing it. The elasticity
of metals is also changed under the influence of electricity. What
is more probable than that the thermal conductivity should also be
changed ?

There are many objections to the view taken by Thomson. The
numbers expressing the Thomson effect bear no apparent relation to
the thermo-electric current ; and, moreover, the effect is entirely too
small to produce even the weakest thermo-electric current.

The fact that the formulte deduced on Thomson's hypothesis agree
with experimental results is of but little importance. Tlie thermo-elec-
tric curves determined experimentally are, approximately, parabolas-
Thomson's equation is also that of a parabola. But any theory, based
on the sujDposition that the heat effects are proportional to the current
strength, will give the equation of a parabola.

It was mentioned that the current (9 -|- /S) (7 was imperceptible.
In the few expei'iments that were made the current G was very feeble,
not much greater than the thermo-electric current I, which was given
by an element of German silver alid iron. The resistance of the cir-
cuit was about two hundred ohms. Consequently, the current equiva-
lent to the extremely small amount of heat (9 -j- aS) C might readily
have produced no apparent effect.

I have attempted to show that the Peltier and Thomson effects can-
not be the whole cause of the thermo-electric current. The true cause
is yet to be discovered.

Many unsuccessful attempts have been made to find relations between
the strength of the thermo-electric current and the physical properties
of the metals of the thermo element. To completely solve the
problem, however, we must know the way in which the physical

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

properties of the metals change, when the metals are under the
influence of heat and a current of electricity.

The thermo-electric current depends essentially on the differences of
the two metals. The slightest change in the structure or the composi-
tion of the metals makes a perceptible change in the current. There-
fore, to determine the variations of the electric current with the
temperature, it is necessary to know the variations of the metals with
the temperature. A junction of iron and silver might be expected to
give twice as strong a current at 100° as at 50°. This might be the
case if the iron and silver were exactly the same at 100° as at 50° ;
but iron at 100^ is a different metal from iron at 50° : the thermal con-
ductivity, the electric conductivity, the specific gravity, and many other
properties have changed. It may be due to this fact — that the prop-
erties of the metals change with the temperature — that the thermo-
electric lines are not straight.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 47

INVESTIOATIONS ON LlGOT AND IIeAT, PUBLISHED WITH AN APPROPRIATION FROM THE

RuMPORD Fund.

IV.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE PHYSICAL LABORATORY OF
HARVARD UNIVERSITY.

THERMOELECTRIC LINE OF COPPER AND NICKEL

BELOW 0°.

Charles Bingham Penrose.

Presented by Professor Trowbridge, June 8,1881.

The great difficulty to be encountered in experiments on thermo-
electricity is the variation in the results obtained by different experi-
menters. There can be no comparison with previous experiments
when all the results are different. As an example, take the electro-
motive force of a junction of bismuth and copper — with one junction
at 0° and the other at 100° — as obtained by different experi-
menters : —

Wheatstone 0.00106

Neumann 0.00390

J. Regnault 0.00286

E. Becquerel 0.00483

These results are referred to the electromotive force of a Daniell
element as unity.

It will be observed that the last result is over four times as great
as the first.

There are many causes which might produce this variation. Slight
differences in the structure of the metals often affect the results, and
the results obtained with the same metal, before and after it has been
subjected to pressure and tension, are often very different. A piece
of hard steel always gives different effects from a piece of soft steel.
But these causes must all be of minor importance ; the great trouble
consists in the impurity of the metals. It is well known that other
electrical properties of metals are greatly changed by slight differences
in purity. Thus the specific resistance of copper may be increased
fifty per cent by the presence of slight impurities.

48

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

It is, therefore, of the greatest importance to use absolutely pure
substances in all experiments on thermoelectricity. In the following
experiments, therefore, the metals used have always been chemically
pure, — deposited by electrolysis.

The first experiments were made with copper and nickel. The
nickel was about twelve inches long and V-shaped. To each end was
soldered a strip of copper, about eight inches long. During the ex-
periment one end was placed in melting snow and the other in a
mixture of snow and calcic chloride, — 30 grammes of snow to 40 of
calcic chloride. The two junctions, and also the metals as far as they
were in contact with the freezing mixture, were coated with shellac.
A mercury thermometer — the zero point of which had previously
been verified — was bound to the colder junction of the copper and
nickel. Copper wires, soldered to the free ends of the two strips of
electrolytic copper, connected the thermoelectric element with the gal-
vanometer, the circuit being made or broken by means of a key.
The galvanometer was a Thomson's mirror galvanometer of low re-
sistance. The mixture of snow and CaCl2 generally gave a tempera-
ture of about — 25° C. From this the temperature gradually
rose, and at every 5° increase the circuit was made, and the deflec-
tion of the galvanometer observed. When the temperature had
reached 0° the junction was placed in a vessel of water and heated
gradually to about 80° C, the deflection of the galvanometer being ob-
served for every ten degrees increase of temperature. The following
are the results from five series of experiments. The junctions were
reversed in every alternate series ; that is, the junction that, in the
first, was placed in melting snow, was, in the second, placed in CaClj
and snow. This obviated whatever irregularities might arise from
any difference between the two junctions.

The fii'st column gives the temperature of the colder junction. The
second the number of the experiment. The third the resistance of
the whole circuit and the galvanometer. The resistance of the latter
was six ohms. The fourth gives the deflection of the galvanometer
needle. The fifth gives the product of this deflection into the resist-
ance, which is directly proportional to the electromotive force.

t

Number
of Experi-
ment.

Resistance.
R

Deflection.
d

rfX-B

—25°

2

4

30
3G

14.5
15.0

522.0
540.0

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.
Mean value oi d X ^ = 531.0.

49

Temperature.
t

Number

of Experi-

meat.

Resistance.
Jt

Deflection.
d

dXH

Mean value
oicl X R.

—20°

1

56

8.4

470.4

"

2

36

11.5

414.0

"

5

36

12.6

453.6

446.0

—15°

1

56

6.1

341.6

"

2

36

8.3

298.8

"

3

30

7.7

277.2

"

4

36

9.8

352.8

"

5

36

8.8

316.8

315.4

—10°

1

56

42

2.35.2

"

2

36

4.8

172.8

"

3

36

5.2

187.2

"

4

36

6.0

216.0

"

5

36

6.5

234.0

209.0

—5°

1

56

2.1

117.6

"

3

36

2.6

83.6

"

4

36

2.5

80.0

"

5

36

4.3

154.8

109.0

+10°

1

56

4.5

252.0

"

2

36

7.5

270.0

"

3

36

66

237.6

'■

4

36

6.8

244.8

"

5

36

6.3

226.8

246.2

+20°

1

• 56

9.1

509.6

"

2

36

13.5

486.0

"

3

36

13.5

486.0

"

4

36

14.0

504.0

"

5

36

14.0

504.0

497.9

+30°

1

56

14.0

784.0

"

2

86

8.8

739.6

"

3

36

21.4

770.4

"

4

56

14.0

784.0

"

5

56

13.6

761.6

767.9

+40°

1

56

18.5

1036.0

"

2

86

11.7

1006.2

"

3

106

9.6

1020.3

"

4

106

9.7

1028.2

(1

5

56

18.5

1036.0

1025.3

+50°

1

56

23.5

1316.0

"

2

106

12.3

1303.8

"

g

206

6.3

1297.8

"

4

206

6.3

1297.8

"

5

206

6.3

1297.8

1302.6

+60°

1

56

28.0

1568.0

"

2

206

7.7

1686.2

"

3

206

7.6

1565.6

"

4

206

7.6

1565.6

1596.3

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.)

60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The preceding values of d y, H are directly proportional to the
values of the electromotive forces. The formula for the electromotive
force is E^kRd, in which k is the constant of the galvanometer, R
is the resistance of the circuit, and d is the tangent of the deflection
of the galvanometer needle.

The constant of the galvanometer was determined by means of a
small gas battery. The electromotive force of the gas battery was
found, by means of Thomson's electrometer, to be .285 of a Daniell
element. The electromotive force of a Daniell element = 1.079
volts, hence that of the gas battery = 1.079 X -285 =: .307515 volts
= 30751500 absolute units, since one volt = 10^ absolute units, in
the C. S. G. system. The formula for the constant is

" — R'd'

where E' = the electromotive force of the battery, R' the whole re-
sistance of the circuit, and d the tangent of the deflection of the gal-
vanometer needle,

"" — R'd'

Consequently the preceding formula for the electromotive force
E = k R tan a becomes

The constant by which the preceding results in the tables are to be
multiplied in order to reduce the electromotive force to absolute units

is then ^^7^, = k.
R'd

It was found that when R' = 12000 d' = 45.0.
" " " R' = 11000 d' = 50.5.

The first gives for k = 56, 9 ; the second 55.3 ; mean value of
it =56.1.

Hence to obtain the absolute values of the electromotive forces the
values oi d y^ R given by the tables must be multij^lied by 56.1.

After the preceding experiments a still lower temperature was ob-
tained by means of solid carbonic dioxide and ether. Two experi-
ments were made, the temperatures in the first being measured by an
ether thermometer, in the second by an air thermometer. In both
the same metals, copper and nickel, employed in the previous experi-
ment, were used.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

51

In the first experiment tlie cold mixture was placed under the re-
ceiver of an air pump. The exhaustion was maintained by means of
a Richard's air pump. This occasioned a faster evaporation of the
ether, and a consequent greater decrease of tehiperature, than could
otherwise have been maintained.

The results obtained are as follows : —

Tfinpernture
given by Ether
Thermometer.

Resistance.
J2

Deflection.
d

dX-K

—40°

—52.5°
—52.5°
—52.0°

96

96
96
96

16.2
20.0
19.5
18.7

1555.2
1920.0
1872.0
1715.2

In the second experiment the temperatures were measured by
means of the air thermometer. The bulb of the air thermometer,
the junction of copper and nickel, and the bulb of the ether thermome-
ter, were placed side by side and surrounded with solid carbonic diox-
ide, over which ether was poured. The simultaneous readings of the
galvanometer, of the air thermometer, and of the ether thermometer
were then taken, after the air thermometer had reached its lowest
temperature.

The followinfi: are the results : —

Temperature
given by Air
Thermometer.

Temperature
given by Ether
Thermometer.

Resistance.

Deflection.
d

dxit

Mean value
ofdX R

60.2 C

42.3° C

106
206
156

13.5
6.8
9.0

1431.0
1400.8
1404.0

1411.0

In the preceding two experiments the constant of the galvanometer
was obtained, as before, by means of the gas battery.
In the first experiment, E = 14000 cZ = 47

30751500

k=z

14000 X 47
In the second experiment, 72 = 12000 d

= 46.7
48

•. k =

30751500
12U0U X 48

= 53.3

Consequently to obtain the values of the electromotive force for the
preceding experiments the values oi d 'X. R must in the first experi-
ment be multiplied by 46.7, in the second by 53.3.

62

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

From the preceding table it is seen that the ether thermometer
cannot be used to measure temperatures accurately. The coefficient
of expansion of ether is by no means constant, and besides the ether
adheres to the sides of the thermometer tube. The real value of the
coefficient cannot be obtained from these results, as only the bulb of the
thermometer was subjected to the low temperature ; but as the bulb
was very large in proportion to the bore of the tube, an approximate
value may be obtained.

When the temperature, as given by the air thermometer, was

— 60° .2 C the ether thermometer stood at — 42° .3 C; the reading

42.3
of the ether thermometer was — -^ of what it should have been if it

dO.2

contracted regularly. Thus temperatures in the neighborhood of

— 42° C, as given by the ether thermometer, can be corrected, and

60.2
more approximate results obtained, by multiplying by jy-o = 1.42.

It should be remembered that the temperatures thus obtained are
by no means accurate ; they are only rough approximations.

Applying this correction to the temperatures given by the ether
thermometer, we have : —

Temperatures
given by Ether
Thermometer

reduced by

multiplving by

1.42.

Resistance.
.K

Deflection.
d

dxR

—56 8° C

—74.5° "
—74.5° "
—73.8° "

96
96
96
96

16.2
20.0
19.5
18.7

1555.2
1920.0
1872.0
1715.2

If now the values of d X E from all the preceding tables are mul-
tiplied by the constants necessary to obtain the absolute values of the
electromotive forces, the preceding results may be summed up in
the following table. The first column gives the temperatures of one
junction of the copper and nickel ; the other junction was always
at 0°. The second column gives the absolute values of the corre-
sponding electromotive forces, in the C. G. S. system of units. The
third column gives the differences between the alternate electromotive
forces. And the fourth the differences between the corresponding
temperatures.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

53

Absolute yalue of

Differences between

Biflerence
between alter-
nate Tempera-
tures.

Temperature.

the Electromotive
force.

alternate Klectro-
motive Forces.

+G0° C

89552.43

+50° "

73075.86

16476.57

10°

+J0° "

67519.33

15556.53

10°

+M0° "

43079.19

14440.14

10°

+20° "

27932.19

15147.00

10°

+10° "

13811.8

14120.39

10°

- 5° "

6114.9

—10° "

11724.9

'661 0.6"

'5°

—15° "

17693.9

5909.0

6°

—20° "

25020.6

7326.7

5°

—25° "

29789.1

4768.5

5°

—56.8° "

72627.84

42838.74

31.8

—60.2° "

.75254.27

2626.43

3.4

—73.8° "

80099.84

4844.67

13 6

—74 5° "

88496.5

8390.66

0.7

Note. — Between 74.5' and 25° the temperature rose too rapidly to obtain
intermediate readings with the air thermometer.

.If these results are represented by a curve, of which the abscissas
are proportional to the temperatures, and the ordinates to the corre-
sponding electromotive forces, it is seen that the curve is approxi-
mately a right line for all the points except those corresponding to
the temperatures obtained .by tlie ether thermometer. It was to be
expected that these points would not lie exactly on the curve, as the
temperatures were so roughly obtained.

The thermoelectric line for temperatures below 0° is almost a direct
continuation of the line above 0° ; the two, however, are inclined at a
slight angle. The reason of this is probably due to the fiict that for
temperatures above 0° the piece of electrolytic copper soldered to the
hot end of the nickel became more heated throughout than the piece
soldered to the cold junction ; and consequently the points of contact
where the copper galvanometer wires joined the two pieces of electro-
lytic copper were unequally heated, and a subsidiary current was pro-
duced. It was found that when both junctions of copper and nickel
were kept at the same constant temperature, a very small current
was produced when one piece of the electrolytic copi^er was slightly
heated above the other.

From these experiments it appears that an ether thermometer can-
not be used to measure low temperatures accurately, not only because
the ether adlieres to the sides of the tube, but because its coefficient of
expansion is variable ; also that the thermoelectric line of copper and

64

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

nickel, when chemically pure, is practically straight, at least between
-j- 60° C and — 60° C.

A thermoelectric element of pure copper and nickel can therefore
be used as an accurate means of measuring low temperatures.

Examination of Ether Thermometer.

After the preceding experiments the ether thermometer was more
critically examined. The bulb was placed in a mixture of calcic
chloride and snow, beside the bulb of a mercury thermometer ; and
afterwards in water, which was heated to about ■+ 30° C.

The results are contained in the following table. The first column
gives the temperatures shown by the mercury thermometer ; the
second column the corresponding temperatures shown by the ether
thermometer.

Temperatures
given by

Mercury Ther-
mometer.

Temperatures
given by Ether
Thermometer.

Temperatures

given by
Mercury Ther-
mometer.

Temperatures
given by Ether
Thermometer.

+30° C
+25° «
+20° "
+15° "
+10° "
+ 5°"
— 5° "
—10° "

+28.0° C
+23.6° "
+19.0° "
+14.7° "
+ 10.3° "
+ 6.2° "

— 1.6° "

— 5.6° "

—15° C
—20° "
—23° "

24° "

—25° "
—26° "
—60.2° "

— 9.8° C
—14.0° "
—16.1° "

—16.7° "
—17.4° "
—18.1° "
—42.3° "

The zero point of the ether thermometer was determined by bury-
ing the bulb in melting snow for twenty minutes. It was then found
that the true zero was 2° above the zero of the scale. Applying this
correction to the preceding results, it is still seen that the ether ex-
panded and contracted very irregularly.

It is true that only the bulb of the thermometer was subjected to
the different temperatures; but the bulb was very large in proportion
to the base of the tube, and as an ether thermometer must necessarily
be made rather long, it is, in the great majority of cases, impossible to
subject any more than the bulb to the temperature to be determined.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 65

V.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORATORY
OF HARVARD COLLEGE.

By W. H. Melville.

Presented, July, 1881.

CRYSTALLINE FORM OF CRYOLITE.

The crystalline form of Cryolite was described by Dana in hia
" System of Mineralogy," 1868, as Trimetric, but, as he distinctly stated,
the system in which the mineral crystallizes was considered doubtful.
Des Cloizeaux has since investigated the optical characters, and deter-
mined the system of crystallization to be Tricliuic, which Websky
corroborates by his measurements.

The difficulties which are presented in the determination by measure-
ments are two-fold. In the first place, the angles which the three most
prominent faces make with each other are very closely right angles,
thus suggesting one of the three orthometric systems ; and, secondly,
these angles are rendered uncertain by the presence of striations, a
habit almost invariable. Minute crystals (Figs. 1 and 2), varying
from three to five hundredths of an inch in length, were employed in
the following determination, and these were taken from the surface of
a pure white specimen of Cryolite. By mounting a large r>umber of
crystals, it was observed that the angles made by the three pinacoid
planes with each other were quite constant, — the greatest difference
from the means amounting to about 3', — so that all suspicioii which I
entertained as to the probability of their being right angles, was removed.
A few colorless transparent crystals, absolutely free from stria?, and
showing no evidence of twinning, were found, and from these the funda-
mental angles used in calculating the elements of the crystalline form
were taken. They are represented in Fig. L The plane (001) was
chosen for the basal section, because it formed the termination of the
crystals, and was not commonly striated.

50

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Crystalline Form — Triclinic.

Forms {100^, {010 1,

{001}, \no}

{201}

{111}, {ITl},

{TTl}, {Til},

and

{311}

Fundamental Angles.

Between normals (100)

and (010) — 91°

53'

30"

(100)

„ (001) — 89°

47'

50"

(010)

„ (001) — 89°

55'

30"

(111)

» (001) - 54°

10'

(111)

„ (010) - 55°

42'

30"

From these were calculated : —

Brachydiagonal a = 1
Macrodiagonal b = 1.00362
Vertical axis c = 1.00185

Angles

between axes X Y =: 88°

6' 30"

X Z = 90°

12' 20"

Y Z = 90°

4' 33"

gles between normals. IMeasured.

Calculated.

Websky

(100)

wc

(010) — 91° 53' 30''

. . .

91° 57'

(100)

((

(001) — 89° 47' 50"

89° 36'

(010)

u

(001) — 89° 55' 30"

. . .

89° 58'

(111)

f(

(001) — 54° 10'

. . .

(111)

((

(100) — 55° 42' 30"

(111)

il

(100) — 55° 31'

55° 27' 57"

(111)

a

(001) — 55° 40' 13"

55° 36' 13"

(ITl)

(f

(100) . . .

53° 16'

(001)

a

(ITO) — 89'' 52'

89° 54' 20"

(001)

((

(201) — 63° 20' 59"

63° 19' 43"

(201)

ii

(100) — 26° 24' 22"

26° 28' 7"

(111)

ii

(311) — 29° 57' 50"

30° 7' 30"

(311)

i(

(100) — 25° 24' 30"

25° 25' 31"

(311)

a

(001) — 72° 2' 30"

72° 5' 17"

(100)

a

(ITO) — 44° 1' 54"

43° 57' 18"

(ITO)

n

(OTO) — 44° 4' 38"

44° 9' 12"

(001)

11

(TTl) _ 54° 18' 35"

54° 25' 43"

Fig. 2 shows the distribution of planes upon a second set of crystals
which were taken from the same specimen of Cryolite as those repre-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 57

sented in Fig. 1. Tliese I consider twins, for the following reasons : —
Faces of the form {001} w'cre striated parallel to the combination
edge (111) A (TTl), although but very faintly. The striation was
shown best by a spectrum which appeared when a crystal was ad-
justed for measuring the angle between the poles (001) and (111),
and this spectrum did not appear when the crystal occupied any other
position. Furthermore, if we assume for the moment that the draw-
ing. Fig. 2, is that of a simple crystal, the angle between the poles of
(OTO) and (001) will be 90° 4' 30", or the supplement of that between
(010) and (001). In fact, however, the following are the actual
measurements : —

(100) A (001) = 89° 44' 30" ) (100) A (TOO)

(001) A (TOO) = 90° 3' i" 179° 47' 30"

(010) A (001) = 89° 51' 30" | (010) a (OTO)

(001) A (OTO) = 89° 46' j 179° 37' 30"

If, then, we consider the twinning-plane parallel to the form {110}
(not present on the crystals), by turning one half of the crystal
through 180°, the angle (OTO) A (001) =89° 46' will correspond to
(100) A (001) = 89° 44' 30". Again, the angle (THl) A (TTl) is
the same as that found for (311) A (^l^* Tn other words, the plane,
which appears in Fig. 2 as (T31), is the other member of the form
|311|, and lies opposite (311).

The form (22) of Dana corresponds to what I call {311}. In no
instance were four similar planes of the form {311} to be seen on any
termination.

In our projection of the poles of the faces. Fig. 3, the great circles
[001, 100] and [010, 100] sensibly coincide with the diameters of the
circle of the primitive.

The drawing. Fig. 2, was made on the assumption that such crystals
were simple, and not twinned, as I have above described them.

WHITE TOURMALINE.

Specimens of White Tourmaline, from Dekalb, St. Lawrence Co.,
N. Y., have been recently put on exhibition in the Mineral Cabinet of
Harvard College, and, being interested to know what planes were
represented on the crystals, I undertook the study of them. The
rhombohedral forms which were observed on the several crystals
are shown in Fig. 4, and also the table.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Miller.

Bravais-Miller.

Naumann.

Rhombohedrons

{211}

{10T4|

+ ii?

^110^

{1T02}

-^H

{100}

^lOTl}

+ i?

lUT}

{2201}

— 2E

Scalenohedrons

{310^

^3124}

IBS

{21T}

{32T2}

ii?3

{312}

^5322}

I E5

Prisms

{2TT}

{lOTO}

oo F

{lOT}

{2TT0}

00 F2

00 P5

\21^

{54T0}

2

In all crystals the three prisms above tabulated were present, but the
alternate planes of ^214} — or the planes of ^-{211}, if we regard the
form {2TT} composed of X-^ 2TT} and ^| 112} — were far less prominent
than the remaining planes of the same form. Indeed, they were fre-
quently diminished to such an extent that they appeared almost as lines,
and then no image could be obtained from them.

Among the crystals which were studied, one only was found doubly
terminated. The forms were as follows : —

alogue Pole.

Antilogue Pole,

pio}

k{2n\

{100}

\no}

/t^lll}

{lOOl

k{3l^

One crystal was very highly modified, and exhibited all the forms,
with the exception of {211}.

The following measurements were obtained : Fundamental angle
(between normals) (100) and (010) = 77=* 17' ; 77° Dana.

The angle between the axes of Miller's system, 79*^ 36, or the verti-
cal axes of Naumann's system c =: 0.90146 ; 0.89526 Dana.

Calculated

gles between normals.

Observed.

from (100) A (010).

Dana.

(112) and (110)

62° 23

62* 30|

62° 40

(112) " (HI)

25° 33

25° 39|

25° 49

(110) " (101)

47° 6

47° ll

46° 52

(110) " (211)

23° 33

23° 33f

23° 26

(110) " (310)

21° 53

21° 47^

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 59

Calculated

gles between normals.

Observed.

from (100) A (010).

Dana.

(110) " (21T)

29° 8

29° 10

29°

(110) " (315)

41° 51

41° 48

41° 48

(110) « (lOT)

66° 16

66° 26}

66° 34

(315) " (UT)

21° 12

21° 19^

(115) " (213)

11°

10° 53^

10° 54

(213) " (lOT)

19° 7

19° 6f

19° 6

(lOT) " (ITO)

59° 57

60°

60°

Crystals are stout, and have a section in general triangular. A per-
fect and easy cleavage parallel to {lOT} can be obtained, the lustre of
which is pearly. Prism faces, except sometimes those of {213}, are
remarkable for the absence of striations. The color of the mineral
varies slightly : some crystals are almost pure white ; others very light
amber, and these are transparent. The mean specific gravity of two
determinations gave the figures 3.01589. Fuses easily to a white
glass, and when decomposed with the mixture of bisulphate of potas-
sium and fluor-spar, imparts to the flame a green color, far more
intense than I have previously obtained with Tourmaline.

IODIDE OF ARSENIC.

In 1880 I undertook the study of the physical and chemical proper-
ties of iodide of arsenic. Professor J. P. Cooke had previously shown
(Proceedings of the American Academy, Vol. XIII.) that solutions of
iodide of antimony in bisulphide of carbon were oxidized when exposed
to sunlight, provided that air had free access. From the analogy of
the properties of arsenic and antimony, it was thought that the iodides
of these elements would exhibit the same behavior. My observations
in this investigation I have recorded below.

Iodide of arsenic is very easily prepared by shaking up in a flask a
solution of iodine in bisulphide of carbon with pulverized arsenic. By
repeated crystallizations from bisulphide of carbon, the resulting iodide
is purified, and is finally deposited in yellow-red hexagonal tables.
Since iodide of arsenic is more soluble in bisulphide of carbon than
iodide of antimony, the conditions are more favorable for obtaining
large and stout crystals than in the case of Sbl^ Solutions of AsT^ in
bisulphide of carbon are light red, but rapidly change in sunlight, the
oxidation closely resembling that of Sbl^ Free iodine is given off", but
remains dissolved in the bisulphide of carbon, coloring the solution dark
purple. Where the solution of iodide of arsenic has moistened the

60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

walls of the flask or containing vessel during the process of oxidation,
minute octahedrons of arsenious oxide are deposited. A white deposit
is also formed at the botton of the flask, but in quantities too small to
test. This deposit is probably -As.^O^. Now, this decomposition, un-
like that of Sbl^, is complete, and the chemical reaction may be expressed
by the formula, —

4 Asl, -\- 0^ = 2 As^O, + 67-7.

The reaction for the oxidation of Sbl^ in a similar way, as given in
the paper above alluded to, is as follows : —

SbT^ 4- 0=SbOI-{- I-I.

The oxidation of iodide of arsenic, therefore, goes a step farther, so
that instead of oxi-iodide, thei'e is formed an oxide of arsenic.

After the solution has been filtered from the oxide, distilled several
times with fresh bisulphide of carbon, and then allowed to crystallize,
no new modification of Aslg could be detected. In like manner, there
is no variety corresponding to the yellow trimetric iodide of antimony.
Iodide of arsenic sublimes easily in yellow-red leaves, with an hexago-
nal outline, which, when examined with the polariscope, exhibit the phe-
nomena of optically uniaxial crystals, with a negative double refraction.

The melting point of iodide of arsenic is 138i^°-139°, about 28°
lower than that of Sbl^ (hexagonal variety), which is given 167°.

Iodide of arsenic crystallizes in the hexagonal system, and is isomor-
phous with SbL (red variety). The crystals of both substances consist
of a rhombohedron modified by the first acute rhombohedron and basal
plane, and parallel to this latter form perfect cleavages are very easily
obtained. The crystals which I measured were prepared by the method
above described, and also by crystallizing a German preparation of the
same iodide from bisulphide of carbon.

Forms {100} {lOTl} + i? ^

{110^ {IT02} _|7? ( Figs. 5 and 6.

{Ill} {0001} oP )

Faces of the form {110} were more perfectly developed than those of
1 100}; in consequence of this the fundamental angle (110) A (HI) ^^'^'^^
taken for calculation. Fundamental angle 110 A 1 H = 59° 48' 27".
The axes of Miller's system make with each other the angle 51° 38'
(54° 40' for iodide of antimony) ; the vertical axis of Naumann's sys-
tem c = 2.9796 (c = 2.769 for Sbl^). In the following summary of

n^.z.

f^^s.

00/

Goj

010

^'^■^.

/2/

f^-^.s.

f^^.6.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES.

61

angles I have compared those given by P. Friedlander, Zeitsch. f.
Krjst. u. Miu., iii. 21-1.

Angles between normals.

Measured.

Calculated.

Friedlander

(110) and (111)

59° 43' 27"

.

59° 59'

(110) « (OOT)

46° 21' 50"

46° 24' 46"

(OOT) « (111)

73° 50' 47"

73° 46' 47"

(100) " (010)

112° 31'

(100) « (110)

. . .

56° 15' 30"

(110) " (Oil)

. . .

96° 55' 30"

96° 54' (97°

calculated).

Faces of the form {100} were very frequently striated, but still not
enough to materially vitiate the angles obtained from them, as shown
by the table.

Twins are very common, the twinning plane parallel to the basal
section.

I have in progress a comparison of the three iodides of antimony,
arsenic, and bismuth, and the results will be published as soon as crystals
of iodide of bismuth can be prepared large enough to measure.

62 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

VI.

RESEARCHES ON THE COMPLEX INORGANIC ACIDS.
By Wolcott Gibbs, M. D.,

Rumford Professor in Harvard University.

(Continued from Vol. XVI. p. 139.)

Presented May 24th, 1881.

PHOSPHO-MOLYBDATES.

The application of molybdic oxide to the separation and estimation of
phosphoric acid has given a special interest to the phospho-moljbdates,
and they have accordingly been studied more or less completely by
several chemists. The most thorough investigations which we possess
are those of Debray,* Rammelsberg,t and Finkener,J but particular
salts have been examined by others, and these will be noticed under
the appropriate special headings.

Phospho-molybdates appear to be formed whenever phosphoric acid
or a soluble phosphate is brought into solution with a molybdate, the
presence of a free acid not being essential. They are also formed
when phosphates and molybdates are fused together, when molyb-
dates insoluble in water are dissolved in phosphoric acid, when
molybdic oxide is digested with an alkaline phosphate, and when in-
soluble phosphates and molybdates are treated together with a dilute
acid. As a class, they are better defined and more easy to obtain
pure than the phosplio-tungstates which in many respects they closely
resemble. When phospho-molybdates of fixed alkaline bases are
heated, they at first give off water of crystallization, and by careful
heating may be obtained anhydrous. In some cases, however, molyb-
dic oxide is volatilized even from salts containing fixed alkaline bases.

* Bull. Soc. Chim., [2.] v. 404.

t Rcnchte der Deutsclien Ciicm. Gescllschaft, Zehnter Jahrgang, p. 1776.

} Ibid., Elfter Jahrgang, p. 1G38.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 63

I did not succeed in obtaining well-defined pyro-phospho-molybdates or
pyro-phospho-tungstates, though of course the residues of the ignition
of the acid salts may be regarded as such. When a phospho-molyb-
date is dissolved in ammonia-water and a current of sulphydric acid
gas is passed into the hot solution, sulpho-molybdates ai'e formed in
large quantity. This reaction distinguishes the phospho-molybdates
from the phospho-tungstates which are not decomposed U'uder the
same circumstances.

Analytical Methods. — Tlie determination of the sum of the per-
centages of molybdic and phosphoric oxides was usually effected, as in
the case of the phospho-tungstates, by precipitating the two oxides
together by mercurous nitrate with addition of mercuric oxide to neu-
tralize the free nitric acid. It is best to precipitate from a boiling
solution, and to boil for a short time after adding mercuric oxide.
This last must always be in small excess. On account of the volatility
of molybdic teroxide, it is not possible to determine directly the sum
of the weights of the two oxides by simple ignition, but the difficulty
may be readily overcome by the following process. The filter with
the mercurous salts is to be cautiously heated in a platinum crucible
properly inclined to the vertical axis of the flame until the filter is
completely carbonized. On then regulating the heat and the supply
of air, the carbon may be readily burned off, leaving a mass of mer-
curous salts mixed with more or less mercuric oxide, no weighable
amount of molybdic teroxide being lost. An accurately weighed
quantity of anhydrous normal sodic tungstate in fine powder is then
to be added, and the contents of the crucible carefully mixed together
with a stout platinum wire previously weighed with the crucible
itself. The whole is to be heated at first by radiation from a small
iron dish, and afterward directly, until a clear white fused mass is
obtained. A second ignition and second weighing will determine
whether every trace of mercury has been expelled. It is almost
needless to remark, that all these operations must be conducted under
a flue with a good draught. This process gives excellent results, and
is much less tedious than would perhaps be supposed.

After the estimation of the phosphoric oxide the molybdic teroxide
is best determined by difference from the sum of the weights of the
two oxides found as above. No really good general method for the
quantitative separation and estimation of molybdic oxide has yet been
given, at least no one which is sufficiently accurate to serve as a check
upon the method above described. The ammonium salts of this series
are most simply analyzed by igniting them directly with sodic tung-

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

state, when the loss of weight corresponds to the sum of the water
and ammonia.

As in the case of the phospho-tungstates, the quantitative determi-
nation of phosphoric oxide is a matter of considerable difficulty. The
method of separation by means of magnesia mixture has been carefully
studied by Dr. Gooeh, to whose paper I have already referred.* Dr.
Gooch found it necessary to precipitate the ammonio-magnesic phos-
phate a second time, a single precipitation giving an error amounting
sometimes to 6 or 7% of the phosphoric acid present. After re-solu-
tion and pi'ecipitation by ammonia, the mean error amounted to only
0.65^, which makes an almost insensible correction when, the quan-
tity of phosphoric oxide is small. In a few instances I have applied
this correction after a double precipitation, but I prefer to employ the
following method, which gives an almost perfect separation from
molybdic teroxide. The phosphoric oxide is first precipitated from a
hot solution as ammonio-magnesic phosphate, the supernatant liquid
after complete subsidence carefully decanted upon an asbestos filter,
the precipitate washed with magnesia mixture and ammonia, then
redissolved in the least possible quantity of hot dilute chlorhydric acid
and reprecipitated with ammonia. After complete subsidence and
decantation, the precipitate is boiled with successive portions of a
solution of ammonic sulphide. A more or less dark orange-red so-
lution of ammonic sulpho-molybdate is always obtained at first, but
after two or three repetitions of the process the ammonic sulphide
added remains colorless on heating. The ammonio-magnesian phos-
phate is then filtered upon the asbestos filter already employed. In
place of tliis method I have sometimes employed the following modifi-
cation, which gives, I think, equally good results. After the first
precipitation the phosphate is to be redissolved, and the hot solution
precipitated at once by ammonic sulphide in excess. The precipitated
phosphate is then to be boiled two or three times with ammonic
sulphide as above. Whatever inaccuracy is inherent in this method
depends, in my judgment, upon the fact that, as Dr. Gooch has
shown, the determination of phosphoric acid by means of magnesia
is, under the most favorable cu-cumstances, a less accurate process
than has been supposed.

The determination of ammonia and the alkalies was effected by the
methods already described in the case of the phospho-tungstates.
Water must be estimated by ignition with sodic tungstate, as there is

* Proceedings of American Academy, Vol. XV. p. 63.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 65

often volatilization of molybdic teroxide when a phospho-molybdate is
ignited at a temperature sufficient to expel its water. The analyses
require great care and no small amount of practice to insure good
results. As in the case of the phosj>ho-tungstates, the alkaline bases
are best determined by difference.

Twenty-four Atom Series. — Phospho-molybdic acid. The acid of
this series was first obtained by Debray, who prepared it by boiling
aramonic phospho-molybdate with nitro-muriatic acid, and allowing
the solution to evaporate spontaneously. I find that this is a good
method of obtaining the acid, but the following details should be
observed. The bright yellow ammonic phospho-molybdate should be
first dried, and then heated with a large excess of strong aqua-regia
in a casserole over an iron capsule to serve as a radiator. In this
manner the decomposition proceeds very regularly and without suc-
cussions. When it becomes necessary to add fresh acid, the super-
natant liquid should be allowed to settle completely and then be poured
off carefully. Fresh acid may then be added, and the process, which
is at best a slow one, continued. When the ammonium salt has disap-
peared, the liquid is to be evaporated until the excess of nitric and
chlorhydric acids has been expelled. On standing, large bright yellow
octahedral crystals are obtained from the very concentrated solution.
These may be redissolved and recrystallized, but there is always
some loss in the process of purification, because solution in water pro-
duces more or less decomposition of the acid with formation of a pale
greenish white crystalline body. This substance passes very readily
through a filter, and the solution of the acid must be allowed to settle
completely before the clear supernatant liquid is brought upon the fil-
ter. Debray obtained three different hydrates of phospho-molybdic
acid, to which he gave, respectively, the formulas

20 M0O3 . P.O^ . 3 H^O + 21 aq,

20 M0O3 . F.p, . 3 a,0 -f- 48 aq,
and

20 M0O3 . P.O., . 3 H,0 + 38 aq.

Unfortunately he has not given either the methods or the com-
plete results of his analyses. In the first hydrate he found 13.30^,
in the second 23.40^, and in the the third 19.60% of water.

I obtained the acid only in transparent octahedral crystals which
had a bright yellow color. Of these crystals, dried by pressure with
woollen paper,

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 5

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

0.9945 gr. lost by ignition with WO.Nag 0.2362 gr. = 23.75% water.
1.4588 gr. gave 0.0713 gr. F.f>3ig., = 3.12% P,Og.

The analysis leads to the formula

24 M0O3 . PPg . 3 H,0 + 59 aq,
which requires : —

Calc'd.

Found.

24 M0O3

3456

73.31

73.13

PA

142

3.01

3.12

62 HP

1116

23.68

23.75

4714

100.00

The phosphoric oxide was determined by double precipitation and
treatment with ammonic sulphide. The molybdic oxide was estimated
by difference. The crystallized acid effloresces so readily that the pre-
cise determination of the water is difficult. In a portion of the crystals
which had effloresced in a very marked degree, —

0.9873 gr. lost on ignition with WO^Nag 0.1760 gr. =: 17.82% water
2.2472 gr. gave 0.1163 gr. Y.fi.Mg^ = 3.31 % Pp^

The ratio of the molybdic to the phosphoric oxide is in this analysis
also 24 : 1 ; and, if we compute the results of both analyses for an an-
hydrous compound of the two oxides, we find : —

Calc'd.

24M0O3 3456 96.06 95.91 95.97

P„0/ 142 3.94 4.09 4.03

3598 100.00 100.00 100.00

The analyses leave, I think, no reasonable doubt as to the ratio of
the two oxides. Phospho-molybdic acid therefore corresponds in com-
position with phosjiho-tungstic acid, the ratio of the two oxides being
24:1, as given by Finkener,* and not 20:1, as stated by Debray.
With respect, however, to the number of atoms of water in the crys-
tallized octahedral hydrate, I may remark that, while the analysis
agrees best with the formula given,

24 M0O3 . PPg . 3 up + 59 aq,
* Loc. cit.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 07

it is much more probable that the acid really contains an atom less of
water, and that its formula, apart from the question of basicity, is

24 M0O3 . pp. . 6 II.,0 + 55 aq,
like

24 WO3 . P.O^ . 6 11,0 + 55 aq,

already described. This formula requires 23.38% water, instead of
23.759^, as found. Debray found 23.40%. As already stated, the
crystals analyzed were dried by pressure with woollen paper, after
draining off a syrupy mother liquor, and may therefore not have been
perfectly free from extraneous water. Finally, the analyses of Finke-
ner led also to the formula with Gl atoms of water, and I shall adopt
this as the definite constitution of the octahedral hydrate. Finkener's
work has not yet been published in detail ; but from the abstract which
he has given, it clearly appears that we owe to him the establishment
of the true constitution of the only phospho-molybdic acid yet obtained.
As already mentioned, there are two other hydrates of phospho-tung-
stic acid, having, respectively, the formulas

24 WO3 . P,0, . 6 H^O + 47 aq,
and

24 WO3 . pp. . 6 H,0 + 34 aq.

The two hydrates of phospho-molybdic acid described by Debray
would coiTespond to the formulas

24 M0O3 . Vfi. . 6 H,0 + 24 aq,
and

24 M0O3 . Tfi, . 6 H,0 + 43 aq,

if we suppose them, as is most probable, to belong to the 24-atom se-
ries. The first formula requires 13.05%, the second 19.66% water;
Debray found 13.09 % and 19.60 %. Finkener obtained still another
hydrate, containing about 32 atoms of water, basic water included.

Phosjiho-molybdic acid dissolves very readily in water, forming a
colorless liquid which has a strong acid reaction. As already stated,
the solution is always accompanied by a slight decomposition, with for-
mation of a very pale greenish white crystalline substance. A pre-
cisely similar decomposition is observed in the solution of the corre-
sponding phospho-tungstic acid. The crystals lose all their water when
slightly ignited. According to Finkener, three atoms of water remain
at 140° C. The solution readily expels carbonic dioxide from the
alkaline carbonates. The question of the basicity of the acid will be
discussed farther on.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

24 : 3 Ammom'c Phospho-molyhdate. — The constitution of the beau-
tiful yellow salt which is formed when an excess of a mineral acid is
added to a solution containing molybdic and jDhosphoric oxides and a
salt of ammonium, has long been in dispute. The analyses of Svan-
berg and Struve,* Nutzinger,t Sonnenschein,t Lipowitz,§ and Selig-
sohn,|| gave results which differed very sensibly from each other,
according to the method of analysis employed. Debray gave the
formula

20 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 (NIIJP 4- 3 aq,

but without the details of his analysis. More recently the subject has
been examined with great care by Finkener,1[ who has arrived at the
conclusion that, though the percentages of water and ammonia may vary
within wide limits, the ratio of the molybdic and phosphoric oxides is
always as 24 : 1.

With respect to the preparation and properties of the yellow ammo-
nium salt, I have little to add to what has been done by these chemists.
I repeatedly prepared the salt for analysis, usually by mixing solutions
of ammonic molybdate — 7:3 salt — and phosphate, adding nitric acid
in excess to the solution, and boiling. When the mixed solution is
boiled for a short time, the precipitation of the yellow salt is complete
after standing until the liquid becomes cold. In the publication of this
result, which is important in analysis, I hav^ been anticipated by Atter-
berg ; ** but I propose in another paper to give the results of my work
on the quantitative determination of phosphoric acid, and will then give
ample details.

As regards the composition of the yellow phospho-molybdates of
ammonium, my results do not agree with those of Finkener, as I think
I have evidence that, as in the case of the phospho-tungstates, there
are series of phospho-molybdates in which the ratio of the molybdic to
the phosphoric oxide is as 20 : 1, as 22 : 1, and as 24 : 1. In one prepa-
ration, —

1.1492 gr. lost on ignition with W04Na2 0.0827 gr. NH3 and H^
= 7.20%

* Journal fiir prakt. Cheniie, xliv. 291.
t Pliarmaccut. Vierteljahresschrift, iv. 549.
\ Journal fiir prakt. Cliemie, liii. 342.
§ PoggenJorff's Annalen, cix. 1.35.
II Journal fiir prakt. Cheniie, Ixvii. 470.
1" Loc cit.
** Berichte der Cliem. Gesellschaft, 1881, p. 1217.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. G9

0.5905 gr. lost ou ignition with WO^Na^ 0.0432 gr. NH3 and ilfi

1.7158 gr. gave 0.1027 gr. Tfi.^Ig, = 3.83% P^O^
0.980G gr. " 0.05G7 gr. P^'o^Mg^ = 3.70% Pp^
1.8903 gr. " 0.1321 gr. NII^'ci "=3.20% (NH,),0

In these analyses, tlie first determination of the phosphoric oxide
was made by double precipitation only, without subsequent treatment
with ammonic sulphide; but in the second, this reagent was employed
in the manner above described. The ratio of M0O3 to PjO^ is almost
precisely 2-1: 1, and the analyses correspond closely with tlie formula

24 M0O3 • P2O5 • 3 (NHJP + 24 M0O3 . pp. . 2 (Nig.O . H,0

+ 16 aq,
which requires : —

Calc'd.

Mean.

48 MoOg

6912

89.05

89.00

2 PA

284

3.66

3.75

3.70 3.83

5 (NH,),0

260

3.35

3.39

3.39

17 H.p

306

3.94

3.86

3.81 3.92

7762 100.00 lOO.-OO

Acid salts of similar type occur frequently in the class of phospho-
molybdates, as in that of phospho-tungstates.

24 : 1 Croceo-cohalt Salt. — The disposition of the cobaltamines to
form highly crystalline compounds, together with their well-defined and
various degrees of basicity, led me to study the relations of these bases
to the phospho-molybdic acids. This had already been done to a cer-
tain extent with the 5 : 1 atom series by Jorgensen, whose results I
shall cite in connection with that series. Neither roseo-cobalt nor
luteo-cobalt forms well-defined salts with 24 : 1 phospho-molybdic acid.
I had therefore recourse to croceo-cobalt,* the oxide of which may be
written

Co2(NH8)8(NO,),0, or, briefly, CcO.

The chloride of this series gives no precipitate with solutions of 7 : 3
amnionic molybdate, or of hydro-disodic phosphate ; but in an acid solu-
tion of these two salts a solution of the chloride throws down a beau-
tiful bright yellow highly crystalline salt, which msiy be washed with
cold water. The portion analyzed was dried on woollen paper only.
Of this salt, —

* Proceedings of Amidcan Academy, Vol. X. p. 1.

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

1.0728 gr. gave 0.8133 gr. M0O3 + ^2^0 = 75.81^
1.4520 gr. " 0.4719 gr. P,0. ' " = 2.96%

This corresponds to 72.85% M0O3 ^J difference, and 24.19% of
CcO and water bj the loss. The analyses agree very closely with
the formula

24 M0O3 • P2O0 • CcO . 2 up 4- 2] aq,

which requires : —

Calc'd.

24 M0O3

3456

72.82

72.86

PA

142

2.99

2.96

CcO
23 H^O

734

414

15.47 \
8.72 1

24.19

1 24.19

4746 100.00

Under the microscoiDe this salt is seen to consist of fine yellow felted
needles. It is very slightly soluble in cold water, but is soluble in a
rather large quantity of boiling water, giving an orange-yellow solution,
with a strongly acid reaction. The solution gives with argentic nitrate
a very insoluble sulphur-yellow flocky precipitate, which after a time
becomes crystalline, and a pale yellow flocky precipitate with mercu-
rous nitrate. No precipitate is formed with cupric sulphate or baric
chloride. The salt could not be recrystallized ; it is interesting as a
particularly well-defined soluble acid salt of the 24 : 1 atom series.

24 : 2 Acid Potassium Salt. — This salt was prepared by boiling
together solutions of potassic molybdate and phosphate, adding an ex-
cess of nitric acid, and boiling the whole for some time. As in the
case of the ammonium salts, the precipitation is greatly facilitated by
this process, taking place very slowly in the cold. The salt obtained
was in very minute crystals, bright yellow, and but slightly soluble in
cold water. Of this salt, —

0.7772 gr. lost on ignition 0.0128 gr. = 1.64% water

0.7962 gr. « " 0.0130 gr. = 1-66% "

1.1703 gr. gave 1.0895 gr. M0O3 + P.O^ = 93.10%
1.3263 gr. " 0.0779 gr. V.pMg., = 3.76% P.O^

1.3033 gr. " 0.0778 gr. " = 3.82% "

The phosphoric oxide was twice precipitated as ammonio-magnesic
phosphate. The analyses correspond with the formula

24 M0O3 . V.p. . 2 ICO . H,0 + 3 aq,

which requires : —

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 71

Calc'd.

24 M0O3

3456

89.55

89.31

i^o^

142

3.69

3.76 3.82

2 K,0

189

4.90

5.25

4 11,0

72

1.86

1.66 1.64

3859 100.00

Tioeniy-two Atom Series. — In the paper already referred to, Ram-
melsberg has described several salts in which he found the ratio of
molybdic to phosphoric oxide as 22 : 1. Unfortunately, he has not
given the method of analysis which he employed, and in a question of
so much difficulty and delicacy it is, to say the least, extremely desira-
ble to know what degree of precision may be expected in the analyses.
As his results appear to be supported by my own, I shall adopt them,
leaving to the further progress of analytical chemistry the final settle-
ment of the few doubtful points.

22 : 3 Ammonium Salt. — Rammelsberg found for the neutral salt
of this series the formula

22 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 (NHJP + 12 aq,

which corresponds, except as regards the amount of water of crystalli-
zation, with a phospho-tungstate which I have already described, —

22 WO3 . P2O5 . 3 (NHJ^O + 21 aq. "

In one preparation of a yellow insoluble ammonium salt exactly
resembling the corresponding salt of the 24-atom series, —

1.6885 gr., lost on ignition with WO^Na^ 0.0873 gr. = 5.17% Nllg

and H2O
1.7764 gr. gave 0.6200 gr. PgO^Mg, = 4.17% P^O^.
1.9024 gr. " 0.6029 gr. " =4.01% "

1.2334 gr. " 0.6262 gr. NH.Cl = 4.23% (NH,)^.

The salt was dried for some time in pleno over sulphuric acid, and
had evidently lost water of crystallization. If we deduct the remain-
ing water, 0.94%, and calculate the analysis for an anhydrous salt,
we have for the formula

22 M0O3 • ^'Po • 3 (NH,)P ;

Calc'd.

22 M0O3 3168 91.41 91.68

PP, 142 4.09 4.05

3(NH,)P 156 4.50 4.27

3466 100.00

72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In another preparation, —
1.0324 gr. lost on ignition with WO.Naj 0.0922 gr. = 8.33% TsHg

and up
2.0670 gr. gave 0.1255 gr. PA^Ig, = 3.88% Pp^
2.0352 gr. " 0.1220 gr. " =3.84% "

These analyses lead to the formula

22 M0O3 . V,,0. . 3 (NHJP + 9 aq,

which requires : —

Calc'd.

22 MoOg

3168

87.32 87.21

P-A

142

3.91 3.88 3.84

3 (NHJ.O
9 HP

156
162

^■^^|8.77 8.93
4.48)

3628 100.00

If from the analyses of the two salts above described we calculate
the composition of the combination of molybdic and phosphoric oxides
supposed to be isolated, and compare this with the percentages calcu-
lated upon the two hypotheses of a ratio of 22 : 1 and a ratio of 24 : 1,
we have : —

Calc'd. I. II. Calc'd.

22 M0O3 3168 95.76 95.76 95.76 96.06 3456 24 MoOg
PA 142 4.24 4.24 4.24 3.94 142 PA

2^fi

3310 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 3598

In both cases the phosphoric oxide was precipitated twice, but the
ammonia-magnesian phosphate was not treated with ammonic sulphide.
According to the results of Dr. Gooch already cited, the probable
error of this method does not exceed 1 % in excess of the quantity of
phosphoric oxide present. It appears, therefore, that the correction
to be applied to the phosjjhoric oxide in the above analyses does not,
at most, exceed 0.04%. The mean of Dr. Gooch's analj'ses would
require a deduction of 0.02% only. The yellow ammonium salt
analyzed by Rammelsberg corresponds to the formula

22 M0O3 • P2O5 ■ 3 (NHJ^O + 12 aq,

which requires (Rammelsberg) : —

Calc'd.

22 M0O3

3168

86.04

86.45

PoO,

142

3.86

3.90

3(NH,),0

156

4.24

3.25

liJ HP

216

5.86

5.77

3682 100.00 99.37

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 73

Rammelsberg gives these figures us the means of several analyses
which agree well with each other, but it must be admitted that a
closer correspondence with the percentages required by the formulas
would have been desirable. The comparison is not given in his
paper. The air-dried salt loses all its water over sulphuric acid. The
three atoms of basic water, if we assume their existence, must there-
fore be united by a very feeble affinity. Rammelsberg has also
analyzed the corresponding potassic salt of the same series. I here
give his results, for the sake of comparison with the formula : —

Calc'd.

22 M0O3

3168

83.17

84.43

P.P5

142

3.73

3.78

3 K,0

283

7.43

6.86

12 HP

216

5.67

5.55

3809 100.00 100.62

This salt loses all its water between 120° and 140°. In judging
the results of these analyses, as well as of those which I have given,
it must be carefully borne in mind that the salts themselves cannot be
recrystallized, and that consequently their absolute pui-ity cannot be
guaranteed. Moreover, if — as I believe I have shown — there are
very similar salts which represent three series in which the ratios of
the molybdic and phosphoric oxides are respectively as 24 : 1, 22 : 1,
and 20 : 1, we may, at least occasionally, have mixtures of the salts of
three, or of any two series. The difficulty here is precisely that which
occurs in the case of the phospho-tungstates.

44 : 2 Acid Potassium Salt. — This salt was prepared by boiling
a mixture of potassic molybdate and phosphate with nitric acid in
excess, when a beautiful yellow crystalline powder separated. This
was washed with cold water and dried on woollen paper. Of this
salt, —

0.9850 gr. lost on ignition 0.0521 gr. = 5.28% water.

0.8983 gr. gave 0.7943 gr. M0O3 + Pp^ = 88.42%
2.0617 gr. gave 0.1201 gr. VJdMg^^ = 3.72%

These analyses lead to the formula

44 M0O3 . 2 PA . 5 Kp . HP + 21 aq,
or

22 M0O3 . PPs . 3 Kp + 22 M0O3 . Pp, . 2 Kp . Hp -f 21 aq,

which requires : —

74 PKOCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Calc'd.

44 M0O3

6336

84.62

84.70

2 PA

284

3.79

3.72

5 K.O

472

6.30

6.30 (difF.)

22 HP

396

5.29

5.28

7488 100.00

The salt is therefore the acid salt corresponding to a neutral salt
with the formula

22 M0O3 . Pp, . 3 K,0.

Rammelsberg's analyses agree better with the formula of the acid
salt given above than with that of the neutral compound assumed by
him.

Twenty Atom Series. — The only salt of this series which I have
obtained is one of ammonium prepared like the salts already described,
having like these a fine yellow color and a very fine-grained crystalline
structure, and like them but slightly soluble in water. Of this salt, —

1.0936 gr. lost on ignition with WO.Na^ 0.0729 gr. = 6.66% NH,

and HgO
1.8183 gr. lost on ignition with WO^Na^ 0.1155 gr. = 6.35% NHg

and H^
0.8862 gr. gave 0.6153 gr. Nli.Cl = 4.12% (NH,),0
1.3213 gr. gave 0.6224 gr. PA^%2 = 4-19% PA
1.5135 gr. gave 0.6349 gr. PaO^Mg,^ = 4.31% PA

The salt was dried on a water-bath, and afterward over sulphuric
acid. The phosphoric oxide was precipitated twice, but not treated
with ammonic sulphide. The analyses lead to the formula

60 MoO„ . 3 PA • 8 (NHJ.O . IToO -f 11 aq.
which requires : —

Calc'd.

6OM0O3 8640 89.09) gg^g 89.21 1 93 52

3 P,0- 426 4.39) " 4.31 4.19 i

8(NHJ,0 416 4.29) ^^^^ 4.12)g.(j

12 I-ip _216 2.23) 2.54)

9698 100.00

If we calculate the composition of the mixed oxides of molybdenum
and phosphorus existing in this salt we have : —

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 75

Calc'd.

20 M0O3

2880

95.30

95.39

P.O3

142

4.70

4.61

3022 100.00 100.00

It will be seen that the ratio is here very nearly as 20 : 1. This may
however be merely accidental, and farther researches are necessary to
fully establish the existence of a 20-atom series.

According to Debray a solution of argentic nitrate gives with one of
phospho-molybdic acid a precipitate which soon becomes crystalline,
and which has the formula

20 M0O3 . P2O5 . 7 Ag.p + 24 aq.

Such a salt would possess a twofold interest, first, as another evi-
dence of the existence of a 20-atom series of phospho-molybdates, and,
secondly, as showing that the acid of the series may unite with more
than six atoms of base. On mixing the two solutions as above, I ob-
tained a precipitate in small indistinct crystals of a greenish yellow color.
These crystals were soluble in hot water, but the solution was quickly
decomposed with precipitation of a white powder. Under the micro-
scope with a high power and transmitted light the salt appeared to
consist of small tabular crystals mixed with a few long yellow prisms
of very different habitus. Of this compound, —

1.3604 gr. lost by ignition with WO^Na, 0.0G92 gr. water == 5.08 c;^
2.1099 gr. gave 0.8287 gr. AgCl = 31.63% Ag^O
0.6733 gr. gave 0.2619 gr. AgCl = 31.44% Ag.p
2.1099 gr. gave 0.0928 gr. PgO^Mg^ = 2.81% Ffi.

The phosphoric oxide was determined in the filtrate from the ar-
gentic chloride by double precipitation and treatment with amnionic
sulphide. The ratio of the molybdic to the phosphoric oxide is as
21 : 1, but the formula which most nearly represents the analysis is

22 M0O3 •

P^O,

i-7Ag,

0

+

14 aq,

which requires, -

—

Calc'd.

22 M0O3

3168

61.08

60.57

P2O5

142

2.74

2.81

7 Ag,0

1624

31.32

31.44 31.63

14H„0

252

4.86

5.08

5186 100.00

76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The only conclusion which can fairly be drawn from the analysis is
that there is at least one phospho-molybdate in which the number of
atoms of base exceeds three. It is certain that the salt does not rep-
resent a pei'fectly definite and homogeneous compound, and it may
possibly be a mixture of the 20-atom salt, 20 MoOg . PgO^ . 6 Ag^O,
and an acid molybdate of silver, 2 M0O3 • -^S2^» nearly in atomic pro-
portions. By dissolving the salt in nitric acid and evaporating, Debray
obtained another salt in small brilliant yellow crystals. For this salt
he proposes the formula

20 M0O3 • P2OS . 2 AgP + 7 aq,

but as usual he has given no analyses.

Eighteen Atom Series. — I have myself met with no salts belonging
to this series, but according to Finkener* there are sodium salts corre-
sponding to the general formula

18 M0O3 . P2O5 (3 — x) Na^O + (25 + x) aq.

These salts are yellow and easily soluble.

Sixteen Atom Series. — 16:3 Ammonium Salt. — In preparing the
5 : 3 atom ammonium salt a white crystalline precipitate was formed,
insoluble in cold, but soluble with decomposition in much boiling water,
and easily soluble in ammonia. In this salt dried over sulphuric
acid, —

0.5100 gr. lost by ignition with WO^Na^ 0.0722 gr. = 14.16% NH3

and HgO
1.1653 gr. gave 0.1259 gr. NH.Cl = b.^bcf^ {^^^-J^
0.8114 gr. gave 0.0658 gr. V^^Mg^ = 5.19% P^O^

The analysis corresponds with the formula

16 M0O3 . T,0, . 3 (NU,),0 + 14 aq,
which requires, —

Calc'd. Found.

I6M0O3 2304 80.73 80.65

P,,05 142 4.97 5.19

3 (NHJ2O 156 5.46 5.25

I4H2O 252 8.84 8.91

2854 100.00

* Loc. cit., p. 1639.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 77

Five to One Series. — Salts of this series were discovered at an
early period in the history of the subject by Zenker.* The ammonium
salt was analyzed by Zenker f and Werncke.t and recently by Ram-
melsberg.§ Debrny obtained the same salt, but has published no
analyses. Ramraelsherg also obtained the corresponding potassium
salt, as well as an acid salt of the same series. The alkaline salts are
colorless, and separate in well-defined crystals, which are usually easily
soluble in water. The acid of the series, as Debray has stated, can-
not be obtained by the decomposition of its salts, being resolved by
acids into free phosphoric acid and salts of the 24-atom series. The
decomposition may probably be expressed by the equation

24 (5 M0O3 . rp^ . 3 11,0) =

5 (24 Mobg . P,0, . 3 H,0) + 19 {V.f>, . 3 H,0).

All the neutral salts are tribasic (old style) or more correctly hexa-
tomic, but well-defined acid salts exist in which the ratio of the molyb-
dic oxide to the fixed base is as 10 : 5. Such salts have been obtained
by Rammelsberg and by myself. The salts of the higher series are de-
composed by alkalies, as stated by Debray, salts of the 5-atom series
and alkaline molybdates being formed. Conversely, when a mineral
acid is added to a solution of an alkaline salt of the 5-atom series, a
salt of a higher series is formed, frequently as a yellow crystalline
precipitate. The neutral salts of this series hitherto described have
respectively the formulas

5 M0O3 . Vp, . 3 K.,0 + 7 aq.

5 M0O3 . PA • 3 (NHJ.P 4- 7 aq.

5 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 Na^O + 14 aq.

5 M0O3 . P0O5 . 3 Ag,0 4- 7 aq.

5 : 3 Phospho-mohjhdate of Ammonium. — This beautiful salt ap-
pears, as already stated, to have been first obtained by Zenker. It
is readily obtained by dissolving together five molecules of ammonic
molybdate and two of ammonic phosphate, and evaporating the solu-
lution, when beautiful prismatic crystals, with a glassy lustre, separate.
These may easily be purified by recrystallization. The salt is readily
soluble in hot, less easily in cold water. The solution has an acid
reaction, Zenker's analyses, as well as those of Werncke, agree
closely with the formula

5 M0O3 . PPs • 3 (NIl4),0 -f 7 aq,

* Journal fiir prakt. Chemie, Iviii. 256. t Loc. cit.

X Zeitschrift fiir Analyt. Chemie, xiv. 12. § Loc. cit.

78 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

in which formula the phospho-molybdic acid is regarded as tribasic.
Debray gives the same formula, without details of analysis, and
Rammclsberg has very recently again analyzed the salt, confirming
the results of Zenker. The salt in question is particularly interest-
ing, first, because the number of atoms of molybdic oxide is uneven ;
and secondly, because the basicity of the acid appears to be 3, and not
6, even when the salt has separated from neutral solutions.

Jorgensen * has described two well-defined crystalline salts belonging
to this series and having according to his notation respectively the
formulas

Co, (NH3),„C1,. (5 M0O3 . 2 PO,H)
and

Co,(NH3)ioCl2 . (5 M0O3 • 2 PO.NH,).

I should write these

5 M0O3 . PA • Co,(NH3),„Cip, . H,0
and

5 M0O3 • PA • Co,(NH3)joCl,0,(NH,),0.

It will readily be seen that both salts correspond to the acid repre-
sented by the formula

5 M0O3 • P2O5 • 3 H2O.

Acid 10 : 5 Ammonium Salt. — When ammonic phosphate is dis-
solved in boiling water, and molybdic oxide is added in small portions
at a time, the oxide readily dissolves, but a greater or less quantity
of a white insoluble crystalline salt is formed. The filtrate deposits on
evaporation large colorless crystals, which aj^pear to be either trimetric
or monoclinic. Of these crystals, —

1.1126 gr. lost on ignition with WO.Na, 0.2076 gr. = 18.66% NH3

and H2O.
1.2962 gr. " « « 0.2425gr. = 18.71% "

1.2165 gr. « " " 0.2247 gr. = 18.47% "

0,9263 gr. gave 0.1912 gr. PA^Ig2 = 13.20% V.-P^
1.0540 gr. " 0.2196 gr. " = 13.32% "
1.1824 gr. « 0.3018 gr. NH.Cl = 12.41% (NII,)^
1.0183 gr. « 0.2563 gr. " = 12.23% "

1.6430 gr. " 0.4168 gr. « = 12.32% "

* Journal fiir prakt. Chemie, [2.] xviii. 209.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 79

The analyses lead to the formula

10 M0O3 . 2 PPs . 5 (NIIJ.p . 11,0 + 6 aq,
or

5 M0O3 . T.fl. . 3 (NII,),0 + 5 M0O3 . PA • 2 (NllJaO . UrP + 6 aq,
which requires : —

Calc'd.

Mean.

0 MoOg

1440

68.24

68.13

. . .

. . .

. . .

2 PA

284

13.46

13.26

13.20

13.32

. . .

5 (NIT,),>0

2G0

12.32

12.32

12.41

12.23

12.32

7 11^0

126

5.98

6.29

6.15

6.34

6.39

2110 100.00

The phosphoric oxide was determined by double precipitation only,
without subsequent treatment with amnionic sulphide. The percent-
age is a little lower than that required by the formula, which is
unusual ; but the general agreement of the analyses with the formula
is satisfactory. Rammelsberg has described an acid potassium salt
with the formula

10 M0O3 . Vfi. . 5 K,0 . Hp + 1 9 aq.

It is therefore at least probable that we shall find another ammonia
salt with 20 atoms of water, and another potassium salt with 7 atoms.
Zenker has described another potassic salt to which he gives the
formula, — as I should write it, —

9 M0O3 . P^O. . 4 K,0 . 2 H.O + 18 aq ;

but the results of his analyses differ very widely from the percentages
required by the formula, and on repeating his process I obtained
only the 10:5 atom salt of Rammelsberg. The formula given above
for this salt requires 11.11 % P2O5. I found 11.22%.

Rammelsberg* has also described a white insoluble potassium salt
to which he gives the formula 15 MoO, . P2O5 . 5 K2O, but without any
statement of his analyses.

ARSENIO-MOLYBDATES.

Compounds of arsenic and molybdic oxides have been described
by Seyberth f and by Debray.f Seyberth obtained an acid with the
formula, — as I should write it, —

* Loc. cit.

t Berichte der Chem. Gesellscliaft, 1874, p. 391.

t Comptes Rendus, Ixxviii. 1408.

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

7 MoOs As.O^ . 3 H^O + 11 aq,

and the three corresponding salts : —

7 M0O3 . AsA • (NHJP . 2 Hp + 4 H^O
7 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 3 BaO
7 M0O3 . As^O. . 3 Ag.O.

Debray obtained the acids and one or two salts of two different
series, which may be represented respectively by the formulas: —

20 M0O3 . As,0- . 3 H,0 + 24 aq

20 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 3 K^O

20 M0O3 . AsA • 3 (NH,),0
6 M0O3 • A^Ps . 3 up -j- 13 aq
6 M0O3 . AsPs . 4 (NHJP 4- aq
6 M0O3 . AS2O5 . (NH,),0"+ 4 aq
6 M0O3 • AsA . Na,0 + 1 2 aq.

Debray considers the formula of the 20-atom ammonium salt as
probable only, and regards the water determination in the corre-
sponding acid as not quite certain. Neither Seyberth nor Debray has
described the analytical methods employed, or given the details of
the analyses.

I have found it most advantageous to separate arsenic from mo-
lybdic oxide by precipitating with magnesia mixture, redissolving the
amraonio-magnesic arsenate, and precipitating a second time with
ammonia after adding a little magnesia mixture. The ammonio-mag-
nesic arsenate may be digested with ammonic sulphide without de-
composition ; but after the second precipitation it does not retain
molybdic oxide, and the subsequent treatment is therefore unneces-
sary. To determine the sum of the molybdic and arsenic oxides
I precipitate the two together with mercurous nitrate and mercuric
oxide, in the manner already described for the estimation of molybdic
and phosphoric oxides, filter upon paper, and after drying roll U]) the
filter and its contents and ignite cautiously in a porcelain crucible.
By slow and careful heating the filter may be completely burned with-
out loss of molybdic or arsenic oxides, this result being attained by
the oxygen of the mercurous and mercuric oxides present. A
weighed quantity of sodic tungstate is then to be added in fine powder,
the mass well mixed in the crucible, and then cautiously heated until
mercury is completely expelled, and after cooling a white fused mass
remains. A second or even a third heating is necessary to insure a

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 81

perfectly constant weight. The difference between the percentage
of arsenic oxide, As^jOg, and the sum of the percentages of the arsenic
and molybdic oxides, gives the percentage of molybdic oxide with
a very fair degree of approximation. In these salts the water must
always be determined by ignition with sodic tungstate or some similar
compound, since both arsenic and molybdic oxides are volatile.

Sixteen to one Series. — When solutions of ammonic arsenate and
acid molybdate (7 : 3 salt) are mixed, a beautiful white crystalline pre-
cipitate is thrown down, which is very insohible in cold water but
dissolves slightly in boiling water, giving, however, a turbid solution.
The salt is readily soluble in ammonia water. The portion analyzed
was well washed on a filter with cold water and dried on woollen
paper. In this salt, —

1.1322 gr. lost on ignition with WO.Na^ 0.1636 gr. NHg and HjO

= 14.45%
1.3389 gr. gave 0.2481 gr. NH.Cl = 9.00 p^ (NH^P
1.4276 gr. " 0.1478 gr.As,0,Mg,= 7.68% AS2O5

The analyses lead to the formula

16 M0O3 . As A • 5 (NH^^O . H^O + 8 aq.

which requires : —

Calc'd.

I6M0O3 2304 77.94 1 77.97)

AsA 230 7.78 r^-^^ 7.68 1^^-^^

5(NHA0 260 8.79] ^'^^ui^

9 H,0 _262 5.49 j 5.45 1
2956

The salt may have lost a little ammonia in drying. "When potassic
arsenate and acid molybdate are mixed, a similar salt is formed. A
solution of arsenic acid gives at once in solutions of acid ammonic or
potassic molybdate a beautiful white crystalline precipitate, insoluble in
cold water, but soluble in a large quantity of boiling water, forming
cloudy solutions which pass freely through a filter. These may serve
as starting-points for new investigations. The arsenio-molybdate above
described is not perceptibly altered by long boiling with nitric acid,
but the existence of higher compounds containing 22 or 24 molecules
of molybdic to one of arsenic oxide appears at least extremely probable.

The phospho-molybdates and arsenio-molybdates now known with
some degree of certainty are as follows : —

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 6

82 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

24 MoOg . PaOg . 6 HoO + 47 aq Mo24p.207i(HO)i2 + 47 aq

24 MoOg . PaOg . 6 H.O + 43 aq MojiP^O-ifHOJi^ + 43 aq

24 MoOg . PoOg . 6 H^O + 24 aq MooiPoO^ilHO),, + 24 aq

24 M0O3 • P2O5 . 2 KoO . 4 HoO Mo^iPaO^iKOlJHOjg

24 MoOg . P0O5 . CcO . 5 H06 + 18 aq Moo4PAi(CcO.)(HO)io + 18 aq

48 M0O3 . 2 P2O5 . 5 ('NRi).p . a,0 + 16 aq Mo48P40h8(NH40)io(HO)2 + 16 aq

22 M0O3 . P.Og . 3 (NH4)20 . 3 H2O + 9 aq Moo2P2065(NH40)6(HO)6 + 9 aq

22 M0O3 . P2O6 . 3 (NH4)20 . 3 HoO + 6 aq Mo22P2065(NH40)6(HO)6 + 6 aq

22 M0O3 . P2O5 ■ 3 (NH4)20 Mo2oP2068(NH40)e

22 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 K2O . 3 H2O + 9 aq Mo22P2065( KO)6(HO)6 + 9 aq

22 M0O3 . PjOg . 7 Ag20 + 14 aq Mo22Po064( AgO)i4 + 14 aq

44 M0O3 . 2 P2O6 . 5 K2O . H2O + 21 aq Mo44P40i3g(KO)io(HO)2 + 21 aq

60 M0O3 . 3 P2O5 . 8 (NH4)20 . H2O + 11 aq Mo6oP60i86(NH40)i6(HO)2 + 11 aq

18 MoOg . P2O5 . NaaO . 5 H2O + ?n aq Moi8P2053(NaO)2(HO)io + m aq

18 MoOg . P2O5 . 2 Na20 . 4 H2O + n aq Moj8P2053(NaO)4(HO)8 + n aq
16 MoOg . PaOg . 3 (NH4)20 . 3 H2O + 11 aq Moi6P2047(NH40)6(HO)6 + 11 aq

5 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 Na20 . 3 H2O + 11 aq Mo5P20i4(NaO)6(HO)6 + 11 aq
5 M0O3 . PoOg . 3 (Nk4)20 . 8 H2O + 4 aq Mo5P20i4(NH40)6(HO)6 + 4 aq
5 MoOg . P2O5 . 3 K2O . 3 H2O + 4 aq Mo5P20i4(KO)6(HO)6 + 4 aq

5 M0O3 . P2O5 . 3 Ag20 . 3 H2O + 4 aq Mo5P20i4(AgO)6(HO)6 + 4 aq

10 MoOg . 2 P2O5 . 5 K2O . HoO + 19 aq MoioP4034(KO)io(HO)2 + 19 aq
10 M0O3 . 2 P2O5 . 5 (^4)26 . HoO + 6 aq MoioP4084(NH40)io(Hb)2+ 6 aq

20 M0O3 . AsiOg . 6 H2O + 21 aq Mo2oAso059(HO)i2 + 21 aq

20 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 3 K2O Mo2oAs206o(KO)6

20 MoOg . AS2O5 . 3 (NH4)20 Mo2oAs2062(NH40)6

16 M0O3 • AS2O5 . 5 (NH4)20 . H2O + 8 aq Moi6As204-(NH40)io(HO)2 + 8 aq

7 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 6 HoO + 8 aq Mo^AsoOooCHO)]^ + 8 aq

7 MoOg . AS2O5 . (NH4)20 . 6 H2O Mo^AsoOoolNHiOjolHOJio

7 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 3 BaO Mo7As2023( Ba02)8

7 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 3 AgoO Mo^AsoOogfAgOJe

6 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 6 H2O + 10 aq MOfiAsoOi-CHOJio + 10 aq
6 M0O3 . AS2O5 . 4 (NH4)oO + aq MogAsoOigfNH^OJa

6 M0O3 . AS2O5 . (NH4)26 . 2 H2O + 2 aq Mo6Aso02o(NH40)2(HO)4 + 2 aq
6 M0O3 . AsoOg . Na20 . 5 HjO + 7 aq Mo6As20i7(NaO)o(HO)io + 7 aq

For the convenience of comparison with the corresponding com-
pounds of tungsten, I have in writing these formulas as far as possible
assumed that all the phospho-molybdic and arsenio-molybdic acids con-
tain 12 atoms of hydroxyl, or, in the language appropriate to the old
notation, are six-basic. With the material before us, we are now pre-
pared to discuss the question of the basicity of the phospho-tungstates

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 83

and phospho-molybdates as well as of the corresponding arsenic com-
pounds.

The general results to which the study of the phospho-molybdates
and arsenio-molybdates has led are as follows : —

1 . The phospho-molybdates form a series of which the lowest term
contains five atoms of molybdic to one of phosphoric oxide, and the
highest twenty-four atoms of the former to one of the latter.

2. As in the case of the phospho-tungstates, the greater number of
the molybdenum compounds contain an even number of atoms of tung-
stic oxide. The homologizing term is therefore 2 MoOg for these
cases.

3. By far the greater number of phospho-molybdates contain three
atoms of fixed base (old style), or, in more modern language, may be
considered as derived from acids containing six atoms of hydroxyl.
Anhydrous compounds of this type occur, and are not always simply
residues obtained by heating salts which may be considered as acid, as
containing, for example, 3 E^O . 3 H^O. It seems therefore necessary
to admit the existence of acids of the general type

n M0O3 • P2O5 • 3 H,0,

which may, however, stand in the relation of pyro-acids to other acids
of the type

n M0O3 . P2O5 . 6 HP .

4. On the other hand, while no single phospho-molybdate containing
more than three atoms of fixed base for one of phosphoric oxide has
been obtained in a state of indubitable purity, it is probable that there
is at least one salt with six or more atoms of fixed base. I refer to
the silver salt which I have expressed by the formula

22 M0O3 . Pp, . 7 Ag.O + 14 aq.

5. Setting aside the evidence derived from the analogy of the phos-
pho-molybdates and phospho-tungstates, there is at present no sufficient
proof of the existence of a series of phospho-molybdates or arsenio-
molybdates containing more than three atoms of fixed base. Such
purely negative evidence must not be too highly regarded.

6. As in the case of the phospho-tungstates, there exists a class of
phospho-molybdates in which the ratio of the number of atoms of base
to that of the number of atoms of phosphoric oxide is as 5 : 2, the num-
ber of atoms of molybdic oxide being even.

Since the publication of my work on the phospho-tungstates and

84 PROCEEDmCS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

arsenio-tungstates a paper by Sprenger * on the phospho-tungstates has
appeared. Sprenger has examined, with a single exception, only the
compounds of the 24 : 1 series, and has added a number of new salts,
which, so far as regards their constitution, fully confirm my own results.
The compounds described, belonging to the 24-atom series, are the
following : —

24 WO3 . P2O5 . 3 H^O + 58 aq

24 WO3 . p'a . 3 BaO + 58 aq

24 WO3 . P2O5 . 2 BaO . H^O + 58 aq

24 WO3 . PA • BaO . 2 H^O -j- 58 aq

24 WO3 . P2O3 . 3 Cu^O + 58 aq

24 WO3 . P2O5 . 3 Ag'fl + 58 aq

24 WO3 . PA . AgP . HP + 58 aq.

Sprenger's formula for the octahedral acid agrees with that which I
had given if we consider the acid as tribasic. The other salts which
he has described are new, and form a valuable addition to our knowl-
edge of this class of compounds. It is well worthy of notice, that in all
of his salts, the acid included, the number of atoms of water is the
game. The acid with 58 atoms of water of crystallization forms, there-
fore, a complete and stable molecular structure in which 2, 4, or 6 atoms
of hydrogen are replaceable. I do not recall any other series in which
this constancy of crystalline water occurs, at least to the same extent.
Sprenger has also obtained a salt of the 22-atom series which is of
much interest. This is the barium salt

22 WO3 . P2O5 . 7 BaO + 591 aq,

and its special interest depends upon the fact, first, that the ratio of the
tungstic to the phosphoric oxide is as 22 : 1, and, secondly, that the
salt contains seven atoms of fixed base, or, in other words, must be con-
sidered as derived from an acid containing at least fourtee^i atoms of
hydroxyl. Sprenger asserts that he has obtained the corresponding
acid, and it is to be hoped that he will pursue the subject farther.
This barium compound furnishes additional evidence of the independent
existence of a series in which the ratio is 22 : 1, and in addition it
renders more probable the formula which I have given for Debray's
silver salt,

22Mo03.PA-7Ag,0+14aq.

From these two tolerably well-established cases it would appear that
* Journal fiir prakt. Clieniie, xxii. 418.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 85

we are not justified in holding that the phospho-tungstates, phospho-
molybdates, and corresponding arsenic compounds, have a basicity of
which the higher limit is six. I may here mention that I shall here-
after describe a vanadio-molybdate of ammonium the analyses of which
agree well with the formula

18 M0O3 . VA . 8 (NHJP + 15 aq.

The risk of drawing hasty conclusions from purely negative evi-
dence is particularly great in discussing the degree of basicity of this
whole class of compounds, but 1 shall endeavor to show that it is possi-
ble to devise structural formulas which will embrace and explain all
degrees of basicity which appear to be possible under the general con-
ditions of the problem.

We may, as in the case of the alkaline tungstates already discussed,
assume that both tungsten and molybdenum are hexatomic, and, as in
that case, we may start from the commonly received formula for po-
tassic dichromate,

CrO^ - 0 - K

I

0
I

CrOa - 0 - K

which may be equally well applied to hexatomic tungsten,

0
II
0=W-0-K

I

o

I
0 = AY - O - K
II
0

If we further suppose that the separate terms of the structural
formulas are symmetrically arranged, and take a 6 : 1 phospho-tung-
state

6W03.PA-6H,0 or 6WO,.PA.(HO)j2

as an illustration, we may, with at least a certain degree of proba-
bility, express the structure as follows : —

86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

HO-WO2 = WO, -OH

I I

HO-WO2 — WO2-OH

I I

HO-WO2 — WO2-OH

I I

0 o

1 I

3 (HO) H PO-O-OP = (OH),

This formula explains the basicity of the acid satisfactorily. It.
also shows that, as six atoms of hydroxyl are united with phosphorus,
and six with tungstic oxide, there should be theoretically a limiting
case corresponding to an acid containing six atoms of hydroxyl, and
represented by the formula

6W03.PA.3H,0 or 6WO,.03.PA.(HO)e
and structurally by

WO2

1

\ 0/

wo,

1

WO2

-0-

wo,

II

II

WO,

1

-0-

W02

1

0

1

0

1

3

(HO)

1

ePO

-0-

1

0P =

(0H)3

According to this view six atoms of hydroxyl are always associated
with phosphorus, or, as the case may be, with arsenic. I consider this
view of the subject by far the more probable. At the same time, how-
ever, it is also possible that we may have the structural formula,

HO -WO, = WO, -OH

I I

HO-^WO, — WO, -OH

I I

HO -WO, — WO, -OH

I I

0 0

I /Os. I

OP — PO

in which all the atoms of hydroxyl are associated directly with tung-
sten, and in the present state of our knowledge we can only decide the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 87

question upon general grounds of probability, so that our conclusions
are at best uncertain. Finally, both formulas being at least possible,
it may be that there are two isomeric modifications of each series of
acids represented respectively by the formulas above given. There is
no present evidence of the existence of such isomeric modifications in
the case of phospho-tungstates, phospho-molybdates, or the correspond-
ing arsenic series ; but Marignac has shown that there are two isomeric
series of silico-tungstates, which he calls respectively silico-tungstates
and tungsto-silicates, and it may be that the difference between these
depends upon differences in the mode of combination, precisely similar
to those which I have pointed out above. I shall return to this sub-
ject in the general discussion of my results. With respect to the two
linking terms,

II II

0 0 0 0

I I I / 0^ I

3 (HO) E PO - O - OP E (0H)3 and OP — PO

no assumption is made which is not in perfect accordance with com-
monly accepted views of the subject.

We may now consider the most general case, that, namely, in which
there are twenty-four atoms of tungstic or molybdic, to one of phos-
phoric or arsenic oxide. We have for an acid of this type

24 WO3 . P2O5 . 6 HP or 24 WO, . 0,, . PA • i^O)^

and in accordance with the principles above laid down the Btructural
formula may be written : —

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

1

=

wo,

1

1

0

I

1

0

1

wo,

1

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

wo,

1

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

wo,

1

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

wo,

1

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

wo,

1

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

wo,

J

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

0

1

wo,

I

=

wo,

1

1

0

1

0

1

wo,

=

1

wo,

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

HO - wo,

1

—

1

wo,-

1

• OH

1

HO - wo,

1

—

1

wo,-

1

-OH

1

HO - wo,

1

—

1

wo,-

1

-OH

1

0
1

1

0

1

3 (HO) = PO - O - OP E (OH)j

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 89

The case of an acid containing for twenty-four atoms of tungstic
oxide six atoms of hydroxyl may easily be deduced from the above,
upon the principle explained in the first example cited. Without again
writing the cumbrous formula, it may easily be seen that the cases
of acids containing more than twelve atoms of hydroxyl, if such really
exist, are embraced in the above-given structural formula, and that in
such cases there will be two variations in the mode of combination of the
hydroxyl, similar to the two which occur when there are six or twelve
atoms of hydroxyl. The structural formula given would explain sim-
ply and naturally the trihasic character of all known phospho-molyb-
dates and phospho-tungstates containing twenty-four atoms of metallic
oxide, since in these all the hydroxyl may be united with phosphorus
exclusively, or with tungsten exclusively. It only remains to consider
the case of the compounds having for one atom of phosphoric or arsenic
oxide an uneven number of atoms of metallic oxide, as, for instance,
the 5 : 1 and 7 : 1 series. In these cases also there exists, as has been
shown, a second and derived series, of which the successive terms are to
be regarded as formed from those of the first series by doubling the mo-
lecular weight and dropping an atom of fixed base. Thus, we have

5 M0O3 • PA • 3 H2O and 10 M0O3 . 2 Vf^, . 5 Kp . H^O + 19 aq

7 M0O3 • ^s.Ps . 3 H2O 14 WO3 . 2 P2O5 . 5 Nap . Hp -f 42 aq

22 M0O3 • P2O5 . 3 H^O 44 M0O3 . 2 P^Og . 5 Kf) . Hp + 21 aq

24 M0O3 . PA • 3 HP 48 M0O3 . 2 P^O^ . 5(NH J,0 . Hp+l 6 aq

All these salts appear to have an acid reaction. They may all be
regarded as acid six-basic salts, and it is easy to see that the two series
may be reduced to one by doubling the formulas of all the terms on the
left, so that we shall have a single series, of which the successive terms
are

10 M0O3
12 M0O3
14 WO3 .

. 2 PA • 6 H2O
. 2 As.,05 . 6 HP
2PA.6HP

48 M0O3

.2PA.6HP

This view in no wise excludes acids or salts of a higher degree of
basicity. It has the advantage of bringing all the compounds to-
gether, and of being more completely in accordance with what we
know of the constitution of salts belonging to simpler types. The
structural formulas which I have given — provisionally, of course —

90 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

may easily be modified to suit this view, and will all be symmetrical,
and suggestive of various possible isomerisms.

The study of other complex inorganic acids will, doubtless, throw
further light upon the subject, and to it I shall continue to devote my
leisure. It already begins to appear that inorganic compounds may
possess an unexpected degree of complexity, and that very wide fields
of research in inorganic chemistry are still open.

(7b he continued.)

OF ABTS AND SCIENCES. 91

VII.

AN INDIRECT DETERMINATION OF CHLORINE AND
BROMINE BY ELECTROLYSIS.

By Leoxard p. Kinnicutt.

Presented November 9th, 1881.

In the indirect determination of chlorine and bromine the method
most commonly employed is to precipitate both halogens with argentic
nitrate, and then either to reduce the weighed argentic chloride and
bromide to metallic silver by heating in an atmosphere of hydrogen,
or to change the bromide into chloride by heating in a stream of
chlorine gas.

The determination by either method is difficult, requires the closest
attention, and is liable to give erroneous results ; both on account of
the slight loss that may occur in transferring the weighed chloride
and bromide from the crucible to the glass tube, and also from slight
volatilization during the heating. I have found that even in reducing
the mixed haloids to metallic silver in a slow current of hydrogen,
small particles of silver are almost always carried by the gas along
the tube. Led by these facts, I attempted during the past winter to
find a new method which would, if possible, from its accuracy and
simplicity, tend to bring the indirect determination of chlorine and
bromine when they occur in organic compounds more into vogue than
is at present the case. In this attempt I believe I have been success-
ful, and the method I have devised is based on the principle that
melted argentic chloride and bromide are easily reduced to metallic
silver by the galvanic current.

The details of the process are as follows : —

After the mixture of the two halogen compounds of silver has been
heated in a porcelain crucible so that they just fuse together, the cru-
cible is cooled and weighed, a piece of platinum foil connected with a
platinum wire is placed in the crucible so that it rests on the melted
silver salts, and dilute sulphuric acid (1 pt. cone, to 3 pts. water by

92 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

volume) is poured into the crucible until it is two-thirds full, a second
piece of platinum foil united to a wire is then placed in the acid solu-
tion, care being taken that it does not touch the silver mixture. The
zinc pole of a two-cell Bunsen battery is connected with the platinum
foil that rests on the silver salts, and the carbon pole with the plati-
num foil just mentioned. The decomposition begins immediately,
chlorine and bromine being given off from the positive electrode, the
reduced silver remaining at the bottom of the crucible in the form of
a porous mass. The reaction requires from twelve to eighteen hours ;
with a weight of less than one and a half grammes of the mixed haloids
I have found twelve hours sufficient to produce complete reduction ;
with a weight exceeding that amount I prefer to allow eighteen.
When the argentic chloride and bromide are completely reduced, the
battery is disconnected, the electrodes taken out of the sulphuric acid
solution and washed with distilled water. The sulphuric is then
poured off from the silver, and the silver is washed by decantation
with distilled water, the decanted liquid being poured through a small
filter ; this is afterwards burnt, added to the silver sponge which still
remains in the crucible ; the crucible is then heated over a low free
flame to constant weight. The weight thus found, minus the weight of
the crucible and filter ash, is of course the weight of silver contained
in the argentic chloride and bromide.

The only point that requires any great degree of care in this process
is the melting of the mixed haloids. The temperature at which the
fusion takes place must be as low as possible, so as to avoid any vola-
tilization, and the melted mass should be united as far as practicable
in one piece.

In some of the following analyses I have used a platinum crucible.
When this has been the case, one wire has been wound around the
crucible, while the other, as before, has been merely allowed to dip
into the acid solution ; in this way the whole crucible serves as an
electrode, and there is no need of bringing the melted chloride and
bromide into one globule. With a platinum crucible, the washing of
the reduced silver must be continued until a few drops of the filtrate
gives no precipitate with baric chloride, and the drying should be done
in an air bath at a temperature of about 150° C. After weighing, the
silver, which always adheres to the crucible, can be dissolved out with
dilute nitric acid.

The first series of analyses shows the accuracy of the process when
either argentic chloride or bromide is taken alone, the second series
when they occur together.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

93

Wt. taken.
Argentic chloride.

0.7206 grammes.
1.2984 "
1.8455 «

TTt. taken.
Argentic bromide.

0.9313 grammes.
0.9421 «

First series of analyses.

Wt. found.
Silver.

0.5419 grammes.
0.9771 "
1.3892

Wfc. found.
Silver.

0.5352 grammes.
0.5424 "

wt. calculated.
Silver.

0.5425 grammes.
0.9777 "
1.3889 "

wt. calculated.

Silver.

0.5350 grammes.
0.5424 "

In this connection I publish, by permission, three analyses, made
according to this process, by Prof. J. P. Cooke, in determining the
purity of a sample of argentic bromide.

Wt. of argentic bromide.

1. 4.1450 grammes.

2. 1.8172

3. 4.9601 "

Wt. of silver.

2.3817 grammes.
1.0437 "
2.8497 "
Mean value . .

Per cent of silver.

57.444
57.434
57.449

57.442

Second series of analyses.

Wt. taken.
Argentic bromide

wt. taken.
Argentic chloride.

Wt. found.
Silver.

wt. calculated.
Silver.

0.9389 gr.

1.0498 gr.

1.3283 gr.

1.3293 gr.

1.0915 "

. 1.3042 "

1.6095 «

1.6086 "

1.1779 «

1.2551 "

1.6229 "

1.6217 «

1.2470 «

1.5420 "

1.8778 «

1.8770 «

1.6153 «

0.6661 "

0.8560 "

0.8550 "

The slight increase of variation between the found and calculated
results in this second series of analyses I attribute to a slight volatili-
zation of the argentic chloride before the chloride undergoes fusion.

With the argentic iodide I have only tried qualitative experiments,
but I can see no reason why its determination when mixed with either
argentic chloride or bromide cannot be accomplished according to this
method.

94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

VIII.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORATORY
OF HARVARD COLLEGE.

By Charles F. Mabeky.

Presented February 8, 1882.

Thk investigations described in the following papers were made under
my supervision, and they formed a part of the work in the Summer
Course of Instruction in Chemistry for 188L

DIBROMIODACRYLIC AND CHLORBROMIODACRYLIC ACIDS.

Charles F. Mabery and Rachel Llotd.

From the ease with which various substituted acrylic acids have
been obtained from bromjjropiolic acid,* we were led to believe that
derivatives of some interest would result by the simultaneous addition
of different halogens. This idea was confirmed by a few preliminary
experiments, which showed that iodine monobromide and iodine mono-
chloride could readily be made to form addition-products with brom-
propiolic acid. These substances have been submitted to a careful
study, and the results we have obtained are presented in this paper.

DinROMIODACRTLIC AciD.

Dibromiodacrylic acid was made from brompropiolic acid, by the
action of iodine monobromide. In the preparation of iodine mono-
bromide according to the method of Lagermarck,t the required weiglit
of iodine, with an excess of bromine, was heated to 50° for ten minutes

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. pp. 211, 235.

t Berichte der deutsch. chem. Gesellsch. 1874, 907.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 95

on the water bath. Dibromiodacrylic acid was formed in small quan-
tity, when the solid residue left by evaporation of the excess of bro-
mine was dissolved in ether and allowed to stand with brompropiolic
acid. The product of this reaction, however, consisted to a large
extent of an oil, from which very little pure substance could be recov-
ered. This ditiiculty was partially overcome by the application of
heat ; and by boiling the solution for an hour on the water bath we
succeeded in obtaining about forty per cent of the amount theoretically
required. The thick pasty mass left after the evaporation of the ether
soon solidified, and was easily purified by crystallization from hot
water.

Dibromiodacrylic acid dissolves readily in ether, alcohol, carbonic di-
sulphide, and chloroform. In cold water it is rather sparingly soluble ;
from a concentrated hot solution it falls at first as an oil, which crystal-
lizes as the solution cools, in oblique prisms of the monoclinic system.
It melts at 139°-140°, and sublimes slowly at higher temperatures.

The composition of this substance was determined by the following
analyses : —

I. 1.0762 grm. of the substance gave 0.3385 grm. CO^ and 0.0420

grm. HgO.
II. 0.1993 grm. of the substance gave by the method of Carius
0.3385 grm. Ag Br + Ag I.

Calcula

c

ited for CgHBrJOa .
10.11

Found.
I. II.
9.85

H

.28

.43

2 Br + I

80.63

80.21

To determine the solubility of this acid at ordinary temperatures,
we used the method of V. Meyer. The filtered solution was neutral-
ized with baric carbonate, and the barium estimated by precipitation
with sulphuric acid.

I. 8.7164 grms. solution gave 0.0968 grm. BaSO^ .
II. 9.7772 grms. solution gave 0.1089 grm. BaSO^ .

The solution saturated at 20° contains, therefore, the percentages : —

I. IT.

3.39 3.40

Dr. "W. H. Melville has made a cry stall ographic examination of
this substance, and obtained the following results : —

96

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Crystalline Form of Dibromiodacrtlic Acid.

001

no

lip

OOI

MoNOCLiNic System.

Forms {001}, {010}, {110}, {121}, {111}.='

Elements : — Clinodiagonal, « = 0.617
Orthocliagonal, b = 1.
Vertical Axis, c = 0.581
Angle of Axes = 52° 11|'

Observed.

Calculated.

001 and no

123° 26'

(

110 " 010.

64°

> Fundamental an

Ill " 110

59°14'i.

>

111 " 010

62° 11 "

61° 47'

121 " 010

42° 59'

42° 58'

121 " 001

70° 29'

70° 19'

121 " 110

55° 59'

56° 13'

121 " TIO

84° 55'

85° 5'^

The following salts of this acid have been examined : —

Baric dibromiodacrylate Ba(C3Br^J02)2 • S^H^O.

To prepare the barium salt, a solution of the acid was neutralized
with baric carbonate and the filtered solution concentrated by evapora-
tion. On cooling the salt crystallized in rhombic prisms, which were

* Tlie form jlll ^ appeared only on a few crystals.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 97

very soluble in hot, less soluble in cold water. The air-dried salt lost
three and a half molecules of crystal water at 80°.

I. 0.7087 grm. of the air-dried salt lost 0.0512 grm. H^O at 80".
II. 0.7273 grm. of the salt lost 0.0535 grm. 11,0 at 80°.

III. 0.G244 grm. of the salt lost 0.0441 grm. H.,0 at 80°.

IV. 0.G575 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave 0.1808 grra. Ba SO^ .

Calculated for Ba(CaBr2l02)2 • 3^11^0. Found.

I. II. III.

HP 6.92 7.23 7.36 7.06

Calculated for Ba(C3Br2lOo)2 • Found.

Ba 16.17 . 1G.16

The solubility of this salt in cold water was determined by V.
Meyer's method. The saturated solution was filtered, evaporated to
dryness, and the barium estimated by ignition with sulphuric acid.

I. 2.6342 grms. of a solution saturated at 20° gave 0.1038 grm.

BaSO, .
II. 2.0175 grms. of a solution saturated at 20° gave 0.0806 grm.
BaSO, .

From these determinations the following percentages were calcu-
lated : —

I. n.

14.32 14.52

Calcic dihromiodacrylate Ca(C3Br2l02)2«

The calcium salt was made by saturating an aqueous solution of the
acid with calcic carbonate. From the concentrated solution the salt
crystallized in clustered needles which were less soluble in cold than
in hot water. When air-dried it was constant at 80°.

0.4118 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave 0.0714 grm. CaSO^ .

Calculated for Ca(C3Br.J02)2 • Found.

Ca 5.33 5.10

Potassic dihromiodacrylate KC.jBr2l02 ?

This salt was prepared by neutralizing an aqueous solution of the
acid with potassic carbonate and evaporating on the water bath. It
separated in the form of rhombic plates, which proved to be so deli-

VOL. XVII. (N. S. XI.) 7

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

quescent that we were unable to determine the water of crystalliza-
tion.

0.8834 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave 0.1842 grm. KgSO^.

Calculated for KCaBr^IO^. Found.

K 9.92 9.92

Argentic dihromiodacrylate AgCgBr.^IOj.

From a hot aqueous solution of the acid the silver salt is precipitated
by the addition of argentic nitrate in hexagonal plates. It may be
recrystallized from hot water without decomposition, and it is but
slightly affected by the action of light. The salt was dried over sul-
phuric acid for analysis.

1.0737 grm. of the salt gave by precipitation with HBr 0.4288 grm.
AgBr.

Calculated for AgC3BrJ02. Found.

Ag 23.32 " 22.98

When dibromiodacrylic acid is heated to 100° in a closed tube with
bromine, iodine is set free and bromine takes its place. The substance
thus formed is identical with the tribromacrylic acid described by Pro-
fessor H. B. Hill and one of us* as shown by its melting point 115-
118°, and by a study of its crystalline form. The following angles
were measured by Dr. Melville : —

Tribromacrylic Tribromacrylic
acid from acid from

Angles between normals, dibromiodacrylic. brompropiolic.

Zone [010, 110] 110 and 010 65° 33' 65° $8'

48° 40'

110 and 010

65° 33'

010 « TIO

65° 44

TIO " TTO

48° 28'

TTO " OTO

65° 52i'

OTO « ITO

65° 35'"

ITO « 110

48° 44'

359° 561'

010 and Oil

63° 11'

Oil " OTl

54° 5'

OTl " OTO

62° 56'

Zone [010, Oil] 010 and Oil 63° 11' 63° 14'

53° 33'

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. p. 216.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 99

It also gave the percentage of bromine required for tribromacrylic
acid.

0.1553 grra. substance gave 0.2819 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for CgHBrgOa. Found.

Br 77.66 77.25

Chlorbromiodacrtlic Acid.

Chlorbromiodacrylic acid may be prepared most conveniently by
heating brompropiolic acid with an ethereal solution of iodine mono-
chloride, although without the application of heat the reaction takes
place slowly. Iodine monochloride was made according to the method
proposed by Bunsen.* Tlie calculated weight of iodine was dissolved
in aqua regia with the aid of heat, and after cooling the solution was
extracted with ether and washed thoroughly with water. When brom-
propiolic acid is heated for an hour with this solution, the oily liquid
left on evaporation of the ether soon deposits large prismatic crystals
of the addition-product. For purification the crude product was
pressed in filter paper and recrystallized from hot water.

This substance is readily soluble in ether and alcohol, somewhat less
so in carbonic disul^ohide and chloroform. From a hot aqueous solu-
tion it separates as an oil which crystallizes on cooling in rhombic
prisms of the monoclinic system. By crystallization from water we
did not succeed in raising the melting point above 110° ; but the crys-
tals formed by slow evaporation of a solution in carbonic disulj^hide
melted at 115-116°. It sublimes freely at somewhat higher tempera-
tures.

This acid was identified by the following analyses : —

I. 0.G743 grm. substance gave 0.2843 grm. COj.f
II. 0.1505 grm. substance gave 0.2721 grm. AgCl -f AgBr -j-
Agl.

Calculated for CaHClBrlOi. Found.

I. II.

C 11.55 11.50

• H .32

CI + Br -f- I 77.84 77.41

* Ann. Chem. u. Pharm. LXXIV. 8.

t By an accident the water in this combustion was lost.

100

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The following results were obtained in determining the solubility in
cold water : —

I. 8.1470 grms. of a solution saturated at 20° gave 0.1396 grm.

BaSO, .
11. 5.4630 grms. of a solution saturated at 20° gave 0.0968 grm.

BaSO^ .
From these results were calculated the percentages : —
I. II.

4.58 4.74

For a determination of the crystalline form of this acid we are
indebted to the kindness of Dr. Melville, who obtained the following
results : —

Crystalline Form of Chlorbromiodacrtlic Acid.

coi

no

//

001

Monoclinic System.
Forms {001}, {010}, {110}, {121}, {111}, {201},

Elements : — Clinodiagonal, a = 0.594
Orthodiagonal, b = 1.
Vertical Axis, c = 0.572

Angle of axes XZ = 52° 47'

Observed. Calculated.

Angles between normals 111 and 110 58° 23'

121
121
111

110 55° 45'
010 43° 48'
010 62° 43'
110 « 001 123° 26'

110 « 010 65° 3'

111 " ITO 82* 24'

Fundamental Angles.

62° 28'

123° 13'

64° 5&

82° 23'

I OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 101

It will be seen by inspection of the forms of dibromiodacrylic and
chlorbromiodacrylic acids that these substances present a striking in-
stance of isomorphism. In fact the only form not common to both is
that of {201}, which was not observed on the crystals of dibromioda-
crylic acid. This similarity in form, which extends also to tribroma-
crylic acid, is rendered more prominent by a comparison of the observed
angles. The measurements of tribromacrylic acid show a greater
variation in the observed angles except in the case of the angle which
the prism {110} makes with the piuacoid {010}.

Dibromiod- Chlorbromiod- Tribrom-

acrylic acid. acrylic acid. acrylic acid.

110 and 010 64° 65° 3' 65°33

110 " TIG 128° 130° 6'

110 " 001 123° 26' 123° 26'

111 " 010 62° 11' 62° 43'
111 " 110 59° 141' 58° 23'
121 « 010 42° 59' 43° 48'
121 « 110 55° 59' 55° 45'

The elements of the crystals also proved to be nearly identical.

Dibromiod- Chlorbromiod-

acrylic acid. acrylic acid.

Clinodiagonal a 0.617 0.594

Orthodiagonal 5 1. 1.

Vertical axis c 0.581 0.572

Angle of axes XZ 52° ll'i 52° 47'

A study was made of some of the more important salts of chlorbrom-
iodacrylic acid.

Baric chlorhromiodacrylate Ba(C3ClBrI02)2 • SJHjO.

A solution of the acid was saturated with baric carbonate, filtered,
and concentrated on the water bath. The salt separated on cooling
in rectangular prisms, which when dried by exposure to the air con-
tained three and a half molecules of crystal water. It is quite soluble
in cold, and very soluble in hot water.

I. 0.8250 grm. of the air-dried salt lost when heated to 80° 0.0636

grm. HgO.
II. 0.7273 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80° 0.0540 grm. HgO.

III. 0.5401 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80° 0.0384 grm. H^O.

IV. 0.5502 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80° 0.0438 grm. H^O.

Found.

II.

III.

IV.

7.44

7.11

Found.

7.96

V.

VI.

VII.

18.26

18.34

18.10

102 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

V. 0.6697 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave on ignition with HgSO^
0.2080 grm. BaSO, .
VI. 0.5032 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave 0.1570 grm. BaSO^.
VII. 0.4959 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave 0.1527 grm. BaS04.

Calculated for BaiCgClBrlO-i) 2 • S^H^O.

I.
HgO 7.67 7.71

Calculated for Ba(C3ClBrI0.2)2
Ba 18.07

The solubility at 20° was determined by evaporating a saturated
solution to dryness and igniting the residue with sulphuric acid.

I. 3.7500 grms. solution gave 0.2339 grm. BaSO^.
II. 3.1458 grms. solution gave 0.1957 grm. BaSO^.

According to these determinations a solution saturated at 20° con-
tains the percentages : —

I. II.

20.30 20.23

Calcic chlorhromiodacrylate Ca(C3ClBrI02)2 . HgO.

When a solution of the acid is neutralized with calcic carbonate,
and the filtered solution concentrated by evaporation, the calcium salt
separates in the form of branching needles. The air-dried salt con-
tains one molecule of crystal water, which it loses at 80°.

I. 0.7180 grm. of the air-dried salt lost 0.0216 grm. lip at 80°.
II. 0.6770 grm. of the air-dried salt lost 0.0197 grm. H2O at 80°.
III. 0.6583 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave 0.1404 grm. CaS04.

Calculated for Ca(C3ClBrI0.2)2 . HgO. Found.

I. II.

H2O 2.66 3.01 291

Calculated for Ca( CgClBrlOo)^ . Found.

III.
Ca 6.05 6.27

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 103

Potassic chlorbromiodacrylate KC3ClBrI0,^ ?

The potassium salt is obtained as a very deliquescent solid mass by
evaporating a solution of the acid after neutralizing with potassic
carbonate.

0.807 G grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave on ignition with IlgSO^
0.217Ggrm. K^SO,.

Calculated for KCsClBrlOi . Found.

K 11.19 11.27

Argentic chlorbromiodacrylate AgCoClBrlOj .

The silver salt was prepared by the addition of argentic nitrate to a
hot aqueous solution of the acid. It crystallizes in rhombic prisms,
which are quite soluble in hot, sjmringly soluble in cold water.

I. 0.5383 grm. of the salt gave 0.1825 grm. AgCl.
II. 0.5129 grm. of the salt gave 0.1766 grm. AgCI.

Calculated for AgCaClBrlO.^ . Found.

I. II.

Ag 25.80 25.52 25.91

PRELIMINARY NOTICE ON ORTHOIODBENZYLBROMIDE AND
ITS DERIVATIVES.*

Charles F. Mabery and Franklin C. Robinson.

Orthoiodbenzylbromide is formed when bromine is allowed to act on
orthoiodtoluol at temperatures near its boiling point. In the prepara-
tion of orthoiodtoluol we obtained the most satisfactory results from the
sulphate of orthodiazotoluol. Orthotoluidin from the factory of Kahl-
baum at Berlin was treated in quantities of 10 grms. each with two
molecules of sulphuric acid, and to this mixture, kept cold with snow,
was added gradually a solution of one molecule of sodic nitrite. On
the addition of hydriodic acid (boiling point 127°) in slight excess
over the calculated amount for the solution of the diazo-compound
thus obtained, orthoiodtoluol was precipated as a heavy oily liquid.

* Since Professor Jackson decided not to include orthoiodbenzylbromide in
his researclies on the substituted benzyl compounds, we have undertaken its
study. (C. F. M.)

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The crude product was washed with sodic hydrate and acetic acid,
and lastly with water. It was then dried over calcic chloride, and
finally purified by fractional distillation. In this way from 20 grms.
orthotoluidin we obtained before fractioning 28 grms. orthoiodtoluol,
which gave 20 grms. boiling at 211° (mercury column wholly in
vapor).*

To convert orthoiodtoluol into orthoiodbenzylbromide, 10 grms.
were heated to 190-200° under a return condenser, and 10 grms.
bromine allowed to run into the flask from a drop funnel as rapidly as
it was absorbed. On cooling, the product of the reaction formed a
thick oily liquid which did not solidify at 0°. It was therefore washed
with a dilute solution of sodic hydrate, to remove the iodine which was
invariably set free during the bromiring, and distilled in the vapor of
concentrated hydrobromic acid according to the method followed by
Professor Jackson in the purification of orthobrombenzylbromide.f
The distillate solidified when cooled with snow, and after removing
the oil by pressure in filter paper, it was purified by crystallization
from ligroin.

The composition of this substance was established by the following
analyses : —

I. 0.1994 grm. of the substance gave 0.3945 grm. Ag Br -|- Ag I.
II. 0.2793 grm. of the substance gave 0.3945 grm. Ag Br -|- Ag I.
III. 0.3246 grm. of the substance gave 0.3350 grm. CO2 and 0.0674
grm. Hp.

Calculated for C^H^Brl. Found.

I. II. III.

c

28.28

H

2.02

Br + I

69.68

28.16
2.30

69.53 69.11

Orthoiodbenzylbromide is readily soluble in ether, hot alcohol, benzol,
carbonic disulphide, and chloroform. It is nearly, if not quite, insolu-
ble in water, and very sparingly soluble in cold ligroin. From a cold
saturated solution in ligroin it crystallizes in flattened prisms often 2 or
3 centimeters in length. AVhen crystallization takes place from a hot
solution it appears in the form of short thick prisms. The vapor of
this substance affects the mucous membrane in the same way as that

* Kekulc, Beriehte der deutsch. cliem. Gesellsch. 1874, 1007.
t These Proceedings, Vol. XII. p. 217.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 105

of all the benzyl compounds thus far examined, and it seems to be far
more volatile than the corresponding para compound. It melts at
52-.53°, and at higher temjieraturcs sublimes slowly in oily drops
which soon solidify iu radiating needles. By oxidation with dilute
nitric acid it is converted into an acid which melts at 150-155°.
Since the orthoiodbenzoic acid obtained by Kekule* from orthoiodtoluol
melted at 155-156°, our product without doubt has the same compo-
sition.

As a further proof of the constitution of orthoiodbenzylbromide
we made the uitril, and from it orthoiodalphatoluic acid. To form the
nitril the bromide was boiled with an alcoholic solution of potassic
cyanide. The oily liquid precipitated by the addition of water was
heated to 125° for four hours with fuming hydrochloric acid. When
cold the oil solidified, and more of the acid separated from the solution
in long needles. After removing the excess of hydrochloric acid, the
crude product was purified by crystallization from hot water.

Orthoiodalphatoluic acid crystallizes in fine felted needles which are
sparingly soluble in cold, readily soluble in hot water and in alcohol,
ether, carbonic disulphide, and ligroin. With the limited amount of
material at our disposal we were unable to raise the melting point
above 95-90°. It would seem, however, from the analogy of the
orthobromalphatoluic acid that the melting point of our acid should
be somewhat higher. When we return to this subject and have access
to a larger supply of the acid, its melting point will be more carefully
tested. The silver salt of this acid was made by adding argentic
nitrate to an aqueous solution of the ammonium salt. It separated
from the solution as a curdy precipitate which was but slightly soluble
in water, readily soluble iu dilute nitric acid. For analysis it was dried
over sulphuric acid.

0.2615 grm. of the salt gave by precipitation with HCl 0.1008 grm.
AgCl.

Calculated for C^HJCOOAg. Found.

Ag 29.27 29.00

We also submitted the bromide to the action of alchoholic ammonia ;
but as the result of one experiment with a small quantity of substance
we succeeded in isolating only the primary amine. The product of
this reaction was treated with water, and the aqueous solution evaporated
on the water bath. Upon the addition of sodic hydrate the free base

* Berichte der deutscli. chem. Gesellsch. 1874, 1007.

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

was partially precipitated as an oily liquid, and more of the oil was
obtaiued by extracting" the solution with ether. The residue left by
evaporation of the ether was immediately converted into the carbonate
by absorbing carbonic dioxide from the air. It was dissolved in
alcohol, a little hydrochloric acid added, and the platinum salt formed
by the addition of chlorplatinic acid. This salt crystallized in pale
yellow microscopic prisms, which were sparingly soluble in water and
cold alcohol, readily in hot, and insoluble in ether. It was purified by
recrystallization from hot alcohol, washed with ether, and dried over
sulphuric acid for analysis.

0.2082 grm. of the salt gave on ignition 0.0468 grm. platinum.

Calculated for (C7lIJNH3)2PtCl6 . Found.

Pt 22.48 22.48

Since our work was interrupted by the closing of the summer term,
a more complete examination of the derivatives of orthoiodbenzyl-
bromide must be reserved for another paper.

CHLORTEIBROMPROPIOKIC ACID.
Charles F. Mabery and H. C. Weber.

The formation of chlortribrompropionic acid by the action of bro-
mine on chlorbromacrylic acid has been mentioned in a previous paper
by R. Lloyd and one of us.* Although this reaction took place with-
out difficulty in a chloroform solution at ordinary temperatures, the
product proved to consist in great part of an oil which could not be
made to crystallize. With the hope of obtaining a more satisfactory
yield we tried the action of undiluted bromine at a higlier tempera-
ture. Chlorbromacrylic acid, melting point 68-70°, with a slight
excess over the calculated weight of bromine, was heated to 100° for
two hours in a closed tube. The excess of bromine was removed by
spontaneous evaporation from the product, which was purified by pres-
sure between folds of filter paper and crystallization from carbonic
disulphide. By this method from 6.5 grms. chlorbromacrylic acid we
obtained 8.5 grms. essentially pure chlortribrompropionic acid, or about
seventy per cent of the theoretical amount.

This acid is readily soluble in ether and alcohol, less soluble in cold
than in hot carbonic disulphide and chloroform. In contact with water

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. p. 240.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 107

it forms an oil which does not solidify at 0°. From carbonic disulphide
or chloroform it crystallizes by slow evaporation in oblique prisms of
the triclinic system which melt at 102-103°. lu the analysis of this
substance the following results were obtained : —

I. 0.1582 grm. of the substance gave by the method of Carius,

0.3234 grm. AgCl + AgBr.
II. 0.1582 grm. of the substance gave 0.3251 grm. AgCl -|- AgBr.

III. 0.9373 grm. of the substance gave 1.9049 grm. AgCl -j- AgBr.

1.9003 grm. AgCl + AgBr gave 1.1568 grm. Ag.*

IV. 0.8096 grm. of the substance gave 0.3065 grm. CO^ and 0.0631

grm. up.

Calculated

for Call^CIBrsO, .

Found.

I.

II. III.

IV.

c

10.42

10.32

H

.58

.87

CI + 3 Br

79.75 79.58

80.00

CI

10.28)
69.47 1 79.75

9.62 1
69.74 1

Br

79.36

The barium, calcium, and potassium salts of this acid were made
and analyzed.

Baric chlortrihrompropionate Ba(CgHClBr302)2.

To form the barium salt a solution of the acid was neutralized with
baric carbonate and baric hydrate, filtered, and concentrated by spon-
taneous evaporation at the ordinary temperature. The salt crystallized
in slender oblique prisms which were quite soluble in cold water.
The air-dried salt was constant when heated to 80°.

I. 0.6933 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave on ignition with HgSO^

0.1920 grm. BaSO^.
II. 0.6440 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave 0.1793 grm. BaSO^ .

Calculated for Ba( C3HClBr30.2).2 . Found.

I. n.

Ba 16.59 16.26 16.37

* This determination was made with the aid of the excellent method devised
by Mr. L. P. Kinnicutt. (These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. p. 91.)

108

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The solubility of this salt we determined by the method of V.
Meyer. A saturated solution was kept at 20° for three hours, filtered,
evaporated to dryness, and the residue ignited with sulphuric acid.

I. 1.8400 grm. solution gave 0.0977 grm. BaSO^.
11. 0.892G grm. solution gave 0.0470 grm. BaSO^ .

These results correspond to the percentages : —

I. II.

18.82 18.66

Calcic chlortrihrompropionate Ca(C3HClBr302)2 .

To prepare the calcium salt we neutralized a solution of the acid
with calcic carbonate and calcic hydrate, and allowed the filtered solu-
tion to evaporate spontaneously. From the concentrated solution the
salt separated in clustered needles, which, when air-dried, were constant
at 80°.

1.0691 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave on ignition with HgSO^
0.1883 grm. CaSO^ .

Calculated for Ca(C3HClBr302)2 •
Ca 5.49

Found.
5.25

Potassic chlortribrompropionate KCgHClBrgOj

H^O.

The potassium salt was made by neutralizing a solution of the acid
with potassic carbonate and evaporating at the ordinary temperature.
This salt crystallized in rhombic prisms which are freely soluble in
cold water. It contained one molecule of crystal water which was
given up over sulphuric acid.

I. 1.0688 grm. air-dried salt gave 0.0502 grm. H.O.
II. 1.0428 grm. air-dried salt gave 0.0490 grm. H^O.
III. 0.9802 grm. of the anhydrous salt gave 0.2201 grm. K2SO4.

Calculated for KCsHClBfaOi ,

.H2O.

Found.
I. II.

H2O 4.48

4.70 4.72

Calculated for KCgHClBraOa

Found.
III.

K 10.20

10.08

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 109

The silver salt of this acid proved to be so unstable that vfe did not
succeed in preparing it in a form sulRcicntly pure for analysis. On
the addition of argentic nitrate to an aqueous solution of the acid,
even in the cold it immediately became turbid from the separation of
argentic chloride.

Although the barium salt is comparatively stable, we found that it
was slowly decomposed when heated iu aqueous solution. In order to
identify the products of this decomposition, the acid was distilled with
an excess of baric hydrate. The distillate was caught in bromine
water, the excess of bromine allowed to evaporate, and the solution
extracted with ether. The oily residue left by evaporation of the
ether solidified at 0", and possessed an odor characteristic of the sub-
stituted ethans. It would seem probable, therefore, that the volatile
product of this decomposition was tribromethylen ; but it was formed
in such small quantity that further study was rendered extremely
difficult. The residue in the retort contained baric chloride in abun-
dance, but it gave no reaction for baric bromide. The formation of
tribromacrylic acid is thus rendered extremely probable ; but the resi-
due unfortunately was lost before it could be subjected to a more
critical examination. Since the summer term soon after closed, we
were unable to repeat our work, and it must therefore be reserved for
future study.

Chlorbromacrylic acid forms also an addition-product with hydro-
bromic acid. When it is heated to 100° in a closed tube with concen-
trated hydrobromic acid, an acid is formed which melts at 80°. Further
study of this substance, which is probably chlordibrompropionic acid,
will be postponed for the present.

110

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

IX.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORATORY OF
HARVARD COLLEGE.

ON CERTAIN SUBSTANCES OBTAINED FROM TUR-
MERIC. — I. CURCUMIN.

By C. Lorixg Jackson and A. E. Menke.

Presented December 14, 1881.

The chemical study of curcumin, the yellow coloring matter of tur-
meric, dates from a paper * by A. Vogel, Sr., and Pelletier, published
in 1815, although even before this turmeric-paper had been used as
a test for alkalies, and its action with boric acid and various salts
observed.f No analysis is given in this paper, and the low melting-
point (40°) and description of the method of preparation show that
the "yellow coloring-matter of turmeric" obtained by A'^ogel and
Pelletier was principally composed of resin and turmeric oil ; they
proved, however, that it contained no nitrogen, and studied its action
with alkalies, acids, and certain salts, especially acetate of lead.

In 1842 A. Vogel, Jr.,t analysed a similar but perhaps somewhat
purer preparation, which, however, must have consisted in great part of
the yellow resin contained in the root, as it also melted at 40° ; it is
not wonderful, therefore, that his analyses led to no formula.

Passing over a number of unimportant notices,§ we come next to a

* Journal de Pharmacie, i. p. 280.

t TrommsdorfF, Tromnisdorff's Journal von Pharm., xvi. p. 96. Sementini,
Bibliothuque Britanniquo, Jan. 1815.

t Journ. de Pharm. et de Chim., sdr. 3, ii. p. 20.

§ Desfosses, Ann. Chim. Phys., xvi. p. 7G; A. Vogel, Jr., Report. Pharm.,
se'r. 3, iii. p. 178 ; H. Rose, Pogg. Ann., cii. p. 545 ; Lepage, Archiv der
Pharm., Ser. 2, xcvii. p. 240; Leube, Vicrteljalirssclir. pr Pharm., ix. 395;
Alex. Miiller, J. pr. Chem. Ixxx. p. 119 ; Wittstein, Vierteljalirssclir. pr. Pharm.,
ix. p. 282; Schutzenherger, Paraf. Mul. Soc. Bull., 1861, p. 503; Ludwig, Archiv
der Pharm., cvi. p. 109; Kraut, Zeitschr. anal. Chem., iv. p. 168.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. Ill

paper by Schlumberger,* in which the action of a mixture of sulphuric
and boric acids on crude curcumin is studied, and a description given
of ihe product called by him rosocyanin, because it dissolved in
alcohol with a fine red color, and was turned blue by alkalies. lie
also describes a resinous product of the action of boric acid on curcumin
(pseudocurcumin).

Two years later, in 18G8, Bolley, Suida, and Lange t examined the
turmeric oil, and published a new analysis of a purer curcumin (melt-
ing-point 120°) ; but it was not till 1870 that curcumin was obtained
essentially pure. In this year Daube,^ Ivanow-Gajewsky,§ and
Kachler || published independent papers on the subject, of which
Ivanow-Gajewsky's is entitled to the precedence, as the number of the
Beilin Berichte which contained Daube's original paper gave a notice
in the Correspondence of the reading of Gajewsky's paper before the
Russian Chemical Society a month earlier. In addition to an analysis
of the turmeric oil, he assigns, as the simplest possible, the formula
C^II^O to curcumin, which after crystallization from ether or benzin
melted at 172°. Daube, on the other hand, after extracting his curcumin
with benzol, and purifying it by conversion into the lead salt, obtained
the melting-point 165°, and the formula Cj^Hj^Oj. He also found
that it was decolorized by sodium amalgam and alcohol, and converted
into oxalic acid by dilute nitric acid.

Kachler, who did not succeed in crystallizing his curcumin, although
both Ivanow-Gajewsky and Daube got crystals, obtained the same
formula as the former, that is, C^II^O, or some multiiile of it. He also
studied the action of sodium amalgam upon it, and that of hot zinc
dust, but with no very definite results in either case ; whereas by fusing
curcumin with potassic hydrate, he obtained protocatechuic acid. From
the turmeric oil he obtained essentially the same analytical results as
Ivanow-Gajewsky.

In 1872 Ivanow-Gajewsky published a second paper 1[ on turmeric,
containing another method for extracting curcumin, which, however,
gave it a melting-point of 140°, and an analysis of the lead salt sup-
porting his formula C]6H,gO, (= (CJI^O)J. Moreover he confirmed
the results of Kachler with fusing potassic hydrate (protocatechuic
acid) and zinc dust, and states that the oil obtained with the latter is
identical with turmeric oil, of which a new analysis is given, and its

* Bull. Soc. Cliim. ser. 2, v. p. 194. § Ibid., 1870, p. 624.

t J. pr. Cliem., ciil. p. 474. || Ibid., 1870, p. 713.

t Ber. d. ch. G., 1870, p. 609. 1[ Ber. d. ch. G., 1872, p. 1103.

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

oxidation (yielding valeric and caproic acids) and action with phos-
phoric pentachloride studied. He also prepared and analysed roso-
cyanin, but was unable to find a satisfactory formula, for it.

Finally, in 1873, he published the last paper* we have been able to
find on this suliject, in which he states that curcumiu yields on oxida-
tion with potassic dichromate terephthalic acid, and that rosocyanin con-
tains no boron, and, fused with potassic hydrate, yields jmraoxybenzoic
acid.

In brief, the following facts had been established in regard to cur-
curain at the time that we began our research upon it: — Its formula
was either C^Jrl^^O^ or CjgHjgO^ ; the highest melting-point observed
was 172° ; with alkalies it formed reddish-brown salts; with boric and
sulphuric acids rosocyanin ; it was susceptible of reduction, and gave an
oil with zinc dust ; by oxidation it yielded oxalic acid or terephthalic
acid, and by fusion with caustic potash protocatechuic acid.

Accordingly we first turned our attention to the determination of
its formula.

Extraction and Purification of Curcumiu.

After several experiments we have adopted the following method
as the best and most convenient : — The turmeric oil is first removed
from the ground root by treatment with ligroine ; | then the curcurpin,
mixed with a large quantity of resin, is extracted with ether, and
finally purified by crystallization from alcohol.

The turmeric v;sed by us has been principally Bengal turmeric,
bought of Messrs E. and F. King, of Boston; we have, however, also
extracted enough of the Madras turmeric, the only other brand occur-
ring in the Boston market, to assure ourselves of the identity of the
curcumiu obtained from both.

For a full description and history of turmeric, which consists of the
root-stocks of the Curcuma longa^ a plant of the ginger family, grow-
ing in India and other parts of the East, we would refer to Fliickiger
and Hanbury's Pharmacographia,$ and to a full botanical article
recently published by A. Meyer § in the Archiv der Pharmacie.

* Ber. d. ch. G., 1873, p. 196.

t In our first experiments we followed Ivanow-Gajewsky, and used carbonic
disulphide for this purpose ; but we liave found that hgroine is not only much
cheaper and more agreeable to work with, but yields a purer oil.

I Macmiilan and Co., London, 1879.

§ Arch, riiarm. Ser. 3, xviii. p. 401.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 113

The extraeter was of the form recently described by Scheibler,* as
tliis was the only one of which we have found a description adapted
to the thorough extraction of large quantities of material ; those
forms in which the drug is not kept covered with the extracting
liquid being apt to leave the edges partially unacted on. The only
moililication of Scheibler's apparatus made by us consisted in substi-
tuting a cylindrical tin vessel capable of holding 10 kil. of ground
turmeric for the smaller glass vessel used by him. With a cooler
78 cm. long, the inner tube of which was a flattened U, also made of
tin, the thorough extraction of the 10 kil. of turmeric could be accom-
plished in little more than a fortnight. The solvent was removed,
after it had ceased to act, by forcing out as much as possible of it by
air pressure, and then distilling off the rest by filling with steam a
jacket which surrounded the vessel containing the turmeric.

The ligroine extract yielded on evaporation a dark yellow oil,
amounting on the average to eleven per cent of the weight of the root.
The investigation of this substance will be described in a later paper.

The ether extract, a reddish-brown mass, varying in consistency
from semi-liquid to solid according to the period of the extraction at
which it was obtained, was treated with successive small quantities of
cold alcohol, which dissolved the viscous impurities more easily than
the curcumin. In very obstinate cases washing with ether was found
advantageous ; if, on the other hand, the extract was comparatively
free from resin, it could be washed with alcohol upon a filter. In either
case the residue was purified by reciystallization from alcohol until ,it
showed the constant melting-point 178°.

The average yield of curcumin was 0.3 of one per cent : this, how-
ever, is only the amount that can be extracted by the process just
described; the quantity contained in the root is much larger, as a con-
siderable amount remained mixed with the resinous impurities,
and the green fluorescence of the crude turmeric oil pointed to the
presence of some curcumin in this substance.

Composition of Curcumin.

The following comi)ustions were made of the curcumin purified as
just described and dried at 100^. In most of these analyses a slight
ash was left, the amount of which has been subtracted from the weight
of substance before calculating the percentages.

* Ber. d. ch. G. 1880, p. 338.

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 8

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

I. 0.1106 gr. of substance gave 0.2774 gr. of CO^ and 0.05G3 gr.

of up. No ash.
II. 0.2180 gr. gave 0.5450 gr. of CO^ and 0.1099 gr. of 11,0. Ash
0.0007 gr.

III. 0.2149 gr. gave 0.5376 gr. of CO.^ and 0.1090 gr. of Up.

Ash 0.0006 gr.

IV. 0.2195 gr. gave 0.5480 gr. of CO, and 0.1099 gr. of H^O.

Ash. 0.0006 gr.
V. 0.2743 gr. gave 0.6815 gr. of CO2 and 0.1378 gr. of Up.
Ash 0.0010 gr.

I. II. III. IV. V. Mean.

Carbon 68.43 68.39* 68.42* 68.27* 68.00* 68.30
Hydrogen 5.65 5.62 5.69 5.59 5.60 5.63

All these analyses were made with curcumin from Bengal turmeric:
I. and II. of different portions of the same sample, III., IV., and V.
of different samples.

The following analysis was made of curcumin extracted from
Madras turmeric : —

0.3467 gr. gave 0.8612 gr. of CO, and 0.1870 gr. of H,0. No ash.

Carbon 67.74

Hydrogen 5.99

The sample analysed was very red, and the somewhat lower per-
centage of carbon obtained was undoubtedly due to the presence of an
impurity which causes the curcumin to crystallize in red burrs, as is
shown by the following analysis of a very red sample of Bengal cur-
cumin: —

0.2168 gr. of substance gave 0.5400 gr. of CO, and 0.1057 gr. of
H,0. No ash.

Carbon 67.93

Hydrogen 5.42

* These numbers become, if the ash is not subtracted from the weight of the
substance : —

II.
Carbon 68.17

Hydrogen 5.60

III.

IV.

V.

68.23

68.00

67.75

6.64

5.50

5.58

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 115

It is to be observeil, however, that enough of this impurity to change
the crystalline habit and color of the curcumia has but a very slight
effect on the percentage composition, and, it may be added, does not
lower the melting-point more than one degree. That it is formed by
the oxidation of curcumin by the action of the air, appears from the
fact that pure yellow curcumin was partially converted into red burrs
when moistened with alcohol and exposed to the air for a long time.
When once formed, the impurity can be removed only by repeated
crystallization, and the amount of Madras curcumin at our disposal
did not admit of this, nor did we take the trouble to prepare a larger
supply, as the above analysis with the melting-point 178° is sufficient
to establish the identity of the Madras and Bengal curcumins.

The following comparison shows that our results agree tolerably
well with those of Daube, but are entirely at variance with those of
Kachler and Ivanow-Gajewsky. (As no analyses are given in the
abstract of the latter's article, which alone is at our disposal, we have
given the theory for his formula, C^gH^gO^, under his name.)

Jackson
and Menke
Mean
67.92 68.30
5.70 5.63

There are, then, eight analyses of curcumin, which support a percent-
age of carbon in the neighborhood of 68 against three (or more) in
favor of one near 70.*

It is probable that the high results obtained by Ivanow-Gajewsky
and Kachler were due to the presence of resinous impurities, since
their predecessors, who analysed exceedingly impure curcumin, as
shown by the low melting-point, obtained the following results.

Ivanow-

Gajewsky

Kachler

Daube

Carbon 70.58

69.90 69.87

67.90 67.89

Hydrogen 5.90

5.70 5.59

5.66 5.76

A. Vogel, Jr.

Bolley, Suida, and Lange

Carbon

69.50

69.07

Hydrogen

7.46

6.40

This view is further supported by tJie fact that we obtained a higher
melting-point, 178°, than anyone else; Daube found 165°, Ivanow-
Gajewsky 172°, later 140°, while Kachler gives no melting-point,

* Ivanow-Gajewsky obtained a percentage of lead in a plumbic salt agree-
mg with his combustion ; but tliis result is more than counterbalanced by the
analyses of derivatives of curcumin given later in this paper.

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

and did not succeed in obtaining his ciircumiri crystallized. In view
of these facts we feel no hesitation in rejecting all the previous analy-
tical results except those of Daube.

Daube gives curcumin the formula Cj,jTIj,j03, but our results, and
for that matter his, agree much better with the formula C^JI^^O^, as
appears from the following comparison : —

^10 "10^3

C14H14O4

Daube

Jackson & Menke

Carbon

67.42

68.29

67.90

68.30

Hydrogen

5.62

5.69

5.70

5.63

We have therefore adopted the formula Cj^H^^O^, which is also con-
firmed by the analyses of derivatives of curcumin to be given later
in the papier.

Properties of Curcumin.

Curcumin crystallizes from alcohol in stout needles, which under
the microscope appear as well-formed prisms with square ends, or
spindle-shaped crystals, often arranged in radiating groups ; iu color
i*t is orange to yellow, according to the size of the crystals, with a
beautiful blue reflex ; its solution in ether exhibits a very strong
green fluorescence ; when pure it has no odor ; it melts at 178'^, appar-
ently with decomposition.* It is nearly insoluble in water, somewhat
soluble in cold, more readily in hot alcohol and methyl alcohol, more
soluble in glacial acetic acid than in alcohol, less so in ether, very
slightly soluble in benzol f and carbonic disulphide, and essentially
insoluble in ligroine. Strong sulphuric acid dissolves it with a fine
reddish-purple color, which changes to black from charring after some
time ; strong hydrochloric acid produces the same effect, but with more
difficulty. It is readily soluble in alkalies and alkaline caibonates, and
is even dissolved to a slight extent when boiled with precipitated
calcic carbonate and water. The solution in amnionic hydrate loses
ammonia when boiled, and deposits unaltered curcnmin. A solution
of baric hydrate converts it into a blackish-red powder, but lime-water
gives a red solution like that obtained from calcic carbonate. It is not
affected by acid sodic sulphite.

* Daube found 1G4° ; Gajewsky, 172^ or 140^.
t Compare Daube, Ber. d. eh. G. 1870, p. G09.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 117

Salts of Curcumin.

In taking up the study of this subject we were at first attracted
to the lead salt by the analyses and descriptions of Ivanow-Gajewsky
and Daube ; but, after several experiments, we decided that it was too
indefinite a substance to throw much liglit upon the nature of cur-
cumin, and accordingly turned our attention to the potassium salts,
which at first did not seem promising, but on proper treatment have
yielded satisfactory results. Before describing these, however, we
will say, that there seem to be at least two lead salts, as we have
obtained a dark claret precipitate and also a flame-colored one.
The most [)romising method of preparation seemed to be boiling cur-
cumin witli precipitated calcic carbonate and water, and adding
plumbic acetate to the filtrate ; in this way the flame-colored salt was
obtained.

A\'e liave succeeded in obtaining two potassium salts, containing one
and two atoms of potassium respectively.

Dipotassic Salt of Curcumin ICjCj^Hj.^O^.

This was made by adding a large excess of a strong alcoholic solu-
tion of potassic hydrate to a hot saturated solution of curcumin in alco-
hol ; if the solutions are strong enough, flame-colored crystals of the
salt are deposited on cooling; if this is not the case, it can be precipi-
tated by addition of ether. If an insufficient amount of potassic
hydrate is used, a dark red solution of the monopotassic salt is formed,
which becomes lighter on the addition of more potassic hydrate as
the second atom of potassium is taken up. The salt was crystallized
from boiling alcohol to vvhicli a few drops of ether had been added,
washed with a mixture of alcohol and ether, then with ether alone,
pressed on filter-paper, and dried as rapidly as possible in a steam-
drying closet containing some potassic hydrate.

0.71 G8 gr. of the salt gave, heated with sulphuric acid, 0.3824 gr. of

lv,SO,.
0.2675 gr. gave 0.1 4o9 gr. of ICSO^.

Calculated for CiiHjoKoO^ Found.

Potassium 24.27 23.95 24.48

If curcumin had the formula CigHuO^ the dipotassic salt would

contain,

Potassium 22.46.

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The salt consists when first formed of flame-colored needles in
globular radiating groups, but becomes deep claret on drying. It is
freely soluble in water, not quite so soluble in alcohol, and essentially
insoluble in ether ; the alcoholic solution takes on a magenta color
when exposed to the air, and the salt seems to absorb carbonic diox-
ide readily, although the change of color was more probably due to
oxidation.

Monopotassic Salt of Curcumin KCj^HjgO^

If an excess of potassic carbonate is added to a hot solution of cur-
cumin in absolute alcohol, there is a violent effervescence, and the
liquid turns deep blood red. After slight concentration the excess of
potassic carbonate was removed by filtration, the salt precipitated with
ether, and purified by washing with ether. An attempt to crystallize
it from a mixture of alcohol and ether gave no satisfactory result.
Pressed between filter-paper, and then dried at 100°, it gave the
following results : —

I. 0.4808 gr. of the salt gave after ignition with sulphuric acid

0.1540 gr. of K,,SO,.
11. 0.5381 gr. of the salt gave 0.1680 gr. of K^SO,.

Calculated for KC14H13O4 Found.

I. II.

Potassium 13.76 14.36 14.02

KCjeHijO^ contains 12.60 per cent of potassium.

The salt is precipitated in crimson black flocks, which dry to a mass
having the green color and lustre of rosanilin, although the shade is
somewhat blacker. It is very easily soluble in water and alcohol,
giving blood-red solutions, but insoluble in ether, and does not seem
to be altered by exposure to the air. It can also be made by the
action of an excess of curcumin on the dipotassic salt, or by adding
potassic hydrate not in excess to curcumin suspended in alcohol. It
is very much more soluble than the dipotassic salt.

Curcumin forms also a flame-colored calcium salt, slightly soluble in
water, which can be made by adding calcic chloride to a solution of
the monopotassic salt. The same salt is formed in small quantity
when calcic carbonate is boiled with curcumin and water or alcohol,
carbonic dioxide beinfj set free.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 119

The ziucic salt seems to be soluble, the baric salt insoluble,* while
the silver salt is probably very unstable, as curcumin is decomposed
when boiled tor more than a minute with argentic nitrate and alcohol.

The fact that only one atom of the hydrogen contained in curcumin
can be replaced by the potassium of potassic carbonate would point to
the existence of one, and only one, carboxyl group in its molecule ;
the presence of this group is confirmed farther by the power of de-
composing calcic carbonate possessed by curcumin, f The replace-
ment of a second atom of hydrogen when curcumin is treated with
potassic hydrate in excess indicates the existence of a hydroxyl group,
probably a phenol hydroxyl, and it would seem, therefore, that curcu-
min is a diatomic monobasic acid.

JEsters of Curcumin.

Although the analyses of the potassium salts had agreed with the
formula of curcumin derived from the analysis of the original sub-
stance, it seemed desirable to confirm this formula still farther by the
study of some derivative of curcumin more stable and easily handled
than the salts ; we accordingly took up the investigation of the esters,
but found that the ethyl ester made by the action of ethyliodide on
the dipotassic salt was a disagreeable brownish-black tarry substance,
that could not be obtained in a crystalline condition. We therefore
abandoned the stud}' of this substance and turned our attention to the
monopai-abrombenzyl ester, which we preferred to the benzyl ester, in
the first place because of the great tendency of the parabrombenzyl
compounds to crystallize, and secondly, since the presence of bromine
increased the difference between the percentages of carbon in the two
formulas by more than five tenths of one per cent, and also gave a
third element whose quantity could be determined.

Monoparabromhenzyl Ester of Curcumin C^^Hj3(Cj.HgBr)0^.

To an alcoholic solution of the monopotassic salt of curcumin an
excess of parabrombenzylbromide was added, and the mixture allowed

* As our work on the potassium salts had achieved the end for which we
undertook tlie study of tlie salts of ourcuniin, we tliought it not worth wiiiie
to purify any of the otlier salts for analysis.

t Some experiments on the action of phosphorous trichloride upon mono-
ethylcurcumin confirmed the presence of a carboxyl group, as far as they went,
but the product was too ill-defined to repay a thorough study.

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

to stand for several days, when it was found that pale yellow crystals
mixed with potassic bromide had been deposited ; the dark-colored
liquid was poured off, and the solid residue freed from parabi'omben-
zylbromide by repeated treatment with hot ligroine, and from cui-cumin
by boiling with successive portions of aqueous potassic carbonate,
until it ceased to give a red solution. The essentially inire ester thus
obtained was boiled several times with alcohol, which dissolved a
small portion of it, while the residue melted to a reddish-black tar;
upon dissolving this in glacial acetic acid and precipitating with water,
yellowish flocks were thrown down, the melting-point of which was
compared with that of the similarly-colored indistinct crystals obtained
by cooling the alcoholic extract. As both these substances melted,
or, more accurately, drew together, at the same temperature, the ester
seemed to be essentially pure, and after drying at 50°-60° was
analysed.

I. 0.1796 gr. of substance gave 0.3980 gr. of CO^ and 0.0817 gr.

of H,0.
II. 0.2506 gr. of substance gave according to Carius 0.1156 gr. of
AgBr.

Found. Calculated for

Ci4Hi3(C,H,Br)0, Ci6H,,(C,HeBr)04

Carbon 60.43 60.72 62.58

Hydrogen 5.05 4.57 4.76

Bromine 19.63 19.26 18.14

From these results there can be no doubt that Cj^Hj^O^ is the true
formula of curcumin.

The ester consists of indistinct crystals, grouped in forms like
cauliflowers, of a much paler yellow color than curcumin ; it mt_dts at
7G°-78°, beginning to draw together at 76°, and becoming thoroughly
liquid at 78°; we have not succeeded in obtaining it with a perfectly
sharp melting-point. It is more soluble in glacial acetic acid than in
alcohol, nevertheless the latter is to be preferred as a solvent for obtain-
ing crystals, since the substance is apt to separate from the hot glacial
acetic acid in a fused tarry condition. It is readily soluble in ether
and benzol, but does not crystallize well from these solvents ; slightly
soluble in carbonic disulphide ; essentially insoluble in ligroine ; not
attacked by a solution of potassic carbonate, but soluble in potassic
hydrate, although without the red color characteristic of curcumin.
As the analysis of this ester establishes our formula, we have not
continued the study of the esters.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 121

Oxidation of Cur cumin.

Our experiments on this subject can be divided into two classes,
those in wiiich we made a complete oxidation of the substance, aud
those in whicli a partial oxidation was obtained by using au insufficient
amount of the oxi(lizin<f airent, or one less ener<i;etic.

CumpU'te Oxidation. — As Ivanow-Gajewsky states that he obtained
terephthulic acid by the action of jjotassic dichromate and sulphuric acid
on cnrcuinin, we turned our attention first to this experiment. Un-
fortunately only an abstract of his paper is accessible to us, so that we
ciitild not liud the exact conditions ol" his oxidation ; we have tliere-
fure varied the conditions in several ways, but always with the same
result. It will be sufficient to describe a single experiment. Half a
gramme of curcumin was mixed with sulpliuric acid previously diluted
with its own volume of water, and solid potassic dichromate added ;
the action was extremely violent, accomj^anied by great evolution of
heat and strong- effervescence ; the gas given off was carbonic dioxide.
At the end of the process there was no 'insoluble substance in the
licpiid, which was therefore distilled until it was reduced to a small
volume. The strongly acid distillate, treated with argentic oxide, after
filtering and concentration deposited long flattened needles, which
looked exactly like argentic acetate, and were proved to consist of this
substance by the following silver determination : —

0.1812 gr. of salt dried at 100° gave 0.1559 gr. of AgCl.

Calculated for AgCoH^Oo Found.

Silver G4.68 ' " 64.76

There was no other volatile acid in the distillate, and no organic
matter could be found in residue from the distillation. If the action
was moderated by using more dilute sulphuric acid, the phenomena
were the same, except that it was necessary to start the reaction by the
aid of heat. In none of the products of the oxidation of curcumin
with potassic dichromate could any terephthalic acid be found, they
consisted only of acetic acid and carbonic dioxide.

If curcumin is dropped into fuming nitric acid it dissolves with a
hissing noise and formation of nitrous fumes and hydrocyanic acid.
The red liquid thus obtained gave no precipitate with water; on evap-
oration it deposited brownish crystals, principally oxalic acid, but it
was not further examined. In this respect we confirm the resuhs of
Daube, who also obtained oxalic acid from curcumin and nitric acid.

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Incomplete Oxidation. — When curcumin was dissolved in aqueous
potassic hydrate, a solution of potassic permanganate added, not in
excess, and after the oxidation had ceased, the liquid acidified with
sulphuric acid, a strong smell of vanilla was observed. The liquid
was accordingly filtered, and the precipitate thoroughly washed with
boilino- water, the filtrate and wash-water extracted with ether, and
the extract treated with acid sodic sulphite, as directed by Tiemann
and Haarmann.* The product was an oil, having a strong smell of
vanilla and gradually solidifying in circular groups of radiating
needles ; the amount, however, was extremely small, and none of this
product was obtained with an excess of potassic permanganate or
when the quantity of curcumin was much more than half a gramme.
The same substance was obtained with various weak oxidizing agents,
such as bleaching powder and water, potassic ferricyanide with potassic
hydrate, and even the action of atmospheric oxygen on curcumin dis-
solved in potassic hydrate. Of these the mixture of potassic hydrate
and potassic ferricyanide gave the best yield, but even this was ex-
tremely small, — in fact after uniting the product from all the oxida-
tions made by us, in which over eight grammes of curcumin were used,
the quantity was not enough for complete purification. By sublimation,
however, and subsequent crystallization from boiling water, it was
obtained in white needles resembling in appearance and odor the
vanillin from the vanilla-bean and melting at 79". Vanillin melts at
80°-81°.

In addition to the vanillin there were formed carbonic dioxide, a
black amorphous substance with feebly acid properties, perhaps the
aldehyd resin of vanillin, as it appeared in largest quantity when no
vanillin was obtained, and an acid volatile with steam. We have not
as yet made any complete study of these secondary products, because
the properties of the humus-like substance are far from inviting, and
the amount of the volatile acid is so minute that its isolation in quan-
tity sufficient for analysis would be extremely laborious. We shall,
however, return to these substances if we fail in finding easier methods
for studying the nature of the side-chain.

As the small yield of vanillin was undoubtedly due to the presence
of the phenol hydroxyl, which ofi'ered a point of attack for the oxidiz-
ing mixture, we next tried to increase our yield by replacing the
hydroxyl hydrogen with some radical which would protect it from
oxidation, and in this way not only prove that the substance was really

* Ber. d. cli. G. 1875, p. 1115.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 123

vanillin, but also that it was one of the principal products of the oxi-
dation. For this purpose we first tried to make acetylcurcumiu by
treating curcumin with acetylchloride : this gave a deep biuish-greeu
liquid, which on standing turned brown, and then yielded on addition
of water a yellowish precipitate which could not be obtained in crys-
tals, its solutions forming on evaporation a dark-colored varnibh.
With acetic anhydride no better results were obtained, and as there
seemed no prospect of getting a good analysis of the substance, it
was at once oxidized with potassic permauyanate. The result was nut
essentially better than that obtained with pure curcumin, and we
accordingly turned our attention to the oxidation of diethylcurcumiii,
which was made by boiling the dipotassic salt with absolute alcohol
and a slight excess of cthyliodide for six hours in a flask with a
return cooler. On distilling off part of the alcohol and allowing the
rest to evaporate spontaneously, the compound is left as a most unin-
viting brownish-black tar, which when heated with sodic hydrate dis-
solves with a dark red color resembling that of the alkaline solution
of curcumin. Upon treating this solution with potassic permanganate
until -it was decolorized, filtering from manganic hydrate, and acidify-
ing with sulphuric acid, a yellowish precipitate was obtained, which
after two crystallizations from boiling water with bone-black melted at
195°, the melting-point given by Wassermann* for ethylvanillic acid
(Tiemanu t gives 193°-194°).

The nature of the substance was still further confirmed by the fol-
lowing combustion : —

0.1216 gr. of substance gave 0.2714 gr. of CO^ and 0.0707 gr. of

up.

Calculated for C10H12O4 Found.

Carbon 61.22 60.87

Hydrogen . 6.12 6.46

There can be no doubt, therefore, that the substance is ethylvanillic
acid, and it was formed in such quantity that it must be considered one
of the principal products of the reaction. If the potassic permanga-
nate was not added in excess, and the liquid extracted with ether,
crystals of ethylvanillin were obtained, which on sublimation formed
an oil solidifying after a short time in large twinned crystals Hke those

* Ann. Cliom. Plmrm. 179, p. 366.
t Ber. d. ch. G. 1875. p 1127.

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of cassiterite, and having a smell similar to that of vanillin, but not
identical with it.

Summary of Results.

The formula of curcumin is C^Jrl^fi^, as proved by analyses of cur-
cumin itself, of its potassium salts, and its parabrombenzyl ester.

It is a phenol-carboxylic acid, as shown by the study of its salts.
Tlie presence of carboxyl is indicated by its power of driving carbonic
acid out of potassic and calcic carbonates, and by the decomposition of
its diethylester on boiling with potassic hydrate. It contains the
vanillin group, and therefore its formula, as far as we have determined
it, is : —

HC (C5H5)COOH
I

H-C " CH

II I

H-C / C-O-CH3

c

I
0-H

We are at present engaged in the study of the group C5H5, and
propose to extend our investigations to rosocyaniu and the turmeric
oU.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 125

X.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE CHEMICAL LABORATORY
OF HARVARD COLLEGE.

By Hexry B. Hill.

Presented February 1, 1882.
I. Ox DiBROMACRTLIC ACID.

In a communication upon furfurol and certain of its derivatives
which I laid before the Academy a year ago, I described a dibro-
macrylic acid * which O. R. Jackson and I had some time before ob-
tained from mucobromic acid by the action of alkalies. Although we
had not been able to prepare the acid in a state of perfect purity, still
our results seemed to us sufficient for its identification, and since it
then appeared that a more extended study of it would interfere with
other investigators in the same field, further work upon it had been
for the time given up. Not long afterward it became evident that
our hesitation upon this account had been quite unnecessary ; but it
was not until recently that I was able to take up again the study of
this acid. I have now obtained results which correct our previous
observations in several important particulars.

For the preparation of the acid O. R. Jackson and I used
chiefly the barium salt, which crystallized well from water or dilute
alcohol, and which gave us constant analytical results. The air-dried
salt lost nothing in vacuo over sulphuric acid, or when heated to 80°,
and the percentage of barium which it contained agreed closely with
that required by the formula Ba(C3lIBr202)2- ^^ therefore with
little hesitation considered the salt anhydrous, and were inclined to
ascribe the slight loss of weight which we noticed at 100° to a slow
decomposition. The acid made from carefully-prepared barium salt
crystallized well, melted quite sharply at 83-84°, but on analysis

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (x. s. vni.) p. 192.

126 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

proved to contain too high a percentage of bromine. Since the acid
made from the lead salt had given us precisely the same unsatisfactory
results, we thought it probable that the impurities which were found
in the acid thus made were introduced by a decomposition of the acid
itself in its liberation from its salts. A more careful study of this
reaction subsequently convinced me, however, that such was not the
case. Certainly no carbonic dioxide, bromacetylen, or hydrobromic
acid could be detected as resulting from such decomposition when
dilute sulphuric acid was added in slight excess to a boiling aqueous
solution of the barium salt. I therefore turned my attention to a
further purification of the salts.

Since repeated recrystallization of the barium salt failed to give me
any much better product, I thought it worth while to determine the
variation of composition introduced by one set of crystallizations from
water. I therefore dissolved 30 grammes of white well-crystallized
salt (A) in 380 cc. of hot water. On cooling 6.5 grms. of the salt
(I.) separated, and by successive filtration, evaporation, and cooling
I obtained the fractions (II.) 8.9 grms., (III.) 6.9 grms., and (IV.)
4.8 grms., the remaining 2.9 grms. being lost in the filter-papers
upon which the successive portions were dried. An analysis of these
air-dried salts gave the following results : —

A. 0.5669 grm. substance gave 0.2239 grm. BaSO^.

I. 0.5713 grm. substance gave 0.2276 grm. BaSO^.

II. 0.5139 grm. substance gave 0.2036 grm. BaSO^ .

III. 0.5665 grm. substance gave 0.2231 grm. BaSO^ .

IV. 0.5003 grm, substance gave 0.1941 grm. BaSO^ .

Calculated for Calculated for

Ba(C3HBr202)2. Ba(C3HBr20o)2.H20. A.
Ba 23.03 22.35 23.21

From these results it was evident that the barium salt contained a
persistent impurity which could not be removed by fractional crys-
tallization, and that the constancy of its composition was accidental.
I next tried the beautifully crystalline acid potash salt which I have
already described,* and found that it gave results which were all that
could be desired. This salt can easily be made by neutralizing a
weighed amount of the ordinary acid melting at 82-84° with potassic

* Loc. cit. p. 194.

Found.

I. II.

III.

IV.

23.43 23.29

23.15

22.80

Found.

I.

II.

III.

69.66

69.56

69.60

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 127

carbonate, and adding to the hot solution an equal amount of the acid
dissolved in a little hot water. As the solution cools the salt separ-
ates in long silky needles, which after a few recrystallizations from hot
water yield an acid whose melting-point is constant. The loss in
recrystallization is comparatively small, since the salt is but sparingly
soluble in cold water and dissolves very freely in hot. The analyses
which I have made of the acid prepared in this way show its perfect
purity.

I. 0.2183 grm. substance gave by the method of Carius 0.3573
grm. AgBr.
II. 0.2127 grm. substance gave 0.3476 grm. AgBr.
III. 0.2530 grm. substance gave 0.4137 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for CsHoBrp.^.
Br. 69.56

The pure acid melts at 85.5-86°, but in other respects does not differ
essentially in its physical properties from the product which I have
already described. The solubility of the acid was determined by
neutralizing with baric carbonate an aqueous solution of the acid
prepared according to the method of V. Meyer, and precipitating
with sulphuric acid the barium dissolved.

I. 12.7854 grms. of a solution saturated at 17°. 5 gave 0.3107 grm.
BaSO, .
II. 13.5723 grms. of a solution saturated at 17°.5 gave 0.3303 grm.
BaSO, .

III. 10.8488 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.2695 grm.

BaSO, .

IV. 9.7341 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.2484 grm.

BaSO^ .

According to these determinations the aqueous solution saturated
at 17°. 5 and 18° contains the following percentages : —

17°.5. 18°.

I. n. III. IV.

4.80 4.81 4.90 4.94

Baric Dibromacrylate, Ba(C3HBr202)2 • H.,0. The barium salt
prepared by neutralizing a solution of the pure acid with baric car-

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

bonate did not differ in outward appearance from the salt made directly
from mucobromic acid by the action of baric hydrate, but proved on
analysis to contain a percentage of barium materially lower than that
which O. R. Jackson and I had previously obtained, and closely agree-
ing with that required by one molecule of water of crystallization.
When dried by exposure to the air the salt lost nothing over sulphuric
acid or when heated to 85°, but by long-continued heat at 100° (75 to
100 hours) or more rapidly at 120° it gave up its crystal water with-
out showing any signs of decomposition.

I. 0.6642 grm. of the air-dried salt gave by precipitation 0.2540
grm. BaSO^ .
II. 0.6392 grm. of the air-dried salt gave on ignition with H^SO^
0.2434 grm. BaSO, .
III. 0.5300 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 120° 0.0161 grm. H,0.
IV. 1.9253 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 100° 0.0548 grm. HgO.
V. 1.1582 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 100° 0.0351 grm. H^,
and gave by precipitation with HaSO^ 0.4408 grm. BaSO^ .

Calculated for Ba(C3HBroOo)2 • H^O. Found.

I. IT. III. IV. V.

Ba 22.35 22.48 22.39 22.38

HgO 2.94 3.04 2.85 3.03

The solubility of the salt was also determined.
I. 9.4276 grm. of an aqueous solution saturated at 18° gave by
precipitation 0.2214 grm. BaSO^ .
II. 8.4088 grm. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.1917 grm.
BaSO, .

According to these determinations the aqueous solution of the salt
saturated at 18° contains the following percentages of the anhydrous

salt : —

I. II.

6.00 5.82

Plumbic Dihromacrylafe, Pb(C3HBr202)2 ■ H.20- The lead salt
which, according to the analyses made of former preparations, was
anhydious when made from the pure acid by neutralization with plum-
bic carbonate, or from the acid potassium salt by precipitation with
plumbic acetate, likewise proved to contain one molecule of water of
crystallization.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 129

I. 0.5972 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 100° O.OIGI grm. II.p,
and gave by iguition with II^SO^ 0.2Go5 grm. PbSO^ .

II. 1.0438 grm. substance dried over H^SO, lost at 100° 0.0283 grm.

II.^O, and gave by Iguition with H^SO^ 0.4622 grm. PbSO^ .

Calculated for Pb(CaIIBr..O.,)., . ILO. Found.

I. II.

Pb 30.31 30.37 30.25

HP 2.64 2.70 2.71

Calcic Dibromacrylate, Ca(C.jHBr.>02)., . 3H.,0. The calcium salt
made from the pure acid crystallized in long clustered needles, which
gave on analysis results identical with those which 0. R. Jackson and
I formerly obtained.

I. 2.1502 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80-85° 0.2034 grm.
H.O.
IL 1.2264 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 95-100° 0.1171 grm.

up.

III. 1.8124 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 100° 0.1755 grm. Hp.

Calculated for CalCgHBr.O.J . 3HoO. Found.

I. II. III.

Hp 9.78 9.46 9.55 9.68

I. 0.4393 grm. of the salt dried at 100° gave on ignition with HgSO^
0.1199 grm. CaSO, .
II. 0.6161 grm. of the salt dried at 100° gave on ignition with H.^SO^
0.1674 grm. CaSO^ .

Calculated for Ca(C3HBr202)2. Found.

I. II.

Ca 8.03 8.03 7.99

Potassic Dibromacrylate, KC3HBr.p,,. The analysis of the potas-
sum salt made by neutralizing the pure acid with potassic carbonate
showed that it was anhydrous, as it had previously been described.

I. 0.7334 grm. of the salt dried over HjSO^ gave on ignition with
11,80, 0.2373 grm. K,SO^.
II. 0.7507 grm. of the salt dried over H„S04 gave 0.2427 grm.
K,SO,.

VOL. xvii. (n. S. IX.) 9

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Calculated for KC8HBr202 Found.

I. II.

K 14.58 14.53 14.51

Although many unsuccessful attempts had previously been made to
prepare brompropiolic acid in a pure state, it seemed to me not im-
possible that the prolonged action of alkalies in the cold might remove
from the dibromacrylic acid a molecule of hydrobromic acid, and that
a purer product might thus be obtained. I found, however, that the
reaction was extremely slow, at least with baric hydrate. An aqueous
solution which contained one molecule of baric hydrate to each mole-
cule of dibromacrylic acid was strongly alkaline even after standing
for fifteen days, and gave on acidification and extraction with ether
the compound of brompropiolic and dibromacrylic acids which has
already been described. After recrystallization from ligroin the sub-
stance melted at 103°, and gave on analysis the following result : —

0.2535 grm. substance gave 0.3766 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for CeHaBfaOi . Found.

Br. 63.33 63.22

Since I had before noticed that this intermediate product could be
obtained from dibromacrylic acid by the action of baric hydrate in the
course of a few hours, and that malonic acid was formed even in the
cold after the lapse of several months, it was evident that further
attempts in this direction were useless.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 131

II. On tue Crystalline Form of a Diciiloracrylic Acid.

By W. H. Melville.
(Communicated by II. B. Hill.)

Although the physical properties of the ^ dichloracrylic acid of
Wallach * are decidedly different from those which W, Z. Bennett
and I found to be characteristic of the dichloracrylic acid made from
mucochloric acid,t a difference which appeared to be fully confirmed
by a. comparison of the salts of the two acids, still it seemed to me
desirable to prove with a little more precision the difference between
the two. Since Wallach had made no determinations of the solubility
of his acid or its salts, and moreover thought % that little weight
should be attached to the determinations of crystal-water which he
had as yet published, there remained no definite, well-established
points of difference except the melting-points (86° and 77°) and a
difference in the crystalline form of the potassium salt : one crystal-
lizing in needles, the other in hexagonal plates. Since the & acid had
been obtained in measurable crystals and fully described in Wallach's
first paper, although we had previously been unable to get measurable
crystals of our acid, I made fresh attempts with larger quantities of
material than had then been at our disposal. I found that by the
slow cooling of a warm, moderately dilute solution in chloroform well-
developed crystals could be obtained, although the determination of
the crystals was rendered difficult on account of the rapid roughening
of their faces when exposed to the air. Dr. "W. H. Melville succeeded,
however, in making the necessary measurements, and to his kindness
I am indebted for the following description. The purity of the
material used was determined by analysis.

0.2061 grm. of the substance gave 0.4198 grm. AgCl.

Calculated for C3H.2CI.2O2 . Found.

CI. 50.36 .50.35

* Ann. Cliem. u. Pharm. vol. cxciii. 19.

t Tliese Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 206.

I Ann. Cheno. u. Pharm. cciii. 80.

132

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Crystalline form of Dichloracrylic Acid.

001

ti

loo

n^

(00

too

Monoclinic System.

Forms, {100} {001} {110} {111}.

Elements: Clinodiagonal a =1.1865
Orthodiagonal b = 1
Vertical Axis c = 0.3637
Ande of Axes XZ = 87° 32'

Angles between Normals.

Observed. Calculated.

Til andTTl = 37° 54' ^
Til " 001 = 25° 8' [■ Fundamental angles.
Til « TOO = 71° 49')

001 " TOO = 87° 32' 87° 33'

TOO « TIO = 49° 56' 49° 51'

TIO " 110 = 80° 6' 80° 18'

Although Wallach's dichloracrylic acid also crystallizes in the mono-
clinic system, the forms are totally unlike, and the ditFerence between
the two acids is therefore established.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 133

III. On the Relation between Dibromacrylic Acid and
Tuir.KOMPuorioNic Acids.

By Henry B. Hill and Clement W. Andrews.

Nearly two years ago Michael and Norton * published a description
of the tribrompropiouic acid melting at 92° which was first mentioned
by Linnemann and Penl,t and which they obtained by the addition
of bromine to the so-called ^ monobromacrylic acid of ToUens and
Wagner. In this paper they remarked that potassic hydrate attacked
the acid readily in alcoholic solution, but they attempted no isolation
of the dibromacrylic acid which was thus formed. They soon after-
wards offered to 'relinquish the farther study of this acid, in case we
felt interested to undertake its preparation and comparison with the
dibromacrylic acid which one of us had already described. This kind
offer was accepted, and we began the investigation at once. Although
we had no difficulty in the isolation of a dibromacrylic acid which
closely resembled that which had been made from mucobromic acid,
still it was impossible to establish the identity of the two until the
latter had been somewhat more carefully studied. In the mean time
Mauthner and Suida, t in an article upon substituted acrylic and pro-
pionic acids, described again the preparation of the tribrompropiouic
acid melting at 92°, without having seen more than a brief notice of
Michael and Norton's work. In this article they further showed that
it might be converted by the action of potassic hydrate into a dibrom-
acrylic acid, which, as they asserted, was identical with that which
O. R. Jackson and one of us had obtained from mucobromic acid.§
The only facts which they brought forward in support of this assertion
were, the melting-point, 85°, the ready formation of malonic acid by
the action of baric hydrate, and the anhydrous form of the lead salt.
Since neither the melting-point nor the action of baric hydrate will
discriminate between the two isomeric forms of dibromacrylic acid
already known, and moreover since the lead salt of one of these two
acids has never been described and of the other is not anhydrous, as
one of us has recently shown, it is evident that these facts were wholly
insufficient to characterize the acid in question. Our investigation of

* Amer. Chem. Journ. ii. 18.

t Berichte der deutsch. chem. Gesellsch., viii. 1008.

t Sitzungsberichte der kk. Akademie, Wien, Ixxxiii. 273.

§ These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 192.

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the same acid has shown us that their assertion, though unsujiporteci
by eviilence, was accidentally correct.

Dihromacrylic Acid, CgHgBr^Og . In the preparation of the tri-
brompropionic acid neces.^ary for this research we followed quite
closely the method of Michael and Norton, although we did not con-
sider it necessary to purify the dibrompropyl alcohol by distillation
under diminished pressure before oxidation. For the conversion of
the tribrompropionic acid into the corresponding dihromacrylic acid
we have found it most advantageous to dissolve it in the calculated
amount of a titrated solution of baric hydrate, and to allow the
reaction to proceed at ordinary temperatures. After standing for
several days the neutral or at most feebly alkaline solution was evap-
orated, and the acid extracted from the recrystallized barium salt thus
obtained. Since this acid was found by preliminary trial to give a
sparingly soluble acid potassium salt which crystallized in long silky
needles, for further purification it was converted into this salt. After
several recrystallizations from hot water, the acid was set free by the
addition of hydrochloric acid and extracted with ether. The acid thus
obtained crystallized in small oblique prisms readily soluble in alcohol,
ether, and chloroform, more sparingly in benzol or carbonic disuljihide.
Under water the crystals melted at about 20° to a colorless oil which
dissolved readily on heating. The acid dried over sulphuric acid
melted at 85-86°, and gave on analysis percentages corres^jonding to
the formula CgHgBrgOg .

I. 0.7497 grm. substance gave on combustion 0.4341 grm. CO^ and
0.0673 grm. Hp .
II. 0.2863 grm. substance gave 0.4691 grm. AgBr.
III. 0.2093 grm. substance gave 0.3432 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for C3H.,Br„0., . Found.

' ' ' I. II. III.

c

15.6.5

H

0.87

Br

69.56

15.79
1.00

69.72 69.84

The solubility of the acid we determined by neutralizing with baric
carbonate an aqueous solution prepared according to the method of
V. Meyer and determining by precipitation the barium dissolved.

I. 12.4640 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.3124 grm.
BaSO^ .
II. 12.2745 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.3091 grm.
BaSO,.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 135

According to these determinations the aqueous solution saturated at
18° contained the following percentages: —

I. II.

4.95 4.97

Baric Dibromacrylate, Ba(C„HBr.,0.,)2 . H.^O. The barium salt made
by neutralizing a solution of the acid with baric carbonate crystallized
in rhombic plates more or less irregular in form, which when dried by
exposure to the air contained one molecule of water.

I. 1.3641 grm. of salt dried over IIoSO^ gave by precipitation
0.5195 grm. BaSO, .
II. 3.1482 grms. of the air-dried salt lost at 110° 0.0933 grm. 11,0;
0.8202 grm. of the same air-dried salt gave by precipitation
0.3147 grm. BaSO, .
III. 1.7219 grm. of salt dried over H,SO^ lost at 120'' 0.0520 grm.
H^O ; 0.6769 of the same salt gave by precipitation 0.2555
grm. BaSO^.

Calculated for Ba(C8nBrA)2 • HoO .

I.
Ba 22.35 22.40

H.p 2.94

For its further identification we determined its solubility in water
at 18°.

9.2373 grm. of a solution saturated at 18° gave by precipitation
0.2131 grm. BaSO,.

From this determination it follows that the aqueous solution satu-
rated at 18° contained 5.89% of the anhydrous salt.

Calcic Dibromacrylate, Ca(C3HBr,02)., . 3H.,0. The calcium salt
crystallized in clustered needles which contained three molecules of
water of crystallization when dried by exposure to the air.

I. 0.5761 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80° 0.0535 grm. H.,0.
II. 0.5101 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 80° 0.0491 grm. H^^O.

Calculated for Ca(C3HBr.20.2)2 . SH^O. Found.

I. II.

HjO 9.78 9.29 9.63

0.4608 grm. of the salt dried at 80° gave on ignition with H,SO^
0.1262 grm. CaSO,.

Found.

II.

in.

22.56

22.19

2.96

3.02

136 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Calculated for Ca(C3lIBr20i,).2. Found.

Ca 8.03 8.0G

Potassic Dlbromacrylate, KC3HBr20.^. The potjissium salt was
made from the acid by neutralization with potassic carbonate. It
crystallized in leafy plates which were anhydrous.

0.6842 grm. of the air-dried salt gave on evaporation with HgSO^
and ignition 0.2229 grm. K^SO^ .

Calculated for KCaHBr.p^
K 14.58

Found.
14.62.

A comparison of these results with those which one of us has pre-
sented in the preceding paper will be facilitated by the following
table, which gives the mean of each series of results : —

Dibromacrylic Acid from

MucobroDiic

Tribrompropionic

85.5-86°
4.92
2.97
5.91
9.56

85-86°
4.96
2.99
5.89
9.46

Aqueous solution 18°, % acid

Barium salt solubility 18°

Calcium salt % water

Since the identity of the dibromacrylic acid formed by the sub-
traction of hydrobromic acid from the tribrompropionic acid melting
at 92° with that derived fron^ mucobromic acid was thus established
with precision, it seemed to us of interest to study a little more closely
the tribrompropionic acid which this same dibromacrylic acid forms
by the addition of hydrobromic acid. Mr. C F. Mabery * had with
one of us already proved that such an addition product could be formed,
but it had been prepared solely from the impure acid melting at 83-
84" and very little studied. "We therefore at first undertook its prep-
aration in larger quantity from pure acid melting at 85-86°.

Tribrompropionic Acid, CgllgBr^O^, . When dibromacrylic acid
made by the action of baric hydrate upon mucobromic acid is heated
with three or four times its weight of hydrobromic acid saturated at
0° for eight or ten hours, at 100° the needle-like prisms disappear and
are replaced by rectangular plates of the new tribrompropionic acid.
With the pure acid no carbonization such as had been noticed in work-
ing with the impure acid was observed even at 120°, and we therefore

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 197.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 137

usually allowed the addition to proceed at this higher temperature,
since the reaction was tlien completed in a shorter time. The tubes
opened without marked pressure, and the crystalline product separated
from the acid mother-liquors by filtration upon a perforated platinum
cone was dried upon porous tiles. When treated in this way the
dibroraacrylic acid gave about its own weight of crude tribrompro-
pionic acid. The acid can readily be purified by recrystallizing it
successively from ligroin and carbonic disulphide. The use of car-
bonic disulphide causes considerable loss, but with ligroin alone we
failed to obtain as high a melting-point. After several recrystalliza-
tions the acid showed a constant melting-point, and gave on analysis
the required percentages.

I. 1,0329 grm. substance dried over IIjSO^ gave on combustion
0.444G grm. CO., and 0.0994 grm. H,0.
II. 0.2184 grm. substance gave 0.3963 grm. AgBr.
III. 0.1938 grm. substance gave 0.3525 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for CsHaBrgO. . Found.

I. II. III.

C 11.57 11.74

H 0.96 1.07

Br 77.17 77.29 77.39

This tribrompropionic acid is very soluble in alcohol or ether, some-
what less soluble in chloroform, carbonic disulphide, benzol or ligroin.
It dissolves freely in hot water, but is quite rapidly decomposed on
boiling with the formation of hydrobromic acid. From the hot aque-
ous solution the acid crystallizes on cooling in pearly scales. Repeat-
edly recrystallized from carbonic disulphide, the acid melts at 118°.

Argentic Tribrompropionate, AgC3lI.,Br302. Argentic nitrate added
to a cold aqueous solution of the acid precipitates the silver salt in
small clustered rhombic plates. On warming it with water argentic
bromide is rapidly formed, but it may be dried over sulphuric acid
without essential decomposition.

0.2901 grm. of the salt dried over H2S0^ gave by precipitation with
HBr 0.1316 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for AgCaHoBrgO^. Found.

Ag 25.83 26.05

The barium and calcium salts were readily soluble in water, and
their solutions could not be warmed without the instantaneous forma-

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

tion of bromide. Even on evaporating their solutions at ordinary
temperatures over sulphuric acid in vacuo the barium salt was almost
wholly decomposed ; the calcium salt was apparently somewhat more
stable, for it was thus obtained in dendritic needles, although the mother-
liquor contained calcic bromide. Since the air-dried salt lost nothing
over sulphuric acid and was decomposed by heat, the water of crys-
tallization could not be directly determined. It gave, however, a per-
centage of calcium agreeing closely with that required by two
molecules of water.

I. 1.1087 grm. of the air-dried salt gave on ignition with HgSO^
0.2179 grm. CaSO,.
II. 0.7279 grm. of the air-dried salt gave on ignition with HgSO^
0.1425 grm. CaSO, .

Calculated for Ca(C3H^Br302)2- 2Hp. Found.

Ca 5.75 5.78 5.76

We were unable to prepare other salts.

Dihromacrylic Acid. The ready decomposition of the tribrompro-
pionic acid made it seem desirable to isolate and identify the dihrom-
acrylic acid which was thus formed. For this purpose we dissolved
pure tribrompropionic acid, melting at 118°, in water and added from
a burette a titrated solution of baric hydrate. So ra|)id was the
action that an alkaline reaction could not be maintained until nearly
one molecule of baric hydrate had been added for each molecule of
the acid. When the calculated amount of baric hydrate had been
added the solution was allowed to stand for half an hour, and then
but a trace of baric carbonate could be precipitated with carbonic
dioxide. Ether extracted from the acidified solution a crystalline
acid melting at 85-86°, which gave on analysis the percentage of
bromine required by the formula C3H2Br20.2 .

0.1979 grm. substance gave 0.3240 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for CsHoBroO.^ . Found.

Br. 69.57 " 69.66.

The solubility of the acid in cold water was determined by the
method of V. Meyer.

I. 10.7793 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave on neutralization
with baric carbonate and precipitation 0.2908 grm. BaSO^ .
II. 7.7354 grms. of a solution saturated at 18° gave 0.1940 grm.
BaSO, .

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

139

According to these determinations the aqueous sohition of the acid
saturated at 18° contained the percentages : —

I.
5.32

II.
4.95

Baltic Dibromacrylate, ^^{C^l^v.f).^.,. ir>0. By neutralizing the
arid with baric carbonate, or more conveniently by the direct evapo-
ration of the solution obtained by the action of baric hydrate upon
tribrompropionic acid, we obtained the barium salt in leafy rhombic
plates which, when dried over sulphuric acid, contained one molecule
of water.

I. 1.1489 grra. of the salt dried over II.^SO^ lost at 100-105° 0.0335
grm. H,0.
II. 1.5158 grra. of the salt dried over H.,SO^ lost at 105-110° 0.0457
grm. H._,0, and gave on precipitation 0.5790 grm. BaSO^ .

Calculated for Ba(C3HBr.20.J., . H.O ,

Found.

Ba
H,0

22.35
2.94

I.

II.

22.46

2.92

3.02

Calcic Dihromacrylate, Ca(C3HBr20„).2 . 3 HgO. The calcium salt
crystallized in radiating needles which contained when air-dried three
molecules of water.

0.9444 grm. of the air-dried salt lost at 100-105° 0.0906 grm. Hp,
and gave on ignition with HgSO^ 0.2332 grm. CaSO^ .

Calculated for Ca ( CgHBroO J o. 3 H.p . Found.

Ca 7.25 7.26

H^O 9.78 9.59

These results are sufficient to prove that this dibroraacrylic acid is
identical with the one already studied, as a comparison of the mean
results given in the followino; table will show.

Dibromacrj'lic Acid from

Mucobromic Acid.

Tribrompropionic.

Melting-point

85.5-86°
4.92
2.97
0.53

85-86°
5.12
2.97
9.59

Aqueous solution saturated at 18°, % acid

Calcium salt % water

140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

IV. On Certain Tetrasubstituted Propionic Acids.

By Henry B. Hill and Charles F. Mabert.

In a previous communication * one of us has already mentioned the
fact that the dibromacrylic from mucobromic acid, unlike the dichlor-
acrylic acid of Wallach, takes up a molecule of bromine with readiness
and forms a tetrabrompropionic acid. We were led to undertake a
more complete study of the tetrasubstituted propionic acids, especially
with the hope that the study of those containing two different halo-
gens might throw some light upon the position of the halogen atoms
in the disubstituted acrylic acids formed from mucobromic and muco-
chloric acids. After our investigations were concluded Mauthner and
Suida t published in the Proceedings of the Vienna Academy a paper
entitled " Ueber gebromte Propionsiiuren und Acrylsliuren," in which
they anticipate us in the publication of a portion of our work. Since
they were perfectly well aware that, in studying derivatives of a sub-
stituted acrylic acid which they asserted, although without adequate
proof, was identical with that obtained from mucobromic acid, they
were trespassing upon ground which one of us had already fully re-
served, we think it advisable, although it involves a certain amount of
repetition, to give our results in full, more especially since we are able
to correct their work in several important particulars.

Tetrahrompropionic Acid.

Tetrabrompropionic acid can readily be made by the addition of
bromine to dibromacrylic acid at ordinary temperatures. J We have
prepared it by adding to a solution in chloroform the calculated amount
of bromine. On standing, the addition product gradually separates,
often in large, well-formed prisms. The amount of the product thus
obtained was about 90% of the theoretical yield. After recrystalliza-
tion from chloroform the substance was dried over sulphuric acid.

* Tliese Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 197.

t Sitzungsbcrichte der kk. Akademie, Wicn, lx.\.\iii. 273.

\ Mauthner and Suida assert that the dibromacrylic acid will take up no
bromine in tlie cold. They prepared tetrabrompropionic acid by heating to
100° witb undiluted bromine. That the bromine is very readily taken up one
of us first mentioned several years ago (Berichte der deutsch. chem. Gesellsch.,
1. xii.657).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

141

I. 0.5480 grm. substauce gave 0.1837 grm. COg and 0.0286 grin.
11,0.
II. 0.1775 grm. substance gave 0.3432 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for C3HoBr40.,

C 9.23

H 0.51

Br 82.04

Found.
I. II.

9.14

0.58

82.28

Tetrabrompropionic acid crystallizes in prisms of the triclinia sys-
tem which melt at 125-126°. It is very soluble in alcohol or ether,
readily soluble in hot chloroform, carbonic disulphide or benzol, and
separates in crystals as these solutions cool. lu ligroin it is sparingly
soluble. Under water it melts at a very low temperature to a color-
less oil which dissolves freely on heating.

For a crystallographic study of the substance we are indebted to
Dr. W. H. Melville,

Crystalline Form of Tetrabrompropionic Acid.

010

CQI

Triclinic System.

Forms, ^100} ^010} {001} {011}

Elements: Macrodiagonal a =1.507
Brachydiagonal b = 1
Vertical Axis c = 0.934

Angles of Axes XY =94° 59'
XZ= 104° 28'
YZ = 74°20'

:1T0V

142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Angles between Normals.

Observed. Calculated.

100 and 010 = 88° 48'
010 " 011=36° 3'
Oil " 001 = 48° 5U'
100 " 011 = 77°2U'
100 " ITO = 57° 25'
100 " 001 =1 77° 1' 76° 2V

y Fundamental angles.

Argentic Tetrabrompropionate, AgC3HBr^02 . Argentic nitrate
added to a solution of the acid in dilute alcohol jirecipitates the silver
salt in clustered needles, which may further be increased in quantity
by the cautious addition of ammonic hydrate. The salt is extremely
unstable, forms argentic bromide on warming, and blackens rapidly
in diffused light.

1.2182 grm. of the salt dried over HgSO^ gave 0.4744 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for AgCgHBr^O^ . Found.

Ag 21.78 22.38

Baric Tetrabrompropionate, Ba(CnHBr^02)2 • 2H2O. An aqueous
solution of the acid dissolved baric carbonate readily in the cold, and
if the solution was not warmed there was no noticeable decomposition.
On spontaneous evaporation at ordinary temperatures the barium salt
was left in clusters of flattened needles. When dried by exposure to
the air they contained two molecules of water which they lost over
sulphuric acid.
I. 0.7239 grm. of the air-dried salt lost over HgSO^ 0.0272 grm.

II. 0.7087 grm. of the air-dried salt lost over H^SO^ 0.0259 grm.
Hp.

Calculated for Ba( CsHBriO-Jz ■ 2H.p. Found.

I. II.

H2O 3.79 3.76 3.G6

0.6756 grm. of the salt dried over H.SO^ gave on ignition with
H2SO, 0.1742 grm. BaSO, .

Calculated for BaiCsHBriOo). . Found.

Ba 14.97 15.16

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 143

Calcic Tetrabrompropionafe, Ca(C.;IIBr^0^)2. The calcium salt,
made by neutralizing an aqueous solution of the acid with calcic car-
bonate and allowing the solution to evaporate spontaneously, crys-
tallized in needles which proved to be anhydrous. The salt freed
from moisture by pressure did not materially lose in weight when
exposed to the air, and when air-dried lost nothing over sulphuric
acid.

I. 0.5065 grm. of the salt dried over IlaSO^ gave on ignition with
IT^SO, 0.0888 grm. CaSO^.
II. 1.088G grm. of the salt dried over H.SO^ gave 0.1850 grm.
CaSO, .

Calculated for Ca(C3H.,Br40.,)2. Found.

I. II.

Ca 4.89 5.1G 5.00

When a solution of baric tetrabrompropionate was heated baric
bromide was formed, carbonate dioxide escaped, and at the same time
the liquid became turbid through the separation of a colorless oil.*
On distilling the liquid the oil passed readily over with steam, and
since from the method of its formation there could be little doubt that
it was tribromethylen, for identification it was immediately converted
into its dibromide by the addition of bromine. The crystalline addi-
tion product which was thus obtained when purified by recrystallization
melted at 53° and gave on analysis a percentage of bromine which
showed it to be pentabromethan.

0.1696 grm. substance gave 0.3766 grm. AgBr.

Calculated for C^llBr^ . Found.

94.12 94.48

This decomposition may therefore be expressed by the equation :

Ba(C3HBr,0.,)2 = BaBr., + 2 CO., + 2 CaHBrg.

By the action of an alcoholic solution of potassic hydrate upon tetra-
brompropionic acid a molecule of hydrobromic acid is removed, and
there results the tribromacrylic acid melting at 118° which we have

* Mauthner and Suida assert tliat this decomposition also takes place on long
standing at ordinary temperatures. They were therefore able to isolate no
salts. We have never observed any decomposition in the cold. Loc. cit.
p. 284.

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

already described.* Dr. W. II. Melville kiudly made a crystallo-
graphic study of the crystals which we obtained, and established their
identity with those he had previously examined, which were prepared
by the addition of bromine to brompropiolic acid. A description of
the crystalline form of tribromacrylic acid Dr. Melville presents in
a separate communication.

a Dichlorhrompropionic Acid.

In studying the dichloracrylic acid made from raucochloric acid
W. Z. Bennett and one of us found that even at 100° it would not
take up bromine when dissolved in chloroform.f Subsequently it
appeared from the experiments of C. W. Andrews that the substituted
propionic acid could readily be made by the action of undiluted bro-
mine, although circumstances at the time prevented a detailed study
on his part. As a precise characterization of this addition product
seemed of interest we undertook its preparation and investigation.

Pure dichloracrylic acid melting at 85-86° was heated with a mol-
ecule of bromine for several hours at 100°. The almost colorless
product of the reaction was pressed thoroughly with paper and purified
by crystallization, at first from carbonic disulphide, and finally from
chloroform. When dried over sulphuric acid this substance gave on
analysis percentages agreeing closely with those required by the for-
mula CHgCljBr^Oj. In the indirect determination of the halo-
gens we used the extremely convenient and accurate method recently
described by Mr. L. P. Kinnicutt.J

I.§ 0.8124 grm. substance gave 0.3550 grm. CO^ and 0.06G5 grm.
HoO.
11. 0.1715 grm. substance gave 0.3775 grm. AgCl -\- AgBr.
III. 0.4790 grm. substance gave 1.0559 grm. AgCl -f- AgBr. From
this by reduction was obtained 0.6887 grm. Ag.

* These Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 210. ISIauthner and Suida
assign to the barium and calcium salts of this acid, prepared by them from tetra-
brompropionic acid, formulae differing greatly from those which we formerly
established by our analyses. Since their determinations were made with
small quantities of material, we have not thought it necessary to make further
analyses in support of our formulae.

t Tliese Proceedings, Vol. XVI. (n. s. viii.) p. 211.

X These Proceedings, Vol. XVn.(N. s. xi.) p. 91.

§ These analyses were made by Mr. Andrews.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES.

145

Calculated for C3H.2Cl2Br.2O2

C 11.96

H 0.67

CI 23.59

Br 53.15

76.74

I.

1.91

Found.
II.

III.

0.90

76.93

23.77
52.90

This a dichlorclibrompropionic acid crystallizes in well-formed tri-
cliuic prisms, which melt at 94-95°, It is readily soluble in water,
alcohol, or ether ; in carbonic disulphide, chloroform, or benzol it dis-
solves less freely. From a solution in carbonic disulphide it could be
obtained by slow evaporation in well-formed crystals, whose study was
kindly undertaken by Dr. \V. H, Melville.

CRrSTALLlNE FORM OF « DiCHLORDIBROJIPROPIONIC AciD.
00*

0/0

/

f'on\

h

J^l—

oio

|00

1 ■

-V

001

Triclinic System.

Forms, pOO} {010} {001} {101} {011} {lOT} {OTT} ; {110}
and ^ITO} often present.

* Elements : Macrodiagonal a = 1 .023

Brachydiagonal b = 1

Vertical axis c = 1.052

Angles of axes XY = 91°

XZ = 76° 31 1'
YZ = 108° 52'

* Through an error the ratios of the fundamental parameters were originally
given in the Berichte der deutsch. chem. Gesellsch. xiv. 1680. a : b : c =
1.034 : 1 : 1.062.

VOL. XVII. (n. B. IX.) 10

1-16

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Angles beticeen Normals.

Observed.

Calculated.

100 and 010 =

93° 37'

100

a

101 =

52° 58'

010

a

oil =

34° 57'

010

a

101 =

77° 19'

101

a

oil =

58° 46'

100

a

10T =

38° 32'

Oil

u

001 =

35° 21'

001

ii

OTl =

55° 45'

100

u

Oil =

101° 3'

100

a

OTl =

98° 49'

101

((

TOl =

87° 34'

lOT

u

OTT =

50° 32'

> Fundamental ancrles.

38° 41'
35° 52'
55° 30'
100° 39'
98° 38'
88° 20'
50° 30'

Argentic a Dichlordibrompropionate, AgCgHCl^Br.^O, . The silver
salt falls, on the addition of argentic nitrate to an aqueous solution of
the acid, in flattened jagged needles which are readily decomposed by
heat. They could, however, be dried over sulphuric acid without any
essential decomposition, as is shown by the following analysis : —

0.4885 grm. of substance gave by precipitation with HBr 0.2231
grm. AgBr.

Calculated for AgCsHCUBrA •
26.46

Found.
26.23

Baric a Dichlordibrompropionate, Ba(C3HCl2Br202)2 • The barium
salt we made by neutralizing a cold aqueous solution of the acid with
baric carbonate. On evaporation at ordinary temperatures it crys-
tallized in long branching needles, which when dried by exposure to
the air did not lose materially in weight over sulphuric acid, and con-
tained a percentage of barium corresponding to the anhydrous salt.

I. 0.5069 grm. of the air-dried salt gave 0.1 G06 grm. BaSO^ .
II. 0.5239 grm. of the air-dried salt gave 0.1G7G grm. BaSO^.

Calculated for Ba(C3HCl2Br.,0.)o
Ba 18.59

Found.
I. II.

18.58 18.81

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 147

The barium salt is decomposed by warming, its solution giving
products similar to those obtaiued in the same way from tetrabroin-
propionic acid. This decomposition, however, we have not as yet
studied further.

|3 Dichlordibrompropionic Acid.

Although dibromacrylic acid assumes a molecule of bromine so
readily, we found at first great difficulty in preparing the corresponding
addition product with chlorine. If chlorine gas is passed into melted
dibromacrylic acid it is gradually taken up and the melting-point of
the acid is slowly changed. After long-continued action a considerable
quantity of the dichlordibrompropionic acid is formed, but so contam-
inated with oily by-products that its purification is a matter of some
dilRcidty. This addition of chlorine is, however, rapidly and neatly
accomjilished if the reaction is allowed to proceed in direct sunlight
at 100°. When at this temperature the melted acid becomes nearly
solid with separating crystals of the addition product, the chlorination
is interrupted. The product which we obtained in this way from
pure dibromacrylic acid melting at 85-86° was purified by crystalliza-
tion first from carbonic disulphide and finally from chloroform. On
analysis it gave the following results : —

I. 0.5183 grm. substance gave 0.2335 grm. CO2 and 0.0431 grm.
H.O.
II. 0.1547 grm. substance gave 0.3400 grm. AgCl -}- AgBr. From
this by reduction was obtained 0.2214 grm. Ag.

Calculated for (CglLClaBr.p.J. Found.

I. II.

12.13
0.92

23.37
53.21

Tills ^ dichlordibrompropionic acid crystallizes in oblique prisms
which melt at 118-120°, and in its behavior with solvents closely
resembles the a acid. In water, alcohol, or ether it dissolves very
easily, but with somewhat more difTiculty in carbonic disulphide, chlo-
roform, or benzol. The solution in carbonic disulpliide gave by slow
evaporation well-developed crystals whose elements Dr. W. II. Mel-
ville kiudlv determined.

c

11.96

H

0.66

CI

23.59

Br

53.15

148

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Crystalline Form op ^ Dichlordibrompropionic Acid.

(01

iQV

MonocUnic System.
Forms, {100} {110} ^111} {102}

Elements : Clinodiagonal a = 2.393
Orthodiagonal b = 1
Vertical axis c = 1.731
Angle of axes XZ =: 46° 9

Angles between Normals.

/Ol

Observed.

Calculated.

110 and TIO =

60° 11' \

111 "

T10 =

42° 24|' [

Fundamental Ai

111 "

110 =

40° 331' )

TOO "

T10 =

59° 53'

59° 541'

111 "

ITI =

120° y

119° 56'

100 "

111 =

88° 57'

88° 47'

102 "

T10 =

102° 21'

102° 23'

102 "

110 =

78° 5'

77° 37'

102 "

111 =

63° 44'

63° 42i'

The difference between the « and ^ acids was further confirmed by
a study of the silver and barium salts.

Argentic ^ Dichlordihrompropionate, AgCjIICloBi-.^O^ . The silver
salt is precipitated in the form of short, thick, pointed prisms when
argentic nitrate is added to an aqueous solution of the acid. It is

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 149

readily decomposed by heat, but may be dried for analysis over sul-
phuric acid.

0.4950 grm. of the salt gave on precipitation with HCl 0.1731 grm.
AgCl.

Calculated for AgCgHCliBraOa . Found.

Ag 26.46 26.31

Baric § Dichlordibrompropionate, Ba(C3lICl2Br202)2. 2H2O. The
barium salt which we made by neutralizing an aqueous solution of the
acid with baric hydrate crystallized on spontaneous evaporation of its
solution in long radiating needles which were very soluble in cold
water. When dried by exposure to the air the salt proved to contain
two molecules of water which it lost over sulphuric acid.

I. 1.6201 grm. of the air-dried salt lost over H2S0^ 0.0705 grm.
14,0.
II. 1.5443 grm. of the air-di-ied salt lost over H2SO4 0.0731 grm.
H2O.

Calculated for Ba(C3HCl2Br202)2 • 2 ttjO. Found.

I. II.

H2O 4.66 4.35 4.74

0.8236 grm. of the salt dried over HgSO^ gave 0.2619 grm. BaSO^.

Calculated for Ba(C3HCl2Br202)2 . Found.

Ba 18.59 18.63

These results prove that the « and (3 dichlordibrompropionic acids
described are essentially different.

Dichlordibrompropionic Acid.

a

/3

System of Crystallization

Melting-point

Triclinic.

94-95°

BalCsHBroCLO.,)

Monoclinic.

118-120°
Ba(C.jHBr,,Cl.,0.,)2-2H.,0.

Barium salt

The barium salt was readily decomposed by warming its aqueous
solution. Baric chloride and carbonic dioxide were formed together
with a colorless oil which undoubtedly was a dibromchlorethylen.
With bromine this oil gave a solid addition product, which, however,
we have not as yet prepared in quantity sufficient for complete purifi-
cation and identification.

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

V. On the Constitution of the Substituted Acrylic and
Propionic Acids.

By Henry B. Hill.

Within a few years the number of substituted acrylic and pro-
pionic acids known has been largely increased, and yet the constitution
of but few of these can be said to be satisfactorily established. In a
previous communication I was led to adopt provisionally for muco-
bromic acid the formula, —

CBr^ — CHO
I
= C — COOH

which explained its connection with maleic acid, in whose molecule the
researches of Fittig had shown the provable existence of a dyad
carbon atom. The structure of the related dibromacrylic acid was
then naturally expressed by the formula, —

CBr^H
I

c =

I
COOH

against which at the time nothing more convincing than a belief in its
improbability could be urged. The relations which Andrews and I
have shown to exist between this same acid and two different tribrom-
propionic acids prove, however, that this formula is incorrect. An acid
with this structure could be formed from but a single tribrompropionic
acid, and must of necessity give this same tribrompropionic acid by the
addition of hydrobromic acid. The same objection also applies with
equal force to the other two conceivable formulae for dibromacrylic
acid which contain dyad carbon, —

= CH = CBr

I I

CBr^ and CHBr

1 I

COOH COOH

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 151

aud these must consequently be rejected. There remain therefore for
the acid in question but two possible formulae, —

CBr^ CHBr

II II

CH and CBr

I I

COOH COOH

The formation of two isomeric dichlordibrompropionic acids by the
addition of chlorine to the dibromacrylic acid and of bromine to the
analogous dichloracrylic acid, as Mabery and I have shown, would
seem again to be decisive in favor of the first of these formula}, since
its adoption would give, —

CBr^Cl CCljBr

I I

CHCl and CHBr

I I
COOH COOH

as the structure of the two isomeric dichlordibrompropionic acids,
while the second formula would give in either case the same com-
pound, —

CHBrCl

I
CBrCl

I
COOH

Although it was by no means impossible that a molecular rearrange-
ment had taken place in one of these two reactions, still it seemed
improbable, since the reactions were apparently neat, and in the treat-
ment with chlorine, where such a change would be more naturally
expected, no bromine could be detected in the escaping chlorine.
On the other hand the adoption of the formula, —

CBrg CCI2

II II
CH and CH

I I

COOH COOH

for the derivatives of mucobromic and mucochloric acids presented
difficulties quite as serious. In the first place the dicliloracrylic acid

152 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of Wallach had been proved beyond all doubt to be different from
that which Bennett and I had described by a comparison of the crys-
talline form of the two acids, and it would follow then that Wallach's
acid could not have the formula he assigned to it. The formation of
an acid with different structure from chloralid could, however, be
explained upon the assumption that the chlorpropiolic acid was the
first product of the reduction, and that this passed, on the one hand
by the addition of hydrogen, into the |3 chloracrylic acid, and on the
other hand formed dichloracrylic acid by addition in the subsequent
treatment with strong hydrochloric acid which Wallach prescribes.*
Although this hypothesis was far from satisfactory, it seemed to me
hardly more improbable than that a similar molecular rearrangement
had taken place in the reaction which had come under my own obser-
vation.

Still another difficulty was to be found in the formation of the
dibromacrylic acid in question from the tribrompropionic acid melting
at 92°, which, if the ordinarily accepted formula for the latter, —

CH^Br

CBr^
I
COOH

were correct, would prove the incorrectness of the formula assumed.
I was at first unable to attach any great importance to this argument,
inasmuch as the constitution of the monobromacrylic acids was ex-
tremely uncertain. For although the discovery by Wallach of the
B monobromacrylic acid melting at 115° had rendered the coustitution
of the a and ^ monobromacrylic acids of Tollens extremely doubtful,
it by no means proved their identity.

Ei'lenmeyer has, however, recently shownf that the a and ^ acids of
Tollens, as well as their potassium salts, crystallize in identical forms,
and the structure of the tribrompropionic acid melting at 92° is there-
fore put upon quite another footing. Since the same (a) monobrom-
acrylic acids can be made from a dibromjiropionic and also from its
isomer, the a /3 dibrompropionic, it follows that this acid must have the
structure, —

* Ann. Chem. u. Pharm., xcxiii. 7.

1 Berichte der deutscb. chem. Gosellsch., xiv. 1867.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 153

CH

II
CBr

I

coon

and the tribrompropionic acid made from it by the addition of bromine
must of course have the corresponding form, —

CH^Br

I
CBfj

I
COOH

Since the formnlte with dyad carbon are in this case excluded, there
remains for the dibromacrylic acid in question onlv the structure, —

CHBr

II
CBr

I
COOH

Ahhough this conchision is directly at variance with the results
which Mabery and I obtained in the study of the dichlordibrompro-
pionic acids, it must be confessed, I think, that it is probably correct.
Still, since its adoption presents undoubted difficulties, I shall endeavor
to bring more direct experimental evidence as to its correctness.

The dibromacrylic acid of Fittig and Petri, which, as Mabery and I
have shown, can be made from brompropiolic acid, would naturally
have the form, —

CBr,

II
CH

I
COOH

and the acids made in the same way containing two halogens the
corresponding, —

CBrI CBrCl

II II

CH CH

I I

COOH COOH

154

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The tribrompropionic acid melting at 118° would be written, —

CHBr^

I
CHBr

I
COOH

and the tetrabrompropionic acid would have the form, —

CHBr^

CBr,
I
COOH

VI. Crystalline Form op Tribromacrylic Acid.

By W. H. Melville.

101

001

1.00

MonocUnic System.

Forms, {010} {110} {011} {101} |T01} {021} ; the last three
forms being rarely observed.

Elements : Clinodiagonal a = 0.502
Orthodiagonal b = 1.
Vertical axis c = 0.559
Angle of axes XZ = 64° 29^'

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

155

Anrjlcs between Normals.

Observed.

Calculated.

010andTlO = 65° 38/ >

010 '

' on = G3° 14'^

Fundamental angles

on '

' TlO = 57° 35')

TlO '

' TTO = 48° 42'

48° 44'

010 '

' 021 = 44° 41'

44° 45'

021 '

' on = 18° 33'

18° 29'

on «

' OTl = 53° 33'

53° 32'

on '

' TOl = 42° -lb'

42° 23y

Since * Dr. F. Becke's results of the determination of the same
crystals do not appear to be reconcilable with the above, a comparison
is important. The forms r (110) / (ITO) when referred to the crys-
tals which I have examined, correspond to {021}, and o (Til), u
(TTl) would, if present, occur as the prism {120}. Among the many
sets of crystals submitted to me I have never observed the prism
{120}. The following table shows a few of the angles both actual
and hypothetical, assuming that the crystals are monoclinic in form,
when compared with Becke's corresponding measurements.

Monoclinic.
(010) A (021) = 44° 41'
(021)A(05l) = 90° 38'
(05I)A(0T0) = 44° 41'
(010)A(T20) = 47° 45f'
(T20) A (T^O) = 84° 28|'
(HO)A(OTO) =47° 45 1'
(010) A (021) = 44° 41'
(010) A (120) =47° 452-'

Becke.

44°

42'

=:

br

91°

11'

rl

44°

13'

r=

bl

47°

19'

=

bu

84°

55'

=

ou

48°

10'

bo

44°

27|'

—

mean

of br and bl

47°

441-'

=:

ii

„ bu

„ bo

The following measurements, which were obtained from a single
crystal, appear to establish conclusively the system of crystallization as
monoclinic.

* Sitzungsberichte der kaiser. Akad. der Wissensch., Band Ixxxiii. 286-287,
Wien, 1881.

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Zone [010, 110] (110) A (010) = 65° 33'

(010) A (110) = 65° 44'
(TIO) A (TTO) = 48° 28'
(TTO)A(OTO) = 65° 521'
(OTO)A(ITO) = 65° 35'
(ITO)A(IIO) = 48° 44'
359° 56^'

Zone [010, Oil] (010) A (021) = 44° 41'
(021) A (Oil) = 18° 30'
(Oll)A(OTl) = 54° 5'
(0T1)A(0T0) = 62° 56'

63° 11'

180° 12'

(ITO)A(OII) = 122° 321'
(Oil) A (110) = 57° 18|'
179° 51'
(0T1)A(TT0)= 57° 21'

The crystal face (OTl) was somewhat imperfect, so that the reflected
image was extended in width. Hence, the angles between (Oil) and
adjacent planes are rendered uncertain, but only by the small value
of 7' or 8'. All the other faces gave exceedingly sharp reflections.

From these considerations upon the system in which tribromacrylic
acid crystallizes, it will appear that we have to deal with a question
of small differences, and that in consequence of the very prominent
monoclinic habit, we are justified in making these crystals monocliuic,
and not triclinic, as Becke has determined them.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 157

XI.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE PHYSICAL LABORATORY OF
THE MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY.

XV. SIMPLE METHOD FOR CALIBRATING THERMOMETERS.

By Silas W. Holman.

Presented March 8, 1882.

The calibration of a thermometer by most of the methods in ordi-
nary use is a tedious and somewhat difficult operation, and hence
often neglected even in important work. For the purpose of supply-
ing a method simple both in observation and computation, and at the
same time accurate, the following process is described, which, although
involving little that is new, has not, to my knowledge, been used
before.

First, however, it is necessary to recall to the attention of observers
the fact that, without calibration correction, the readings of a ther-
mometer having a scale of equal linear parts cannot be relied upon
within one or more divisions of this scale ; and that thermometer
makers, knowing this, almost universally space the graduation upon the
tube to correspond more or less closely with the shape of the bore, as
determined by previous calibration or by comparison with a standard (!)
instrument. This practice is much more general than is ordinarily
supposed, and has an important bearing upon the accuracy of the
work done with such instruments. For the scale thus made is merely
approximate, the dividing-engine or other tool being changed only at
such intervals as to make the average error less than some specified
amount. An inspection of these conditions will show that the cali-
bration of such a tube and scale can be only approximate, except with
corrections for the inequalities of the spacing, involving an amount of
labor disproportionate to the result attained. The best makers, such
as Fastr^, Baudin, and other?, have produced satisfactory thermometers
graduated to equal volumes ; but even these are not as reliable as in-
struments of less cost with a scale of equal linear parts, say of milli-

1C8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

metres, supplemented by a calibration by the observer rather than an
approximation by the maker.* The best form of tube for almost all
work is one backed with white enamel, with an inverted pear-shaped
bulb at the upper end of the capillary (a very important feature), and
with a scale of equal arbitrary linear parts (0.7 mm. to 1 mm. is a
suitable length for estimation of tenths) or of approximate degrees,
for convenience, etched or engraved upon it.

Without reviewing here the methods proposed by various writers, it
may be said that it has been the general plan to select beforehand
upon the scale two points between which to make the calibration,
this space being considered the " calibration unit " ; the errors of these
points being, of course, zero. This plan has led to unnecessary com-
plexity in the resulting methods. Such an assumption is no more
requisite in calibration after a scale has been put upon the tube, than
in calibrating by the dividing-engine or micrometer before making the
scale. It is obvious, therefore, that the selection of these points is
wholly arbitrary, and, if used at all, one or both of them may. if de-
sirable, be chosen after the observations with the calibrating thread
have been made. The choice should be made with the view of facili-
tating the work. Hence the use of the observed freezing and boiling-
points, upon which some methods are based, is most undesirable.

In the method which will now be given, either one or both of these
points may be left to be selected, according to the combined conditions
of length of thread employed, shape of the tube, and numerical con-
venience, after the observations with the thread have been made.

Let it be desired to find the calibration corrections for a given tube.
Determinations which will give the errors of every 3 cm, of length
will ordinarily be sufficient, but this must depend upon the result
sought. Separate a thread of mercury of about that length. The
actual length of the thread within two or three millimetres is of no
consequence whatever; and hence a suitable thread can be obtained in
a very short time.

Set the thread with its lower end at or near the beginning of the
graduation: call the reading t of the lower end of the thread /j,

* It should be noted tliat thermometers intended for measurements above
about 280°C. almost always contain sufficient air to render tlie separation of a
thread for calibration difficult, if not impossible. The object of the air is that
its pressure upon the top of the column may prevent the mercury from enter-
ing into ebullition.

t Tenths of a division are supposed to be read by estimation.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. lo9

and that of the upper end u^. Move the thread leps than 1 mm. and
read again, finding thus /^ and ic.,. Move the thread about 1 cm. and
read l^ and Wg. Move less than 1 mm. and read l^ and u^. So con-
tinue throughout the wliole length of the graduation, increasing the
number of settings and repeating the whole series in reverse order, if
the highest attainable precision is desired. Avoid, as far as conve-
nient, taking readings with an end of the thread apparently just at a
line of the scale, as the width of the line, even in the best scales, is a
source of considerable error.* If the zero point of the graduation
has for any reason been selected as the first of which the error should
be assumed zero, the settings may to advantage, though not neces-
sarily, be made to extend each way from this.

Then u^ — l^ , u^ — I.2 , &c. will give a series of lengths of the cali-
brating thread in all parts of the tube. Before reuniting this thread
to the rest of the mercury, plot points with abscissas l^, l, , &c., and
ordinates ?<j — ^j , ^<2 — 4 > '^^•' ^^^ corresponding lengths of thread,
and draw a smooth curve through the points thus obtained. This line
will p;ive a general idea of the form of the capillary bore ; and, should
any parts of it show considerable irregularities, the corresponding
portions of the tube shoj-ild be at once re-explored with the thread.

If not already done, the point, A, upon the scale, to be used as the
starting or reference point of the computation, should now be selected.
In general the extreme ends of tlie tube are to be avoided, as more
likely to have been rendered irregular or rapidly tapering in the pro-
cess of making or joining on the bulbs. If the zero of the numbering
is placed two or three centimetres from the bottom of the tube, it
forms a desirable starting-point.

Find upon the curve the ordinate u' corresponding to the abscissa A ;
then with abscissa A -\- u' find the corresponding ordinate u" ; with
abscissa A -\- u' -\- u" find the corresponding ordinate u'", thus con-
tinuing to the upper limit of the graduation. If ^ is at a sufficient
distance from the lower end of the graduation, find for the point with
abscissa A — w' the corresponding ordinate w' ; as may be readily
done, when necessary, by inspection of the curve, finding the ordinate,
which, added to its corresponding abscissa, will give A ; then with
the abscissa A — w' — w" find the ordinate iv", &c. These points
A — w' — w", A — w', A, A -\- u', A -\- u' -\- u", &c., upon the
graduation are the points separated by equal volumes of the capillary.
When the calibration extends both ways from the zero of graduation,

* Some of the advantages of Neumann's method are offset by this error.

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the readings below A should be treated in the same way as those
above that point, and this case will therefore not be further consid-
ered. Select any one of these as the second point of which the error
is to be arbitrarily assumed as zero, and call this B. Then

A -[. u' -\- u" -{- + «""^ = B.

There are thus n spaces of equal volume between A and B, and

these correspond each to -th of the interval B — A. Hence the true

'■ n

reading (which, however, it is not necessary to compute numerically)
at the point

A

is

A

A-\-u'

((

A + liB-A)

J _j_ m' -}_ «'■

A-\-l(B-A)

B

B

A — w'

il

A-l(B-A)

A — w' — w"

l(

A-l{B-A)

&c.

&c.

And the error, obtained by subtracting the true readings as given in
the right-hand column from the corresponding actual reading given
in the left-hand column, at

A is 0

AJ^u' " A-\-u'-{A + l{B-A)}=u'-l{B-A) ^

A-\-u'-\-u" " u' -]- u" — ^ (B — A)

B "0

A — w' " —w'-\-^(B— A)

A — w' — w" " —w' — w" -\-- (B — A)
&c. &c.

In selecting B it might have been assumed equal to ^ -|~ "'> thus
makino-n = l. This would somewhat simplify the calculation, and
would be of equal accuracy, but is objectionable from the fact that in
general this volume would differ considerably from the average volume
obtained when n has a greater value (always an integer), and the re-
sulting series of errors would assume larger numerical values.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 161

The errors or corrections are, for purposes of interpolation, most
conveniently represented graphically by a smooth curve through points
with abscissas proportional to the direct readings

A — iv', A, A -\- u', A-{-ti' -\- u", &c.,

and ordinates to the corresponding corrections.

Should it be necessary to increase the accuracy by a second cali-
bration with a thread of different length, it is only necessary to take
one of approximately an integral part of (i? — A), and when the
final curve of error is drawn, make the error at 2? equal to zero, dis-
tributing the difference at that point proportionally to the scale read-
ings among the errors at the intermediate points :. in other words, to
shift the axis of the second curve of error so that it shall make the
error at B zero. The superposition of a second curve of error
deduced from the same series of observations as the first, but using
another starting-point. A' differing from ^ by a suitable fraction of
the length of the thread used, will somewhat increase the accuracy
of the result by rendering interpolation more certain, but neither of
these procedures is requisite except where a very detailed study
of the instrument is to be made.

This method requires for each calibration the use of but a single
thread. The computation is simple, and involves a minimum of ap-
proximation. Errors of observation are largely eliminated by the
number of settings made in all parts of the tube, and by the inspec-
tion of the curve of lengths, both of which operations tend in an
unusual degree to detect any mistakes or minor irregularities of the
capillary. It avoids the common requirement of setting the thread
exactly at certain definite points in the tube, or any approximate cor-
rection for slight errors in such setting, two sources of considerable
error and inconvenience, especially when the thread must be set near
or under a line of the graduation. And, lastly, the total time of cali-
bration for a result of given accuracy is reduced to one half or one
third of that required by Neumann's method, the quickest and most
satisfiictory with which I am acquainted, except that given by Picker-
ing. The latter, described with some slight inaccuracies at the refer-
ence noted below, is a neat application of the graphical method, and
the curve of lengths of thread adopted in the method which I have
described is identical with the corresponding one given by Professor
Pickering, while the whole process is fully one third shorter and some-
what more accurate. From a series of calibrations executed upon the
same thermometer (one with a millimetre scale by Baudin of Paris),

VOL. xvn. (x. s. ix.j 21

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

using a variety of methods, I have obtained slightly more concordant
results with the proposed method than with Neumann's or Pickering's,
all three possessing, however, nearly the same degree of precision,
and decidedly better results with these than with any of the other
existing simple methods.

Considerable aid in eliminating errors of parallax in such work is
sometimes found by looking down upon the horizontal thermomet(?r
through a vertical tube having a small hole at each end. One of the
cheap French microscopes with its lenses removed, and inverted in its
stand, answers this purpose well. With such a device two calibrations
of the above described thermometer with threads of 3 cm. and 5 cm.
respectively, each with only one series of observations, and requiring
not more than one hour and a half each for completion, gave results
whose average difference from each other at nine points was 0.04 mm.,
and the arithmetical sum of the extreme differences was 0.12 mm.,
a result of sufficient accuracy for any class of work of which such an
instrument is capable.

For brief descriptions of methods of separating threads of mercury
for calibration, reference may be made to the paper by Russell and
the text-book by Pickering noted below. These processes are in
general use, and are safe and convenient.

Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Boston, Feb. 1st, 1882.

References upon Calibration op Closed Thermometer

Tubes.

Bessel. Pogg, Ann., vi. 287 (1826).
Rudberg. " " ix. 535, 5GG.

« " xxxvii. 376 (1836).

" " xl. 39, 562 (1837).

KoHLRAUSCH. Physical measurements, p. 59 [Engl. Transl.].
Pickering. Physical Manipulation, ii. 75 (1876).
Thiesen. " (Neumann's Method.) Carl's Rep., xv. 285 (1879).
Russell. ( " " ) [Transl. from Thiesen].

Amer. Jour. Sci., xxi. 373 (1881).
Marek. Carl's Repertorium, xv. 300 (1879).

[Solution by least squares.]
Von Oettingen. Inaug. Diss. (Dorpat, 1865).

[This I have been unable to obtain. S.W.H.]

OF ABTS AND SCIENCES. 163

XII.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO NORTH AMERICAN
BOTANY.

By Asa Gray.

Presented February 8, 1882.

I. Studies of Aster and Solidago in the Older Herbaria.

Aster and Solidago in North America, like Hieracium in Europe,
are among the larger and are doubtless the most intractable genera of
the great order to which they belong. In these two genera, along
with much uncertainty in the limitation of the species as they occur
in nature, there is an added difficulty growing out of the fact that
many of the earlier ones were founded upon cultivated plants, some of
which had already been long in the gardens, where they have under-
gone such changes that it has not been easy, and in several cases not
yet possible, to identify them with wild originals. Late flowering
Compositce, and Asters especially, are apt to alter their appearance
under cultivation in European gardens. For some the season of
growth is not long enough to assure normal and complete develop-
ment, and upon many the difference in climate and exposure seems to
tell in unusual measure upon the ramification, inflorescence, and mvo-
lucral bracts, which afford principal and comparatively stable characters
to the species as we find them in their native haunts. I am not very
confident of the success of my prolonged endeavors to put these
genera into proper order and to fix the nomenclature of the older
species ; and in certain groups absolute or practical definition of the
species by written characters or descriptions is beyond my powers.
But no one has ever seen so many of the type-specimens of the species
as I have, nor given more time to the systematic study of these
genera. The following notes should therefore be of use.

It is noticeable that the herbarium of Nees von Esenbeck for Aster
is not referred to. / cannot ascertain what has become of it. But

164 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the types of several of his species, or specimens named by him, have
been met with in other herbaria, especially in that of Lindley and that
of Schultz, Bip., the latter now a part of the large collection of Dr.
Cosson. As to Asters, I do not here attempt anything beyond a
report of the main results of the study of certain principal herbaria ;
and I leave the high northern and far western species out of the
present view.

Besides general acknowledgments to the curators and botanists who
have in all cases most obligingly facilitated my researches, special
thanks are due to Professor Lawson, of Oxford, and Professor Eichler,
of Berlin, who kindly sent to Kew, for leisurely examination and com-
parison, one the Asters and Solidagoes of the herbaria of Morison and
of Sherard, the other those of Willdenow.

1. Notes on the North American Asters in the Older Herbaria.'

I. Species of Linnceus.

A. SiBiRicus. Founded on Gmelin's Siberian plant. Two speci-
mens in the Linnsean herbarium : they belong to a robust form of
the species which is represented in North America by the^. montanus
of Richardson.

A. DiVARicATUS. Founded, as to the plant in the herbarium, on
the upper part of a specimen of A. corymhosus, Ait., wanting the cor-
date petioled leaves, and with open inflorescence unusually foliolose.
But the synonyms, both of Gronovius and of Plukenet, relate to A.
itiflrmus, Michx., A. cornifolius, Muhl. The Linnajan name in this
case should subside.

A. DUMOSUS. Herbarium specimen of the very early cultivated
plant, and still in cultivation as a low and far more densely bushi/
plant than we find in the wild state. The figure in Hermann's Para-
disus referred to by Linnaeus answers well to the wild species ; that of
Plukenet more resembles the early cultivated form.

A. TENUiFCfLiDS. This is founded upon an indigenous specimen in
the herbarium, which is well described. As I have several years ago
recorded, it is Nuttall's A. fiexuosus, which must give place to the
Linncean name. The cited figure of Plukenet (which does not well
correspond with Plukenet's phrase) belongs })robahhj to A. pohjphrjllus,
Willd.

A. LiNARiiFOLius. Seemingly an indigenous specimen of this
well-known species.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 165

A. RiGiDUS. Not in the herbarium ; founded wholly on Grono-
vius, Fl. Virg. ; and Clayton's plant is identical with the preceding
specie3.

A. LiNiFOLius and A. iiyssoi'ifolius, Mant. 114, both belonging to
Galatella, an Old World group, were erroneously referred to North
America (where nothing of the kind has been detected), and are to all
appearance mere varieties of A. acris, L. A. linifolius originated in
Hort. CliflT. No. 15, and there is a specimen in Cliffort's herbarium.
The synonym of Morison relates to something else, perhaps to A. tenu-
i/olius, L. ; the plant of Gronov. Fl. Virg. referred to is A. tenuifoUus,
L. So that the name linifolius completely subsides, at least as regards
the American flora.

A. CONCOLOR. Two specimens, one from Kalm (" K "), and per-
haps the other also ; probably collected in New Jersey.

A. UNDULATUS. Specimen from Kalm ; the form with some cine-
reous pubescence, extending even to the involucral bracts ; lower
part of the stem wanting ; pretty clearly the A. diversifolius of
Michaux, and not the A. patens. The character and good figure cited
from Hermann's Paradisus are a part of the foundation of the species ;
from his phrase, " foliis undulatis," Linnaeus took the specific name ;
and the figure is characteristic.

A. Nov^-Angli^. The species is wholly clear, and comes down,
with its name, from Tournefort and Hermann. But in his herbarium
LinniEus had somehow confounded it with A. grandljlorus, and Smith
corrected the mistake.

A. ERicoiDES. In the second edition of the Species Plantarum
this is brought next to A. dumosus. The specimen in the herbarium
from the Upsal Garden is an attenuated floriferous state of the re-
ceived species. But the Dillenian plant from which Linnoeus drew
the specific name, and also the plant of Clayton, the character of
which, by Gronovius, Linnaeus copied as that of his A. ericoides, are
A. multijlorus, Ait. Solander, therefore, ought to have continued the
name of ericoides for the Dillenian and Gronovian plant, unless he
could ascertain that the specimen in the Upsal Garden was in the
herbarium as early as the year 1753. That cannot be done. But the
two species must now continue as named and characterized in Ait.
Hort. Kew.

A. CORDIFOLIUS. The species largely rests on the plants of Cor-
nuti and of Morison, both well figured, and the latter identified in his
herbarium. There is a specimen in the Liuna^an herbarium, unnamed

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

by LinnfciJs, however ; but Smith has written " cordifolius verus, fide
Cornuti." Kulm's specimen, ticketed cordifolius by Linnoeus, is A.
corymhosus, Ait. ; so that Linnaeus confounded the two, and Solander
first distinguished them.

A. PUNiCEUS. Specimen from Kalm ; unequivocal, as also is the
figure and character of Hermann, from the "puniceis caulibus" of
which Linnjeus drew the specific name.

A. ANNUUS. The Erigeron annuus,

A. VERNUS. The Erigeron vernus, not in the herbarium of Lin-
naeus, but taken wholly from Gronov. Fl. Virg.

A. L^vis. Credited to Kalm and described wholly from his speci-
men ; it is the well-known species, in the form known as A. rubri-
caulis, Lam., and A. cganeus, Hoffm.

A. MUTABiLis. No trace of it in the Linnoean herbarium,
although indicated as being there by the underscoring of the number
in Linnaeus's copy of the Spec. PI. ed. 1. The species must be dis-
carded as a complex one, the adduced plants being incongruous, and it
being now impossible to know what materials were under observation.
The original character, in ed. 1, 875, does not agree with " Pluk. Aim.
56, t. 326, p. 1," which is not to be found in Plukenet's herbarium,
and which may be A. dumosus or a Galatella. There Linnaeus com-
pares it with a species, A. serotinus, which he never published nor
preserved in his herbarium. Finally, in the second edition of the
Spec. PL, he reconstructed the character in a manner incompatible
with the former one, introduced before the Plukenetian synonym one
from Herm. Hort. Lugd. t. 67, which (on the authority of the contem-
porary herbaria of Royen and of Sherard) proves to be A. Icevis, L.,
and changed the comparison to one with A. Tradescanti. The new
character agrees no better with either figure than these do with each
other. The A. mutahilis of Ait. Hort. Kew. has an earlier and good
name in A. Icevigatus, Lam,

A. Tradescanti. Likewise a compound, of which the elements
have been variously employed ; but the name may be kept up by
going back to its origin, that is, to the Aster Virginianus ratnosissi-
t)uis serotinus, parvis Jlorihus albis Tradescanti, Morison, Hist. iii.
121. This, as found in Morison's herbarium and in Sherard's, is
the smallest flowered paniculate species, the A. fragilis Willd. (not
Torr. and Gray), A. leucanthemos, Desf, A. artemisicejiurus, Poir.,
A. parvijlorus, Nees., and a part of A. tenuifolius, Torr. and Gray.
It is still continued in European cultivation, here and there becoming

I

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 1G7

naturalized. This, then, is A. IVadescanti of Linnaeus, Spec. PI., as
to syn. Moris., which gave the name, and in part as to Hort. CliiF.
That is, of the two specimens in Cliffort's herbarium, one belongs to
Morison's species ; the other, which was taken up in Torr. and Gray's
Flora as the foundation of the species, is the racemose A. vimineus,
Lam., A. Tradescanti fragiUs, Torr. and Gray. But I now understand
that Cliffort's herbarium is really no authority for Linnajan species.
The specimen preserved in the Linna^an herbarium is from the Upsal
Garden, of unknown date; but as " Ilort. Ups. 262 " is cited under
the species, it was probably in hand when the character was drawn
up. It belongs to a related species with larger heads, of which the
next oldest name is A. paniculaius, Lam. This name should be em-
ployed for the larger-flowered, and A. Tradescanti for Tradescant's
small-flowered species.

A. Novi-Belgii. This is really founded wholly on the A. Xovce-
Belgice latifoUus umbellatus Jloribus dilute violaceis, Herm. Hort.
Lugd. 67 and (tab.) 69, which, from early specimens, can be fairly
identified with a polymorphous species still common in the gardens,
in a variety of forms and under several names, A. Jloribundus, serotinus,
adulterinus, eminens, prcsaltus, &c., all of them apparently derived
from a common and most variable species of the Atlantic States near
the coast, which has been by me referred (not correctly) to A. longi-
folius, Lam. But the indigenous specimen so named in the Linnajan
herbarium, from Kalm, is clearly A. puniceus, L., and one from the
Upsal Garden is A. paniculaius. Lam., or near it.

A. TARDIFLORUS, founded entirely on specimens cultivated in the
Upsal Gai'den, is confidently identified with a low form of A. patulus,
Lam., a northern species, not rare in cultivation, but little known by
indigenous specimens. This low form is most like A. prenanthoides.
The species dates only from the second edition of the Species Plan-
tarum ; it is said to have been cultivated for eighteen years before it
flowered, and then late in the season. But the cultivated Aster which
matches the Linna;an specimens (of two sterile stems with lower
leaves, and a stronger flowering one destitute of them) blossoms unu-
sually early. So it is doubtful whether the Linna^an name (which has
commonly been applied to a form of A. Xovi-Belgii) ought to be
kept up.

A. GRANDIFLOEUS. Not in the Linna^an herbarium; but this well-
marked species is founded on the excellent figures of Martyn and

168 TROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of Dillenius, and on Gronov. Fl. Virg. Clayton's plant came directly
from the rather limited district which this species inhabits.

A. MISER. A name to be suppressed. It was wholly character-
ized, not upon any plant, but upon the figure of " A. ericoides Meliloti
agrarice umbone" Dill. Elth. 40, t. 35, fig. 39. Even the description
by Dillenius must have been made mainly from the plate, for it is a
caricature or exaggeration of the specimen (completely identified) in
the Sherardian herbarium, said to be raised from New England seeds.
It is either a sparsely-flowered state of A. viinineiis, Lam., or a sub-
racemose form of A. dumosus, L. The umbonate or much protuber-
ant disk of the capitulum in the plate is quite fictitious (as is also
the "caulis crassus "), at least there is no trace of it in the specimen
which evidently served for the figure. Yet this umbo and the thick
stem give the sole diagnosis of the Linnsean species.

A. MACROPHYLLUS is the well-known species.

A few specimens which had not been named or not taken up by
LinnaBus may be passed by. Linnoeus did not well know his species
of Aster and of Solidago. Consequently, while retaining most of his
species, it is necessary to suppress three or four of his names.

II. Species founded hy Lamarck, 1783, in Diet. i. 301-308.

The identifications gathered at Paris in Hort. Mus. Par., the General Herba-
rium, and those of Tournefort and of Jussieu. The proper herbarium of
Lamarck at Rostock I have not been able to consult. But distinct traces
of all the species, with one exception, have been found at Paris.

A. AMPLEXiCAULis. A form of A. NovcB-Anglice, L. ; but the
synonym from herb. Tournefort is of A. puniceiis, L.

A. AMYGDALiNUS. The common northern form of A. umhellatiis,
Mill. Diet. 1759, the older name.

A. RUBRiCAULis. The A. Icevis, L.

A. AMCENUS. The A. puniceiis, L.

A. PANicuLATUS. A commou and multiform northern species, the
A. Tradescanti, L., as to herb, and Hort. Ups. (but not of Morison),
comprising A. tenuifolius and A. simplex of Torr. and Gray, Flora,
mainly, excl. syn. Name changed by Nees to A. Lamarckianus, but
to be restored, being older than the homonym of Alton.

A. SALiciFOLius. Not found, nor was the " Virga aurea Cana-
densis elaiior, salicis minoris folio, Nees," identified in the herbarium
of Jussieu. I was informed by Professor Roeper that no specimen

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 169

was to be found in the herbarium of Lamarck. From the character,
one may perhaps assume its identity with the later homonym of Ait.
Hort. Kew.

A. viMiNEUS. The A. Tradescanti and xai-./ragilis of Torr. and
Gray, Flora. A name to be employed.

A. LONGiFOLius. A form of the ^. yi^MCCHS, Ait., and A. salicifo-
liiis, Richardson ; a northern species, for which this, the oldest name,
must be employed.

A. L^viGATUS. The A. mutabilis of Alton, common in European
gardens under the name of A. briwialis, Nees. It was well compared
by Lamarck with A. Icevis, and as differing by its more simple or not
imbricated involucre. Unequivocal indigenous specimens are hardly
known ; they are to be sought in Lower Canada and Nova Scotia.

A. nisriDUS. By the character clearly A. puniceus, L., to which
it has been referred.

A. PATULUS. The species still cultivated under this name, native
of Canada, &c., a low form of which is A. tardijlorus, L.

A. MISER, Lam. (not L.), is the A. purpuratus of Nees, A. virga-
tus, Ell.

III. Species of Walter, Flora Caroliniana, 1788.

A. Carolinianus. ) ttt n i • * i u ht- i,

> vVell-known species, taken up by Michaux.

A. SQUARROSUS. )

A. CILIATUS is quite unknown.

IV. Species founded {by Solander) in Aiton, Horius Kewensis, 1789.

A. NEMORALis. The well-known species.

A. UMBELLATUS. Credited to Mill. Dict. (1759), therefore much
earlier than A. amygdalinus, Lam. The indigenous s[)ecimen from
Nova Scotia is of a broad-leaved form, while those of Hort. Chelsea
(Miller's) and of Hort. Kew. are narrower-leaved.

A. PALUDOSTTS. Type of the section Heleastrvm.

A. PATENS. Specimens from Miller, and from New York, Ander-
son. But the specimen collected by Bartram in East Florida is A.
Carolinianus.

A. FOLIOLOSUS. A state of A. vimineus. Lam., verging to A. du^
mosiis, L. The jilant of Dill. Elth., on the figure of which Linna?ns
founded A. miser (vide supra), is referred here. Solander must have
seen the specimen in the Sherardian herbarium ; otherwise he could
hardly have made it out.

170 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

A. ERicoiDES. Here the species originates, as distinguished from
the next. The specimens are well marked, and bear also the name of
A. lucidus, Solander.

A. MULTiFLORUS. The A. ericoides dumosus of Dill. Elth ; and,
being the Gronovian plant also, it would more properly have retained
the Linnsean name, as already stated.

A. SALiciFOLius. A floriferous branch or summit of the plant
which is named A. carneus in Torr. and Gray, Fl. N. Am., and which
may also be A. sulicifolius, Lam. The specimen is of " Hort. Kew.
1781." Another specimen, ticketed as a variety, is different, perhaps
A. polyphyllus, Willd.

A. ^STivus. Two specimens on one sheet : Hort. Lee and Hort.
Kew. ; the species still in cultivation ; not that of Torrey and Gray's
Flora, but one more nearly related to A. paniculatus, Lam., appar-
ently indigenous only in British America.

A. JUNCEUS. Apparently the A. longifolius. Lam., at least the in-
digenous plant from Nova Scotia ; but the specimen from " Hort.
Kew. 1771," on which the species may be said to be founded, seems
to be a narrow-leaved form of A. paniculatus, Lam.

A. PENDULUS. A form of the next, with slender divergent branches ;
the A. miser, var. diffusus, Torr. and Gray.

A. DIFFUSUS. " Hort. CoUinson, 17G2, Hort. Kew. 1777, Hort. Lee,
1781." All forms of A. miser, var. diffusus, Torr. 'and Gray : and
this common and well-marked species may take the name of diffusus
rather than either the preceding or the following name.

A. DiVERGENS. " Hort. Kew. 1777," the specimen nearly de-
stroyed, and "Nova Scotia, prope Halifax, Halbgren, 1779." Clearly
of the preceding species.

A. MISER. " Hort. Kew. 1777," of course not the Linnteau plant ;
appears from the very small heads to be the Morisoniau A. Trades-
canti.

A. MUTABiLis. Specimens from " Hort. Kew. 1777, Hort. CoUin-
son, Hort. Jacquin." Being all of the same species, this might be
taken in place of the undeterminable Linna3an mutabilis ; but it is the
earlier published A, Icevigatiis, Lam., which, therefore, is the name
to be adopted.

A. Novi-Belgii. Specimens of various Asters, throwing no light
upon the Linna;an species.

A. PANICULATUS. Name pre-occupied by Lamarck ; the specimen
(not a good one) is of " Hort. Gordon, e sem. Labrador," and is pretty

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 171

clearly the same as A. Lindleyanus, To it. and Gray, which name
may be continued, although A. ciliolatus, Lindley, is aj^parenlly only
a small form of it.

A. sPECTABiLis. The well-marked species, cultivated at Kew
Gardens in 1777.

A. RADULA. The recognized species, originally from Nova Scotia,
near Halifax.

A. BLANDUS, Pursh, FI. ii. 555, is a species of Solander's, in the
Banksiau herbarium, described and published by Pursh from too
scanty material, a specimen collected on Bisque Island in the St.
Lawrence by Halbgren. And Solander indicates as a variety of
this a specimen from John Bartram. If not reduced and nearly
smooth forms of A. puniceus, both must belong to the A. tardi'Jiorus,
L., which see.

v. Species originating in Michaux, Flora Boreali- Americana, 1803.

A. SOLIDAGINEUS. The Sericocnrpus soUdagineus of Nees.

A. Marilandicus. Sericocarpus conyzoides^ Nees.

A. TORTiFOLius. Sericocarpus tortifoUus, Nees.

A. INFIRMUS. Somewhat earlier published than A. cornifolius,
Muhl. in Willd. Spec, for the volume containing the latter cites
Michaux. The habitat, " a Canada ad Carolinam," is erroneous as
respects Canada : the stations assigned in Michaux's Flora are not
rarely incorrect in a similar way« As is well known, this is A,
divaricatus of Linnseus as regards the synonymy, but not of his her-
barium, nor of the specific character. The present name is to be
adopted.

A. ACUMiNATus. The well-known species. It appears, from the
herbarium of Jussieu, that this is the A. divaricatus of Lamarck, but
not of Linnteus.

A. UNiFLORUS. A small and simple-stemmed form of the A.
nemoralis of Aiton.

A. SUBULATUS. A mixture of the small-rayed and conyzoid coast
species and of the nearly-related larger-rayed one (^A. divaricatus,
Torr. and Gray, Fl.), but in the proper herbarium mainly the former,
to which only the character applies, especially the "ligulis radii
minutis." This name to be employed, for it proves that no part of A.
linifolius, L., belongs here.

A. ARGENTKUS. A. sericeus, Vent., slightly earlier published.

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

A. coRiDiFOLics. A marked variety of A. dumosus, L., of the
piue-baneu district of the Soutiiern Atlantic States.

A. SPARSiFLORUS. A slender form of A. dumosus, L.

A. suRCULOSus. The recognized species, from North Carolina.

A. DivERSiFOLius. Same as A. undulauts of Linnaeus and of
most authors.

A. viLLOSUS. fA. ericoides, var. villosus, Torr. and Gray.

A. AMPLEXICAUHS. A. pateus, Ait. ; and there is an earlier A.
amplexicaulis, Lam.

A. BiFLORUS. A small northern variety of A. radula, Ait.

Nearly all the Michauxian species had already been well deter-
mined.

VI. Species originating in Hoffmann, Pliytographische Blatter, 1803.

A. CTANEUS. Clearly A. Icevis, L.

A. THYRSIFLORUS. The figure and detailed description point to
the A. Novi-Belgii. The plant in cultivation under the name twenty
to forty years ago, and preserved in herbaria, has smaller and nar-
rower leaves.

VII. Species originating in Willdenow, Species Plantarum, iii. part 3, pub-
lished in 1803. [Later than Michaux, whose species are mentioned, and
farther on in the book the Flora is cited by volume and page.]

A. piLOSUS. The A. villosus of Michaux, whose name is given as
a synonym, and whose specimen was described.

A. ciLiATUS, Muhl. in litt. Is A. middjlorus, Ait.

A. SPURius. A. NovcE-AnglicE, a cultivated form,

A. PiiLOGiFOLius, Muhl. The recognized jilant, from Muhlen-
berg, A. patens, var. phlogifoUus.

A. SAGiTTiFOLius, " Wedermeyer." The specimens on fol. 1, 2, 3,
represent the species in the herbarium ; that of Torrey and Gray's
Flora.

A. HUMiLis. The indigenous specimen from Muhlenberg is a low
and broad-leaved form of A. umbellatus, Ait., i. e. the Diplopappus
amygdalinus of Torr. and Gray's Flora. The cultivated specimen,
answering to the figure in Hort. Berol. t. G7, is A. infnnus, Michx.
The character appears to have been drawn from the former.

A. CORNIFOLIUS, Muhl. Same as the A. injirmus, Michx., and as
the A. humills figured in the Hortus Beroliueusis.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 173

A. ELEGANS. Described from a cultivated plant of unknown origin;
the specimen in the herbarium is A. spectahilis, Ait., under which
De Candolle cites the species, but also under A. squarrulosus.

A. CONYZOIDES. Sericocarpus conyzoides, Nees.

A. VERSICOLOR. Name to be adopted for the species most closely
related to A. Icevis, L. It is represented in the herbarium by fol. 1, 2,
and perhaps 3, which has no flowers. Fol. 4 is of A. Carolinianus,
and fol. 0, of some other species, possibly A. salignus.

A. LiEViGATUS. A mixture in the herbarium. Fol. 1 is either
A. Icevis or A. versicolor ; fol. 2 is a fragment of A. prenanthoides,
Muhl. ; fol. 3, of A. puniceus ; fol. 4 is wholly doubtful ; and fol. 5 is
of -4. Iceviffaius, Lam., a far older homonym.

A. PRENANTHOiDES, Muhl. The wcll-markcd species, from Muhl-
enberg.

A. AMPLEXiCATJLis, Muhl. Kot the homonym of Lamarck, nor of
Michaux. This is A. Icevis, L.

A. RECURVATUS, Willd. The specimen, '• Hort, Berol.," seems to
be A. paniculatus, Lam., or near it; but something else would appear
to be described, perhaps A. diffusus, Ait., surely not A. thyrsiflorus,
Hoffm., to which De Candolle refers it in part, for the corolla is
said to be no larger than in A. Tradescanli.

A. FLORiDajNDUS. Plant of the gardens, apparently A. Novi-
Belgii.

A. SEROTINUS. Apparently either A. Icevigatus, Lam., or a form
of A. Novi-Belgii.

A. LANOEOLATUS- Seemingly the A. paniculatus, Lam.

A. DRAcrxcuLOiDES. Cultivated specimens : fol. 1, 2, are of A.
paniculatus, Lam. ; fol. 3 of same with smaller heads, verging to the
Morisonian A. Tradescanti.

A. FRAGiLis. The Morisonian A. Tradescanti, not the A. Trades-
canti, \ar. fragilis, Torr. and Gray.

A few notes are added upon the representatives of some earlier
species in the Willdenovian herbarium.

A. NEMORALis. Two sheets ; not Alton's plant, but a Galatella of
the Old World; and to this the character evidently belongs, being
the same as the

A. HYSSOPIFOLIUS. The "Am. Bor." is a continuation of an origi-
nal mistake. Same of A. lixifolius.

A. SOLIDAGINOIDES. Michaux's A. solidagifieus, with a Greek
instead of the oriijinal Latin termination.

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

A. FOLIOLOSUS. Fol. 4 is A. vimiveus, Lam., therefore Alton's
plant or near it; fol. 1 is A. salidfolius, Ait., "A. obliquus, Nees;"
fol. 2, 3, A. ericoides, L. and Ait.

A. TENUiFOLius. Of course not the Linnaean plant ; but at least
four of the eight sheets belong to A. ericoides; the others are of
various species.

A. SALiciFOLius. Apparently A. cestivus, Ait., which is repre-
sented by cultivated specimens resembling the original in the Banksian
herbarium.

A. PANICULATUS is A. cordifoHus, L. Intended, of course, for
the Ait. Hort. Kew. species.

A. cORDiFOLius. The specimen from Muhlenberg is of A. sagitti-
folius.

A. SALiGNus, the name changed from A. salidfolius^ Scholler ; the
species referred to Europe (Germany and Hungary), where it prob-
ably is indigenous, or at least has long been domiciled.

A. MUTABiLis. Fol. 1, 2 are apparently the same as A. versicolor ;
fol. 3 is nearer A. Icevigatus, Lam.

A. vmiNEUS. Not of Lam., but the A. miser, Lam., that is,
A. purpuratus, Nees, and A. virgatiis, Ell.

A. Tradescanti. Fol. 1 is of the Morisonian plant ; while fol. 5
is A. pahdus, Lara.

A. SPECTABiLis. Not the Aitonian species, but some long-culti-
vated one, of the Novi-Belgii sort.

A. TARDIFLORCS. Same as the A. adulter inus,'V^\\\^. Enum., and
Lindl. Bot. Reg., the A. Novi-Belgii of Hort. Cliff., &c.

A. JUNCEUS. Apparently same as A. cestivus, Ait.

A. MISER. 1 . „ , , , , , • J- , • 1

All belong to the polymorphous species for which

> the name of A. dijfusus is preferred, with some

mixture of -4» dumosus L.

A. DIVERGENS.
A. DIFFUSUS.
A. PENDULUS.

Vni. Spedes originating in Wilhlenow, Enumeratio Plantarum Hort. Reg.
Bot. BcroUnensis, 1809.

A. SPARSiFLORUS. Micliaux's species taken up and described ; is
A. dumosus., a large-leaved form.

A. ADULTERiNDS. A. Novi-Belgii, answering to the specimens of
the plant cultivated in early times, as preserved in herb. Morison and
herb. Cliffort.

OF ARTS AND SOIENCESi 175

A. CONCINNCS. Apparently a good species, with small leaves and
heads, but still obscure as a wild plant.

A. BELLiDiFLORUS. Apparently derived from ^. joanicwZa^MS, Lam.

A. EMiNKNS. Apparently a state of A. salicifolius. Ait.

A. LAXUS, Probably a form of A. cestiviis, Ait.

A. SIMPLEX. Appears to be referable to A. salignus of Willdenow,
which, although related to A. paniculatus, Lam., is attributed to Europe.

A. POLYPHTLLrs. A wcll-marked species, related to A. ericoides,
but much larger in all its parts; for which I know no earlier name.
It is the A. tenuifolius of Nees, in part, and of De Candolle. It is
a late-flowering species, showy in cultivation, and Is little known by
indigenous specimens.

In the Supi^lement to the above, edited by Schlechtendal (the
father), 1813, after the death of "Willdenow, the two following Willde-
nowian species originate.

A. PALLENS. A form of A. patulus, Lam.

A. pnjscox. Ambiguous ; probably a form of the preceding.

IX. Species, or rather Names originating in Poiret, Diet. Suppl. i. 1810.

A. PR^EALTUS. A change of the name merely of the A. salici-
folius, Ait. Hort. Kew.

A. Pexnsylvanictts. Change of name of A. amplexicavMs, Muhl.
in Willd., that is, A. Icevis, L.

A. ARTEMisi.EFLORUS. Change of name of A. dracuncidoides,
Willd., but from the character should be A. Tradescanti, L., the plant
of Morison.

A. STRiCTUS. No original seen ; probably founded on A. salignus
of Willdenow.

X. Species originating in Pursh, Flora America; Septentrionalis , 1814.

A. LEDiFOLius. A. nemoralis, Ait., with changed name.

A. GRAMiNiFOLius. Solaudcr's, taken up from herb. Banks ; the
Erigeron hyssopifolius, jNIichx.

A. CANESCENS. Bradbury's plant, of the Mach^ranthera {Die,-
teria, Nutt.) section.

A. RETicrLATUS, The plant which was subsequently named A.
ohovatus by Elliott.

A. BLAXDUS. Taken up from Solander in herb. Banks., already
noted under Ait. Hort. Kew., at the close.

176 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

A. PEREGRiNus. Solander's species in herb. Banks., near to A.
salsitginosus, Richardson, if not a pubescent form of it.

A. sTRicTus (not of Poiret). A reduced and boreal form of A.
radula, Ait.; same as A. bijlorus, Michx.

XI. Species of the Atlantic United States originating in De Candolle, Prodi:

V. 1836.

A. PATEXTissiMus, Lindlcy, in DC, is a form of A. patens, Ait.,
with long branches.

A. AURiTUS, Lindley, in DC, is A. patens, var. phlogifolius.

A. UROPHYLLUS. ) Also of Lindlcy ; may both be referred to A.

A. HIRTELLUS. J sagittifoUus, Willd.

A. Drummondii, Lindley. A recognized heterophyllous species
of the Mississippi Valley, but ambiguous between A. sagittifoUus and
A. undulatus.

A. ciLiOLATDS, Lindley. A reduced form of A. paniculatus, Ait.,
that is A. Lindley anus f Torr. and Gray.

A. C-iERULESCENS. Spccies to be admitted, yet has seemed to pass
into A. salicif alius, Ait.

A. MULTiCEPS, Lindley. Only the A. oblongifolius, Nutt., from
St. Louis.

A. SUBASPER, Lindley. A. salicifolius, Ait., var. subasper.

A. HEBECLADUS. "| Texau forms of the polymorphous A. multi-

A. SCOPARIUS. i florus^ Ait.

A. HiRSUTiCAULis, Lindley. A narrow-leaved and hairy variety
of A. diffusus, Ait.

A. STENOPHYLLUS, Lindley. Narrow-leaved form of A. salicifo-
lius. Ait. ; or the specimen sent to Nees may be the nearly related
A. paniculatus, Lam.

A. BiFRONS, Lindley. A. diffusus, Ait., var. bifrons.

A. MiCROPHYLLUS, Torr. in Lindley, adn. This is A. cdnalus,
Nutt., earlier published.

A. AZUREUS, Lindley. A well-recognized heterophyllous species.

A. RETROFLEXUS, Lindley. Apparently same as A. thyrsijlorus,
Hoffm.

A. TDRBiNELLUs, Lindley. A well-recognized and very distinct
species.

The species of the high northern and of the western portions of
North America, of which several originate in De CandoUe's Prodromus,
are not here considered.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 177

2. Determination of the Species of Solidago.

1. Species of Linnccus, as represented in the Linna'on Herbarium and from

the earlier sources.

S. SEMrERViRENS. An undeveloped specimen of the sea-side
species of Atlantic North America. All the synonyms cited in the
Species Plantarum apjjear to belong here; that of Plukenet has been
verified.

S. Canadensis. Two slieets jiinned together : one is a minutely
pubescent form of the received species ; the other, from Kalm, belongs
to S. rugosa, Mill., viz. to the plant which has long passed for S.
altissima. The syn. Pluk. Aim. t. 236, fig. 1, which may have
suggested the specific name, is to be excluded.

S. ALTISSIMA. The true original of the Linna^an species is the
" Virga aurea altissima serotina, panicula speciosa patula. Mart. Cent.
14, t. 14," i. e. Martyn's Hist. PI. 1728, fol., represented by an excel-
lent plate, clearly representing a large form of S. Canadensis, to which
Linnaeus declares it is very similar. He distinguishes it by " foliis
enerviis subintegerrimis ; " the last word was changed in the second
edition to " serratis." It is a form with thicker and more obscurely
triple-nerved leaves than the ordinary S. Canadensis. The specimens
in the herbarium are confounded, apparently from the first, also by
attempted rectifications by Smith. A sheet ticketed by Linnaeus
" altissima" is noted, apparently by Smith's hand, as " *S'. Canadensis,"
but it i^robably is not. Another sheet holds specimens numbered 1,

2, 3 : the first of these is a panicle of S. nemoralis, the second is a
branch of S. hicolor, the third belongs to aS*. odora. A specimen
ticketed " serotina " by Linnfcus, and by Smith " altissima," is the
species which has so long passed as S. altissima, viz. ^S". riigosa, Mill.
The Dillenian figures appended by Linnajus as ^' plantas vix genuinas "
belong to the latter species, as the plates themselves show, and the
originals in the Sherardian herbarium confirm. These have been
wrongly taken as the type of aS. altissima, which, however, must now
be reduced to a synonym of S. Canadensis, while the species of Dill.
Elth., in all three plates, may assume the old name of S. rugosa, Mill.,
which is much more appropriate than altissima for a plant which
is seldom tall. The other Solidago, " Virga aurea Marilandica," &c.,
of Martyn, t. 13, I cannot identify from the figure. It may be the
var. procera or var. scabra of Canadensis, but the heads seem much
too large.

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 12

1(8 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

S. BiCOLOR. This species, published in the Mantissa, is iu the
herbarium under the name of S. discolor. Two other sheets are
fastened together, both of specimens from Kahn. One of them,
ticketed " K. 77, radio albo," and '•^bicolor" in the hand of Linnasus,
is not of that species, but seems to be a form of S. rugosa. The
other, marked only " K.," judging from the character and other indi-
cations, must be the original of

S. LATERIFLORA ; Otherwise that is not in the herbarium. It is a
familiar form of the Aster miser, var. diffusus, Torr. and Gray, Fl.,
that is, of A. diffusus, Ait.

S. LANCEOLATA, also of the Mantissa, is in the herbarium from
Kalm, " 30," with another specimen, doubtless the original from
Royen.

S. Mexicana. The " Virga aurea limonii folio," &c., of Tourne-
fort, an obtuse-leaved form of S. sempervirens, L., which is the name
to be adopted. Came in all probability from the temperate North
American coast, not from Mexico.

S. CiESiA. Not in the herbarium under this name. The species
was founded on the " Virga aurea Marilandica cassia glabra " of Dill.
Elth. 414, t. 307, f. 395, which, as the plate shows and the original at
Oxford proves, is the well-known *S'. ccBsia.

S. FLEXiCAULis. The specimen is S. ccesia, with which, however,
the character " foliis ovatis " and the figures cited from Plukenet and
from Hermann do not accord. The syn. " Virga aurea Canadensis,
asterisci folio," Herm. Parad. t. 244, apparently from the figure and
certainly from the " Canadensis" is the broad-leaved relative of S. ccesia,
for which I have always kept the name of S. latifolia, L. Hermann
indicates that it is V. Canadensis Scrophularia; folio, of the Paris
Garden in his time. Plukenet's figure and specimen, t. 235, f. 3,
are pretty clearly the same.

S. LATiFOLiA. The specimen which appears to be the original of
the species is our latifolia, and the habitat is a confirmation. The
name written by Linnajus on the sheet is " lateriflora," which Smith
has corrected to "■latifolia, vide Sp. PI." But it is not the ordinary
thin-leaved and flexuous-stemmed form of our shady woods and dells ;
it is rather a state which this species takes on when cultivated in open
ground. The syn. of Plukenet, t. 235, f. 4, should be this, by the
phrase " latissimo folio, Canadensis glabra ; " but the preserved speci-
mens, which quite accord with the figure, must belong to the S. latissi-
mifolia of Miller, a broad-leaved a-xillary-flowered state of S. elliptica,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 179

Ait., which appears to have been early cultivated in European botanic
gardens.

The conclusion formerly reached is to be adhered to, namely, that
of the three antecedent names, S. ccesia, Jlexicaulis, and latifolia,
the first and the last are to be maintained, and the S. jiexicauUs
dropped; the plant of the herbarium under this name being only
S. ccEsia, the character and synonymy belonging to S, latifolia,
while the sole synonym (of Plukeuet) under latifolia goes to S.
elliptica of Alton.

S. viRGAUREA. The Linna;an specimens are wholly of the Euro-
pean plant.

S. RiGiDA. An unmistakable species ; the name suggested by
Herm. Farad. Bat., whose figure is cited.

S. NovKi$oiiACEXSis. Single specimen, its source not recorded.
It has long been a puzzle, but it is certainly no Solidago, almost cer-
tainly not from America, and pretty clearly the Aster Tartaricus,
Linn. f.

II. Of Alton, Ilortus Keicensis, 1789, preserved in the Banksian Herbarium.

This is the next authority on the genus, except the edition of
Miller's Dictionary cited in the work, in which specific names are
given in a tentative way, within brackets. As is well known, the
whole editorship was by Solander ; but his name not appearing, the
work is necessarily cited as that of the elder Alton, whose name only
is on the titlepage. Accordingly, to the latter the species of Solid-
ago, Aster, &c., published in the Hortus Kewensis have always been
attributed.

S. Canadensis, L. Various forms of the Linnnean species,

S. PROCERA. Two specimens on one sheet, " Hort. Kew. 1778,"
the date which is borne by very many of the specimens in the her-
barium. They are of S. Canadensis, var. inocera, Torr. and Gray, Fl.,
which has larger heads than the type, very commonly in ascending
dense racemiform clusters, as expressed in Solander's phrase '• racemis
spiciformibus erectis, inuptis nutantibus ; " but he notes in his manu-
script, '• an racemi semper erecti ? " The pubescence of the stem and
leaves is hardly "villous," but rather puberulous.

S, SEROTiNA, Not really the plant of Torr. and Gray, Fl., but
their S. gigantea, that is, the completely glabrous form, the S. glabra,
Desf. &c.

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

S. GiGANTEA. The S. serotinci of Torn, and Gray, Fl.,*&c., namely,
the form with some sparse hairiness on the midrib and often the Lit-
eral ribs or veins underneath ; also " pedunculis liirtis " rather more
manifestly than in the preceding. The two are to be taken as of one
species, for which the name serotina is preferable. The glabrous form
is seldom gigantesque ; the jiresent one often is so, and may be dis-
tinguished as var, gigantea.

S. KEFLEXA. The specimen, as of the preceding species, is of
Hort. Kew. 1778, but all three are in the work said to have been
cultivated in 1758 by Philip Miller. This is a badly grown form of
S. Canadensis. Indeed Solander in his manuscript notes, " Planta
primo intuitu videtur monstrosa varietas S. Canadensis."

S. LATERIFLORA. Two shccts from " Hort. Kew. 1778," not the
Linna?an plant, nor of certain determination, probably a form of S.
ulmifolia, Muhl. Solander, in his manuscript, notes a resemblance to
S. ccesia, to which, however, the Linna?an plant (which is Aster
diffusus) has more likeness.

S. ASPERA. Name taken from Dilh Elth. 411, t. 305, on which
the species is founded; specimen from Hort. Kew., 1778, a form of
the next species with rather broad and short rugose-veiny leaves, the
upper face quite scabrous.

S. ALTissiMA. Not the Linnfean plant (vide supra, p. 177), but that
which from this date has passed for it, and for which we must now fall
back to the oldest and in the main most appropriate name, S. rugosa,
Mill. Diet. All the indicated varieties of this polymorphous but
well-marked species belong to it, including that which Pursh pub-
lished as »S'. villosa.

S. NEMORALis. The spccics which has always gone by this name.
An indigenous specimen from " Virginia Dr. Mitchell," and a culti-
vated one of Hort. Kew. 1778.

S. ARGUTA. Two sheets; one of Hort. Fothergill, 1778; the
other of unknown source, j^robably an indigenous specimen. Both
are the S. arguta of Muhlenberg and of most authors anterior to Torr.
and Gray's Flora, in which this species was taken up as S. Miihlcn-
bergii, Torr. and Gray. I was misled by a wrong identification
made by Dr. Boott, to which in 1839 I mistakenly acceded. A third
specimen, ticketed by Solander " S. argutce affinis, Hort.," is mani-
festly of the same species. This restoration brings back the specific
name to a plant for which it is appropriate, as it was not for the
following species.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 181

S. JUNCEA. The true original of this species, as the Solaiuler
manuscript shows, is a small and perfectly characteristic specimen,
ticketed " Hudson's Bay, Hutchinson." The specific name was mani-
festly suggested by the slender and naked racemiform fiower-chisters
of small heads. It is the S. arguta, yar.Juncea, of Torr. and Gray's
Flora, the larger and broad-leaved form of which was wrongly taken
up as *S'. arguta. The other sheet, of cultivated specimens, one, if not
both, from Kew Gardens, may be of the same species, or may be
S. neglecta, Torr, and Gray, with unusually spreading inflorescence.

S. ELLiPTiCA. Two sheets ; each with a single specimen. One
is of Hort. Kew. 1778, is tlie upper part of a large plant, with '• ra-
cemis paniculatis secundis," and is more like the Solidago referred to
this species in Torr. and Gray's Flora, now viewed as a large
form of S. ElUottii, found near the sea-coast of southern New Eng-
land and New York, the leaves only inconspicuously serrate. The
other, brought from "Hort. Rtg. Parisiensis" by Houston, is the
plant there cultivated of old under the name of S. latifolia or lateri-
flora, the ^S*. latlssimifolia of Miller, as Solander indicates, and prob-
ably Plukenet's t. 235, f. 4. It appears to be the species still under
cultivation in Europe, with flower-clusters abbreviated and mainly in
the axils of comparatively ample leaves, so as to resemble long-
cultivated *S. latifolia, L. It will take the name of *S'. elliptica, var.
axillijiora. No indigenous specimens known.

S. SEMPERviRENS, L. Three specimens on two sheets, an indige-
nous one from Dr. Mitchell, and cultivated ones from Miller and from
Kew ; all narrow-leaved forms of the Linneean species.

S. ODORA. Three sheets : one with an indigenous specimen,
"Cherokee Country, W. V. Turner, 1769," with an aboriginal name
recorded, and is the true plant; so is the original of Plukenet's t. 116,
f. 6, preserved among the Plukenet plants at the British Museum. The
other specimens are from Kew and from Miller, the latter not clearly
of this species ; and two large leaves affixed to the sheet belong to
something quite different, probably to Erechthites Jiieracif alius.

S. LAXCEOLATA, L. One of the sheets contains a specimen of S.
tenuifolia, indicated as a variety.

S. LAEVIGATA. Same as S. sempervirens, L., a form with lanceo-
late and acute leaves.

S. Mexicana, L. The Linna^an plant, from Kew Gardens and
from Paris. Clayton's plant is a form with narrower and acute upper
leaves, nearly the S. laevigata, Ait.

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

S. VIMINEA. Hort. Kew. 1778, a form of the S. sempervirens, L.
(the name to be adopted for this maritime sjiecies), with some pubbs-
cence on the upper part of the stem.

S. STRICTA. The cultivated plants, from Miller and from Kew,
1778, on which the species was characterized and published, prove to
be identical with the well-marked and much later S. virgata, Michx.,
a pine-barren species of the Atlantic coast. The way in which tie
name was appropriated to more northern species is as follows, So-
lander first characterized in his manuscript and ticketed in the herba-
rium a "*S'. parvijiora,'' on a specimen from Hudson's Bay, collected by
Banks (the S. Terrce-Novce, Torr. and Gray), afterwards changed that
name for 8. stricta, at the same time erasing his phrase " paniculato-
corymbosa racemis recurvis " and adding to the habitat " prope
Novum Eboracum," but not erasing "ad Sinum Iludsonis." The
early-cultivated specimens in the herbarium are not good ones, the
inflorescence becoming compound, as it often does in the indigenous
state ; yet the species ought not to have been so mistaken. The name
has been used for more than one northern species, but as published
in the Hortus Kewensis and cultivated at the time, it belongs alto-
gether to the well-known S. virgata of Michaux, which name it
supei'sedes.

There is a specimen from Kew Gardens, 1778, noted by Solander in
manuscript as S. stricta^ var., which is a form of S. speciosa, Nutt.,
and apparently is the original of S. erecta, Pursh : vide infra, p. 187.

S. LiNOiDES of Solander, in herb. (Hort. Lee, 1779), proves to be
identical with the original S. stricta, that is, S. virgata, Michx. ; and
with this his unpublished character agrees, especially the " caule stricto
simplicissimo," and the " raceraus terminalis spiciformis," as it does
not with the species which Dr. Boott thought he had identified with
it.

S. rETiOLAUis. The authentic plant, of Hort. Kew. 1778, was
rightly identified by Dr. Boott long ago, and taken up in Torr. and
Gray's Flora, and the specimen is not very undeserving of the name.
Solander in his manuscript distinguishes two forms, viz., " «, foliis
integerrimis, calycibus squarrosis," thus noting a distinctive feature,
and " j3, foliis serratis ; " the latter, marked "■ Hort.," is of a very
different species, not well made out, but apparently of S. Virgaurea of
Europe.

S. BICOLOR, L. The Linna^an species.

S. itiGiDA, L. The well-marked Linna^an species.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 183

S. C^ESIA, L. A cultivated and branching form, from " Ilort.
Chelsea," with unusually racemose-paniculate inflorescence, the S.
gracilis of Schrader. There is a depaui^erate indigenous specimen,
from "New York, Anderson, 1778," which naturally was thought
different, and is ticketed '• S. tenera." There is also one of the
more normal form of the species, upon which is founded S. axillaris.^
Pursh.

S. A5IBIGUA. No native country assigned; but, from the speci-
men, it may be probably referred to the European S. Virgaurea.
Under this name, also, an altered form of S. latifolia, L., was in
early cultivation.

S. MULTiKADiATA. The Original in Solander's manuscript is from
Labrador, 17 Go, and is designated as '■'■ Solidaginis minutce maxime
affinis, cujus forte sole varietas radiis plurimis." Upon the same sheet
are similar but more dwarfed specimens, of later date, from " North-
west Coast, Sledge Island, Dav. Nelson ; " and from the same sta-
tion and collector there is a sheet filled with a larger form, which
Solander was disposed to refer to S. Camhrica ; on a third sheet
are specimens from Kew Gardens, 1780, also from " Gordon ad Mile
End, 1777, Decembri," ticketed " var. ramosa" abnormal plants,
flowering out of season.

For the species taken up by Pursh from Herb. Banks., see further
on, viz. p. 187.

m. Of Michaux, Flora Boreali-Americana, 1803.

It is known through tradition that this work was prepared by
L. C. Richard, from the collections of the elder Michaux; but he
wholly withheld his name, which therefore cannot be cited.

Of the twelve species of Solidago, all well determined, four here
originate ; viz. —

S. PAUCiFLOscuLOSA. A peculiar species of the Florida coast,
the only shrubby one.

S. GLOiiERATA. A robust large-flowered species of the Alleghany
Mountains.

S. viRGATA. Proves to be the original S. stricta, Ait. ; vide
p. 182.

S. RETRORSA. Is S. odora, Ait., while the S. odora of Michaux is
S. tortifolia, Ell.

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

IV. Of Willdenow, Species Plantarum, 1803.

Volume III, part 3, containing the Compositor, is later than Mich-
aux's Flora, which in some places it refers to.

The species in Willdenow's herbarium are numbered consecutively,
and under the several species the sheets are numbered. This vras
probably done after Willdenow's death. The folios bearing the higher
numbers are usually the older and the more authentic for the species.
Many of the earlier numbers are badly misnamed, and may be later
additions. The Muhlenbergian species here originate, and are repre-
sented in the herbarium by named and determinable specimens, which
is not the case in Muhlenberg's own herbarium at Philadelphia. The
latter proves to be of no account for this genus and Aster.

S. Canadensis, L. Mostly true ; but fol. 1 is S. ccesia, and fol. 5
is S. odora.

S. PROCERA, Ait. The plant of the Hortus Kewensis.

S. SEROTiNA, Ait. The plant of Torr. and Gray's Flora, having
some pilosity on the ribs of the leaf beneath, the >S. giffcmtea, Ait.

S. GIGANTEA, Ait. Fol. 3 is the authentic specimen, from Muhl-
enberg, glabrous, the true S. serotina of Alton ; fol. 1, 2, are unde-
veloped cultivated specimens of other species.

S. ciLiARis, Muhl. in litt. Is S.juncea, Ait.

S- REFLEXA. Fol. 2 is the authentic plant, and apparently of
Alton, viz. a form of S. Canadensis ; fol. 1 may be a form of S.
ruffosa, Mill.

S. LATERIFLORA. Not the Linnaean plant, but the plant early cul-
tivated under this name, viz. *S'. eUiptica, var. axillijiora.

S. ASPERA, Ait. The plant of Alton, viz. a form of *S'. rugosa,
Mill.

S. ALTissiMA, L. Fol. 1 is a form of ^S*. Canadensis; fol. 2,
vrhich accords with Willdenow's character, is S. rugosa, Mill., with
narrow leaves.

S. RUGOSA, Mill. From Muhlenberg; with broadly oblong and
not rugose but unusually scabrous leaves.

S. SCABRA, Muhl. in litt. Same as the preceding, with smaller
and more sen-ate leaves, rugose-veiny and scabrous beneath, glabrous
and nearly smooth above. But Muhlenberg in his manuscript Florula
Lancastriensis evidently describes not this, but S. procera, Ait.

S. NEMORALis, Ait. Only a radical leaf represents the species;
the flowering specimen and two large radical leaves are of S. patula^

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 185

Muhl. Ticketed " Fintleniann," therefore cultivated. Willdenow's
own description is inconjiruously made up of the two.

S. PATULA, Muhl. in litt. Three sheets, apparently all from
Muhlenberg. One is named " S. angulata^ Muhl.," in the hand-
writing of Sprengel. Willdenow singularly omits all mention of the
characteristic scabrosity of the upper surface of the leaves, which
under the preceding species he has described from similar and mis-
placed leaves.

S. L'LMIFOLIA, Muhl. in litt. Dwarf and scanty specimen of the
Muhleubergian species.

S. ARGL'TA, Ait. No specimen.

S. JUNCEA, Ait. No specimen which belongs here, but one so
named is S. nemoralis, from JMuhlcnbcrg.

S. ELLiPTiCA, Ait. No specimen.

S. SEMrERViKEXS. Cultivated specimens of the species, with
narrow and acute leaves.

S. ODORA, Ait. Three folios of this species, and one of S. nemo-
ralis, from Kinn.

S. BICOLOK, L. The well-known species.

S. PETiOLARis, Ait. The plant of fol. 2 " v. v." is European ^S".
Virgcmrea. Fol. 1 contains an indigenous S. speciosa, Nutt., from
Muhlenberg.

S. STRiCTA, Ait. Truly the species of Solander, viz. S. virgata,
Michx., a leafy cultivated specimen, from Hunnemann, probably sent
from some English garden.

S. LAXCEOLATA, L. A Cultivated and an indigenous specimen, the
latter from Richard.

S. c.ESiA, L. Fol. 2 and 3 are true, from Muhlenberg; fol. 1
is some other cultivated plant.

S. iiisPiDA, Muhl. in litt. Upper part of a plant of S. bicolor,
var. concolor.

S. L^viGATA, Ait. Two folios of the broader-leaved S. seynper-
virens, sent by Muhlenberg. " Pedunculi villosi " does not apply to
them ; they are barely pubescent.

S. Mexicana, L. From Hunnemann ; same as the foregoing.

S. viMiis^EA, Ait. Cultivated specimen of a narrow-leaved, less
succulent, open-paniculate state of »S'. semper virens, L.

S. FLEXiCAULis, L. Three folios of S. latifolia^ Torr. and Gray.

S. AMBiGUA, Ait. Cultivated forms, apparently of European S.
Virgcmrea, and a specimen perhaps of S. latifolia, L., in an altered
condition.

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

S. MULTiRADiATA, Ait. Some of the specimens apparently true;
one is S. 7-ugosa, Mill.

S. RiGiDA, L. From Muhlenberg.

S. no. 15986, sent by Muhlenberg as No. 300, is S. Canadensis,
var. scabra, Torr. and Gray's Flora, and apparently the S. scahra of
Muhlenberg, according to the description in his unpublished Flora
Lancastriensis. Muhlenberg's own herbarium in its existing state
throws no light upon the question.

V. Of Willdenow, Enumeratio Planiarum Hort. Reg. BeroUnensis, 1809.

S. RECURVATA. Cultivated plant, best described as between S.
gracilis, Poir. (a derivative of S. ccesia) and *S'. uhnifolia, not
matched by any indigenous specimens. A plant cultivated under this
name in the Berlin Garden, 1838, 1839, seems like a hybrid between
S. ccBsia, var. paniculata, and S. Canadensis.

S. LIVID A. Cultivated plant, best described as between S.fuscata,
Desf., and S. ccesia, var. paniculata. Some indigenous specimens of
S. ccesia seem to indicate this as its original.

S. HIRTA. Folios 2 and 3 belong to S. rugosa, Miller, a form
with erect inflorescence and rather large heads; and fol. 1, an imper-
fect and uncertain specimen, may be of the same species.

S. LiTHOSPEUJiiFOLiA. Two sheets ; same as S. viminea, Ait., but
more puberulent and broader-leaved ; being probably a state of *S.
sempervirens much changed under long cultivation. But the aspect of
the cultivated plant is very unlike that of S. sempervirens.

S. FRAGRANS. Cultivated plant : a narrower-leaved form of S.
lateriflora, Willd., Spec, viz. S. elliptica, vai-. axillijlora.

VI. Of Polret, Diet. {Enc. Meth.) viii. 1808.

The original species are the following, including those of Desfon-
taines. Cat. Hort. Par., or rather Tableau, Bot. Mus. 1804.

S. GLABRA, Desf. The S. serotina. Ait. Still common in Euro-
pean cultivation.

S. CONFERTA, Poir. Described from herb. Desfontaines ; is S.
nemoralis. Ait., as appears from the original, now in the herbarium of
Dr. Cosson.

S. GRACILIS, Poir. A slightly changed form of S. ccesia, L., cult.
Hort. Paris. &c.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 187

VII. Of Poiret, Suppl v. 4G1, 1817.

S. CORYMBOSA, Poir. ; of unknown origin, was founded ou a form
of S. Virga-aiirea, preserved in herb. Poir., now Cosson.
S. MULTiFLOKA, Ilort. Par. See Desf. Cat. infra.

VIII. Of Pursh, Flora Americcc Septentrionalis, 1814 ; original species
only, most of tliem taken up from Herb. Banks, really from
Solander's names.

S. viLLOSA. The S. altissima /3, Ait. Kew., a thiu-leavcd and
hairy-stemmed variety of S. rugosa, Mill.

S. PYRAMiDATA. From " Herb. Enslen." The S. pilosa, Walt.,
which is also S. Jistulosa, j\lill. Diet.

S. ASPERATA. Is S. patula, Muhl. Not now observed in the
Banksian herbarium, but was once identified there by Dr. Boott, and
it was named by Pursh in that of Lambert.

S. Sarothr^e. From Lewis and Clark's collection ; Gutierrezia
Euthamice.

S. ERECTA. No specimen in the Banksian herbarium is so named ;
but Pursh probably had in view the plant referred to as the S.
stricta ^ of Solander in that herbarium, wliich is probably a narrow-
leaved form of S. speciosa, Nutt. More evidence would be required
to supersede the latter name.

S. MACROPHTLLA. There is no specimen so named to be found in
the Banksian herbarium (nor is there any of S. squarrosa of Pursh's
time) ; but I confidently identify Pursh's species with a large speci-
men of S. thyrsoidea, Meyer, collected in 1779 by Halbgren on Bisque
Island in the Bay of St. Lawrence, which is ticketed by Solander,
" S. pratensis, var. caule villosiusculo." Pursh's is the earliest-
published name of this species, and may be adopted.

S. HUMiLis. Founded by Solander on a specimen collected by
Banks himself in Newfoundland, and on the shores of Hudson's Bay,
taken up by Richardson, Boott, &c.

S. ELATA. The character is only " S. caule piloso tereti, foliis
lanceolatis subtus pilosiusculis, racemis erectis, ligulis elongatis. Herb.
Banks, MSS." It is not referred to by Solander in his note-books.
There are two specimens so named by him, on separate sheets; but it
seems that they were thought too uncertain for publication, as indeed
they are.

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

IX. Of Desfontaines, Cat. Hort. Reg. Paris., ed. 3, 1829.

S. GLABRA. Same as S. serotina, Ait, first published in Poir. Diet.

S. NUTANS. A form of S. Canadensis, L.

S. INTEGRIFOLIA. A Cultivated state of S. sempervirens, L.

S. HU-MiLis. A low form of S. rugosa, Mill., with inflorescence
not normally developed under cultivation.

S. FUSCATA. Species of unknown source, introduced into the Paris
Garden about the year 1828, first mentioned in the additamentum to
Desfontaines' Catalogue, p. 3G2, as «S^. fusca, Hort. Par. ; in the adno-
iationes, p. 402, characterized as S. fuscata. It is a smooth and gla-
brous and rather freely branching plant, in the virgately thyrsoidal
and not at all secund inflorescence recalling S. puberula, but with
broader and obtuse involucral bracts, the stems purplish. Not identi-
fied with any indigenous species.

S. PLANTAGiNEA. The Same as S. eUiptica, Ait.

S. MULTIFLORA. First published in Poir. Suppl. v. 461, in culti-
vation down at least to 1869 ; it appears to be related to S. nlmifolia
as S. humilis is to S. rugosa, viz. a form in which the leaves have be-
come firmer and the panicles less evolute by exposure under cultiva-
tion. No indigenous specimens well correspond.

S. ASTERULA. Apparently the same as the plant cultivated in the
Paris Garden under the unpublished name of aS. rigidida, Bosc, from
about 1828 to 1831, not recognized in the wild state, perhaps derived
from the preceding or from S. Elliottii, or from S. rugosa, which the
hirsute pubescence of the upper part of the stem strongly suggests.

S. GRANDiFLORA. This I take to be a tall cultivated state of
S. littoralis, Savi, of the Italian coast, a species quite distinct from
S. Virgaiirea. " .S*. Narhonensis, Pourret, in Act. Tolos. iii. 329," which,
if actually published, has been overlooked, is perhaps the same species.

X. Of De Candolle, Prodromiis, v. 1836.

S. Cleli^. Probably S. elliptica, Ait., var. axilUJlora, Gray, and
the same as S. duhia, Scop. Del. Insub. t. 10.

S. SCABRIDA. A Mexican species, seemingly only a larger-flow-
ered S. Canadensis, var. scahra.

S. DECEMFi.ORA, is S. uemoralis^ Ait., from Texas.

S. Fj.AnKLLiFoujiis, Wcndl. (/S. fabellata, Schrader, cited by

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 189

Sprengel as a syn. of liis S. arguta)^ appears to be S. lirida, "Willcl.
Enum.

S. ScHUADKRi. Cultivated plant; looks like a hybrid between
S. ccesia, var. panicidata, and S. Canadensis (inflorescence not well
developed) ; while the plant cultivated under the name in the Paris
Garden in 1^69 is purely the former.

S. CARiNATA, Schrader, in litt., is S. viminea, Ait., viz. S. semper-
rire7is, var. viniinea, Gray.

S. LEPiDA. A species of the Northwest coast, collected by
ria:'nke, to which S. ehugafa, Xutt., veiy closely approaches.

S. CONFERTIFLORA. Another plant of Htunke's collection on the
Northwest coast, very near the variable S. hmyiilis, Pursh, probably
only a quite glutinous form of it, the S. glutinosa, Nutt.

S. SPATiiiLATA. Came not from " Mexicanis terris," properly so
called, but from Monterej^ in California, and is aS'. spiciformis, Torr.
and Gray, Fl., which thus becomes a synonym. ,

S. ROTUNDIFOLIA. Is a ruuud-leaved form of S. radula, Nutt.,
from Texas.

3. SoLiDAGO: General Disposition of the Admitted Noi'th American
Species, with the principal Synonyms^ at least those not cdreadij
adduced in Torr. ^ Gray, Flora N. America.

§ 1. VIRGAUREA. ( Virga-aurea, Tourn.)

* Squarros.^. ( § 1. Chrysastrum, Torr. & Gray.)
S. DISCOIDEA, Torr. &, Gray. A uniformly rayless species.

S. SQUARROSA, Muhl.

S. PETiOLARis, Ait., & var. axgusta, S angusta., Torr. & Gray, Fl.

* * Glomeruliflor^.
-I— Akenes canescently hirsute or pubescent : stem and branches
terete, often glaucous.

S. CiESiA, L., with var. axillaris {S. axillaris, Pursh) and var.
paniculata. To the latter is referred S. gracilis, Poir., S. ar-
gida, Spreng. Syst. (not Ait.), S. argentea, Hornem., S. Schraderi of
the Gardens (that of DC. seems to be an abnormal or hybrid form),
and even S. recurvata, Willd., all from the Gardens, and altered
by cultivation. This species is also the probable parent of ^S*.
livida, Willd., including S. Jiabellata, Schrader, or S. Jlabellijbrmis,
Wendl,

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

■f- -h- Akenes canescently hirsute : stem and branches angled,
not glaucous.

S. LATiFOLiA, L. excl. syn, Pluk. S. Jlexicaulis, L., ex. syn. & char.,

not of herb.
S. LANCiFOLiA, Torr. & Gray, in Chapm. Fl. 209.
S. CuRTisii, Torr. & Gray ; with var, pubens, the S. puhens, Curtis,

in Torr. & Gray.

-1- •)— H— Akenes glabrous : inflorescence virgately thyrsoid.

S. MONTICOLA, Torr. & Gray, in Chapm. Fl. S. Curtisii, var. ? mon-

ticola, Torr. &. Gray, Fl.
S. BICOLOR, L. aS'. viminea, Bosc in herb. Poir. ; therefore S. erecta,

DC. Prodr. — Var. concolor, Torr. & Gray. S. hispida, Muhl.

in Willd. S. hirsuta, Nutt. — Var. lanata. S. lanata, Hook. Fl.

* * * TlITRSIFLOR^.

H— Southwestern species, fully two feet high, with very numer-
ous short and firm entire leaves, uniform up to the inflorescence :
pubescence minute, somewhat scabrous and cinereous : heads
four lines long.

S. BiGELOVii, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. svi. 80. Cinereous-puberu-
lent ; leaves oval and oblong, mostly obtuse at both ends, and his-
pidulous on the margins ; thyrsus simple or compound, rather dense,
or at length open ; involucre broadly campanulate, puberulent ;
akenes minutely pubescent or glabrate. S. petiolarls^ Gray in Bot.
Mex. Bound. 79, not Ait. Mountains of New Mexico and Arizona ;
also adjacent Mexico. — It passes into var. Wrightii. A form
with sometimes narrower leaves, and a simple thyrsus of few heads,
inclining to corymbose. S. petiolaris, var.. Gray, PL Wright, i. 94.
S. Wrightii, Gray, 1. c. Southwestern Texas to Arizona.

S. LiNDHEiMERiANA, Scheele in Linna3a, xxi. 599. S. speciosa, var.
rigidiuscula, Gray, PI. Lindh. ii. 222, not Torr. & Gray.

•I- -I- S. Alleghanian species, with thinner and bright green mostly
ample and serrate leaves.

•H- Of the middle country.

S. BucKLEYi, Torr. & Gray. A somewhat stately species, obtained
from Middle Alabama by Buckley, perhaps even earlier from Lin-
coln Co., North Carolina, by M. A. Curtis, and later in Jasper Co.,
Georgia, by Professor Porter.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 191

■M- ++ Of the high mountains.

S. GLOMERATA, Michx. Does not well accord with the name, the
large heads when well developed being loosely disposed or scattered.
S. spiTUAM^A, M. A. Curtis.

-1- -1- •)- Boreal-montane, of difficult and uncertain limitation.
++ Bracts of the involucre acute.

S. JiACROPHTLLA, Pursh. S. t/ii/rsoidect, E. Meyer, Torr, & Gray,

FL, &c. *S'. leiocarpa, DC. N. New England and Lake Superior to

Hudson's Bay.
S. MULTiRADiATA, Ait. S. Vtrffaurea, var. multiradiata^ Torr. &

Gray, Fl. Labrador to Northern Rocky Mountains and Unalaska.

— Var. SCOPULORUM. S. corymbosa, Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil.

Soc. Higher Rocky Mountains to New Mexico, Utah, &c. — Var.

Neo-Mexicaxa. a tall form, perhaps quite distinct, two feet

high, with numerous heads loosely disposed in approximate axillary

as well as terminal clusters, forming a narrow elongated thyrsus.

High summit of one of the Mogollon Mountains, H. H. Rusby, 1881.

And a form approaching it was collected by Dr. Palmer in Utah.
S. ViROAUREA, L., var. alpina, Bigelow. Alpine region of the

mountains of Maine, New Hampshire, and Northern New York.

Also Hudson's Bay (?).

•H- ++ Bracts of the involucre obtuse.
S. HUMiLis, Pursh, not Desf. — Var. Gillmani is an extreme form

of this variable species, with dentate even laciniate leaves and an

open compound panicle ; growing on sand hillocks on the shores

of Lakes Superior and Michigan.
S. CONFERTIFLORA, DC, S. glutinosa, Nutt., of Oregon to British

Columbia, near the coast, is probably only another form of S.

humilis.

-I— -1— H— -!- California coast species, with few heads and incon-
spicuous rays.

S. SPATHULATA, DC. S. spiciformis^ Torr. & Gray, Fl. Hajnke's
plant is from Monterey, California.

* * * * Paniculate.
-1— Maritimce, Icevigatce.
S. cONPixis. Apparently pale green; leaves lanceolate and rather
short, or the radical obovate; heads small (two lines long), crowded

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

in a dense oblong panicle, not secund ; rays small, not surpassing
the disk-flowers ; akenes canescently iiubescent. S. sempervirens
Gray, Bot. Calif, i. 319, in part. Southern borders of California,
collected by Palmer, Cleveland, and Parish.

S. SEMPERVIRENS, L. Besides the synonyms, S. Mexicana^ L., S.
Icevigata^ Ait., and S. ItmonifoUa, Pers., the S. Azorica, Ilochst. in
Seubert, Fl. Azorica, is to be added. The indigenous plant is apt
to acquire some hirsute jjubesceuce on the inflorescence and the
upper part of the stem, and even on some of the leaves, when it
grows beyond the influence of salt or brackish water. — Var. viM-
INEA, the S. viminea^ Ait., S. integerrima. Mill. Diet., S. integri-
folia^ Desf., and S. carinata, Schrader ; these are duller-leaved
cultivated forms, with some fine appressed jiubescence on the inflor-
escence, evidently the result of prolonged cultivation in European
gardens. And S. lithospermifolia, Willd., must be a still more
altered state, with larger leaves, these somewhat puberulent. No
indigenous specimens like it have been found.

S. STRICTA, Ait., also of Pursh, not of later authors. S. virgata^
Michx. S. Imoides, Solander, ined. S. genistoides, Bertol. This
was an unexpected discovery, which leaves no choice other than the
restoration of the original name to the species which was well
named *S'. virgata by Michaux. — Inseparable from it is var. angus-
TiFOLiA, S. angustifoJia, Ell., which in brackish soil appears to pass
into the most slender and narrow-leaved form of S. sempervir-ens.

S. FLAVOVIRENS, Chapm. Fl. 211. Even this shows indications of
passing into a broad-leaved form of S. stricta^ Ait.

■i- -i- Unicostatce, ogrestes,

++ Slender, wholly glabrous and smooth, always rayless.

S. GRACiLLBiA, Torr. & Gray.

++ ++ Minutely puberulent, obscurely venulose : thyrsoid panicle
of small heads not at all secund.

S. PUBERULA, Nutt. — Var. PULVERULENTA, Chapm., viz. S. puh'e7-u-
lenta, Nutt., and S. obovata, Bertoloni.

++++++ Leaves obscurely veined, with only midrib prominent,
mainly entire ; cauline closely sessile : heads small, in a broad
panicle of racemiform recurving clusters : rays 3 to 5, rarely
none.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 193

= Leaves all entire and glabrous, more or less pellucid-punctate.

S. ODORA, Ait., with var. inodoka.

!S. CiiAPMANi, Gray, Proe. Am. Acad. xvi. 80. S. odora, in part,

Chapm. Fl. *S'. tortifoUa of Curtiss, distrib. no. 1351. Florida.

Between »S'. odora and S. pilosa.

= = Leaves more or less serrulate, scabrous or pubescent, very
numerous up to the inflorescence.

S. TOKTIFOLIA, Ell. S. retrorsa, Pursh, and Nutt, not Michx.
S. PILOSA, Walt. S. Jistulosa, Mill. Diet, and the synonymy in
Torr. &, Gray, Fl.

4H- ++ ++ ++ Leaves comparatively ample and obviously but not
prominently veiny, of rather firm texture, perfectly glabrous
and smooth, never much serrate : heads middle sized, crowded
in usually narrow and erect thyrsoid inflorescence, not secund.

= Atlantic species : akenes glabrous or nearly so : rays conspic-
uous, five or six.

S. ULIGINOSA, Nutt. Jour. Acad. Philad. vii. 101. S. stricta, Hook.

Fl. ii. 4, in part; Torr. & Gray, Fl. ii. 204, not Ait. Although

Nuttall appears to have had more than one plant in view, this is

really the one upon which his species was founded.
S. SPECiosA, Nutt., with var. angustata, and var. rigidiuscula,

Torr. & Gray.

= r= Pacific and Rocky Mountain species: akenes pubescent:
rays more numerous and smaller.

S. GuiKARDONis, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. vi. 543.
S. SPECTABiLis. S. Guirardonis, var. spectabilis, Eaton, Bot. King.
154.

++++++++++ Leaves veiny, and at least the lower serrate;
heads racemosely paniculate and when well developed secund,'
commonly in recurving racemiform clusters : Atlantic species.

= Leaves shagreen-scabrous on the upper face, ample ; stem
strongly angled.

S. PATULA, Muhl. S. asperata, Pursh, as to herb. Lamb. S. angu-
iata, Spreng. in herb. Willd. ; Schrader in DC. Prodr. Var. strict-
ULA, a southern small-leaved and stricter form. «S'. salicina. Ell.,
ex char. S. scabrn, Hook. Comp. Bot. Mag.

A-OL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 13

194 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

= = Leaves on both faces and stem minutely cinereous-pubes-
cent : flowering in sjiring ; the inflorescence hardly secund.

S. VEKNA, M. A. Curtis in Torr. & Gray, Fl.

== = == Leaves thin and loosely veiny, or firmer when growing
in arid places ; but veins and veinlets on the lower face gener-
ally conspicuous and reticulated ; heads small ; bracts of the
involucre rather few and narrow ; akenes pubescent.

[S. ELLiPTiCA, Ait. Unknown in the wild state ; see p. 181.
S. plantaginea, Desf., is tlie same.]

a» Rays few (1 to 3) or none : leaves cLisping.

S. AMPLEXiCAULis, Torr. & Gray, but not of Martens.

b. Rays 4 to 6, or rarely none : leaves sessile by a narrow base,
pinnately veiny : pubescence of spreading hairs, or none.

S. RUGOSA, Mill. Diet. ed. 6 ; Willd. Spec. iii. 2058. Virga-aurea,
&c., Dill. Elth. 406, 410, 411, t". 304, 305, 308, mentioned by
Linnaeus under his S. altissima, but not referred to it, as was com-
monly supposed, and not really any part of the Linncean S. altis-
sima, for which it was taken by subsequent botanists. S. ahissima
and S. aspera, Ait. Kew. ; Willd., «S:c. S. scah'a, Muhl., in Willd.,
I.e. S. vilJnsa, Pursh. S. hnmilis, Desf., a low form, with inflores-
cence hardly spreading or secund. S. hirta, Willd. Enum. S. rig-
idula, Bosc, in hort. Par. (?) S. asperafa, »Soland. in herb. Banks.,
therefore of Pursh as to the type. S. pilosa, recurvata^ Virgin-
iana, and altissima, as well as rugosa. Mill. Many but indefinite
varieties.

S. ULMi FOLIA, INIuhl. in Willd. S. laterijlora, Ait. Kew., but not of
Linnaeus. S. multijlora, Desf., appears to be a cultivated form of
it. — Var. MICROPHTLLA, S. microphylla, Engelm. in herb., is a
rigid and small-leaved southern form, from Texas.

= ^ = = Leaves of firmer texture and less conspicuous reticu-
lation, not scabrous or hardly so, commonly glabrous as are
the stems : bracts of the involucre broader, obtuse.

S. Elliottii, Torr. & Gray, connects with the preceding. It is
S. elliptica (?), Ell., also of Torr. & Gray, Fl., as to plant from New
York, &c. But not the original aS'. elliptica, of which no indige-
nous representative has yet been identified.

S. LiNOiDES, Torr. & Gray, Fl., but not of Solander.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 195

S. NEGLECTA, Torr. & Gray, Fl. Not identified with any older
species.

S. TERU^-NovyE, ToiT. & Gray, Fl. Still insufficiently known.

S. BooTTii, Hook., Torr. & Gray, Fl. S. juncea, DC, not Ait. —
Var. LuDOViCiANA, is a dubious form, with larger heads and leaves.
Var. BRACIIYPHTLLA, the »S'. brachijphylla, Cliapm. in Torr. &
Gray, Fl., is a remarkably small-leaved and usually rayless form of
Georgia and Florida, passing into the typical S. Boottii.

S. ARGUTA, Ait., Muhl., Fursh, DC, &c. ; the S. Muhlenbergii^ Torr.
& Gray. See p. 180. S. verrucosa, Schrader, is probably the same,
but is known only by the figure.

S. JUNCEA, Ait., &c. ^Sl ciliaris, Muhl. in Willd. S. arguta, Torr.
& Gray, Fl., not Ait. Name refers only to the inflorescence, which
reminded Solander of that of some species of Juncus.

•»—-)—-)— Not maritime : leaves more or less triple-ribbed (of
which there are indications in the lower leaves of one or two
of the preceding species, and some of the following show it
obscurely). — TriplinervicE.

++ At least the stem and mostly the bright green leaves smooth
and glabrous or nearly so, not cinereous or canescent : inflor-
escence (when well developed) secund in commonly spreading
racemiform clusters which are collected in a terminal com-
pound panicle : akenes more or less pubescent.

== Leaves of firm texture, rather rigid, acute or acuminate, the
slender lateral ribs hardly seen in the upper cauline : bracts of
the involucre firm and broadish, all obtuse.

S. MissouRiENsrs, Nutt., with syn. as in Torr. & Gray, Fl. — Var.
MONTANA. The low or dwarf mountain form, with panicle usually
compact, the heads sometimes hardly secund, the leaves mostly all
entire. This is the original *S'. Missouriensis, Nutt. Jour. Acad. vii.
32, from the "Upper branches of the Missouri," collected by
Wyeth, and it extends from Saskatchewan nearly to the Pacific. —
Var. EXTRARiA, is a robust and broad-leaved form, with larger
heads and more conspicuous rays ; of the Rocky Mountains in
Colorado and New Mexico.

S. SnoRTir, Torr. & Gray. Formerly known only on the banks of
the Ohio, it has recently been detected in Northern Arkansas, by
Professor F. L. Harvey.

S. Marsh ALLi, Eothrock, in Wheeler, Rep. vi. 146. S. Arizona.

196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

::= = Leaves thinner, sometimes membranaceous : bracts of the
involucre chiefly linear, obtuse.

S. Leavenworthii, Torr. & Gray. Southern Atlantic States near
the coast.

S. RUPESTRis, Raf. Probably an extreme glabrous and slender form
of S. Canadensis, growing in shade.

S. SEROTiNA, Ait., which, as already stated, is the S. gigantea of
Willdenow and American botanists, the S. glabra, Desf. ; and a
form of it S. Pitcheri of Nuttall. — Its var. gigaxtea, that is, »S'.
gigantea, Ait., but the serotitia of Willdenow and of later authors,
differs only and very variably in having some pilose or hirsutulous
pubescence on the veins or the under surface of the leaves.

•H- -H- Minutely pubescent or glabrate, not cinereous or scabrous :
leaves thinnish, veiny, and with lateral ribs sometimes evident
but often obsolete : panicle usually erect and thyrsiform, with
the heads hardly at all secund : involucral bracts small, thin
and narrow. Intercalated between the j^receding and the fol-
lowing, to both which the species are nearly related, yet as
much so to S. rvgosa. Northwestern species.

S. LEPiDA, DC. Not too well distinguished from the next, by
its fewer and larger usually glomerate heads, little surpassing
the upper leaves, and the subulate-linear acute involucral bracts.
Belongs to the Northwest Coast, Alaska, &c.

S. ELONGATA, Nutt. S. stricta, Less, in Linnasa. S. elata, Hook. Fl.
Eastward it seems to pass into S. Canadensis.

++ -H- ++ At least the stem pubescent or hispidulous-scabrous,
either hirsutely or canescently : branches of the panicle when
well developed secund.

= Leaves tapering gradually to an acute or acuminate apex :
panicle open : bracts of the involucre narrow and thin : rays
small and short.

S. Canadensis, L. Also the original S. altissima, L., founded on
Martyn's Hist. PI. 14, t. 14, but not of most subsequent authors,
who have followed the conjectural references to Dill. Elth. (See
S. rugosa.) S. rejiexa^ Ait., Willd., &c. S. nutans. Desf. S. fongi-
folia, Schrader in DC. — Var. procera, Torr. & Gray, the X pro-
cera, Ait., &c., and S. eminens, Bischoff. — Var. scabra, Torr. &
Gray. Chiefly a southern form, apparently extending well into

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 107

Mexico, under the name of S. scabn'da, DC. — Var. canescens, of
S. W. Texas and S. New Mexico, is an outlying form, peihaps a
distinct species, which from its hoariuess and the broader bracts of
the involucre, might be confounded with narrower-leaved and soft
pubescent forms of S. nemoralis. — Var. Arizomca, the S. mollis,
Rothrock in Wheeler, Rep. vi. 14G, and in the heads approach-
ing the Mexican S. velutina, DC, is another ambiguous plant, with
low stems and comparativcl}' large heads, the thin involucral bracts
acutish ; of New Mexico and Arizona.

= = Leaves obtuse, or abruptly apiculate or acutish, of firm or
coriaceous texture, the upper entire ; pubescence all close, cin-
ereous or canescent, or scabro-hispidulous ; the lateral ribs
commonly incomplete and not rarely obscure or even wanting :
panicle mostly compact : bracts of the involucre broadish^^
obtuse, and of firm texture: rays rather few but large, golden
yellow.

a. From cinereous to canescent with fine and soft or at length
minutely scabrous pubescence : leaves firm, but not rigid.
S. Californica, Nutt. *S'. velutina, var. panicula contracta, DC.

The plant of Hfcnke is from Monterey, California, not Mexico. —

Var. Nevadensis is hardly to be distinguished from the next species.
S. NEMORALIS, Ait. S. hispida, Mulil. in Willd. S. conferta, Poir.

Diet. viii. 549. S. cinerascens, Schweinitz in Ell. S. decemjlora,

DC. S. puberida, DC, not Nutt. — Var. incana. S. mollis,

Bartl. in DC, &c. S. incana, Torr. & Gray.
S. NAXA, Nutt., of the Rocky INIountains, &c. ; has few and larger

almost corymbosely disposed heads, and broader involucral bracts ;

otherwise the larger forms are too like aS'. nemoralis.

b. Hispidulous-scabrous, rigid, green.

S. RADULA, Nutt. S. rotundifolia, DC. S. scaherrima, Torr. &
Gray, Fl. S. decemjiora, Gray, PI. Lindh., not DC.

c. Scabro-puberulent, somewhat cinereous ; the very small leaves
with hardly any lateral ribs.

S. SPARSiFLORA, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. xii. 58. A var. subctn-
EREA, from S. Arizona, Lemmon, indicates an unsuspected relation-
ship with S. nemoralis. And, from the Mogollon Mountains, New
Mexico, Mr. Rusby sends a form between the latter and S. Cana-
densis, var. canescens. Further study of fuller materials is required.

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

===== Leaves thinnish, puberulent, but greeu, broad, acute,
divergently tripliiierved and veiny, serrate: involucral bracts
narrowly oblong, obtuse : rays few.

S. Drummondii, Torr. & Gray. Triplinerved, but most related to
such venose species as S. amplexicaulis and >S'. rugosa.

***** CORYMBOSiE.

-t- Leaves not triplinerved, flat ; cauline very numerous : akenes

glabrous,

++ Turgid, 10-15-nerved.

S. RIGID A, L.

S. CORYMBOSA, Ell., not Foil'., which is only S- Virgaurea.

++ ++ Akenes barely 5-nerved.

S. Ohioensis, Riddell.

•J- H— Leaves somewhat conduplicate-carinate ; lower slightly
triplinerved.

S. RiDDELLii, Frank in Riddell, Synops. S. amplexicaulis, Martens.
S. HouGiiTONi, Torr. & Gray, in Gray, Man., ed. 1, 21 L

-t- -1- -I— Leaves flat, smooth and glabrous, narrow, somewhat
triplinerved or 3-nerved, lucid.

S. NiTiDA, Torr. & Gray. Louisiana and Texas.
S. PUMILA, Torr. & Gray. Chrysoma pumila, Nutt.

§ 2. EUTHAMIA.
* Western species, more paniculate.

S. OCCIDENTALIS, Nutt.

* * Eastern species ; fastigiate-cymose and glomerate.

S. LANCEOLATA, L.

S. TENUiFOLiA, Pursh. This proves to be the Erigeron CaruUnin-
num, L., that is, Virga-aurea Carol., &c.. Dill. Elth. 412, t. 306,
fig. 394.

S. LEPTOCEPHALA, Torr. &, Gray. Louisiana and Texas.

§ 3. CHRYSOMA.
S. PAUCiFLOSCULOSA, Michx. Chrysoma solidaginoides, Nutt.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 199

*^* Mexican Species. Remarkably few are known, and these
have nearly all been mentioned in the foregoing enumeration.

S. SCABRIDA, DC, is hardly other than an extreme form of S. Can-
adensis, var. scahra.

S. VELuriNA, UC, seems to be a distinct species of the same group,
and has recently been collected by Dr. Palmer in the north of
Mexico. The variety from '* Real del Monte, H^enke," is to be
excluded, being aS*. Californica from Monterey, California.

S. GONOCLADA, DC, is a peculiar species not to be confounded with
S. odora (a form of which, named S. gonoclada by Schultz, occurs
in Mexico), which is also S. piincticulata, DC ; but that was from
Texas, not Mexico.

S. PANICULATA, DC, is the same as S. gonoclada. But the aS^. Mexi-
cana, HBK., doubtfully referred to it, is truly the S. Mexicana, L.,
viz. S.'Sempervirens, L. To it belongs no. 124 of my distribution
of plants of Ghiesbreght from Chiapas.

S. SIMPLEX, HBK., is a peculiar species, of the S. Virgaurea group,
which Dr. Schaffner has apparently rediscovered in his S. Pseudo-
Virgaurea, ined.

S. SPATUULATA, DC, of the Same group, proves to be Californiau.
See p. 189.

II. Novitice Arizonicce, etc. : Characters of the Neiv Plants of
certain Recent Collections^ mainly in Arizona and adjacent
Districts, ^c.

The principal PolypetalcE, as well as the Apefalce, &c., of the recent
collections in our hands will soon be published by Mr. Watson.

Braya Oregonensis. Humillima, fere glabra ; caulibus foliosis
subpollicarsibus e caudice multicipiti caespitosis ; foliis confertis S{)ath-
ulato-linearibus integerrimis ciliolatis coriaceis glaucescentibus ; raceme
intra folia sessili vel in pedunculo scapiformi parum exserto pauci-
floro ; silicula ovata sectione subtereti acuta stylo gracili persistente
superata 1-2-sperma (ovulis in loculis binis pendulis), valvis rigido-
coriaceis, septo pertenui. — Union Co. Oregon, on sterile subalpine
ridges, coll. June, 1880, in fruit, May, 1881, in flower, W. C. Cusick.
This peculiar little Cruciferous plant I had named Cusichia, and the
discoverer has partially distributed it under this name. But I perceive
that it should be referred to the somewhat polymorphous genus Braya

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

(including Brown's Plutypetahim), and that it may fairly be associated
with B. pilosa and B. purpurascens, both illustrated by Hooker, not-
withstanding the reduction of the ovules to a \)\xiv in each cell and the
maturation of only one or two large seeds.

^scuLUS Parryi. ^. Callfornicce afRnis, frutex humilis ;
foliis 3-5-foliolatis ; folio! is obovatis obtusis subcoriaceis brevissime
petiolulatis subtus cano-tomentosis ; floribus brevipedicellatis ; calyce
campanulato ad medium usque gequaliter 5-fido petalisque extus to-
mentosis ; filamentis validioribus minus exsertis. — Northern part of
Lower California, April, 1882, Parry ^ Jones, and Pringle.

Crotalaria Pringlei. Simplicifolia, e basi suffrutescente per-
enni ramosissima, pilis longis albidis villoso-sericea; foliis oblongo-
lanceolatis (semipoU. ad pollicarem) subsessilibus utrinque obtusis
mucronatis, aliis exstipulatis, alii? stipulis solitariis vel binis lanceo-
late subulatis secus caulem breviter decurrentibus instructis ; pedun-
culis 2-3-florisfolium raro superantibus ; calycis lobis hia^qualibus ;
legumine ovali glaberrimo. — Santa Catalina Mountains, South Ari-
zona, Pringle. This is from an interesting collection made by Mr. C.
C. Pringle, in the southern part of Arizona, in the summer of 1881.

Dalea Lemmoni, Parry in coll. D. hrachystachi affinis (vide PI.
Wright, ii. 40), gracilior ; foliolis 3-5-jugis paullo angustioribus ;
spicis longius jDedunculatis ovatis ; bracteis (exterioribus fere glabris)
calycisque lobis longius aristato-productis, illis insigniter albo-plumosis ;
corolla ut videtur purpurascentes. — Near Fort Bowie, Apache Pass,
South Arizona, Lemmon, 1881. This and numei'ous following species
form a part of the fruits of two laborious and trying explorations in
Southern Arizona, made by Mr. J. G. Lemmon and Mrs. Lemmon.
This interesting disti-ict has been made accessible by the opening of
the Southern Pacific Railroad, the directors of which have rendered
very essential and highly appreciated service to science by the facili-
ties which they have afforded to the above-mentioned and to other
botanists.

Dalea Ordi^. D. alhijlorce sat similis, sed glabella, caulibus suf-
fruticosis foliisque tantum puberulis ; foliolis saepius angustioribus ;
spicis numerosioribus brevius pedunculatis ex ovata cyliiidraceis
tenuiter sericeis ; bracteis minoribus ; ealycis lobis lato-subulatis tube
glandulis insigniter notato fere dimidio brevioribus ; corolla la^te alba.
— Plains near Bowie and Rucker Valley, S. Arizona, Lemmon, 1881.
Also collected in the previous year by Mrs. Dr. Ord, whose name this
handsome and abundantly florifcrous species may commemorate.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 201

Dalea Pringlei. D. IcEvxcjatce proxima, etiam glaberrima spicis
obloiigis cyliiidraceisque villosibsimis exceptis ; caulibus gracilibus e
basi sulfrutescente pedalibus ; foliolis (lin. 1-2 lorigis) obovatis seu
ovalibus puiictatis ; bracteis ex ovata aciiminatis fiore parum breviori-
biis ; calycis lobis deltoiilco-subulatis tubo a-quilougis corolla parva
ktte purpurea a^quantibus. — Foot-hills of the Santa Catalina Moun-
tains, S. Arizona, Pringle, April and May, 1881.

CouRSETiA MiCROPHVLLA. Foliolis 5-8-jugis absquc imparl (lin.
1-3-longis) subcoriaceis oblongis cuspidato-mucronatis sericeo-pubes-
centibus demum glabratis, venis perobscuris ; racemis laxe paucifloris ;
calycis glandulosi lobis e basi lata lanceolatis tubo sublongioribus ;
corolla alba nunc roseo tincta, carina obtusiuscula ; legumine glandu-
loso toroso compresso 5-8-spermo. — Eocky canons of the Santa
Catalina Mountains, S. Arizona, flowering in April, Prinyle, Lem-
rnon. — Shrub with long and slender flowering branches; the fruit
obtained only by Mr. and Mrs. Lemmon.

Ckacca Edwardsii, Gray, PI. Wright, ii. 35. C. glabrescens,
Ilemsley, Biol. Centro-Amer. i. 2G2, as to Mexican plant, here re-
ferred by an oversight. Seems to vary widely. Taking the loosely
branching and diffuse specimens with sparse sericeous pubescence as
the type, the leaflets of which are commonly 9 or 7, and are some-
times an inch long, there are two marked varieties to be noted, viz.

Var. sericea, with dense sericeous pubescence apj^arently per-
sistent on the lower face of the smaller oblong leaflets. This Mr.
Lemmon collected, in the spring of 1881, in Spring Creek Canon, of
the Santa Catalina Mountains ; and Mr. Pringle about the same time
in the Santa Rita Mountains. It is distinguished from C. mollis,
Benth. (as is the species), by the less attenuated calyx-segments being
decidedly shorter than the carina, inflorescence less villous, and the
ovary glabrous.

Var. glabella, with far less and minuter or sometimes quite
deciduous pubescence, lower and strict stem, and more numerous leaf-
lets, these from oval to roundish, on the lower leaves 9 or 11, on the
others 15 to 17 in number. This was collected by Wright, and again
by Lemmon in 1881, along with the typical form.

Ruiius LASIOCOCCUS. Inter R. pedutum et R. Chamcemorum ;
caulibus herbaceis humifusis cinereo-puberulis ; stipulis ovatis sub-
scariosis ; foliis cordato-rotundis 3-5-lobatis cum paucis trisectis, lobis
segmentisve obtusissimis crebre duplicato-dentatis ; pedunculis ramos
breves paucifoliatos terminantibus 1-2-floris ; calycis segmentis ovatis

202 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

acuminatis integerrimis petalis obovatis albis brevioribus ; ovariis
paucis (5-9) etiam druiiellis carnosis tomentulosis. — Oregon, near
Mount Hood, E. Hall, 1871 (no. 140), J. Howell, 1878. — In the
account of Hall's collection this was inadvertently called R. pedatus
(some of which was mixed with it) ; from which it is quite different,
being much less slender, with thicker leaves which are seldom divided,
some of the larger not unlike small ones of R. ChamcBmorus. Flowers
not much larger than those of R. pedatus, the petals broader, five
lines long. The cauescent dense ttmentum of the ovaries is seen
even on the mature drupelets.

RiBES VIBURNIFOHUM. Rihesia, modo R. nigri resinoso-atomiferis;
foliis ovalo-rotuudis utrinque obtusissimis (nee cordatis nee plicatisj
inciso-paucidentatis nunc obsolete trilobis glabris (petiolo excepto)
demum coriaceis (pollicem longis): racemo subsessili corymbiformi
plurifloro, pedicellis filiformibus, bracteis scariosis caducis ; calycis
tubo turbinato demum oblongo, limbo rotato 5-partito roseo, lobis
ovalibus ; petalis minimis patentissimis viridulis filamentisque bre-
vissimis margini disco lato piano insertis. — Northern part of Lower
California, near All Saints Bay, Parry, Pringle, and Marcus Jones,
April, 1882. A sti-aggling bush, so peculiar that the acute collectors
did not recognize the genus. Yet the flowers have all the characters
of the Rihesia section, and the conspicuous glands of the leaves,
young shoots, pedicels, &c., are just like those of R. nigrum.

HousTONiA Wrightii. Pumila (2-5-pollicaris), e radice ut
videtur perenni multicaulis, suberecta, fere glabra ; stipulis scariosis
subintegris ; foliis linearibus muticis, imis sublanceolatis ; cymulis
foliosis ; calycis lobis subulato-lanceolatis tubo brevissimo 2-3-plo
longioribus corollee subinfundibuliformis (lin. 3-4-longjE) tubo saepius
dimidio brevioribus ; capsula subdidymo-globosa ^ libera ; seminibus in
loculis 5-8 crateriformibus. — Hedyotis humifusa, Gray, PI. Wright,
i. 82, & Oldenlandia humifusa^ PL Wright, ii. 68, non PI. Lindh. ii.
216. On the Limpio, Western Texas, Wright, Fort Whipjile, Ari-
zona, Palmer, 1865, no. 75. New Mexico, T/mrher (?), Greene, 1877.
Arizona in the San Franc'sco Mountains, Greene, 1880, no. 400.
Arizona, Dr. Budd, Pringle, Lemmon, 1881, no. 512. Santa Magda-
lena, New Mexico, 1881, G. R. Vasey. The tube of the corolla is
sometimes almost twice the length of the lobes, sometimes shorter,
broader, and hardly longer than the lobes.

HousTONiA Palmeri. H. aspervloides et //. angustifolice sat
proxima, fere glabra; caulibus e radice perenni diffuso-ramosissimis

OF A.RTS AND SCIENCES. 203

gracillimis ; stipulis parvis nudis ; foliis Hneari-filiformibus (semipolli-
caribus) 2:)edunculis sparsis gracilibus adscendeiitibus (nunc pollicari-
bus) brevioribus vel ajquilongis ; calycis lobis subulatis tubo sa^pius
2-3-plo longioribus ; corolla (purpurea) liypocraterimorpha, lobis
intus crebre albo-puberulis tubo dimidio brevioribus ; stminibus paucis
turgidis circumscriptione rotundis. — Coalmila, Mexico, in the moun-
tains east and south of Sattillo, Palmer, 1880, no. 397, 398.

IIousTONiA (Ereicotis) fasciculata. Fruticosa, ullrapedalls,
ramosissima ; ramis rigidis foliosis*, junioribus tetragonis hirtello-
puberulis ; stipulis brevissimis scariosis sa^pius biacuminatis ; foliis
lariciformibus vel subulato-linearibus rigidulis glabris (lin. 4-3-1-
longis) internodio parum brevioribus et in axillis plerumque copiosis ;
cymulis paucifloris ; floribus parvis (lin. 2 longis) brevi-pedicellatis ;
corolla3 tubo calycis lobis obtusiusculis subduplo et lobis suis parum
longioribus ; capsula ovali ab apice libero integro loculicida ; semini-
bus in loculis 4-5 majusculis elongato-oblongis peltatis ventre vix con-
cavis, testa la^viuscula. — Southwestern border of Texas, at Presidio,
Bigelow in Mexican Boundary Survey. Organ Mountains, New
Mexico, T7. R. Vasey, 1881, Coahuila in Mexico, near Parras and
Monclova, Palmer, 1880, no. 404, 406. — Except for the narrow
seeds, this is a much less anomalous Houstonia than is my H. acerosa,
of the same region, and the two must go together into a section for
which I incline to preserve De CandoUe's name of Ereicotis, some
species of which certainly have loculicidal dehiscence ; and I doubt if
the genus Mallostoma can be maintained.*

Galium Rothrockii. Facies G. Wrightii, Gray, pariter sufFrutico-
rum, erectum, sed glabrum, lajve ; foliis quaternis minoribus linearibus
subcoriaceis eveniis mucronatis ; panicula laxa floribunda ; fructu par-
cius hirsuto. — S. Arizona, C. Wright (part of no. 1113), Rothrock
(no. 675, not mentioned in his volume, the fruit hardly formed); Lem-
mon, 1881, with good fruit; New Mexico, Rushy.

Verxoxia Ervendbergii. Zp/)iWa/j/oo, herbacea, glabella ; caule
ramoso ; foliis lanceolatis vel oblongo-lanceolatis serrulatis supra
scabris ; capitulis laxe corymboso-cymosis sparsis longiuscule pedun-

* HousTOXiA (Ereicotis) acerosa, first published as Hedyotis (Ereicotis)
acerosn, in PI. Wright, i. 81, has been referred to ^lallostoma by Herasley, in
Biol. Centr. Amer. ii. 31, notwithstanding the note in Gen. PI. The roundish
seeds have a deep but small ventral excavation. Houstonia humifusa. Gray,
Proc. Am. Acad. iv. 314, as Hooker remarks, has the stipules sparsely ciliate
with setif orum teeth : no. 400-403 of Palmer's 1880 coll. are forms of it.

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

culatis 25-40-floris: involucro lin. 3-4 alto subcampanulato, bracteis
gradatim imhricatis acutis vel apiculato-acumiuatis ; pappi setis lin. 3
lou'Tis, squamuUis exterioribus diam. aclieuii baud excedeutibus. —
V. liatruides, Gray in coll. Ervendb., Proc. Am. Acad, v. 181, excl. syn.
& pi. Coult. — Mexico ; near Tautoyuca, Ervendberg. Near Monclova,
Palmer, no. 750. Apparently also near Monterey, Gregg. V. liatroi-
des, DC. (wbich, according to Schultz Bip., is also his K. Ehrenbergi-
ana), has much more numerous, smaller, and fewer-flowered heads, and
mostly broader leaves more rugosely veiny beneath.

Vernonia Schaffneiu. Lepidaploa, herbacea, scaberula, 1-2-
pedalis : foliis ovalibus oblongisque (obtusis) basi acutis ; capitulis
paucis subumbellato-cymosis longiuscule pedunculatis circa 40-floris ;
involucro hemisphajrico lin. 4—5 alto, bracteis pluriseriatis oblongis
obtusis, extimis minimis nunc acutis ; pappi setis lin. 3 longis squamel-
lis brevibus consj^icuis circumdatis. — Mexico, San Louis Potosi, in
the mountains near Morales, Schaffner, no. 347. Coulter's no. 229
may be a form of the same species.

Vernonia Greggii. Lepidaploa, herbacea, subpubescens ; caule
sat robusto ; foliis oblongo-lanceolatis mox scabris acutis deuticulatis ;
capitulis paucis sparsisve longiuscule pedunculatis circa 50-floris ; in-
volucro hemisphserico lin. 5 alto, bracteis pluriseriatis oblongo-lan-
ceolatis acutis vel acuminatis ; pappi setis lin. 3-4 longis et squamellis
angustissimis lineam longis. — Northern Mexico, Gregg, 1848-9, no.
102.

Var. Palmeri. Capitulis majoribus ; squamellis pappi validiori-
bus brevioribus. — ■ Lerios, a mountain district east of Saltillo, Palmer,
no. 753.

Stevia Lemmoni, Gray in Syn. Fl. ined., is fructicose, puberu-
lent, leafy up to the dense clusters of very numerous heads : leaves all
opposite, linear-oblong, obtuse, thinuish, obscurely triplinerved : in-
volucre somewhat viscid-pubescent : flowers apparently white : pappus
a cupulate and almost entire short crown. — S. Arizona, in the Santa
Catalina Mountains, Lemmon, 1880.

Stevia Plummer^, Gray. 1. c, is herbaceous, puberulent and the
bright green foliage almost glabrous, leafy up to the dense clusters of
heads : leaves commonly opposite, oblong-lanceolate or broader, acute,
incisely serrate, very conspicuously nervose-vciiiy and reticulated,
hardly punctate : flowers deep rose-purple : pappus of 4 broad and
truncate fimbriate-denticulate paleoe. — S. Arizona, in the Rucker Val-
ley, Chirricahua Mountains, Mr. Sf Mrs. Lemmon, 1881. Also on the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 205

divide of the Mogollon Mountains, New Mexico, Rushy. — A very
pretty and distinct species of Slevia, which may appropriately bear the
name of one of the discoverers, Mrs. Lemmon, botanically still best
known by her maiden name of Plummer, having shared the labors
and privations of her husband in the aiduous exploration of which
this is one of the fruits. These two species are the only ones of the
genus yet known as peculiar to the United States, the three others
ranging through Mexico.

EuPATORiUM PADPERCULUM. E grcge E. ageratoides, glabrum,
ultrapedale; foliis ovato-lanceolatis ; foliis (pollicaribus) ovato-lanceo-
hitis basi sa^pius rotundatis obtusiuscule serratis sat petiolatis ; ramis
floridis brevibus cymis oligocephalis terminatis paniculam foliosam re-
ferentibus ; capitulis 2o-floris parvis (lin. 2 longis) ; involucri brac-
teis lanceolatis acutiusculis dorso hirto-puberulis ; corolloe alba3 lobis
extus parce tenuiterque barbellatis mox nudis ; pappo albo moUi, setis
baibellulatis. — On dripping rocks in the Santa Rita Mountains, S.
Arizona, Pringle.

Elpatouium Fendleri. Brickellla Fendleri, Gray, PI. Fendl. 63,
PI. Wright, ii. 73. This proves to be an Eupatorium^ with o-angled
but not rarely G-nerved akenes, or sometimes one or two of the nerves
at the angles are double. It has recently been collected in Arizona as
well as New Mexico, by Greene, Lemmon, and Rusbij.

EuPATORiUH (Phanerostylis : styli rami sursum incrassati petal-
oiileo-ampliata, corolla sursum ampliata .5-lobo) Coaiiuilense. Hu-
milis, e basi perenni multicaulis, diffusum, viscido-puberulum ; foliis
plerisque oppositis ovatis obtusis parce dentatis longe petiolatis ; pedun-
culis terminalibus elongatis monocephalis ; capitulo semipollicari plu-
rifloro ; involucro imbricato pauciseriali, bracteis linearibus, extimis
laxis herbaceis, interioribus paucistriatis ; achenio lineari ; pappo e
setis circiter 24 sat validis albidis barbellulatis ; corolla cum stylis in-
signioribus longe exsertis aut albis aut carneis. — Northern Mexico, in
the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo, Coahuila, Palmer, no. 453.

Barroetea srBULiGERA, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. xv. 29. Bidbo-
sfi/lis subuh'gera, S. Schauer in Linn. xix. 718. No. 4.52 of Palmer's
North Mexican collection, 1880, abundantly gathered at Soletlad, "a
section of low mountains with a few oaks, 25 miles southwest from
Monclova in Coahuila." The heads well accord with one from an origi-
nal specimen. But the plant of Aschenborn is said to be " fruticulus
pedalis," with rameal leaves 9 lines long and a petiole of 2 lines,
the upper still smaller. Palmer's specimens are taller than this, and

206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

still herbaceous, but want the base, which is probably lignescent ; are
widely and freely branching ; and the leaves, even the largest (about
an inch and a half long), have a petiole of two lines at most, com-
monly shorter. The akenes are well flattened, sharp-edged, one face
sliglitly convex and the other concave, the latter with a midnerve, the
pericarp very thin. The heads in this, as also in B. setosa, are all erect.
But iu the herbarium of M. Boissier is a specimen from herb. Pavon,
which, so long as there is no evidence that the forms run together, must
be taken as a third species of the genus, and the original character
will have to be modified a little in respect to the nervation of the
akenes : —

Barkoetea Pavonii. Herbacea ; foliis ovatis membranaceis basi
lata truncata vel subcordata arete sessilibus argute dentatis, dentibua
setigeris ; capitulis laxe paniculatis in pedunculo gracili nutantibus ;
involucri (lin. 4 longi) bracteis fere scariosis lanceolatis mucronato-
acutatis ; acheniis latiusculis plano-compressis, uno latere 3- altero
1-3-nervato. — Mexico, herb. Pavon, nunc Boissier, sub nom. " Eupa-
torium setiferura" and " E. cuspidatum." Char, from notes taken in
herb. Bossier and two capitula. In form the involucral bracts resemble
those of B. setosa.

Brickellia odoxtophtlla. Sat elata, puberula; caulibus vel
ramis simplicibus; foliis alternis membranaceis petiolatis grosse crenato-
dentatis cordatis vel subcordatis, sinu lato aut truncato aut medio
breviter cuneato-decurrente, venis baud reticulatis ; capitulis racemosis
secundis pendulis iis B. secundiJlo7-ce (forma B. CavaniUesii) simili-
bus; involucri glabri bracteis omnibus acutis. — Coahuila, Mexico, in the
Sierra Madre south of Saltillo, Palmer, no. 442. Leaves with lamina
an inch or two long, thin ; lower obtuse and almost as wide as long,
some of them with more tapering apex.

Brickellia Pringlei. Inter B. cylindraceam et B. thyrsijloram ;
caulibus herbaceisstrictisbipedalibus puberulis superne hirsutulis ; foliis
brevi-petiolatis oblongo-lanceolatis acutis basi obtusis subserratis fere
coriaceis trinervatis eximie reticulatis scabro-puberulis ; thyrso e ramis
floridis brevibus oligocephalis laxo folioso ; capitulis vix pedunculatis
plusquam 20-floris ; involucro pluriseriatim imbricato, bracteis gla-
bris, intimis lanceolatis acutis, exterioribus ovatis rotundisque parum
mucronatis in bracteolas pedicellum imbricantes transeuntibus. — S.
Arizona, in canons of the Santa Cataliiia Mountains, April, 1881.

Brickellia Lemmoni. Foliis priori capitulis et infiorescentia B.
betoniccefolia sat aflEinis, cinerco-puberulis ; caulibus gracilibus ultrape-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 207

dalibus thyrsoideo-florihundis ; foliis submerabranaceis lanceolatis basi
acutis sessilibus vel in petiolo brevissimo marginato atteiiuatis minus
reticulatis; capitulis plerisque breviuscule ac graciliter pedunculatis
10-12-floris; involucri pauciscriati bracteis sensim acutatis, intimis
linearibus, extimis ovato-lanceolatis. — Kucker Valley in the Chir-
ricahiia Mountains, S. Arizona, Lemmon, 1881.

Brickellia cylixdracea, Gray & Engelm., var. laxa. Forma
caule aut simplici aut laxe ramoso ; capitulis minoribus aperte panicu-
latis nunc brevissime nunc exserte pedunculatis ; foliis ramealibus
petiolatis. — Southwestern part of Texas, at Georgetown and Bluffton,
Pahner.

Brickellia grandiflora, Nutt., var. petiolaris. Forma gra-
cilis, sat elata ; foliis hastato-deltoideis nunc longe sensim acuminatis
petiolo gracillimo (1-2 pollicari) paullo parumve longioribus. — ]Moun-
tains of S. Arizona, Lemmon.

Brickellia frutescexs. Frutex humilis ; ramis divaricatis ca-
pitulis subsolitariis terminatis ; foliis omnibus alternis parvis (lin. 3-5
longis) spatliulatis integerrimis eveniis ; involucro circa 20-floro, brac-
teis obtusiusculis ; acheniis glabellis ; pappi setis minutissime crebre-
que serrulatis. — Tantillas Canon, near the borders of San Diego
Co., but within Lower California, Palmer, 1875, with heads undevel-
oped. Mountain Springs, San Diego Co., G. R. Vasey, 1880, in flower.
And, according to Dr. Vasey, also collected by the late Sutton Hayes in
the same district.

KuHNiA ScHAFFNERi. Humilis, glaucescens, fere glabra; radici-
bus tuberosis ; caulibus brevibus decumbentibus foliis sublinearibus
oblongisve integerrimis parvis (lin. 3-6 longis) crebre instructis, fertili-
bus pedunculo adsurgente nudo scapiformi (ultra-spithamjEo) mono-
cephalo terminatis; capitulo ultra-semipollicari. — Valley of Mexico,
Schaffner. Sent by the discoverer, without name, to Dr. Cosson
of Paris.

Lessingia glandulifera. L. Germanoriim sat proxima ; caule
erecto ramosissimo ; ramis ri<iidis ramulisque foliis parvis crebris
nunc quasi imbricatis coriaceis rigidis glabris margine pi. m. glan-
duliferis instructis ; involucro magis turbinato, bracteis etiam sa^pius
glanduliferis ; glandulis modo Calycadenice claviformibus. L. Ger-
manorum et L. ramulosa, var. tenuis, pro parte, Gray, Bot. Calif, i. 307,
etc. — L. Germanoriim, Less., of which I have an original specimen, is
Avhitened when young with an appres>ed tomentum, even up to the in-
volucre ; the bracts of which are less unequal, more foliaceous, and,

208 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

like the sparse and softer leaves, wholly destitute of the nail-headed
glands wliich conspicuously appear on most specimens of the species
now recognized, though sometimes they are few and small. The corol-
las are plainly yellow, more so than in dried specimens of L. Germaao-
rum, which according to Chamisso are satFron-colored. The original
species we have only from the neighborhood of San Francisco.
L. glanduUfera occurs from ^lonterey to San Diego, Owens Valley,
San Bernardino, &c. Fine specimens from the latter district, col-
lected by the Brothers Parish and Mr. Pringle, have directed my
attention to the species, which I had confounded with two others.

Grindelia costata. Elata, glabra, la^vis ; ramis gracilibus mo-
nocephalis ; foliis fere membranaceis lanceolatis acutis serrulatis basi
auriculis breviter adnato-decurrentibus semiamplexicaulibus ; capitulo
hemisphajrico semipollicari ; involucri bracteis brevibus subulatis de-
mum squarroso-recurvis raodo G. squarrosce ; acheniis (lineam longis)
Isevibus lunato-gibbosis vel incurvis circa 10-costatis, costis plerisque
crassis (valleculis angustissimis) obtusis, ventrali cariniformi ; areola
epigyna parvula. — Northern Mexico, near Juraz, in Coahuila, 100
miles north of Monclova, Palmer, no. 472.

Grindelia subdecdrrens, DC, is a species which should like-
wise be well distinguished by the akenes : these in De Candolle's s[)eci-
mens are at maturity so turgid as to be globular, are without ribs and
almost without angles, the slightly depressed terminal areola rather
large. Specimens which have been referred to it, with immature fruit
more prismatic, may probably belong to G. squarrosa.

Grindelia Arizonica, Gray, as yet unpublished (to which be-
longs Q. microcephala, Rothrock in Wheeler Rep. 141). of which ripe
fruit is still wanting, appears to include no. 467 of Palmer's North
Mexican collection.

Acamptopappus Shockleyi. Frutex humilis, ah A. sphcerocephalo
differt capitulis majoribus hemispha^ricis in pedunculo gracili ramos
patentes terminante solitariis radiatis ; ligulis circiter 12 (oblongis
semipollicaribus luteis) ; involucro minus imbricato ; pappo achenio
paullo longiore. — Western Nevada, near Candelaria, Esmeralda Co.,
W. S. Shockley.

Bigelovia intricata. Suffrutescens, divergenti-ramosissima,
glaberrima, parce sqnamoso-foliata ; ramulis gracillimis monocephalis;
foliis crassiusculis subulatis soepius mucrone apieulatis, majoribus semi-
pollicaribus, ramulinis minimis squamiformibus ; capitulis (lin. 3-4
longis) 12-15-floris; involucro campanulato, bracteis sat numerosis

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 209

spiraliter 3-4-seriatim imbricatis subcliartaccis (albidis nervo viridulo)
acutis inappeiuliculatis, extimis lato-lanceolalis brevibus, intimis line-
aribus ; corolliB lobis brevibus ovatis ; styli appemlicibus lineari-lance-
olatis parte stigmatifera loiigioribus ; acbeniis teretibus pluristriatis
hirsutulis pappo dimidio brevioribus. — S. E. California, in the Moliave
desert, at Lancaster station, Parry. A notable species, having the
very short corolla-lobes of the section Clirysothnmnopsis, along with the
involucre of the EiiOiamioidece division of tiie Aplodiscus section.

BiGELOViA ALBIDA, Marcus Joues in berb. Chrysothomnus,
fruticosa, 2-3-pedalis, fastigiato-ramosa, snbglaber, glutinosa ; ramis
ad apicem usque (sajpius fasciculatim) foliosis ; foliis fere filiformibus
(poUicaribus) inucronatis ; capitulis cymoso-confertis semipoUicaribus
5-floris ; involucri bracteis lanceolatis subcoriaceis, exterioribus sursum
subfoliaceis subpatentibus in acumen aristellatum productis, intimis
papyraceis muticis ; corolla " alba ! " (ut videtur ochroleuca), lobis
linearibus ; antlierai appendicibus brevissirais obtusissimis ; styli appen-
dicibus lineari-filiformibus parte stigmatifera 2-3-plo longioribus ;
acheniis villosulis. — In alkaline soil, Wells, Nevada, Jl/a?'CT<5 ./ones,
August, 1881.

Aster (Orthomeris) stenomeres. lanthe, A- scopulorum
(Diplopappus alpinus, Nutt.) proximus ; caulibus gracilibus subpedali-
bus ; foliis viridibus angusto-linearibus longioribus vix marginatis ;
involucre lato, bracteis parum biseriatis tenuioribus minus inajqualibus
linearibus, junioribus laxe pubescentibus ; ligulis ultra-semipollicari-
bus. — Rocky Mountains of Montana and Idaho, Burke, Watson ;
collected by the former many years ago, by the latter in 1881 at
Battle Camp.

Aster (Orthomeris) Palmeri. A. spinoso aliquanto affinis,
caule frutescente capitulisque Feliciis Capensibus similis, glaber.;
ramis herbaceis e caule lignoso 4-pedali paniculato-ramosissimis Bac-
chai-idis modo striato-angulatis ; foliis integerrimis angustissime linea-
ribus leviter uniuerviis, ramulorum parvis obtusis ; capitulis panicu-
latis sparsis lin. 3 longis ; involucri campanulati bracteis imbricatis
erectis oblongis obtusis rigidulis, dorso versus apicem viiidulo, margi-
nibus scariosis ; receptaculo fimbrillis acheniis angustis subteretibus
hirsuto-sericeis dimidio brevioribus onusto; ligulis 8-10 brevibus
albis; fl. disci circiter 20. — S. Texas, at Corpus Cbristi Bay and on
the Rio Grande at Eagle Pass, September and December, 1879.
Palmer, no. 509, 516. This militates against the West Indian genus,
Gundlachica, of Proc. Am. Acad. xvi. 100.

VOL. XVII. (n. 8. IX.) 14

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Aster imhricatus, "Walp. Rep. ii. 574. This is the name, by
transference, of the Chilian species named by Xuttall Tripolium im-
hricatum. And it may here be noted that it is the original Tripolium
conspicuum. Lindl. in DC. Prodr. v. 254, founded on specimens of
Bridges and Bertero ; a jalant of rather rigid and strict habit, perhaps
perennial, with comparatively large solitary heads, and a "turbinate"
involucre of firm i^luriserially imbricated bracts, the outermost ovate
and ovate-lanceolate, the inner mostly acute. It is quite different
from the common and wide-spread annual sj)ecies which has been
taken for it.

Erigeron dryopiitllus. Euerigeron, subcinereo-pubescens ;
radice perenni ; caule pedali parce ramoso ; ramis npice nudis mono-
cephalis ; foliis membranaceis obovatis lyrato-pinnatifidis sinuatisve
in petiolura alatum attenuatis, ramealibus lanceolatis snbintegris ;
involucri bracteis subulatis ; ligulis 80-90 longe exsertis lin. 3 longis
albis purpureo tinctis ; acheniis parce hispidulis ad margines tantum
nervatis ; pappo fere simplici, setulis exterioribus paucis exiguis. —
Northern Mexico, in the mountains at Guajuco, N. Leon, southeast of
Monterey, Palmer, no. 495.

Erigeron Pringlei. Ctespitosus e caudice crasso multicipiti,
pygmfEus, fere glaber et loevis ; caulibus floridis simplicibus erectis vel
patentibus gracilibus inferne foliatis monocephalis ; foliis radicalibus
pinnatim 3-5-fidis in petiolum longe attenuatis, lobis brevibus oblongis
acutis, caulinis angusto-linearibus ; involucro glabro ; ligulis 25-35-
violaceis. — Crevices of rocks on the Santa Rita Mountains at the
elevation of 9000 feet, S. Arizona. Pringle.

Erigeron Muirii. AfRnis E. grandijtoro, Hook., differt insig-
niter lana gnaphalioidea mollissima longa herba tota vastiente ;
caulibus spithamieis monocephalis ; foliis plerisque spathulatis ; invo-
lucri bracteis sursum attenuatis ; ligulis albis ; pappo externo multi-
squamellato conspicuo. — Cape Thompson, Ahx&ksi, John Muir, 1881.
The most interesting and apparently the only new species of an ex-
tensive and truly valuable collection made by Mr. Muir in a recent
searching-cruise which he accompanied, and which extended to
Wrangel Island. The plant seems to have been abundant, for it
occurs in the collection under three numbers. The head, style, rather
scanty main pappus, &c., are very much as in E. grandijlorus, espe-
cially of the var. lanatiis ; but of that the pubescence is villous, except
at the head, towards the base of the plant varying to hirsute : in this
the whole plant is densely clothed with long and soft cottony wool,

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 211

quite in tlie manner of Gnaphalium, and the short outer pappus is
very conspicuous.

Uacciiaris sarothroides. B. Emoryi affinis, scoparia, micro-
phylla; foliis linearibus iutegerrirais, ramulinis miuimis ; capitulis laxe
pauiculatis miiioribus paucifloris ; pappi fl. masc. setis apice nudis,
fl. foem. dcmuui liu. 3 longis. — Southern borders of California, San
Diego Co., near the old Mission station, the boundary monument, &c.,
Sutton Hayes, Palmer. This is one of the species with soft elongating
pappus in fruit, which has been somewhat confounded with B. Emoryi,
and also with B. sergiloides, which belongs to another section.*

* The North American species of Baccharis I now understand in this wise,
arranging them in four groups.

1. Pappus of the fertile flowers very copious, pluriserial, elongated in fruiting,
fine and rather soft : akcncs 8-10-costate : stems somewhat simple and Iiorba-
ceous above the woody base : leaves linear, 1-nervcd. — To this group belong
B. juncea of S. Brazil, of which I have not seen akenes, and B. Seenanni, Gray,
of Mexico, only that the latter appears to have 5-nerved akenes.

B. Wrigutii, Gray, PI. Wright, i. 101, & ii. 83. W. Texas to S. Colorado and

Arizona.
B. Texana, Gray, PI. Fendl. 75, & PI. Wright, 1. c. Texas.

2. Pappus of the fertile flowers less copious, conspicuously elongating in
fruit, soft and fine, mostly flaccid and bright white : akenes 10-nerved. These
are brandling shrubs, with numerous glomcrulate or paniculate heads, the
leaves sometimes incisely lobed or angulate dentate, but not serrate.

* Atlantic species.

B. uALLMiFOLiA, L. Coast of Ncw England to Texas ; also in Cuba.

B. GLOMERULiFOLiA, Pcrs. North Carolina to Florida near the coast; also
Bermuda.

B. SALiciNA, Torr. & Gray. B. salicifoUa, Nutt. Colorado, east of the moun-
tains, to W. Texas. I have seen few specimens that belong to this species.
Its leaves are from oblong to linear-lanceolate, rarely entire ; heads or glome-
rules of two or three heads pedunculate ; involucre of both sexes campanu-
late (nearly .3 lines long), of mainly ovate and acutish bracts.

B. AXGusTiFOLiA, jMiclix. Brackisli marshes, from S. Carolina and Florida
to Te.xas.

* * Pacific species.

B. piLCLARis, DC, including B. consanguinea, DC. Pacific coast from Mon-
terey to Oregon.

C. rMORTi, Gray, Bot. Mex. Bound. 83. S. California from Los Angeles Co.,
and through the interior country well into Arizona and the southern part of
Nevada and Utah. Originally described only from upper branches ; some
specimens of it have been referred to the preceding, others to B. salicina.

212 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

PLUCnEA (Berthelotia) borealis. Tessaria borealis, Torr. &
Gray (§ Phalacrocline, Gray, PI. Wright), &c. Berthelotia lanceo-
lata, DC, being referred by Bentham to Pluchea, carries with it the
present plant. Tlie near affinity of the two, as well as the subcaudate
anthers, I had noticed in PI. Wrightianai, i. 102, but I did not carry
out the conclusion on account of the stoutness of the pappus-bristles.
— Tessaria, Ruiz & Pav., considering that the species are exclusively
South American, may be retained, and characterized by the narrow
heads and the long villosity of the small receptacle.

Antennaria flagellaris. Capitula A. dimorphce sed minor,
floribus paucioribus ; caudice parvo simplici emittente flagellis scapi-
formibus gracillimis nudis (spithamajis) propagiue mox radicante et

From the variations in the size of the heads and a difference in male in-
volucres, tliis may comprise two species.
B. SAROTiiEOiDES, Gray, supra. So far as known, this is confined to S. Califor-
nia along and near the Mexican frontier.

* * * Of New Mexico, Arizona, and Mexico ; the branches terete and
lightly striate (not striate-angled as in the preceding and in most of our
species), minutely pruinose-roughened.

B. PTEKOXioiDES, DC. Prodr. v. 410. B. ramulosa, Gray, PI. Thurb. .301, &
Bot. Mex. Bound. 84. Aplopappus ramulosus, DC. Linosyris (Aplodiscus)
ramulosa, Gray, PI. Wright. The specimen in the Candollean herbarium
appears to be tliis rather wide-spread and peculiar Mexican species.

3. Pappus of the fertile flowers not longer than of the male, even in the fruit
not surpassing tlie style, therefore not elongating in age, ratlier rigid and
scanty : akenes lO-nerved, but the intermediate nerves sometimes indistinct :
fertile corollas regularly and acutely 5-tootlied : receptacle bearing some chaffy
scales similar to involucral bracts among the outer flowers, becoming hemi-
spherical or conical when these are numerous : liranches herbaceous from a
woody base ; the fruitful ones bearing sparing small leaves, or naked, and
paniculate small heads.

B. SEEGiLOiDES, Gray in Pacif. R. Rep. iv. 101, & Bot. Mex. Bound. 83, also
Bot. Calif, i. 333, but there mixed with B. sarothroides, &c. Desert of
S. E. California to Nevada and adjacent borders of Nevada and Utah.

4. Pappus of the fertile flowers not flaccid, little if at all elongated in fruit,
mostly not copious : akenes only 4-5-nerved.

* Scabro-puberulent or pubescent, not glutinous : fruiting pappus mani-
festly surpassing the style : heads loosely paniculate : bracts of the
involucre scarious with a green or greenish back or centre, acute or acu-
minate : stems herbaceous from a more or less woody base.

B. BRACHYPHYLLA, Gray, PI. Wright, ii. 83. S. Arizona to the borders of
California. Very minutely puberulent.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 213

monocephalo terminatis ; foliis omnibus angusto-linearibus. — A. di-
morpha, var. Jiurjelluris, Gray, in Wilkes Exped. xvii. 3GG. — Wash-
ington Territory and eastern part of Oregon, Pichering and Bruclc-
enridge, Cusick, IIowcU. A peculiar sjjecies of the marked section to
which A. dimorpha belongs. Incomplete specimens were referred to
that species, on the strength of Nultall's description, from which it
would seem that his female plant might almost be of this species.
And the following proves to be a third s[)ecies of this section.

Antennakia sTENOriiYLLA. Stolonibus flagellisve ut videtur
nullis ; caulibus gracilibus 3-6-pollicaribus foliosis foliisque angusto-
linearibus acutatis elongatis argenteo-lanatis ; capitulis 2-4 ad apicem
nudum caulis capitatim cougestis ; involucre utriusque sexus lin. 2-3

B. Plcmmek^, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. xv. 48, &c. Mountain ravines back of
Sta. Barbara and Sta. Monica. Miss Plummer (now Mrs. Lemmon), Parish.
* * Glabrous or nearly so, smooth, often glutinous : fruiting pappus slightly

if at all surpassing the style.
•<- Bracts of the 15-30-flowered involucre rather narrow and of firm texture,
witli green centre or costa : leaves rather small and rigid, serrate with
rigid or spinulose teeth.
B. THESioiDES, HBK. Includes B. ptarmfarfolia, DC. A common Mexican

species, collected in S. Arizona by Wright.
B. BiGELOvii, Gray, Bot. Mex. Bound. 84. First collected in Arizona and
New Mexico by Bigelow, Wi-ight, and Thurber, recently by Lemmon and liusby.
t- -f- Bracts of the many-flowered involucre rather narrow, thin and pale
but with greenish centre : heads corymbosely cymose : receptacle hemi-
spherical or broadly conical !
B. DouGLASii, DC, including B. Hccnkei, DC, which came from Monterey,
California, not Mexico. An herbaceous species, wholly Californian.
•»-•(-■*- Bracts of the many-flowered involucre broad (outer ovate), thin-
chartaceous, rather dry, with narrow scarious margins (at least the
inner) yellow or tawny : stems very leafy up to the corymbosely cymose
inflorescence : leaves lanceolate, willow-like.
B. GLUTiNOSA, Pers. A name to be adopted if this is indeed the Cliilian species,
as I suppose. It is certainly both B. ccerulescens and B. Alamani of De Candolle,
and probably has other names. It is a tall species, herbaceous from a more
or less woody base, common from S. California to S. W. Texas and tlirough
Mexico.
B. viMiNEA, DC. A. Californian species, which extends from Monterey to
San Bernardino Co., is a true shrub, 6 to 12 feet high, with shorter and more
entire leaves than the foregoing, bearing smaller clusters of larger heads,
terminating short lateral brancblcts. According to Messrs. Parish Brothers
it blossoms at the end of winter or in early spring ; while the foregoing
blossoms in autumn.

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

longo, bracteis omnibus ovatis oblongisve obtusiusculis brunneis vel
masculis internis apice albo ; setis pappi fl. masc. sursum parum bar-
bellulatis liaud cluvellatis. — A. alpina? var. stenophylla, Gray, iu
Wilkes Exped. 1. c. — Spipen River, Wasbington Terr., Pickering
and Brackcnridge. Union Co., Oregon, on higb bills, Ciisick.

Gnaphahum Wrightii. G. microceplialo peraffine ; ramis diffu-
sioribus ; foliis latioribus plerisque spatbulatis basi nunquam adnato-
productis ; iuvolucri bracteis griseo-albis obtusis, interioribus apicu-
lato-acutatis. — G. microcephalum. Gray, PI. Wright, i. & ii., non
Nutt. — Common from S. Arkansas and W. Texas to New Mexico.
Also no. 419 of Parry and Palmer's collection from San Luis Potosi,
Mexico, wliich has been referred to G. canescens, DC. ; but, from the
character, that species is better represented by no. 433i of the same
collection.

Adenocaulon. To the remarks in Proc. Am. Acad. viii. 653, the
following correction and addition should be made. An attentive
examination of all the species shows that the basal auricles of the sa-
gittate anthers are manifestly produced into a slender acumination or
small tail, the adjacent ones connate. And the genus is so thoroughly
conj:;ruous with Carpesium, which is anomalous in the EulnuIecB, that
the two may well be associated in the Inuloid subtribe Adenocaiclece.

MiCROPUS AMPHIBOLUS. M. Califomico proximus, differt floribus
focmineis 9-10 in receptaculo oblongo subimbricatis, bracteis fructiferis
tenuioribus (maturis chartaceis) parum latioribus, appeudice ovata
hyalina majore primum arete inflexa demura porrecta ; floribus sterili-
is pappo paucisetoso instructis. — California, no. 416 of Kellogg
/ Harford's distribution ; and Walnut Creek near Martinez, Brewer,
1860-62. — I wish to call attention in California to this plant, which
has been confounded with Micropus Californicus and with some other
FilaginecB. Its characters are such as really to give some color to the
merging of Stylocline in Micropus, the female flowers, about ten in
number, being spirally inserted on a somewhat elevated tbougii hardly
columnar receptacle, the scarious hyaline apical appendage to the bract
(which all the species possess) being larger in proportion to the bract,
indeed almost of its length in anthesis, and then infiexed, afterwards
horizontal, and the almost mature fructiferous bracts comparatively
thin and soft, so that it approaches Psilocarplnis. Moreover the
few staminate flowers are subtended by linear deciduous paleoe, and
provided with a few pappus bristles. The organic apex of the ovary,
though lateral, is close to the summit. Transitional though it be, I

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 215

cannot refer the plant to Sti/locline, nor suppress that genus without
also suppressing Psilocarphus.

PLUMMERA, Nov. Gen. Coynpositarum.

Capitula heterogama, pauciflora; fioribus radii foemineis ligulatis
2-5, disci niasculis 6-8. Involucruni obpyramidatum, cupuliforme,
cartilagiueo-coriaceum, duplex ; exterius e bracteis 4 ovatis oblongisve
obtusis dorso carinatis ultra medium usque scepius coalitis ; interius e
bracteis totidem alternantibus vix brevioribus liberis obovato-cuneatis
apice lato rotundato subseariosis. Receptaculura planum nudum,
Corollce radii lato-cuneata;, trilobae, sensim in tubum brevem angustataj ;
disci tubuloso-infundibuliformes, breviter obtuseque o-dentatae, extus
crebre glanduloso-pubentes, tubo proprio brevi crassiore. Antheraj basi
obtusaj. Stylus fl. disci apice brevissime bifidus, ramis baud stigmati-
feris, apice depresso-dilatato semi-peltato : ovarium inanum gracile.
Achenium fl. radii turgidum, obovatum, ecostatum, sursum pilis tenu-
issimis villosum, areola epigyna parva parum depressa: pappus
nullus.

Pldmmera floribunda. Herba ut videtur biennis, bipedalis,
superue corymboso-ramosissima, foliosa, subglabra, odore et sapore
amaro-aromatica ; foliis omnibus tenuiter 1— 3-ternatim partitis, modo
Helenii et ActinellcB impresso-punctatis ; capitulis parvis perplurimis
fastigiato-cymosis plerisque pedunculatis ; floribus aureis. — Apache
Pass, S. Arizona, Mr. ^ 3Irs. Leminon. Dedicated to the latter, under
the name which she until recently bore ; the partner of her husband
in the severe labors and privations of Arizona exploration, and in the
honor of this and of many other interesting discoveries. The natural
affinity of this plant may rather be with Actinella in the Helenioidece ;
but the essential characters are wholly those of the Helianthoidece-
Milleriece.

DUGESIA, Nov. Gen. Comp.-Melampodiearum.

Capitula heterogama, radiata ; fl. radii 8-12 foemineis, disci pluri-
mis hermaphrodito-sterilibus. Involucrum latum, duplex ; exterius
foliaceum, e bracteis 6-8 obovatis oblongisve patentibus ; interius e
bracteis numerosioribus oblongis membranaceis erectis. Receptacu-
lum planum ; paleis angusto-linearibus scariosis planis apice dilatato
subherbaceis flores steriles subtendentibus, exterioribus ab acheniis et
bracteis invokicri subtendentibus omnino liberum. Corollaa radii
ligula plana cuneato-oblonga apice 2-3-fida e tubo brevi ; disci fere

216 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Silphn, stylus sterilis Silphit, vel summo apice bifida : ovarium inane.
Achenia obovata, crassa, obcompresso-turgida, dorso subconvexo uni-
nervia, ventre subangulata, costa prominente superne in den tern cras-
so-subulatum rigidura porrectum desiuente, marginibus dentato-alatis
(nempe ala siiiuato-iucisa nunc jiluripartita, lobis suminis cartilagiueis
auriculiformibus forte ad pappum referentibus), basi nee bractea sua
involucri nee paleis internis adnata.

DuGESiA Mexicana. Herba bumilis e radice perenni, facie Chry-
sogoni, foliis pinnatifidis hispidulis EngelmannicB (sed plerisque oppo-
sitis), acbenio dente interno instructo Lindheimerce, sed Sllphio potius
affinis, acbenio crasso (maturo tuberculato-scabro) scbizoptera insignis.
— Lindheimera Mexicana, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. xv. 34 ; Hemsl.
Bot. Centr. Am. ii. 141. San Luis Potosi, Parry ^ Palmer; but
collected much earlier by Dr. Schaffner. This might seem to be re-
ferable to the obscure genus Schizoptera of Turczaninow ; but the
involucre and slender tube to the sbort ligules attributed to that genus
indicate something different, perhaps more like Guardiola.* — This
genus is named in honor of Professor Alfred Duges, of Guanaxuato,
Mexico, a zealous zoologist, from whom we have recently received a
collection of the plants of that part of the country.

Parthenium confektuji. Herbaceum, pube adpressa substrigosa
canescens et hirsutum ; radice ignota forte perenni ; caulibus 1-2-peda-
libus sat validis subsimplicibus usque ad apicem foliosis ; foliis circum-
scriptione obovato-oblongis bipinnatifidis, segmentis lobisque brevibus
crebris obtusis, vel pinnatilobatis lobis paucies crenato-incisis ; capitu-
lis perplurimis corymboso-cymosis confertis; involucro canescenti-
pubente ; pappi paleis parvulis oblongis. — Plains of Coahuila, Mexico,
near Parras, Gregg, 1847-9, Palmer (no. G48), 1880. Belongs to
the section formed for P. Jlysterophorus (but pi-obably the root
perennial), which species indeed approaches it in a canescent and
simpler-leaved variety (var. lyratum), of the same region, no. 316,
Wright, no. 647, Palmer, &c. The present species, now confirmed by
Palmer's specimens, was long ago collected by the late Dr. Gregg.

* Chrysogonum ViRGiNiANUM, L. It Still appears that this is the only
species of the genus, although a rather variable one. The akenes at maturity
fall away from the receptacle, carrying the involucral bract behind and the
bracts of two or sometimes three sterile tlowers in front : so the genus belongs to
the Parthenioid group, along with Berlandiera, Engelmamua, &c., and not with
Silphium, where Bentham placed it, liaving combined it witii Moonia, Arn, and
taking the character in these respects from that truly distinct Indo-AustraUan
genus.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 217

Ambrosia pdmila, the Franseria pumtla, Nutt., and of Torr, &
Gray, FI. ii. 293, of which " we had not seen the fruit," nor had
Nuttall, is a good Ambrosia, with muticous fruiting involucre. Occa-
sionally two of these are connate at base, on which character Delpino
founded his genus Heinianihrosia. The species is very closely related
to A. CANESCENS, namely A. fruticosa, var. canescens, Benth. PI.
Ilartw. 17, of Mexico. But that is taller, more silvcry-canescent,
with narrower lobes to the leaves, slender-pedicelled sterile heads,
and some small spines to the fruiting involucre ; the latter character
probably unreliable.

RuDBECKiA MONTANA. E grege Ji. occidentalis, procera, lasvis,
fere glabra; foliis pinnatifidis, sumrais pauci-laciniatis, lobis paucijugis
lanceolatis, terminali majore nunc oblongo-ovato ; ligulis nullis ; disco
primum ovoideo, fructifero cyliudraceo 1-3-pollicari ; acheniis cum
pappo longius cupulato liu. 3-4-loiigo. — Rocky Mountains of Colo-
rado ; E. Hall, sjjec. cult. Elk INIountaius, Colorado, Brandegee.

RuDBECKiA MoHRii. R. atroriibcnti, Nutt., per-aflinis, ramosior,
glaberrima ; foliis minus rigidis angusto-linearibus viridibu.s ; disco
atro-fusco subgloboso ; ligulis luteis ; paleis receptaculi parum mucro-
natis ; acheniis longioribus subcurvatis areola obliquo iusertis ; pappo
profunde cupulato. — Margin of ditches and ponds near the Dead
Lakes, not far from lola, W. Florida, June 22, 1880, Cliarles Muhr.
This has some affinity on the one hand with R. nitida, but is a much
nearer relative of it. atrorubens, which is quite of this genus, and no
Echinacea. Dr. Mohr collected these two peculiar species in the same
district.

Gymnolomia TRILOBA. Subglabra, ramosa ; radice ignota ; foliis
alternis lato-ovatis trilobis basi truncata vel subcordata ; involucri
bracteis linearibus disco hemisphterico demum ovoideo brevioribus ;
receptaculo conico ; acheniis glaberrimis subcompressis calvis. — On
peaks of the Chirricahui Mountains, south of Rucker's Valley, Ari-
zona, Lemmon.

Synedrella vialis. Calyptrocarpus vialis, Less. Syn. 221, &
Linno3a, ix. 269. Oligogyne Tampicana, DC. Prodr. v. 629 ; Deless.
Ic. Sel. iv. t. 38; Gray, PI. "Wright, i. 111. Blainvillea Tampicana,
Hemsl. Biol. Centr.-Am. ii. 169. In PI. Wright., above cited, I had
noted the near relationship of this plant to Synedrella as well as to
Blainvillea, and concluded that the wingless akenes mainly distin-
guished it from the latter genus. I had then seen no winged or mar-
gined akenes, and did not know that upon this plant was founded the

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Cahjptrocarpus of Lessing, which is characterized as having "achae-
niuni plano-obcompressuin .... intcrruptc et aoguste alatum." A
tuberculate winged margin of this sort is mauifest in some of the
outer akeues of Texan and Mexican specimens. »S'. peduncularis of
Beutham appears to be the connecting link between this species and
S. nodljiora. The autlior would doubtless have added this third
species, if he had noticed that the akenes of the disk as well as the
ray are obcompressed and dorsally subtended by narrow flat chaff.
And so De Candolle's Oligogyne is described. Blainvillea is quite
different in these respects. But to Blainvillea, and certainly not to
this species, belongs B. biristata,T)C. (the Galophthalmum Brasiiiense
of Nees and Martins), of Brazil.

ViGUiERA LANATA. Tomcnto denso pannoso candidissima, humilis
e basi ut videtur lignescente ; foliis plerisque subradicalibus crassis
rotundatis fere integerrimis trinervatis basi nunc subcordatis petiolatis,
caulis floridi alternis, superioribus nunc omnibus ad bracteas parvas
spathulatis linearibusque reductis ; involucri imbricati (semipoll. alti)
bracteis linearibus tomentosis ; ligulis plurimis ultra-semi^^ollicaribus ;
acheniis undique sericeo-villosissimis ; pappi j^aleis intermediis trunca-
tis fimbriato-laciniatis aristis subulatis dimidio brevioribus. Bahiopsis
lanata, Kellogg, Proc. Calif. Acad. ii. 35. — Cerros Island, Lower
California, Veatch, Street, Belding. — Through the kind attention of
Dr. Parry, we possess an original specimen of Dr. Kellogg's Bahiopsis,
which is here characterized. It is quite different from the plant
doubtfully named Viguiera nivea, Benth. ? in the Botany of Califor-
nia, which, falling back to its earliest specific name, now becomes V.
tephrodes. Nor is it the Encelia nivea, of Benth. Bot. Sulph. 27,
which is still ambiguous. The original at Ivew appeared to me desti-
tute of pappus, and Bentham's note, in Gen. PI. ii. 376, leaves it to
be inferred that he saw none. There is a jjlant collected in Lower
California by Lieutenant Belding which accords with Bentham's
description, except that the leaves are alternate, and there is a very
caducous pappus of two aristiform paleiv, but no intermediate squamella^.
The akenes, when known, will j^robably refer it to Encelia rather than
to Heliantlms. But it is to be noted that Encelia nivea, Benth., is
said to come from San Quentin. Now the only San Quentiu we
know is on the Bay of San Francisco. But the plant at Kew was
not recognized on inspection.

Leptosyne (Coreocarpus) Arizonica. Suffruticosa, ramosa ;
ramis floridis elongatis herbaceis gracilibus foliatis ; foliis omnibus

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 219

oppositis 3-5-partitis, segmentis linearibus plerumque integerrimis ;
capitulis laxe corymboso-cymosis breviuscule peduuculatis ; iuvolucro
extenio indistincto e bracteis 1-3 parvis, iuteruo seu proprio e bracteis
G-8 ovatis biseriatis ; anuulo corolla; tubi barbato ; ramis styli fl.
herm. appendice subulato sui)eratis ; acheiiiis obloiigis margiiiibus serie
tuberculoium quasi alatis aut calvis aut aristis 1-2 teiiuibus instructis
(faciebus aut laivibus aut birtello-muriculutis), iutimis minus perfectis
angustioribus imniargiiiatis. — Near Fort Lowell, Arizona, along
streams, Leinmon, 1880. Santa Cataliua Mountains, Priiirjle 1881. —
Tlie delicate short awns of the akenes are either naked or S2)aring]y
denticulate, the denticulations spreading or some of them recurved.
The minute cupule at the summit of the ovary and akene is within
the base of the corolla, therefore an epigynous disk. — It is becoming
evident that Leptosyne^ DC, Piigiopappus, Gray {Agarista, DC),
and Coreocarpns with Acoma, Benth., must be combined into one
genus, which is the counterpart ou the western side of North
America of Coreopsis on the eastern, and from which it is distin-
guished by its fertile ray-flowers and by the annulus of the disk-corolla.
The latter is a peculiarity of the genus. Leptosyne maritima^ as we
have it in cultivation, occasionally develops a short paleaceous awn
to each margin of the summit of the akene. Pugiopappus (of three
described species) and Coreocarpns form good sections, and the latter
approaches Bidens.

Madia Yosemitana, Parry in litt. Inter sect. Anisocarpiim et
HarpoEcarpum, pusilla, spithama;a ; foliis linearibus integerrimis, sum-
mis alternis ; capitulis solitariis longiuscule pedunculatis ; floribus radii
5, ligulis brevibus, involucri bracteis apice brevissimo erecto, achenio
semi-obovato parum falcato apice coronula parva setulis ciliolata in-
structo ; disci 3 sterilibus intra cupulam 4-dentatam, pappo instructis
e setis paucis parce barbellatis corollam a^quantibus. — Cxlifornia, in
damp moss at the foot of the Upper Yosemite Fall, Parry, June 1881.

Lagophylla glandulosa. L. ramosissimce proxima ; indumento
parco brevi ; ramulis foliis prjesertim superioribus bracteisque glandu-
lis claviformibus obsitis ; acheniis minus obcompressis, areola tei minali
miuore. — Cdifornia, in the Sierra Nevada from Auburn to near the
Yosemite, Lemmon, Mrs. Pidivell, G. R. Vasey.

AcTiNELLA Vaseyi. E grcge A. Richardsonii ; radice ut videtur
perenni ; caule stricto pedali ramisque floridis fastigiatis foliosis ;
lobis foliorum angusto-linearibus; involucro campanulato (lin. Sj^alto),
exteriore 8-9-lobato, nempe e bracteis ovato-oblongis ultra medium

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

conuatis ; ligulis majusculis (lin. 4 loiigis) ; receptaculo convexo ; pappi
palcis obloiigis sajpius obtusis enerviis corolla disci vix dimidio brevi-
oribus. — New Mexico, in the Organ Mountains, G. It. Vasey,
August, 1881.

Artemisia Parishii. Seriphidiu7n, frutescens, 3-4-pedalis, to-
mento minutissimo undique canescens ; foliis (plerisque sesquipollicari-
bus) aut linearibus integerrimis (lineam latis) aut inferioribus apice
dilatato tridentatis ; panicula ampla laxa, ramis gracilibus polycephalis ;
capitulis (lin. 2 longis) 6-7-floris ; iuvolucro campanulato ; acheniis
utriculatis glandulosis et pilis arachnoideis parce villosis. — Newhall,
Los Angeles Co., and in Cajon Pass, California, Oct. 1881, coll.
S. B. Sf W. F. Parish. It has the habit and ample paniculate in-
florescence of A. Palmeri.

Senecio Lemmoni. Frutescens, parum succulentus, ramosissimus,
tomento arachnoideo parco mox delapso glaberrimus ; foliis lanceolatis
argute dentatis vel denticulatis (summis linearibus integerrimis), imis
in petiolum marginatum attenuatis, superioribus basi auriculato-dilatatis
amplexicaulibus, auriculis spinuloso-dentatis ; ramis floridis apice
nudis ; capitulis pauciusculis longius pedunculatis ; involucre parum
bracteolato ; ligulis circ. 12. — Near Camp Lowell and Sta. Catalina
Mountains, S. Arizona, Lemmon, 1880 & 1881. Not much like any
other North American species.

Cnicus Rothrockii. C. Arizonicce similis, ramosior; caule foliis-
que glaberrimis Isevibus, vel ramis nunc pilis crispulis parce pubescen-
tibus ; involucri bracteis primum laxe lanulosis. O. Arhonicus, var.,
Rothrock in Wheeler Rep. vi. 179. — Central and Southern Arizona,
Rothrock, 1874, Lemmon, 1881.

HECASTOCLEIS, Nov. Gen. Comp.- Mutisiacearum.

Capitula uniflora : flos hermaphroditus. Involucrum cj'lindraceum,
e bracteis pauciseriatis imbricatis angusto-lanceolatis subherbaceis rigidis
cuspidatis. Receptaculum parvum nudum. Corolla fere coriacea,
tubulosa, angusta, regularis, limbo baud ampliato in lacinias 5 a?quales
lineares mox recurvo-patentes fisso. Antherte lineares, subcoriacea^,
basi in caudas sat longas nudas productaj. Stylus integer, apice stig-
matico truncate parum emarginato. Achenium immaturum cylindra-
ceum, glabrum. Pappus coroniformis, laciniato-deutatus, corueus. —
Frutex ramosus, glaber ; ramis rigidis foliosis; foliis alternis et in
axillis fasciculatis coriaceis, caulinis llneari-lanceolatis plerumque cus-

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 221

pidato-mucronatis margine hinc inde spinuliferis sessilibus, floralibus
arapliatis lato-ovatis iliciformil)us venulosis margine sjiiiiulis gracilibus
armatis capitula sessilia pi. m. glomerata fulcrantibus paululum super-
antibus ; corolla albida.

Hecastoclkis Siiockleti, — Very arid district, at Candelaria,
Esmeralda Co., Nevada, W. S. ShocMey. A remarkable addition to
the few known North American Mutisiacece, to stand near AinsUcca,
but ahngether sui generis and of peculiar habit. The generic name
alludes to the separate enclosure of each flower in its involucre.

CuEi'is PLEUROCAUPA. Inter C. occidenlaJem et C. acuminatam.
quasi media, pube minuta cinerea demum decidua; caulibus subaphyl-
lis ; foliis runcinato-dentatis incisisve ; cyma paniculiformi laxa ; capit-
ulis angustis paucifloris ; acheniis oblongis sursum baud attenuatis
eximie alato-10-costatis pappo paullo brevioribus. — Head-waters of
the Sacramento, above Strawberry Valley, on wet slojies of the moun-
tains, at the altitude of about 7,500 feet, 1881, Pringle. The short
and thick akones, with at least ten narrow and very salient ribs, almost
wings, sei)arated by broad grooves, distinguish this species.

LoBKLi.A. Gattingeri. L. appendiculatce sat similis ; floribus
minoribus (lin. 3 longis) ; calycis lobis baud ciliatis attenuato-subula-
tis fere inappendiculatis basi utrinque callo minimo instructis, fructi-
feris capsula brevioribus ; pedicellis quandoque bracteolatis. — Middle
Tennessee, in springy places of calcareous bluffs and in cedar bar-
rens. Dr. Gattinger. No. 1 G37 of the distribution of A. H. Curtiss,
under the name of L. leptostachys. Flowering May and August,
from a monocarpic root.

GiTHOPSiS diffusa. Demum effuse ramosissima; ramis gracili-
bus; foliis parvis ; calycis lobis lanceolatis (basi latioribus) corollam
subfcquantibus ovario pra^sertim capsula fere lineari arete sessili sub-
dimidio brevioribus ; seminibus turgide oblongis. — On Cucamonga
Mountain, S. California, June, 1881, S. B. 4- W. F. Parish. The
capsule opens apically, as in the original species.* The blue corolla is
only 2 lines in length.

Androsace Arizonica. E grege A. occidenfalis, tenella; scapis
debilibus decumbentibus radiisque umbella) pauciflora; capillaribus
elongatis ; foliis phyllisque involucri consimilibus brevibus ; calycis
lobis foliaceis, fructiferis accrescentibus ovatis radiato-patentibus tube

* Baillon's statement to the contrary is foundod on a misapprehension, he
evidently having taken a Texan Specularia for Gcthopsis. See Bull. Soc. Linn.
Par. 304.

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

brevi lato capsula semiclaudente longiorlbus ; corolla minima ; semini-
bus paucis (5-G) sat magnis. — Santa Catalina Mountains, S. Ari-
zona, Pringle. Mostly in fruit, April 19, 1881 ; earlier specimens
may have a less inconspicuous corolla. A. occidentalis has been col-
lected in the same mountains.

GoMPHOCARPDS HTPOLEUCUS. Asclepiadi lanuginosce (Mexi-
canne) hand dissimilis ; caule valido bipedali puberulo ; foliis omnibus
oppositis ovalibns brevi-petiolatis supra glabratis viridibus infra albo-
tomentosis ; pedunculis umbella multiflora longioribus ; corolla viridula,
segmentis ovali-oblongis (lin. 4 longis) ; cucullis atropurpureis carno-
sis erectis (antheris duplo longioribus) oblongo-ligulatis et basi hastatis
sed lobis seu appendicibus triangulatis acutis arete inflexis, facie interna
baud fissa. — Santa Rita Mountains, Arizona, Pringle*

* The following Gentianece are contributed by Dr. Engelmann : —
Erythrjea nudicaulis, Engelm. Biennis, E. DougJasii proxima ; caule hu-
miliore erecto sursuni laxe brachiato-rainoso ; foliis infimis ovatis basi breviter
contractis rosulatis, caulinis paucis lineari-lanceolatis ; floribus paucis longe
pedunculatis ; calyce tubum coroUse vix ccquante ; lobis corollae oblongis obtusis
planis tubo paullo brevioribus ; antheris lincari-oblongis ; stylo ovario multoties
breviore ; seminibus subglobosis reticulatis. — Base of Santa Catalina Moun-
tains, Arizona ; fl. April, C. G. Pringle. This is distinguished from all the
North American species by its rosulate leaves (4 to 6 or 8 lines long) and
almost naked stem, 2 to 6 or 8 inclies high, with small and narrow distant
leaves, and few (rarely more than 4 to 6) very long-peduncled flowers; these
are scarcely more than 5 lines long, rose-purple with yellow throat ; anthers
(soaked) from half to nearly a full line long ; stigmas broadly fan-shaped.
From the nearly allied E. Douglasii it is distinguished by its radical leaves
and whole growth, by a much shorter flower-tube in proportion to the lobes,
and rather smaller seeds.

Gentiana microcalyx, Lemmon in litt. Annua, erecta, pedalis seu sesqui-
pedalis, fastigiato-ramosa ; foliis sessilibus e basi subcordata ovato-lanceolatis
margine sub lente scabrellis ; floribus inferioribus longe pedicellatis in apice
ramulorum cymoso-aggregatis (fere 5 lin. longis albidis denmm pallide violaceis) ;
calyce profunde inasqualiter 5dobo tubo corollas ter quatcrve breviore ; lobis
corolla; patcntibus lanceolatis acutiusculis basi nudis tubo subcylindrico brevi-
oribus ; ovario subscssili in stylum brevissimum attenuato ; seminibus globosis
Iteviusculis. — Arizona, Mr. Sj- Mrs. Lemmon. — Leaves thin, and, with the excep-
tion of the middle ones, almost without nerves, from an inch to an inch and a
half long. Flower 5 lines, calyx 1 line long. Allied to G. Wislizeni of the
same region, but distinguished by the smaller proportions, thinner leaves, and
especially the shape of the calyx and the absence of any fringe in the throat of
the corolla, whereby it stands next to the much larger and coarser G. qmiKjwJiora.

G. Englemann.
Mr. Lemmon has published a description and a woodcut of this new Gentian
in the Pacific Rural Press, of Feb. 25, 1882. It was collected on the summit
of the Chirricahua Mountains, in the southern part of Arizona, Sept. 30, 1881.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 223

GiMA (Navarretia) prostrata. G. leucncephalcE proxima, sed
humifusa cai)itiilo primario radical!, ramisque inferne iiiulis apice capi-
tulutn foliis iiivolucratum gerentibus quasi prolifera ; calycis tubo
parce hirsuto ; ovulis seminibusque in quoque loculo 4. — Near Los
Angeles, California, on tbe margin of desiccated ponds, Rev. J. C.
Nevin, 1879, 1881, Dr. Parry, 1881.*

PiiACELiA Pringlei. Euphncclla, p. namatoidei proxima, gra-
cilior, glanduloso-pubescens, aperte ramosa ; foliis linearibus basi
attenuatis, inferioribus oppositis, omnibus pseudo-racemis gracilibus
brevioribus ; sepalis linearibus corolla fere rotata cterulea dimidio bre-
vioribus. — Mountains about the head-waters of the Sacramento
River, N. California, at 7,500 feet, Pringlc, 1881. This is interest-
ing as connecting the anomalous P. nnmatoides with the ordinary
Phacelias. Only one or two pairs of leaves are opposite ; the inflo-
rescence is as free from circination as in that species.

PiiACELiA PLATYi.OBA. Euphcicelia inter species pi. m. glandu-
losas ncc setosas, gracilis, pube brevi molli subviscosa ; foliis parvulis
pinnato-o-partitis, segmentis oblongis crcnato-incisis, terminali majore
subpinnatifido ; floribus in spica angusta breviter pedicellatis subcon-
feitis ; calycis lobis e basi angusta valde dilatatis foliaceis (1 vel 2
subito in laminam oblato-ovatam, cteteris minoribus obovato-spathula-

* It has at length become evident that the unequal insertion of the stamens
(so characteristic of Phlox] will no longer serve to distinguisli CoHomia from
GiUa. Transitions occur in the same species from very unequal to equal inser-
tion, or nearer to equality than in some other Gilias besides those of the Navar-
retia section. The character of solitary cvules having also failed, nothing
remains but to remand Nuttall's genus Cnllomia to the already large and much
diversified genus Gilia. Fortunately not many new names will be required:
For the

C. Cavanillcsiana, Don, is GiUa glomeriflora, Benth.

C. CuvaniUesktna , Gray, as to the United States plant, is G. mnltijlora, Nutt.,
from which one or two other species or forms are still to be extricated.

C. Thurbert, Gray, has to be G. Thurberi.

C. lonrjijlora, Gray, is G. lonrjijlora, Don.

C. agjrcfjala, T. C. Porter, is G. agrjrefjata, Spreng.

C. leptulea. Gray, is G. capiUans, Kellogg.

C. licteropliijlla, Hook., is G. Sessei, Don.

C- gilioides, Benth., with C. f/lutinosa, is G. divaricata, Nutt.

C. gracilis, Dough, is G. gracilis, Hook.

C. tenclla. Gray, may be named G. Icptotes.

C. linearis, Nutt., can retain the specific name of G. linearis, and

C grandijlora, Dough, that of G. grandijlora, the homonym of Steudel being
G. densijlora.

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

tis); corolla subrotata caerulescente, appendicibus brevibus obtusis-
sirais ; capsula in exemplo abortu moiiosperma obloiiga acutiuscula
(Ihieam longa) calycem baud superaiite ; semine subrugoso. — Califor-
nia, in Fresno Co., 1881, Parry. The species of this group are not
very clearly defined ; but no one has a foliaceous calyx of this fashion.
The expanded corolla is barely 4 lines in diameter. The fruiting
calyx does not exceed 2 lines in length ; and the one or two quasi-
petiolate lobes are a line in breadth.

Eriodictyon angustifolidm, Nutt., var. pcbens. Foliis ssepe
latiuscule lanceolatis baud lucidis supra puberulis subtus tomentulosis ;
ramulis pube brevi et calycibus villo denso indutis. — San Bernardino
Co., California, 1881, aS'. B. ^- W. F. Parish, Parry. With the
foliage of E. glutinosum as to shape, and a pubescence which makes
some approach to that of E. tomenhisnm, this has the short and nearly
campanulate corolla of E. angustifolium, to which it is acrordingly
referred.*

* Revision of the Racemose Basi-bracteate Species q/" Echinospekmum, in Correction
oftlie Syn. Flora of N. America, ii. p. 189.

1. Very loosely and small-flowered biennials, or perhaps sometimes annuals :
corolla and nutlets not over 2 lines broad or long; leaves tliin and green.

E. ViRGiNicuM, Lehm. Nutlets of the globose fruit equally short-glochidi-
ate over the whole back.

E. piNETOEUM, E. L. Greene, in herb. Cauline leaves small, narrowly oblong,
mostly obtuse : racemes erect and simple ; nutlets only marginally glochidiate
with flattened prickles, but the flat or concave ovate dorsal disk glochidiately
muriculate. — New Mexico, on tlie Pinos Altos Mountains, July & Sept. 1880,
E. L. Greene.

E. DEFLEXUM, Lehm. Nutlets only marginally glochidiate, with the dorsal
disk minutely scabrous : in var. Americanum (which makes some approach to
E. Virginicnm) the somewhat more granulate dorsal disk not rarely bears two
or three small glochidiate prickles on an obscure midnerve !

2. More or less larger- and less looselj'-flowered : racemes usually paniculate :
tube of the corolla not at all or only slightly surpassing the caly.x : glochi-
diate prickles either wanting on the back of the nutlets or shorter and
smaller than those of the margin.

* Biennials : dorsal disk of the nutlets wliolly unarmed, granulate-scabrous.

E. URSiNUM, E. L. Greene, in herb. Hispidulous or hispid on the stem and
leaves, stout : nutlets small (2 lines long), with broadly ovate dorsal disk plane
or nearly so, the subulate flattened marginal prickles short. — New Mexico, on
gravel beds of Bear Caiion in the Bear Mountains, New Mexico, 1880, E. L.
Greene. To tliis, in flower only, evidently belongs no. G33, Fendler, N. Mexican
Coll., which had been referred to the next species.

E. FLORiBUNDUM, Lehm. Pubescent, rather strict : nutlets larger, with

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 225

Eritrichium INTICRMKDIUM, E. Krynitzk'ia, E. muriculato affine,
admoduin variaus ; nuculis ovato-lanceolatis (ex ovata sursum serisim

ovate-dcltoiil dorsal disk more or less carinately one-nerved, margined b}' a
series of long flat subulate prickles. — The syn. " E. subdecurre.ns, Parry, &c ,"
to be excluded, as it belongs, along with many of the specimens referred here,
to the next species. Corolla commonly 3 lines in diameter.

* * Perennials, largt'r-flowcred (corolla usually 5 lines in diameter) : dorsal
disk of the nutlets sparsely armed with much shorter and smaller glochi-
diate prickles than the flattened and basally dilated mai-ginal ones.

E. DiFFUSUM, Lehm. Pubescent and often canescent with soft hairs or with
leaves hispidulous, branclied from the base: pedicels usually slender : nutlets
with broadly ovate dorsal disk ; the ventral face roughish and dull ; the margi-
nal prickles as in E. Jloribundum; but mature fruit not seen. — Lehm. Pug. ii.
23; Hook, Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 83, not Gray, Syn. Fl., in which this species is
mixed with E. Jlorihundum. Rochdia patens, Nutt. Jour. Acad. Piiilad. vii. 44.
Echinosprnnmn subdecumbens, Parry in Proc. Davenport Acad. i. 48. Douglas's
plant, on wiiich the species was founded by Lehmann, is a low and leafy form,
quite cinereous, with altogether immature fruit. When well known it may give
cliaractcrs specifically to distinguish the following :

Var. iiispiDUM. Stem and leaves truly hispid : nutlets broadly ovate (3 lines
long), with marginal prickles completely confluent for more than half their
length into a wing, the ventral face very smooth and lucid. — Eastern Oregon,
on rocky hills and gravelly banks, Cusick, 1880 and 1881 ; and near Boise City,
Idaho, Dr. T. E. Wilcox, 1881.

* * * Perennial, with simple stems from a multicipital caudcx, compara-
tively large-flowered (limb of the nearly rotate corolla half an incli in
diameter), linear-leaved, sericeous : fruit wholly unknown; probably of this
genus.

E. ciLiATUM. Cijnoglossum ciliatum, Dougl. in herb. Hook. ; Lehm. Pug. &
Hook. Fl. 1. c. 85. — Douglas's station noted in herb. Hook, is " On the gravelly
banks of mountain streams near the head-springs of the Columbia ; in herb.
Benth. Kettle Falls and Spokan River, 1826." The fruit is a great desideratum.
Cynorjiossum Ilowardi, with which it was rightly associated in the Syn. Flora,
p. 188, is evidently only a dwarf and probably alpine variety of the same
species, in which the sericeous hirsute pubescence is all still appressed. In the
plant of Douglas spreading and more bristly hairs fringe the margins of the
leaves with a kind of ciliation, and there are similar spreading or refle.xed
bristles on the lower part of the stem. This is a foot or so in height.

3. Comparatively large-flowered, perennial, with tube of the corolla surpassing
the calyx and about the length of the lobes: nutlets of the globose fruit
equably armed over the whole surface and margins with long and slender
but flattish minutely glochidiate prickles.

E. Californicum. E. dijj'usum, Gray, Syn. Fl. 1. c. (excluding small-flowered
specimens which belong to the true E diffnsnm, and excl. syn. Kellogg ?) not of
Lehm. — Sierra Nevada, California, from Mount Shasta southward. This was
VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 15

226 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ad apicem attenuatis nunc valde papilloso-muricatis ; ab E. harhigero
differt calyce sa^pius dimidio minore baud villoso ; nuculis ssepius 4
fertilibus. — Southern part of California (from Los Angeles, Nevin,
&c.) to adjacent Arizona. Not uncommon in collections, bas been
confounded at times vvitb botb of the two species mentioned: if it
should pass into E. muriculatum, the character of that species would
require much extension. It bas been collected by Parry, Lcminuji,
Parish, Cleveland, &c.

Erituichium racemosum, "Watson in herb. Krynitzkia, Pseudo-
3Iyosotts, 6 basi lignescente perenne, raraosissimum, setis rigidis
subsparsis hispidum ; foliis linearibus parvulis ; floribus racemoso-
paniculatis sparsis, nonnullis folioso-bracteatis ; pedicellis flori sub-
sequilongis ; calyce setis rectis patentissimis rigidis instructo, segmentis
laiiceolatis acutis tubo corollae alba5 breviter hypocrateriformis bre-
vioribus; nucula fertili ssepius unica (fere lineam longa) e basi lata
sursura angustata dorso parce muriculata intus sulco sursum angustato
tota longitudine gynobasi subulata in stylum sat gracilera producta
adnato. — Mesquite Canon, San Bernardino Co., California, March,
1881, *S'. B. 8f W. F. Parish. The calyx and pedicel appear to be
persistent.*

taken for Lehraann's E. diffusum, because of his description of the corolla
(" Corolla alba ? magna, tubus calyce paullo longior sensim ampliatus ") ; and
Californian specimens of the real E. diffusum were mixed witli it. The origi-
nal specimens of the latter do not have the exserted tube of the corolla which
marks the present species when in blossom, as does the fruit at maturity. It
is the E. nervosum of Kellogg ; but neitlier the leaves nor the sepals are per-
ceptibly nervose (the former not "3-5-nerved" nor the latter "3-nerved"),
so that the name would be a false one.

*^* E. Mexicamim, Hemsl. {CipiorjJossum Mexicamim, Schlecht, in Linnaea,
& DC. Prodr. x. 156), is an apparently biennial species with slender prickles
covering the whole surface of the fruit, but with corolla-tube not exceeding
the calyx.

* ERiTRicniuM, § Plagiobothrys.
Good specimens and careful notes, kindly communicated by the Rev. J. C.
Nevin of Los Angeles, and a consequent re-examination, enable me to distin-
guish the species of the first subdivision in the Syn. Fl. N. Amer. (p. 102)
more clearly than is done in tliat work. It will be seen that one of them
requires a change of name.

E. FULVUM, A. DC, the M ijosilis fuh-a , Hook. & Am. Bot. Beechey, p. 38, and
I suppose Phifjiohothrys rufescens, Fischer & Mej'er, as appears from tlic habitat,
were all founded on the Chilian plant. My specimens of this, from Bertero's

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 227

LiTiiosPERMUM (Riiytispermum) glabrum. Ilumile, e radice
annua ramosum, lajve, prteter pube parca adpressa minuta glaberri-
raum ; foliis spathulato-linearlbus ; bracteis inflorescentiaj spiciformis
clcnsiflorne demiim elongataj nuUis ; floribus fere sessilibus ; calycis
segmentis subspathulato-linearibus foliaceis corolloe albai a^quilongis,
fructiferis costa inferne valde incrassata indurata; nuculis oblongo-
ovatis subtriquetris fere la^vibus opacis, areola basilar! baud magna. —
Apacbe Pass, S. Arizona, Leinmon, 1881. A singular species of Old-
World type, somewhat like L. incrassatum of Gussone ; the base of
the calyx and its exceedingly short pedicel similarly thickened and
indurated after flowering ; but the flowers are not accompanied by
bracts, the nutlets are narrower, slightly contracted at base and with
less dilated areola of insertion, and quite inclosed in the mdurated
base of the calyx.

Jacquemoxtia Prixglei. J. ahutiloidei affinis, fticie Abutili,
erecto-difi'usa e basi frutescente, baud volubilis ; foliis cordatis breviter
acuteque acuminatis integerrimis utrinque cum ramis canescenti-

and from C. Gay's collection, although destitute of good fruit, plainly differ
from the North American species. The calyx is 5-parted all but to the base
into linear lobes. There is no evidence that it connives over the fruit, and
it seems that it cannot be circumscissile.

E. NOTHOFUi.vuM, of California and Oregon, the Myosotis fulva, Hook. Bot.
Beeehey, Suppl. p. 369 (that of Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. is probably E. tendlum,
Gray), E.fulvum, A. DC. as to Calif, plant ; Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. x. 57, &c.
Erect from a rosulate tuft of thinnish radical leaves ; the slender compara-
tively simple stems reaching a foot or two in height : spikes ebracteate except
sometimes at base : calyx 5-cleft barely to the middle into oblong-lanceolate
and hardly at all accrescent lobes, closely connivent over the fruit, promptly
circumscissile above the base. The pubescence of the calyx, although gener-
ally rufous, is often whitish.

E. CANESCEXS, Gray, 1. c. Diffusely spreading or depressed, or sometimes
ascending, more canescently hirsute, but the tips of tlie cal^-x at first not
rarely rufous : leaves of firmer texture : spikes bracteate below and sometimes
tiiroughout : calyx 5-parted (fully two thirds to the base) ; the lobes broadly
triangular-lanceolate or broader, accrescent, open in fruit, tardily when at all
circumscissile close to the base.

Var. Anizoxicujt, Greener, more hirsute or hispid, with somewhat the
aspect but not the fruit of E. Toirei/i : corolla smaller, sometimes witli a tinge
of rose-color : calyx less accrescent : rugas of the nutlets rather sliarper and
towards the sides rising sometimes into elevated points or tubercles. — Arizona,
Greene, Prinrjle S. Utah, Marcus Jones. An intermediate form, collected on the
Mesas near San Bernardino by the Brothers Parish, has soft-hirsute pubes-
cence, softer leaves, the upper ones forming conspicuous bracts to the loose
spikes, and very accrescent mostly wide-open calyx.

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AlilERICAN ACADEMY

tomentosis ; pedunculis folio longioribus 2-3-floris ; floribus perlicella-
tis ; sepalis acutis vel parum acuminatis, 3 exterioribus ovatis, iuterio-
ribus subovatis teiiuioribus dimidio minoribus ; corolla ut videtur alba,
limbo pollicern lato. — S. Arizona, in the Santa Catalina Mountains,
Pringle, May, 1881.

EvoLVULUS L^TUS. E. Arizonico affinis, scd pilis longis patenti-
bus villosus atque indumento sericeo undiqne argentato-sericeus, mul-
ticaulis e basi pereuni suffrutescente ; caulibus erectis foliosis ; foliis
lanceolatis sessilibus (majoribus ultra-senaipollicaribus, sumniis lin.
2-3 longis) ; pedunculis 1-3-floris folia pi. m. superautibns ; corolla
caerulea semipollicem diametro. — Mesas and foot-hills of the Santa
Rita Mountains, S. Arizona, Pringle.

Breweria minima. Pusilla, e radice annua diffusa, pubescens ;
foliis lanceolatis basi attenuatis, imis spathulatis ; pedunculis unifloris
folio brevioribus versus apicem bibracteatis : flore lin. 2-3 longo ;
corolla violaceo e calyce parum exserta, lobis subovatis ; stylo bipar-
tite.— Northern part of Lower California, April, 1882, 3Iarcns Jones,
Parry, Pringle. This has the aspect of an Evolvulus and of the Sfy-
lisma section of Breweria.^

Pentstemon Parisiiii. p. spectahili et P. Clevelandi affinis,
pariter glaberrimus, glaucescens ; caule 2-3-pedali ; foliis integerrimis
vel tenuissime denticulatis, caulinis pra?sertim superioribus oblongo- seu
ovato-lanceolatis e basi subcordata semiamplexicauli baud connatis ;
panicula ampla eflfusa, pedicellis gracilibus ; corolla (pollicari) angusto-
infundibuliformi roseo-rubra mox violascente, limbo parvo suba;quali,
lobis lin. 2 longis ; filamento sterili glaberrimo. — S. E. California, in

* It may here be noted that an inspection of the originals in the Sherardian
herbarium enables me to eliminate two false species of Convolvidacece introduced
by Pursh, which have given trouble, viz. : —

Convolvulus Sherardi, Pursh, Fl. ii. 730. This is founded on a poor fruiting
specimen of Convolvulus micranihus, R. & S., which was collected in the West
Indies, not in " Carolina."

Cahjstegia paradoxa, Pursh, 1. c. 729. The specimens belong to Convolviihs
hirsutus, Bieb. (C. sagittatus, Sibthorp), and were doubtless collected by Sibthorp
in Greece. There are two tickets with the specimen : one with tlie phrase
" Convolvulus hirsutus anguloso folio, fl. albo ; " the other, which is there
through some misplacement, is the one which Pursh has copied, and which led
him wrongly to conclude that tlie plant came from Virginia.

Cali/sicgia Catesbeiana, Pursh, 1. c, is founded on a specimen from Catcsbj' in
the same cover as the above (no. 343) ; I had already rightly referred it to
the Convolvulus scpium, var. repens, but it is one of the forms which may almost
as well he referred to C. spithamcEus.

OF ARTS- AND SCIENCES. 229

the Cucamonga Mountains and elsewhere, Wallace (panicles only,
referred in Syn. Fl. 2Ga, to P. Glevelnndi), S. B. Sf W. F. Parish.
P. Cleveland!, of wliith the best specimens have now been received
from the Brothers Parish (who are most zealously and admirably
developing the botany of the region) appears to hold to the bearded
sterile filament, has decidedly smaller and narrower corolla, of more
crimson color; the leaves are rigid, very acutely and rigidly dentate,
and the np[)cr pairs almost always connate into an oblong or oval
disk. "With P. spectahills this equally showy species accords only the
character of the panicle and the glabrous filament, the corolla being
less ampliate above, &c. I am glad to dedicate the species to the
botanists who alone have collected it (except for the imperfect and
misunderstood specimens of the late Mr. Wallace) and have enabled
me to make it known.

Pentstemon brevilabris. Glaber, glaucescens, e basi lignes-
cente ramosus, ultra-spithamajus ; foliis coriaceis integerrimis oblongo-
lanceolatis imisve spathulatis ; thyrso angusto elongato, pedunculis
paucifloris brevissimis ; calycis segmentis lanceolatis prorsus herbaceis ;
corolla vix semipollicari (albida?) sursura ventricosa parum bilabiata,
lobis subconformibus brevissimis; filamento sterili autheriferis fere
conform! nudo. — Cerros Island, Lower California, S. Belding, 1881.

Ortiiocarpus Parishii. IWiphysaria a.ni\\Qvi?, omnibus biloculari-
bu5, ultra-spithamjea, ramosa ; foliis 3-5-fidis ramisque fere glabris,
lobis lineari-filiformibus ; braeteis 5-partitis foliis consimilibus sum-
misve purpureo tinctis cum calyce tenuiter pubentibus flore brevioribus ;
lobis calycis lanceolatis obtusis tubo dimidio brevioribus ; corolla pur-
piirascente labio ssepius pallido, saccis tarn latis quam longis, fauce
parum pubescente, galea lauceolata obtusiuscula extus puberula. —
San Jacinto Mountain, San Diego Co., California, S. B. ^ W. F.
Parish, July, 1880.

CouDYLANTiius ( Adenostegia) Nevinii. Paniculato-ramosus,
subvillosus ; foliis tripartitis integrisque angnsto-linearibus baud
calloso-apiculatis ; iloribus secus ramulos graciles sparsis nudiusculis ;
corolla flavido-purpurascente ; staminibus 4 consimilibus; filamentis
villosis ; antheris unilocularibus, loculo altero rudimentario vel sicpe
nullo ; seminibus Igevibus scarioso-apiculatis. (To stand next to C.
tenuis, and the subsection in Syn. Fl. to be widened ou account of
the essentially one-celled anthers.) — California, in the San Bernard-
ino Mountains, at about 5,000 feet, Rev. J. C. Nevin, 1880, S. B.
^ W. F. Parish, 1881.

230

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

MoNARDELLA TENUiFLORA, S. "Watson in herb. Soror M. ma-
cranthce, Gray, fruticuloso-caespitans, spithamcea, tomentuloso-cinerea;
foliis parvis (lamina lin. 3-4 longa) ovalibus ovatisve ; capitulis mul-
tifloris ; bracteis oblongis ; corolla albida, tubo filiformi longe exserlo
(ultra-semipollicari) lobis oblougo-lauceolatis multoties longiore. —
S. California, at San Jacinto, in San Diego Co., July, 1880, S. B. ^
W. F. Parish.

Appendix.

BuRSERA MiCROPHYLLA, Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. v. 1.55. This
shrub was collected by Xantus at Cape San Lucas, Lower California,
in fruit, and soon after by Schott, in So-
nora, with a few flowers. It appears to
have all tlie characters of Bursera, except
that, according to Torrey's notes, the ovules
are solitary in the cells. In the original
description is the phrase, " Cotyledones con-
tortuplicatissima." Recently Dr. Parry and
the Messrs. Parish have collected it in
Arizona, near Maricopa, in fruit, and have
raised seedlings, "When sending some
seeds, the Brothers Parish called my atten-
tion to the singularly dissected cotyledons.
They are here represented from a drawing
of a seedling raised in the Botanic Garden of Harvard University,
the figure a little larger than life. Bentham and Hooker state that
the cotyledons of Bursera are " interdum trifidte." In this species
they are biternately dissected into narrow linear lobes. The leaves
of the next pair are simpler, the secondary lobes being fewer and
short ; the succeeding are pinnately parted into seven leaflets, passing
toward the adult leaves, which are pinnate with numerous very small
leaflets on an interruptedly margined rhachis.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 231

XIII.

THE WEDGE PHOTOMETER.
By Edward C. Pickering.

Presented May 10, 1882.

Much attention has recently been directed to the use of a wedge of
shade glass as a means of measuring the light of the stars. While it
has been maintained by various writers that this device is not a new
one, the credit for its introduction as a practical method of stellar
photometry seems clearly to belong to Professor Pritchard, Director
of the University Observatory, Oxford. Various theoretical objec-
tions have been offered to this photometer, and numerous sources of
error suggested. Professor Pritchard has made the best possible reply
to these criticisms by measuring a number of stars, and showing that
his results agreed very closely with those obtained elsewhere by wholly
different methods. His instrument consists of a wedge of shade glass
of a neutral tint inserted in the field of view of the telescope, and
movable so that a star may be viewed through the thicker or thinner
portions at will. The exact position is indicated by means of a scale.
The light of different stars is measured by bringing them in turn to the
centre of the field, and moving the wedge from the thin towards the
thick end until the star disappears. The exact point of disappearance
is then read by the scale. The stars must always be kept in the same
part of tl^e field, or the readings will not be comparable. By a long
wedge the error from this source will be reduced. A second wedge
in the reversed position will render the absorption uniform throu"^hout
the field. Instead of keeping the star in the same place by means of
clockwork, the edges of the wedge may be placed parallel to the path
of the star, when the effect of its motion will be insensible. To
obtain the best results the work .^-hould be made purely differential,
that is, frequent measures should be made of stars in the vicinity
assumed as standards. Otherwise large errors may be committed, due

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

to the varying sensitiveness of the eye, to the effect of moonlight,
twilight, &c., and to various other causes,

A still further simplification of this photometer may be effected by
substituting the diurnal motion of the earth for the scale as a measure
of the position of the star as regards the wedge. It is only necessary
to insert in the field a bar parallel to the edge of the wedge and place
it at right angles to the diurnal motion, so that a star in its transit
across the field will pass behind the bar and then undergo a continu-
ally increasing absorption as it passes towards the thicker portion of
the wedge. It will thus grow fainter and fainter, until it finally dis-
appears. It is now only necessary to measure the interval of time
from the passage behind the bar until the star ceases to be visible, to
determine the light. Moreover all stars, whether bright or faint, will
pass through the same phases, appearing in turn of the 10, 11, 12, &c.,
magnitude, until they finally become invisible. For stars of the same
declination, the variation in the times will be proportioned to the vari-
ations in the thickness of the glass. But since the logarithm of the
light transmitted varies as the thickness of the glass, and the stellar
naagnitude varies as the logarithm of the light, it follows that the
time will vary as the magnitude. For stars of different declinations,
the times of traversing a given distance will be proportional to the
secant of the declination. If d, d' are the declinations of two stars
having magnitudes m and m', and i, t' are tlie times between their
transits over the bar and their disappearances, it follows tliat in' — m
z=zA{t sec 5 — t' sec 5'). For stars in the same declination calling
A sec 5 = -4' we have iv! — m = A! {t — <') . Accordingly the dis-
tance of the bar from the edge of the wedge is unimportant, and, as
in Professor Pritchard's form of the instrument, it is only necessary
to determine the value of a single constant, A. Various methods
may be employed to determine this quantity. Professor Pritchard
has recommended reducing the aperture of the telescope. Tliis
method is open to the objection that the images are enlarged by dif-
fraction when the aperture is diminished ; constant errors may thus
be introduced. Changing the aperture of a large telescope requires
some time, and in the interval the sensibility of the eye may alter.
These difficulties are avoided by the following method, which may be
employed at any time. Cover the wedge with a diaphi-agm in which
are two rectangular apertures, and place a uniformly illuminated sur-
face behind it. Bring the two rectangles into contact by a double
image prism, and measure their relative light by a Isicol. From

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 233

the interval between the rectangles and the focal length of the tele-
scope the light in magnitudes corresponding to one second, or A, may-
be deduced. Perhaps the best method with a small telescope is to
measure a large number of stars whose light has already been deter-
mined photometrically, and deduce A from them.

The great advantage claimed for this form of wedge photometer is
the simplicity of its construction, of the method of observing, and of
the computations required to reduce the results. It may be easily
transported and inserted in the field of any telescope like a ring
micrometer. The time, if the observer is alone, may be taken by a
chronograph or stop-watch. Great accuracy is not needed, since if
ten seconds correspond to one magnitude, it will only be necessary to
observe the time to single seconds. The best method is to employ
an assistant to record and take the time from a chronometer or clock.
If the stars are observed in zones, the transits over the bar serve to
identify or locate them as well as to determine their light. A wedge
inserted in the field of a transit instrument will permit the determina-
tion of the light of each star observed without interfering with the
other portion of the observation. If the stars are all bright, time
may be saved by dispensing with the thin portion of the wedge. In
equatorial observations of asteroids the light may be measured photo-
metrically with little additional expenditure of time. Perhaps the
most useful application would be in the observation of zones. When
the stars are somewhat scattered it would often happen that their light
might be measured without any loss of time. By this instrument
another field of usefulness is opened for the form of horizontal tele-
scope advocated at a former meeting of this Academy (Proc. Amei-.
Acad. XVI. 364). Very perfect definition would not be required,
since it would afFect all the stars equally. To an amateur who would
regard the complexity of an instrument as a serious objection to it,
a means is now afforded of easily reducing his estimates of magni-
tude to an absolute system, and thus rendering them of real value.

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XIT.

ON THE COLOE AND THE PATTERN OF INSECTS.

By Dr. H. A. Hagen.

Presented April 12, 1882,

" Probably there is scarcely a dash of color on the wing or body of
an insect of which the choice would be quite arbitrary, or which
might not affect its duration for thousands of years." These words
were written by Sir Charles Lyell in a letter to Sir John Herschel in
1836.* This letter, which is a real treasure of thought, asserts
clearly that the writer assumes " such contrivances must sometimes
be made, and such relations predetermined between species," for the
protection of their existence.

Though it has been accepted generally that certain colors and
patterns of insects might be a protection against enemies, these inter-
esting facts have been mentioned only occasionally, and a general
review is still a desideratum. Professor Weismann t has given a
very elaborate paper on the origin of the pattern of caterpillars. The
paper, as stated in the preface, intends an examination of the pattern
strictly for the purpose of finding out whether all patterns can be
accepted as the consequences of selection and adaptation, and as pro-
duced in a purely mechanical manner, or whether some unknown
power has to be accepted in part or entirely to explain the pattern.
The writer reaches the conclusion that the latter is not the case, and
that the known principles of selection and adajitation explain the dif-
ferent patterns. The choice of caterpillars was made purposely to

* Life, Letters, and Journals of Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., London, 1881, vol. i.
p. 4G9; Nature, No. G33, Dec. 15, 1871, p. 147.

t Dr. A. Weismann, Studien zur Descendenz-Tlicorie, Leipzig, 1875, vol. i. ;
1876, vol. ii. Die Entstehung der Zeiclmung bei den Suhmettorlings Kaupcn.

OF AUTS AxND SCIENCES. 235

exclude entirely a third factor, sexual selection. Everybody will fol-
low Professor Weismaun's careful and elaborate study with interest,
though it is probable that the examination of a larger number of
exotic species (he has chiefly used European) will change, or at least
modify, some of his statements.*

Nevertheless, if it if to be assumed with Professor Weismann that
the colors and the pattern originate in a purely mechanical manner,
there seems to be a large gap still to be filled. The statement that
color and pattern appear in a caterpillar by selection and adapta-
tion as a beneficial protection, without showing how they have been
produced, where they come from, which part of the body, and what
kind of chemical process brings them out, represents simply a belief.
Belief is, as it is well known, beyond discussion, as long as it is based
upon views which cannot otherwise be proved. But as the author
has prominently advanced that the origin of the color and the pat-
tern is only the consequence of mechanical arrangeraents, excluding
entirely predetermining power, the possibility of such mechanical
arrangements should have been proved satisfactorily.

If we compare side by side Sir Charles Lyell's letter with the
accepted predetermination and Professor AYeismann's work with the
denied predetermination, there seems to be no difference except in
the belief of both authors.

The conviction that color and pattern are the consequence of exist-
ing laws and actions in the body of the insect, induced the present
writer to extend his study in that direction. May it not be considered
too assuming, if the result shall prove inadequate to the purpose. The
first step in all such questions is the most difficult, and often noth-
ing moi'e is left to be said about it, except that it was the attempt
of the first step.f

* Of North American Sphingidse the previous stages of fifty-four species
are known, and of fifteen species all stages. "With very few exceptions all
were published before 1874. Of the European species all stages were de-
scribed long ago of eight species : Sphinx ligustri by Schwarz ; Sph. pinastri
by Sepp, Ratzeburg, Hartig, Schwarz, Klopsch ; Deil. euphorhkz by Sepp, Rosel,
Schwarz ; Deil. porcelliis by Sepp; Smer. tilice by Rosel, Reaumur; Smer. ocellata
by Sepp ; Smer. popitli by Sepp, Schwarz ; Deil. nerii by Rossi. With few ex-
ceptions excellent figures are given. The literature is tlierefore not so scanty
as has been assumed, though not sufficient for the purposes of the author.

t Some parts of the present paper were publislied in the Amer. Natural.
1872, pp. 388-;3r)3, and Entom. Monthly Mag. 1872, ix. pp. 78-83, Mimicry in
the Colors of Insecta.

236 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The Color.

As most insects are more or less colored, color is an impor-
tant character. I have said purposely insects, and not arthropods,
because my studies have not extended to the other groups. Some
facts, of course, can be applied to all ; but the other groups are not
to be compared for the frequency and for the intensity of the
colors with those of insects. There is no doubt that the different
colors of insects are the consequence of the contact of the animal
with air and light ; or at least that colors are more strongly devel-
oped by both these factors. The only contrary statement known to
me is by Professor Sachs, and will be considered later. The influence
of light is proved by the colorlessness of cave insects, of the larvae
living in the earth or in the interior of plants or animals, even by
some insects living only a very short time in the open air, as certain
very small Pllphemerina and Diptera. It is proved by these facts that
colors of organic bodies, plants, and animals are found prominently in
their external coverings. Therefore the Greek philosophers consid-
ered color to be the product of a chemical action, called by them
mxpig, boiling. The interior of organic bodies is mostly colorless or
discolored. There exist, indeed, exceptions even in insects, but at
least a part of these internal colors is to be found in places which are
in contact with the air. The trachea in Odonata and others are red ;
the fat body in Trichois red, in Zerene yellow, in Pentatoma green ;
the Malpighian vessels in some Orthoptera green ; the testicles in
some Hemerobina, at least in the previous stages, lemon yellow ; the
anal glands in Osmylus black ; the blood in Chironomus red. In other
orders we find some internal organs of Ilolothuria brick-red, of Echi-
nus yellow. After all, we are justified in considering those cases as
exceptions, or even as rare ones.

Besides air and light, there is a third factor influencing the develop-
ment of color, heat and its counterpart, cold. The heat has a well-
known prominence in all chemical processes, and of course also in
colors if they are the result of a chemical process. The carbonizing
of tissues gives to them a certain color by the change which follows
the combination of the tissue with oxygen. Such colors arc very
common, and of different intensity in insects. The brown or black
color of many chrysalids, which are inclosed in a cocoon not perme-
able to the rays of light, is probably the product of carbonization.
The importance of heat and of cold for the production of colors in

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 237

insects has lately been sliown by careful and convincing experiments
by Dorfmeister,* Weismann.t W. II. Edwards,^ and others.

The remarkable influence of a wet or dry atmosphere on the colors
will be considered later. The interesting albinism and its counterpart,
melanism, have not yet been studied to such an extent as to allow of
decided conclusions. Albinism is much rarer among insects than
among birds ; but it is obvious that a satisfactory explanation of these
aberrations would permit conclusions about the nature and origin of
the colors.

Besides chemical colors, there exist a very different kind, optical
colors, which we will consider first.

Optical Colors.

Optical colors, produced by the interference of light, are by no
means rare among insects, but they are solely optical phenomena.
Colors by the interference of light are produced in two different ways :
either by thin superposed lamelliP, or by many very fine lines or small
impressions in very near juxtaposition.

There must be present at least two superposed lamellce to bring
forth colors by interference. There cannot be more than four layers
in the wings and scales, which show principally such colors in insects,
two external ones belonging to the cuticula, and two internal ones
belonging to the hypodermis. The naked wings of Diptera and Neu-
roptera often show beautiful interference colors.

The scales of Entimus and other Curculionidje are well known
for their brilliancy, and it is interesting to remark that when dry
scales are examined with the microscope, many are found partly in-
jured, which give in different places different colors, according to the
number of layers which remained. The elytra of some Chrysomelina
and other beetles with iridescent colors orobably belong to the same
category.

* G. Dorfmeister, Mittheil. des naturwiss. Ver. f. Steiermark, 1870, pp. .3-8;
Ueher den Einfluss der Tcniperatur bei der Erzeugung der Sohmetterlings
Varietiiten [Vaness^a AtaJanta), and ibid. 1864 (not seen by nie); Ueber die
Einwirkung verschiedener wahrend der Entwicklungsperiode angewendeter
Warmegrade auf die Fiirbung und Zeichnung der Schmetterlinge.

t Ueber Saison-Dimorphismus der Scbiiietterlinge, 1875, vol. i.

X Mr. D. W. Edwards' (Coalburgh, West Virginia) papers are published,
Canad. Entomol. 1875, vol. vii. p. 228; 1877, vol. ix. pp. 18, 203; vol. xiv.
1882, p. 21 ; Psyche, 1880, vol. iii. Nos. 69, 70; 1881, vol. iii. No. 83.

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Since science is so far advanced, that for every color produced by
interference of light the distance of the lamellns is known by calcula-
tion, it would be possible to give the exact figures of the distance for
every color observed on insects. The wings of some insects show
interference colors only for a certain time (Chrysopa, Agrion), as long
as the membranes of the wings are soft and not firmly glued together.
Later those wings become simply hyaline. On other insect wings
those colors remain during lifetime and persist even after death.

Secondly, interference colors are produced by many very fine lines
or stria3 in very near juxtaposition. Such colors are easily observed
by looking in an oblique direction towards a glass micrometer, even
not a very finely divided one. Some forty years ago Mr. Barton, a
manufacturer in London, used to make iridescent buttons called iris
buttons. There were only thirty to forty impressed strite on a square
line. But each adjacent square line had the strice in another direc-
tion. The fine longitudinal and transversal lines of the Lepidopte-
rous scales seem to serve admirably well to produce the brilliant effect
of color-changing butterflies. But there must be something more
present, as most of the scales of Lepidoptera are provided with simi-
larly fine lines, and only comparatively few species change colors. I
remark purposely that the lines in the color-changing scales are not
in nearer juxtaposition. The explanation of the fact given a century
ago by Rosel,* stating that both sides of the lines (like small prisms)
were differently colored, was due to an optical illusion, explained by
the insufficient power of the non-achromatic microscopes at that time.
There may be a way of explaining this kind of iridescence not yet used
by naturalists; I mean calculation. The late Mr. Nobert, of Greifs-
wald, the unrivalled maker of the well-known test-plates, which con-
tain bands differing by the number of lines, had so far advanced that the
last band has lines with less than one 100,000th of an inch distance,
where the delicate lines of Diatoms are separated from each other by
one 50,000th of an inch. Some twenty years ago there did not exist
microscopes strong enough to see those lines, and it was doubted by
the French Academy if they were really present. Mr. Nobert, as
accomplished in mathematics as in mechanics, proved by calculation
based upon the interference colors produced by those lines, the space
between them. The result agreed perfectly with his previous asser-

* A. J. Rosel, Monatliche Insecten Belustigung, 1755, vol. iii. p. 256,
pi. 44.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 239

tions. Now the most powerful microscopes show the lines, and they
have been photographed of every band by Dr. "Woodward in "Wash-
ington. But even now science is not entirely equal to mechanics, as
the photographs show by some optical illusion six or more lines than
were made by Mr. Nobert. Perhaps in the color-changing butterflies
natural colors are combined with optical colors, or perhaps interference
colors produced by superposed lamella; are combined with those pro-
duced by fine striae. It will be necessary to deprive the wings of
their natural colors by bleaching, and then to make a microscopical
examination. I have begun experiments for this purpose. The
wings of Apatura clytie, a variety of A. ilia, are pale yellow in the
color-changing part ; the wings of Euploea stiperba are velvety black
above, the black changing into violet in the color-changing part.
Both wings, put in eau de Javelle, began to grow pale after one hour.
The paleness began first in the color-changing part of E. siiperba,
and was less visible in the much lighter-colored wings of A. clylie.
After one hour and a half the whole color-changing part of both
species was entirely hyaline. The not color-changing parts were very
little affected, and in A. clytie the light-brown spots were nearly intact.
Both wings had lost entirely the change of colors. The microscopical
examination showed that the scales of the color-changing parts were
very much affected. The scales were hyaline, nearly invisible ; the
longitudinal stria? less sharp, the transversal ones even more affected,
and mostly obliterated. In some places in the middle of the color-
changing part the scales had disappeared, and only their stems were
left. On the other hand the scales of the not color-changing parts
were nearly unchanged, and both kinds of the stria; as sharp as before-
The under side of the wings does not change color at all, nevertheless
the parts corresponding to those iridescent ones of the upper side
were affected as much and in the same manner as the scales of the
upper side. From the beginning of the bleaching process both sides
made the same progress in becoming hyaline. Now the stria; of the
scales, though they had been much affected by the bleaching, could
not be the producers, at least not alone, of iridescence, as in all not
color-changing scales the stria; are exactly of the same arrangement
and distance, just as fine and approximate as in the iridescent ones.
Therefore it may be ^iresumed that the lamella; of the iridescent
scales are more distant one from the other, less firmly glued together,
and therefore easier affected by the bleaching fluid and the colored
substance between the lamellae easier bleached. But why are the

240 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

corresponding not iridescent scales of the under side of the wing also
affected, and at the same time with those of the ujiper side ? It can
only be supposed that the quicli effect upon the scales on one side of
the wing gives easier access to tlie scales on the other side. I confess
tliat I am not entirely satisfied with this explanation, but I do not
know of a more satisfactory one. For the first experiment the wings
were cut through the middle of the color-changing part, and were
therefore perhaps more quickly affected. In subsequent experiments
with entire wings of Euploea superba the iridescence was gone iu
three-quarters' of an hour, but the wing was only less dark even in the
color-changing part. In the same space of time wings of Apatura
Iris and Ilia, and of Thecla gucrcus were entirely bleached, those
of Lyccena Damon only partly. The question whether the striaj of
scales with more distant lamella3 will help to produce iridescence,
which the same kind of stride of scales with not distant lamellaj does
not do, I am unable to answer.

The colors of butterflies change mostly from purple to blue, some-
times to yellow. Probably a calculation based upon the appearance
of these colors might help to solve the question.

An interesting observation by Professor Graber * is here to be
noticed. When caterpillars of Apatura are kept in diffiised light, the
wings of the butterfly show almost no iridescence. The wings of
Vanessa polychloros have slate-colored marginal spots instead of the
commonly blue ones, when the caterpillars are raised under yellow
glass. As no authority is quoted, these observations may have been
made by Professor Graber himself. It is obvious that here a new
and interesting field for experiments is open. The record of Profes-
sor Graber's observations is too fragmentary to go farther with conclu-
sions based upon them, the more so as such isolated experiments need
always the support of reiterated observations before they can be
accepted as facts. This would be needed here even more, as it is
difficult to understand how a different light could work through the
skin of a caterpillar on the wing of the imago which is scarcely
beginning to be built up in the interior of the caterpillar. If true, it
would be an important discovery. An observation by G. Schoch f
does not corroborate Professor Graber's statement, at least for the

* V. Graber, Insectcn, 1877, vol. ii. p. 38.

\ G. Schoch: Mittheil. d. Rchwcizer cntora. Gesell. 1880, vol. v. p. 540.
Zucht von Eiiprcpia caja im gefiirbteni Licht.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 241

changing of colors. Enprepia caja was raised by him in different
colored light. The caterpillars were kept in three boxes, covered
with red, violet, and blue glass. Those under violet glass were more
voraeious than the others, and consumed twice as much food. Their
cry^alis transformed in the imago a fortnight earlier than the others.
]Jut the images of all did not show any perceptible difference. Per-
haps raising of th(^ caterpillars in diffused or homogeneous light may
have a different effect, at least for iridescent butterflies. The Newton
color rings viewed with homogeneous (yellow) liglit change the coloi-
' of the rings, the dimensions of which grow smaller and smaller between
the red and violet rings, in a proportion from fourteen to nine. I do
not know that iridescent butterflies have been examined under homo-
geneous light; perhaj^s such experiments would allow further conclu-
sions.

Krukenberg * presumes the golden-green color of Carahiis auratus
to be an interference color. It is not changed by the influence of
light, nor was he able to extract from the elytra any green pigment
with ether, benzol, carbon of sulphur, chloroform, alcohol, even after
having submitted the elytra before to the influence of muriatic acid or
ammonia. Chlorophyll is not present, whether free or combined with
an acid. The chlorophyll found by K. B. Hofmann (Lehrbuch der
Zoocheraie, 1875, No. 3, p. 3G8) in the elytra of Cantharis is not
present in them, but is derived from the contents of the alimentary
canal. The change of the color in Cantharis is probably the conse-
quence of an alteration of the chitinous external integuments by cold
weather or by a more elevated habitation.

Interference colors are also produced by very small impressions in
juxtaposition. Such an arrangement is found on the feathers of birds ;
for instance, on the necks of pigeons and elsewhere. In the hairs of
Aphrodite and Eunice this arrangement may be compared with striae
(Leydig). Perhaps this kind of interference colors is found more fre-
quently among insects than is commonly known. At least there are
often parts of insects, and their limbs in appearance yellowish, but in
a certain direction changing to brown or blackish. I know of no other
explanation of this not uncommon fact on the legs of Diptera, of
Hymenoptera, and of PhryganidiTi. G. Pouchet (Des Changements dc
Coloration sous I'lnfluence des Nerfs, Journ. de I'Anat. ct Physiol.,

* C. Fr. W. Krukenberfj: Vergl. physiolog. Studien an den Kiisten d.
Adria, 1880, 1881, vol. iii. p. G2.

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 16

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Paris, 1876) has drawn attention to the so-called Iridocystcs (Tnter-
fereiizellen of Briicke). They do not belong to the pigment, but
to optical colors, to fluorescence. A large number of small superposed
lamella! become luminous by contraction. They are very brilliant in
Saphirina and in a large number of fishes, allowing them to change
color according to the color of the bottom on which the lishes are
standing. They may occur in some insect larvte, but have not yet
been recorded. I believe that the arrangement in some insects' eyes
(Mantis), to be mentioned later, belongs to the Iridocystes. It should
be remembered that interference colors, one or both kinds, may occur
in the same place together with natural colors. The mirror spots
of Saturnia Pernyi show besides the interference colors a white
substance in the cells of the matrix, which Leydig believes to be
Guauin. But this fact is denied by Krukenberg for the same spe-
cies, and also for Attacus mylltta and Plasia chrysitis (vol. v. 1881,
p. 65).

Natural Colors.

There exist two different kinds of natural colors.

1. The pigment is deposited in the form of very small nuclei in the
cells, or in the product of cells, in the cuticula.

2. The pigment is a homogeneous fatty substance, a kind of dye
somewhat condensed.

Pouchet speaks of a third kind of natural colors, which are said to
be inherent to certain tissues. He mentions them only for the muscles,
as I believe erroneously. So I have dropped entirely this kind of
colors till a more sufficient proof for their existence is given.

The first kind of natural colors is to be compared with pigment
inclosed in air-tight glass tubes ; the second is related to a diffusive or
fluid pigment.

The first kind of colors belongs to the cuticula, and I will call them
dermal colors. I consider them to be produced mostly by oxidation
or carbonization, in consequence of a chemical process originating and
accompanying the development and the transformation of insects. To
a certain extent the dermal colors may have been derived from hypo-
dermal colors, as the cuticula is secreted by the hypodermis, and the
colors may have been changed by oxidation and air-tight seclusion.
The cuticula is in certain cases entirely colorless, — so in the green
caterpillar of Sphinx oceUata ; but the intensely red and black spots
of the caterpillar of Papilio machaon belong to the cuticula, and

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 243

only the main yellow color of the body to the hypodermis (Leydig,
Histiol., p. 114). A jiarticular main color of the cuticula is assumed
by Grabcr (p. 17), which is said to change the underlying hypodermal
colors. As far as my studies go, the color of tlie cuticula is often
somewhat yellowish with a brownish shade, and only the most super-
ficial layers contain pigments, which therefore must have been pro-
duced during or directly after the casting of the skin. The layers
below the superficial ones were of indifferent color and had nothing
to do with the main color of the insect (thorax of Phanccus carni-
fex). Whether this is generally true will be proved by farther
observations.

The second kind of colors belongs to the hypodermis, and are called
hypodermal colors. I consider them to be the consequence of a
chemical process, generating color out of substances contained in the
body of the insect. These colors may be changed into other colors
by light and heat, perhaps by acids or by the influences of the sexual
organs. If such a change were to a certain extent a photographic
process, some important facts (mimicry) could be understood, which
otherwise are inexplicable.

The dermal colors are red, brown, black, and all intermediate shades,
and all metallic colors, blue, green, bronze, copper, silver, and gold.
The dermal colors are easily to be recognized as such, because they
are persistent, never becoming obliterated or changed after death.
Dermal colors are not unfrequently retained by insects inclosed in
copal, but never by fossil insects inclosed in amber. The persist-
ence of dermal colors is easily understood, as they are formed before
the chitine becomes rigid, and later are preserved in a similar manner
as if they Avere inclosed in hermetically-sealed glass tubes.

The hypodermal colors, placed in the soft and not chitinized hypo-
dermis, are easily recognized, because they fiide, change, and disappear
after death. A fresh or living insect, when opened, can easily be
deprived of the hypodermal colors, simply by the action of a small
brush. An important exception is to be made in certain cases, in
which hypodermal colors are persistent after death as well as dermal
colors. In such cases the colors are better protected and inclosed
nearly air-tight. I refer to certain colors of the elytra and wings, of
the hairs, scales, and appendages of the body. The elytra and wings
are, as is well known, at first open bags in direct communication with
the interior of the body. The hairs and scales are at first similar
open bags, glued together only at a later period. In all of them the

244 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

hypodermal colors are formed, of course, before the membranes are
glued together ; after that time those hypodermal colors are nearly as
well preserved as dermal colors, except that they are subject to fading
after a lapse of time. The possibility of such an inclusion is proved
as a fact by the inclusion of air in the white scales of Lepidoptera.
The white mother-of-pearl spots of the species of Argynnis are pro-
duced by a system of fine transversal pore-canals filled with air ; by
Hydrometra the white ventral marks have the same origin (Leydig).

The hypodermal colors are mostly brighter and lighter than the
dermal ones, — light blue or green in different shades, yellow to
orange, and the numerous shades of those colors combined with white.
Exceptionally they are metallic, as in Cassida, and are then obliterated
after death. The fact which I find quoted, that such metallic colors
can be retained in dead specimens by putting a drop of glycerine
under the elytra, allows us to conclude that those colors are based
upon fat substances. The hypodermal colors are never glossy, as far
as I know ; the dermal colors frequently.

It must not be overlooked that elytra, wings, and hairs all possess
a cuticula, and that even here dermal colors are frequently to be
found, together with hypodermal ones, chiefly in metallic colors. In
the same place both colors may be present, or one of them alone.
So we find hypodermal colors in the elytra of Lampyrido?. In the
elytra of the Cicindelida? the main metallic color is dermal, the white
lines or spots are hypodermal ; by which arrangement the variability
in size and shape of those spots is explained. A large number of
Lepidoptera have hypodermal colors in the scales of the wings, — a
fact shown by the rapid fading of those species.

There occur in a number of insects external colors, that is, colors
upon the cuticula, which I consider to be in fact displaced hypodermal
colors, — the mealy pale blue or white upon the abdomen of some
Odonata, the white on many Hemiptera, the pale gray on the elytra
and on the thorax of the Goliath beetle, and the yellowish powder on
Lixus. Some of those colors dissolve easily by ether or melt in
heat, and some of them are a kind of wax. I believe that those
colors are produced in the hypodermis, and are exuded through the
pore canals. Therefore they may be considered as belonging to the
hypodermal colors. Eriosoma aim is commonly covered with white
waxy secretions. When taken off" gently a new secretion soon begins
to appear out of the pores of the four circular glands which are
found on each segment of the abdomen. If the dorsal half of the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 245

abdomen of a female is cut off, tlie fluid contained in the body by its
contact with the air changes directly to a white shade, which seems to
be of the same nature as the external secretion. Therefore this
white secretion would not be strictly derived from the hypodermis,
except that it is secreted by hypodermal glands. I am not sure
whether some of the colors before mentioned may not be in some way
different from the others. In the case of Lixus I find it stated that
the mealy powder, when taken off, is renewed in a few days. I cou-
fess that my opinion concerning those external colors is not yet en-
tirely settled. That those colors are simply an exudation of fluid
in the body through the pore canals is not to be accepted ; they must
have been changed in passing through the hypodermis. In such Lepi-
doptera as become oily after death, the fat exudes through the pore
canals, and, passing through the hypodermis, reaches the outside of
the body unchanged. A chemical investigation would be very desira-
ble, and would perhaps give some better explanation ; but the quan-
tity which may be had of those colors is always too small for such
a purpose. The blue mealy matter of the abdomen of Odonata when
scratched off and brought in contact with ether on a glass slide is
directly dissolved, leaving scarcely a margin around the spot after the
evaporation of the ether. When the same matter on a glass slide
is held over a candle, it melts directly, and after drying a dull whitish
spot is left.

Bezold's Views upon the Nature of Colors.

Recent investigations about the nature of colors advance also our
knowledge of the colors of insects. The Theory of Color in its Rela-
tion to Art Industry, by W. von Bezold,* contains some excellent
statements, which allow us to understand better the colors of insects.

1. " Transparent colors, so called by artists, are similar in their action
to colored glass or to clear-colored solutions. When the light falls
upon a shining surface of such colors, a reflection primarily takes
place at the upper surface, extending only to a fraction of the impin-
ging light; the remainder enters the colored mass, and there undergoes
a process of absorption, so that it is already decidedly colored wlien
it arrives at the ground-surface of the layer. If at this second sur-
face the light strikes upon a white body which reflects irregularly,

* Dr. W. von Bezold : The Theory of Color in its Relation to Art and In-
dustry. Translated by S R. Kiihler, Boston, 187G, &c.

246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

colored rays will be emitted from this layer in all directions which
face toward the impinging ray of light, and in the repeated penetra-
tion of the colored layer their color will increase in intensity."

I am not yet prepared to assert with certainty that such transparent
colors exist in insects. It is obvious that the different layei's of the
cuticula, when possessing a peculiar color, would answer exactly the
conditions above stated, the more so as a glossy surface is frequent
among insects. Perhaps some remarks by Graber (lusecten, i. p. 17)
belong here. " Most frequently the hypodermis is colored brown or
red, even in such insects as are externally entirely green, as the grass-
hopper, or black, as the cricket. This fact is to be explained partly by
the refraction of the cuticula, and partly by its peculiar color." If
Graber's observation proves to be true, the explanation will be suffi-
cient, and then we have a right to assume that similar cases may occur
among insects. Transparent colors would belong to the dermal colors,
modified perhaps by the underlying hypodermal colors.

2. " Body colors in an artistic sense [Bezold, p. 57] differ entirely
in their action from transparent colors. They are likewise transparent
in very thin layers, and with them it is also the light that has passed
through the pigment which exhibits the characteristic color of the
latter ; but the great difference in the optical action of the pigment
and of the medium, makes it impossible for the light to penetrate
through layers of any perceptible thickness. On account of this dif-
ference a division in transmitted and reflected light takes place at all
the surfaces of separation of the particles of the coloring matter, so
that the portion of transmitted light is' already reduced to an almost
inappreciable quantity at an insignificant depth below the surfixce.
The same is of course true of the light sent forth by the lower sur-
face, and this explains why such colors are opaque when applied in
tolerably thick layers. The light reflected by body colors will always
contain a larger quantity of white light than light that is reflected by
transparent colors. This is the reason why that brilliancy and depth
or fulness can never be attained by body colors as by transparent
ones."

It is therefore obvious that just this kind of color is very frequent
among insects, and not only in dermal, but also in hypodermal colors,
when the cuticula covering them is perfectly hyaline.

3. " Surface colors [Bezold, p. Gl] are the consequence of bodies
which cause a division of the light falling upon them, which allow
rays of a specific degree of refrangibility, or, in other words, of certain

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 247

colors to enter, while they reflect all others. Such bodies show one
color when the light falls upon them, and another when the light is
transmitted through them. The metals in very thin leaves are espe-
cially prominent in this class of bodies. The various aniline pigments
also show such surface colors when dry. Thin layers of those pig-
ments will have a perfectly metallic appearance. Fuchsine or Ma-
genta has a green golden color when the light falls upon it, a purple
color when the light is transmitted through it."

The surface colors are prominently interesting for entomology, as
they explain for the first time the frequent metallic colors on insects,
which have often so true a metallic appearance, that indeed it has been
tried to extract the gold out of them. The condition that such layers
must be perfectly dry, makes it evident, as I have before stated, that
metallic colors must belong to the dermal ones. As I have stated
later, that insect colors might with propriety be compared with aniline
colors, the whole comparison is even more to the point.

4. ^^Fluorescent colors [Bezold, p. 621] act quite differently from the
before-mentioned ones. In all those cases a division of the impin-
ging rays took place, so that a part of the rays entered the body or
passed through it, and that the remainder was absorbed or reflected.
But the fluorescent bodies transform the light falling upon them into
light of another color, that is to say of different wave-length. This
is frequently observed in the yellowish-green uranium glass, in fluor-
spar, in solution of quinine, in petroleum and other bodies. Investi-
gations with the aid of the spectru-m show that in the case of bodies
of this kind light of the most varied colors is transformed into lio[ht
of some other definite color, and that even invisible rays can be
changed into visible ones, as the ultra-violet rays. The retina pos-
sesses in a slight degree the property of fluorescence." I jjresume
that a number of insect colors may probably belong to this kind,
namely, the violet shades observed in Rutela and similar beetles.

■I have i^urposely dwelt at length on these phenomena, as I believe
that they will throw considerable light ui^on occurrences till now
unexplained.

Hypodermal and Dermal Colors.

The hypodermal colors are very often different in males and females
of the same species. The dermal colors rarely differ, so far as I
know, in the sexes. But there are some genera with prominent
dermal colors, which are nearly always different in both sexes, as
Calopteryx, some Ilymenoptera, some Coleoptera, and others.

248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

It would be interesting to know exactly the rule for the change of
color in males and females. So far as I know, this change seems to be
between related colors, and not between complementary ones. But
my observations are far from having any conclusive importance ; in
some cases, as in Hetaerina, the change is effected by complementary
colors, red and green. The same investigation will have to be made
for hypodermal colors. As far as I know, even here the change seems
commonly and chiefly between related colors ; though some cases of
complementary colors have been observed.

The dermal colors never change during lifetime ; the hypodermal
ones may be changed in some way, and are known to be altered in
some instances in a male or female during its lifetime, by sexual or
other influences. By sexual influences, for instance, yellow is changed
into orange, brown into red (in some Agrion females), milk-white
into blue in males, and into green in females (Platycnemis). By
other influences, for instance, by cold (Brauer) in hibernation, pale
yellow is changed partially into red (Chrysopa). But this change
is said to be produced by chromatophores by other naturalists
(Leydig). The hypodermal colors in one insect {Cassida aurickal-
cea) are stated to be changed by a voluntary act of the insect, and
the new color can again disappear (Harris).

Sexual Selection.

Everybody has studied with interest in Mr. Darwin's works (De-
scent of Man, vol. i. p. 374; Nature, vol. xxi. p. 237, No. 532) the ex-
position of his theory of sexual selection. The part concerning the
butterflies is a rather prominent one. But when we weigh the given
facts, they do not seem to be so conclusive as they are considered to
be. Comparatively very few species agree very well, or only well,
with Mr. Darwin's assertions. The fact that it is only peculiar to
butterflies, and does not occur in other families of Lepidoptera,
becomes more important when we find that the theory is exemplified
only in less than one per cent of the butterflies themselves. Why is
the whole main army so much behind ? — is a question nowhere found
answered. After all, the statement, that the male is so much more
beautifully colored for sexual selection, will apply only to exceptional
cases among Le[)idoptera.

Papilio tunnis in North America offers a rather puzzling case.
Its southern dark-colored female, formerly Papilio glaucus, will be as

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 249

good an example as any other for an indiflferently colored female of a
beautifully colored male.

But unfortunately it happens that all the females of Pupilio turnus
in the northern half of North America are so presumptuous as to
show the same gay colors as the male, and even brighter and more
variegated ones. Both sexes have as caterpillars the same food in the
South and in the North. The chrysalis of the dark and gay-colored
females is not different, except that I find in two of the dark ones
raised by J. Boll in Texas (there occur both forms) a longitudinal
blackish ventral baud which is not to be seen in the chrysalis of the
gay-colored females. There is, therefore, no reason left to understand
why this species should form such a strong exception. If the males
need something besides beauty in their competition for the females, it
seems as if the strongest would always be the winner. But is it sure
that the most prominent external beauty always coincides with the
most prominent sexual power ? I confess that I have some doubt
about the fact, as the artificial loss of this power by castration is
followed in birds, in mammals, and in an isolated instance in fishes, by
an unusual development of external beauty.

TTie Change of Color.

The color of insects, or at least its changes, may be originated by
the influence of the air and its humidity, of the temperature, of the
season in which they appear, of the character of the country.

The facts to elucidate such important and interesting changes are
still scarce and isolated. The curious season dimorphism belongs
here. The facts stated in the publications of Weismaun and W. H.
Edwards are known to every student, and need not be repeated here.

The darkening influence of a climate or country with a large
amount of average humidity, which is so well proved for vertebrates
by Mr. J. A. Allen, has a similar effect on insects. The peculiar col-
oration of animals living in deserts is well known, and to a certain
degree repeated among insects. The brilliancy of colors in the
tropics has become long ago a commonplace remark. Surely there
are to be found in the tropics the most brilliantly and intensely col-
ored animals, but it must not be forgotten that by far the largest
number of insects in the tropics are just as indifferently and as darkly
colored as those in colder regions.

It is a remarkable fact that cold or arctic regions, where snow and

2.30 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ice prevail, do uot form, concerning the color of insects, a counterpart
to the trojjics to the extent we might expect. Of course we find
there white or pale-colored species, but they are by no means numer-
ous, and the so-called winter insects, which are found on the snow,
are mostly dark brown or black. But even in the coldest regions
beautiful and gayly colored species occur, but mostly yellow, orange,
or red ones.

An interesting and only recently studied fact, is the change of
colors of the same insect in different countries. Some valuable hints
are given by Dr. Speyer (Stettin, entom. Zeit. 1875, p. 103). If the
predominant colors of Noctuidas are gray, brown, or reddish brown, or
rather a mixture of black, white, and red, less red and more black
has been observed in North American specimens, and less black and
more red in European ones of the same species. If the colors are a
mixture of yellow and red, just the op2:)Osite change is seen ; in the
North American specimens the red is predominant, in the European
ones the yellow.

A few words more about beautifliUy colored caterpillars. As
sexual selection could uot have acted here, and as it was observed
that some of them were not taken by certain species of birds and
lizards, but purposely avoided by them, it was supposed that the
splendid color serves here as protection. But if we remember that
some birds prefer certain caterpillars, and other birds others, as, for
instance, the hairy caterpillars, whose hairy cover suggests the idea of
protection, we shall arrive at the conclusion that more observations are
needed to confirm the above-quoted supposition.

Water insects are nearly all of the same dark hue, yellowish brown
to black, often with an olive shade. Only parts of the body which
are uncovered in the air (abdomen of Nepa) are sometimes of a
brighter purple color. But even among water insects some are to be
found (Hydrachna) of an intense red color.

The climax of the development of the pure and elementary colors
seems to be reached in the class of insects. All these colors appear
here without any transition whatsoever, even in close juxtaposition.

77ie Pattern.

The pattern of the colors of insects is a subject very important for
every naturalist who studies or describes insects. Till to-day only
very little has been published about the pattern. Something is stated

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 251

by monographers about certain groups or families, but that is all. I
believe that a more detailed study of pattern and of the diflerent
patterns which are to be found in different groups, and perhaps the
development of the law according to which the pattern is changed in
diiFerent groups, would advance us nearer to the knowledge of its
nature and origin. What I know about it is only the first step iu this
direction.

The pattern is not the product of an accidental circumstance, but
apparently the consequence of certain events or actions in the interior
of the insect, mostly at the time of its development. The proof is
easily afforded by the regularity of the pattern in the same genus or
in the same family. If studied carefully and comparatively, the pattern
of such a genus is the same for all species, but for some of them more
or less elaborated. The number of such genera, and even of such
families having the same pattern, is so large, that some will be readily
remembered by every naturalist. In some families a peculiar and
constant pattern can be observed for the head, a different one for the
thorax and its limbs, and again another one for the segments of the
abdomen. The latter is on the different segments (Hyraenoptera,
Diptera, Neuroptera, Pseudoneuroptera) mostly the same, but more or
less elaborated, and less finished in the first and last segments. To a
certain extent the same can be said about the segments of the thorax.

Weismann has studied carefully the origin of the pattern of cater-
pillars of the Sphingidaj. The caterpillars were chosen by him
because sexual selection is thus excluded. When just hatched they
are mostly colorless, but after a few hours they almost always become
uniformly green.* The pattern a2:)pears generally after the first
moult in the form of longitudinal bands or lines. There is a dorsal
line, and one ou each side a subdorsal one, and lower down one along
the stigmata. In Cha^rocampa the subdorsal line is changed on
two segments of the thorax into large eye-spots, and disajjpears
entirely on all the following segments. In Deilephila the same line
forms a ring-spot on the last segment, which in some sj^ecies is re-
peated in former segments. In Smerinthus oblique lines cross the
subdorsal line on each segment, and these oblique lines receive colored
borders in Sphinx and Acherontia. The caterpillars of Cha^rocampa
and Deilephila change later the green color to a darker one.

* The young larva of Deilephila euphorbice is entirely black on leaving the
egg (Sclnvarz), or pale and becoming black after half an hour ("Weismann).

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Weismann contends that all those patterns and colors possess only
a biological value. The green color, which first appears, corresponds
to that of the leaves. But in a large caterpillar one main color
would be too apparent ; therefore longitudinal lines separate the main
color into several fields and diminish the danger, the more so when
the caterpillar lives among grasses. The oblique lines afford a similar
protection, and are even more effectual when the lines have colored
borders, which make them resemble the ribs of leaves. The eye-
spots of Chaerocampa are said to frighten enemies, and the variegated
colors of Deilephila to designate them as not eatable. The dark
color of full-grown caterpillars of Chaerocampa is said to be owing to
the impossibility of being protected by any color, on account of its
large size. These caterpillars acquire, therefore, the habit of feeding
at night, and hide themselves during daytime under dead leaves.
As, therefore, every one of the quoted characters is of biological
value, they can be explained by means of natural selection, and the
necessity to admit a phyletic, or inborn power (immediate, designing,
or ordaining power, Crooke) does not exist. The possibility of the
existence of such a power is rejected by Weismann.

The conclusions and statements of Weismann are based upon a
number of European species. But it seems that the study of exotic
species will show that some of these conclusions cannot stand, or will
lose at least a large part of their value. The colorlessness of the
newly hatched caterpillars is perhaps not witliout exception in some
tropical species. The succeeding green color belongs to the hypo-
dermal colors, but all the longitudinal and oblique lines and the spots
belong to the dermal colors. The dorsal line is the consequence of
the situation of the dorsal vessel ; j^robably the subdorsal line and the
oblique lines are muscular lines, and the stigma line a consequence of
the large longitudinal tracheas.

The large eye-spots on the thoracical segments indicate the place
under which the wings are beginning to be formed. Similar spots,
but less strongly developed, are to be found in a number of larvae
of Myrmelionidae. The formation of the wings necessitates a largely
accelerated circulation in those places, and therefore an oxidation of
the cuticula. These eye-spots belong to the dermal colors. The
very remarkable eye-spot in Pteror/on (^Thyreus) Ahbottii appears in
the third stage exactly on the same place where before the tailed
appendage existed. The change in this species is very interesting.
The second stage has as main color a very light grayish pink, and

OF ARTS A^^D SCIENCES. 253

possesses an orange tubercle, surrounded with black, where the first
stage had a tailed appendage. The third stage is either similar to
Pterogon oenotherce, dark gray with numerous irregular and very-
fine jmler lines and some darker longitudinal ones, or is black, with
large transversal bright yellow bands (indeed so large that the color
can also be described as yellow with transversal and longitudinal
black bands), and both have instead of a tailed appendage a promi-
nently black and large eye-spot. The dififerently colored caterpillars
represent not the two sexes, as I have raised males which are entirely
alike in color and pattern, from both forms of the caterpillar. Both
forms live on the same vine (Ampelopsis qm'nqiiefolia), but the
yellow ones are rare. All stages live and feed during the daytime on
the vine, the very visible pink ones and the yellow ones, which would
need some protection, and the gray ones, which do not need it. I
remark purposely that the latter does not go in the daytime on dry
stems, as Weismann (p. 80) records for Pterogon oenotherce^ but feeds
on the green leaves together with the other ones.

The question why this pattern, when considered to be the consequence
of the before-q.uoted causes, is not developed in every caterpillar, is
still to be answered. A large number of conclusions of a similar
character accepted now-a-days are based on exceptions, if we consider
the large number of species which do not agree with them. So feed
in North America the very large caterpillars of Chserocampa openly,
during daytime, contrary to Weismann's statement for the European
species. Exactly in the same manner feed openly in daytime a
number of uniform light green caterpillars, which must nevertheless
be well protected, as they belong to common species. That the varie-
gated colored ones are repugnant to a higher degree than the not
variegated ones, is still to be proved. Both are rarely taken here by
birds, as far as 1 know. That such caterpillars live upon poisonous
plants is true for some European species (Slater, Trans. Entom. Soc.
London, 1877, p. 205). I believe Weismann's statements are only
to be admitted as true ones as far as they go, but not in a general
way.

I may state that at least one case is known to me where a
difference in feeding caterpillars exaggerated the pattern. An ento-
mologist in Prussia a few years ago divided a large lot of Sphinx
caterpillars of the same species, and fed both with tLe same leaves.
The stalks of one lot had been placed in fresh water, and of the other
lot in salt water. Both grew very well, but the latter differed con-

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

siderably in color. Nevertheless the imagos were all alike. The
caterpillar of Hemileuca Maia feeds in Michigan, New York, and
Massachusetts on shrub oak {Q. ilicifolia), in Maine and in Nevada (?)
on SpircBa salicifolia. The caterpillars are very little different, but
the imago differs considerably. The first ones are largely black, with
more or less narrow white bands ; the last ones are largely white only
with blackish borders, and sometimes the hairs on both sides of the
front part of the thorax are also snow white.

Rev. H. H. Higgins (Quart. Journ. of Science, 1868, vol. v. pp. 323
-329, pi. 1) gives some remarks on the proximate origin (the appliances
immediately engaged in producing the color pattern) and general con-
figuration of the patches, bands, and spots of color on the wings of
Rliopalocera. " In the chrysalis state the pritterns of the closely folded
wings, the like spots on the right and left wings do not coincide; that
v.'hich becomes a beautifully formed band, begins as a mere line or
a shapeless spot. The simplest type of color presents itself in the
plain uniform tint when the scales are all colored alike, which is
comparatively rare. At first the scales growing on the membrane
upon or near the veins show a fi-eer development of pigmentary
matter, and in this manner would arise a kind of jDrimary or funda-
mental pattern, namely, a pale ground with darker linear markings,
following the course of the veins (Pi'eris cratcegi). This pattern
occurs in most of the families. Let it be supposed that at a given
distance from the base a portion of the dark scales begins to diverge
on each side from the veins. The dark lines thus formed will meet
in the middle of the areas between the veins producing a band of
scallops having their concavity towards the base of the wing. A
similar band nearer to the base would have its convexities in the same
direction. If the latter mode of divergence be quickly followed by
the former, a row of annular markings between the veins is the result,
the simplest form of annular or ocellate spots. In the pupa state the
scheme of the future pattern is fully organized, so that by the exten-
sion of the soft wings the pattern of the imago is easily performed.
From the vein scales arise all the darker markings, enclosing some-
times the areas of pale, ground tint. The modifications of those areas
are performed by a blush, the deepening or the intensifying of the
color in certain parts of the wing ( G. Cleopatra) . Besides this comes
the gloss by iridescence."

Charles Darwin (Descent of Man, vol. ii. pp. 126-127. fig. 52) speaks
of the formation and variability of the ocelli on the wings of many Lepi-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES, 255

doptera: " Although we do not know the steps by which these wonder-
fully beautiful and complex ornaments have been developed the
process, at least with insects, has probably been a simple one ; for, as
Mr. Trimen writes to me, no characters of mere marking or colora-
tion are so unstable in the Lepidoptera as the ocelli, both in number
and size."

As far as I know there is nothing more published on this subject.
In some few instances I have been able to observe how the pattern is
produced. In dragon-flies (Odonata) the thorax is transparent and
entirely colorless at the moment of transformation. At this time the
muscles are in process of formation. The thoracic muscles of the
Odonata are, as is well known, very powerful, and rather exceptional
in the shape of their tendons. I observed very strong currents of the
blood just along the place where the muscles were developing. The
rush of the blood was very much accelerated. Now just outside of
these we find in Odonata dark lines or bands, which appear to be the
result of the formation of the muscles. Ubi irritatio^ Hi affluxus ;
therefore it is not improper to conclude that a powerful action in the
development of the muscles is here the cause of a stronger combus-
tion and of an oxidation in the adjacent parts of the external crust
of insects. But not the pattern of the thorax alone follows the
lines of the muscles. On the head we find a certain pattern corre-
sponding to the muscles of the mandibular apparatus ; another one on
the segments of the abdomen corresponding to the so-called respira-
tory or abdominal muscles, and another one on the legs corresjDond-
ing to their muscles. It is important to remember that those patterns
are better and more definitely developed in the most powerful flying
Odonata, as in the ^schnina, and especially in the Gomphina. The
main color of the Gomphina is yellow of different shades, mostly
greenish-yellow, and the stronger the species the larger is mostly the
pattern of blackish bands.

I have observed the same proceedings in Cicada just emerging from
the nympha skin. On the head, thorax, abdomen, and legs appear
similar patterns, corresponding to the muscles or to their insertion
places. In fact where a stronger circulation exists in insects, the
parts become more strongly chitinized and darker colored.

Should my explanation of these facts be accepted, we shall have
taken a step forward in understanding the origin of the pattern. I
know very well that among the Odonata patterns exist which do not
agree with my explanation, and in one case are even opposed to it.

256 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

But though most of the patterns can be explained in this manner,
there nuiy exist otlier factors still unknown explaining the opposite
patterns. Tlie explanation given can be considered as admissible as
long as the number opposite to it is a comparatively small one.

The pattern on the wings and elytra cannot, of course, be the pro-
duct of action near or along the muscles, as these limbs are unprovided
with them internally. JBut it seems probable that there the sudden
rush of blood and air by the accelerated circulation and respiration
during the act of transformation produces the same effect. At least
some patterns, the origin of which would be inexplicable, could be
understood bj it.

If a stream or jet of blood passing through the narrow base of the
wingbag should meet within its centre a small obstacle, the pre-
viously straight stream would take the form of a funnel. Should
this obstacle be a kind of ring, the funnel shape would be retained
by the stream, but its central portion would pass undivided through
the ring, and upon meeting another obstacle would produce a second
funnel. Therefore there may be two or more funnels, one within the
other, and a section of them will be circular or elliptical according
to the angle at which they reach the inner surface of the wing. A cu-
rious fact seems favorably to support my suggestion. Nearly every
larger ring or eye-spot of the wings shows a white interruption or
spot in some place. Now as it is impossible that any obstacle, such as
mentioned before, can be entirely free and isolated in the stream, we
must presume that it is somewhere connected with the interior of the
body, and is perhaps produced by some prominent ridge or corner,
and then the funnel or the ring must be interrupted in some place by
this connection. If it is so, this place will not be oxidated (colorless),
and will correspond to the white spot mentioned before.

Such patterns of the elytra and wings have to be performed at the
time when the wing is still an open bag, and before the transforma-
tion. There is still another circumstance which explains some pat-
terns. The walls of the bag which will be later a wing or elytron,
are very suddenly enlarged and strongly dilated during the act of
transformation. Therefore small rudimentary patterns in the bag
will be altered and enlarged by the same proceedings. I know that
many patterns of Lepidopterous wings can be easily explained in this
way. All the wavy lines and similar marks belong to these patterns.
As the ribs or veins of the wings seem to grow faster in transforma-
tion than the membrane between them, the wavy shape of the lines

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 257

would thus be explained. In fact the larger part of the patterns seem
to be produced by expansion or by distraction of the pattern, performed
in the bag at a period before transformation. It should have been
stated before, that the formation of patterns on the wings of Lepi-
doptera must take place at the time when the scales are still little
open bags.

At first ray suggestion about the formation of the pattern in such a
manner may seem to be strange, and j)erliaps not admissible. But in
thinking over the subject again and again, I have found more and more
sup25ort for its adoption. I had been puzzled chiefly about the exist-
ence of obstacles in the streams of blood. The excellent paper of
C. Semper (Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Zool. vol. viii. pi. xv. f. 1)
contains a statement of the formation of a layer to close the wing-
bags at the base. This layer is formed by a number of cells united
gradually by some projections, and the whole may be compared to a
kind of cobweb with larger spots at certain intervals. I believe that
the presence of such a layer would explain very well the presence of
obstacles in the manner before stated.

A striking proof of the appearance of dark color and dark lines
along an accelerated circulation is given by the dark coloration around
the nipple and along the linea alba in pregnant women. This dark
color is not formed by pigment cells, but by the common cells of the
mucosa. Around the nuclei of these cells is -found deposited fine and
homogeneous pigment.

The colors of the pattern are dermal colors. They may, and in
fact do, often cover the whole insect. Leydig stated long ago that
the eye-spots of the caterpillars of Papilio are dermal colors. All
colors, the pattern excepted, are hypodermal colors. The dermal
colors are formed during the transformation, before the integument
becomes rigid and before the cuticula has finished to enclose safely
the colors. The hypodermal colors are formed either after this period
or as a main color in previous stages just after hatching, before any
pattern exists.

I think this is the proper place to mention the interesting fact
called mimicry. In treating of mimicry there have been used indis-
criminately very different fjictors. I have before endeavored to give
some preliminary ideas about it, which are perhaps useful in explahiing
this curious fact. Of course I speak here only of mimicry in colors,
of colors imitating the surroundings, as, for instance, the excrements
of birds, dry leaves, berries, parts of trees, branches, bark, and what-

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 17

258 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ever is found of them. The mimicry of the form and shape of other
insects is even more wonderful, but still unexplained, except as a pro-
tection. I have to confess, that just the unexplained mimicry of
form seems in some way opposed to my explanation of the mimicry
of colors. Science is in such questions still in its infancy, and the
first step is always the hardest. Every plausible suggestion is not
objectionable till a more convenient one has been given.

As stated before, the dermal colors never change, the hypodermal
colors can change. Therefore mimicry of pattern is here excluded,
the hypodermal colors being the only ones on which the animal has
any influence, either involuntarily by the constant action of the nutri-
tive fluid, or voluntarily.

If it could be proved by facts that by a kind of photographic pro- .
cess the colors of the surrounding objects can be transmitted, a great
step towards an understanding of mimicry in color would be attained.
The fact is probable, at least in some instances. I know no other
explanation, and the discovery that the seeing-purple in the eyes of
men and animals retains for a certain time after death the impression
of things and faces last seen, is in favor of my hypothesis. The eyes
of the insects contain a layer homologous to the seeing-purple, and
this layer is a decidedly hypodermal one.

There is not much known about the color of the eyes of insects.
It may be said that perhaps all colors have been observed, from black
to white, brown, red, blue, green, golden, and in all different shades.
The color belongs to the chorioidea, and the pigment is included in
cells. Eyes without color pigment do not serve for vision. As the
colors are not persistent after death, they belong to the hypodermal
ones. Among Arthropods is to be found, just as in Vertebrates, the
peculiar organ called tapetum, a luminous colored spot on the under-
side of the chorioidea. The tapetum is recorded for Arachnida?,
Lepidoptera, and Diptera, and can cover the whole eye or parts of it,
or can form certain figures, as in Tabanidae and other Diptera.

Leydig describes the tapetum of fishes as formed by small plates or
lamella? in very near juxtaposition. Only by a stronger pression the
iridescent lamellEe will become separated. Arthropods, for instance
Chrysopa, shows in the golden eyes small colored nuclei ; but in other
insects (Mantis) these nuclei alternate with iridescent plates. The
large Sphingidas and Noctuida? possess a peculiar tapetum. A verti-
cal cut through the eye shows underneath the dark pigment a silver-
white layer with a reddish front border formed by numerous and very

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 259

fine tracherc. The reddish color belongs to the bacillar-layer of the
optical nerve.

T}ie Nature of Color and its Formation.

"What is color ? Where does it come from, and what part of the
body is used to produce it? What kind of chemical process brings it
out?

The importance of these questions is obvious, but science has not
answered them till to-day. Even the questions themselves have
scarcely been mentioned. It is a curious fact, though frequently
observed, that the nature of the most interesting phenomena is not
questioned at all, only because everybody meets them every day and
everywhere.

The chemical nature of all colors — optical ones excepted — is
undoubtedly proved by the fact that colors can be destroyed par-
tially or entirely by chemical action. The greatest enemy of color is
light. The strong and continuous influence of light, principally of
sunlight, gradually fades every color, which is not sustained or re-
newed by the life of the insect. This fact is the more important, as
on the other hand the influence of light during life is a color-pro-
ducing one. But to produce color life is needed, for a continuous
fresh supply of matter to be changed into color. As soon as life
ceases and fresh matter is no longer supplied, the chemical influence
of light becomes too strong, and causes discoloration.

I may here notice that Professor Sachs (Botau. Zeitung, 1863,
1865, and with Askenasy, 1867), by the examination of the influence
of light in producing the blossom-colors, arrived at this, result, that
the development of these colors is not dependent on the influence of
light. The size of the blossom and the intensity of its colors are
said to depend on fertilization by insects (Wallace).* Therefore on
high mountains or in northern regions, where the insect fauna is a
small one, the plants have large and intensely-colored flowers, which
are easily recognized at great distances. Dr. H. Muller (Kosmos,
August, 1880) is of the same opinion, "that the colors of flowers are
developed through the fertilization by insects, as he believes, in a pro-
gressive manner. Red, violet, and blue are always developed later,
by natural selection, than white and yellow. But there is no reason

* Ch. Darwin : The Effects of Cross- and Self-fertilization in the Vegetable
Kingdom, 1877.

260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

to aflopt the theory that the development of the different flower colors
alvvjiys originated from the same primal color, and surely the series
of the developed colors was not always identical."

I am not prepared by my studies to object altogether to the state-
ments of such prominent authorities. But it is well known that
plants and animals excluded from light are more or less colorless.
Secondly, the number of plants with highly colored flowers which are
not fertilized by insects will exceed, perhaps largely, those fertilized by
insects. The horticulturists produce year after year in greenhouses
new varieties, with larger and more brilliantly colored flowers, but
certainly not through fertilization by insects.

During the summer of 1881, chrysanthemums were prepared for a
flower exhibition in Boston by a thoroughly experienced and scientific
horticulturist. He had kept purposely plants, cuttings from one and
the same plant, partly in sunlight, partly not in the dark, but without
sunlight. The effect was so striking, that later the judges would not
accept as a fact that both kinds came from the same stock. The
plants kept in sunlight showed the most brilliant colors, the other
were pale and very little colored.

I am not able to understand how this fact could be brought about
without acknowledging the influence of light. I quote only this
case, though every horticulturist may be able to give similar ones,
because the experiment was made purposely, and is doubtless reliable.
I think science will need a plausible explanation of such experiments,
proving that sunlight was not the acting factor, before the statements
of even such a prominent authority as Professor Sachs can be
accepted. .

The bleaching of the colors of insects by chloride of lime or by
certain solutions of it is proved by Dimmok's experiments (Psyche,
No. 17, 1875), and by my own recorded before. Perhaps chemical
investigation made in a more varied manner, and the use of less
strong chemicals, will some day throw more light upon the nature of
colors. An interesting observation may here be noticed (J. W.
Wilson : Chemical Change of Coloration in Butterflies ; Psyche, No.
75, 1880). In coloring a proof plate of Limenitis arthemis for the
well-known book by Mr. W. H. Edwards, the insect was inclosed in
a shallow glass box, and Miss Peart, the artist, had fastened a bit of
cotton inside with a little undiluted carbolic acid. When the plate
was sent to Mr. Edwards, rich purple had been painted where the
insect is metallic blue or green. The colors of the type had been

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 261

changed by the acid. Several weeks later the purple disappeared, and
the insect showed again its proper colors. Carbolic acid, being a
comparatively weak acid, is more easily neutralized ; moreover, being
volatile, its effects are more transient than those of stronger acids,
which change the colors. After such a change alkali only partially
restores the proper colors.

The use of benzine affects mostly yellow and orange wings of Lepi-
doptera, changing these colors into isabell. The application of
tobacco-smoke changes pink flowers of roses into light-green ones, and
its effect on butterflies is visible, but less marked. Light-brown
insects preserved in dilute carbolic acid become much daiker, nearly
blackish, and they retain this color after having been taken out of the
acid.

By the chemical analysis of chitin a certain part was found appar-
ently representing the coloring matter. It was insoluble in water,
alcoliol, and ether, amorphous, and probably resinous. This matter
can be precijjitated by acids from a solution of potash.

I was not able to find in the literature sufficient information about
the chemical origin and nature of colors. Perhaps some recent pub-
lications may throw light upon the subject. Mr. M. Nencki (Bericht.
deutsch. chem. Gesell. 1874, vol. vii. p. 1593) stated that indol —
the coloring radical of indigo — can be produced through digestion of
alliumcn by pancreas juice. The fact was denied by Mr. Kuhne
(ibid. 1875 vol. viii. p. 206), in so ffir as the production of indol was
affirmed, but he believed it was produced by the fermentation of
the juice, or by the numerous bacteria? commonly found in the pan-
creas. Mr. M. Nencki reported later (ibid. 1875, vol. viii. p. 336)
that he had succeeded in the production of indol from albumen only.
The reddish oil — indol-coloring substance — gives with sufficient
nitric acid a red color, with less a violet color (ibid. p. 722). Out of
the albumen was produced 0.5 per cent nitric acid, nitrosoindol. By
boiling the red coloring substance a brown one is produced, which
gives in alcoholic solution of kali or natron a green color, with sulphu-
ric acid a purple one.

In 18G8 Messrs. Grabe and Liebermann had shown that madder-
lake can be obtained out of anthracen, a kind of coal-camphor. The
consequence of this discovery was, that everywhere the culture of
madder was given up entirely. Since that time Professor Bayer in
Munich has endeavoured to produce an artificial indigo (Nature,
vol. viii. p. 251 ; vol. xxiii. p. 390; vol. xxv. p. 593; Kosmos, 1881,

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

vol. V. p. 61). He proved the possibility of producing it from protein
bodies ; but the artificial indigo would be much more expensive than
the natural one. In 1878 he obtained small indications of indigo out
of phenyl-acetic acid, a product of coal-tar. In 1880 he got indigo
out of ciiinamic acid, which is made out of toluol, also contained in
the coal-tar. The cinnamic acid was changed by nitric acid into a
nitrum combination, and afterwards changed by brom into dibromid.
This latter in contact with alkali produces indigo. But this indigo also
is more expensive than the natural one. I am not able to find more
concerning the production of color in chemical literature.

All fats contained in animals and plants are glycerids of fat acids.
A large series of fat acids consists always of two atoms of oxygen
combined with a number of atoms of carbon, and always twice as
many atoms of hydrogen. Of these acids the simplest is formic acid,
(CHgO.,), which, is common in insects, and also to be found in some
plants (Urtica).

These acids are extensively developed in some insects living to-
gether in numerous societies, as in ants and white ants, but, as far as I
know, not in bees or wasps. The acid is sometimes much condensed,
and if one strikes a hill with the hand, it will smell strongly of acid.
If in winter time, when hills are closed outside, and of course the acid
in the hill is more concentrated, one tries to work with the fingers
into the hill, to collect Myrmecophiles, the tips of the fingers are
sometimes affected as if they had been put in very strong acids. The
same is stated of tropical species of white ants living in very strongly
built hills. The acid is also reported as corrosive for metals.

Uric acid is largely represented in Arthropods, and only doubtful
for Arachnids and Crustacea. To the rich literature about the pres-
ence of uric acid in insects, Krukenberg,* p. 28, adds, after his own
observations, twenty-eight species. It is not present in Apis melUjica,
nor in the excrements and in the rectal glands of Tetrix bi'punctata,
of Locusta viridissima, and some other Orthoptera ; also not in some
caterpillars and in the larva? of Cimbex variabilis. He never found
a species which contained uric aci-d in the fat body, and none in the
intestinal canal and in the Malpighian vessels. The insects contain,
besides glycogen, leucin, tyrosin, haemoglobin, and peptic-tryptic and
diastatic enzyms.

* C. 'Ft. W. Krukenberg: Vergl. physiolog. Studien an den Kusten d.
Adria, 1880, 1881, vol. iii. p. G2.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 263

Perhaps there exists some stronger acid in some insects. One
observation made by myself can scarcely be explained in any other
way. A large species of Mygale, having been many years in alcohol,
was taken out of it and exposed on a glass slide near the stove to a
moderate heat. When it was dried, I was astonished to find the whole
slide injured by a corrosive acid. Examined with the microscope, the
surface of the slide was covered all over with fine short and mostly
parallel lines, rough as if cut out with a diamond. As there is no
acid known which injures glass, fluor acid excepted, the fact cannot
be explained ; but I am quite sure that I was not mistaken in my
observation.

I am not able to give any further statements on fat, fat acids, and
other acids, because nothing more is known about them. My conclu-
sions are as follows: —

It is certain that a color (indigo) is produced as result of the diges-
tion of albumen.

It is certain that fat is produced by digestion out of albumen.

It is certain that colors of insects are combined with fat. There-
fore it seems probable that the colors of insects are chemically pro-
duced by a combination of fats or fat acids with other acids or akalis
by the influence of air, light, and heat.

It should not be overlooked that anilin is the product of a distilla-
tion of the oily parts of coal or peat. Colorless anilin has no alkaline
reaction, but neutralizes acids. Everybody knows the variegated
and beautiful colors originating from anilin combinations, and it is
not a daring conclusion to presume that colors of animals and plants
have a related origin and nature. I am assured by Professor W.
Hempel, Dresden, Saxony, that in the Gulf of Naples a moUusk has
been found which contains aniline colors.

The very obvious question, " Does the food have any influence on
the colors of insects ? " is answered as often in the afllirmative as in the
negative.* I have stated before that Spliingid caterpillars fed on
plants placed in salt water showed colors different from the caterpil-
lars fed with the same plant placed in fresh water. But the imago
showed no difference whatever. On the other hand, the imago of the
American Hemileiica maja shows the typical black form whenever
the caterpillar feeds on Quercus ilicifoUa^ as in Massachusetts, New

* R. MacLachlan, Entom. Weekly Intelligencer, London, 1861, No. 254 ;
Variation caused by the Food of the Larva does not exist."

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

York, and Micliigan. But the pale variety, H. Nevadensis, occurs
where the caterpillar feeds on Spiroea salicifolia in Maine, and proba-
bly farther in the west. The Caterpillars are slightly different in
color. Actias hma, fed in Europe on the European walnut, is
slightly different in color of the wings from those fed in America
on the American walnut. The specimens from Texas are more bril-
liantly colored than those from New England. I have seen in the
Museum in Berlin, Prussia, a large box filled with different varieties
of the imago of Bombyx caja, and was told by Professor Klug that a
number of them were artificially produced by feeding the omnivorous
caterpillar with different kinds of food. The most abnormal variety
came from caterpillars fed with crumbs of dry bread. Perhaps simi-
larly reliable facts might be found in the literature. Mr. Speyer has
given, as related before, some information concerning a different shade
of the colors of moths which are found in America as well as in
Europe. But there are probably different factors working together
to produce these variations.

Krukenberg,* in his elaborate paper, " Ueber thierische Farbstoffe
und deren physiologische Bedeutung," comes to the conclusion that
the change of color (in perfectly developed insects) is a consequence
of the change of food, and can be explained by the alteration and
mutation of the pigments through heat and light. His experiments
were made for the purpose of finding the cause of the turning into
yellow or red by green grasshoppers in autumn. He tries to answer
two questions : First, does the pigment of grasshoppers originate
directly out of the food, and does it consist of pure chlorophyll or a
substance containing chlorophyll, or is it to be accepted as a peculiar
production of the organism ? Second, is the color the consequence of
only one pigment, or of several? His detailed answer is as follows :

"It is evident that the green color of the grasshoppers is the con-
sequence of several different pigments, which can be separated by
chemical process."

The immersion of the green grasshopper in ether colors it yellow,
and the grasshopper becomes cochineal red. The same is observed
when insects are treated with hot water or alcohol. The turning
to cochineal red is not the consequence of a chemical mutation of the
yellow-green pigment, but solely of its extraction, and the subsequent

* C. Fr. W. Krukenberg: Vergl. physiolog. Studien an den Kiisten d.
Adria, 1880, 1881, vol. ill. p. 62.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 2G5

appearance of the red color, which was formerly coTered. If the
grasshopper or its wings are subjected to stronger heat, both pigments
disappear at the same time. Krukeuberg believes it to be very proba-
ble, after his experiments, that the light has a prominent influence
on the color of insects, and that the light turns to red the insects
which were green during the summer. Spectral analysis makes it
evident that the green color has no connection with chlorophyll.

It is often denied by entomologists that food has any marked
influence on color, as it is observed that in many cases caterpillars of
the same species feeding on the same plant show very different colors,
as, for instance, many Sphingidoe, cankerworm, and others.

Perhaps Coccus cacti derives its coloring matter from the cactus;
but I was puzzled to find that some grubs of a beetle from Peru,
preserved in alcohol, had colored the alcohol rather intensely with
cochineal color. I do not know whether they live on the cactus, but
it can hardly be presumed. Tiiat other insects prepare a coloring
matter is well known from the May-beetles in Europe. An umber-
brown color, good for use, was prepared from them by distillation, and
used at the end of the last century. Mr. G. B. Buckton * and Mr.
Sorby f have published very interesting notes and experiments upon
the coloring matter of the Aphides. The somewhat condensed con-
clusions are : —

1. The purple coloring matter appears to be a quasi-living prin-
ciple, and not a product of a subsequent chemical oxidizing pro-
cess. Mounted in balsam or other preserving fluids, the darker
species stain the fluid of a fine violet.

2. As autumn approaches and cold weather reduces the activity of
the Aphides, the lively greens and yellows commonly become con-
verted into ferrugineous red, and even dark brown, which last hue in
reality partakes more or less of intense violet or purple. These
changes have some analogy with the brilliant hues assumed by maple
and other leaves during the process of slow decay.

3. Aqueous solution of crushed dark-brown and yellow-green varie-
ties of Aphides originate different colors with acids and alkalies. The
chief difference consists in an alkali changing the solution of green
Aphides into a gamboge-yellow, instead of a purple, as in the brown
Aphides.

* G. B. Buckton : Monograph of the British Aphides, vol. ii. p. 167.
London, 1879.

t Sorby : On the Coloring Matter of some Aphides. Quart. Journ. Microsc.
See. vol. ix. p. 352. London.

266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

4. In the generality of cases coloring matters, such as indigo,
Indian yellow, madder-lake, and the like, do not separately exist in
the substance of vegetables, but the pigments are disengaged through
fermentation or oxygenation. Again, alizarin itself is reddish yellow,
but alkaliue solutions strike it a rich violet, just as we find them act
towards the substance which Mr. Sorby calls Aphidilutein.

5. Mr. Sorby's four stages of the changes effected by tlie oxidation
of Aphideine produce four different substances.

The different colors produced by the uoe of different chemicals
must be compared in Mr. Buckton's paper. But there can be no
doubt that here colors are produced chemically out of protein-bodies,
— a fact somewhat homologous to the before-quoted artificial pro-
duction of indigo.

The influence of temperature on the colors of the imago of Lepidop-
tera was first shown by Mr. Dorfmeister. He proved that a higher
temperature changes the reddish-yellow of the hind-wings of Bombyx
caja to minium, a lower temperature to ochreous yellow. The chan-
ging of spring-races of butterflies into autumn-races by putting the
chrysalis on ice, the well-known experiments made by Mr. W. H.
Edwards and Prof. Weismann and others, show unquestionably the
influence of temperature on colors. Probably here the change is the
effect of a surplus of nitrogen. The water absorbs a small quantity
of air, but in such a manner that this air contains less than two
parts (1.87) of nitrogen to one part of oxygen, instead of four parts
of nitrogen. Therefore an excess of nitrogen in the surrounding air
must be the consequence, as is the case in the iced chambers of
fi-uit-houses, where the oxygen is purposely rarefied in relative
quantity. By this nitrogen, together with the nitrogen contained
in the chrysalis, life and development are retarded to a minimum ;
but the chemical action which produces colors will work neverthe-
less to a certain extent. Therefore a change in the colors of the
imago is the necessary consequence, and this change affects proba-
bly the pattern, which is, as stated before, produced largely by
oxygen, which is here rarefied.

Goethe has characterized the yellow and related colors as acid
ones, the blue and related as alkaline colors. He states that vege-
table yellow colors can be changed by alkali into red, or even into
blue red.

For plants the predominant color is green, for insects bi'owu ; both
of which are called indifferent colors.

op arts and sciences. 267

Final Conclusions.

If color and pattern are produced in a purely mechanical manner, as
Prof. AVeismanu contends, it ought to be possible to explain and to
prove this mechanical manner, if we will go beyond the simple belief
that it is so.

The foregoing review contains all that is known about these ques-
tions : —

1. That some colors of insects can be changed or obliterated by
acids.

2. That two natural colors, madder-lake and indigo, can be pro-
duced artificially by the influence of acid on fat bodies.

3. As protein bodies in insects are changed into fat bodies, and may
be changed by acids contained in insects into fat acids, the forma-
tion of colors in the same manner seems probable.*

4. That colors can be changed by different temperature.

5. That the pattern is originated probably by a combination of
oxygen with the integuments.

6. That mimicry of the hypodermal colors may be effected by a
kind of photographic process.

In comparing these still insufficient data with the statement — that
color and pattern are produced in a purely mechanical manner, and
are the consequences of natural selection, of adaptation, and of inherit-
ance,— we must, if we wish to go beyond belief, directly exclude in-
heritance, as after the statement of Professor Weismann himself f it is
entirely unknown how inheritance works ; even the question itself is
still entirely untouched. We must further exclude natural selection
and adaptation, as both are (according to Professor C. Semper $) only
able to begin to work after pigment is produced and after a chango
of the pattern has begun.

What is then left to justify our accepting a purely mechanical
manner but the simple belief that it is so ?

I am convinced that color and pattern are produced by physiolo-
gical processes in the interior of the bodies of insects.

* Dr. R. Sachse : Die Chemie und Physik der Farbestoflfe, Kohlenhydrate
u. Protoinsubstanzen, p. 288 sqq. Leipzig, 1877.

t Dr. A. Weismann : Die Dauer des Lebens, 1882 ; and Studien, vol. ii. p.
296.

t Professor C. Semper : Die natiirlichen Existenz-bedingimgen der Thiere,
1880. Vol. i., p. 265; vol. ii. p. 232.

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XV.

ON TELEPHONING OVER LONG DISTANCES OR
THROUGH CABLES.

By N. D. C. Hodges.

Presented May 10, 1882.

The first point I wish to bring up is, that within any conductor con-
nected with the earth the only electrical forces against which work
has to be done during the movement of electrified bodies are those
due to the mutual actions between the charges in these bodies, and not
to the charges which may exist outside the conducting surface. So
that in causing a movement of electricity from A to B, the work is
the same when A and B are inside a conducting surface as when they
are outside ; and to cause a current along any course from A to B,
the same amount of energy will be required as if the system A B
were in open space.

Hence in the case of a double-wire cable of no great length com-
pared with its section, so that the resistance of the wire should not be
sufficient to cause it to act like a succession of short pieces, the source
of the electromotive force being contained in a conducting surface
continuous with the outside of the cable, a current could be produced
as easily as in an air-line.

In the next place, in the case of a cable we have a condenser to
deal with, the circuit wire being the inner, and the water outside the
outer surface. In order to cause a current to flow through a conductor
situated in this way, a quantity of electricity must be supplied suffi-
cient to raise the potential along the conductor to such a degree that
the required current may flow.

To raise the charge of a conductor, the work to be done is expressed
by ^ £ F, where e is the final charge of the conductor and V its poten-
tial ; or, in terms of the capacity and potential, ^ q V^.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 269

For a single wire surrounded by a homogeneous non-conductor to

an indefinite distance, the electric capacity is J -. , where I is the

" log _
a
length of the wire and a its radius.

For a wire surrounded by a homogeneous dielectric to a limited

distance, the capacity is | , where K is the specific inductive

log -I

capacity of the dielectric, and a^ and a.^ the outer and inner radii of
the dielectric.

As the energy required to charge a condenser is

and as no work is done in moving the one conducting surface within
the other, the same expression for the work done in charging a cable
will hold when the wire is not concentric with the outside as when it
is, as was supposed in the above.

Hence the work required to charge a unit length of cable, even
when the wires are not in the centre, will be equal to

log -J

On account of this static capacity of a cable, there is a retardation
in the transmission of signals from the greater amount of energy
which must be supplied from the electrical source before the potential
along the wire will be raised sufficiently to cause the required current;
just as, in the case of heat, the specific heat of a bar determines how
much heat must be given to one end of the bar before heat will flow
along the bar at any given rate.

With a single wire cable let Vhe. the potential at any point of the
wire. Let Q be the total quantity of electricity which has passed
through a section of the cable at that point since the beginning of the
current. Then the quantity which at the time t exists between
sections at x and x-\- bxis

and this is equal to q Vdx.

Hence o K = — .

ax

--- dx
dx

270 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

With a double-wire cable when used to form a metallic circuit, the
two wires being connected to the two poles of the battery or trans-
mitter, or whatever the electric source may be, the quantity of elec-
tricity flowing across any section of the cable on one of the wires
will be equal and of opposite sign to that on the other.

Hence the total quantity flowing across any section of the cable
will be zero, and dQ will be zero. So that the potential to which the
condenser, consisting of the two wires and the outside surface of
the cable, will be raised will be zero, and the energy required from
the battery no greater on account of the nearness of the water, the
second conducting surface of the condenser.

There is one thing to be considered, that the wires, being covered
with some insulating material which cannot be made perfectly homo-
geneous, they, with the broken nature of the dielectric about them,
will each form a condenser to some extent.

It would therefore appear that, as far as the retardation is due to
the static capacity of a cable, it can be greatly reduced by using a
double wire cable with homogeneous insulating material.

In support of this view there are the experiments made by "Wheat-
stone, and described in the Proceedings of the Royal Society for
1854-55. Wheatstone made experiments on a cable of six wires
intended for use in the Mediterranean. The length of the cable was
one hundred and ten miles. On connecting one of the wires with one
pole of his battery, the other pole being to ground, he found that quite
a time was required before the flow into the cable fell to the rate due
to leakage. On connecting one pole of the battery with one wire and
the other with another, the charge which the cable wires would take
was reached instantly.

On long land lines the static capacity of the line is due, outside of
the capacity of the wire, to the neighborhood of the earth. This has
been found to affect the articulation in telephoning on the line from
Boston to Baltimore, five hundred miles in lengtli. By the use of a
complete metallic circuit the articulation was greatly improved.

Salem, Mass., U. S. A.,
May 9th, 1882.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 271

XVI.

ON THE YOUNG STAGES OF SOME OSSEOUS FISHES.
By Alexander Agassiz.

Presented May 9, 1882.

Part HI.*

Many interesting points of relationship between the embryos of
osseous Fishes and their fossil representatives have been traced by.
comparing the structure of the tail of the fish embryo as it passes
from the leptocardial stage through the various stages of heterocer-
cality to a so-called homocercal stage. This relationship, as has been
pointed out, is very marked, and has led to some important generaliza-
tions. The comparison of the pectorals or of the dorsal and anal
fins does not, however, lead to such interesting results. It is true that
as far as the pectoral fins are concerned, their resemblance in the
early stages of the bony fish embryo to the crossopterygian type of
pectorals is very striking, but, owing to our imperfect knowledge of
the structure of the pectorals of the ancient Fishes, this comparison is
at present less complete than that between the tails of the older fossil
Fishes and the tails of the embryos of the modern osseous Fishes.

With regard to the comparison of the median fins of the osseous
Fishes of to-day with the median fins of Fishes of earlier periods, we
do not come to any satisfactory results. If we take, for instance, the
change undergone by the embryos of osseous Fishes, we find invaria-
bly in the youngest stages a continuous embryonic fold, extending from
the head along the dorsal side to the extremity of the tail and around
the lower side to the yolk bag. At a later period, when they carry
embryonic rays, these embryonic median fins resemble somewhat the

* Part I. Proc. Amcr. Acad. XIII. 1877-78, p. 117 ; Part II. Proc. Amer.
Acad. XIV. 1878-79, p. 1.

272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

fins of some of the earlier Ganoids in which the fin rays are very-
numerous, as, for instance, the Platygnathus of the Ohl Red. These
characters are represented in the Ganoids of to-day botli in Ceratodus
and Protopterus ; indeed even the Blennies, Eels, Murenidae, and
Ophididte of to-day may be regarded as types of these embryonic
stafTes, of which Phaneropterus with its confluent dorsal and caudal
is a representative among the older fossils. But in the one case the
fin rays are the permanent rays, while in the other the [embryonic]
fin rays disappear with the appearance of the permanent osseous fin
rays, as I have shown in my paper on the early stages of Lepido-
steus.* The same conditions are repeated also in the young stages of
that genus.t

As regards the formation of the dorsals, the posterior dorsal is the
first to be differentiated ; in the embryos of the osseous Fishes the
anterior dorsal appearing only subsequently, and either independently
or connected with the posterior one. In those fishes which have
these fins separated in the adult, the dorsals are usually united in the
earlier stages, but if the anterior dorsal is of a peculiar type, as, for
instance, in Lumpus, Trachypterus, and Lophius, the anterior dorsal
becomes separated at an early stage, sometimes even while still in the
egg, fi'om the posterior dorsal. We can therefore assume that as far
as the dorsals are concerned a continuous median fin still connected
with the caudal is the earliest embryonic type of fin.

The next stage of development is a type in which the caudal is well
separated from the dorsal and anal embryonic fold, with a continuous
single dorsal ending finally by the differentiation of the dorsal into
one or more independent dorsals. The formation of abnormal types
of anterior dorsal to form structures adapted to special uses, as in
Lophius, is an embryonic feature, and this development of the dorsal
may exist either as a separate dorsal, or the anterior rays of the single
dorsal may be developed to an extraordinary degree, forming immense
filaments, as in Argyreiscus, Blepharis, and many other fishes.

This anterior dorsal also may exist only in the embryonic stage, as
is the case in Fierasfer and Trachypterus. The anal is usually well
■developed before the appearance of the ventrals, except in the cases of
those genera in which the ventrals take an extraordinary development

* Proc. Amcr. Acad., 1878, XIII. p. 65.

t In my next paper on bony Fislics, I hope to treat of the transformation of
the median fins of osseous Fishes from tlieir embryonic stage to that of fins
with permanent osseous rays.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 273

and are adapted for special uses, as in the young of some Gadoids, or
tliose genera in which the rays of the ventrals extend into large fila-
ments, which may be of use as tactile organs. The most charac-
teristic of these genera are found among some of the newly discovered
deep-sea Fishes dredged by the " Challenger " and by the " Blake."

In the Fishes living at moderate depths and in pelagic Fishes the
pectorals or ventrals may be developed into organs of flight, as we
find it to be the case in the young of Onus, which certainly mimics to
an extraordinary degree in its embryonic stages the Flying-Fishes.
The specialized ventrals of the embryonic stages of Lophius and Onus
may represent the huge ventral appendages, articulated fins, which
exist in Pterichthys and other Devonian Fishes. The absence of
ventrals or the presence of small ventrals and the existence of a laige
anal fin, still more or less united with the caudal and dorsal fin, may
thus be regarded as embryonic characters. The differentiation of the
anal is the next stage of development, and well-developed, isolated
anals and ventrals are generally found to occur with well-developed
and isolated dorsals. The existence of abnormally developed ven-
trals, as in young Gadoids, may also be considered as an embryonic
character.

As far as the oldest fishes are concerned, we find in them the same
dorsals and anals isolated from the heterocercal tail fin, just as they
exist in many of the Fishes of the present day, and there is nothing to
show that in the earliest known fossil Fishes the development of the
median fins did not take place much in the same manner as it takes
place to-day in the young of Lepidosteus,

There is something in the general structure of the youngest embryos
of Lumpus which recalls to us the Cephalaspidse. The position of
the mouth in all young bony Fishes is characteristic of the earliest
Fishes ; they have in common also a cartilaginous skeleton, heterocercal
tails, and a rudimentary dorsal and anal, with prominent pectorals, as
in some of the fossil genera. "With the Dipteridni, although we have
median fins broken up into several distinct fins and a heterocercal tail,
yet these fins all belong to the embryonic posterior dorsal and anal.
In the next prominent group, the Acanthodida, the heterocercal tail
continues and is found to exist with single anal and dorsals, and small
ventrals with well-developed pectorals. While in the PaL-eoniscida?,
the Dapedidae and Pycnodonts, we find the representatives of embry.
onic types in which the tail becomes much less heterocercal, the anals
and dorsals are each one long continuous fin with numerous rays, recal-

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 18

274 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

lino- the embryonic stages of Poronotus figured in this memoir. "When,
however, we reach the Jurassic, Cretaceou.«, and Tertiary, we come
upon types more closely allied to the older stages of our bony Fishes,
embryos in which an anterior dorsal is found, of which the anterior
part is more or less developed, as in Platax semiophoriis and tlie like,
havino- also heterocercal tails. We also meet in these later formations
genera in which the fin rays of the ventrals are still excessively
developed, as in embryo Gadoids, and finally find the Fishes of the
youngest formations agreeing more closely than any of their predeces-
sors with the adult forms found in the seas of the present day.

The number of scattered papers in which various young stages
of osseous Fishes are described is large, but, with the exception of
the memoirs of Sundevall, of Liitken, and of an interesting chapter
on Yomg Fishes by Giinther in his Introduction to the Study of
Fishes, these papers are usually limited to a single stage of develop-
ment. As the present communication is mainly devoted to the study
of young stages which have not as yet been described, I have quoted
only those papers which had special reference to the genera here
studied. I propose to incorporate the bibliography covering this sub-
ject with that of the Embryology of Fishes now in preparation for the
" Selections from Embryological Monographs " to be published in
vol. ix. of the Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology.

Labrax lineatus. BL ^ Sch. (Eoccus, Gill).
(Plate I. Plate II. figs. 3, 4.)

In very young striped Bass, measuring about S.S""" in length (Plate
I. fig. 1), the eye is of a bright blue color, with an emerald green band
above the pupil. This, with the prominent silvery swimming bladder
and the long line of large chromatophores extending from the vent
along the base of the embryonic anal fin nearly to the extremity of
the body, renders it easy to recognize the young stages of the Bass.
All the stages here figured were collected on the surface with the tow-
net. The eggs I have not found.

In the next stage (Plate I. fig. 2) the head has become proportion-
ally larger, the mouth is placed more anteriorly, and the embryonic
caudal rays are also more prominent. The muscular bands, the brain
as well as the stomach, are colored a light yellowish-brown.

In the next stage (Plate I. fig. 3) the head is comparatively still
larger, the body has become stouter, and the embryonic caudal is

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 275

better separated from the dorsal and anal fin folds. The jaws are
larger, the lower juw projecting well beyond the upper one. In the
next stage (Plate I. fig. 4), the permanent caudal is forming, and
the original muscular bands around the body are more distinct than in
tlie previous stage, otherwise the young fish does not differ materially
from the stage of Plate I. fig. 3. In the next stage (Plate I. fig. 5)
the caudal is almost terminal, and the posterior dorsal as well as the
anal are indicated by the rudimentary permanent rays along the
dorsal and anal lines.

In Plate II. fig. 3, the young Bass has a symmetrical rectangular
caudal, well-developed pectoral and ventral fins, with anal and poste-
rior dorsal completely separated from the caudal, the permanent rays
large. The anterior dorsal is low, and still united with the poste-
rior dorsal ; the line of pigment spots extending along the ventral
side is the only prominent one. A young Bass in the stage of
Plate II. fig. 4, shows a forked caudal comparatively larger than in
tlie adult, while the outline of the dorsal and anal is lobed, and the
anterior dorsal distinct from the posterior one, and fully as high.
The head has also become more elongated, and the little Bass assumes
somewhat the coloring of the adult. In addition to the original ven-
tral line of pigment spots, two prominent stripes of elongated black
spots extend along the lateral line, and a less distinct line runs along
the base of the dorsals. The line at the base of the dorsals is some-
times present in much younger specimens (Plate I. fig. 3 a) not older
than those of Plate I. fig. 3. In a younger stage than Plate I. fig.
3 a, this dorsal line was interrupted, consisting of three patches along
the base of the dorsals. The pigment spot which appeared at the
base of the caudal rays as early as in stage Plate I. fig. 2, now
extends as a short line across the base of the permanent rays.

Temnodon saltator, Lin. {Ponatomus saltatrix, Gill).

(Plate II. fig. 5.)

Of the Carangidce I have only found on the surface one small
Blue fish (Plate II. fig. 5) measuring 9""" in length. The tail fin was
but slightly forked ; the anterior dorsal rudimentary, but the base of
the permanent fin rays already present; permanent fin rays existing
in the posterior dorsal as well as the anal ; large pectorals, rudimen-
tary ventrals. Teeth of upper and lower jaw already quite prominent ;
body elongate, angular. Prominent line of black pigment spots

276 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

extending from the top of the head to the end of posterior dorsal
alono- upper side of stomach and base of anal and caudal. PLye
brio-ht blue, bluish silvery body with a few faint pigment cells uni-
formly scattered over the flanks. The Carangidse with rudimentary
ventrals and no anterior dorsals are evidently genera representing the
embryonic stages of this family.

Stromateus triacanthus, Peck (Poronofus triacantkus, Gill).
(Plate VI.)

The more advanced stages of the Butterfish (from 10-20""" in
length and larger) are frequently found within the tentacles of our
common Dactylometra. The younger stages were, however, all fished
up from the surface with the hand-net.

The youngest stage of Poronotus observed measured 7""° in length
(Plate VI. fig. 1). The body in this stage is comparatively stout,
the head large. The caudal is already developing, though the em-
bryonic lobe is still present; the urostyle is quite large. The dorsal
and anal embryonic fins are narrow. The pectoral is large, rounded,
transparent, the permanent rays well developed. The eye is large,
and has the peculiar greenish-brown metallic lustre of the adult ;
this makes it comparatively easy to recognize the embryo Butterfish
in the early stages.

There is a line of large chromatophores along the base of the anal,
extending from the vent along the ventral line to the operculum, a few
large pigment cells (four to five) on the digestive cavity, and a large
patch over the swimming bladder. There are four comparatively small
pigment cells along the lateral line, three to four along the dorsal
line behind the head, and eight to ten irregular pigment spots on the
head above the eye, with three or four small pigment cells in advance
of the eye and on the jaws. In the following stage (Plate VI. fig. 2)
the anterior part of the body and the head have a light brownish tint,
the tail fin is nearly symmetrical, it has permanent fin rays with three
articulations, the body is somewhat more elongated, there are the first
traces of the permanent dorsal and anal fin rays along the dorsal and
ventral lines. The general distribution of the pigment spots is very
similar to that of the previous stages ; the cells are, however, some-
what more dendritic. In the following stage figured (Plate VI. fig. 3)
the chromatophores have greatly increased in number and size, espe-
cially on the upper part of the head and along the flanks of the ante-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 'J i (

rior part of the body. There is now a double line of dendritic cells
extending along the base of the anal and of the dorsal, and a few
small cells at the base of the caudal rays. The dorsal and anal fins
are separated from the caudal by a deep cut, but the caudal embryonic
fin fold is still quite broad, and extends well beyond the base of the
tail.

In the next stage (Plate VI. fig. 4) the young Poronotus has
assumed, though faintly, the general coloring of the adult. The whole
body is slightly tinted with yellowish brown, the head and anterior
part of the body being darkest, with patches of carmine between the
eye and base of the brain. The upper part of the head, the anterior
part of the dorsal line, and the flanks of the body are well covered
with large dendritic chromatophores closely packed together. Large
and more distinct cells cover the sides of the body behind the digestive
cavity. A row of longitudinal bars of pigment extends along the
whole base of the dorsal, while delicate dendritic cells extend along
the base of the anal and at the base of the caudal rays. The caudal
in this stage has become slightly forked, the dorsal and anal are high,
still better separated from the caudal than in the previous stage. The
mucous pores of the head are already quite numerous along the oper-
culum and near the nostrils. When the young Butterfish has reached
a length of 16""" (Plate VI. fig. 5) the body has become much
broader, the mucous pores of the head have greatly increased from
tlie previous stage figured, the chromatophores of the anterior part of
the body, above the head, along the dorsal region, and over the stomach
have become very numerous, they extend over the anterior part of
the dorsal, with a double line of rectangular spots along the base to
the extremity, and a similar double line extends along the base of the
ventral. The dorsal and anal, as well as the caudal, have assumed
very nearly the outline they have in the adult ; the permanent rays are
well articulated in the median fins.

Atherinichthts notata, Giinth. {Ckirostoma, Gill).

(Plates X., XI.)

The youngest specimens of Atherina (Plate X. fig. 1) are striking
for their coloring, a light yellow tint extending over the whole em-
bryo. The young Atherina is readily recognized from its light-blue
eye, with greenish-emerald band above the pupil, and large otoliths,
the patches of large chromatophores along the upper and lower side

278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of the stomach, and three lines of rectanguhir pigment cells extend-
ing, the one along the whole base of the embryonic anal, the second
along the lateral line, the third along the base of the posterior ex-
tremity of the embryonic dorsal. The next stage figured (Plate X.
fig. 2) is characterized by its proportionally larger head, by the pres-
ence of a large dendritic pigment cell over the base of the brain, with
five rounded spots in front of it over the principal lobe of the brain,
and similar spots behind extending into the dorsal line of pigment
spots, which in this stage runs along the whole base of the embryonic
dorsal, and forms a line fully as marked as the other two already
existing in the younger stage. In this stage the yellow coloring of
the body is more intense along the upper part of the head, over the
stomach, and along the dorsal line, than in the younger stages. The
large dendritic pigment cells on the top of the head are sometimes
found in specimens quite as young as Plate X. fig. 1 . In the stage
of Plate X. fig. 2, the caudal fin is forming.

In the next stage figured (Plate X. fig. 4) the head has become
somewhat lengthened, the caudal fin more terminal, the embryonic
caudal lobe quite rounded ; the yellow coloring of the body and head
is more marked, and has assumed at the same time a somewhat green-
ish tinge. The embryonic dorsal and anal are slightly lobed ; the first
trace of the base of the permanent dorsal and anal rays can be seen
along the dorsal and ventral lines. There are very rudimentary veu-
trals as slight projections, one on each side of the anterior part of the
embryonic anal. The diagonal muscular bands are well marked.
The three lines of pigment cells are more prominent than they were
in the preceding stage.

In a somewhat older stage (Plate XL fig. 5) the head is propor-
tionally more elongate than in younger stages. The caudal fin is
nearly symmetrical, but with a slight trace of the embryonic caudal
lobe ; the dorsal and anal are well separated from the caudal ; their
permanent fin rays have commenced to form, though not as well
advanced as those of the caudal.

In the next stage figured, when the young Atherina has attained a
length of about 16""" (Plate XI. fig. 6), the general outline of the
head and body is much that of the adult ; but the tail fin is still
rounded ; there is but a trace of the anterior dorsal ; the dorsal and
anal are still quite low, though completely separated from the caudal ;
the anterior part ot the anal embryonic fin, in which no permanent
rays are formed, has not entirely disappeared ; the ventrals have

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 279

greatly increased in length since the stage of Plate XI. fig. 5. The
caudal rays are edged with rows of narrow pigment cells, while in
the preceding younger stage the pigment spots of the caudal were
limited to the base of the rays (Plate X. figs. 3, 4), or there are but a
few irregularly scattered along the fin rays (Plate X. fig. 5). There
is a marked line of pigment cells along the base of the dorsal and
anal ; in the anal an additional line of pigment spots runs near the
outer edge of the fins. The general coloring of this stage approaches
quite nearly that of the adult, though the body and the lateral line do
not have quite as silvery a lustre as in the older stages.

In the oldest Atherina here figured the snout has become quite
pointed (Plate XI. fig. 7). The anterior dorsal has made its appear-
ance, the caudal is forked, the dorsal and anal are high, having much
the shape they have in the adult, the pectorals are quite pointed.
The permanent rays of all the fins are now edged with narrow pig-
ment cells. The pigment spots of the lateral line consist of three or
four irregular lines of minute dendritic chromatophores, while the
dorsal line is made up of two irregular lines of large spots extending
from the snout to the base of the tail. The ventral line extends only
from a point slightly in advance of the base of the anal to the caudal
fin ; it also consists, like the dorsal line, of two irregular lines of
elongated jjigment spots. In this stage the young Atherina has fairly
assumed the principal characteristic features of the adult.

Batrachus tau, Lin.
(Plate XVI. fig. 1.)

Dr. Storer has given a figure of a young Batrachus (Mem. Amer.
Acad, v., Plate XIX.) measuring about 2""" in length. It differs but
slightly from the large specimens, the more rounded outline of the
head, as seen from above, and the greater elongation of the head
characterising this younger stage.

A young specimen (Plate XVI. fig. 1), measuring only 8""™ in
length, was slender, the pectorals fully developed ; the openings in
the mucous membrane of the head were well developed, the ven
trals small ; the dorsal and anal fins were still connected with the
embryonic caudal, the separation between the anal and caudal being
but little marked. The tail fin was still in an embryonic stage, with a
well-marked trace of the ganoid lobe. The whole fish was dotted with
small i)igment spots, with a few larger cells scattered irregularly over

2S0 TROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the surface ; the pectorals were similarly covered. The general tint
of body and fin was gray, with blackish and yellowish pigment cells.

LoPHius piscATORius, Lin.
(Plate XVI. figs. 2-5 ; Plates XVII., XVIU.)

The eggs of Lophius are laid embedded in an immense ribbon-
shaped mucous band, from two to three feet broad and from twenty-
five to thirty feet long. This geiatinous mass is often found floating
on the surface of the sea during the last part of August. It looks at
a short distance like an immense crape. The mucous mass is of a
light violet gray color, and the dark black pigment spots of the young
Lophius, still in the egg, give to the mass a somewhat blackish ap-
pearance. The eggs are laid in a single irregular layer through the
mass, usually well separated by the mucus in which they float (Plate
XVI. fig. 2).

When just hatched (Plate XVI. fig. 4) it would be difiicult to
recognize the young as the embryo of Lophius. It has but a single
first dorsal element, a narrow short spathula-shaped ventral, and a small
circular pectoral. These characters, with its transversally flattened
body and head, seem in this stage to have no relation to the vertically
flattened adult Lophius. The embryo in this stage, as well as while
still in the egg (Plate XVI. fig. 3), and until it is far more advanced
(Plate XVI. fig. 5, Plate XVII. fig. 7), is remarkable for the great
width of the embryonic fin fold along the dorsal and ventral lines,
the very straight notochord, and the three or four prominent patches of
intense black pigment cells placed at equal distances along the lower,
upper, and terminal parts of the chord. The tail pigment spots extend
on both sides of the notochord, and form the largest of the three patches.
This is the case from the earliest stages, until the body of the young
Lophius is completely covered by pigment cells, as in the oldest stage
here figured (Plate XVIII. fig. 2). I have already on a former occa-
sion figured some of the changes which the tail undergoes as the
embryo passes from the stage of Plate XVII. fig. 3, to the oldest
stage of the young Lophius (Plate XVIII. fig. 2).

The principal changes of form of the body of the young Lophius
consist in the gradual flattening of the head, and at the same time the
increase in the proportion of the head as compared to the rest of
the body, — a feature in which Lophius and the Cottoids diifer some-
what from the post-embryonic changes of other osseous Fishes, where

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 281

the head loses in later stages the comparatively huge size which char-
acterizes nearly all the younger stages of bony Fishes soon after they
leave the egg.

The yolk bag of the young Lophius when just hatched is compara-
tively small (Plate XVI. fig. 4), being almost entirely absorbed while
still in the egg, and it soon disappears entirely (Plate XVI. fig. 5).
In a somewhat younger stage, taken out of the egg (Plate XVI.
fig. 3), it is quite globular, and the first trace of the pectorals and of
the ventrals as a mere fold of the embryonic fin fold, which extends
over the yolk bag, is still well shown.

In tliese earlier stages (Plate XVI. fig. 3, and Plate XVI. fig. 1)
the embi-yoiiic fin folds are covered with minute round black pig-
ment spots. It is only in much more advanced stages (Plate XVIII.
fig. 1) that we begin to find traces of the ordinary dendritic pigment
spots which eventually cover the dorsal, anal, and caudal fins (Plate
XVIII. fig. 2).

The young a few days after hatching (Plate XVI. fig. 5) differ
from the preceding stage mainly in the greater elongation of the
head, the disappearance of the yolk bag, the comparatively larger
pectorals, and in the position of the eye, which is somewhat higher.
In the next stages (Plate XVII. figs. 1-3) the head has become still
more elongated, the lower jaw projects well beyond the upper jaw,
the branchite are well developed, the eye has assumed a still higher
position in the head, the pectorals have greatly increased in size, the
single anterior dorsal element is more than double what it was in the
size figured before, and the ventrals have become greatly lengthened,
showing a trace of the second ray at the base of the larger ones.
The alimentary canal is well circumscribed, and the pigment spots
over the remainder of the yolk bag, the top of the brain, and the
base of the chorda are of an intense black, with a slight tinge of
yellow over the alimentary canal.

The outline of the body has somewhat lengthened, the embryonic
dorsal and ventral fins remain of great width, showing as yet no trace
of separation of an anal or dorsal or caudal fin, beyond the presence
of embryonic fin rays in the large caudal pigment spot (Plate XVII.
fig. 3), already present in younger stages.

In somewhat older stages the original dorsal ray shows a trace of
a second ray behind its base (Plate XVII. fig. 4), which in a still
older stage attains half the length of the original ray (Plate XVII.
fig. 5.). The second ray of the pectorals of this same stage (Plate

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XVIT. fig. 4) has also greatly increased in length from that of Plate
XVII. fig. 3, tho original pectoral ray at the same time having be-
come so bent that the extremity forms an obtuse angle with the base.
The separation of the anterior from the posterior dorsal takes place
at a very early stage, already within the egg (Plate XVI. fig. 3), the
first ray of the anterior dorsal pushes its way through the embryonic
dorsal fold in a slight depression formed above the head, and thus
forms the separation of the anterior part of the dorsal embryonic fold
from the posterior. In a view from above of the young Lophius
within the egg, the derivation of the pectorals and of the ventrals from
the embryonic fin fold which covers the yolk bag is well seen. The
paired fins are formed in the same manner on the yolk fold. They
belong to the original embryonic fin fold, which splits, so as to cover
the yolk bag.

Plate XVII. fig. 6, represents the embryo Lophius in a somewhat
older stage than when the dorsals and ventrals are in stage figured
on Plate XVI. figs. 4, 5. The dorsal and ventral embryonic folds are
somewhat more opaque, both from the greater number of pigment
spots, which, however, are of lighter tint than in younger stages, and
from the additional number of embryonic fin rays. These are now
very closely placed together on the dorsal side ; they are somewhat
less numerous and more distant on the ventral side. This stage is
remarkable also for the great size of the lobed fleshy pectorals, with
rows of light gray dendritic pigment cells along the line of the em-
bryonic rays. There is a rudiment of a third dorsal ray, and the
second ray of the ventral is more than half as long as the original
ray. Teeth are well developed on the lower jaw. In the next stage
figured (Plate XVIII. fig. 1) the principal dififereuces consist in tlie
increased length of the anterior dorsal rays (there are three rays now,
and the rudiment of a fourth), the increase in length of the two ventral
rays and the appearance of a rudiment of a third ray. Muscular
bands are now more distinct along the body than in the younger
stages ; the three principal pigment spots have become broken up into
smaller dendritic pigment cells, and we have the first trace of the
formation of a caudal fin in the widening of the body immediately
below the anterior part of the caudal pigment spots. The fleshy
pectoral has become still larger than in the last stage figured ; the
dendritic stellate chromatophores of the head and of the ventral region
of the pectoral side of the body are more numerous ; the head has
greatly increased in size, it is colored light yellow ; the muscular bands

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 283

and the tissues below the patches of the chromatophores along the
body line are of the same color. The broad fiat lin rays, dorsal and
ventral, are of a grayish tint ; the eye is blue. In the oldest of the
young Lophius which I have had occasion to examine (Plate XVIII.
figs. 2, 3) the changes from the preceding stage are very grc-at.
Although the body is still laterally compressed, the head, which has
greatly increased in size, as well as the body anterior to the anal
opening have become somewhat flattened vertically, the first trace of
the great flattening so characteristic of the genus. The anterior part
of the head projects proportionally far in advance of the orbits, the
head sloping less from the base of the anterior dorsal ray than in
preceding stages. The pectorals have now become enormous, they
extend across the whole width of the body of the young Lophius,
they are lobed at the edge, the rays articulated, well marked, and
edged with rows of elongated dark pigment spots. The tail fin is well
formed, though it still retains its ganoid shape, and the posterior dorsal
and anal, though well formed, are still connected by a distinct remnant
of the dorsal and ventral embryonic fin fold with the caudal fin. The
anterior dorsal now has five rays, with a rudimentary one anterior
to the first formed ray. These rays are connected at the base by a
fm fold at a much higher point than in younger stages ; they extend
far beyond the fold ; the extremities curve down about a quarter of
the length of the ray. The increase in length of the ventral rays
has been still more remarkable. The original ventral ray is now
nearly twice as long as the body of the fish, and the second ray extends
fully as far as the extremity of the caudal fin. There are two shorter
exterior rays and one interior ray ; they are joined by a membrane
extending nearly to the base of the caudal, so that when expanded
and seen from above the ventrals appear like regular wings. Their
great size and the shape of the peculiar pectorals is well seen in the
figure from above (Plate XVIII. fig. 3). The general color of the
body of the largest specimens here figured is of a very light, dirty
violet tint, of an olive green along the dorsal line ; the body and head
are covered by darker violet gray pigment spots. The pigment spots
of the ventrals are of an intense bhick, as well as a few of the spots
along the extremity of the urostyle. The pigment cells, of a violet
gray, are especially numerous along the line of the pectoral rays, with
a row of darker cells at their base (fig. 10). The dorsal, anal, and
caudal fins are still very transparent, with a delicate tinge of violet.
The young Lophius is very active during its embryonic stages, in

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Striking contrast to the sluggish habits of the adult. The adult is
comparatively a deep-water fish, I have dredged it in the " Blake "
as low down as 320 fathoms off Newport. The females undoubtedly
come to shallower waters to spawn, as they are not an uncommon fish
during July and August, being frequently found left by the tide on the
flat where they come to spawn.

The young in the stages here figured are pelagic Fishes ; they were
all collected, during July, August, and September, on the surface both
at Newport and in Massachusetts Bay. The young hatched from the
egg were only raised as far as the stage represented in Plate XVI.
fig. 4. The young fishes frequently assume, when at rest, an inclined
position, much as the young Garpike, and do not float horizontally
as other bony Fishes do. See the figure in my former paper on the
development of the tail in Plate II. Vol. XIII. Proc. Amer. Acad.
1877-78.

Gunther* has figured (on p. 471, Introduction to the Study of Fishes)
a young Lophius measuring over 70""" in length, in which there are
three long anterior dorsal filaments. The older of the young stages
I figure resemble somewhat Melanocetus. The general resemblance
of the more advanced stages of Lophius (Plate XVII. figs. 3, 6,
Plate XVIII. fig. 1) to the Opbidid^e and Macrouridae is very
striking.

Somewhat similar to the egg ribbons of Lophius are the masses of
eggs laid by Fierasfer described by Risso and Cavolini, and also well
figured by Emery ,t who has followed the development of the young
and given excellent figures of different stages ; see Emery, Plate I.
fig. 2, Plate II. figs. 5-7. They assume also, as do the young of
Lophius, a peculiar slanting attitude characteristic of certain stages
of growth. It is most interesting that such distant types as Lophius
and Fierasfer should in their embryonic stages show such close re-
semblances. Compare the figures of this paper and figs. 5 and 6 of
Plate II. of Dr. Emery's Memoir. It is not extraordinary that these
forms should have been described under the different generic names
of Vexillifer, Helminthostoma, and Porobranchus. The temporary
dorsal appendage which is so prominent in the young Fierasfer
(Emery, Plate I. fig. 2) is developed much in the same way as the

* See also Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist. 18G1, vii. (3), p. 190.
t Fauna u. Flora d. Golfes v. Neapel. II. Monographic. Fierasfer, v. Dr.,
Carlo Emery, 1880.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 285

permanent dorsal appendages of Lophius, which are eventually changed
to the appendages used for fishing by the adult. What part this tem-
porary dorsal appendage plays in Fierasfer is not known, but Emery
supposes it to have the same function as in Lophius.

COTTUS GRCENLANDICUS, C. Sf V.

(Plate III., Plate II. figs. 1, 2.)

The eggs of this species (Plate III. fig. 1) are found floating on the
surface ; they are readily recognized from the number of small oil
globules (from 10-12) wliich the yolk contains. Other Cottoids lay
their eggs in bunches attached to the bottom, or singly between stones
in shallow water. The young immediately on hatching (Plate III.
fig. 2) are characterized by the great width of the anterior part of the
body, the breadth of the embryonic dorsal fin toward the head, and the
great size of the fleshy pectorals. Viewed from above, when slightly
older (Plate III. fig. 3), the pectorals are seen to project far beyond
the general outline as thick fleshy flaps ; their formation as a fold of
the primitive lateral "embryonic fold is well shown in the stages within
the egg (Plate III. flg. la Ic) ; in the last stage (Plate III. fig. Ic)
they appear to stand independently of the body upon the yolk mass.
In the stages of Plate III. figs. 4, 5, the rapid increase in the size
of the head and of the pectorals can be traced. In the stage of
Plate III. fig. 4, the permanent pectoral fin rays are commencing to
form, and in Plate III. fig. 5, what we may call the crossopterygian
stage of the pectorg,ls is very striking.

The development of the anterior part of the body goes on, as in
Lumpus, much more rapidly than that of the posterior, and at a stage
(Plate II. fig. 1) where the Cottoid characters of the head and pecto-
rals are already very striking, the embryonic dorsal and anal folds are
still united with the caudal fold, and the tail only shows, as yet, a
rudimentary caudal fin and the beginning of the ventrals.

In the nexl; stage (Plate II. fig. 2) the spiny processes of the
operculum and head of the young Cottus are well developed, and the
pectorals fins have all the appearance of that of older specimens ;
the ventrals are well advanced, the dorsals and anals are separated
from the caudal fin, the permanent fin rays are quite prominent, and
the anterior dorsal exists as a Ioav fin.

The general coloring of this stage of the young Cottus is of a dirty
yellowish brown, with patches of darker pigment cells and black spots

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

along the base of the anal fin, of the pectorals, and of the upper part
of the stomach and head. In the youngest stages (Plate III. figs.
2, 3) there are two large patches of yellowish brown along the dorsal
embryonic fin, four along the ventral, and the outer edge of the pecto-
rals is colored in the same manner. In the subsequent stages (Plate
III. fig. 4, and Plate II. fig. 1) the young have the general coloring
of the older stages. This seems characteristic of other Cottoids, as in
a young Hemitripterus acadianus corresponding to Plate III. fig. 4 ;
the brilliant red coloring so characteristic of the adult is the prevail-
ing tint of the pigment spots of that early stage.

Ctclopterus lumpus, Lin.

(Plates IV. V.)

In the youngest stage of this species I have had occasion to ex-
amine (Plate IV. fig. 1), measuring 4""", the caudal fin was already
partly separated from the dorsal and ventral embryonic fin. The
spiny rays were also indistinctly indicated in those fins. The pectorals
were large, the rays gradually diminishing in length towards their
junction with the sucking disk (the modified ventrals on the abdomi-
nal side). The anterior dorsal is formed evidently, as in Lophius, at
an early stage, and separates, as in that genus, the anterior and poste-
rior parts of the embryonic dorsal fin. The younger stages of Lumpus
(Plate IV. figs. 1-4) are noted for the great length of the urostyle.
The head of the younger stages is remarkable for its great length
and breadth (Plate IV. figs. 1-4). The great prominence of the pig-
ment spots on the anterior part of the young fish, as far as the base
of the dorsal and ventral embryonic fins, gives the young Lumpus a
very striking appearance. It resembles somewhat the armored Fishes
of the Old Red, and we are strongly reminded of the restorations of
Coccosteus in such stages as those of Plate IV. figs. 1 and 3. With
increasing age and size (Plate IV. figs. 3, 4) the young Lumpus is
more uniformly covered by pigment cells, the posteri6r part of the
body becomes less transparent, more fleshy, and it loses its ancient
look, resembling more, at this stage (Plate IV. fig. 4), the young of
Batrachus, which may, indeed, be said to be a permanent condition of
this stage of Lumpus (with the exception of the absence of the suck-
ing disk in Batrachus). The posterior dorsal and the ventral have
become well separated from the caudal fin, which in Plate IV. fig. 4,
has nearly completely lost its ganoid shape, having become almost

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 287

symmetrical. The urostyle, however, is still marked by its great
lengtli. The permanent rays of the median fins are well advanced
(Plate IV. fig. 4) ; the paired fins have not changed materially since
the last stage (Plate IV. fig. 3). There is great diversity in the
coloring of the young of Lumpus. In the youngest stages (Plate IV.
figs. 1-3) the head, in a line drawn nearly vertically below the base
of the anterior dorsal, is of a light chocolate brown, with a darker
brown band extending from the nostrils above the eye to the base of
the anterior dorsal. A light blue band extends from the rear of the
eye to the top of the operculum, and in front of the eye to the nos-
trils. A blue spot of similar tint is found at the posterior base of the
dorsal and at the base of the caudal extremity of the posterior dorsal.
The rest of the body is straw colored. The young of stage repre-
sented in Plate IV. fig. 4, were usually of a bright olive green,
darkest towards the dorsal side, with the same blue band extending
towards the operculum from the rear of the oi'bit, with one or two
round blue spots above the level of the pectorals along the lateral
line. Other specimens were of a bluish neutral slate tint, uniformly
spotted with darker pigment cells, with the same blue band between
the eyes, above the nostrils, and behind the eyes. This was also the
coloring of the oldest of the young specimens caught (Plate V, figs.
1, 3), resembling in general the bluish coloring of the adult, only of a
darker tint.

The intermediate stages varied greatly in coloring ; some were of
a yellowish brown spotted with chocolate-colored patches, with light
greenish bands behind the eyes, and five roundish spots of the same
color along the lateral line, and a similar number of larger spots along
the base of tlie posterior dorsal, extending, in some specimens, along
the median dorsal line of the body to the colored band extending
between the eyes. Other stages, with a similar arrangement of ellip-
tical spots of a bluish tint along the dorsal and lateral lines, were of a
reddish brown color with pigment patches of a darker greenish or of
a brownish color, the abdominal region being of a lighter color.

In the stage of Plate V. figs. 1, 2, the anterior part of the body
already assumes somewhat the angular outline characteristic of the
adult, though these young stages are all more elongated than the
adult, having also the head comparatively well separated from the pos-
terior part of the body. The young in the stages of Plate V. figs.
1, 2, do not as yet show any traces of the prominent rows of spiny
tubercles formed in the adult. These were developed to a slight

V

\

288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

extent in young Lumpus measuring 34™™ in length (Plate V. figs.
3, 4) : a line commencing to form along the anterior slope of the
anterior dorsal, a less prominent horizontal row on a level with tlie
line of tlie orbits close to the eyes, a third lateral one along the body
at the level of the upper extremity of the operculum. This, the most
prominent of the rows, consisted of large, elliptical protuberance?,
through which spiny processes projected (Plate V. figs. 3 «, 3 b), and
a last row of somewhat smaller tubercles along the median line of
the abdomen behind the ventrals. The anterior dorsal fins of these
young stages (Plate V. figs. 3, 4) resemble greatly such permanent
anterior dorsals as exist in Chironectes, for instance.

In the older stages (Plate V. figs. 1-4) the anterior dorsal has
become well separated from the posterior, the median fins are entirely
isolated, with well-developed fin rays, and the caudal has become sym-
metrical. The pectorals are somewhat larger, but otherwise they and
the ventral fin disks (Plate V. fig. 3 c) do not difi^er much from their
condition in younger stages. The early development of the pectorals
seems a marked characteristic of all embryos of osseous Fishes.

These young stages of Lumpus were all collected close to the
shore ; they were found living among the eel-grass at N;ihant, near
low-water mark. Giinther has figured * the young of Cyclojjtemis
spinosus. Of these stages, the youngest correspond to the oldest
stage of Cyclopterus lumpus here figured, the oldest measuring over
45inm i^ length.

Gasterosteus aculeatds, Lin.

(Plate IX.)

The changes due to growth in Gasterosteus closely resemble those
of Fundulus. The principal differences consist in the longer per-
sistence of the embryonic tail lobe, which is still very prominent (Plate
IX. fig. 1) at a stage when in Fundulus the tail has become nearly
symmetrical. The notochord continues to extend into the tail as late
as the stage of Plate IX. fig. 4. The chromatophores are in the
shape of irregular spots during early stages ; they become more and
more dendritic as the young fish grow older (Plate IX. figs. 2, 3, 4).
In the stage of fig. 4 they begin to assume the arrangement forming the
vertical bands of the adult, and in the oldest stage here figured (Plate

* An Introduction to the Study of Fishes (1880), p. 485.

/

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 289

IX. fig. 5) the general pattern is similar to that of the adult. In
subsequent stages the spiny processes of the operculum are developed
as well as those of the large ray of the ventrals. The veutrals make
their appearance at about the time of the disappearance of the yolk
bag (Plate IX. fig. 3), somewhat later than the formation of the rudi-
mentary anterior dorsal spine (Plate IX. fig. 2). The outline of
the young fish becomes more compact with age, passing gradually
through the changes represented in Plate IX. figs. 1-5, from an
elongated slender fish to one with a comparatively broader and
stouter body.

Pelagic Fish Eggs.

The number of species of marine Fishes of which the eggs are
pelagic is probably quite large. Scarcely a summer passes without
some new egg being brought to light by the surface-fishing carried on
at Newport. The eggs of the majority of our species of Flounders,
those of Ctenolabrus, of Tan toga, of several species of Cottus, I know,
from my own observation, to float on the surface of the water.
Hiickel has called attention to the pelagic eggs of Lota or some
Gadoid which he had observed as early as 1866. Sars has shown the
same to be the case with the eggs of the Cod. Mr. Ryder has figured
the eggs of the Spanish Mackerel (Bull. U. S. Fish Com., i. PI.) Both
he and E. van Beneden, who also has observed pelagic fish eggs
(Quarterly Journal Mic. Soc. 1878), have called attention to the
value of these pelagic fish eggs for embryonic investigations. Mr.
Ryder has also made observations of the spawning of Zeus, and
suggests that many of the marine Fishes are nocturnal spawners.
That this is the case with many of the Fishes I have named above
seems probable from the state of segmentation in which they are found
to be on the morning following the day on which they were collected.
The pelagic eggs collected during the day were invariably well ad-
vanced, and the experiments for artificial fecundation which I have
made with Ctenolabrus and Tautoga to obtain the very earliest stages
of the development of the egg were invariably made late in the after-
noon, towards dusk. I have long known the eggs of Lophius to occur
floating on the surface as a gigantic mucous band, and they have also
been subsequently collected by the U. S. Fish Commission. The eggs
of Fierasfer are also pelagic ; see Emery's monograph. I have my-
self also collected the eggs of the Spanish mackerel on the surface,

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 19

290 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

and have observed a couple of stages of the young considerably more
advanced than those figured by Mr. Ryder. The youngest of the
stages I have observed correspond very closely with the stage figured
by Mr. Ryder on Plate IV. fig. 16, Bull. U. S. Fish Com. It was
remarkable, however, for having a lateral anal opening close to the
notochord, the anal embryonic fin extending unbroken beneath it from
the operculum to the extremity of the tail. The older stages are very
readily distinguished from other fish embryos by the large pigment
spots which are formed one above the other, and by three large patches
dividing the posterior part of the body into nearly equal parts, from
the extremity of the anal opening to the tail.

Ctenolabrus cceruleus, Deh

(Plates XIII. XIV. XV.)

The egg of Ctenolabrus floats on the surface immediately after being
laid, and the eggs in all stages of development are fished up with the
hand-net from June to the last part of August. The greater number
of the eggs appear to be laid in July. The segmentation of the egg is
rapid ; in less than twelve hours after fecundation there are sixteen
segmental spheres. In fifty hours the embryonic cap is well formed ;
in fifty-two hours the eyes are blocked out ; and the young fish is
hatched in from four and a half to five days in the stage of Plate XIII.
fig. 1, measuring about 2"™ in length. The yolk bag is large, elliptical,
and it (as well as the embryonic fin fold) is free from chromatic cells,
which cover only the dorsal part of the body, and stop a little way short
of the extremity of the notochord. On the second day after hatching
(Plate XIII. fig. 2) the young Ctenolabrus is about 3™" in length, the
body is much more elongated, the head especially has lengthened, the
distance between the eyes and the otoliths is nearly double, the rudi-
mentary pectorals are better marked, and the distance of the vent from
the yolk has greatly increased. The black chromatic cells have also
increased in number, and are proportionally smaller than in the pre-
ceding stages. On the third day after hatching (Plate XIII. fig. 3)
the young Fish presents a totally different appearance : the chromato-
phores characteristic of the early stages within the egg immediately
after hatching have disappeared, there are left but a few large cells
in the anterior part of the head, behind the pectorals along the dorsal,
while there are in this and the subsequent stage (Plate XIII. fig. 4)
large patches of pigment cells, and large chroraatophores at the base

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 291

of the anterior termination of the notochord below the level of the
eyes. We find also along the body a large patch at the posterior
extremity of the stomach, a second at the end of the intestine near
the vent, with a smaller patch between this and the anterior one, and
a third prominent patch extending across the body half way between
the vent and extremity of tail, with a couple of smaller spots in front
and one behind this patch. In the stage of Plate XIII. fig. 3, the
opening of the mouth is still inferior, the pectorals have greatly
increased in size since the preceding stage, the body has much
lengthened, the vent is placed about half way between the anterior and
posterior extremity, and the embryonic fin folds are comparatively
much narrower. In a stage but slightly older (Plate XIII. fig. 4) the
chromatophores are larger and more prominent, the pectorals have
increased in size, the head has increased in length, the mouth is more
anterior, the yolk bag has become much reduced, and the heart and
alimentary canal have greatly increased in size. In the next stage
(Plate XIII. fig. 5), the fourth day after hatching, the young Fish
measures about 4""" in length, and has greatly changed from the
preceding day. The opening of the mouth is anterior, the branchial
rays have been formed, the heart is divided into chambers, the stomach
proper has greatly increased in size, and the intestine is better special-
ised than in the younger stages. The muscular bands appear well
defined above and below the notochord, embryonic caudal rays are
quite distinct, the permanent pectoral rays are blocked out, and the
pigment cells are reduced to the three large patches described in the
previous stage and a few smaller cells round the eyes and on the head.
A small but prominent pigment spot has made its appearance near
the end of the notochord on the lower side of the body. The stages
intermediate between Plate XIII. fig. 1, and Plate XIV. fig. I, were
not traced. In Plate XIV. fig. 1, the caudal is well developed, show-
ing but a slight trace of its ganoid lobe. The head is much larger,
the body comparatively stouter, the mouth anterior, the brancliia? well
developed, and important changes have taken place in the size of the
stomach. In the next stage (Plate XIV. fig. 2), measuring G""" in
length, the snout has become more pointed, and the body is quite
broad and comparatively much flattened.

The spinal apophyses, of which a few could be seen in the pre-
ceding stage, are large and well developed, the dorsal and ventral
muscular bands have become most prominent, there is a trace of the
origin of the ventrals, the anal and dorsals are separated from the

292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

caudal embryonic lobe by a deep narrow slit, and in both these fins, as
well as the caudal, the permanent rays have begun to be formed, beinc
most advanced in the caudal fins. There are two gigantic black chro-
matophores extending over the dorsal part of the stomach, three
prominent chromatophores of the same color in the posterior flanks of
the body immediately in the line of separation of the dorsal and anal
from the caudal lobe, and the remnant of a small black pigment patch
at the base of the caudal rays. On the top of the cerebrum there is
a patch of black pigment, and also on the anterior part of the dorsal
line near the base of the brain. The general color of the young fish
at this stage is yellowish, with brilliant yellow patches surrounding the
dark patches of black chromatophores ; the eye is of a dull blue color,
with a black band above the pupil. In the next stage (Plate XIV.
fig. 3), measuring 6.5°"" in length, the caudal fin has lost its ganoid
lobe and has become symmetrical ; the cleft separating the dorsal and
anal from the caudal lobe has completely isolated them from the
caudal ; the snout has lengthened somewhat, the pectorals and ventrals
have become larger. The principal difference in the appearance of
these two stages consists in the great development of closely packed
chromatophores, which cover uniformly the whole body and the pos-
terior part of the head. The fins alone are as yet free from them ; but
at the base of the dorsal and anal there is a prominent continuous
line of black pigment cells, and a few small inconspicuous chromato-
phores at the base of the caudal rays. The next stage (Plate XIV.
fig. 4), but slightly older than Plate XIV. fig. 3, measuring 7°"" in
length, differs from it mainly in the absence of the coating of chro-
matophores. There are, as appears from this stage (Plate XIV.
fig. 4), from that of Plate XIV. fig. 3, and from the subsequent stage
figured, three sets of coloring characterized by the extremes here
figured. One as in the stage of Plate XIV. fig. 3, with densely packed
dendritic chromatophores ; the other, fig. 4, with only a few prominent
patches of large chromatophores, and the intermediate stage (Plate
XIV. fig. 5), measuring H"" in length, in which we have the large
prominent patches (Plate XIV. fig. 5), with the band of continuous
pigment cells along the base of the dorsal and anal, and the body uni-
formly covered with comparatively small pigment spots. This will
probably account for the great differences already noticed in the
youngest stages (Plate XIII. figs. 4, 5, 6, and Plate XIII. 1, 2, 3)
in the presence or absence and distribution of the dendritic chro-
matophores. We might naturally expect such a difference from the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 293

innumerable variations in coloring noticed in the adult Ctenolabrus.
During a single season at Nahaut, the late Professor Agas-siz had no
less than sixty colored sketches made of specimens of this species,
measuring from three to four inches in length, illustrating differences
in the coloring or markings. In younger stages, when the young
Ctenolabrus measures not more than 15""" in length, I have found
fully as great a variety in the types of coloration as among the adult ;
the principal types of coloring varying from a perfectly uniform light
green tint to a mottled and banded pattern, which recalls far more
Julis than the usual pattern of design and coloring found in our
Ctenolabrus. The next stage figured (Plate XV. fig. 1) is but slightly
more advanced than Plate XIV. fig. 5 ; it belongs to the light-colored
type. The principal differences to be noticed are the nearly complete
disappearance of the caudal embryonic fold and the formation of a
rudimentary anterior spiny part of the dorsal. In a young Ctenolabrus
(Plate XV. fig. 2) measuring 11""" in length, this anterior part of the
dorsal is somewhat more developed ; the urostyle is much smaller.
This specimen belonged to a type of coloring of which the adult has
patches of darker color along the dorsal and ventral lines, these
patches also extending over the anal and dorsal fins. The darker
chromatophores are black, those of the dorsal fin and along the dorsal
are of a light-brown color, and the whole upper part of the body and
head is colored a brilliant yellow. In a young Ctenolabrus measuring
15°"° in length the anterior part of the dorsal has greatly increased
in height, the posterior ends of the dorsal and anal have become
rounded, and there is no trace of the rudimentary caudal embryonic
fin. Young specimens of the same length were either uniformly
covered by closely packed brownish or black chromatophores on a
reddish-brown or greenish background, or else the darker chromato-
phores were arranged in bands, slanting from the median line towards
the tail, with irregular patches at the base of the dorsal fin and along
the dorsal side, or else they were of the pattei'n figured here (Plate
XV. fig. 3) upon a light yellowish background.

In a somewhat more advanced stage (Plate XV. fig. 4) of about
the same length as Plate XV. fig. 3, the body and head of the young
Ctenolabrus have become quite compact, the fins resemble in outline
those of the adult, and the young Ctenolabrus has practically assumed
the principal characteristic features of the older and larger fish.
Fishes in the stages of Plate XV. figs. 2-4, are still pelagic, though
many of them can be caught in the eel-grass or kelp along with the
older fishes.

294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The young Ctenolabrus at a very early age assume the peculiar
slanting of the body which the older fish take specially when feeding
or when coming up to examine any object.

MOTELLA ARGEXTEA, Rhein.

(Plate VII. Plate VIH. figs. 1-3.)

The youngest specimen of this species I have seen (Plate VII.
fig. 1) measured 4"'™ in length. It was remarkable for the compara-
tively strong coloring for so young a stage. The head dorsal and
ventral muscular lines, as well as the sides of the stomach, are of
a dark dirty yellow. The pectorals are large and transparent, but
the ventrals, already well developed, are of a dark maroon color.
The lower part of the eye is light blue, the pupil of a dark crimson.
About half way between the tail and pectorals there are two large
pigment cells, one in the dorsal, the other in the ventral side of the
notochord. A smaller cell indicates the position where the embry-
onic caudal fin rays are forming.

There are three pigment cells on the brain, the largest in front, two
smaller ones at the extremity of the snout, one on the lower and one on
the upper jaw, with a still smaller cell at the base of the operculum.
Four to five larger cells form a black edge to the upper side of the
stomach. In a somewhat older stage (Plate VII. fig. 2) the principal
differences consist in the greater size of the pectorals, the larger
ventrals, the increase in size of the chromatophores on the head and
stomach, and the greater elongation of the snout. Seen from above
(Plate VII. fig. 3) the ventrals appear like wings proportionally as
large as the pectorals of the young Flying-Fish. In a young fish
measuring T"'" in length (Plate VII. fig. 4) the pectorals have in-
creased but little in size since the preceding stage. The ventrals are
nearly one third the length of the fish. The head, quite rounded
above, is proportionally larger, and the body much wider and less
elongate than in the younger stages (Plate VII. figs. 1-3).

The chromatophores are more numerous in the upper part of the
head and on the upper part of the stomach, while the single cell of
the dorsal region half way to the tail has increased to a large patch
of chromatophores, and forms in this stage the largest accumulation of
pigment cells. The permanent rays of the caudal fin are well
advanced, and at the base of each is placed a minute pigment spot.
The permanent rays of the dorsal and anal are also commencing to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 295

form, but they are far less atlvauced than those of the caudal. The
embryonic fin rays are still to be traced iu that part of the fin fold
which unites the caudal lobe with the dorsal and anal. The coloring
of this stage is greener than in the preceding stages ; the greenish
tint is especially marked on the upper part of the head and near the
dorsal patch of chromatophores. The ventrals are somewhat darker
colored than the younger stages. In all the stages thus far figured the
young fish swims mainly by means of the powerful stroke of the
ventrals, which they spread like wings laterally to their fullest extent
at right angles to the body. In a somewhat more advanced stage
(Plate YII. fig. 5), measuring 12™™ in length, the body has increased
greatly in length, the pectorals are longer, the ventrals are less than
one-fourth the length of the body ; the caudal has become terminal
and rounded, and quite well separated from the dorsal and anal ; the
permanent fin rays are well developed in the three median fins ; the
head has become lengthened, and the pigment spots of the upper part
of the head and anterior part of the body are smaller and more
numerous than in the preceding stages.

The chromatophores along the dorsal line and base of the dorsal
and anal are now arranged in longitudinal lines. The coloring of the
body behind the anterior base of the dorsal, as well as the head, has
assumed a yellowigh-green tint slightly bluish towards the ventral
side.

In a subsequent stage (Plate VII. fig. G), but slightly older, the
greenish color of the dorsal part of the fish has become more marked,
and there exists a principal lateral line of black chromatophores
extending from the operculum nearly to the posterior extremity of the
dorsal ; the extremity of the body near the caudal is still quite trans-
parent, of a yellowish tint, showing the ganoid termination of the
notochord. The ventrals in this stage are proportionally longer
again than in Plate VII. fig. 5, being somewhat more than one
quarter the length of the fish. Viewed from above, the young
fish is often seen with ventrals spread at right angles, as in Plate
VIII. fig. 1 a, or flapping them violently up and down when excited,
or as in Plate VIII. fig. 1, when swimming rapidly. In a somewhat
older stage (Plate VIII. fig. 2) the dorsal and anal fins are well
separated from the caudal ; the anterior dorsal has commenced to
form ; the ventrals have lost somewhat their wing-like character,
they are usually carried folded, and appear more like long fin rays ;
the head has lengthened, is more rounded, sloping anteriorly ; the

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

pectorals are elongated, and the greenish blue color of the body
is limited to the dorsal regions, the sides being silvery ; a colored
belt, slightly greenish, extends along the base of the anal. In the
oldest pelagic specimen of young Motella (Plate VIII. fig. 3) the
barbel of the lower jaw is well formed, the anterior dorsal is higher
than the posterior dorsal, the ventrals are long fin rays equalling in
length one third of the length of the young fish, the greenish blue
color of the dorsal region is more intense than in the younger stages,
and extends in slightly lighter-colored diagonal bands across the
flanks ; the posterior part of the dorsal, of the anal, and the base of
the caudal are marked with small black pigment spots at the base
of the permanent fin rays. In this stage and in the one immediately
preceding (Plate VIII. fig. 2) the young fish make but little use
of their ventrals while swimming. The extremity of the caudal is
cut quite sharply at right angles to the longitudinal Hue, with
slightly rounded corners. At this stage the resemblance to Breg-
maceros is striking.*

Gadus morrhua, Lin.

(Plate Vin. figs. 4, 5.)

The only other Gadoid of which I have found the young by fish-
ing on the surface is probably our common Cod ; when only 28'°'" in
length it has in this early stage (Plate VIII. fig. 5) assumed all the
characteristic features of the genus. The only other young stage I
have seen is a young Cod measuring 20'"'" in length (Plate VIII.
fig. 4), which differed from fig. 2 in not having a barbel, and in having
the median fins still connected, although the three dorsal and two
anals were quite distinct. The pigment cells were not arranged to
form any definite pattern, but covered uniformly the dorsal region.
The breaking up of the continuous embryonic dorsal and anal into
separate fins is admirably seen in the stage represented in Plate VIII.
fisf. 4.

* Emery in his monograph of Fierasfer has also figured the pectorals of
the young Merlucius and Motella. There is still some imcertaintj' with regard
to the genus to which the specimens I have here referred to Motella belong ;
they may prove to be one of the species of Onus described by Collet.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 297

FUNPULUS NIGROFASCIATUS, C. Sf V.

(Plates XIX. XX.)

Sundevall has already given the principal changes of form which
Cyprinus undergoes while passing from its leptocardial stage to that
of the adult. I have traced the principal changes of growth in one of
our species of Fundulus, and find they agree fairly with the stages fig-
ured by Sundevall. That in the youngest stages the crossopterygian
nature of the pectorals is owing to their large size is perhaps as strik-
ing as in any other embryo of osseous fish known to me. (See Plate
XIX. figs. 5, 6, in which are given a view of the pectorals, fig. 6,
from above ; partly in profile, fig. 5 ; and a side view of a large
pectoral (fig. 4), in which the fleshy base and the embryonic rays
of the fin are best developed just previous to the appearance of the
first trace of the permanent fin rays.)- The gradual change of the
pigment cells from a linear arrangement to the characteristic pattern
of the adult is readily traced in the oldest specimens figured on
Plate XX.

OSMERUS MORDAX, Gill.

(Plate XII.)

The egg is pelagic, quite transparent ; the young on hatching are
about 5™°^ in length (Plate XII. figs. 1, 2), with a comparatively
small yolk bag, very rudimentary head, huge eyes, the vent placed
at about three quarters of the length of the body near the posterior
extremity, pectorals quite rudimentary. There are no pigment cells
in this stage in any of the young I have collected. In the next stage
figured (Plate XII. fig. 3) the young fish has greatly changed, the
head is quite elongate, branchiae are present, the lower jaw projecting
beyond the upper one, pectorals large, eye brilliant emerald green,
the yolk bag has completely disappeared, the caudal embryonic fin
rays are very marked ; we can also see the first trace of the separation
between the caudal, anal, and dorsal. A prominent row of large pig-
ment cells extends along the base of the anterior anal embryonic fin
fold, with a smaller line extending along the upper side of the intes-
tines, a few small pigment cells at the extremity of the notochord,
along the base of the posterior anal and of the operculum, with two
or three pigment cells along the dorsal line about half way from the
head to the tail.

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In the next stage figured the young Osmerus is considerably older,
measuring already 22™™ in length ; the caudal is completely separated
from the dorsal and anal, in both of which the permanent fin rays
already exist ; there are rudimentary ventrals present in this stage.
The general coloring of the body is a light dirty yellow, with patches
of more brilliant yellow along the lateral line and base of the head.
There is one line of greyish pigment spots along the dorsal side of the
notochord, a very prominent line of large pigment cells running some-
what below the notochord, extending from the base of the pectorals
to the vent, with four or five large pigment cells along the base of the
anal and the ventral line towards the base of the caudal. Small pig-
ment spots extend along the base of the caudal fin rays, with three or
four larger spots at the base of the caudal fin. The oldest stage I
have found (Plate XII. fig. 5) was not larger than Plate XII. fig. 4,
but the caudal, anal, and dorsal were in a more advanced condition, the
permanent fin rays better marked, the head less elongate, the body
behind the ventrals comparatively broader. The great resemblance
of this stage of Osmerus to Scomberesox and Belone in the general
arrangement of the median fins and the great elongation of the body
is striking. Mr. H. J, Rice has, in the Report of the Commissioner
of Fisheries of Maryland for 1877 (Plates III. V.), given excel-
lent figures of several young stages of the Smelt. The figures here
given complement the stages already known, and with those of Mr.
Rice give a fair sketch of the principal changes of the Smelt due to
growth. The resemblance of the development of Osmerus to that of
the Herring as given by SunJ .vail is very striking. Sundevall figures
young fishes, which he calls embryo Herring, from 8 to 38"^"^ in
length, but he does not state whether they were actually raised from
eggs of known origin. Before the publication of Mr. Rice's paper I
had already supposed the young fishes figured on Plate XII. to be the
young of some Clupeoid, but the figures given by him seem to leave
no doubt that the young I figure on Plate XII. belong to the Smelt.

M

><

^

r^J^.

^^

flu;:

^

^

r

^

N.

N

'./ \

^

Oty^'U^

yVz-t^y f^h-f^>i/'i^^

3 *-

.^fi4^

<^. i^. fica.

Tft£J^eli9tyf)ifPri'--f^4^-2ifiyrm(nitStBostor

^

■^

^ \

^

fe

<

> \

^

^Jl

^

^3-

^

^

5^

§^

(

(y(^(i<P(U^ ' /a-Hx^ Oi\crv^ ^Vrkuo

^tjc.

<^- ae,.

ntlleHetfpeP"'>^Cc.2U lyrTmKitStstfU.

Oyeca^iu^ ' ^euTix^ <f^V«<ro-i fC^'kjut

W.-XL

a.

cy.^.

TheKelicb/p^Bnn iifv^ Q, m Tr^mra t

/xj Cijuu<i--^ y^x^-zw <^%*vu^ (Ty^^Xi^

W.:KTr.

■<^. <Ji

Tht,mUoiyt^^'^^<^-2JITrernmtitbo^

><

I

^

^

^

^

r

^

^

i

>

r

?^

^
^

ii

r

>3^

Clet^'la^^ /4^«^ 6~>l^<'^'^ A^Kj^p

DteMc HoKpr Panting CoJll TrmontStSoHm

M MAyy Jn-*yyJ <1>M^/W, AvVvAJ

lY.mx

a.Of.cUl.

c^eiiW/c'" '"*'^'^* ''■"'"""*■•*''■•'"'

^

r

'li'ii

1

1/1:

r^-lJ

i

^ /I

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 299

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE I.

Labrax lixeatus, Bl. §• Sch. (Roccus, Gill.')

Fig. 1. Young Labrax measuring 3.5™™ in length.
" 2. Slightly older than fig. 1, measuring ■A'"™ in length.
" 3. Still more advanced, measuring nearly 5'"™ in length.
" 3a. Tail of young Labrax somewhat older than stage of fig. 3, with a

dorsal line of pigment spots.
" 4. Young Labrax in which caudal is forming, 8™™ in length.
" 5. Somewhat more advanced than fig. 4.

PLATE IL

Fig. 1. Young CoTTus gr<enlandicus, somewhat older than stage of Plate
III. fig. 5, measuring 8™™ in length.
" 2. Profile view of young Cottus measuring 1L5™™ in length.
" 3. Young Labrax 16'"™ in length.
" 4. Young Labrax 26™™ in length.
" 5. Young Blue Fish (Temnodon saltatoe) measuring 9™"» ia length.

PLATE m.

Cottus grcenlandicus, C. §* F.

Fig. 1. Egg of Cottus found floating on the surface.
" In. First trace of pectorals of young Cottus still within the egg.
" 16. Somewhat older stage of lateral fold.
" Ic. Still older stage than fig. 1 b, still within the egg.
" 2. Young Cottus just hatched, measuring 2.5™™ in length.
" 3. Slightly older specimen, third day after hatching, seen from above.
" 4. Young Cottus, somewhat older than preceding stage, measuring 3™™

in length.
" 5. Young Cottus eleventh day after hatching.

PLATE IV.

Cyclopterus lumpus, Lin.

Fig. 1. Young Lumpus, seen in profile, measuring 4™™ in length.
" 2. Same seen from above.

" 3. Young Lumpus, somewhat older than preceding stage, seen in profile.
" 4. Profile view of young Lumpus measuring 5™™ in length.
" 6. Profile of young Lumpus measuring 10™™ in length.

300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

PLATE V.

Cyclopterus lumpus, Lin.

Fig. 1. Young Lumpus 20"" in length.

" 2. The same as fig. 1, seen from above.

" 3. Profile of young Lumpus still older, measuring 34™" in length.

" 3a. Spiny protuberances along anterior dorsal line of anterior dorsal.

" 3b. Largest spiny protuberances of lateral line.

" 3c. Pectorals and ventrals seen from the abdominal side.

" 4. Same as fig. 3, seen from above.

PLATE VI.

PORONOTUS TRIACANTHUS, GUI.

Fig. 1. Young Butterfish 7™" in length.
" 2. Somewhat older stage than fig. 1.
" 3. Older stage than fig. 2 ; 9""" in length.
" 4. Slightly more advanced than fig. 3 ; 10""° in length.
" 5. Young Butterfish having principal characters of the adult, 16™™ in
length.

PLATE Vn.

MOTELLA ARGENTEA, Rhein.

Fig. 1. Young, measuring 4™™ in length.
" 2. Somewhat older than fig. 1, 5™™ in length, seen in profile.
" 3. Same as fig. 2, seen from below to show rays of ventrals.
" 4. Young, measuring 7.5"™ in length.
" 5. Young, measuring 12"™ in length.
" 6. Slightly older than fig. 5, measuring 14.5"™ in length, seen in profile.

PLATE VIIL

MOTELLA ARGENTEA, Rhein.

Fig. 1. View from above of same embryo as Plate VII. fig. 6.
" la. Same as fig. 1, seen from above, with its ventrals fully expanded and

spread out.
" 2. Young Motella with small anterior dorsal, measuring 15™" in length.
" 3. Considerably older than fig. 2, measuring 34™™ in length.
" 4. Young Gadus measurmg 25"'" in length.
" 5. Young Cod measuring 28™™ in length.

PLATE IX.

Gasterosteus aculeatus, Lin.

Fig. 1. Young Gasterosteus with prominent ganoid tail fin measuring 7™™ in
length.
" 2. Older stage, 12"™ in length, in which the embryonic fin lobe has dis-
appeared, the tail fin has become symmetrical, and the permanent
rays of the dorsal and anal are well developed.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 301

Fig. 3. Slightly older than preceding stage. Rudiments of anterior dorsal
spines and of ventrals have made their appearance, 15""" in length.

" 4. In this stage the rudimentary anterior dorsal spines, as well as ventrals,
have increased somewhat in length, the dorsal and anal arc both
higher, and the chromatophores of the body are arranged in bands
somewhat as in the adult, 22""" in length.

" 5. Young Gasterosteus, in wliicli the principal characteristics of the adult
are fairly developed, 27""" in length.

" 5a. Anterior spine of ventral of young Gasterosteus, somewhat older than
preceding stage.

PLATE X.

AxnERiNicnxnYS notata, Giinth. (Chirostoma, Gill).

Fig. 1. Young Atherina measuring S"'™ in length.

" 2. Somewhat older stage, measuring G..5""" in length, seen from above.

" 3. About in stage of fig. 2, seen in profile.

" 4. Older than preceding stage, 9°"" in length.

PLATE XI.

AXHERINICHTHYS NOTATA, Gunth.

Fig. 1. Somewhat more advanced than preceding stage (Plate X. fig. 4) 10, 5'"'»

in length.
" 2. Young Atherina measuring 10™"^ in length.
" 3. Young Atherina, having the principal characters of the adult, of about

the same length as fig. 2.

PLATE XIL

OSMERUS MORDAX, GUI.

Fig. 1. Young Osmerus just hatched, measuring 5™™ in length, seen in

profile.
" 2. Same seen from above.
" 3. Young Osmerus measuring 9™™ in length.
" 4. Considerably older than fig. 3 ; 22™"" in length.
" 5. Oldest Osmerus found swimming on the surface, measuring 22™'" in

length.

PLATE Xm.

Ctenolabrus coeruleus, Dek.

Fig. 1. Young just hatched from the egg, 2"^™ in length.
" 2. Young, on the second day after hatching, 3™™ in length.
" 3. Young on the third day after hatching.
" 4. Young on the third day after hatching, somewhat older.
" 5. Young hatched four daj^s, about 4™°> in length, seen in profile.
" 6. Young same as fig. 5, seen from above.

302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

PLATE XIV.

Ctenolabrus cceruleus, Dek.

Fig. 1. Young 5""™ in length, fished up at the surface. Caudal fin forming.
" 2. Young 6™™ in length, anal and dorsal fins separated from the caudal,

ventrals commencing to form.
" 8. Young 6.5™"" in length, somewhat more advanced than fig. 2.
" 4. Young measuring 7™" in length, the dorsal and ventrals somewhat

better separated from the caudal fin than in the preceding stage.
" 5. Young 10™™ in length.

PLATE XV.

Ctenolabrus cceruleus, Bek.

Fig. 1. Young somewhat more advanced than the stage of Plate XIV., fig. 5,
of about the same length.
" 2. Young 11mm in length.
" 3. Young 15™m in length.
" 4. Young of same size as preceding figure, but somewhat more advanced.

PLATE XVI.
Fig. 1. Young Batrachus Tau, measuring 8"™ in length.

LOPHIUS PISCATORIUS, Lin.

Fig. 2. Three eggs embedded in the gelatinous membrane in which they are
laid ; magnified.
" 3. Young Lophius taken out of the egg just previous to hatching.
" 4. Young Lophius just after hatching.
" 5. Somewhat older stage ; the yolk bag has entirely disappeared.

PLATE XVn.

Lophius piscatorius, Lin.

Fig. 1. Slightly older stage than fig. 5, Plate XVL
" 2. Same as fig. 1, seen from above.

" 3. Older than fig. 1 ; the second ray of ventrals commences to form.
" 4. Anterior dorsal of slightly older stage, showing the beginning of the

second ray.
" 5. Anterior dorsal rays of specimen somewhat older than fig. 4.
" G. Older stage than fig. 5, with longer dorsal rays in anterior fin and

rudiment of third ; two large ventral rays.
" 7. Ventral rays of specimen somewhat older than fig. 3, about in the

stage of fig. 5.

J

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 303

PLATE XVm.

LOPHIUS PISCATORIUS, Lin.

Fig. 1. Young Lophius showing still greater increase in length and number of
anterior dorsal and ventral rays.
" 2. Oldest pelagic stage, measuring 30""" in length, seen in profile.
" 3. Same seen from above, slightly less magnified.

PLATE XIX.

FUNDULUS NIGROFASCIATUS, C. Sf V.

Fig. 1. Young, measuring 7""" in length.
" 2. Same seen from above.
" 3. Older than fig. 1 ; dendritic pigment cells more numerous in the upper

part of the head ; the nearly unbroken lines of chromatophores are

broken up into separate cells ; the permanent rays of the dorsal and

anal fins make their appearance.
" 4. Crossopterygian stage of pectoral of young Fundulus about in stage of

fig. 1, from the side.
" 5. Same fin seen from above, slightly bent laterally when in motion.
" 6. Same fin seen from above, at rest.

PLATE XX.

Fundulus nigrofasciatus, C. Sf V.

Fig. 1. Young measuring llmm Jn length and uniformly covered with dendritic
chromatophores, dorsal and anal quite high, well separated from the
caudal ; first trace of veiitrals.

" 2. Young measuring IG"™ in length, body more compact, ventrals quite
distinct, anal and dorsal slightly lobed, caudal rounded, pectoral
elongated, whole body covered uniformly by closely packed dendritic
chromatophores.

" 3. Young measuring 20""" in length ; although the head is still compara-
tively larger than in fig. 4, yet the anterior part of fish has assumed
the characteristic sloping outline of the adult. The scales are
already well developed in this stage. The pigment cells are com-
paratively smaller than in younger stages, and very closely packed
over the whole surface, especially on the dorsal side.

" 4. Same as fig. 3, seen from above.

304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XVII.

CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE PHYSICAL LABORATORY OF
THE MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY.

XVI. EXPERIMENTS ON THE FATIGUE OF SMALL SPRUCE

BEAMS.

By F. E. Kidder.

Presented May 10, 1882.

The following experiments were undertaken with the object of deter-
mining if possible what part of the so-called breaking load of a beam
would ultimately cause the beam to break, all the conditions being the
most favorable.

Incidental to the experiments, the moduli of rupture and of elas-
ticity of small beams of kiln-dried spruce were determined.

The experiments were made in the Physical Laboratory of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, the testing-machine used being
the same as that described in a paper by the writer presented to the
Academy Feb. 9, 1881.

With this machine the loads are applied by suspending known
weights directly from the centre of the beam. The deflections of the
beams were measured by means of a micrometer screw, the principle
of electrical contact being taken advantage of in reading it. The
moduli given have been computed from deflections measured to
thousandths of an inch or hundredths of a millimetre.

As the load was suspended from a bolt resting upon the beam at
the centre, it was necessary to measure the deflections one inch from
the centre. For the small deflections from which the moduli of elas-
ticity were determined, the difference between the measured deflection
and the actual deflection is so small that it would not come within the
limit to which the deflection was measured. For the deflections given
in the tables, the deflections at the centre would be somewhat larger,
but the error does not practically affect the results.

As the room in which these experiments were made is kept very
warm and dry, any unseasoned timber would be so aff'ected by the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

805

heat that It would be impossible to tell whether the deflections were
caused entirely by the load, or partly by the heat of the room ; hence
it was thought best in making these experiments to use kiln-dried
timber.

The small beams upon which the experiments were made were
taken from two spruce planks, selected from lumber which had been
cut in Maine during the previous season. The planks were kept in a
drying-kiln three weeks, and were then cut up into pieces about two
inches square and allowed to dry until tested. For convenience the
beams cut from one plank are classed as Series No. 2, and those from
the other as Series No. 3 ; Series No. 1 including those beams pre-
viously experimented upon, which were discussed in my previous
paper.

All the pieces of wood experimented upon were what might
almost be called perfect pieces, being straight grained and free from
knots. They were about Ih inches square, and 40 inches between
the supports. The exact dimensions, with other data, are shown in
the tables.

TABLE I.
Sekies No. 1. Unseasoned Spruce.

Centre

No. of
test

Clear
span

Breadth

Depth

E.

R.

breaking
weight for

Deflection
just before

piece.

I.

B.

D.

beam, 1" x
l"Xl'. A.

breaking.

in.

in.

in.

lbs.

lbs.

lbs.

in.

1

40

1.475

1.45

1,731,000

11,380

632

1.565

2

40

1.445

1.52

1,556,000

10,330

574

1.895

3

40

1.469

1.448

1,765,000

10,710

595

1.48*

4

40

1.42

1.498

1,736,000

10,830

601

1.466

5

40

1.45

1.485

1,688,000

11,980

665

1.579

6

40

1.48

1.44

1,795,000

11,040

613

7

40

1.464

1.46

1,682,000

10,570

587

8

40

1.42

1.48

1,647,000

11,280

626

i.571

9

40

1.46

1.46

1,704,000

11,180

621

1.425

10

40

1.441

1.46

1,616,000

12,440

691

1.81*

Averag

je value o

f E, 1,692,000 1

bs.

«

* i

' B, 12,170 lbs
\pproximately.

, of A, 620

lbs.

Tables I., II., and III. are so arranged that a comparison of the
strength and stiffness, together with the ultimate deflection of the
pieces in the different series, can easily be made.

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 20

306

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

TABLE 11.
Series No. 2. Kiln-dried Spruce.

Centre

No. of
test

Clear
gpan

Breadth

Depth

E.

DefleRtion
ju.st before

R.

breaking
weight for

piece.

I.

B.

D.

breaking.

beam, 1" X
1" X 1'. A.

in.

in.

in.

lbs.

in.

lbs.

lbs.

1

40

1.52

1.52

1,573,000

1.676

12,560

698

2

40

1.405

1.5

1.656

13,590

755

3

40

1.52

1.5

1.517

12,-540

697

4

40

1.51

1.50.3

1.816

13,720

762

5

40

1.506

1.50G

1.662

13,740

763

6

40

1.51

1.516

1,760,000

1.937

Broke under f b. w.

7

40

1.508

1.508

1,636,000

1.79

Broke under f b. w.

8

40

1.51

1.518

1,721,000

Carried § b.

w. 22 days.

9

40

1.5

1.504

1,580,000

Tested with

Jb. w.

Averag(

3 value c

f E for five pieces, 1,654,000 lbs.

(<

« <

' R " "

13,230 •'

"

t( I

' A " "

"

735 "

The letter E is used to denote the modulus of elasticity in these
tables, and R the modulus of rupture.

The quantity denoted by A is one eighteenth of the modulus of
rupture.

It will be noted that the pieces in Series No. 1 were not kiln dried,
but were taken from a plank selected from ordinary timber.

TABLE III.

Series No. 3. Kiln-dried Spruce.

Centre

No. of

Clear

Deflection

breaking

test

span

Breadth B.

Depth D.

just before

R.

weight for

piece.

I.

breaking.

beam, 1" X 1"
X 1'. A.

in.

in.

in.

in.

lbs.

lbs.

1

40

1.54

1.535

1.59

10,-500

583

2

40

1.54

1.54

1.654

10,596

588

3

40

1.545

1.54

1.638

10,644

591

4

40

1.54

1.545

1.42

8,487

471

5

40

1.54

1.54

1.575

0,200

511

6

40

1.54

1..532

1.607

Broke under | b. w.

7

40

1.54

1.54

1.567

Broke under f b. w.

8

40

1.541

1.541

Tested with ^ b. w.

Average i

?^alue of R,

'or five pieces,

9,885 lbs.

"

" " A,

" « ti

540 "

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 307

Series No. 2.

In commencing this series of experiments five of the beams were
subjected to loads of 30 and 40 lbs., and the deflection measured
at the end of one hour from the time the load was applied. From
these deflections the moduli of elasticity have been calculated. The
values given in Table II. are the average of the values obtained from
the deflection under 30 lbs. and the deflection under 40 lbs.

Having determined the moduli of elasticity of these pieces, five
pieces of the series were broken by means of a gradually increasing
load, and from their breaking load the modulus of rupture of each
piece was computed. The average value of these five pieces (Nos.
1-5) was then considered to be the average value for the whole series,
and the breaking weight of the remaining pieces of the series was
computed on this basis.

Before attempting to break the remaining pieces, a load of 50 lbs.,
about -j^ of its breaking load, was applied to piece No. 6, with the
object of determining if the deflection under this slight load would
continually increase. The load was kept on the beam 288 hours, and
the deflections, taken at intervals, are given in Table IV. From these
it will be seen that the deflection increased very rapidly for the first
24 hours, and then quite regularly, but slowly, for 192 hours, and
that after that it continued to decrease for 72 hours, when it slightly
increased again.

As it was desired to use the machine for the more direct purposes
of the experiments, the piece was removed from the machine, but it
would have been interesting to have watched the further action of the
load on the beam.

During the time that the deflections decreased, the weather was very
wet, and it is the opinion of the writer that the deflections were some-
what affected by the change in the condition of the atmosphere. It
should be observed that the greatest increase of deflection was very
small, being only 0.44 of a millimetre, or about 0.017 of an inch.

After allowing this same beam several days in which to recover
from the strain caused by the load of 50 lbs., 574 lbs., or f of its cal-
culated breaking load, was suspended from the beam, and the deflection
measured at frequent intervals, with the results shown iu Table IV.
After carrying the load 260 hours the beam broke.

308

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

TABLE IV.
Deflections of Piece No. 6, Series No. 2, under a continued Load.

Load of 50 lbs. — 6^ per cent, of Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

2.04

120

2.305

240

2.408

24

2.22

144

2.368

264

2.358

72

2.265

168

2.418

288

2.368

96

2.283

192

2.478

Load removed.

Load of 574 lbs. or | of Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

25.51

69

33.8.3

140

38.17

1.5

28.72

75

34.33

165

39.83

4.5

30.58

92

35.28

188

40.58

19.5

31.72

117

37.17

237
260*

41.59
42.47

* Broke shortly after.

Piece No. 7 of this series was computed to hold 756 lbs. before
breaking, and 504 lbs., or § of the breaking weight, was suspended
from the beam. After supporting this load 134 hours the beam broke.

TABLE V.

Deflections of Piece No. 7, Series No. 2, under 504 lbs. or
Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

23.04

48

84.43

120

43.16

14

28.48

86

38.06

134

45.46

24

31.26

96

40.04

Broke soon after.

38

33.16

110

41.64

The deflections of the beam measured at frequent intervals are
given in Table V.

Piece No. 8 of this series carried | of its breaking weight 499
hours, with an increase in deflection of 7.64 millimetres (0.3 in.).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

309

As the deflection was constantly increasing, and was already more
than the deflection of Piece No. 7 when the load was first applied, it
seems to the writer that the beam would undoubtedly have in time
been broken by its load.

The deflection of this beam is given in Table VI.

TABLE VI.

Deflections of Piece No. 8, Series No. 2, under 511 lbs. or § of its
Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

21.98

211

26.86

403

29.15

44

23.07

235

27.09

427

29.37

68

25.45

259

27.82

451

29.48

92

25.78

283

28.14

475

29.53

116

25.94

308

28.58

499

29.62

140

26.20

332

28.81

Weight taken off.

168

26.43

379

29.02

The last piece in Series No. 2, Piece No. 9, was subjected to a load
of ^ of its breaking weight for 327 hours, during which time the
deflection constantly increased from 16.39 mm. (0.644 in.) to 19.07 mm.
(0.75 in.). The load was then removed and the "set" of the beam
measured. This set gradually decreased as the beam recovered itself,
until it was quite small, and probably the larger part of it was due to
the indentation of the beam at the points of support, something which
cannot well be prevented in a wooden beam. It will be seen from
table VII., that each time the load was applied the beam deflected a
little more than at the previous application of the load ; also that
the set increased much faster than the deflection.

This tends to prove that the continued application and removal of
one half of the breaking weight of a beam will in a comparatively
short time cause it to break.

310

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

TABLE VII.
Experiments on Piece No. 9, Seeies No. 2.

Deflection under 374 lbs. or ^ of its Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

1

Time applied.

Deflection.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

16.39

48

17.96

211

18.74

2

17.08

66

18.08

2rA

18.87

18

17.49

116

18.17

279

18.91

25

17.77

138

18.34

803

19.01

42

17.8(3

164

18.43

327*

19.07

* Load removed.

Recovery of the piece

on removal of the above load after 327 hours

application.

Time to

Set.

Time to

Set.

Time to

Set.

recover.

recover.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

hours.

mm.

0

2.41

8

1.73

48

1.32

2

•1.94

24

1.46

74

1.30*

4

1.74

32

1.38

* At least .5 mm. of this set was due to the indentation of the beam at

the points of support.

After 21 days rest the beam vfas again put in the machine, and the same
load of 374 lbs. was alternatively applied and taken off, with the following
results : —

Weight.

Deflection on

application of

load.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

Set.

Time to
recover.

Set.

lbs.

mm.

hours.

mm.

mm.

hours.

mm.

374

16.62

26

18.22

1.45

16

.53

„

17.34

8

18.54

1.60

15

.66

,,

17.52

i

18.49

1.70

15i

.67

„

17.75

18.83

1.90

14^
14j

.97

„

17.95

19.00

1.97

1.08

„

18.10

48

19.56

2.68

24

1.48

,,

18.38

9i-

19.52

2.50

14^
14|

1.47

„

18..38

OJ

19.48

2.40

1.53

„

18,58

9

19.73

2.60

15

1.54

,,

18.70

48

20.35

3.15

9

1.67

,,

19,15

24

20.86

3.40

15

1.75

,,

19.55

24

22.02

4.30

24

2.26

,,

20.12

24

21.86

4.20

9

3.97

,,

21.85

756

26.80

7.70

24

5.61

"

24.90

105

27.16

7.40

24

5.70

Note. — Tlie numbers in colu

mn 5 show the

set of the

beam imnicdiatclv

after the removal of the load, v

^hich was susj

ended fro

m the beam during

the number of hours given in co

umn 3.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES.

311

Series No. 3.

The results of the second series of experiments convinced the writer
that a perfect and dry spruce beam would in time break under a load
of only one half of its calculated breaking weight, but to make the
results more certain a third series was undertaken, with the same
object in view.

The pieces of wood tested in this series were to all appearance
equally as perfect and dry as those in Series No. 2. Table III. gives
the dimensions of the beams in this series, the moduli of rupture of
the first five pieces, and the ultimate deflection of all the pieces.

The average value of the modulus of rupture of the first five pieces
was taken as the basis from which the breaking weight of pieces
Nos. 6, 7, and 8 were computed.

Piece No. 6 of this series was broken by a load of f of its calcu-
lated breaking weight, 22 days after the load was applied. The deflec-
tions of this beam at various intervals during the 22 days are given
in Table VIU.

TABLE VIII.

Deflection of Piece No. 6, Series No. 3, under a Load of 399 lbs. or
I OF its Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

days.

mm.

days.

mm.

days.

mm.

0

19.12

5.5

25.31

17.5

31.53

0.5

21.53

6.5

25.40

19.5

38.84

L5

22.90

10.5

27.40

20.5

36.05

3.5

24.85

12.5

28.79

21.5

39.09

4.5

25.25

13.5

29.09

22**

40.82

* Broke within 12 hours.

The next piece of the series, No. 7, was subjected to a load of f of
its breaking weight, which it carried 24^ days, and then gave way as
the others bad done.

The deflections are given in Table IX.

312

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

TABLE IX.

Deflection of Piece No. 7, Series No. 3, tinder a Load of 401 lbs. or
§ of its Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

Time
applied.

Deflection.

days.

mm.

days.

mm.

days.

mm.

0

20.07

9.5

31.68

18.5

33.19

1.5

23.77

10.5

31.93

19.5

33.28

3.5

26.98

11.5

32.04

20.5

33.58

4.5

29.70

12.5

32.30

23

35.57

5.5

30.37

15.5

32.70

23.5

37.04

6.5

30 80

16.5

32.85

24.5*

39.80

8.5

31.40

17.5

33.07

* Broke within 12 hours.

Having proved that § of the so-called breaking weight of a beam
is more than it will carry permanently, the next beam was subjected
to only ^ of its calculated breaking weight.

This load was kept on the beam 49 days, during which time the
deflection increased from 13.4 mm. (0.527 in.) to 18.55 mm.
(0.73 in.) It was then necessary to remove the beam from the
machine, that the latter might be used for other tests. The " set " of
the beam on the removal of the load was 4.35 mm. (0.171 in.).

Seven days after the load was removed it was again put on the
beam, and allowed to remaia 77 days, when it was again removed,
that the beam might be put on a temporary frame and kept there,
with the same load suspended from it, until it broke.

The " set " of the beam on the second removal was only 3.76 mm.
(0.148 in.), being less than what it was after the first removal.

The deflections of the beam are given in Table X.

As this beam continued constantly to deflect, and as this increase in
deflection is still going on, it seems to the writer that it must ulti-
mately break under this load, for when the deflection reaches a cer-
tain limit it will, as is shown by the other pieces, rapidly increase
until it breaks.

Observations on Tables I., II., and III. Comparing Tables II.
and III., we find a great difference in the values of the moduli of
rupture for the two sets of experiments, although the planks from
which the pieces were cut were selected from the same lot of lumber
and dried the same length of time.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES.

313

TABLE X.

Deflection of Piece No. 8, Series No. 3, itn-der a Load of 301 lbs. ok
^ OF ITS Calculated Breaking Weight.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

days

0

1

3

4

6

8

10

11

12

13

mm.
18.40
15.03
15.51
15.58
16.34
16.52
16.53
l(i.66
16.83
16.79

days.
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
24

mm.
16.77
16.93
16.89
16.89
16.97
17.07
17.14
17.14
17.10

days.
25
26
27
29
31
33
88
45
49

mm.
17.14
17.17
17.41
17.51
17.59
17.70
17.97
18.45
18.55

After taking the last deflection the load was removed from the beam,
when the centre of the beam returned to within 4.35 mm. of its original
position. After 7 days the load of 301 lbs. was again put on the beam,
causing the following deflections : —

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

Time applied.

Deflection.

days.
0
1
3
5

10

13

18

mm.
13.20
14.25
14.61
14.90
15.25
15.37
15.73

days.
23
38
43
47
48
53
54

mm.
15.70
16.18
16.43
16.50
16.52
16.64
16.70

days.
69
63
66
68
71
77

mm.
16.84
16.95
17.05
17.11
17.15
17.32

The only reason which the writer can give for the low value of R
in the third series is that the plank was sawn from the outside of the
tree. It will be noticed that the values of It ran very high for the
pieces in Series No. 2, also that the average value of R for Series
No. 1 is only about 8 per cent less than that for Series No. 2, while
it is about 23 per cent greater than the average for Series No. 3.

This would lead one to infer that ordinarily dry lumber does not
have its strength materially increased by being kiln dried.

Comparing Tables I. and II., we see that the average value of the
modulus of elasticity for the beams of unseasoned spruce is fully as
large as that for the kiln-dried spruce. The beams in Table I., though
denoted as unseasoned, were fully as dry as timber which has been in
an ordinary building three months, but it was not artificially dried.

314 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

If we compare the ultimate deflections of all the pieces with
their moduli of rupture, we shall find as a rule that those beams
which were the strongest bent the most before breaking.

The values of £J in Tables I., II., and III. were computed from the

expression £J = . „ .^ , A denoting the deflection in inches. The
values of H were computed from the formula ^ = | j^,-

From further observations of the tables we shall see that the
deflections of Pieces Nos. 6 and 7 of Series No. 3 increased 100 per
cent ; or the deflection when the load was applied was only about
^ what it was when the beam broke.

Also that the deflection of Piece No. 9, Series No. 2, and of Piece
No. 8, Series No. 3, is much less than one half of what the ultimate
deflection would probably be.

Hence I think it perfectly safe to conclude that for spruce-beams
of small section a load which will produce a deflection of one half
the maximum deflection of the beam before breaking will ultimately
break the beam.

From a study of Tables VII. and X. it appears that a load of
one half the so-called breaking load of a beam does not injure the
beam when applied only for a short time; for it will be noticed that
for both Pieces No. 9, Series No. 2, and Piece No. 8, Series No. 3,
the deflection of the beam upon the second application of the load
was almost the same as upon the first application, the difference being
very slight indeed.

Effect of the " Annual Rings " on the Strength of a Beam.

After computing the moduli of rupture for the first five pieces of
Series No. 2, the writer was surprised to see that three pieces had
nearly the same modulus, and that the remaining two pieces also
agreed almost exactly, but that there was a great difference between
the moduli of the three and of the two pieces.

The writer could think of no reason for this phenomenon until he
examined the fractured section of the beams, when it was discovered
that in the three beams which had the high moduli the " annual
rings " were parallel, or nearly so, with the top and bottom surfaces
of the beam, while in the other two the " annual rings " made an
angle of about 45° with these surfaces.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 315

Conclusions.

The conclusions which may be drawn from the research here
described, the writer considers to be as follows: —

That for spruce beams of small section, selected from lumber which
has been moderately well seasoned and dried, the strength is not
materially increased by the timber being kiln dried ; that the modulus
of elasticity is not proportional to the modulus of rupture ; and that
the elasticity is not increased by kiln-drying the timber.

That with small spruce beams those which have the greatest
strength bend the most before breaking.

That when a load between h and J of the so-called breaking weight
is applied to a small spruce beam it produces a deflection which for a
few hours rapidly increases, until the beam has fairly settled under its
load ; from this time the deflection increases gradually uutil a short
time before breaking, when it increases more and more rapidly.

That a load of ^ of the so-called breaking weight if applied but for
a few days does not injure such beams.

That a load which will cause such a beam to deflect one half of its
maximum deflection before breaking will ultimately break the beam.

That under the most perfect conditions small spruce beams will
not permanently support a load of one half their so-called breaking
weight.

That the position of the annular rings in spruce beams of small
section materially afPects the strength of the beams, their strength
being the least when the rings make an angle of 45° with the top
and bottom surfaces of the beam.

The writer agrees with Prof. R. H. Thurston in considering 5 as
the least factor of safety which should be used for wooden beams
under an absolutely static load.

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XVIII
CONTRIBUTIONS TO AMERICAN BOTANY.

By Sereno Watson.

Presented May 5, 1882.

1. List of Plants from Southwestern Texas and Northern Mexico, col-
lected chiefly by Dr. E. Palmer in 1879-80. — I. Polypetalce.

Dr. Edward Palmer's present collection was made during the
last six months of 1879, mostly in the region lying northwest of San
Antonio, Texas, and along the routes from that place to Laredo and
Eagle Pass upon the Rio Grande, and during the following year in
the States of Coahuila and Nuevo Leon in Mexico. A nearly com-
plete set of these plants was sent to the herbarium at Kew, England,
and a partial list was there somewhat hastily made, which is the basis
of the present one. In addition, determinations are given of an
excellent collection made by Dr. J. G. SchafFner in the State of San
Luis Potosi (likewise partially named at Kew), as well as of some
plants received from Professor Alfred Duges of Guanajuato, and as
occasion serves the numbers of the previous collection of Parry &
Palmer in Northern Mexico are also cited. The numbers under
which Palmer's collection was distributed by him are included in
parentheses under the species. The Cactacece have been kindly
named by Dr. Engelmann, so far as their determination was possible,
and continual use has been made of the recent catalogue of the Mex-
ican flora by Mr. W. B. Hemsley in the botanical volumes of the
" Biologia Centrali- Americana " of Godman and Salvin, which has
proved a very material assistance.

Clematis Drummondii, Torr. & Gray. At Uvalde, Texas (3),
and Parras, Coahuila (1) ; also specimens with smaller leaves from
Laredo on the Rio Grande (2), nearly equivalent to C. nervata,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 317

Benth., which is a more silky -pubescent form, and the same as 2 Parry
& Palmer. The species varies considerably in the size and form of
the leaves.

Clematis PixcnicRi, Torr. & Gray. At Laredo, Texas (7), and
from several localities in Coahuila (4, 5, 6, 8), in as many different
forms, the last number corresponding to 1 Parry & Palmer, referred
to C. jiHfera, Benth., which is to be considered a synonym. This
polymorphous species, ranging from Western Illinois to Central Mex-
ico (Guanajuato, from Duges), is extremely variable in its foliage.
The leaflets, usually four pairs, may be either ternate or 3-lobed, or
all simple and entire, broadly ovate or cordate to lanceolate, and
usually acute, but sometimes very obtuse or long-acuminate. The
flowers vary from 9 to 18 lines in length.

Thalictrum strigillosum, Hemsl. At Lerios, Coahuila (9).
Apparently one of the more common Mexican species, and probably
to be identified with some older one. Ghiesbreght's specimen from
Chiapas, referred by Hemsley to T. longistyluni, also belongs here.
Dr. Schaffner collects in the San Miguelito Mountains two very dis-
tinct species which are not readily identified. Both are glabrous, one
having ascending peduncles bearing close heads of sessile triangular
carpels, which are li lines long, with thickened and rib-like angles, the
other polygamous, with long recurved peduncles and open heads of
2 to 9 pedicellate compressed carpels beaked with a long style.

Anemone Mexicana, HBK. Santa Rosa Mountains, Guanajuato
(Duges) .

Ranunculus geoides, HBK. A low species, silky-pubescent,
with the radical leaves 3-lobed. A single specimen was collected at
Guajuco, Nuevo Leon.

Ranunculus Hookeri, Schlecht. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (183 SchafFner) ; 6 and 1030 Parry & Palmer. This species, if
rightly understood, is a common one in Mexico. The mature carpels
have usually a few more or less prominent scattered tubercles upon
the sides.

Ranunculus stolonifer, Hemsl. Near Morales, San Luis Potosi
(185 Schaffner) ; 4 Parry & Palmer.

Ranunculus delphinifolius, HBK. In the San Miguelito
Mountains (184 SchafFner), and at Guanajuato (Duges).

Aquilegia longisstma, Gray, in herb. Somewhat pubescent
with silky hairs: stem three feet high: leaves deeply lobed with
narrow segments, glaucous beneath, green above : flowers " lake,
white, and straw-color," the lanceolate sepals broadly spreading, 12 to

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

15 lines long, the petals spatulate, about 9 lines long, the claw open-
ing by a narrow orifice into the very slender elongated sjjur, which is
4 inches long or more. — In the Caracol Mountains, south of Mon-
clova, Coahuila (10). Allied to A. ccerulea and A. chrysantha, but
distinguished from both by the narrower petals and the constricted
mouth of the much more elongated spur.

Delphinium leptophtllum, Hemsl. In the San Miguelito
Mountains (27 SchafFner) ; Guanajuato (Duges) ; 7 Parry & Palmer.

Delphinium azureum, Michx. Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (11).
Apparently not differing from slender few-flowered forms of this vari-
able species.

CoccuLus Carolinus, DC. San Antonio, Texas (12),

CoccuLus DiVERsiFOLius, DC. ( C. oUongifolius, DC.) Laredo,
on the Rio Grande, Texas (13). Both with oblong and with ovate-
cordate leaves, representing the two forms figured by Mo9ino & Sesse
and described by De Candolle.

Berberis Schiedeana, Schlecht. (^Mahonia trifolia, Cham. &
Schlecht.) In the Sierra Madre, forty miles south of Saltillo (14).
The specimens accord very closely with Schlechtendal's description,
except that the leaves are all trifoliolate, as in Schiede's original
specimens. The racemes are short, about equalling the petioles.
The Mahonia ilicina of Schlechtendal (Berberis, Hemsl.), at first
supposed by him to be this species, he afterward identified (Bot. Zeit.
12. 655) Avith B. pallida, Hartw.

Berberis trifoliolata, Moric. In the same locality (15), and
also at Lerios, forty-five miles east of Saltillo (16).

Berberis gracilis, Hartw., var. With the 5 to 7 leaflets often
rounded at base and the racemes shorter (1 or 2 inches long). In the
San Miguelito Mountains (711 Schaffner) ; 8 Parry & Palmer.

Ntmph^a ampla, DC. At San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila
(17), and at Monclova (18).

Argemone platyceras, Link & Otto, Icon. PI. Ear. Hort.
Berol. i. 85, t. 43. {A. hispida, Gray.) At Saltillo (19) ; 10 Parry
& Palmer. A probable variety was also collected at Parras (20),
with the large flowers of a decided pink color, and the seeds less than
a line long, scarcely more than half of the usual size.

Argemone fruticosa, Thurber. At San Lorenzo de Laguna,
Coahuila, in flower and fruit (21). The flowers, which have not
before been collected, are noted as sulphur-yellow, and are 2.V to 3
inches in diameter. The beaks of the sepals are large and conical,
terminating in stout rigid spines.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 319

BoccoNiA FRUTESCENS, Linn. At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (23).

HuNNEMANNiA FUMARi/EFOLiA, Swect. At Monterey, Nuevo
Leon (22) ; 1031 Parry & Palmer.

FuMARiA PARVIFLORA, Lam. At Saltillo (24) ; 9 Parry &
Palmer.

Nasturtium tanacetifolium, Hook. & Arn. At San Lorenzo
rie Laguiia, Coahuila (34), and near Corpus Cbristi Bay, Texas (35);
San Luis Potosi (148 Schaffner) ; 11 Parry & Palmer.

Arabis runcixata. Biennial, hirsute with simple spreading
hairs, low and branching : leaves runcinately lyrate, petiolate, the
lobes acute and acutely toothed ; lower leaves 4 inches long : flowers
small (1| lines long), on hispid petioles, the calyx glabrous: pods
ascending, an inch long by a line wide, beaked by the long style, few-
(about 10-) seeded : seeds elliptical, winged. — In shaded places about
San Luis Potosi (155 Schaffner). Allied to A. petiolaris, Gray.

Arabis Mexicana. Very slender, glabrous, decumbent : leaves
lyrately pinnatifid, the few lateral lobes narrow, distant, mostly
entire, the terminal one 2- or 3-toothed or - lobed : racemes elongated
in fruit, the flowers very small (a line long), white, on slender spread-
ing pedicels a line or two long : pods ascending, 5 to 8 lines long by
half a line broad, abruptly beaked by a rather conspicuous style, the
valves reticulately veined, obscurely 1 -nerved toward the base : seeds
in one row, round, narrowly wing-margined. — Near Guanajuato
(Duges), where it is popularly known as " Lantejuelilla," and consid-
ered injurious to cattle eating it.

Cardamine auriculata. Annual, erect or ascending, slender,
branching, a span high, very sparingly hispid : leaflets three {lairs,
petiolulate, ovate or the terminal one oblong-ovate, crenate, about
half an inch long or less, often with a small subsidiary auricle or
stipule-like leaflet on the lower side at the point of union with the
rhachis of the leaf : flowers white, 2 lines long : pods an inch long by
half a line broad, ascending on pedicels about 3 lines long, and attenu-
ate above into a long slender style. — At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (49).
Most resembling C. impatiens. The Cardamine Schnffneri, Hook. f.
in Hemsl. Diag. PI. Nov. 1 . 2, is the same as C. Gambelii, Watson.

Vesicaria purpurea, Gray. Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (29).
Flowers white, becoming pink. A low doubtful form, with yellow
flowers, was found in the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (28), and at Mont-
erey, Nuevo Leon (32).

Vesicaria argyrea, Gray. In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (30) ;
a slender form with narrow leaves, and a taller and stouter form with

320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

broader conspicuously toothed leaves. 25 Parry & Palmer, referred
to this species by Hemsley, is rather V. recurvata, Engelm.

Vesicaria Fendleri, Gray. ( F. stenophylla, Gray.) In the
Sierra Madre, Coahuila (31).

Vesicaria Schaffneri. Biennial, with several or numerous
ascending or decumbent stems, 6 to 15 inches high, simple or branched,
canescent throughout with a close scurfy pubescence : leaves linear-
to oblong-oblanceolate, obtuse or acute, entire or with one or two
teeth on each side, very variable in size (| to 3 inches long): petals
pale yellow or at length purplish, 3 lines long, twice longer than the
linear sepals : pod glabrous, globose (narrower at base when young),
about 2 lines long, very shortly stipitate, erect on the slender and at
length horizontal pedicel, which is about 4 lines long ; style about a
line long, — On mountains and in shaded places near San Luis Potosi
(150 Schaffner, in large part; 26 and 25J- mainly, Parry & Palmer;
mixed with V. argyrea). With the habit nearly of V. Gordoni, which
however, like V. argyrea and most of the allied species, has an evidently
stellate pubescence.

CocHLEARiA (?) Mexicana. Annual, erect and slender (6 inches
high or less), the stem branching above and puberulent : leaves shortly
petiolate, ovate, truncate or usually cuneate at base, sparingly toothed,
the cauline 6 to 1 2 lines long, including the petiole : flowers very
small, in a flexuose raceme, the yellowish-white spatulate petals
(a line long) twice longer than the green sepals : style very short,
and stigma capitate : pods glabrous, globose, nearly sessile upon
spreading pedicels (2 lines long), 1 to \h lines in diameter; valves
nerveless : seeds 4 in each cell, subglobose. — At Monterey, Nuevo
Leon (40). Referred with some hesitation to this genus (§ Kernera),
with which it accords as well as with any other. The filaments are
straight and naked, with conspicuous glands at base ; cotyledons
accumbeut.

Sisymbrium canescens, Nutt. Near San Luis Potosi (153
Schaffner). 683 Coulter, referred to S. streptocarpum, is the same.

Sisymbrium Coulteei, Hemsl. Near San Luis Potosi (154
Schaffner, in part, with the following) ; 14 Parry &, Palmer.

Sisymbrium Palmeri, Ilemsl. The typical form, with dense
hoary pubescence and undulate-toothed leaves, the lower lyrate.
Also var. elatius, Hemsl., taller (1 or 2 feet high), less canescently
pubescent and somewhat villous, the leaves thinner and greener, not
undulate, the lower large but scarcely lyrate, all strongly auricled ;
pods somewhat longer (9 to 12 lines) and pedicels rather shorter (2 to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 321

6 lines). Near San Luis Potosi (154 Schaffiier, in part) ; 13 Parry
& Palmer.

Erysimum asperum, DC. In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (48).

Thklypodium loxgifolium, "Watson. Hispid below with spread-
ing hairs : lower leaves unknown, the upper narrowly linear : sepals
glabrous, broad and very concave, 2 to 2!, lines long; petals a little
longer, oblong, scarcely narrower below: pod very slender, 1^ to 2i
inches long by ^ line broad, beaked by the slender style, spreading or
usually pendent upon the slender pedicel (3 to G lines long). — In the
San Miguelito Mountains (156 Schaffner, in part). This is 52 Ilart-
weg, 687 Coulter, and perhaps 22 Fendler.

Thkltpodium micranthum. {Streptanthus micranthus, Gray.)
Biennial, erect (2 to 3 feet high), more or less stellately pubescent:
lower and cauline leaves oblanceolate, sinuately pinnatifid, stellately
pubescent, attenuate to a petiole, the upper linear, entire, usually
glabrous: flowers smaller than in the last (1 to 1^> lines long), the
calyx glabrous or pubescent : pod slender, about an inch long,
sessile, nearly terete, the style very short and thick, ascending or
sometimes pendent, on pedicels 2 to 4 Hues long. — In the Sierra
Madre, Coahuila (37), and at San Luis Potosi (156 Schaffner, in
part). This includes 23 Fendler, 844 Wright, 610 Rothrock, and 281
Pringle, all of which have been referred to the preceding species,

Thelypodium auriculatum. {Sisymbrium auriculatum, Gray.)
In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (25), and at Lerios (50). The only
partially incumbent cotyledons, together with the characters of the
pods and flowers, and the general habit, seem to require the transfer
of this species to Thelypodium.

Thelypodium linearifolium, Watson. At Saltillo (36).

Eruca sativa. Lam. At Saltillo (2144), and near San Luis
Potosi (152 Schaffner) ; 16 Parry & Palmer.

Greggia camporum, Gray. At San Lorenzo de Laguna (27),
and Monclova, Coahuila (44), and at Monterey, Nuevo Leon (47). A
low form with narrow entire leaves was collected at Parras (46) ; 17
Parry & Palmer.

Syxthlipsis Beklandieri, Gray, var. hispida. More or less
villous, with little stellate pubescence, the ovary densely hairy, and the
pod more loosely so. — Near Corpus Christi Bay, Texas (26). This
is the same as 157 and 1417 Berlandier, from Laredo in Tamaulipas,
and appears to differ from the typical form only in the pubescence.

Synthlipsis heterochroma. Piocumbent and much resembling
ordinary forms of S. Berlandieri, more or less canescent with stellate

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 21

322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

pubescence, and sometimes sparingly villous : flowers bright yellow by
day, becoming brownish purple at night : ovary pubescent and more
or less villous ; pod round-obovate (2h to 4 lines broad), sometimes
shortly stipitate. — At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (3o). The pod of
S. Berlandieri is always sessile, and rounded or almost emarginate at
base.

Synthlipsis Greggii, Gray. At Parras (45) ; 18 Parry &
Palmer. 149 Schaffner, from the San Miguelito Mountains, has
usually shorter pods, sometimes scarcely longer than broad. Dr.
Gregg's original specimens include the same form.

Capsella pubens, Benth. & Hook. At Parras, Coahuila (39).

Capsella Mexicana, Hemsl. In swampy places near Morales
(147 Schaffner) ; 19 Parry & Palmer.

Capsella (?) ScnAFFNERi. Annual, glabrous or nearly so, erect
and somewhat branched mostly from near the base, 4 to 8 inches high,
the stem and branches angled and the angles usually slightly pubes-
cent : cauline leaves linear-oblanceolate, obtuse or truncate or retuse,
sessile, 4 to 6 lines long, entire or with a few short blunt teeth:
flowers white, the petals 2 lines long : fruiting pedicels ascending,
1-2^ lines long : pod shortly stipitate, oblong-lanceolate, somewhat
obcompressed, the valves strongly convex, more or less evidently
nerved and carinate, 1\ or 2 lines long and beaked by a slender
style \ line long: seeds 4 or 5 in each cell; cotyledons probably
accumbent. — San Miguelito Mountains (151 Schaffner). A plant
of very uncertain affinities, and perhaps belonging among the Sisym-
briece near Smeloivshia. The pod varies much, but is decidedly ob-
compressed when well developed, especially toward the base. In
the present uncertain limits of Capsella the species may as safely be
placed here provisionally as elsewhere.

Lepidium LASiocARPUir, Nutt. (Z. Wrightii, Gray.) Low (6
inches high or less), pubescent throughout with short spreading hairs,
the straight pedicels shorter than the pod, stout and much flattened. —
Var. tenuipes. Usually taller, more slender, and less jnibescent, the
pod glabrous : pedicels narrower and more slender, as long as or usu-
ally exceeding the pod. At Parras (41), and San Luis Potosi (145
Schaffner). The same as 21 and 22 Parry & Palmer (referred to
L. Menziesii), and 686 Coulter and 14 Bourgeau, in part (named L.
Virginicum), and of frequent occurrence through the interior north-
ward to Nevada and Southern Colorado. It has the habit of L.
intermedhan, Gray (23 Parry & Palmer), with which it has been
confounded, but is readily distinguished by the flattened pedicel. It

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 323

might be regarded as a distinct species, but is connected with L. lasio-
carpum by intermediate forms, such as those collected at Monterey
(38, 42), and 2-188 Berlandicr (L. ruderale, var. lasiocarpmn,
Engelm.).

LEriDiUM Mknziesii, DC. At INIonterey (43) ; San Luis Potosi
(146 Schaffner). Also 14 Rourgeau, in herb. Gray, mostly.

Cristatf.lla erosa, Nutt. At Lamar, on Copano Bay, Texas
(51). C. Jamf'sii, Terr. & Gray, may perhaps be distinguished by
smaller flowers and shorter pods (an inch long or less). The genus,
however, should be reduced to a section of Polanisia.

PoLANisiA UNiGLANDULOSA, DC. At Solcdad, Coahuila (52) ;
also San Luis Potosi (192 Schaffner), and Guanajuato (Duges).

Polanisia trachysperma, Torr. & Gray. At Laredo on the
Rio Grande (54), the typical form, with style 3 or 1 lines long and
seeds more or less roughened. Also in the mountains north of
Monclova, Coahuila (53), a common form with shorter styles (a line
or two long) and smoother seeds ; flowers white, becoming pink.

Oligomeris glaucescens, Camb. At Saltillo (1149).

Helianthemum Coulteri. Stems short (3 to 6 inches high), erect
from a branched and spreading woody caudex : leaves oblanceolate
(\ io \\ inches long by 2 to 6 lines broad), acutish, attenuate at base
to a very short petiole, rough above with a short stellate pubescence,
densely soft-tomentose beneath, conspicuously pinnate-veined : flowers
large (an inch broad), shortly pedicelled in rather close corymbs,
the acute sepals 3 or 4 lines long : capsule broadly triangular-ovate,
a little shorter than the calyx. — At Zimapan (743 Coulter) and in the
Morales Mountains, San Luis Potosi (COS Schaffner). It is referred
by Hemsley to H. arenicola, Chapm., which has narrower leaves,
softly pubescent on both sides and not evidently nerved, flowers on
longer pedicels and subumbellate, and capsule narrower.

Heliantiiemum patens, Ilemsl. In the San Rafael INIountains
(605 Schaffner) ; 30 Parry & Palmer.

Helianthemu.m glomkratum. Lag. In the San Miguelito IVfoun-
tains (137 Schaff*ner) ; 28 Parry & Palmer.

Helianthemum argenteum, Hemsl. In the San ^Miguelito
Mountains (606 Schaffner) ; 29 Parry & Palmer.

Lechea major, Michx. In the San Rafael Mountains (Schaffner).

Lechea Skin:neri, Benth. In the San Rafael IMo'mtains
(604 Schaffner) : 31 Parry & Palmer.

YiOLA FLAGELLiPORMTS, Ilcmsl, At Lerios, Coahuila (56), and
in the San Miguelito Mountains (182 Schaffner) j 1033 Parry &

324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Palmer. The flowers are described as " ro=ei " by Dr. Scbaffner.
36 Parry & Palmer, referred to V. pubescens, is the same, and
736 Coulter ( V. latistipula, Hemsl.) appears to be an undeveloped
form of it.

Viola Hookeriana, HBK. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(180 Schaffner) ; 34 Parry & Palmer.

Viola Barroetana, SchaiFn. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(181 Schaffner); 35 Parry & Palmer.

Viola cucullata, Ait. ? At Saltillo, a single fruiting specimen
with broadly deltoid leaves.

loNiDiuM VERBENACEUM, HBK. ? In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila
(55). These specimens accord nearly with the original figure and
description, except that the leaves are mostly opposite. It is however
described (not figured) as an annual, while this has an evidently
perennial slender rootstock. The flowers are purple. 660 Ghies-
breght, from San Cristobal, appears to be the same. I. (?) calceolarium,
Gingin, as represented in the drawing of MoQino & Sesse, is very
similar, but with an apparently annual root.

loNiDiDM POLYGAL^FOLiuM, Vent. Wilson County, Texas (57).
A puberulent form, with the stipules very small or obsolete. More
pubescent specimens, with somewhat smaller flowers and well-devel-
oped stipules, were collected at Monterey. This species seems to
include the original I. lineare of Torrey, and nearly all that has
been referred to it.

Amoreuxia Wrightii, Gray. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande
(58), in fine fruit. To this species belongs 37 Parry & Palmer, as
well as the specimens collected at Monterey by Eaton & Edwards,
and in Sonora by Thurber, all referred by Ilemsley to A. palmatijida,
DC, with which A. Schiedeana, Planch., is identified. Aside from
the ovate seed of the one and the reniform seed of the latter species,
A. Wrightii may be known by the five broader lobes of the leaves,
rather abruptly narrowed downward, the lower lobe often incised
on the lower margin, while the leaves of the other have seven or
nine lobes which are narrowed regularly to the base.

PoLYGALA LiNDHEiMERi, Gray. In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila
(2143).

PoLTGALA OVALIFOLIA, DC, At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (65) ;
43 Parry & Palmer.

PoLYGALA PUBERULA, Gray. In the mountains west of Saltillo
(64). Identical with specimens of Schiede & Deppe, referred to
" P. pubescens, Muhl." Also a form with larger flowers at Saltillo

OF AUTS AND SCIENCES. 325

(6G) ; 42 Parry & Palmer. 42i Parry & Palmer is the more fertile
form with nearly apetalous flowers.

PoLYGALA Palmeri. Perennial, branching, 6 to 8 inches high,
densely short-pubescent throughout : leaves scattered, oblong-oblauceo-
late, truncate and mucronate or abruptly acute, attenuate at base,
mostly 6 to 9 lines long by 2 or 3 broad: racemes open and few-
flowered : flowers pale greenish-yellow, 3 lines long, soon reflexed ;
sepals linear-lanceolate ; wings jjubescent and ciliate, ovate, acute,
cuneate at base, about equalling the crestless keel; petals oblong,
purplish : capsule flat, ovate, deeply emarginate, pubescent, 4 lines
long. — At Juraz, Coahuila. Nearly allied to P. Americana and
P. ptiberula, and much resembling forms of the latter species, but
more pubescent, and with larger flowers and fruit.

PoLYGALA OBSCURA, Benth. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon, spar-
ingly collected ; 41 and 44 Parry & Palmer.

PoLYGALA Greggii. Perennial (?), pubescent throughout, the
stems very slender and terete, flexuous above and branching, about a
foot high : leaves punctate, from oblong-spatulate to cuneate-obovate,
obtuse or emarginate, 3 to 5 lines long : flowers few, 2 or 3 axillary
near the end of a short leafy branchlet, white, 3 lines long; sepals
narrowly lanceolate ; wings slightly pubescent, cuneate-obovate, ex-
ceeding the narrowly oblong petals, which are longer than the keel
and adnate to it half its length ; keel without crest, the very broad
and rounded lateral ' margins folded back and covering the hood :
ovary pubescent, flattened, elliptical, emarginate. — West of Cerralbo
(Gregg). A strongly marked species of this group, remarkable for
the long petals and the broad reflexed margins of the keel.

PoLYGALA MACRADENIA, Gray. At Juraz, Coahuila (70) .

PoLYGALA ALBA, Nutt. In the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (G8) ;
39 Parry & Palmer. The lower leaves are often distinctly verticillate.

PoLYGALA SCOPARIA, HBK. At Lerios, Coahuila (69). This
is very probably also P. Mexicana, DC, but the drawing by Mo(;ino
& .Sesse is too poor for positive identification. 45 Parry & Palmer,
which is referred here, has very short round-quadrate capsules, but
still exceeding the petals.

PoLYGALA viRiDis. Minutely pubescent ; stems several, erect or
ascending from a biennial (?) root, 3 or 4 inches high : leaves scat-
tered, oblanceolate, acute, attenuate at base, 3 to 5 lines long by
H or 2 broad: racemes terminal or often lateral, open, ^ to at
length 2 inches long : flowers very small, nearly sessile ; wings spatu-
late (a line long), green with a white margin, exceeding the strongly

326 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

hooded keel ; petals broadly oblong ; crest broad, very unequally
2-lobed on each side : capsule glabrous, oblong, Ih lines long, slightly
inequilateral: caruncle of two linear lobes two-thirds of the length of
the pubescent seed. — On Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (2013). Very
nearly allied to P. scoparia. The crest is a broad triangular lamina
on each side of the median line, to which it is attached, with a narrow
lobe on the outer side.

PoLYGALA SEMiALATA. Glabrous ; stems numerous, very slender,
angled, from an apparently biennial root, 3 to G inches high : leaves
scattered, linear, acute at each end, 2 or 3 lines long : racemes termi-
nal, very slender and open (1 to 3 inches long), the very small
whitish flowers (little more than half a line long) nearly sessile and
soon pendulous; wings broadly spatulate; petals truncate, nearly
equallmg the fimbriately crested keel : capsule similar to that of
P. hemipterocarpa, but only 2 lines long, and the dehiscing cell more
narrowly winged. — At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (67). With P. hemi-
pterocarpa forming a section marked by the curious unequally devel-
oped fruit, one cell indehiscent and filled by the seed, the other
doubly wing-margined, dehiscing between the wings, and at length
unfolding.

Krameria cytisoides, Cav. {K. cinerea, Schauer.) In moun-
tains east of Saltillo (59); 1043 Parry & Palmer.

Krameria canescens. Gray. At Soledad, Coahuila (61).

Krameria pauciflora, DC. In the mountains east of Saltillo,
single specimens ; 38 Parry & Palmer. Distinguished from K. secun-
diflora, DC. {K. lanceolata, Torr.), as it is understood, by the uni-
formly shorter naiTowly lanceolate leaves (3 or 4 lines long), and
by the retrorse barbs along the more slender spines of the fruit.

Krameria ramosissima. Shrubby and divaricately much branched,
a foot or two high, canescent: leaves linear-lanceolate, 1 or 2 (some-
times 3) lines long, often fascicled in the axils : flowers " light maroon " :
fruit ovate, silky-pubescent, with slender very acute naked spines about
half a line long. — K. parvifolia, var. ramosissima, Gray, PI. Wright.
1. 41. On mountains near Saltillo (62) ; also on the Rio Grande
(Wright), at Camargo (Gregg), and in Nuevo Leon (Berlandier).

Frankenia grandifolia, Cham. & Schlecht. At San Lorenzo
de Laguna, Coahuila (60).

Silene laciniata, Cav., var. with ovate leaves. (S. Greggii,
Gray.) In the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (71). The form with
linear leaves, at the other extreme, is the more common ; in the San
Miguelito Mountains (609 Schaffner) ; 46 Parry &, Palmer.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 327

Cerastium nutans, Raf. At Lerios, Coahuila ; near San Luis
Potosi (143 Schaffher) ; 47 Parry & Palmer.

Stfxlaria cuspidata, "Willd. At Morales (124 SchafFner). The
identification of this species with the European ^S*. nemorum, Linn.,
is at least doubtful. It appears to have a more herbaceous and much
more pubescent calyx, the leaves broadest nearer the base, and the
seeds smaller and more coarsely tuberculate.

Stellaria ruosTRATA, IJuldw. At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (77).
Distinguished from the last by its annual root, more or less broadly
ovate acute and usually smaller leaves, smaller and more glabrous
calyx, and smaller seeds scarcely roughened on the sides.

Arenaria alsinoides, Willd. {A. diffusa, Ell. A. lanuginosa,
Eohrb.) lu the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (7G), and near Sau
Luis Potosi (135 SchafFner); 48 and bb}j Parry & Palmer. Also
var. angustifolia, with leaves very narrowly linear (^ to 1 line
wide), sometimes with broader ones at the lower nodes. A low form
of this variety, with mostly simple 1- few-flowered stems and short pun-
gent leaves, was collected at Saltillo. The species is very variable in
its southwestern range, sometimes developing a diffuse regular dicho-
tomously branched inflorescence.

Arenaria decussata, HBK. At Lerios, Coahuila (75), and in
wet shady places near Morales (138 Schaffner) ; Gl Parry & Palmer,

Lepigonum* Mexicanum, Hemsl. (under the «ame Spergularia) .
In sandy places near San Luis Potosi (137 Schaffner); 52 Parry &
Palmer. " Flowers pale yellow." Decidedly perennial, with a thick
perpendicular root. The various forms in Schaffner's collection show
that 58 Parry & Palmer (" S. neglecta?") is a stunted state of it.

Lepigonum rubrum, Fries. San Luis Potosi (137'' Schaffner).

Drymaria cordata, Willd. At Saltillo (79). Young speci-
mens of what appears to be this species, distinguished by the rounded
leaves, subtruncate at base, rarely at all apiculate at the rounded
summit, the inflorescence lax and few-flowered, and the sepals ordi-
narily quite glabrous, 1 to 1^ lines long, acute and scarcely nerved.
The stems are lax, from an annual root, at length rooting at the
lower nodes.

* Tliis generic name is retained for the reasons that are given by Kindbcrg
in his monograph of the genus. Stipularia, Haworth (1812), would strictly
have precedence, but was long overlooked (even by Bentham & Hooker), and
the name has been adopted for a Rubiaceous genus. Lepigonum was proposed
by Fries in 1817. Speigularia was first taken up as a generic name by Presl in
1819.

328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADExMY

Detmaria gracilis, Cham. & Schlecht. Stems very lax, from a
perennial root, glabrous throughout : leaves cordate or deltoid-ovate,
acute : inflorescence much branched and diffuse : sepals thin, nearly
nerveless, acute or acutish, 1^ to 2 lines long. — San Luis Potosi-
(130 Schaffner, in part) ; Guanajuato (Duges) ; also 57 Parry &
Palmer, 21 and 2659 Bourgeau, 706 (?) and 710 Coulter.

Drtmaria Fendleri. Annual ; the erect or ascending stems
and the petioles usually more or less pubescent : leaves broadly sub-
reniform-cordate or the base sometimes truncate, acute or shortly
acuminate : flowers on short pedicels and more or less fascicled, the
pubescent and somewhat rigid sepals long-acuminate, distinctly 1-3-
nerved, about 2 lines long. — From New Mexico and Arizona to
Central Mexico ; 60 Fendler (B. cordata, Gray, PI. Fendl. 13) ;
866 Wright, also Thurber and Bigelow (Z>. glandulosa, Gray, PI.
Wright. 2. 18 ; Torrey, Pacif. R. Rep. 4. 70, and Bot. Mex. Bound.
37) ; Greene, 42 Rusby, and 510 Lemmon ; near San Luis Potosi,
130 Schaffner, in part; Valley of Mexico, 552 (?) Bourgeau. Two
other species of this group, more or less confounded with the pre-
ceding, may be characterized as follows : —

Drtmaria villosa, Cham. & Schlecht. {D. pahistris, Cham.
& Schlecht.) Sparingly villous on the petioles, lower side of the
leaves, and calyx : stems very lax and slender, from a slender root-
stock, often rooting at the lower nodes : leaves subreniform-cordate,
abruptly short-acuminate : inflorescence very lax and open : sepals
thin-membranous, lanceolate, acute, 1 to 1^ lines long. — 944 Botteri ;
Sumichrast ; cult. Hort. Kew.

Drtmaria glakdulosa, Bartl. (D. ramosissima, Schlecht.)
Glandular-pubescent throughout: stems ascending or decumbent,
from a stout rootstock : leaves triangular-ovate, acute or acuminate :
inflorescence very diffuse : sepals rather rigid, lanceolate, acuminate,
1-nerved, 2 lines long. — 51 Parry & Palmer; 1308 Berlandier ;
Palmer (Carmen Island). The original of the species is described
as an annual.

Drtmaria suffruticosa, Gray, in herb. Suffrutescent at base,
much branched, nearly a foot high, smooth and glaucous : leaves
narrowly linear, 6 to 12 lines long: cymes few-flowered, terminal,
the flowers large and reflexed: sepals ovate or rounded, 2.V lines
long; petals included, fimbriately margined below, cleft above into
several linear lobes : capsule broadly ovate : seeds surrounded by a
conspicuous fimbriate crest. — At San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coa-
huila (74).

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 329

Drymauia poltcarpoides, Gray. At the same locality (73,
in part). Glaucous throughout : cymes terminal : seeds white and
shining, almost transparent. Very distinct from the next.
. Drymaria crassifolia, Benth. With similar glaucous foliage,
but the internodes elongated and the slender pedicels fascicled in the
axils : seeds nearly orbicular, dark brown, opaque. — Mixed with the
last under the same number, in the Gray Herbarium set.

Drymaria nodosa, Engelm., and var. angustifolia, Hemsl.
Near San Miguelito (1 40 SchafFner) ; 60 Parry & Palmer.

Drymaria arenarioides, Willd. (D. frankemoides, HBK.)
Near Morales (131) Schaflfner) ; 49 Parry & Palmer.

Drymaria xerophylla, Gray. Near Morales (131 Schaffner) ;
50 Parry & Palmer.

Cerdia purpurascens, DC. San Luis Potosi (128 SchafFner).

Cerdia glauca, Hemsl. In the Esculerillos Mountains (Schaff-
oer) ; 63 Parry & Palmer.

Cerdia gongestiflora, Hemsl. In mountains near San Luis
Potosi (Schaffner); 63|^ Parry & Palmer.

Achyronychia Parryi, Hemsl. At Lerios, Coahuila, a single
specimen ; 53 Parry & Palmer.

PoRTULACA PiLOSA, Linn. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande (2141),
and about San Luis Potosi (771 Schaffner) ; 66 Parry & Palmer.
Also a peculiar form, probably distinct, with a thick fleshy root,
small narrow leaves, 1 to 3 lines long, and very hairy in the axils,
smaller flowers, and lighter-colored seeds ; in the San Miguelito
Mountains (772 Schaffner).

Talinopsis frutescens. Gray. In San Luis Potosi Valley
(773 Schaffner) ; 67 Parry & Palmer.

Talinum aurantiacum, Engelm. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande
(2142), and San Luis Potosi (770 Schaffner) ; 68 Parry & Palmer.

Fouquieria splendens, Engelm. In the mountains east of
Saltillo (80), and at San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila.

Elatine Americana, Nutt. Near Morales (122 Schaffner).

Hypericum perforatum, Linn. At Sutherland Springs, "Wilson
Co., Texas (81).

Hypericum mutilum, Linn., var. (?) Leaves rounded to ovate-
cordate, clasping ; floral bracts narrowly linear : sepals very unequal,
spatulate to oblong-oblanceolate, obtuse or acutish, H to 2^ lines long,
exceeding the ovate capsule : seeds acutish at each end, light-brown.
— On Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (82). II. philonotis, Schlecht., is
probably H. mutilum.

330 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Hypericum denticulatum, HBK. About San Luis Potosi
(607 Schaflfuer, in part) ; 72 Parry & Palmer.

Htpeuicum pauciflorum, HBK. Specimens which agree fairly
with the original incomplete description of this species are collected
by Dr. Schaffner, together with H. denticulatum and the following
species. Parry «& Palmer distributed it also with the next as n. 73,
referred by Hemsley to H. fastigiatum, HBK. The whole plant is
glaucous, the stem 4-angled, simple, 6 to 15 inches high : leaves from
oblong-ovate or oblong-lanceolate below to linear above, ^ to 1 inch
long: flowers few (3 to 12) in a terminal cyme, rather large, the
lanceolate sepals 2 to 4 lines long, shorter than the petals : stamens
about 50 : styles 3 (rarely 4 or 5) : capsule attenuate upward, ex-
ceeding the calyx.

Hypericum Schaffneri. Pale green, not glaucous : stems 4-angled,
G to 18 inches high, branched above : leaves narrowly lanceolate, atten-
uate from a clasping base, |^ to 1 inch long : flowers numerous, often
lateral along the elongated branches of the cyme ; sepals linear, H to
2 lines long, a little shorter than the narrow petals: stamens 5 to 10:
styles very short : capsule oblong, acute or acutish, 2 to 2^ lines long. —
Mountains near San Luis Potosi (607 Schaffner, in part) ; 73 Parry
& Palmer, in part. Allied to H. paniculatum and H. fastigiatum.

Callirrhoe involucrata, Gray. At Lerios, Coahuila (86).
Also var. lineariloba. Gray, from the same locality (85).

Callirrhoe pedata. Gray. In Burnet and Wilson counties, Texas.

Malvastrum tricuspidatum, Gray. At Uvalde, Texas (104).

Anoda hastata, Cav. (Including A. cristata, Schlecht.) At
Soledad, Coahuila (106"), and near San Luis Potosi (159 Schaffner) ;
76, 77 and 78 Parry & Palmer.

Anoda parviflora, Cav. Near Morales (158 Schaffner). Most
readily distinguished from the last by the densely stellate-pubescent
fruit and yellow flowers.

SiDA HEDERACEA, Gray, var. With coarsely-toothed leaves. At
San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila (92).

SiDA FASCICULATA, Torr. & Gray. At Sutherland Springs,
Wilson County, Texas (91).

Sid A DIFFUSA, HBK. (S. JiUformis, Moric.) Both the typical
hairy form, from Sutherland Springs, Texas, and a rough-puberulent
variety, with broad-elliptical leaves, from Monclova, Coahuila (105) ;
also in the San Miguelito Mountains (167 Schaffner); 87 and 89
Parry & Palmer. This name is adopted in the Kew list, and three
seems to be no good reason for objection.

OF AKTS AND SCIENCES. 331

SiDA LiNDHETMERi, Gray. Sutherland Springs, Texas (102).

SiDA FiLiPES, Gray. At Mouclova, Coahuila (lOG).

SiDA TRAGi^EFOLiA, Gray. Mouutaius north of Monclova
(103).

SiDA piiTsoCALYx, Gray. At San Antonio, Texas (88), and at
Parras, Coahuila (87). Two other undetermined species of tliis
genus were collected by Schaffner in the San Miguelito Mountains
(IGO) and near Morales (1G2).

Abutilon Texense, Torr. & Gray. A small-leaved form, from
Laredo, on the Rio Grande (108). A variety (?) was collected by
Dr. Palmer at Sutherland Springs, and has also recently been found
by Dr. Havard in Western Texas, with large leaves roughish on the
nerves beneath, paniculately many-flowered, the calyx roughish-pubes-
cent and erect in fruit, and the carpels stellate-pubescent. In the
ordinary form the calyx is reflexed in fruit.

Abutilon hypoleucum, Gray. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (109),
and a variety from Caracol Mountains, Coahuila, with the carpels
less hispid (110).

Abutilon holosericeum, Scheele. At Soledad, Coahuila (111).
Collected also at Monterey by Berlandier (148 and 1408) and by
Eaton & Edwards. A variety (?), with the tomentum roughish
throughout and the leaves less acuminate, was collected at Mouclova,
Coahuila (112).

Abutilon crispum, Don. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(103 Schaffner).

Sph^ralcea hastulata, Gray. At Saltillo (a solitary speci-
men), and in the San Miguelito Mountains (165 Schaffner). Also at
Guadalupe, Texas, a variety with elongated pedicels (the same as
173 Berlandier), and in the mountains east of Saltillo a form with
shorter ovate or oblong-ovate subhastate leaves (93). This species
is distinguished from the next by its more slender habit, the several
decumbent stems from a slender perennial rootstock, and by the
larger calyx.

Sph^ralcea angustifolia, St. Ilil. The typical form of this
species, as figured by Cavanilles (Icones, 1. 48, t. 08), is received
from Duges at Guanajuato, with large oblong-lanceolate leaves 3 to 5
inches long and extending nearly to the top of the stem, the large
carpels rounded at the summit and not at all beaked, and their lateral
walls obscurely or not at all reticulated. This is strictly Mexican,
but does not appear in this collection, which includes instead several
forms of the common polymorphous variety that ranges northward to

332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Colorado, the S. stellata, Torr. & Gray. This is marked especially
by having the rather smaller carpels more or less rostrate, at least
when young, and their sides strongly reticulated toward the base.
It seems impossible, however, to draw a clear line between the two.
The leaves are usually serrate and mostly somewhat hastately lobed ;
mountains near Saltillo (94, 95, 9G, 98, 99, 100, 101), and at
Monterey, Nuevo Leon. A form with entire and less undulate leaves
was collected at Parras (97). The flowers vary in size, and in color
from salmon to pink and magenta. It is popularly known to the
Mexicans as " yerba del negro."

Pavonia LASiOPETALA, Scheele. (P. Wrightii, Gray.) At Uvalde,
Texas (89), and a form with more acutely and deeply-toothed leaves
at Monclova, Coahuila (90).

Malvaviscus Drummondii, Torr. & Gray. At San Antonio,
Texas (115). Known as "May-apple," and the scarlet fruit eaten,
both raw and cooked.

Hibiscus cardiophtllus, Gray. At Soledad, Coahuila (107).

Hibiscus Coulteri, Harv. At Saltillo, Coahuila (83).

Hibiscus denudatus, Benth., var. involucellatus. Gray. At
Monclova, Coahuila (84). Tliis is much the more common form.

GossYPiUM Barbadense, Linn. At San Lorenzo de Laguna,
Coahuila (116). " Considered by some to be indigenous."

Hermannia Texana, Gray. At Juraz (113).

Melochia pyramidata, Linn. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande
(117).

Ayenia microphylla, Gray. At Juraz, Coahuila (114).

CoRCHORUS piLOLOBus, Link. At Guadalupc, Texas (119), and
at Juraz, Coahuila (120.)

TiLiA Mexicana, Benth. On Caracol Mountains, near Mon-
clova, Coahuila (118).

LiNUM rupestre, Engelm. In the Sierra Madre, east and south
of Saltillo.

LiNUM Greggii, Engelm. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon. A single
specimen.

LiNUM RiGiDUM, Pursh. At Monterey (122). More glaucous
than L. Berlandieri, with narrower leaves and shorter calyx.

LiNUM Cruciata, Planch. At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (121).
Lower leaves very obtuse or slightly apiculate, only the uppermost
glandular-toothed.

LiNUM lecheoides. Erect, leafy, hispid throughout, the stout
purplish stems fastigiately branched toward the top, a foot high:

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 333

leaves sessile, narrowly oblong-lanceolate, acute, pubescent beneath,
glabrous above, 4 to 6 lines long: corymbs few- (1-5-) flowered:
sepals broadly ovate, acute, not ciliate, a line long or less ; petals
yellow, nearly twice longer : styles united at base : capsule ovate,
acute, equalling the calyx. — In the San Miguelito Mountains, near
San Luis Potosi (600 SchafFner).

LixuM SCABRELLUM, Plauch. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(603 Schailner).

LiNUM ScHiEDEANUM, Cham. & Schlecht. In the Morales Moun-
tains (601 Schaffner) ; 1034.^ Parry & Palmer.

LiNUM INIexicanuji, Kunth. At Guanajuato (Dugcs).

IMalpighia glabra, Linn. On Corpus Christi Bay (157).

Galphimia angustifolia, Benth. ( G. linifolia, Gray.) In
mountains north of Monclova (128) ; 94 Parry & Palmer.

HiR^A Greggii. a shrubby climber, rather sparingly tomentose-
pubescent : leaves opposite, ovate-elliptic, the uppermost oblong-ovate,
very obtuse or acutish to abruptly short-acuminate, obtuse at base,
somewhat pubescent beneath, roughish above, 6 to 18 lines long, the
short petioles often 2-glandular : pedicels elongated : calyx glandu-
liferous ; petals yellow, undulate-margined and somewhat erose : fila-
ments short and stout, nearly equal, united to the middle : samara
slightly pubescent, the lateral wings nearly semicu'cular, each an inch
broad, distinct above and below, the dorsal one much smaller. —
Near Monterey, Nuevo Leon (123), where it was also collected by
Dr. Gregg in 1847.

HiR^A LiLACiNA. A slender shrubby climber, somewhat pubes-
cent with straight appressed hairs attached by the middle : leaves
opposite, ovate to lanceolate, acute, rounded or cordate at base, on
slender glandless petioles : pedicels opposite in terminal or axillary
few-flowered racemes : calyx glanduliferous ; petals "blue" or "lilac,"
entire or shortly fimbriate above : filaments slender, united only at
base : samara hairy on the ventral side, orbicular-winged, the lateral
wings together 9 lines broad, the dorsal much smaller. — On Caracol
IMountains, south of Monclova (124) ; it has also been collected near
Palomas (328 Gregg), and at Rinconada (Dr. Edwards).

Gaudiciiaudia filipendula, Juss., var. (?) San Luis Potosi
(901 Schaffner), and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 95 Parry & Palmer.

AsPiCARPA IIYSSOPIFOLIA, Gray. At Monclova and the neigh-
boring Caracol Mountains ; scanty specimens.

AspiCARPA Hartwegiana, Juss. In the Sierra Madre, south of
Saltillo ; scanty specimens.

334 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

AsriCARPA LONGiPES, Gray. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(902 Schaffner).

Janusia gracilis, Gray. In mountains north of Monclova (126).

Tribulus maximus, Linn. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande (131),
and at Monclova, Coahuila (131").

Sericodes Greggii, Gray. The flowers are golden yellow and
fragrant. At San Lorenzo de Laguna (63), and at Soledad (321).

Larrea Mexicana, Moric. A variety with the leaves mostly
bifid at the apex. At Saltillo, Coahuila (132).

Porlieria angustifolia. Gray. At San Antonio, Texas (129),
and in the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (130) ; 97 Parry & Palmer.

Geranium Carolinianum, Linn. In the mountains near Penasco,
San Luis Potosi (190 Schaffner); 101 Parry & Palmer. Very
nearly the usual form of the species, with hairs sometimes spreading,
sometimes reflexed. 100 Parry & Palmer (the same as 389 Botteri
and 273 Bourgeau), referred to this species, is probably a stout large-
leaved form of the next.

Geranium Mexicanum, HBK. {G. Hernandezii, Engelm. in
Gray's PI. Fendl. 27, not DC.) San Rafael Mountains (188 Schaff"-
ner). Resembling the last, but with the more divergent lobes of the
small leaves less narrowly dissected, hairs reflexed, the pedicels, calyx,
and beaks of the fruit glandular-pubescent, and the calyx usually
smaller.

Geranium Hernandezii, DC. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(191 Schaffner). Well marked by the deltoid 3-lobed leaves, the
long middle lobe lanceolate.

Geranium Schiedeanum, Cham. & Schlecht., var. More or less
sparingly strigose-pubescent, the flowers sometimes yellowish-white.
At Lerios, Coahuila (137), and in the San Rafael, San Miguelito, and
Escabrillos Mountains (186, 187, 189 Schaffner) ; 99 Parry &
Palmer.

Geranium crenatum. Stems short from a branching rootstock,
little exceeding the radical leaves, and with the petioles covered with
soft spreading hairs : leaves appressed-pubescent, about an inch broad,
reniform-orbicular, about 5-cleft to below the middle, the broad lobes
shortly 3-5-cleft at the rounded summit and somewhat crenately
toothed : peduncles elongated, 2-o-flowered : calyx and pedicels villous
and glandular-pubescent, the sepals (3 or 4 lines long) very shortly
cuspidate ; petals rose-color, 8 lines long : fruit erect, an inch in
length. — At Lerios, Coahuila (136). The leaves resemble in out-
line those of G. molle and G. Pyrenaicum.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 335

OxALls CORNICULATA, Liiin. At Lerios (133), Saltillo (134),
and Soledad, Coahuila (135) ; San Luis Potosi (7G1 Schaffner, in
part).

OxALis Wkightii, Gray. At San Luis Potosi (761 Schaffner,
with the last). Closely resembling 0. comiciduta, hut distinguishable
by the thick fusiform root and usually more deeply-cleft leaflets.

OxALis DICHONDR^FOLIA, Gray. At Guadalupe, Texas (138).

OxALis DECAPHYLLA, IIBK. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(762 Schaffner) ; 102 Parry & Palmer.

Peganum Mexicanum, Gray. At Parras (150) ; 105 Parry &
Palmer.

Thamnosma Texanum, Torr. At Monclova (141) and Monterey
(140) ; 104 Parry & Palmer.

AsTROPHYLLUM DUMOSUM, Torr. In the mountains east of Sal-
tillo (139). The well-developed petals are oblong-lanceolate, 4 lines
long, glandular-punctate, and white or yellowish.

Xanthoxylum Pterota, HBK. At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (195).

Xanthoxyluji Clava-Herculis, Linn., var. (X macrophyl-
lum, Nutt.) With the leaves all trifoliolate. "West of San Antonio,
Texas (2125).

Ptelea angustifolia, Benth. At Saltillo, in flower (145), and
in the mountains east of that jilace, in fruit (146).

Ptelea trifoliata, Linn., var. mollis, Torr. & Gray. At
Georgetown and Bluffton, Texas (147, 148).

Helietta parvifolia, Benth. in Hook. Icon. PL t. 1385. At
Monterey (142) and in the mountains north of Monclova (143, 144).
Previously collected at Monterey by Berlandier (144 and 1404),
and referred to Ptelea parvifoUa, Gray (Hemsl. Bot. Centr.-Amer.
1. 170), which species rests upon Dr. Gregg's specimens only, collected
on the Buena Vista battle-field and east of Marin.

Casijiiroa edulis, Llav. & Lex. At Guajuco (149).

Castela Nicholsoni, Hook. At Laredo, Texas (152), and at
Juraz, Coahuila; 107 Parry & Palmer.

KcEBERLiNiA SPINOSA, Zucc. At Eagle Pass and Laredo, Texas
(151), and at San Luis Potosi (94 Schaffner) ; 106 Parry & Palmer.

Cedrela ? The lanceolate leaves with a long attenuate acu-

mination, and the flowers in a close cymose panicle. At Guanajuato
(Duges).

Ilex decidua, Walter. At Georgetown, Texas (153, 154).
ScHJEFFERiA cuNEiFOLiA, Gray. At Uvalde, Texas (155), and
westward toward Laredo.

336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Pachystima Mtrsinites, Raf. In the Sierra Madre, forty miles
south of Saltillo ; a few specimens apparently of this species, though
without flowers or fruit.

Llavea integrifolia, Hemsl. At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (182),
and in the mountains north of Mouclova, Coahuila (183).

MoRTONiA SCABRELLA, Gray. At Parras, Coahuila (2111).

MoRTONiA Greggii, Gray. A variety with narrow leaves and
glabrous or nearly so (^M. Falmeri, HemsL). In the Sierra Madre
south of Saltillo (323) ; also in the mountains east of Saltillo, very
sparingly. 558 Gregg is the same, though more pubescent. 3f. effusa,
Turcz., founded on 2119 Berlandier, must also be M. Greggii.

ZizYPnus OBTUsiFOLius, Gray. A variety with small coriaceous
glaucous leaves, from ovate to narrowly oblong, occasionally toothed,
and the inflorescence very pubescent. At Eagle Pass, Texas (168),
and at San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila (166).

ZizYPHDS LYCioiDES, Gray. At Lerios, Coahuila (167).

CoNDALiA SPATHULATA, Gray. At Eagle Pass, on the Rio
Grande (160, 164), and at Saltillo (162); 111, and 112 in part,
Parry & Palmer.

CoNDALiA OBOVATA, Hook. At San Antonio (161) and Uvalde,
Texas (163).

CoNDALiA Mexicana, Schlecht. In the Morales Mountains (93
SchafFner) and in San Luis Potosi Valley (1060 SchafFner) ; 112, in
part, and 113 Parry & Palmer.

MicRORHAMNUs ERicoiDEs, Gray. At Lerios (165).

Karwinskia Humboldtiana, Zucc. At Laredo, on the Rio
Grande (173), and on Corpus Christi Bay.

Rhamnds Caroliniana, Walter. Kendall County, Texas (172).

Adolphia infesta, Meisn. At Guanajuato (Duges). This is
probably the Colletia (?) multijlora of De Candolle.

CoLUBRiNA GLOMERATA, Hcmsl. (Barcetia Guanajuatensis,
Duges, Rev. Cient. Mex. 1. 8, t.) At Guanajuato (Duges).

CoLUBRiNA Greggii. An erect shrub, the branches pubescent :
leaves oblong-ovate to lanceolate, acute or acuminate, subcordate at
base, finely and acutely serrate, more or less rufous-tomentose beneath,
less pubescent above, 2 or 3 inches long : peduncles axillary, bearing
1 to 3 pedicellate globose (drupaceous) capsules, 3 or 4 Imes in
diameter : seeds dark brown, shining, with an obscure protuberance
on the back. — At Soledad, Coahuila (171), and at Monterey, Nuevo
Leon (154 Gregg). The fruit much resembles that of C. Texensis ;
the carpels separating to the base through the calyx and dehiscent to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 337

the middle, but with firmer walls ; the seeds are less turgid and more
shining.

Ceanothus azureus, Desf. (C. cceruleus, Lag.) Locality un-
certain (17G) ; 118 and 119 Parry & Palmer.

Ceanothus depuessus, Beuth. San Rafael Mountains (103
SchafFner) ; 122 Parry & Palmer, referred to G. huxifoUus.

Ceanothus Gueggii, Gray. A variety with the leaves white-
toraentose beneath, and occasionally with a few spinose teeth. At
Lerios, Coahuiia (175). Also the typical form from the Morales
Mountains (102 Schaffuer) ; 120 Parry & Palmer.

Ampelopsis pubescens, Schlecht. At Guanajuato (Duges).

ViTis INCISA, Nutt. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande (177).

ViTis ^STivALis, Michx. At Parras, Coahuiia (180), and in the
mountains near Saltillo (2126). — Also var. cinerea, Engelm. (?),
with different seeds from those of the jjreceding. Southwestern
Texas (178).

ViTis CORDIFOLIA, Michx., var. (?) Covered throughout with a
very short spreading pubescence, the leaves less acuminate and more
bluntly toothed than in the typical form. In the Caracol Mountains,
southeast of Monclova, Coahuiia (179).

Cakdiospermum Halicacabum, Linn. At Uvalde (185) and at
Sutherland Springs, Texas (3G6).

Cardiospermum molle, Linn. At San Luis Potosi (100 Schaff-
ner) ; 123 Parry &, Palmer.

Serjania (?) INFLATA. Branches herbaceous, elongated, puberu-
lent, the tendrils often not floriferous : leaves like those of Cardio-
spermum Halicacabum, somewhat pubescent : flowers in a small racemose
panicle, bicirrhose at base : petals 3 lines long : ovary about equalling
the pubescent style ; capsule an inch long or more, glabrous, thin-mem-
branous, resembling that of C. Halicacabum, but abruptly rounded
above, and the carpels attenuate downward and wing-margined below
the middle : seed solitary in each cell, attached to the middle of the
axis. — In the Caracol Mountains, Coahuiia (186). Closely allied
to 8. macrococca^ Eadlk,, and S. incisa, Torr. (^Paullinia subulata,
Gray), and intermediate between Serjania and Cardiospermum. It
would perhaps be better to refer all these species to the latter genus.

Serjania brachycarpa. Gray. At Corpus Christi Bay (125).

Serjania racemosa, Schum. At Guanajuato (Duges).

Ungnadia speciosa, Endl. At Saltillo, Coahuiia (187), and at
Guajuco, Nuevo Leon.

Sapindus marginatus, Willd. In Burnet County, Texas (184).
VOL. XVII. (n. s. IX.) 22

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Acer grandidentatum, Nutt. In the Caracol Mountains, Coa-
liuila, a single specimen of foliage only.

Nkgundo aceroides, Moench. At San Luis PotosI (88 Schaff-
ner) ; " a very tall tree in cultivated places."

DoDON.EA VISCOSA, Linn. At Monterey (127), and Guajuco,
Nuevo Leon (181); San Luis Potosi (97 and 709 Schaffner) ; 96
Parry & Palmer.

Rhus Copallina, Linn., var. lanceolata, Gray. At Uvalde,
and at Sutherland Springs, Texas (191).

Rhus MiCROPnYLLA, Engelm, At Sutherland Springs, Texas
(193), at Saltillo, Coahuila (192), and in the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (92 and 1061 Schaffner); 126 Parry & Palmer. A shrub 10
to 12 feet high, in the latter locality, popularly known as " Correosa."

Rhus pachtrrhachis, Hemsl. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(95 and 908 SchafTner) ; 125 Parry & Palmer.

Rhus virens, Lindl. At Uvalde, Texas (188), in the Sierra
Madre south of Saltillo (190), and in the Caracol Mountains, Coa-
huila (189).

Rhus Toxicodendron, Linn. At Uvalde, Texas (19-4) ; 124
Parry & Palmer.

P:sT.4.crA Mexicana, HBK. At Saltillo, Coahuila (196), and in
the Morales, San Rafael and San Miguelito Mountains, San Luis
Potosi (89, 90 and 91 Schaffner) ; 98 Parry & Palmer,

Crotalaria pujiila, Ort. Near San Luis Potosi (814 Schaff-
ner) ■, 127 Parry & Palmer.

Crotalaria euiocarpa, Benth. In the same locality (813
Schaffner). 128 Parry & Palmer is the same, referred to C. Maij-
purensis, HBK., but the pod is densely tomentose-villous, instead of
appressed silky-pubescent. 26 Ervendberg, referred to G. anagy-
roides, HBK., is rather C. Maypurensis.

LupiNUS EiiRENBERGir, Sclilecht. At Lerios, Coahuila (197),
and near San Luis Potosi (801 Schaffner), 132 Parry & Palmer.
This is also 61 Ilartweg, in part.

LupiNUS BiLiNEATUS, Beutli. {L. Hartwegi, Lindl.) At Guana-
juato (Duges). Known as " Elotitos" or " Yerba de San Marcos."

LuPiNUS Leonensis. Biennial (''), branching at the base and the
leafy stems decumbent (6 to 12 inches high), coarsely villous through-
out, the hairs appressed or somewhat spreading : petioles about twice
longer than the leaves ; leaflets 5, oblanceolate, acute, very silky
below and on the margin, glabrous or nearly so above, 6 to 10 lines
long or less; stipules linear-subulate, elongated: flowers blue, 5 lines

OF ARTS ajSD sciences. 339

long, scattered in a short raceme, on slender pedicels 1 to 1^ lines
long ; bracts lanceolate, deciduous, shorter than the calyx : calyx-tube
turbinate: pod linear, 4-G-seeded, 12 to 15 lines long by 3 broad. —
At Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (198).

Mkliloti's parvifloua, Desf. At San Lorenzo de Laguna,
Coahuila (I'JO).

Mkdicago minima, Lam. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (200).

TuiFOLiu.M amabile, IIBK. At Morales, San Luis Potosi (806
Schaffner), a narrow-leaved form, the var. longifoliolum, Ilemsl. ;
134 Parry & Palmer.

TuiFOLiuJi ixvoLUCRATmr, TVilld. In the mountains east of
Saltillo, scanty specimens; at Morales (807 Schaffner) ; 135 Parry &
Palmer.

TiiiFOLiUM ScHiEDEANUM. {T. rejlexvm, Schlecht. in Linna^a,
5. 576.) Perennial, cespitose and procumbent, pubescent: leaflets
from cuneate-obcordate to oblanceolate or rhombic-oblong, 3 to 8 lines
long : peduncles axiUary, exceeding the leaves : heads without invo-
lucre ; flowers rather few, pedicellate, becoming reflexed, 3 lines long :
calyx villous-pubescent, the very narrowly attenuate teeth twice longer
than the tube; corolla not inflated in fruit. — Jalapa (Schiede), and
at Lerios, 45 miles east of Saltillo (201). Allied to T. elegans and
T. hyhridum.

HosACKiA ANGUSTiFOLiA, Don. In the Morales Mountains, San
Luis Potosi (820 Schaffner) ; 140 Parry & Palmer.

HosACKiA PUBERCLA, Benth. Near San Luis Potosi, in sandy
places (819 Schaffner) ; 141 Parry & Palmer.

PsoRALEA RHOMBIFOLIA, Torr. & Gray. At Corpus Christi Bay,
Texas (223), and at Monterey, Nuevo Leon (222). Also a nearly
glabrous variety, with the heads of larger bracteate flowers more open
and subracemose; in the Sierra Madre, Coahuila (254),

Psora LEA pentaphylla, Linn. Near San Luis Potosi, in sandy
places (833 Schaffner) ; 142 Parry & Palmer. Known as " Contra-
yerba."

Eysenhardtia amorphoides, HBK. At Uvalde (204) and
Sutherland Springs, Texas (203), in the mountams west of Saltillo
(202) and at Soledad, Coahuila (2114) , also at Guanajuato (Duges).

Eysenhardtia ortiiocarpa. {E. amorphoides, var. orthocarpa,
Gray, PI Wright. 2. 37.) A tree, 10 to 15 feet high, distinguished
from the last by the more numerous leaflets (10 to 23 pairs), and by
the larger (5 to 8 lines long) straight pendent pods. — In New Mex-
ico (98 and IIG "Wright), Arizona (Pringle), near San Luis Potosi

340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

(143 Parry & Palmer, 782 Schaffner) ; also 82 Bourgeau, 108 Bili-
mek, 15 and 230 Ervendberg, and collected by Seemann — all referred
to the last species, which has 5 to 14 (usually 10) pairs of leaflets, and
shorter (3 to 4 lines long) erect curved pods.

Dalea pogonatheija, Gray. In Wilson County, Texas (221),
at Monclova (21 G) and Soledad, Coahuila (220), and at Monterey,
Nuevo Leon (219) ; 163 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea lasiathera, Gray. In the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila
(225), and at Guajuco, Nuevo Leon (224).

Dalea tuberculata, Lag. At Saltillo, Coahuila (2113), in the
San Miguelito Mountains, with white flowers (784 Schaffner), and in
the mountains near San Luis Potosi, with purple flowers (783 Schaff-
ner) ; 156, 157, 158 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea trifoliolata, Moric. {D. triphylla, Schlecbt.) Near
San Luis Potosi, in sandy places (795 Schaffner), and at Guanajuato
(Duges) ; 165 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea Berlaxdieri, Gray. In the Sierra Madre, south of
Saltillo (209).

Dalea lasiostachts, Benth. Near San Luis Potosi, in shady
woods (788 Schaffner) ; 149, 150, 155 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea leucostoma, Schlecht. At Lerios, Coahuila, a single
specimen, and near San Luis Potosi (789 Schaffner) ; 153 Parry &
Palmer.

Dalea ramosissima, Benth. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(785 Schaffner) ; 154 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea alopecuroides, Willd. Near San Luis Potosi (791 and
1058 Schaffner), and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 144 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea pecttnata, Benth. Near San Luis Potosi (790 Schaff*-
ner) ; 146 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea citriodora, Willd. Near San Luis Potosi (792 Schaff-
ner) ; 145 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea aurea, Nutt. In the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (226) ;
a variety with the bracts more acuminate than in the typical form.

Dalea nana, Torr. In the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (228),
at Monclova (227), and at Soledad, Coahuila (217), and at Monterey,
Nuevo Leon (218).

Dalea eriophylla. Dwarf (6 inches high), frutescent, repeat-
edly branched and very leafy, covered throughout with a dense fine
white tomentum : leaves trifoliolate, the oblong leaflets about a line
long ; petioles short : flowers in small dense terminal sessile heads :
calyx very densely white silky-villous, 1^ lines long, the lanceolate

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 341

acuminate teeth as long as the tube ; corolla rose-color, 3 lines long. —
In the Sierra Madre, forty miles south of Saltillo (211). Allied to
D. Greggii.

Dalka roLYCKPiiALA, Benth. In the same locality (208), also in
the Escobrillos and San Rafael Mountains, San Luis Potosi (786 and
787 Schaffner) ; IGO Parry & Palmer.

Dalea Wkigiitii, Gray. In the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila
(229) ; 1G2 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea Luisana. Perennial, herbaceous, the slender sparingly
branched stems decumbent or ascending (2 to G inches long), covered
throughout with an appressed silky pubescence : leaves few, trifolio-
late : leaflets about equalling the petioles, linear-oblong, obtuse or
acutish, glabrous above or nearly so, 3 to 9 lines long by 1 or 1 1
wide: flowers in close sessile heads (the rhachis at length 3 to 9 lines
long) ; bracts silky, ovate, acuminate, equalling the very villous calyx :
calyx-teeth filiform, bearded, exceeding the tube and equalling the
yellow corolla (2 or nearly 3 lines long). — In the San Miguelito
Mountains (808 Schaffner) ; it is also 164 Parry & Palmer, referred
to D. Wrightii.

Dalea Greggii, Gray. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (213); 147,
152 Parry & Palmer, and 1048, in part. 148 Parry & Palmer, with
a part of 1048, referred to D. pulchella, is some other unrecognized
species.

Dalea mollis, Benth. In the mountains north of Monclova
(215); 161 Parry & Palmer.

Dalea frutescens, Gray. In Wilson County, Texas (207), in
the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (206), and at Juraz, Coahuila
(205), ard at Monterey, Nuevo Leon (212). Also a variety with
elongated loosely flowered spikes, the calyx slightly more pubescent,
and the larger petals 4 to 6 lines long, changing from creamy white to
pale rose-color; in the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (210).

Dalea radio ans. Frutescent, glabrous, much branched, the
slender stems short and erect or elongated and trailing and occasion-
ally rooting: leaves half an inch long or less, the leaflets (6 to 9 pairs)
very narrowly linear, obtuse, 1 or 2 lines long: spike nearly sessile,
open, few- (rarely 10-) flowered: calyx as in D. frutescens, villous in
the throat, but the triangular teeth longer and more acuminate, half
the length of the tube ; corolla 3 lines long, magenta. — In the Sierra
Madre, south of Saltillo (214). Nearly allied to D. frutescens.

Petal OSTEMON obovatus, Torr. & Gray. Neai' San Antonio,
Texas (230).

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Indigofera Lindiieimeriana, Scheele. At Uvalde, Texas (232),
and in the mountains north of Mouclova, Coahuila (233).

Indigofera lepposepala-, Nutt. Near San Antonio (231), and
in Wilson County, Texas (253). This is also 20 and 27 Eivendberg,
referred to /. suhulata. — Var. brevipes. With short peduncles not
exceeding the leaves, and very short few-flowered racemes scarcely
elongated in fruit, and the petals but little longer than the calyx-lobes ;
leaflets as in the typical form, 3 to 9, oblong-obovate to oblanceolate,
pubescent on both sides. In the San Rafael Mountains (818 Schaff-
ner) ; 138 and 139 Parry «fe Palmer, — Var. (?) angustata. Re-
sembling the last variety in the shortness of the peduncle, but the
leaflets narrower and more numerous (5 to 16), mostly linear, acute
or obtuse, glabrous above. Near Morales (817 ScliafFner).

Brongniartia intermedia, Moric. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (828 Schaffner).

Peteria scoparia, Gray, var. glandulosa, Gray, in herb. Low
(6 to 12 inches high or less), from a thick tuberous root, with numer-
ous spreading branches, and the inflorescence very viscid pubescent (as
in P. Thompsonce) : leaves 6 to 12 lines long: seeds numerous and
more turgid. — Near San Luis Potosi (834 Schaffner); 172 Parry
& Palmer. Probably distinct. The root is esculent, and known
under the name of " Camote del monte."

Tephrosia tenella. Gray (?) At Soledad, Coahuila (257).
Closely resembling this species, excej'jt that it appears to be perennial,
the several herbaceous stems ari.sing from a rather thick rootstock.

Tephrosia Lindheimeri, Gray. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande
(258).

Sesbania macrocarpa, Muhl. At San Antonio (278, mainly).

Sesbania Cavanillesii, Watson. {Dauhentonia longifolia, DC.)
At San Antonio, Texas — fruit only, distributed with the last. 209
Parry & Palmer belongs to this species, not to S. longifolia, DC,
which according to the description is very different.

Astragalus Humboldtii, Gray. At Lerios (240), at Parras
(242), and in the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (241), the latter
with somewhat shorter calyx-teeth; 170 and 171 Parry & Palmer.

Astragalus ortiianthus, Gray. In the Sierra Madre, south of
Saltillo (243, 2137).

Astragalus Brazoensis, Buckl. Between the Rio Frio and the
Nueces, Texas (244).

Astragalus diphacus. Biennial or perennial, canescently puber-
ulent : stipules distinct, lanceolate; leaves 2 to 4 inches long; leaflets

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 343

6 to 12 pairs, linear to narrowly oblong-lanceolate, obtuse, glabrous
above, 3 to 8 Hues long : racemes short and dense, 1 or 2 inches long
in fruit, or less, on elongated peduncles : calyx campanulate, 2 lines
lung, the narrowly acuminate teeth little shorter than the tube ;
corolla whitish, 3 or 4 lines long: pod coriaceous, sessile, 2-celled,
compressed-subglobose and somewhat didymous, 3 or 4 lines long,
slightly pubescent, at length reticulately veined. — In the San
Miguelito Mountains (816 Schaffner, mainly).

Astragalus Hartwegi, Benth. (A. vaccanim, Gray.) At San
Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila (235).

Astragalus Nuttallianus, DC. At Monterey (237).

Astragalus leptocarpus, Torr. & Gray. At Monterey, a
single specimen, and near San Luis Potosi (822 Schaflfner) ; 176
Parry & Palmer.

Astragalus Arizonicus, Gray. At Parras, Coahuila (234).
Stems more erect than usual.

Astragalus Greggii. Apparently biennial or perennial, the
slender stems ^ to 1 foot long or more, densely pubescent with white
spreading or reflexed hairs: stipules triangular, surrounding the stem;
leaves 1 to 1^- inches long; leaflets 4 to 8 pairs, obovate to oblong,
obtuse or truncate or retuse, tomeutose-pubescent or nearly glabrous,
1 to 3 lines long : peduncles elongated, tomentose ; raceme loosely
few-flowered : calyx tomentose, the long-acuminate teeth exceeding
the short campanulate tube ; corolla 4 lines long, red and white : pod
chartaceous, completely 2-celled by the intrusion of the dorsal suture,
sessile, ascending or spreading, linear-oblong, compressed, slightly
curved, glabrous, 6 to 9 lines long. — In the mountains east of Saltillo
(238) ; also collected by Gregg (439), the locality not stated.

Astragalus strigulosus, HBK., var. gracilis, Hemsl. In
the San Miguelito Mountains (821 Schaffner) ; 175 Parry & Palmer.

Astragalus parvus, Hemsl. Much larger specimens than the
original, the ascending or erect stems a foot high or less; leaflets
linear to linear-oblong, 2 to 6 lines long. In the San Miguelito
Mountains (815 Schaffner); 174 Parry & Palmer.

Astragalus triflorus, Gray. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (816 Schaffner, in part) ; 173 Parry & Palmer.

Astragalus Antoninus. Biennial, canescent with short appressed
pubescence, the slender ascending stems flexuous, i to 1 foot high :
leaves 2 or 3 inches long; leaflets 6 to 9 pairs, linear to narrowly
oblong, obtuse, 4 to 6 lines long: peduncles elongated; racemes open,
few-flowered : calyx pubescent, tubular-campanulate, 3 lines long, the

344 PUOCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

short acuminate teeth hardly half the length of the tube ; corolla rose-
color, G lines long : pod ascending, coriaceous, oblong-ovate and turgid,
abruptly contracted to a very short stipe, 1 -celled, with neither suture
intruded or the dorsal slightly impressed, about 8 lines long, straight,
subpubescent. — In the Sierra Madre, south of Saltillo (239), and
also collected by Dr. Gregg (363) at San Antonio de las Alanganes.
It belongs to the group Scytocarpi, and is apparently allied to A.
coriaceus, Hemsl.

NissOLiA WiSLiZENi, Gray. In the San Miguelito and San Rafael
Mountains (793 and 794 Schaffner).

NissoLiA PLATTCALYX. Somewhat tomentose-pubescent : leaflets

2 or 3 pairs, oblong to oblong-obovate, obtuse or retuse, mucronate,

3 to 6 lines long : calyx-tube broadly campanulate, 2 to 2^ lines long,
the filiform teeth nearly as long ; corolla greenish yellow, 8 lines
long, the standard pubescent : ovary glabrous at base, finely pubescent
above: fruit glabrous or nearly so, 1-3-jointed, 1 to 1| inches long,
the joints rather strongly 3-costate on each side, the upper one with a
curved wing 9 to 12 lines long by 5 or 6 lines broad, thickened on the
dorsal edge. — In tlie mountains east of Saltillo (248, in part). Under
the same number were distributed specimens of another unrecognized
species, with the round-elliptical to ovate leaflets less pubescent, as
well as the petioles, the calyx-tube only a line long, and the ovary
and fruit pubescent and villous with scattered yellow hairs.

Stylosanthes mucronata, Willd. In the San Miguelito
Mountains (800 Schaffner). Agreeing closely with this East Indian
species, which differs from S. procumhens, Sw., in its pubescence, and
in the form and size of the pod.

ZoRNiA TETRAPHYLLA, Michx. Wilson County, Texas (245).

ZoRNiA DiPHYLLA, Pers. At San Luis Potosi (805 Schaffner);
196 Parry & Palmer.

Desmodium viRiDiFLORUM, Beck. In the Caracol Mountains,
Coahuila (246).

Desmodium psilophyllum, Schlecht. In the same locality (2136),
a variety with broader leaves (4 to 6 lines wide) and verging towards
D. Wrightii, Gray, which is very variable in its foliage, and apparently
to be united with the present species.

Desmodium Palmeri, Hemsl. Near San Luis Potosi (796 Schafi-
ner, in part) ; 179 Parry & Palmer, mixed with D. Parryi in the
Gray Herbarium set.

Desmodium spirale, DC. Same locality (796 Schaffner, in part) ;
181 Parry & Palmer.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 345

Desmodium Wislizexi, Eiigelm. With the preceding and distri-
buted under the same number; the same as 180 Parry & Palmer.
Differing from D. spirale in its perennial root and more or less abun-
dant spreading pubescence.

Des.modium Parryi, Hemsh In the San Miguelito Mountains
(797 Schaffner, in part) ; 178 Parry & Palmer.

Dksmodium gracile, Mart. & Gal. (?) With the last (797
Schaffner, in part). Flowering specimens, which agree fairly with
the description.

Desmodium molliculum, DC. At San Rafael, in woods (798
Schaffner). Leaves varying from orbicular to ovate, and from half
an inch to over 2 inches long.

Desmodium orbiculare, Schlecht. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (799 Schaffner) ; 177 Parry & Palmer.

Lespedeza repens, Barton. At Sutherland Springs, Texas (250),
and in the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (249).

ViciA Americana, Linn., var. linearis, Watson. In the Cara-
col Mountains (247).

ViciA PULCHELLA, HBK. At Lerios, Coahuila (2135), and in
the San Rafael Mountains (823 Schaffner).

Lathtrus parvifolius. Glabrous throughout; stem rather
stout, tall, not winged : stipules more or less broadly semisagittate ;
petiole tendril-bearing ; leaflets 4 to 6 pairs, rhombic-oblong to ovate,
acute, 6 to 12 lines long: peduncles exceeding the leaves, loosely 6-
12-flo\vered: calyx-teeth triangular, much shorter than the tube;
corolla purple, 6 to 8 lines long : pod sessile, linear, 2 inches long by
about 3 lines broad. — In the San Miguelito Mountains, San Luis
Potosi (812 Schaffner) ; 197 Parry & Palmer, referred to L. venosus.

CoLOGANiA HUMiFUSA, Hcmsl. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(803 Schaffner) ; 194 Parry & Palmer.

CoLOGANiA LONGiFOLiA, Gray. At LeHos, Coahuila (251). The
same as 189 Parry & Palmer, referred to C. angustifolia, from which
it is distinguished only by the closely appressed pubescence and
straight pod.

CoLOGANiA PULCHELLA, HBK. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(804 Schaff"ner) ; 192 Parry & Palmer.

CoLOGANiA Martia. Stems very slender, from a thick rootstock,
trailing, a foot long or less, retrorsely strigose-pubescent : leaflets
oblonjr (4 to 12 lines long by 2 to 4 wide), or the lower oblong-obovate
or elliptical, glabrous above and strigose beneath, usually very obtuse
or retuse : flowers purple, an inch long or more, on rather long pedi-

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

eels (3 to 15 lines), solitary or in pairs in the axils; calyx appressed-
pubi'sccnt, half au inch long: pod nearly straight, an inch long. — In
sandy places about San Luis Potosi (802 Schaffner). It is also 191
and 193 Parry & Palmer, the former number representing the cleisto-
gamoiis form upon which Zuccarini founded the genus Mariia. In
tliis the flowers are nearly sessile, the petals wanting, and the calyx
very much reduced.

Erythrina coralloides, DC. In mountains near San Luis
Potosi (96 Schaffner). Known as " Colorin."

Apios tuberosa, Moench. At Sutherland Springs, Texas (2134).

Galactia. brachystachys, Benth. At Saltillo, Coahuila (252).

Galactia marginalis, Benth. At Corpus Christi Bay, Texas ;
scanty specimens. The tuberous roots are said to be much relished as
food.

Canavalia villosa, Benth. In the Caracol Mountains, south of
Monclova (259).

PiiASEOLUs ATROPURPUREUS, DC. In the mountains north of
Monclova (262).

PiiASEOLUS DiVERSiFOLius, Pers. At Laredo, Texas (263).

PiiASEOLUS RETUSUS, Benth. Near San Luis Potosi, in sandy
places (825 Schaffner) ; 185 Parry & Palmer. The root is described
as tuberous, and the stems prostrate, 15 to 20 feet long.

PiiASEOLUS iiETEROPHYLLUS, Willd. lu the Same locality (811
Schaffner, in part) ; 187 Parry & Palmer.

PiiASEOLUS (Drepanospron) polymorpiius. Stems from an
esculent tuberous root, 3 feet long or more, glabrous or nearly so :
leaves (usually ^ to 1 inch long, sometimes 2 or 3 inches long) has-
tately lobed (the lower rarely ovate), the terminal lobe from short-
triangular (or sometimes obsolete) to oblong or linear, acute, the
lateral short or elongated, obtuse or truncate or acute : peduncles ex-
ceeding the leaves, few-flowered : bracts small ; bractlets firm and
persistent, ovate, nerved, a little shorter than the calyx ; pedicels 1 or
2 lines long : petals greenish white, 3 or 4 lines long : pod 1 .V inches
long by 4 lines broad, 2-4-seeded. — About San Luis Potosi (811
Schaffner, mainly) ; also 186 and 188 Parry & Palmer. ]Much re-
sembling P.Jiliformis, Benth., which is an annual, with smaller calyx
and bractlets, and much smaller pods. It is similar also to P. Wrightii,
Gray, which has, however, very narrow thin and deciduous bractlets.

PiiASEOLUS (Drepanospron) scabrellus, Benth. in herb.
Gray. Stem and petioles pubescent : stipules triangular ; leaves 1 to
li inches long, scabrous above, more or less hastate (or sometimes

OF ARTS AxND SCIENXES. 347

deltoid-ovate), truncate at base, acute, the middle lobe triangular to
oblong, the basal rounded to quadrate : peduncles exceeding the leaves
and with the inflorescence nearly glabrous ; raceme open, the very-
slender pedicels 3 to G lines long ; bracts and bractlets very small :
corolla purplish, 5 or 6 lines long : ovary densely silky-pubescent ;
pod falcate, H inches long by 4 lines wide. — In the Caracol Mountains,
Coahuila (2122) ; also collected by Coulter in Sonora Alta (without
number in herl). Gray).

Phaseolus multiflorus, Willd. (?) In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (824 Schaffner). Flowers scarlet; known as " Frijol del monte."

PiiASKOLUS ? At Soledad, Coahuila (2G1). Probably an

undescribed species.

Rhynchosia. Texana, Torr. &. Gray. At Lerios, Coahuila (25G),
and in the San Miguelito Mountains (835 Schaffner) ; 190 Parry &
Palmer. This species has been referred to the South American /?.
Senna, but the reason is not apparent.

Rhynchosia minima, DC. At San Antonio, Texas (2G0).
Rhynchosia macrocarpa, Benth. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (826 Schaffner) ; 184 Parry &, Palmer.

Rhynchosia phaseoloides, DC. In the Santa Maria del Rio
Mountains (827 Schaffner).

Sophora sericea, Nutt. At Lerios, Coahuila (264) ; 199 Parry
& Palmer.

Sophora secundiflora, Lag. At Uvalde, Texas (266), and at
Monterey, Nuevo Leon (265), and a form, densely white-silky through-
out, at Parras, Coahuila (2133) ; 200 Parry & Palmer.

CiESALPiNiA Mexicana, Gray. At Monterey (282) ; 1054
Parry & Palmer. C. exostemma, DC, is very similar, but has a
firmer calyx with broader lobes, and stamens nearly twice longer than
the corolla.

HoFFMANSEGGiA STRiCTA, Benth. At Saltillo (267) and Parras,
Coahuila (268), and near San Luis Potosi (832 Schaffner) ; 202
Parry & Palmer. The tuberous roots are edible, and known as
" Camote del raton."

HoFFMANSEGGiA GRACILIS. Hcrbaceous, low (about 4 inches
high) , very slender, puberulent but not glandular nor villous : pinnaj
1 to 3 pairs, with an odd one ; leaflets 5 to 8 pairs, oblong, about 2
lines long, nearly glabrous : raceme loosely flowered : calyx finely
puberulent : pod linear-oblong, very acute, slightly curved, 9 to 12
lines long by about 2 lines broad, 6-9-seeded. — In the Sierra Madre,
south of Saltillo (275). Allied to II. oxycarpa.

348 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Pakkinsonia Texana, Watson. At Uvalde (270), and Eagle
Pass, Texas (271).

Parkixsonia aculeata, Linn. At San Antonio, Texas (272) ;
203 Parry & Palmer.

Cassia leptocarpa, Benth. Near San Luis Potosi (830 Schaff-
ner), and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 204 Parry &, Palmer.

Cassia Rcemeriana, Scheele. At Sutherland Springs (280).

Cassia pumilio, Gray. At Laredo, on the Rio Grande (273) ;
210 Parry & Palmer.

Cassia bauhinioides, Gray. At Monclova, Coahuila (274), and
at San Luis Potosi (831 Schaffner) ; 206 Parry & Palmer. Also a
villous and densely silky variety, with longer slender style, and the
rather straighter pod with a longer beak ; at San Lorenzo de Laguna
(2134) ; 244 Gregg, from Saltillo, is the same.

Cassia Lindheimeriana, Scheele. At San Antonio (276).

Cassia occidentalis, Linn. At San Antonio (277), and at
Guanajuato (Duges), where it is known as '' Bricho."

Cassia Vogeliana, Schlecht. In the Sierra Madre, south of
Saltillo (281).

Cassia Wislizeni, Gray (?) Leaflets oblong-obovate, acute, 3 to 6
lines long : pods 4 to 6 inches long. In the Morales Mountains (829
SchafFuer). Also from hills near Presidio, W. Texas (Dr. V. Havard),
with the leaflets smaller but acute.

Cassia Greggii, Gray. At Soledad, in flower and in fruit (283).

Cassia Cham^crista, Linn. At Sutherland Springs (279).

Bauhinia ramosissi-ma, Benth. (?) At Monclova, Coahuila (285).
Differing from Coulter's specimen, as described by Hemsley, in having
its flowers only half as large and the ovary glabrous.

Cercis reniformis, Engelm. (01 occidentalis, Torr., var. Texen-
sis, Watson.) In the Caracol Mountains, south of Monclova.

Prosopis cinerascens. Gray. Between the Rio Frio and Nueces,
Texas (286), and at Juraz, Coahuila.

Prosopis juliflora, DC. At Eagle Pass, Texas (288), at
Parras, Coahuila (287), and in the mountains near San Luis Potosi
(629 Schaffner) ; 211 Parry & Palmer.

Neptunia pubescens, Benth. At Juraz, Coahuila (300), and at
Corpus Christi Bay, Texas.

Desmanthus velutinds, Scheele. At Eagle Pass, Texas (315).

Desmanthus depressus, Humb. & Bonpl. At San Antonio and
Laredo, Texas (316), and at Monclova, Coahuila (317).

Desmanthus reticulatus, Benth. At Sutherland Springs, Texas.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 349

Desmanthus incurvus, Benth. At Parras, Coahuila (314), and
in the Sierra Madre south of Saltillo. This is also 201 Parry &
Palmer, referred to D. depressus.*

* The North American species of Desmanthus may be grouped and distin-
guished as follows : —

* Stamens 5. — Glabrous or nearly so: pinnas 2 to 8 (usually 5) pairs, on a
rhachis i to 3 inches long; leaflets linear: pod not attenuate at base.

1. D. BRACHYLonus, Boutli. Stout: heads many-flowered: peduncles 1 to 3
inches long: pod oblong, 2 or 3 lines broail, falcate. — Illinois and llorida to
Texas and New Mexico.

2. D. LKPToi.OBus, Torr. & Gray. Slender : hcad.s small : peduncles | to 1
inch long: pod elongated linear, a line broad, straight, acuminate. — Arkansas
and Texas.

* * Stamens 10. — Pod linear: leaflets oblong.

4- Pinna; 2 to 0 (usually 4 or 5) pairs on a rhachis h to \h inches long ; leaflets
veinless.

++ Heads many-flowered, on short peduncles.

3. D. Jamesti, Torr. & Gray. Rather stout, glabrous, or slightly pubescent
and the leaflets ciliate : peduncles usually approximate at the summit, occasion-
ally in pairs : pod 1^ to 3 inches long by li or 2 lines broad, acuminate, obtuse
or but slightly narrowed at base. — S. Colorado and W. Texas to Arizona.

■w ++ Heads smaller, on peduncles 1 to 2J inches long : pubescent or rarely
nearly glabrous.

4. D. vELrTiNcs, Scheele. Pod 1 to 2\ inches long by 1 or \h lines broad,
acuminate, attenuate at base, straight or nearly so. — Texas.

5. D. iNCURVCS, Benth. Pod 8 to 20 lines long by 2| or 3 broad, aciuninate,
rounded or scarcely narrowed at base. — Mexico.

-1- -t- Pinna3 1 to 4 pairs : heads small.
+-4- Peduncles short (I to 1 inch long) : rhachis short (\ inch or less) ; pinnas
usually 1 or 2 pairs ; leaflets veinless : pod 1 to 2 J- inches long, acuminate, atten-
uate at base. — Species scarcely distinct.

6. D. DEPRESSUS, Hurab. & Bonpl. Usually glabrous, low and depressed,
very slender : leaflets small and narrow: pod straight or nearly so. — Florida
to Texas, Mexico, etc.

7. D. viRGATUs, Willd. Stouter and more erect: leaflets mostly larger and
broader. — Florida, W. Indies and S. America.

8. D. ACCMiNATcs, Bcntli. More pubescent: peduncles rarely over h inch
long : pod 10 to 20 lines long, more or less curved. — Texas.

++ ++ Peduncles elongated (1 to 4 inches) • leaflets veined : pod 1 to 1^ inches
long, obtuse or slightly narrowed at base.

9. D. RETiccLATUs, Bcuth. Glabrous or nearly so : rhachis h to 1| inches
long : peduncles usually 3 or 4 inches long : pod acuminate. — Texas.

10. D. OBTUSUS, Watson. Pubescent : rhachis usually very short (i inch
or less): peduncles 1 to 2^ inches long: pod obtuse, apiculate. — W. Texas.
(Seep. 371.)

350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Mimosa MALACornYLLA, Gray. At Monclova, Coahuila (299).

Mimosa monancistra, Benth. At Soledad, Coahuila (290).

Mimosa zygophylla, Benth. At Parras (29G), and in the moun-
tains east of Saltillo, Coahuila (297).

Mimosa acanthocarpa, Benth. In the mountains near San Luis
Potosi (G24 Schaffner, and G25 in part). This is the same as 217
Parry & Palmer (which is described by Hemsley as M. flexuosa,
Benth.), with better developed and mostly larger leaves and leaflets.
M. jlexuosa, aside from its slender flexuous branches, differs in having
its mature pods narrower (less than 2 lines broad) and armed with
straighter spines.

Mimosa biuncifera, Benth., var. (?) In the mountains about San
Luis Potosi (023 Schaifner) ; 210 Parry & Palmer, so referred by
Hemsley. They also closely approach M. Lindheimeri.

Mimosa Lindheimeri, Gray, var. (?) The leaves with 1 to 3
pinnjE and few leaflets, as in 1363 Wright. At Uvalde, Texas (291),
and at Saltillo, Coahuila, in flower (295). Also a variety with few
but larger piiinaa and more numerous leaflets, and the broad pods
obtuse; at Parras (292), and in the mountains east of Saltillo, in
flower (293, 294).

Mimosa ? At Parras were collected flowering specimens of

another species of this group, with old fruit, but the foliage imperfectly
developed. Pubescent, with small curved spines mostly in pairs :
pinuce 2 to 4 pairs, with 4 to 6 pairs of small leaflets : pod coriaceous,
unarmed, pubescent, straight, ^ to 1 inch long by 2 lines broad.

Mimosa strigillosa, Torr. & Gray. At Juraz, Coahuila (2115).

ScHRANKiA ACULEATA, AVilld., var. (?) In the Sierra Madre
south of Saltillo (301), and sparingly at Soledad, Coahuila, and at
Sutherland Springs, Texas. Identical with 2513 Berlandier, so named
by Bentham, but with the pod densely pubescent. The pod is long-
beaked, instead of acute as described and figured from the orifjinal
Vera Cruz specimens upon which the species was founded.

SciiRANKiA suBiNERMis. Glabrous, Unarmed excepting the pod:
pinnee a single pair upon a petiole about an inch long ; leaflets 6 to 10
pairs, oblong, veinless, slightly pubescent: peduncle 6 to 18 lines long:
pod 2 inches long, beaked, glabrous, naked or very sparingly armed
with short spines, chiefly on the margins. — In the mountains north of
Monclova (302).

Leuc^na glauca, Benth. At Saltillo (307)

AcACTA Palmeri. A stout shrub, glabrous or nearly so, with
short stout curved infrastipular and occasional scattered spines :

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 351

piniiK! 1 or rarely 2 pairs upon a rhachis 2 to 12 lines long*, leaflets 2
to 5 pairs, oblong to oblong-obovate, 3 to 4 lines long: peduncles
fascicled, an inch long : calyi glabrous, 1 to nearly 2 lines long, exceed-
ing the narrow deciduous bracllet: ovary glabrous, stipitate. — In the
Sierra Madre south of Saltillo (298). Allied to A. Rcemeriana and
A, micrantha.

Acacia flexicaulis, Benth. At Corpus Christi Bay, Texas
(305). Pinnas always 2 pairs: spikes longer than in the next species
and pedunculate: pod sessile upon a much-thickened branch-like
peduncle.

Acacia amentacea, DC. Between the Rio Frio and Nueces,
Texas (304); 213 Parry &, Palmer. Pinnae a single pair: spikes
short and sessile: pod 2 or 3 inches long by 2 lines wide, attenuate
into a stipe : spines very variable, sometimes sliort, often 1 to 2 inches
long or more. Young fruit has recently been collected for the first
time by Dr. V. Havard, U.S.A., and Dr. S. B. Buckley. This is said
to be the most common species in Southwestern Texas, and to grow
to a height of twenty feet.

Acacia Wrigiitit, Benth. At Uvalde, Texas (303).

Acacia Berlandieri, Benth. At Eagle Pass, Texas (2127), at
JMonterey, Nuevo Leon (308), and in the mountains east of Saltillo
(309). A variety was collected at Eagle Pass (2127, in part) with
narrower pods (6 to 8 lines wide) and smaller seeds (3 or 4 lines long).
The ordinary form has the pod 9 to 14 lines broad and the seeds 5 or
6 lines long.

Acacia constricta, Benth. At Parras, Coahuila (313), and in
the mountains near Los Pogos (627 Schaffner) ; 214 Parry &
Palmer.

Acacia filicina, Willd. At Parras (311), Juraz (310), and in
the Caracol IMountains, Coahuila (2128), and at Sutherland Springs,
Texas; 218 Parry & Palmer.-

Acacia Farnesiana, Willd. In the Sierra Madre south of Sal-
tillo (312). Known by the Mexicans as " Huisache."

Acacia crassifolia, Gray. At San Lorenzo de Laguna, Coahuila
(284). The pod is very thick and coriaceous, 3 inches long by 8 lines
broad, nearly annular and shortly stipitate

Calltandra conferta, Benth., but with slender peduncles. In
the mountains east of Saltillo (318), and in the Morales Mountains
(G2G Schaffner).

Calliandra eriophtlla, Benth., but with the fruiting peduncles
short. At Saltillo, sparingly collected; the same as 212 Parry &

352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Palmer, referred to G. conferta. It appears most probable, however,
that the two species cannot be kept distinct.

Calliandra Coulteri. Stems herbaceous, very slender, glabrous,
about a foot long : stipules herbaceous^ lanceolate, 2 lines long ; pinnae
1 or 2 pairs on a rhachis ^ to 1| inches long; leaflets 6 to 10 pairs,
oblong, 2 to 4 lines long : peduncles 1 or 2 inches long : flowers sessile ;
calyx and corolla glabrous, short ; stamens pink : pod glabrous, 1 \
inches long. — At vSoledad (2129); collected also by Coulter, without
number or locality.

PiTHECOLOBiuM Palmeri, Hemsl. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (625 Schaffner, m part) ; 220 Parry & Palmer. The pod is
stipitate, 3 or 4 inches long or more.

PiTHECOLOBiUM BREViFOLiUM, Benth. In the mountains north
of Monclova (306).

PiTHECOLOBiUM (Chloroleucon) elachistophtlluji. Gray, in
herb. A rigid much-branched shrub, armed with numerous short
rather slender and somewhat curved sjiines, glabrous : pinnte a single
pair upon a petiole 1 or 2 lines long ; leaflets 2 to 4 pairs, oblong-
obovate, reticulated, 1 or 2 lines long : peduncles axillary, solitary, a
line long, longer and much tbickened in fruit ; heads globose, rather
open : flowers 2 lines long, the very numerous filaments 4 or 5 lines
long, united into a slender tube : pod thick-coriaceous, 2 inches long
by nearly \ inch wide, stipitate. — At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (289).

PiTHECOLOBiUM (Chloroleucon) Schaffneri, A stout shrub,
armed with infrastipulary pairs of short stout straight spines, finely
pubescent: pinnte 2 to 4 pairs on a rhachis 3 to 10 lines long, with a
round gland at the base of the upper and lower pairs; leaflets 10 to
15 pairs, oblong, acute, 1 to 1|^ lines long: peduncles solitary, slender,
1^ to 1 inch long : heads dense, globose, nearly glabrous : filaments
numerous, united at base, 4 lines long : pod linear, straight or some-
what curved, 3 to 5 inches long by 4 or 5 lines wide, densely pubes-
cent, flattened, thick and indehiscent, with a resinous endocarp and
spongy septa between the seeds. — In the mountains about San Luis
Potosi (628 Schaffner, and 623 in part); 219 Parry & Palmer, re-
ferred by Hemsley to Acacia, the flowers being unknown,

Prunus Capuli, Cav. At Sutherland Springs, Texas (319"), in
the Sierra Madre south of Saltillo (320), in the mountains about San
Luis Potosi (106 Schaifner), and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 222 Parry
& Palmer, Popularly known as " Capulin."

Prunus glandulosa, Torr. &, Gray. In the Sierra Madre south
of Saltillo (2131).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 353

Prunus Mexicana. Young branches, pedicels and petioles can-
escent with a short dense subtomentose pubescence : leaves deciduous,
oblong-lanceolate or lanceolate, acuminate, rounded at base, acutely
toothed, pubescent and lighter-colored beneath, puberulent above, 2 or
3 inches long : pedicels short, fascicled : fruit compressed-ovate, the
very thick turgid stone 7 or 8 lines long, rounded on the margins,
acutish. — At Lerios, Coahuila (2130).

Spir^a discolor, Pursh, var. dumosa, AYatson. In the San
Rafael Mountains (104 Schaffner) ; 223 Parry & Palmer.

Yauquelixia cortmbosa, Corr. In the Sierra Madre south of
Saltillo (329).

LiNDLEYA MESPILOIDES, HBK. In the same region (324).

RcBUS TRiYiALis, Michx. {R. hiimistrcftus, Steud.) In the moun-
tains about Sau Luis Potosi (105 Schaffner), the stem described as 20
to 30 feet long ; 224 Parry & Palmer. The species is very variable
in the amount of pubescence.

Cercocarpus parvifolius, Nutt. At Lerios, Coahuila (174).
Also var. paucidentatus, with the small leaves entire or sparingly
toothed at the summit, often densely pubescent ; in shady places near
San Miguelito (114 Schaffner). This is the same as 224 Parry
& Palmer, and 1056 Wright. The typical form has occasionally a
similar pubescence.

CowANiA PLiCATA, Don. In the Sierra Madre south of Saltillo
(325) ; 226 Parry & Palmer.

CowANiA Mexicana, Don. At Guanajuato (Duges).

Fragaria Mexicana, Schlecht. At Lerios, Coahuila (326).

PoTENTiLLA HEPTAPHYLLA, Mill. In the Caracol Mountains,
Coahuila (327).

PoTENTiLLA NoRVEGiCA, Linn. At San Lorenzo de Laguna,
Coahuila (328) ; a form with the leaflets frequently divided.

Alchemilla siBBALDiiEFOLiA, 11 BK. In the Morales Mountains
(868 Schaffner) ; 227 Parry & Palmer.

Alchemilla hirsuta, HBK., var. alpestris, Schlecht. Villous
with long scattered and spreading silky hairs, the leaves alike on both
sides, and the calyx wholly glabrous. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (869 Schaffner). This variety, and the more typical form (var.
campestris, Schlecht., having the hairs appressed and more numerous,
especially on the under side of the leaves, on the stem and calyx), have
been distributed together under 721 Parry & Palmer, 71 Coulter
(referred to A. tripartita)^ and 82 Ghiesbreght. 308^ Bourgeau, also
referred to A. tripartita, is the present variety. The lobes of the

VOL. XVII. (n. 8. IX.) 23

854 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMT

leaves vary greatly in their division, from incisely toothed to very
deeply cleft.

Alciiemilla veldtina. Perennial, with numerous decumbent or
ascending branching stems, the stems and branches appressed villous :
leaves glabrous or sparingly villous, cuneate, 3-cleft, 2 to 5 lines long,
the segments entire or 1-3-toothed ; stipules entire or usually of two
narrowly oblong lobes : flowers very small, the calyx covered with a
fine velvety pubescence.- — In swampy places about San Luis Potosi
(870 Schaffner).

Rosa Mexicana. Low (about a foot high), armed with straight
rather slender spines (1 to 5 lines long) : stipules glandular-ciliate, and
the rhachis of the leaves with short stout spreading gland-bearing
hairs and prickly ; leaflets 5 to 7, narrow, mostly acute at each end,
doubly serrate, slightly pubescent and glandular beneath, 4 to 10 lines
long: flowers solitary, 1^ inches in diameter; calyx-lobes glandu-
lar-hairy, at length deciduous, the tube glabrous or very nearly so :
fruit globose, 3 or 4 lines in diameter. — In the Caracol Mountains,
Coahuila (2124). Allied to R. parvijlora.

Crataegus pubescens, Steud. A form with broadly flabelliform
or rhomboidal leaves. In the mountains east of Saltillo (2123). The
Mexican species of this genus are somewhat obscure, but this appears
distinguishable from C. Mexicana by its generally acuter and more
acutely toothed leaves, which are less coriaceous when old. 50 Bour-
geau (" C Crus-galll ") is 0. Mexicana, as also 228 Parry & Palmer.

CoTONEASTER DENTicuLATA, HBK. In the Sierra Madre south
of Saltillo (330) ; 230 Parry & Palmer.

Philadelphus serptllifolius, Gray. A variety with the leaves
for the most part less densely pubescent beneath, similar to 1101
Wright. In the Sierra Madre south of Saltillo (2122'^). The species
is more nearly related to P. microphyllus than to P. Mexicanus.

TiLL^A angustifolia, Nutt. Near Morales, San Luis Potosi (126
Schaff'ner) ; 680 Parry & Palmer.

Cotyledon Schaffneri. Acaulescent, the basal leaves narrowly
lanceolate, narrowing from near the middle each way and acuminate,

3 or 4 inches long by \ inch wide, somewhat purplish ; cauline leaves
rather numerous, linear, flattened, very acute, 1 to H inches long:
flowering stem a foot high, bearing a 2-branched raceme (the branches

4 inches long and about 8-1 2-flovvered) ; pedicels very short : sepals
narrowly lanceolate, unequal, 2 to 5 lines long ; corolla yellow and
pink, 6 to 8 lines long, nearly twice longer than the carpels. — On
sandy slopes of mountains around San Luis Potosi (768 Schaff'ner).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 356

Cotyledon ? A somewhat similar apparently undescribed

species, but the material insufficient for determination. From the
same region (7G9 SchaflTner) ; it was also distributed under 233 Parry
& Palmer, together with specimens of still another species with
broader leaves and the shortly calyculate flowers on long slender
pedicels.

Cotyledon parviflora, Hemsl. In the San Miguelito Moun-
tains (775 Schaffuer).

Sedum Palmerl Caulescent, erect and branching, glabrous and
glaucous: leaves thick, flattened, spatulate-obovate, 1 to 1 i inches lonof
by 9 lines broad (3 lines broad at base), rounded at the summit and
slightly apiculate : branches slender, bearing clustered racemes (4 to
6} an inch or two long : flowers deep orange, on short pedicels, the
narrowly lanceolate petals (2 or 3 lines long) but little exceeding the
sepals : carpels short, about as long as the slender styles. — At Gua-
juco, Nuevo Leon (2121), and in cultivation at Cambridge. Re-
sembling S. dendroideum, but of more slender habit and the flowers
pedicellate.

Sedum ebracteatum, DC. In the Morales Mountains (774
SchaflTner),

Sedum fuscum, Hemsl. In the San Eafael Mountains (778
Schaffner) ; 235 Parry & Palmer.

Sedum parvum, Hemsl. In the Morales Mountains (777 Schaff-
ner) ; 234 Parry & Palmer.

Sedum Liicbmannianum, Hemsl. Near San Miguelito (776
Schaflfner).

Ammannia latifolia, Linn. At Sutherland Springs (331).

CuPH.EA iEQUiPETALA, Cav. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(722 Schaff'ner), and at Guanajuato (Duges); 241 and 242 Parry &
Palmer.

CuPiiyEA LANCEOLATA, Ait. f. (C. Zimopam, Roezl.) In the
Morales IMountains (721 Schaff'ner); and Guanajuato (Duges).

Lythrum gracile, Benth. At Monterey (332), and near Morales
(653 Schaffiier) ; 245 Parry & Palmer. Typical L. alatum, Linn.,
has not been collected in Mexico. L. Kennedianum, HBK. (40 and
299 Bourgeau, 142 Coulter, 243 Parry & Palmer, &c.), which has
been referred to it, is distinguished especially by its longer calyx (5 to
6 lines long), and the upper leaves less reduced. 158 Ghiesbreght,
from Chiapas, is L. alatum, var. lanceolatum, Torr. & Gray, and
140 Coulter (referred to L. Byssopifolia^ Linii.) is var. llnearifo-
LiuM, Gray, collected also by Gregg at Andabago. L. Hijssopifolia

356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

is found in California (V. Rattan and G. R. Vasey), but there are no
Mexican specimens in the Gray herbarium.

Nes^a longipes, Gray. At Parras, Coahuila (333), where it
was also collected by Gregg.

Nes^a salicifolia, HBK. Near San Luis Potosi (654 Schaff-
ner) ; 246 Parry & Palmer.

Jussi^A REPENS, Linn., var. Californica, Watson. With mostly
spatulate leaves, smaller flowers and short pedicels. At Parras (334),
and near Morales (173 Schaffner, together with the typical form).
247 Parry & Palmer and 183 Coulter are the same.

Jussi^EA SUFFRUTICOSA, Linn. Near Morales (174 Schaffner).

LuDWiGiA PALUSTRis, Linu. Near Morales (127 Schaffner).

Q^^NOTHERA Drummondii, Hook. In and near salt water at Cor-
pus Christi Bay, Texas (343), with the leaves sublyrate-pinnatifid.

CEnothera macrosceles, Gray. At Parras, Coahuila (338).
Fruiting specimens, at length collected, determine the position of this
species in the Onagra group, where it was originally placed. The
capsules are about an inch long, straight or somewhat curved, obtusely
tetragonal, 1^ lines in thickness, the seeds nearly smooth or obsoletely
pitted.

CEnothera sinuata, Michx. Around San Rafael (172 Schaff-
ner); 253 Parry & Palmer. Also the var. hirsuta, Torr. & Gray,
at Corpus Christi Bay, Texas (345).

Oenothera speoiosa, Nutt. In the mountains east of Saltillo
(339) and in the Caracol Mountains, Coahuila (336), and near Mon-
terey, Nuevo Leon (335, mainly) ; 252 Parry «fe Palmer, ffi". hirsuta
and CE. Berlmidieri, Walp., {Xylopleurum, Spach), are mere forms of
this species.

QiiNOTHERA tetraptera, Cav, A variety with small flowers, the
calyx-tube 3 to 6 lines long, and the fruit 6 to 8 lines long including
the short pedicel, from Monterey, Nuevo Leon (347). 250 Parry
& Palmer is the same in part, there being with it a somewhat more
villous form with larger flowers, the calyx-tube an inch long, and the
fruit (5 lines long) sessile or nearly so (169 Schaffner, San Luis
Potosi). With 335 Palmer, in the Gray herbarium, is a low form
villous throughout with spreading hairs, even to the calyx-lobes, with
larger flowers, the pedicel short and calyx-tul)e 6 lines long. A
doubtful form was collected in the Sierra Madre south of Saltillo
(340), with large flowers, the calyx-tube an inch long, and the pedi-
celled fruit about an inch long and attenuate at top. It is difficult to
define the limits of this and the preceding species, or to draw a clear

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 357

line between them. It would seem that this species is always more
or less villous, and the capsule larger and more broadly winged
and more abruptly contracted at top. The calyx-tube is usually
shorter in proportion to the ovary, and the capsule with its pedicel
often 1 to 1 1 inches long.

CEnothera rosea, Ait. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (34G), in
swampy places near Morales (170 Schaffuer), and Guanajuato (Duges),
where it is called " Yerba del Golpe."

OENOTHERA BRACHTCAKPA, Gray. At Saltillo (2120), and a form
with extremelj' narrow leaves (342). This species appears to include
CE. Wri'ffhtii, Gray.

OENOTHERA (Megapterium) dissecta, Gray, in herb. Stems
slender, herbaceous, from an underground rootstock, branching, decum-
bent or erect, sparingly pubescent: leaves narrow, 1 or 2 inches long,
pinnatifidly lobed, the linear lobes very unequal : flowers axillary,
sessile, the calyx-tube Ih inches long, slightly dilated above, the tips
free in the bud ; petals rose-color, an inch long : capsule oblong-ovate,
narrowed at each end, half an inch long, strongly winged at least
toward the top and with a prominent thick rib between the wings.
— In sandy localities near San Luis Potosi (168 Schaffner) ; 249
Parry & Palmer.

CEnothera Hartwegi, Benth. In the mountains east of Saltillo
(337, 341), and at Saltillo a form with somewhat smaller flowers
(344). At Lerios a low form was sparingly collected, with linear
leaves, and nearly corresponding to the variety lavandulcsfolia. 248
Parry & Palmer is a similar but still more reduced form with small
flowers.

LoPEziA ruMiLA, Bonpl. In the mountains near San Luis
Potosi (640 Schaffner), and at Guanajuato (Duges). The smaller
specimens from the latter locality accord with the original description.
The much larger ones from Dr. Schaffner are still more pubescent,
and with leaves an inch long or more.

Lopezia trichota, Schlecht. ( ?) In swamps about San Luis Potosi
(641 Schaffner), and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 256 Parry & Palmer.
Not agreeing wholly with the description of the original specimens,
which were found in rocky localities. The herbaceous stems are from
a very thick perennial root, the lower leaves opposite, broadly ovate,
rounded or subcordate at base, obtuse or acutish, obsoletely toothed,
the upper oblong-ovate to lanceolate, acute and more acutely toothed ;
the narrow petals and the style pilose, the stamens glabrous.

Gaura parviflora, Dougl. At Saltillo (2119).

358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Gaura Drummondii, Torr. & Gray. At Laredo, Texas (348).

Gaura coccinea, Nutt. About San Luis Potosi (171 Schaffner) ;
a narrow-leaved and a broader-leaved form, the same as 254 and 255
Parry & Palmer.

Stenosiphon virgatus, Spach. At Sutherland Springs (349).

Cevallia sinuata, Lag. At Uvalde, Texas, and at Saltillo, spar-
ingly ; at Parras, Coahuila (360), at Monterey, Nuevo Leon (361),
and at San Lorenzo de Laguna a form with broader sinuately toothed
leaves (362) ; 258 Parry & Palmer.

Petalonyx crenatus, Gray, in herb. SufFruticose, low, the
short herbaceous branchlets leafy and densely retrorse-hispid: leaves
oblong-lanceolate, sessile, 2 to 4 lines long, densely covered with short
barbed hairs, the crenate margins revolute : flowers white, in open
terminal naked racemes, each flower involucrate with three unequal
toothed bractlets at the summit of the short slender pedicel : calyx-
lobes linear, hispid, recurved ; petals narrowly linear, not connivent,
2 lines long : filaments and style a half longer. — At San Lorenzo de
Laguna, Coahuila (833).

EucNiDE LOBATA, Gray. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (356).
This species has the leaves rather strongly lobed, with acute or
acutish teeth, the inflorescence short (2 or 3 inches or less) with
leaf-like toothed bracts, the calyx-lobes about 2 lines long, stamens
about 60, and the oblong-ovate capsule narrowed at base. 1067
Parry & Palmer is ajjparently distinct, the scant specimen in the
Gray herbarium showing a very short campanulate calyx and few (25
or less) stamens. The genus is clearly distinct from Mentzelia.

EuCNiDE FLORiBUNDA. Stout, a foot high or more, the round-
cordate leaves (H to 2| inches long) slightly lobed and bluntly sinu-
ate-toothed : inflorescence 6 to 8 inches long, with lanceolate entire
bracts acute at each end : calyx-lobes 3 or 4 lines long, nearly equal-
ling the petals: stamens very numerous (100 or more): capsule
broadly campanulate, rounded at base. — At San Lorenzo de Laguna
(832). Resembling E. lohata.

EucNiDE BARTONioiDES, Zucc. At Guajuco, Nucvo Leon (354),
and at Monclova, Coahuila (355), growing on rocks at the mouth of
caves. The calyx-tube in this species is villous, with the barbed
pubescence very short or usually wanting, the lobes 3 to 8 lines
long. Edcnide sinuata,. collected by Botteri (266, in herb. Gray,
without locality), is very similar, but with the leaves sinuately lobed,
the obtuse lobes entire or sparingly toothed: calyx tube densely
covered with barbed hairs, the villous lobes 3 or 4 lines long.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 359

Mentzelia aspera, Linn. At Soledad (351), and in the moun-
tains north of Monclova (831). Distinguished from the next by
the annual root, smaller flowers, and longer and narrower capsule.

Mentzelia hispida, Willd, {M. strigosa, II BK.) At Mon-
clova (352), Soledad (353), and in the Caracol Mountains (357) ;
also in the mountains about San Luis Potosi (110 Schaffner), and at
Guanajuato (Dugcs) ; 257 Parry & Palmer. The root is tuberous.

Mentzelia multiflora, Nutt. At Saltillo (350, 2105), and at
San Lorenzo de Laguna (358, 359) ; several forms, varying in foliage,
size and color of the flowers, and length of the capsule. M. Wrightii
appears to differ only in the more shallow lobing of the leaves.

TuRNERA aphrodisiaca, Ward. In the San Miguelito Mountains
(166 Schaffner) ; 93 Parry & Palmer. Known as " Yerba de
Vemulo." Frequently with 4 styles and a 4-valved 8-seeded capsule.

Passiflora fcetida, Linn. At Laredo, Texas (2110).

Passiflora tenuiloba, Engelm. At Sutherland Springs, Texas.

Passiflora bryonioides, HBK. Near San Luis Potosi (109
Schaffner) ; 259 Parry & Palmer.

CucuMis Anguria, Linn. At Uvalde, Texas (363).

CucuRBiTA f(etidissima, HBK. (C. pereiinis, Gray.) In the
mountains near San Luis Potosi (765 Schaffner j ; known as " Cala-
bazilla loco."

Apodanthera undulata, Gray. About San Luis Potosi (766
Schaffner) ; called '• Melon loco," and the root is said to be esculent.

Maximowiczia tripartita, Cogn. At Uvalde, Texas (365), and
at Laredo, on the Rio Grande (364). This species differs from M.
Lindheimeri, Cogn. [Sici/dium Lindheimeri, Gray; 200 Parry &
Palmer), in its more narrowly lobed leaves, in the shorter campanu-
late tube of the calyx, in the rather smaller and more obtuse fruit, and
in the narrower seeds. The var. tenuisecta of M. Lindheimeri should
rather be referred to this species.

Cyclanthera dissecta, Arn. ( C. Kaudimana, Cogn.) At
Uvalde, Texas (367), and at Guanajuato (Duges). The characters
upon which Cogniaux separates his C. Naudiniana appear to be all
unreliable.

SiCYOS Deppei, Don. About San Luis Potosi (767 Schaffner),
and at Guanajuato (Duges) , known as " Chayotillos." Closely re-
sembling ^S". angidutus, Linn., and distinguished mainly by the smaller
(3 or 4 lines long) and less villous-tomentose fruit. 397 Lindheimer,
as well as 971 and 2401 Berlandier, from Texas, must be the same,
though referred to S. angulatus by Cogniaux.

360 PRQCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Sechiopsis triquetra, Naud. In the Cerro del Cuarto, near
Guanajuato (Duges).

Mamillakia conoidea, DC. At Saltillo (378),

Mamillaria micromeris, Engelm. At Saltillo.

Mamillaria radians, DC. In the mountains west of Saltillo.
Several other undetermined species were sparingly collected.

EcHiNOCACTUs LONGEHAMATUS, Gal. At SaltiUo (373, 374).

EciiiNOCACTDS piLOSDS, Gal. In the mountains east of Saltillo
(375).

EcHiNOCACTus HORizoNTHALONius, Lam. At Saltillo (380).

li^CHiNOCACTUs BicoLOR, Gal. (?) At Saltillo (379).

Cereus cinerascens, DC. At San Lorenzo de Laguna (368, 369),
Parras (370, 371), and Saltillo (372), some with larger spines than
any described ; 368 is doubtful ; 277 Parry & Palmer.

Opuntia Kleini^, DC. At San Lorenzo de Laguna (376).

Opuntia imbricata, DC. At Parras (377).

MoLLUGO Cerviana, Ser. At Blufftou, Texas (381). This
species has been recently collected also in New Mexico and Arizona.

MoLLUGO verticillata, Linn. Western Texas (382) ; San Luis
Potosi (118 Schaffner) ; 283. Parry & Palmer.

Glinus Cambessidesii, Fenzl. At San Lorenzo de Laguna
(72). With smaller flowers and much smaller seeds and generally
less pubescent than G. lotoides of the Old World, to which the Mexi-
can specimens are referred by Ilemsley. The strophiolate seeds with
elongated funicles, together with some peculiarities of habit, rather
justify the retention of the genus.

Hydrocotyle prolifera, Kellogg. At Georgetown, Texas
(383). The same as 107 Coulter and 1068 Parry & Palmer (re-
ferred to H. mterrvpta), and 480 Bourgeau.

Eryngium nasturtiifolium, Juss. At San Lorenzo de Laguna
(384) ; 1112 Parry & Palmer.

Eryngium Deppeantoi, Cham. & Schlecht. In woods near Mo-
rales (7 Schaffner) ; 285 Parry & Palmer, referred to £J. aquaticum,
Linn.

Eryngium serratum, Cav. On rocks, near Morales (8 Schaffner),
and at Guanajuato (Duges) ; 284 Parry & Palmer. Known as
" Yerba del sapo."

Eryngium yucc^folium, Michx., var. (?) Basal leaves short
and narrow, margined with long sliglitly rigid seta; : rays slender and
elongated, erect : heads small ; floral bracts puberuleut. — In the
Caracol Mountains, southeast of Monclova (417).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 361

EuTNGiUM carlin^t:, Dclar. In sandy places near San Luis
Potosi (G Schaffncr) ; 286 Parry & Palmer, referred to E. Wrightii,
which differs chiefly in the much more conspicuous rigid and spinose
floral bracts.

EuLOPHUS Texanus, Benth. & Ilook. At Lerios, Coahuila
(38G).

EuLOPiius PEUCEDANOIDES, IIBK. In the Sierra Madre, south
of Saltillo (Palmer, sparingly), and near San Miguelito (5 Schaffner) ;
292 and 293 Parry & Palmer.

Apium LEPTOPnYLi.UM, F. Miiell. At San Lorenzo de Laguna
(385), at Monterey (2109, in part), and about San Luis Potosi (2
Schaffncr) ; 294 Parry & Palmer. In several forms.

Apium Popei, Gray. At Monterey, Nuevo Leon (2109, in part).

CuANTZiA LINEATA, Kutt. Near Morales (1 Schaffner); 287
Parry & Palmer.

Djscopleura laciniata, Benth. & Hook. At Sutherland Springs,
Texas.

Peucedanum Mexicanum. Glabrous, the stout erect stem 2 or
3 feet high or more : leaves with a broadly dilated sheathing petiole,
at least thrice ternate, the ultimate segments from linear to narrowly
lanceolate, elongated, acute and acutely toothed or laciniate : umbel
naked or with a few linear bracts, the rays (G to 20) ^ to \h inches
long ; bracts of the involucels very narrow : flowers white : fruit very
broadly elliptical (4 or 5 lines long by 3 or 4 broad), on pedicels 1 or
2 lines long, with thin wings and numerous vittK, the dorsal ridges
filiform : seed flattened-reniform, scarcely at all sulcate on the back,
but with a shallow channel on the face. — On rocks near Morales
(4 Schaffner) ; 288 Parry & Palmer. Known as " Ococotillo." 316
and 571 Bourgeau, referred to Peucedanum by Ilemsley, are Angelica
Mexicana, Yatke. Though certainly an Angelica rather than a Peu-
cedanum^ yet it is somewhat anomalous in some of its characters.

Daucus montanus, Willd. At San Luis Potosi (3 Schaffner);
291 Parry & Palmer.

Garrya ovata, Benth. In the San Miguelito and San Rafael
Mountains (888, 889 Schaffner) ; 295 Parry & Palmer, referred to
G. laurifolia.

Garrya laurifolia, Hartw. In the San Rafael Mountains (890
Schaflfner).

362. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

2. Descriptions of New Species of Plants, chiefly from our Western

Territories.

Myosurus cupulatus. Scapes slender, 2 to 6 inches high :
anthers oblong, much shorter than the filaments : fruiting heads loose,
long-conical, about an inch (3 to 1 G lines) long : akeues short and
subquadrate, cupulate at the summit with a raised and at length irreg-
ularly thickened light-colored margin, and witli a broadly triangular
slightly curved ascending beak. — Arizona ; hills between the Gila
and San Francisco Rivers, Rev. E. L. Greene ; on the Santa Catalina
Mountains, at 8,000 feet altitude, J. G. Lemmon ; found by both col-
lectors in April, 1880. Readily distinguished in fruit by the peculiar
akenes. In habit it resembles M. minimus, which has less attenuated
closely compact heads, on often very stout scapes, the rectangular
akenes truncate and beakless or with a very short strictly appressed
beak ; the anthers linear and nearly equalling the filaments. In the
usually small M. aristatus the loose heads are rarely more than 3 or 4
lines long, the oblong-ovate akene with a long slender somewhat
spreading beak.

Myosurus sessilis. Without scapes, the flowers sessile or very
nearly so : fruiting heads usually several (1 to G) and crowded, much
shorter than the leaves, stout and conical (2 to 6 lines long by a line
or more in thickness at base) : akenes with a prominent costa termi-
nating in an erect or spreading subulate beak. — On alkali flats in
Umatilla County, Oregon ; J. & T. J. Howell, May, 1882.

Arabis furcata. Perennial, the slender stems ascending from
a slender branching rootstalk, a foot high or more, glabrous : leaves
sparingly pubescent and ciliate with branched hairs, the lower petio-
late, oblong-obovate, acutish, with few teeth, an inch or two long, the
cauline sessile, oblong to linear, mostly glabrous : flowers white, 3 to
5 lines long, with yellowish sepals : pods narrow, i to li inches long,
beaked by the thick style, on slender spreading pedicels 6 to 10 lines
long. — On the blufi^s of the Columbia, near the mouth of Hood River,
Oregon ; J. & T. J. Howell, in 1879, and with immature fruit in
May, 1882 ; received also from Mrs. P. G, Barrett, of Hood River.
A dwarf alpine form, with shorter pedicels, was collected on Mount
Adams at the White Salmon glacier by W. N. Suksdorf in 1877, and
again in 1879.

Arabis suffrutescens. Perennial, with a decidedly woody
branching base, glabrous or sparingly stellate-pubescent, the erect
subfastigiate stem^ a foot high : lower leaves linear-oblanceolate, acute.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 363

about an inch long, the cauline more oblong and sessile or shortly
auriculate-chispiiig : raceme few- (4-G-) flowered : sepals broad, the
purplish petals twice longer (3 lines long) : pods reflexed on pedicels

4 to 6 lines long, attenuate to a short style, 1^ to 2^ inches long by
1^ lines broad: seeds somewhat in two rows, orbicular, winged. —
Collected on the bluffs of the Snake River and vicinity. Union County,
Oregon, by W. C. Cusick, 1881.

Akabis Cusickii. Perennial, villous-pubcscent throughout with
loose scattered spreading simple hairs, the clustered leafy stems 3 to

5 inches high : lower leaves liuear-oblanceolate, about an inch long,
the upper linear-oblong and clasping but not auriculate at base, all
entire or sparingly toothed : flowers few, pale pink or white, turning
light purple, the petals three or four lines long, twice longer than tlie
sepals and exceeding the pedicels : pods falcate, ascending, acutish,
1^ to 3 inches long by about a line broad ; style none : seeds acutely
margined. — On rocky ridges, Union County, Oregon ; W. C. Cusick,
1879. Resembling A. canescens in habit, which is hoary with short
dense stellate pubescence, and appears to have much smaller flowers.

Streptanthus diveksifolius. Annual, glabrous, erect and slen-
der, branching above, 1 to 1^ feet high: cauline leaves very narrow,
pinnately divided with 1 or 2 pairs of narrowly linear lobes, the upper
entire or nearly so-; those on the branches broadly cordate and clasp-
ing, entire, ^ inch long or less : racemes few-flowered ; pedicels divari-
cately spreading, 1 or 2 lines long : sepals 2 or 3 lines long, pale ;
petals with a rather broad exserted recurved blade, purple-veined :
pods strongly reflexed, Ih to 2^ inches long by less than a line
broad, — On the Cosumne Creek, California ; collected by V. Rattan
in 1866.

Physaria Oregona.* Flowers apparently pale-yellow, the petals
(3 or 4 lines iong) twice longer than the calyx : style very short, less

* The species of Physaria may be distinguished as follows . —

* Cells of the pod much mflated and much longer than the replum.

1. P DiDVMOCARPA, Nutt. Cells vef}' obtusc and divergent. — From Colorado
to British America and Eastern Washington Territory.

2. P. Newberryi, Gray. Cells less divergent. — New Mexico to Utah and
Nevada 1 An obscure species.

* * Cells more or less compressed and but little exceeding the replum.

3. P. Getert, Gray. Pods small, obeordate ; style as long as the pod. —
Spokan Valley, Washington Territory

4. P. Oregona, Watson. Pods large, round-reniform , style very short. —
Eastern Oregon.

364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

than a line long: pod obcompressed, 5 to 10 lines broad, the narrowly
linear replum 3 or 4 lines long, and the flattened obtusely rounded
cells 1-4-seeded. — In gulches on Pine Creek, near Snake River,
Union County, Oregon ; W. C. Cusick, June, 1880. With the habit
and foliage of the other species, but with the flattened pod of Sya-
thlipsis, though the valves are nerveless and not carinate.

Dkaba. chrysantha. Perennial, with leafy decumbent or erect
stems (2 to 6 inches high) from a branching rootstock, which becomes
covered with the persistent bases of dead leaves, sparingly pubescent
with simple hairs: basal leaves narrowly oblanceolate, 1 to 2|^ inches
long, entire or occasionally with 1 or 2 teeth, sparingly ciliate, the
cauline oblanceolate to lanceolate : raceme open, the bright yellow
flowers on slender pedicels 2 to 6 lines long: pod glabrous, oblong
(4 or 5 lines long), acute at each end and beaked by a slender style
^ to 1 line long. — In the high mountains of Colorado (above Golden
City, at 12,500 feet altitude, Rev. E. L. Greene, 1871, and in the
Sawatch Range, T. S. Brandegee, 1880), and on a peak south of
Apache Pass, Arizona, J. G. Lemraon, 1881,

Caulanthus amplexicaulis. Annual, glabrous and glaucous,
branching, suberect or lax and flexuous, 1 to 2 feet high : lower leaves
oblong-obovate, obtuse, auriculate and clasping, coarsely and acutely
toothed or sparingly denticulate or entire, 2 to 4 inches long, the upper
round-ovate to oblong-ovate, entire, the uppermost more acute: racemes
very loose : sepals 3 to 5 lines long ; petals with a narrow recurved
exserted limb, purple-veined : pods terete, about 3 inches long by § of
a line wide, spreading or ascending on pedicels 3 to 6 lines long or
more, with a thick bifid sessile stigma. — In the San Bernardino
Mountains, California ; collected in May, 1881, by S. B. & W. F.
Parish, and by W. G. Wright.

Caulanthus glaucus. Glabrous and glaucous, stout, simple or
sparingly branched, 1 to 2^ feet high : leaves rather fleshy, all petio-
late, ovate to lanceolate, more or less narrowed at base, obtuse or
acLitish, the blade 1 or 2 inches long : sepals purplish, 4 lines long ;
petals greenish, exserted : pods subterete, very slender, 3 to 5 inches
long, arcuate upon ascending pedicels 3 to 6 lines long, the conical
sessile stigma slightly bifid. — At Candelaria, Esmeralda County,
Nevada; W. H. Shockley, 1881.

Caulanthus inflatus. Annual, sparingly hispid or glabrous,
erect, simple or at length branched, the stem fistulous and inflated,
1 or 2 feet high : leaves oblong to ovate, all sessile and auriculate,
acutish, entire, 1 to 3 inches long : flowers purple, the glabrous sepals

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 3G5

somewhat saccate at base, 3 or 4 lines long ; petals ligulate, scarcely
exserted : pods nearly terete, 3 or 4 inches long, ascending on pedicels
2 to 4 lines long ; stigma sessile, deeply bifid. — In the Mohave Desert,
California ; collected by J. G. Lemmon in 1880, and by the Parish
Brothers in March, 1882. With the habit of G. crussicaulis.

TiiLASPi Californicum. Biennial, the several stems G to 8
inches high, glabrous : lower leaves oblanceolate, attenuate to a slen-
der petiole, with few teeth, the upper oblong-lanceolate, narrower
toward the base and usually narrowly auriculate : flowers rather small,
the petals 2 lines long: pods oblanceolate, acute at the summit, 4
or 5 lines long; cells 2-5-sceded. — At Kneeland Prairie, Humboldt
County, California, among rocks at 2,500 feet elevation ; discovered
by Mr. Volney Rattan, June, 1882. Differing from the alpine T.
alpestre, which is usually a perennial, in its narrower oblong stem-
leaves and in its longer acute pod, which is exactly that of Ibei-idella.

Cleojiella brevipes. Low and branching (6 inches high or
less), glabrous, leafy : leaves sessile or nearly so, the leaflets narrowly
oblanceolate, setosely apiculate, 2 to 8 lines long : flowers very small,
solitary in all the axils, on curved pedicels about a line long: pod
ovate, pendulous, very shortly stipitate, \\ lines long. — At Camp
Cady in the jMohave Desert, California ; S. B. & W. F. Parish, May,
1882. Very peculiar in its axillary inflorescence, and short pedicels
and stipes.

Claytoxia cordifolta. Stems 4 to 12 inches high from a slender
running rootstock, bearing toward the summit a single pair of sessile
ovate acute leaves about an inch long ; radical leaves broadly cordate,
acutish, the blade 1 or 2 inches long : flowers few (about 6 or 8) upon
slender pedicels in a naked raceme ; petals 3 or 4 lines long, thrice
longer than the rounded sepals. — Collected by Dr. Lyall in 1861 on
the Pend d'Oreille River in N. Idaho, and in Oregon by Rev. R. D.
Nevius in 1872; found by me in 1880 in the mountains north of
Missoula, Montana, in the damp shade of firs and spruces. Nearly
allied to C. Sibirica, differing in the shape of the leaves, the naked
few-flowered raceme, and more rounded sepals.

Claytonia ambigua. Root thickish and fusiform : stems branch-
ing from the base, low, stout and fleshy, leafy : leaves alternate, nar-
rowly oblanceolate, obtuse, 1 or 2 inches long: flowers in axillary
subsessile fascicles or short crowded racemes, with scarious bracts,
the pedicels 1 to 3 lines long ; petals unequal, shorter than the sepals,
which are \h to 2 lines long: stamens 5: capsule ovate-oblong,
shorter than the calyx, 12-15-seeded: seed shining. — Plains at El

366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Rio on the Colorado, S. E. California, by J. G. Lemmon, March,
1881. A peculiar species, with the numerous seeds of a Calandrinia,
but the flowers more like those of Claytonla^ and the number of
stamens constant.

SiLENE Pakishii. Perennial, the leafy stems (4 to G inches high)
clustered upon a thick root, pubescent tbroughout with a short wool
which is longer on the stems and viscid : leaves oblanceolate, acute or
acuminate, 1 or 2 inches long: flowers 3 to 5, approximate and leafy-
bracted, on short petioles ; calyx an inch long, narrowed below, the
acuminate teeth 3 or 4 lines long ; petals white or nearly so, with
a broad claw, the scarcely exserted blade 2-parted and the lobes
deeply bifid into hairy filiform segments with a narrow lateral one on
each side ; appendages broad, truncate and toothed : styles at length
long-exserted : capsule very shortly stipitate, nearly equalling the
calyx: seeds flattened, with a wing-like lacerate double crest. — In
the San Bernardino Mountains, California; L. B. & W. F. Parish,
August, 1881. A well-marked species, allied to S. Hooker i and
S. Callfornica.

SiLENE PLATYOTA. Minutely puberulent, glandular above, the
slender erect or ascending stems 1 \ feet high : leaves oblanceolate,
acute or acuminate, the lower with ciliate winged petioles : peduncles
rather slender, 1-3-flowered : calyx narrow, green-nerved, acutely
toothed, 6 lines long; petals greenish, broadly auricled, the free lobes
of the auricles entire or sublacerate ; blade bifid, the oblong lobes
entire or usually irregularly notched ; appendages oblong, lacerate ;
filaments and claws somewhat villous ; styles and stamens slightly
exserted: capsule oblong, 4 lines long, on a short stipe: seed crested
with a single row of tubercles, the sides tessellated. — In the Cuyamaca
Mountains (Dr. E. Palmer, 1875), in the San Bernardino Mountains
(.J. G. Lemmon, 1879), and in the San Jacinto Mountains (Parish
Brothers). Belonging to the S. Doiiglasii group.

SiLENE PLiCATA.. Rather stout and tall (2 feet high or more),
pubescent with short spreading somewhat glandular hairs : leaves
oblanceolate, or the upper narrowly lanceolate, acute, 3 or 4 inches
long : inflorescence elongated, naked above, the erect peduncles 1-3-
flowered: calyx ovate, with 10 green nerves, 4 lines long, the triangu-
lar teeth a third as long; petals white, a little exserted, the blade
bifid with oblong lobes and narrow acute lateral teeth, the claw broad
and the produced auricles nearly equalling the short-oblong entire
appendages and somewhat folded upon the base of the blade: stamens
and styles included : capsule sessile or nearly so, ovate-oblong, 4 or 5

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 367

lines long: seeds strongly tuberculate on the back, not crested. — On
a peak south of Rucker Valley, Arizona; J. G. Lemmon, 1881.
Allied to S. Thnrheri.

AuENARiA PUsiLLA. A dwarf slender annual, an inch or two
high, resembling A. Californica in its habit and short thick bluntish
leaves, but the narrower lanceolate sepals acute or acuminate and
obscurely 1-nerved, and the petals wanting or very small : capsule
oblong-ovate, as long as the sepals: seeds turgid, smooth. — Collected
on the plains about Yreka, California, by Rev. E. L. Greene, in April,
187G; at White Salmon, Washington Territory, by W. N. Suksdorf,
in 1880; and at The Dalles, Oregon, by J. & T. J. Howell, 1882.
Greene's specimens were referred to A. Californica in Uot. Calif.
2. 435.

AuKNAHiA MACRADENiA. Perennial, with a branched woody root-
stock, the herbaceous stems a foot high, glabrous throughout excepting
the slightly ciliate base of the riiiid linear-subulate pungent leaves,
which are i to 2 inches long: flowers large, on slender often elongated
pedicels ; sepals somewhat fleshy, with scarious margins, ovate, acute,
nerveless, 2 or 3 lines long; petals greenish-white, entire, exserted :
stamens included, the filaments opposite to the sepals with a pair of
large yellowish glands adnate to the base: stigmas subcapitate: capsule
ovate-globose, 1^ lines long. — Near the Mohave River (41 Palmer,
1876), and in the mountains bordering the Mohave Desert (S. B. &
W. F. Parish, May, 1882). Remarkable among the allied perennial
species for the large glands of the staminiferous disk.

Lepigonum gracile. Annual, slender, glabrous, 2 to 4 inches
high: leaves very narrow, 3 to 12 lines long; stipules deltoid: pedicels
ascending, 2 to 4 lines long: sepals fleshy, short, obtuse, h to nearly
1 line long: petals none: capsule ovate, equalling or a little exceed-
ing the calyx : seeds triangular-pyriform, strongly rough-tuberculate,
not margined. — Common on sandy lands near Dallas, Texas (J.
Reverchon), and in dried ponds on mesa land near Wilmington and
Compton, Los Angeles County, California (Rev. J. C. Nevin). It is
nearly allied to the European L. segetale, and also to L. Mcxicaniim,
from which it differs especially in its smaller calyx and capsules, and
more angular and rougher seeds.

Malvastrum Rugelii. Woody-stemmed, erect and branching
(2 or 3 feet high or more), rather sparingly pubescent with straight
appressed forked hairs : leaves ovate to oblong-ovate, abruptly nar-
rowed at base, acutish, acutely serrate, i to 1| inches long, exceeding
the petioles : flowers nearly sessile, solitary or few in the upper axils

368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

and in a short crowded terminal spike : calyx-lobes triangular, acute
or subacuminate, usually closing over the fruit ; corolla apparently
yellow, 2 or 3 lines long : carpels rounded and blunt. — Collected by
Rugel at the mouth of the Manate River, Southwestern Florida, in
1845, and distributed by Shuttle wm'th as a variety of Malva Ameri-
cana, Linn, It was also collected by Dr. Garber in 1877 on the
Miami River, and by A. H. Curtiss on the Mosquito Lagoon, and
distributed by him under the name Meloclda serrata in his third
fascicle. It resembles most nearly M. tricuspidutum, but with the
blunt carpels of M. spicatum.

Malvastrum densiflorum. Perennial, stout, erect and branched,
2 feet high or more, roughly stellate-pubescent : leaves round-cordate,
somewhat 3-lobed, crenately or acutely toothed, 1 to 1 ^ inches in diam-
eter, the petioles usually much shorter : inflorescence dense and very
hispid, the conspicuous bractlets very narrow, hispid, exceeding the
calyx: fruiting calyx 6 to 8 lines long, membranous, the lobes long-
attenuate ; corolla apparently purple, 6 to 8 lines long : stamineal
column very short: carpels smooth and nearly glabrous, obtuse. —
Southern California, at Agua Caliente in the San Jacinto Mountains
(S. B. & W. F. Parish, and W. G. Wright, 1881), and at San Juan
Capistrano (Rev. J. C. Nevin).

Anoda reticulata. Annual, erect, simple or sparingly branched
above, 2 feet high, finely stellate-pubescent: leaves broadly ovate,
truncate or cordate at base, and often more or less hastately lobed,
acute or acutish, dentate, an inch long or less, the upper linear-hastate
and the uppermost reduced to minute bracts : pedicels slender, 1 to 3
inches long: petals blue, 3 lines long, twice longer than the calyx:
carpels 10, truncate above and rounded on the back, with a double
wall, the outer wholly open at the sides, the inner enclosing the seed
and deciduous with it, strongly reticulated and at length perforated,
and dark-colored: seed a line long. — In the Santa Catalina Moun-
tains, Arizona; J. G. Lemmon and C. G. Pringle, May, 1881. Re-
markable for the character of the double-walled carpels, an approach
to which is also found in A. parvijio^a {A. Wrightii) .

Hermannia pauciflora. Branching from the woody base, a foot
high or less, stellately pubescent : leaves ovate to ovate-oblong, cordate
or truncate at base, 6 lines long or less, on short petioles, dentate :
flowers solitary in the axils, on slender pedicels ; the yellow petals
(4 lines long) twice longer than the acutely lobed calyx, which is not
enlarged in fruit : styles distinct or coherent at the apex . capsule 4 or
5 lines long, the dorsal crest of the carpels with short rather blunt

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 369

teeth. — In the JSanta Catalina Mountjiins, Arizona ; C. G. Pringle,
1881. Our other species, H. Tcxanu, Gray, is taller, with the twice
larger reddish flowers more or less pauicled, the calyx-lobes more
acuminate, the petals more abruptly contracted to a comparatively
narrower claw, and the carpels pectinately crested. The narrowed
base of the erect petal is in both species strongly concave or chan-
nelled.

LuPiNus Plattensis. {L. ornatus, Dough, var. f/labratus, Wat-
son.) Stems herbaceous from an underground rootstock ; appressed
silky-villous throughout, with a somewhat glaucous hue : leaflets 7 to
9, spatulate, acutish or obtuse, glabrous above, on rather short petioles :
racemes loose, shortly peduncled ; bracts short, deciduous : flowers
half an inch long, pale blue, with a conspicuous darker spot upon the
standard. — A readily recognized species, common on the Upper Platte
and northward.

LuPiNUS Havakdi. Apparently perennial, the several herbaceous
stems 1 to 1^ feet high, leafy, at length branched, loosely appressed
silky-villous throughout, the pubescence upon the stems mostly short :
leaflets 7, oblanceolate, glabrous above, 4 to 10 lines long, short-peti-
oled ; stipules very narrow, elongated : raceme elongated, the decid-
uous bracts shorter than the narrow slightly gibbous calyx : petals
purple with a light spot on the standard, broad, G lines long : pod
narrowly linear, 12 to 18 lines long by 2 broad, 6-8-seeded. — Hills
near Presidio, W. Texas; Dr. V. Havard, U. S. A., May, 1881,
Allied to Zi. sericeus, L. Sitgreavesii, and some Mexican species, and
the most eastern representative of the group.

Dalea rubescens. {D. nana^ Torr., var, elatior, Gray, PI.
Wright. 1. 46.) With the simple tall erect stems and dense oblong
heads of D. aiirea, but more slender, the leaves pinnately trifoliolate,
and the flowers smaller, the yellow petals becoming purplish. — West-
ern Texas; at the Limpia Pass, 124 Wright, and at Fort Davis, Dr.
V. Havard, 1881.

Dalea scariosa. Glabrous and glaucous, the herbaceous stems
slender and branching: leaflets 7 to 9, cuneate-obovate, obtuse or
refuse, 3 or 4 lines long ; lower half of the rhachis naked : spike
dense, becoming 2 inches long and open in fruit, on a short peduncle ;
bracts thin and greenish, ovate, acuminate, the white margin somewhat
lacerate : calyx slightly pubescent and obscurely ribbed, the acuminate
narrowly deltoid teeth about half the length of the tube and some-
what tomentose on the margin ; petals pink. — Near Albuquerque,
New Mexico; Kev. E. L. Greene, 1877.
VOL. XVII. (n. s. IX.) 24

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Astragalus terminalis. Perennial, canescent with a fine white
appressed pubescence, the slender stems 6 to 10 inches long: leaves
long-petiolate, with broad triangular stipules ; leaflets 6 to 8 pairs,
linear-oblong to oblong-obovate, obtuse, 3 to 5 lines long: raceme an
inch long, open, long-pedunculate : flowers nearly sessile, reflexed",
purplish, 5 lines long: calyx campanulate, the teeth very short and
broad ; keel with a very short blunt purple beak : pod coriaceous, ses-
sile, straight, erect, narrowly oblong and turgid, G lines long, narrowly
channelled on the back and nearly 2-celled, the ventral suture promi-
nent. — Southern Montana, on the gravelly bank of Red Rock Creek,
in July, 1880, near the then terminus of the Utah and Northern Rail-
road ; S. Watson. Nearly allied to A. adsurgens.

Astragalus giganteus. Perennial, the stout erect stems 2 to 3
feet high or more, tomentose : leaves villous-pubescent and subtomen-
tose ; leaflets 5 to 10 pairs, oblong-ovate, acute, 6 to 9 lines long, less
pubescent above ; stipules broad : racemes short and rather few-
flowered, erect, pedunculate: pods 2-celled, coriaceous, ovate, acumi-
nate, somewhat compressed and the ventral suture impressed, sessile,
erect, 9 lines long. — At Fort Davis, Western Texas ; Dr. V. Havard,
1881. Flowers unknown. A striking species, which seems to have
escaped all previous collectors.

Astragalus grandiflorus. Dwarf, densely cespitose and
scarcely caulescent, covered throughout with a subappressed villous
pubescence : leaflets 7 or 9, oblong-obovate to nearly orbicular, 2 to 5
lines long: peduncles shorter than the leaves (1 to l^- inches long),
few-flowered : calyx cylindrical, about 9 lines, the narrow teeth 2
or 3 lines long; petals purplish-red, 16 to 18 lines long, the claws
exserted, and the keel nearly straight and erect : ovary densely white-
silky, sessile, narrowly oblong, 1-celled. — In the San Bernardino
Mountains, toward the Mohave Desert, at 5,000 feet altitude ; S. B. &
W. F. Parish, May, 1882. Evidently belonging to the group of
Eriocarpi, with unusually large reddish flowers.

Astragalus Vaseyi. Near A. Homii and A. crotaJarice, appar-
ently biennial, canescent with appressed silky pubescence, a foot high
or less: leaflets 7 to 10 pairs, obtuse or acutish, mucronate, 3 to 8
lines long : peduncles exceeding the leaves ; raceme rather loose :
calyx-teeth acuminate-deltoid, little shorter than the campanulate tube ;
petals purple or purplish, 4 lines long : ovary silky ; pod membranous,
ovate-oblong with a straight ventral suture, sessile, usually reflexed,
finely pubescent, about 9 lines long. — At Mountain Springs, San
Diego County, California, by G. R. Vasey, 1880, and by several col-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 371

lectors since from various localities in the mountains of San Bernard-
ino and San Diego Counties.

Astragalus conjunctus. Perennial, with very short stems,
very sparingly appressed-pubescent : leaflets 5 to 10 pairs on an elon-
gated rhachis, linear, 4 to 6 lines long: peduncles elongated (6 to 12
inches high), bearing an open few-flowered raceme; pedicels very
short: calyx narrowly tubular, 3 or 4 lines long, dark-pubescent, with
short narrow teeth; petals pale purple, 6 to 8 lines long: pod coria-
ceous and rugose, erect, sessile, narrowly oblong and nearly straight,
acuminate, 1-celled with the dorsal suture impressed, 9 to 12 lines
long. — In John Day Valley, Oregon (J. Howell, in May, 1880), and
on sterile rocky ridges in Baker County, by W. C. Cusick, 1881.

Lathyrus Cusickii. Glabrous or sparingly pubescent, slender,
from a slender perennial rootstock, h to 2 feet high, without tendrils :
stipules narrowly semisagittate ; leaflets 2 or 3 pairs, linear-lanceolate
to narrowly linear, acute or acutish and mucronate, 2 or 3 inches long :
peduncles equalling or exceeding the leaves, 2-3- (rarely 5-) flowered :
corolla white, 10 to 12 lines long; the calyx 3 or 4 lines long, with
nearly equal teeth, pod attenuate to a narrow base, l^ to 2 inches
long by 3 lines broad : hilum short. — On dry mountain slopes, Union
County, Oregon ; W. C. Cusick. Resembling narrow long-leaved
forms of L. palustris, but with much larger white flowers, the tendrils
wholly wanting, and the hilum of the seed much shorter.

Desmanthus obtusus. Decumbent, finely pubescent: pinnae
usually two pairs, upon a very short rhachis (rarely h inch long) ;
leaflets oblong, veined : head small and few-flowered, on peduncles
much exceeding the leaves (1 to 2}, inches long) : pods narrowly linear
(8 to 16 lines long), straight, obtuse or slightly narrowed at base, ob-
tuse and apiculate at the apex, — Western Texas ; Dr. V. Havard,
August, 1881. Allied to D. reiicidaius, Benth. ; see page 349.

IvESiA Utahensis. Alpine, the short caudex densely covered
with the remains of dead leaves, viscid-pubescent but the pubescence
less glandular above, the prostrate stems |- to 1| feet long: leaves
mostly radical, about 2 inches long, with numerous approximate 3-5-
parted leaflets, the segments oblong-oblanceolate, obtuse, 1 or 2 lines
long ; cauline leaves few, short and with few nearly entire leaflets ;
stipules large, ovate: inflorescence somewhat dense: calyx 1^ to 2
lines long, the teeth equalling or exceeding the tube, and the accessory
lobes narrow ; petals white or pinkish, narrowly spatulate, slightly
exceeding the sepals : stamens 10 : pistils 1 to 3, on a very villous
receptacle. — On the summit of Bald Mountain in the "Wahsatch

372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

range, above Alta, at over 12,000 feet altitude; Marcus E. Jones,
August, 1879.

Saxifraga eriophora. Radical leaves oblong-ovate, dentate,
obtuse, glabrous above, reddish and more or less densely rufous-
tomentose beneath, the broad petiole equalling the blade (about | inch
long) and ciliate with long woolly hairs : scaj^e glandular-pubescent,
the flowers subcymose, with linear-lanceolate bracts: calyx glabrate,
broadly campanulate, the purplish lobes broad and rounded, half the
length of the spatulate pinkish petals : ovary 2-parted, adnate to the
calyx at base. — On the northern slope of the Santa Catalina Moun-
tains, Arizona, at 6,000 feet altitude ; J. G. Lemmon, May, 1881.
Resembling S. Virginiensis and S. nivalis.

Sedum divergens. Perennial, the rather stout stem 2 to 4 inches
high : lower leaves broadly ovate or obovate, sessile, 3 or 4 lines
long, the cauline narrower and somewhat spatulate : inflorescence
close, with short branches : flowei's yellow, pedicellate, the lanceolate
petals (3 lines long) thrice longer than the triangular-ovate sepals,
and equalling the stamens : carpels united at base, very widely diver-
gent above. — In the Cascade Mountains, Washington Territor}' ; on
Mount Adams, by W. N. Suksdorf, September, 1880, and by myself
near the summit of Yakima Pass, October, 1880.

Sedum divaricatum. Perennial and cespitose, with slender
branching rootstocks, the lower rosulate leaves oblauceolate, obtuse
or acutish, roughish on the margin, 6 lines long or less: flowering
stems 2 to 8 inches high, with scattered oblanceolate leaves, or the
upper leaves and bracts lanceolate : inflorescence umbellate, the
branches once forked : flowers nearly sessile, bright yellow, with
short lanceolate sepals and narrowly lanceolate acuminate petals : car-
pels broadly divergent above the united bases. — Collected by W. C.
Cusick in Union County, Oregon. These two species resemble in
their spreading carpels S. Douglasii, which is distinguished by its
lanceolate acuminate leaves.

Cotyledon viscida. Shortly caulescent : leaves numerous and
very viscid, linear to linear-lanceolate, attenuate upward and obtusely
triquetrous, the outer about 3 inches long : flowering stems slender,
a foot high, with similar leaves | inch long : flowers in a spreading
cymose panicle, on pedicels 1 or 2 lines long ; sepals purplish, ovate-
lanceolate, 1-|- lines long, the reddish corolla cleft to below the
middle, 4 lines long and equalling the stamens and styles. — Abundant
on rocks near the Hot Springs at Sau Juan Capistrano, Los Angeles
County, California; Rev. J. C. Nevin, October, 1881.

i

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 373

Cotyledon Oregonensis. Flowering stems 6 to 10 inches high,
from a running rootstock, tlie rosulate basal leaves spatulate, obtuse,
8 to 15 lines long; cauline leaves oblong-spatulate, 6 lines long or
less: peduncles axillary along the upper stem, 1 to 1 inch long, bear-
ing short simple or compound few-flowered racemes ; pedicels a line
or two long, with small bractlets : sepals deltoid, short ; petals pale
yellow, united to below the middle, 4 lines long : stamens slightly
shorter. — Found in the Cascade Mountains, Northern Oregon, by
J. & T. J. Howell, June, 1880. A peculiar species, both in its habitat
and in its inflorescence.

CExOTiiERA (Cuylismia) hetekochroma. Annual, erect (a foot
high), sparingly branched above, glandular-pubescent thi-oughout :
leaves ovate-lanceolate (an inch long or less), dentate or nearly
entire, the villous pubescence less glandular ; floral bracts minute :
flowers in nearly strict racemes, erect on short slender pedicels ,
calyx-tube narrowly obconical {l^ lines long), about equalling the
lobes ; petals purple with whitish base : capsule clavate, 4 lines long :
seeds oblong-obovate. — At Candelaria, Esmeralda County, Nevada ;
W. II. Shockley, 1881.

CEnothera (Sph^ro stigma) refracta. Annual, erect, diffusely
branching, about a foot high, somewhat glandular-puberulent : leaves
narrowly lanceolate to linear, slightly sinuate-toothed, 1 or 2 inches
long : flowers sessile, axillary and spicate, the upper approximate and
nodding in bud : calyx-tube narrowly obconic, 2 to 2| lines long ;
petals pale-yellow, 2 or 3 lines long : stigma large and spherical, ex-
serted : capsule slender, nearly terete, striate, straight or somewhat
curved, 10 to 18 lines long, at length usually abruptly reflexed : seeds
linear, nearly white. — Southern California to Southern Utah, from
several collectors. First collected by Dr. Bigelow near the Colorado
( (E. dentata, Torr. in Pacif. R. Rep. 4. 87, in part), and distributed as
(E. strigidosa, var., in Palmer's collection of 1876 in Arizona and S.
Utah (n. 1G5). It has also been mistaken for (E. alyssoides, and is in
some respects intermediate between the two species.

EcniNOCYSTis ( ?) PARViFLORA. Stem very slender, glabrous :
leaves scabrous above, an inch long or less, cordate, acute, deeply 3-
lobed, the lateral lobes somewhat quadrate : tendrils not branched :
flowers numerous, minute, white, in very slender sessile panicled
racemes, the pistillate solitary in the axils of the panicle and shortly
pedicellate ; corolla rotate, deeply 5-cleft, a line wide : anthers 3,
nearly sessile, united, recurved : ovary semi-obovate, with a long fili-
form beak (the whole 3 lines long), compressed, sparingly echiuate,

374 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

1-celled and 1-ovuled ; ovule erect : stigma capitate, scarcely lobed.
— In the San Bernardino Mountains, California; W. G. Wright,
1880. An apparent congener of Elaterium Bigelovii, "Watson, which
is referred to Echinocystis by Cogniaux. His reference is here fol-
lowed provisionally, but the species are probably to be separated as a
distinct genus.

Deweya vestita. Acaulescent, with a stout rootstock, densely
covered throughout with white soft spreading hairs : leaves com-
poundly pinnate, the numerous crowded confluent segments oblong,
obtuse or acute, a line or two long: pedimcles about equalling the
leaves, 2 or 3 inches high ; involucre none ; rays numerous, stout,
nearly an inch long ; bracts of the involucels several, short, lanceo-
late ; sterile secondary rays slender, -^ inch long or more : fruit ses.-^ile
or nearly so, pubescent, 2^- lines long. — Summit of Mount Baldy,
near San Bernardino, California ; S. B. & W. F. Parish, August,
1880. A very peculiar species.

Angelica Ltallii. Stout, 4 or 5 feet high, glabrous : leaves
ternate-quinate, the leaflets 3 or 4 inches long (or in the upper leaves
1 to 3 inches), lanceolate, acute or acutish, mostly cuneate at base, une-
qually dentate : umbels 30-50-rayed, wholly naked; rays veiy unequal
(1 to 3 inches long) : fruit glabrous, 2 lines long, the dorsal ribs thick
and corky. — Collected by Dr. Lyall in the Galton and Cascade
Mountains, near the British Boundary, in 1859 and 1861 ; by Rev. R.
D. Nevius in Oregon, in 1873; and by myself in the mountains near
Missoula, Montana, in 1880. A. genuflexa, Nutt., from Oregon
and Washmgton Territory, is a more slender species, more or less
rough-pubescent, especially upon the inflorescence, with more acumi-
nate iuoisely toothed leaflets, the umbellets involncellate, and the
fruit larger. A. arguta, Nutt., reported by him from Vancouver
Island, has not since been collected. It is described as glabrous, with
small ovate ratlier acute leaflets and large oblong-elliptical fruit. A. ( ?)
verticillata, Hook., judging from the description given, -probably
belongs to some other genus.

LoNiCERA Utahensis, Watson. It appears probable that the
single flower collected with the original specimens, upon whose
characters the species was chiefly based, was an abnormal one.
Otherwise the species closely resembles L. ciliata, but differs in its
more oblong and always obtuse leaves. It ranges from Southern
Utah to Northvvestern Montana and Northern Idaho, and to the Blue
Mountains of Oregon, and includes all the so-called L. ciliata of that
region.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 375

DouGLASiA DENTATA. Rather stout, branching, canescent with
a fine mostly dense pubescence : leaves rosulate at the nodes, thick,
oblong, obtusish, mostly with 1 to 3 blunt teeth on each side toward
the summit, 4 to 6 lines long : peduncle (an inch long) bearing a
simple few-flowered umbel ; pedicels very unequal (2 to 1 2 lines long) :
calyx narrowed at base, 3 lines long in fruit, the acuminate lobes
nearly as long as the tube : capsule oblong, slightly stipitate, equalling
the calyx-tube. — In the Cascade INIountains, on a dry ridge above
Peshaston Canon, Yakimah County, Washington Territory ; collected
by myself, in fruit, October, 1880. Near D. Iccvigata, Gray.

Pedicularis FuuBisiiiiE. Stem simple or sparingly branched,
leafy, pubescent, about 3 feet high : lower leaves on slender petioles,
more or less completely pinnate, with pinnatifid segments, the upper
sessile and pinnatifid ; lobes acutely toothed, slightly white-margined ;
bracts very broadly ovate, cuneate at base, irregularly laciniate : calyx
short (3 or 4 lines long), the five lanceolate teeth usually laciniate at
the apex ; corolla greenish yellow, narrow, 8 lines long, the suberect
galea a little exceeding the lip, its cucullate summit truncate and often
shortly bicuspidate : capsule ovate, oblique, about equalling the calyx:
seeds oblong-ovate, flattened and somewhat wing-margined, the testa
loose, light-colored, and finely rectangular-pitted. — On wet banks of
the St. John's River, at Van Buren, Arostook County, Maine, and
extending along the river for sixty miles. Dedicated to its discoverer,
Miss Kate Furbish, whose careful study of the flora of her State, and
perseverance and success in illustrating it by colored drawings of all
the species, richly deserve an appropriate recognition. The species
is allied to P. Canadensis and P. bracteosa. It may be worth the
while to note the differences in the seeds of these species, which in
P. Canadensis are ovate and turgid, with a close thin brownish testa,
and in P. bracteosa are oblong, somewhat concavo-convex, and with
3 to 5 strong corky longitudinal ribs.

MiRABiLis TENUiLOBA, Viscid-pubescent, and resembling M.
Californica, from which it may be distinguished by its more acute
or somewhat acuminate cordate leaves, and by the larger involucre (4
or 5 lines long), cleft to or below the middle, the segments narrowly
lanceolate. — In San Bernardino County, California ; W. G. Wright,
1880.

OxYBAPHCs LiNEARiFOLius. Slender, 2 feet high, with spreading
branches from alternate axils, glabrous excepting the pubescent pe-
duncles, involucres and flowers : leaves linear, attenuate to the base,
the lower 3 or 4 inches long : peduncles very slender, spreading or

376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

reflexed, 2 to 4 lines long : involucre 1-2-flowered, becoming 6 lines
broad, cleft to below the middle, the lobes acute or acuminate : peri-
anth greenish, campanulate, 2 or 3 lines long : stamens 5 : fruit ob-
long-obovate, pubescent, very prominently 5-costate, the costaj very
thick and nearly contiguous. — Plains near Apache Pass, in the Chir-
icahua Mountains, Arizona; J. G. Lemmon, 1881. Resembling
forms of 0. nyctagineiis, but more slender and with more leafy and
less pubescent inflorescence, the more deeply and acutely lobed invo-
lucre with fewer flowers, and the fruit more prominently ribbed.

BoERHAAViA PTEROCARPA. Annual, branching from the base,
scabrous-puberulent, a foot high or less : leaves ovate to oblong-lanceo-
late, obtuse or acutish, cuneate at base, entire or somewhat sinuate-
toothed, I to 1 inch long : peduncles axillary and terminal, short,
bearing an umbel of 3 to 6 white or pinkish flowers : fruit ob pyrami-
dal, attenuate to the very short pedicel, truncate, 3-5-sided and winged
at the angles, the sides transversely rugose. — At Apache Pass, Ari-
zona ; J. G. Lemmon, 1881. Remarkable for its winged fruit.

Amarantus (Amblogyne) venulosds. Dioecious, nearly gla-
brous, erect, branching, leafy, 1 to 3 feet high : leaves linear-lanceo-
late, attenuate to a slender petiole, the blade 1 or 2 inches long :
pistillate flowers in close axillary glomerate panicles ; sepals twice
longer than the single small ovate acute bract, becoming thickened at
the rather narrow base, broadly dilated and rounded above, entire or
emarginate or somewhat denticulate, and marked with green veins :
seed I of a line broad. — Collected by Thurber at Santa Cruz, Sonora
(Sarratia Berlandieri, var. dentieulata, Torr. in Bot. Mex. Bound.
179), and in Rucker Valley and Apache Pass, Arizona, by J. G.
Lemmon, 1881. Staminate plants not seen.

AcNiDA (Montelia) Floridana. Annual, tall and slender,
diffusely branched : leaves linear to narrowly lanceolate, attenuate to
a slender petiole : spikes elongated and very slender, interrupted ;
bracts short (scarcely |- line long), acute or shortly acuminate : utricle
very thin, angled and somewhat tuberculate, at length bursting irregu-
larly : seeds black and shining, o\)tusely margined, f of a line broad.
— At Key West (Blodgett), on the sandy coast at North Clear Water
Pass (Chapman), and in Southern Florida also by Dr. Garber and A.
H. Curtiss. A. tuherculata, Gray, diflfers in its stouter habit, larger
and broader leaves, closer and stouter spikes, and longer and more
attenuate acuminate bracts.

Cladothrix oblongifolia. Stems procumbent, often 2 feet long,
the branches ascending, and the whole plant covered with a very

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 377

dense persistent white stellate pubescence : leaves ovate-oblong or
oblanceolate, attenuate to a slender or short petiole, acutisli : llowers
clustered, white. — On the banks of the Colorado, near Chinwiey Peak
(Dr. Newberry) and at Yuma (C. G. Pringle), and in the Mohave
Desert (S. B. & W. F. Parish). Differing from 0. lanuginosa, Nutt.
(to which Newberry's specimen is referred in Ives' Report and in
the Botany of California), in its less prostrate habit, denser and more
persistent pubescence, narrower leaves more attenuate at base, and
rather smaller and paler flowers.

Atriplex orbicularis. Monoecious, perennial and somewhat
woody at base, 3 to 4 feet high, subcanescent with very fine pubes-
cence : leaves alternate, oblong-obovate, an inch long or more, retuse
or obtuse and apiculate, attenuate to a very short slender petiole : in-
florescence paniculate, naked or leafy below, the small dense staminate
clusters with the pistillate flowers and in slender terminal moniliform
spikes; pistillate flowers in sessile clusters: fruiting bracts herbaceous,
thin, orbicular and compressed, somewhat coherent toward the base,
entire, not appendaged on the back, 2 or 3 lines in diameter : ovary
sessile ; styles included : seed | line broad : radicle superior. — At
Santa Monica, California, on the sea-shore at the base of the bluffs ;
S. B. & W. F. Parish, October, 1881. A strongly marked species,
much resembling A. hortensis, from which it is separated especially
by the dense heads of larger male flowers, the sessile ovary, and supe-
rior radicle.

Atriplex Parishii. Monoecious, annual (?), prostrate, diff'usely
branched and leafy throughout, the slender stems woolly-pubescent,
6 to 10 inches long: leaves alternate, farinose, small (2 lines long or
less), sessile, ovate, acutish : pistillate and staminate flowers together,
usually a pair of each in each axil ; calyx 4-parted ; bracts triangular-
hastate, becoming l-J- lines long in fruit and somewhat rigid, the
toothed lobes and acutish apex herbaceous : styles long and exserted :
seed black, -J- line broad : radicle superior. — Costa Station, Los
Angeles County, California, in alkaline soil ; S. B. & W. F. Parish,
October, 1881. Of the A. patula group.

Atriplex fasciculata. Monoecious, annual, branching from
the base, scurfy -pubescent throughout, the ascending leafy stems 6
inches high or less : leaves alternate, oblanceolate, sessile, entire, ob-
tuse or acutish, 3 to 5 lines long: flowers fascicled in all the axils, the
staminate very small and mingled with the pistillate ; fruiting bracts
orbicular, compressed and coherent, very nearly sessile and often
deflexed, nearly 1^ lines broad, not appendaged upon the back, the

378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

narrow herbaceous margin minutely and mostly bluntly toothed. —
Near Fish Ponds, Mohave Desert; S. B. & W. F. Parish, May,
1882. Resembling A. elegans, but the fruiting bracts much less
conspicuously toothed.

Atriplex Paiiryi. Dioecious (?), perennial and woody, much
branched and with rigid spinosely tipped slender divaricate leafy
branchlets, white-scurfy throughout : leaves thick, sessile, cordate or
broadly ovate, acute, 2 to 4 lines long : pistillate flowers 1 to 4 in the
axils ; bracts sessile, united below into a compressed-campanulate sac,
becoming thick and rigid, bordered above by the broader rounded fi'ce
margins, the whole about 1| lines long in fruit and the margins some-
what more in breadth. — Near Colton, California ; Dr. C. C. Parry,
1881. Resembling A. confertiflora, but with much smaller fruiting
bracts, and their margins more broadly dilated in proportion.

KociiiA Californica. Silky-pubescent and subtomentose through-
out, much branched and the branches divergent : leaves linear-oblong,
5 to 6 (on the branches 2 to 4) lines long, about a line broad : flowers
1 to 5 in the axils, the calyx developing a wing about 3 lines broad.
— Southern California; near Colton (C. C. Parry, 1881), and at
Rabbit Springs, San Bernardino County (S. B. & "W. F. Parish,
May, 1882). Readily distinguished from K. Americana by its more
diffusely branched habit and its proportionately broader leaves.

Polygonum (Avicularia) intermedium, Nutt., in herb. Annual,
glabrous or somewhat rough-puberulent, much branched from the
base, the slender reddish quadrangular branches decumbent or pro-
cumbent, a foot long or less : leaves linear-lanceolate, acute, ^ to 1
inch long ; the acuminate triangular sheathing stipules entire or finally
lacerate : flowers axillary and in leafy-bracteate spikes, small (a line
long or less), rarely reflexed in fruit: stamens 8. — On bluffs of the
Columbia River, Oregon ; C. G. Pringle, October, 1881, and by
Nuttall, probably in the same region. Resembling P. coarctatiim, but
with much smaller flowers.

Eriogonum (Ganysma) apiculatum. Annual, slender, some-
what branched from the base, a foot liigh, nearly glabrous, the branches
slightly glandular: leaves all radical, slightly hispid, spatulate, 1|
inches long : jjedicels slender, spreading, 2 or 3 lines long, or the alar
erect and longer: involucres turbinate-campanulate, nearly a line long:
flowers nearly glabrous, pinkish, a line long, the outer segments obcor-
date, the inner oblong-obovate and emarginate, all apiculate in the
sinus. — On the San Jacinto Mountains, at about 9,000 feet altitude ;
Parish Brothers, July, 1881. Of the E. tricJiopodum group.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 379

Ertogonum PARisnii. Of the same group, and resembling the last
in its foliage, glaucous, somewhat viscid witli mostly stipitate glands,
the ^ or 3 stems very diffusely branched above the first node, about a
span high: pedicels very slender, spreading, 1 to 3 lines long: invo-
lucres turbinate-campanulate, ^ of a line long or less : flowers very
small (J line long), red, minutely pubescent, the outer segments oblong-
lanceolate, acute, the inner broadly oblong-spatulate and shortly apicu-
late. — Collected in the San Bernardino Mountains, also by the Paribh
Brothers, in August, 1881.

Eriogonom (Oregoxium) delicatulum. Of the § Corymbosa,
annual, very slender, low (3 to 5 inches high), glabrous above the
base : leaves radical, tomentose, round to oblong, 1 to 3 lines long,
with slender petioles : involucres narrowly turbinate, obscurely nerved,
a line long: flowers yellow, very small: akene soon exserted, a half
longer than the perianth. — In the Mohave Desert ; Dr. C. C. Parry,
1881. Resembling E. Muhavense, but smaller and more slender,
with narrower and less sti'ongly nerved involucres, and the akenes
exserted.

Eriogonum molestum. Resembling E. virgatum, slender, gla-
brous excepting the leaves, 1 to 3 feet high : leaves all radical, reni-
form to cordate or rounded, densely white-tomentose at least beneath,
about an inch broad : involucres few and distant, rarely 2 or 3 together,
2 to 3 lines long : flowers white or pinkish. — Apparently frequent in
the mountains of Southern California, from Los Angeles County to
San Diego ; collected by Palmer, D. Cleveland, Parish Brothers,
Rev. J. C. Xevin, &c.

Chorizaxthe cdspidata. Prostrate, villous-pubescent, with leafy
bracts : leaves narrowly oblanceolate, an inch long or less : floral
bracts acerose: involucres numerous, loosely cymosely clustered, a line
long, 6-toothed, without scarious margins, the alternate teeth shorter,
and all armed with hooked awns : flower nearly sessile, villous,
pinkish ; lobes oblong, nearly equal, acutish, strongly nerved and the
nerve excurrent as a short cusp. — Near San Francisco ; Marcus E.
Jones, 1881 (n. 238G). Allied to C. Parryi.

CoRALLORHizA Arizoxica. Stem stout (li feet high), with 6 to
8 short sheathing leaf-scales, 10-lo-flovvered : flowers large, spurless
and scarcely at all gibbous, the sepals and petals (6 to 8 lines long)
several-nerved ; lip dilated and strongly nerved, with 5 prominent
ridges down the centre, 3-lobed above, the middle lobe undulate on
the margin and somewhat cucullate : column a third shorter than the
sepals, narrowly margined : capsule 6 to 8 lines long, narrowed to a

380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

peJicel about equalling the bract. — In rocky places on the Santa
Rita Mountains, Arizona ; C. G. Pringle, July, 1881. Peculiar in the
very slight gibbosity of the perianth, and in the number of ridges and
strong veining of the lip.

CvPKiPEDiuii FASCICULATUM, Kellogg, in herb. Dwarf (2 to 6
inches high), the villous-pubesceut stem scariously sheathed at base
and bearing a pair of nearly opposite ovate acutish leaves (2 to 4
inches long): peduncle viscid-pubescent, i^ to 1|^ inches long, with a
small lanceolate bract in the middle : flowers solitary, or usually sev-
eral in a terminal cluster, bracteate, greenish : sepals and petals lanceo-
late, acuminate, 6 to 8 lines long, brown-veined, the lower sepals
wholly united or very nearly so ; lip depressed-ovate, greenish-yellow
with brown-purple margin, 4 or 5 lines long : sterile anther oblong,
obtuse, equalling the stigma. — Collected by W. N. Suksdorf on the
White Salmon River, Washington Territory, above the falls, in May,
1880; by Mrs. R. M. Austin in May, 1881, near PrattviJle, Plumas
County, California ; and at some time previous by Mr. Bradley, prob-
ably in the mountains of Del Norte County. Resembling C. guttatum,
of Alaska.

Iris tenuis. Rootstock very slender (a line or two thick) : stems
8 to 10 inches high, with 2 or 3 bract-like leaves 2 or 3 inches long,
2-flowered ; the longer leaves of the sterile branches of the rootstock
equalling the stems and 4 to 6 lines broad : bracts contiguous, the
longer about equalling the slender peduncles (2 to 4 inches long) :
flowers "white, lightly striped and blotched with pale yellow and
purple;" perianth-tube 2 or 3 lines long, the segments naked, slightly
spreading, oblong-spatulate, the outer 15 lines long, a little exceeding
the emarginate inner ones : ovary 3 lines long. — Discovered by L. F.
Henderson in 1881 on Eagle Creek, a branch of the Clackamas River,
Oregon.

Allium Brandegei. Bulbs small, the reticulation of the coats
horizontally oblong (as in A. anceps) : leaves 2, exceeding the angular
scape, 4 inches long by 1 or 2 lines wide : pedicels slender, equal,
about 4 lines long: flowers rose-colored, the broadly lanceolate acute
segments 3 or 4 lines long, nearly twice longer than the stamens :
ovary not crested. — A pretty species, of the A. Douglasii group,
found by T. S. Brandegee in the Elk Mountains, Colorado, where he
reports it to be frequent.

Allium Parishii. Bulbs with numerous reddish-brown coats,
without reticulation (or rarely minute and transversely short-oblong) :
scape rather stout, 4 to G inches high, with a single sheathing linear

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 381

elongated leaf: spathe-valves 2, broadly ovate : pedicels few (G to 12),
short and stout : petals bright rose-color, G to 8 lines long, lanceolate,
acuminate, twice longer than the stamens : filaments lanceolate : crests
prominent, acutish, irregularly toothed : stigma somewhat lobetl. —
lu the mountains bordering the INIohave Desert, near Cushenberry
Springs; Parish Brothers, May, 1882. A showy species of the
A. cristatiim group, with unusually large flowers.

BnoDi.EA STELLARis. Resembling B. minor: leaves nearly terete :
stems 2 to 6 inches high, from small fibrous-coated bulbs, bearing
a 3-6-flowered umbel; pedicels unequal, very short: perianth narrow
at base, 6 to 10 lines long, the greenish tube nearly equalling the
deep-purple segments : filaments very short, winged on each side, the
broadly oblong appendages half the length of the anther, which is
H lines long and shorter than the white deeply emarginate staminodia:
ovary attenuate to a short stipe, acute, the cells G-8-ovuled: capsule
nearly equalling the perianth. — On high mountain sides near Ukiah,
Mendocino County, California ; collected by Mr. Carl Purdy, in June,
1881, who suggests the name with reference to the radiate appearance
of the scapes and pedicels. Distinguished by the winged filaments,
which resemble the corresponding ones of B. capitata.

BuoDi^A FiLiFOLiA. Leaves very narrow (| line broad or less),
about equalling the scape (a span high) : pedicels unequal, \ to nearly
2 inches long : perianth 6 to 9 lines long, the broadly oblong segments
exceeding the rather narrow tube, the outer segments mucronate :
anthers 3, sessile, somewhat sagittate at base, 2 lines long, nearly
twice longer than the triangular staminodia : ovary sessile ; cells 2-
ovuled : capsule oblong-obovate, 3 lines long. — Collected near San
Bernardino by S. B. & W. F. Parish, in 1880, as also by G. R.
Vasey. Distinguished by the short staminodia.

Calochortus longebarbatus. Stem slender, nearly a foot
high, bulbiferous near the base, with 1 or 2 narrow radical leaves,
2-branched and usually 2-flowered at the summit : pedicels erect in
flower and fruit, or nearly so : petals lilac, yellowish at base, an inch
long, obovate, erose-denticulate at the rounded summit, with a broad
glandular pit bordered above by very long flexuous hairs, otherwise
nearly naked : anthers narrowly oblong, obtuse, nearly 2 lines long :
capsule broadly ovate and winged, 6 to 10 lines long, — In low grassy
grounds. Falcon Valley, Klickitat County, Washington Territory;
W. N. Suksdorf, July, 1881. Allied to C. nitidus.

Tradescantia Floridana. Stems very slender, procumbent and
matted, rooting at the lower joints, glabrous : leaves ovate-lanceolate,

382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

acute, 8 to 10 lines long, thin and glabrous, minutely clliolate, the
scarious sheaths narrow and ciliate : peduncles usually terminal, 1 or
2, glabrous ; umbel 3-8-flowered, i.nvolucrate with small ovate or
lanceolate bracts ; pedicels glandular-pubescent, 1 to 3 lines long :
sepals slightly pubescent, purplish, a line long, a little shorter than
the white petals : filaments naked ; anther-cells closely contiguous :
style stout, as long as the oblong-ovate ovary. — In damp shade,
Central Florida, in St. John's and Sumter Counties, &e., collected
by Miss Mary C. Reynolds, in 1878, and by J. Donuell Smith and
A. H. Curtiss. Referred to T. gracilis, HBK., by C. B. Clarke in his
revision of the order, from which it is clearly distinct, that species
having bearded filaments and anther-cells widely separated upon a
broad arcuate connective, broad and densely ciliate sheaths, rougher
leaves, &c.

CyPERUS SERRULATUS. Perennial, a foot high or less, the smooth
stem exceeding the flat rough-edged leaves : involucral bracts 3 or 4,
very scabrous-serrulate on the margin, mostly exceeding the subcap-
itate umbel : spikelets numerous, on very short rays, linear-oblong,
4 to 12 lines long, the spreading greenish acute scales flattened and
acutely carinate, not decurrent on the rhachis, the keel serrulate toward
the apex : nutlet triangular, oblanceolate, acutish, narrowing down-
ward to a substipitate base, | line long. — Received from Dr. George
Vasey as collected in Placer County, California, in October, 1880.

niOCEEDINGS.

Seven hundred and forty-second Meeting.

May 24, 1881. — Annual Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Treasurer and Librarian presented their annual reports.

Tlie following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Alvan Graham Clark, of Cambridge, to be a Resident Fel-
low in Class I., Section 2.

Francis Blake, of Anburndale, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class I., Section 3.

Lucien Carr, of Cambridge, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class III., Section 2.

Fordyce Barker, of New York, to be an Associate Fellow
in Class 11., Section 4.

John Shaw Billings, of Washington, to be an Associate
Fellow in Class II., Section 4.

Jacob M. DaCosta, of Philadelphia, to be an Associate
Fellow in Class II., Section 4.

Alfred Stille, of Philadelphia, to be an Associate Fellow in
Class II., Section 4.

Manning Ferguson Force, of Cincinnati, to be an Associate
Fellow in Class III., Section 3.

William Graham Sumner, of New Haven, to be an Associ-
ate Fellow in Class III., Section 3.

William Stubbs, of Oxford, to be a Foreign Honorary
Member in Class III., Section 3, in place of the late Thomas
Carlyle.

384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The annual election resulted in the choice of the following
officers : —

Joseph Lovering, President.
Oliver W. Holmes, Vice-President.
JosiAH P. Cooke, Corresponding Secretary.
John Trowbridge, Recording Secretary,
Theodore Lyman, Treasurer.
Samuel H. Scudder, Librarian.

Council.

Wolcott Gibbs,- \

Edward C. Pickering, > of Class I.

Charles W. Eliot, )

Henry W. Williams, ^

George L. Goodale, > of Class II.

Henry P. Bowditch, )

Francis J: Child, \

Charles G. Loring, \ of Class III.

Edward Atkinson, )

Rumford Committee.

George B. Clark. Joseph Lovering,

JosiAH P. Cooke, John M. Ordway,

Wolcott Gibbs, Edward C. Pickering,

John Trowbridge.

Member of Committee of Finance.
Thomas T. Bouvie.

On the motion of the Corresponding Secretary it was
Voted, That when this meeting adjourn, it adjourn to the
second Wednesday in June next.

The following papers were presented by title : —

" The Spectrum of Arsenic." By O. M. W. Huntington.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 385

" Researches on the Compound Inorganic Acids." Paper
No. 3. By Wolcott Gibbs.

" Spectra of Celestial Objects." By Edward C. Pickering.

Seven hundred and forty-third Meeting.

June 8, 1881. — Adjourned Annual Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President appointed the following standing commit-
tees : —

Committee of Publication.

Alexander Agassiz, Josiah P. Cooke,

John Trowbridge.

Committee on the Library.

Henry P. Bowditch, William R. Nichols.

Edward C. Pickering.

Auditing Committee.
Henry G. Denny, Robert W. Hooper.

The Chairman of the Rumford Committee presented the
following Annual Report : —

"Daring the last year (May 1880-May 1881) investigations have
been made by members of the Committee, individually or collectively,
on the Magnetizing and Demagnetizing of Metals ; on Atmospheric
Refraction ; on the Dynamo-electric Machine ; and by Professor
Langley on Radiant Energy, with his new instrument, the Bolometer.
Mr. Edmands has been employed to do some additional work on the
measurements of Rutherfurd's Photographic Spectrum, and on a com-
parison of observations with the spectrometer.
VOL. XVII. (n. s. IX.) 25

386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

" The Committee have authorized the payment by the Treasurer of
the following sums out of the income of the Rumford Fund : —

To Professor Trowbridge for apparatus, &c., for

magnetic experiments, $97 65

To Dr, Gibbs for a new dynamo-machine, . . . 115 86
To Professor Langley for apparatus, &c., ... . 300 00
To Mr. Edmands for work on Rutherfurd's photo-
graph, 4 31

To Mr. Edmands for work on spectrometer, . . 30 00
To Philadelphia Mint for medals (including en-
graving and case), 359 79

To Mr. Edmands for work on Atmospheric Re-
fraction, 24 36

Total, $931 97

" The Committee have also authorized the payment from the Rum-
ford Fund of that portion of Mr. Wilson's bill, amounting to $286.23,
which is charged for the printing of the papers 1, 2, 7, 10, 13, 18, 21,
and 22, in Volume XVI. of the Proceedings of the Academy, these
being on subjects connected with Light or Heat ; and also the pay-
ment of $400.00, at the order of the Librarian, for the purchase of
books on Light or Heat.

" Respectfully submitted,

"Joseph Lovering, Chairman.
" Boston, June 8, 1881."

In accordance with the recommendation of the Rumford
Committee, one thousand dollars ($1000) were appropriated
from the income of the Rumford Fund for investigations on
Light and Heat during the current year.

On the motion of the Treasurer it was

Voted, to appropriate : —

For publishing Proceedings, .... $1100

For publishing Memoirs, 900

For Books and Binding, 1250

For General Expenses, 2200

$5450
TRe following paper was presented by title : —
" Eclipses of Jupiter's Satellites." By Edward C. Piokering.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 387

Seven hundred and forty-fourth Meeting.

June 22, 1881. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read the following letter : —

"Massachusetts Charitable Mechanic Association,
" Office of the Pkesident, Boston, June 9, 1881.

" Professor Josiah P. Cooke.

" Dear Sir, — I have the honor to request, in behalf of the Board of
Managers of the Fourteenth Exhibition of the Massachusetts Charita-
ble Mechanic Association, that the Fellows of the American Academy
of Arts and Sciences should do them the honor to bestow, this fall,
the Association's ' Grand Medal,' for that single exhibit in the ensuing
display most conducive to human welfare.

" Such medal will be established by the Association, and we are
desirous of its bestowment in a manner that will add to its value ; and
it has seemed to our Board of Managers that no more renowned
or impartial body could be selected than the Academy which you
represent.

" Should this suggestion meet the approval of your Associates, and
the duty be undertaken by your body, I shall be very happy to confer
further with you in regard to the matter.

" I am, very respectfully,

" Your obedient servant,

" Charles "W. Slack,

" President:'

On the motion of Professor Cooke it was

Voted, To appoint a Committee of seven Fellows of the
Academy who, after conferring with the authorities of the
Charitable Mechanic Association, shall have full power to
decide whether it is advisable for the Academy to accept the
proposed trust, and shall report their decision or action to
the Academy at their stated meeting in October.

The President appointed the following Committee in
accordance with this vote : —

388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Theodore Lyman, Chairman.
Henry P. Bowditch, Edward C. Pickering,

WOLCOTT GiBBS, JOHN TrOWBRIDGE,

Hiram F. Mills, Charles H. Wing.

Seven hundred and fortf-fifth Meeting.

October 12, 1881. — Stated Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Letters in acknowledgment of election were received from
Messrs. F. Blake, Billings, Brown-Sdquard, Da Costa, Force,
Stills, Stubbs, and Sumner.

Mr. Lyman presented an informal Report from the Com-
mittee on the " Grand Medal " of the Massachusetts Charita-
ble Mechanic Association, which, in substance, was that the
Committee had found certain exhibits which seemed to war-
rant the conferring of such a medal.

On the motion of Mr. Scudder it was

Voted, That the Report of the Committee be accepted, and
that the Academy undertake the responsibility which the
Charitable Mechanic Association desires to impose upon it ;
also,

Voted, That the Committee on the " Grand Medal " con-
tinue their work, and present their final Report at the next
meeting of the Academy.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Clarence John Blake, of Boston, to be a Resident Fellow
in Class I., Section 3.

Thomas Gaffield, of Boston, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class I., Section 3.

Frederic Walker Lincoln, of Boston, to be a Resident Fel-
low in Class I., Section 4.

William Otis Crosby, of Boston, to be a Resident Fellow
in Class IL, Section 1.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 389

William Harmon Niles, of Cambridge, to be a Resident
Fellow in Class II., Section 1.

Charles Rockwell Laiiman, of Cambridge, to be a Resident
Fellow in Class III., Section 2.

John Davis Long, of Hiugham, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class III., Section 2.

John Cummings, of Woburn, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class III., Section 3.

Henry Draper, of New York, to be an Associate Fellow in
Class I., Section 2.

The following paper was presented : —

" On the Co-efficient of Expansion of a Bar of Tempered
Steel which has its Graduated Surface protected by a Cover-
ing of Thin Glass." By William A. Rogers.

Voted, That when the Academy adjourn, it adjourn to the
second Wednesday in November, and that that meeting be
an Adjourned Stated Meeting.

SeTen Imndred and forty- sixth Meeting.

November 9, 1881. — Adjourned Stated Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Letters were read from Messrs. C. J. Blake, Draper, Gaf-
field, Lanman, and Long, acknowledging their election into
the Academy.

The chair announced the death of Mr. John A. Lowell.

Mr. Theodore Lyman read the

Report of the Committee on the " Grand Medal" of the Massachusetts
Charitable Mechanic Association.

" The judges first agreed that the exhibit for the grand award must
possess invention not only original but novel, because the admission of
old inventions to competition would render the task of selection hope-
lessly complicated, and because such admission would be against the

390 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

intention of the Association which offered the Medal. In order to get
a knowledo-e of the contents of the Exhibition, the manuscript cata-
logue was examined, and all exhibits that might be candidates were
noted and inspected. There was also distributed to the exhibitors the
following circular : —

"' The Grand Gold il!fec?a?. — Boston, Oct. G, 1881. — The Commit-
tee appointed by the American Academy of Arts and Sciences to con-
sider the award of a Grand Medal, by the Massachusetts Charitable
Mechanic Association, " for the single exhibit most conducive to human
welfare," wish to obtain information for their guidance. If you desire
to compete for this Medal, please to state your claims by tilling the
following blanks : —

" ' 1. Date of patent and time of introduction.

" ' 2. Brief description of the exhibit, with a statement of the reasons
of its superiority, and of its contribution to human welfare.

" ' Replies should be directed, before October 20, to Theodore Ly-
man, Chairman, American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston.'

" The circulars returned were read and considered. When, by
gradual elimination, the candidates had been reduced to three or four,
special reports were prepared on them, and these reports were dis-
cussed at a meeting of the Committee. A ballot was then taken,
which resulted in the selection, by a unanimous vote, of the exhibit of
results of the ' testing machine,' now at the United States Arsenal in
Watertown, and designed and constructed by Mr. Albert H. Emery
(a civil engineer), as the ' single exhibit most conducive to human
welfare,' and therefore the proper one to receive the Grand Medal.

" The purpose of the testing machine is to show the effect of a given
push or a given pull on any solid material. The specimen, placed
horizontally, is squeezed or pulled at pleasure, and the power at work
is measured in two forms : —

" 1. The force used to hold the specimen in place, and that exerted
in the straining press, is indicated by a gauge.

" 2. The strain on the specimen is shown by a weighing apparatus.

" Considered purely as a testing machine, it is the latter apparatus
only which is directly important ; but viewed as a construction capable
of several uses (which uses are claimed by the inventor), the first con-
trivance or gauge becomes of consequence, because it can be applied
to measure with accuracy many sorts of pressure, such as that of steam
or that of the air. In like manner the weighing apparatus may,
mutatis mutandis, be used as a delicate scale.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES. 391

'' It would not be proper to give a detailed description of the struct-
ure, because there are patents on certain portions of it that are not
yet secured ; but a general sketch of it is admissible.

"This testing machine was ordered in June, 1875, by the United
States Board on the Testing of Iron and Steel, of which Colonel T. T.
S. Laidley, U. S. A., was chairman. It was completed about three
years ago. The first patent was in 1872, and others have since been
granted or are now pending. The machine has as its source of pres-
sure a hydraulic accumulator ; and by this pressure the specimen is
held in place, and a steady and easily controlled strain is imparted to
it through a hydraulic press.

'' This straining press has a double action, which, in connection with
the alternating bed and platform of the scale, allows a test, either by
compression or tension, without the addition of intervening parts.
The strain upon the specimen is transmitted directly and without fric-
tion to liqiud supports capable of receiving a strain of 1,000,000
pounds, without exceeding the safe limit of strain for diaphragms
intended for perpetual use.

" The pressure in these liquid supports is communicated, without loss
and with great sensitiveness, to other supporting chambers acting
directly, and still without friction, through a single pair of levers
having steel-plate fulcrums. These last, as distinguished from knife-
edge fulcrums, are not subject to injury from load or shock; may be
protected from corrosion ; allow a free movement of the beam ; may
be adjusted exactly ; and are durable, since their motion is molecular
and far within the limits of elasticity. By means of similar fulcrums,
the strain — now reduced — is communicated to the scale beam, and
motion is imparted to the indicator rod, where a variation of a single
pound is distinctly visible, if the load be small ; and for the maximum
load of 1,000,000 pounds, a variation of ^^o.Vtjtjj ^^ ^^^^ pounds, may
be noted ; while by an admirable system of levers the total weight is
recorded on an indicator plate. The specimen tested may even be
thirty feet in length, — a limit which would include many built-up
structures, such as columns, trusses, and bridge spans.

"Among the proof experiments to which this machine was subjected
by the United States Board, the following may be quoted : —

" 1. A forged link of hard wrought iron, five inches in diameter
between the eyes, was slowly strained in tension, and broke short off
with a loud report at 722,800 pounds.

" 2. In order to see if the weighing parts had been disturbed by the

392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

recoil, which was obviously near the greatest recoil the machine
will ever suffer, a horsehair was next tested. It was -ti/oo ^^ ^"
inch in diameter, it stretched thirty per cent, and broke at one
pound.

" 3. Specimens were subjected to 1,000,000 pounds compression.

"4. Delicate structures, such as eggs and nuts, were tested in com-
pression.

" The results of these and of many other proof experiments demon-
strate the efficiency of this testmg machine. Its action as a whole does
not end its usefulness, for its separate parts may be adapted to other
modes of testing. It is evident, for example, that the bed and plat-
form, with the four supporting chambers, could be removed and built
in as one of the arch stones in a great arch, where the pressure at that
point would be indicated by the scale beam , and by a slight modifica-
tion of the connections, there might be shown the position of the
resultant line of pressure under either a still or a moving load. Were
the same parts buried in the rear of a retaining wall, they would
measure the thrust ; and the effect of that thrust would be shown if
they were built into the lower course of that wall.

" The gauges in this machine which measure the pressure on the
specimen holders, and that in the straining press, constitute in them-
selves a very promising form of steam gauge. As they stand, they
are capable of indicating from one pound to the square inch to 3, GOO
pounds, without straining any part beyond the safe limit of elasticity.
The need of an accurate steam gauge which will not degenerate is
illustrated by the fact that the United States Board appointed to study
the causes of the bursting of steam boilers reported that its results were
entirely unreliable, because uo steam gauge could be found on which
dependence could be placed.

" It only remains to indicate in what way and to what degree the
testing machine is conducive to human welfare.

" It lessens the risk of life and the cost of construction, by condemn-
ing every dangerous part and exposing each excess of material. Struct-
ures may have various faults : (1) They may be too weak, and there-
fore liable to give way at all points. (2) They may be strong enough
in some parts but weak in others, where they are ready to break. (3)
They may be everywhere too strong, in which case the weight of useless
material must be subtracted from the load they ought to bear. In
the first instance, the structure is dangerous and too cheap ; in the
second, it is dangerous and in certain places too cheap ; in the third, it

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 393

is dangerous (because overweighted) and too costly. Only by such an
instrument as a testing machine can these faults be avoided.

"Our mode of life is highly artificial, and is daily growing more so.
We are everywhere dependent on machinery and on complex struct-
ures, be they railroads, steamboats, manufactories, or great public
buildings. These things are absolutely necessary, and make the foun-
dation of human happiness ; but they bring corresponding perils, so
that a community which has bad public works lives in constant dan-
ger. Such danger has hitherto been considerable, even in presence
of the best precautions, because there were no means for accurately
determining the strength of the materials employed. But with this
testing machine there can no longer be an excuse for materials weak
in themselves, or improperly proportioned. By its use every part
may be made safe, from the simple rail to the most complex bridge,
from the humble hand-car to the largest locomotive, and from the
plain column to the most elaborate trussed roof.

"A machine which can guarantee the safety of most of our artificial
surroundings may properly be called conducive to human welfare.

"Theodore Lyman,
Edward C. Pickering,
Charles H. Wing,
John Trowbridge,
Hiram F. Mills,
Henry P. Bowditch."

The Report of the Committee was accepted. A vote was
then taken, which resulted in the selection, unanimously, of
the exhibit of results of the testing machine now at the
United States Arsenal in Watertown, and designed and con-
structed by Albert H. Emery, civil engineer, as the " single
exhibit most conducive to human welfare," and therefore the
proper one to receive the Grand Medal of Honor.

Luigi Palma di Cesnola, of New York, was elected an Asso-
ciate Fellow in Class III., Section 4.

The following papers were read : —

" On the Scientific Use of the Telephone." By John Trow-
bridge.

" On a Machine for Reproducing and Transmitting Vowel
and Consonant Sounds." By Amos E. Dolbear.

394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The following paper was presented by title : —
" On Indirect Determination of Chlorine and Bromine by
Electrolysis." By Leonard P. Kinnicutt.

Seven hundred and forty-seventh Meeting.

December 14, 1881. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President informed the Academy that a letter had
been received from General L. P. di Cesnola, acknowledging
his election as Associate Fellow ; also a letter announcing the
death of Herr Geheimerath J. C. Bluntschli, D.C.L., of
Heidelberg, Foreign Honorary Member.

The following papers were presented : —

" On Curcumiu.'' By C. L. Jackson and A. E. Menke.

" A Comparison of the Harvard College Observatory Cata-
logue of Stars for 1875 with the Fundamental Systems of
Auwers, Boss, Safford, and Newcomb." By William A.
Rogers.

" On Maxwell's Law of the Distribution of Energy among
the Molecules." By N. D. C. Hodges.

Professor Wolcott Gibbs announced his discovery of the
following new complex acids : —

Arsenoso-molybdic acid, Vanadoso-tungstic acid,

Arsenoso-tungstic acid, Vanadoso-phosphoric acid,

Antimonoso-molybdic acid, Vanadoso-arsenic acid,

Antimonoso-tungstic acid, Vanadoso-antimouic acid,
Vanadoso-molybdic acid.

All these acids have well-defined series of salts.

Seven hundred and forty-eighth Meeting.

January 11, 1882. — Stated Meeting.

A quorum was not present, and the Academy was not
called to order.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 395

Seven hundred and forty-ninth Meeting:.

February 8, 1882. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The chair announced the following deaths : —

Lewis Henry Morgan, Dec. 17, 1881 ; Edward Reynolds,
Dec. 25, 1881 ; John William Draper, Jan. 4, 1882 ; Rich-
ard Henry Dana, Jan. 6, 1882 ; Theodor Schwann, Jan.
11, 1882.

The following papers were presented : —

" On a New Telephone." By A. E. Dolbear.

" Conventionalism in Ancient American Art, Illustrated
by Specimens of Pottery from the Burial Mounds." By F.
W. Putnam.

" On Interference Bands in Mapping Spectra." By C. E.
Kelley. (By invitation.)

" On the Distribution of Energy among the Particles of a
Gas." By N. D. C. Hodges.

The following papers were presented by Henry B. Hill by
title : —

1. " Dibromacrylic Acid."

2. " Dichloracrylic Acid."

3. " Relations of Dibromacrylic Acid to Two Different Tri-
brompropionic Acids."

4. " Certain Tetrasiibstituted Propionic Acids.

5. " On the Constitution of the Substituted Acrylic Acids."
The following papers by Asa Gray were read by title : —

1. " Studies of Solidago and Aster."

2. " Novitice Arizonicce, &c. Characters of New Plants,
chiefly from Recent Collections in Arizona and Adjacent Dis-
tricts."

Mr. Charles F. Mabery presented by title,
" Contributions from the Chemical Laboratory of Harvard
College."

396 PBOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Seven hundred and fiftieth Meeting.

March 8, 1882. — Stated Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Secretary of the Society of Arts having received a
letter from General Hazen, Chief Signal Officer, U. S. A.,
in which the co-operation of that Society with the weather-
service was invited, was instructed by the Society to ascertain,
informally, whether the American Academy of Arts and Sci-
ences, being the older and more strictly scientific body, would
relieve the Society of Arts from the invited responsibility.

The following Committee was appointed by the chair to
consider the proposition of the Society of Arts and to confer
with the Society in regard to General Hazen's letter : —

William Watson, Chairman.
Edward C. Pickering, William H. Niles.

The following papers were presented : —

" On the Absorption of Light by Glass." By Edward C.
Pickering.

" Ancient Peruvian Pottery, with Reference to the Char-
acteristic Art of the People." By F. W. Putnam.

" Calibration of Thermometers." By Silas W. Holman,
presented by Professor Charles R. Cross.

" The Crystalline Form of Tribromacrylic Acid." By W.
H. MelvHle (by title).

Seven hundred and fifty-first Meeting.

April 12, 1882. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Council recommended that the name of Frederick W.
Putnam be transferred from Class II., Section 3, to Class
III., Section 2. The Academy confirmed this recommen-
dation.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. 397

The chair announced the death of Saint-Julien Ravenel, of
Charleston, Associate Fellow of the Academy.

The following papers were presented : —

" On the Young Stages of some Osseous Fishes. Part III."
By Alexander Agassiz.

" Wages as a Standard of Cost." By Edward Atkinson.

" On the Construction and Comparison of Three Standard
Metres." By William A. Rogers.

" Note on Thermodynamics." By John Trowbridge.

" On a Modification of the Micrometer Level." By J. Ray-
ner Edmands.

" On the Spirit-Level considered as an Instrument of Pre-
cision." By William A. Rogers.

" On the Colors and Patterns of Insects." By Hermann A.
Hagen.

" On the Conditions of Electric Lighting." By N. D. C.
Hodges.

Seven hundred and fifty- second Meeting.

May 10, 1882. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President announced the death of Henry Wadsworth
Longfellow, Ralph Waldo Emerson, and Charles Robert
Darwin.

Dr. Gray referred to a communication from Mr. Winthrop,
who represented the Academy at Darwin's funeral, and who
mentioned that another Fellow of the Academy, Mr. Lowell,
U. S. Minister, was also present.

The following papers were presented : —

" On Telegraphing over Great Distances." By N. D. C.
Hodges.

" On the Limit of Visibility of Fine Lines Ruled on Glass."
By William A. Rogers.

The following papers were presented by title : —

" On the Wedge Photometer." By Edward C. Pickering.

398 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMEEICAN ACADEMY

" On a New Type of Insects." By Samuel H. Scudder.

" Curcumin." Second paper. By C. Loring Jackson and
A. E. Menke.

" Tumeric Oil." By C. Loring Jackson and A. E. Menke.

" On the Fatigue of Small Spruce Beams." By F. E.
Kidder.

Mr. Sereno Watson presented by title the following contri-
butions to North American Botany : —

1. " List of Plants from Southwestern Texas and Northern
Mexico, collected chiefly by Dr. E. Palmer in 1879-80."

2. " Descriptions of New Species of Plants from our West-
ern Territories."

REPOET OF THE COUNCIL.

MAY 30, 1882.

Since the last Report, May 24, 1881, the Academy has lost
by death eighteen members, as follows: — eight Resident Fel-
lows : John Bacon, Richard H. Dana, Ralph Waldo Emerson,
Thomas P. James, Henry W. Longfellow, John A. Lowell,
Theophilus Parsons, and Edward Reynolds ; five Associate
Fellows : Edward Desor, John W. Draper, Lewis H. Morgan,
St. Julien Ravenel, and John Rodgers ; and five Foreign
Honorary Members : J. C. Bluntschli, Charles Darwin, Joseph
Decaisne, Theodor Schwann, and Dean Stanley.

RESIDENT FELLOWS.

RICHARD HENRY DANA.

Richard H. Dana was born in Cambridge, Aug. 1, 1815. He
and his brother Edmund attended school at Cambridgeport with Dr.
O. W. Holmes and Margaret Fuller, who were, however, too old to be
his associates. He entered Harvard College in the Freshman Class
of 1831-2. In his Junior year he suffered from weakness of the eyes,
and was forced to abandon his studies, making his famous sea voyage
before the mast, and visiting what was then a strange country, Cali-
fornia. Returning to college, he graduated in 1837 and entered the
Law School, where he took the degree of LL.B. in 1839. The
next year he assisted Professor Edward T. Chanuing by teaching elo-
cution in the college.

Mr. Dana had inherited a taste for law, and also for literature. His
grandfather, Francis Dana, who was born in Charlestown in 1743, at
a critical period, was in responsible positions in the public service from

400 RICHARD HENRY DANA.

1774 to 1784. He was Judge in the Supreme Court of Massachu-
setts from 1785 to 1792, and Chief Justice from 1792 to 1806. As
one of the founders of this Academy, a member of its Council from
1789 to 1805, and its Vice-President from 1805 to 1807, he is worthy
of commemoration. His son, Richard H. Dana, Sr., was born in
Cambridge in 1787, and graduated at Harvard College in 1808. In
1814 he entered the literary alliance which started the " North Ameri-
can Review," and in 1818-19 he was associated with Professor E.
T. Channing in the editorship of it. Though he studied law, was
admitted to the Boston Bar in 1811, and began practice in Cambridge
the next year, serving also as member of the Legislature, he was for
many years previous to his death, on July 2, 1879, only remembered
as one of the early pioneers in American letters. In 1821—2 he pub-
lished the " Idle Man." The " Buccaneer and other Poems," which
was printed in 1827, was praised by Wilson in " Blackwood's Maga-
zine " as being " the most powerful and original of American poetical
compositions." When Richard H. Dana the younger graduated, the
subject of his Part was : " Heaven lies about us in our infancy."
This heaven, in his case, was the tastes and talents he had inherited.

What seemed at the time to be an unfortunate interruption in the
college studies of the younger Dana turned out to his great advantage.
It gave him a courage and robustness of character for which he found
full exercise in later years. His " Two Years before the Mast," first
published in 1840, which Dr. 0. W. Holmes has characterized as
the " Odyssey of the forecastle," has acquired a perennial popularity
and made the literary reputation of its author. In the school at
Amsterdam, where boys pass through a three years course of edu-
cation for the merchant service, twelve copies are required in the
library to supply the constant demand of the students for a book which
competes successfully with Defoe's stories. Mr. Dana's interest iu
sailors, whose hardships, privations, and dangers he had shared, led him
to publish another book in 1841 under the title of the " Seaman's
Friend." This description of sea usages was republished in England
under the name of the " Seaman's Manual." His next volume, " To
Cuba and Back," which appeared in 1859, was the fruit of a short
trip in which he was seeking rest from his professional labors. In
1859-GO, Mr. Dana made the grand tour of the earth, stopping at
the Hawaiian Islands, China, Japan, Ceylon, India, and Egypt, and
revisiting California. His vivid description of this journey remains
only in the memory of friends, except what relates to California.
For that the public is indebted to the second edition, in 1869, of his

RICHARD HENRY DANA. 401

first book, in which he records the pleasant recognition of old ac-
quaintances in the Bay of San Francisco, and gives the reader all
that is known of the liistory of his former shipmates, and of tlie ship
itself, until it sank, a victim to the Confederate cruiser "Alabama."

In 1850 Mr. Dana edited "Lectures on Art, and Poems by Wash-
ington Allston." He wrote for the *• Law Reporter," "the American
Law Review," and the '' North American Review." His eulogy on
Edward Everett, pronounced at the request of the municipal authori-
ties of Cambridge, on Feb. 22, 18G5, and his oration at the centennial
celebration, in 1875, of the revolutionary struggle in Lexington, rose
to the height of the subject and the occasion, and fulfilled the promise
of his youth as a writer and orator.

But these literary works, fascinating to young and old, and these
orations, elegant in style and eloquent in delivery, were only epi-
sodes in the chosen life-work of their author. Mr. Dana was admitted
to the Bar in 1840, and rose rapidly to eminence in his profession.
He was familiar with maritime law, and acquired a large practice in
questions of admiralty. He had opportunities, which he never lost, to
befriend the common seaman, for whom he felt more than a senti-
mental sympathy. As a lawyer he trusted more to principles and
less to precedents. Some of the cases in which he was engaged
attracted an unusual share of public attention. In that of the Presby-
terian Synod against the Parish of Dr. Channing, he discussed the
title to public and religious charities. In Maine he defended the
compulsory use of the Bible in the public schools. In 1845 he was
engaged in a case of homicide which led to the revision of the crim-
inal statutes in more than one State. He was interested in the
Church, and employed to take part in disputes involving its relations
to the State. In 1852 he acted in the Prescott controversy, and
argued the bearing of the canon law of the Protestant Episcopal
Church. After he had carefully prepared himself for his cases, he
was ready and glad to meet the most eminent counsel that could be
opposed to him.

In public life he realized the ideal scholar in politics. With no
aptitude or taste for the practices of the politician, he had the qualities
of a statesman. In the Free-Soil movement he was early associated
with Charles F. Adams, Edmund Quincy, and John G. Palfrey, being
a delegate to the Buffalo Convention of 1848. He was one of the
counsel on the side of free dom in the fugitive-slave cases of Shadrack
in 1853, and of Burns in 1854. As a member of the Constitutional
Convention of Massachusetts in 1853, and as a speaker in the Repub-

VOL. XVII. (n. 8. IX.) 26

402 RICHARD HENRY DANA.

lican campaigns of 185G and 1860, he rendered valuable services to his
State and to the country. From 1861 to 1866 Mr. Dana was the
United States attorney for Massachusetts, resigning the office when
it implicated him in the policy of Andrew Johnson, the acting Presi-
dent. In 1867-8 he gave a course of lectures in the Lowell Institute,
and served in the Legislature of Massachusetts. His able discussion
of the Usury law led to its repeal, and is reprinted and read ■ now
when most speeches are forgotten. In 1868 he entered the lists
against General Butler as a candidate for Congress from the Essex
district. Had he succeeded, his character, scholarship, and forensic
eloquence would have raised him above the level of party to that of
statesmanship. His failure is most to be regretted as leading to the
coalition in the Senate in 1876 which resulted in his rejection when he
was nominated by President Grant as Minister to the Court of St.
James. The country could ill afford to lose a name which would
have united with those of Everett, Motley, and Lowell in giving
dignity to its representation iu England.

The Civil War, and the settlement which followed it, raised questions
of law with which Mr. Dana was well fitted to grapple. He drew up
the Prize Act of 1864, and iu connection with Mr. Evarts he argued
prize cases before the United States Supreme Court, vindicating the
rights of the Government in time of war in dealing not only with the
belligerents, but also with loyal citizens. In 1867-8 he appeared
before this court in the proceedings again Jefferson Davis. In 1866
he edited a new edition of " Wheaton's Elements of International Law,"
with additions and annotations of his own. Of his long controversy
with a former editor of the book it is only necessary to say that it
distracted the mind and wasted the time of Mr. Dana. His health
had become the subject of anxiety to his friends, and in 1879 he went
abroad, never to return, except for a brief visit after the death of his
father. Mr. Dana had now come to be recognized as the highest
American authority on international law. His notes on the history
of the neutrality laws of the United States had been translated into
French for the use of the arbitrators at Geneva, and were quoted by
the counsel and in the final decision as authoritative. Mr. Wheaton
had been dead many years, and his work was becoming scarce and
antiquated. The time was opportune for preparing an independent
treatise on the law of nations. Mr. Dana was well equipped for the
task, and he might feel a laudable ambition to build upon the founda-
tions partly laid by his grandfather. With this crowning work of his
life projected, but hardly begun, but when his improving health gave

RALPH WALDO EMERSON. 403

promise of its final completion and of his return to this country, he
died suddenly of pneumonia at Rome on Jan. 6, 1882, and was buried
in the new Protestant cemetery outside the city's walls.

RALPH WALDO EMERSON.

In the death of Ralph Waldo Emerson the Academy has lost a
member rarely seen perhaps at its meetings, and not owing his fame to
any achievements in the fields in which its discussions are usually
engaged, yet from his youth upwards accustomed to follow with a
lively and sympathetic interest the triumphant progress of modern
science, and always glad of an opportunity to see and to converse with
scientific men. " I love facts," he said, " and hate lubricity and people of
vague perceptions."

The earliest of his " lectures," read before the Mechanics' Institute
in Boston, had for its subject " Water," and it was followed by one
upon " The Relations of Man to the Globe." Afterwards he read an
essay, entitled " The Naturalist," before the Boston Society of Natural
History. His early note-books show many traces of his studies of
natural science, and in the last conversation I had with him, a short
time before his death, he recurred to what was always a favorite
theme, the astonishing advance of scientific discovery during his life-
time. In the series of lectures on the Natural History of the Intel-
lect, first given, I believe, in England in 1848, and repeated, with
modifications and additions, in the University Course at Harvard
College in 1870, the central idea was that mind is matter come to
self-consciousness, so that in the shapes and the laws of the physical
world we may trace, as in cipher, the genesis of thought.

Ralph Waldo Emerson was the fourth child and third son of the
Rev. William Emerson, minister of the First Church in Boston, and
Ruth Haskius.* He was born in Boston, May 25, 1803, in the old
parsonage in Summer Street, and was the descendant of several lines
of faithful ministers, going back to the first settlement of the country;
of Peter Bulkeley, one of the first settlers of Concord, Mass., and
its first minister ; of Daniel Bliss, prominent in Whitfield's " revival " ;
of the Moodys, famous preachers of Portsmouth and York, and one
of them a predecessor of William Emerson in the First Cluirch in
Boston. His grandfather, the Rev. William Emerson, of Concord,
of revolutionary memory, was the builder of tlie " Old Manse," and
from its windows witnessed the fight at the bridge; Directly after-
wards he joined the army as chaplain, and died in the service.

404 RALPH WALDO EMERSON.

Ralph, as our Associate was called in his boyhood, did not distinguish
himself in scholarship at school or college, but from very early years
he was a diligent reader of English poetry, and showed much facility
in versification. He entered Harvard College in 1817, and was
graduated in 1821, receiving while there two Bowdoiu prizes for dis-
sertations and a Boylston prize for declamation, and he was chosen
class poet. On leaving college he kept school, as his father and his
grandfather had done before him, until he could find opportunity to
follow the ancestral vocation of jireaching. In 182G he was " appro-
bated to preach " by the Middlesex Association of Ministers, and iu
1829 he was ordained at the Second Church in Boston as colleague of
Rev. Henry Ware, Jr. Finding that the lecturer's desk would be
more convenient for his purposes than the pulpit, he severed his formal
connection with the church in the autumn of 1832, but continued all
his life long a diligent seeker after and expounder of truth as applied
to the conduct of life.

It would be out of place here to undertake to follow his fortunes in
detail, or to attempt to determine his place as a moralist or as a man
of letters. A full account of the occurrences of his life and a discrim-
inating analysis of his jjhilosophy may be found in the excellent work
of the Rev. G. W. Cooke. (Boston : J. R. Osgood & Co., 1881.)
Here it may be sufficient to recount some of the more prominent facts
of his history.

In 1831-2 Mr. Emerson travelled in Europe, making acquaintance
with many persons in England, particularly with Carlyle, whose first
book, " Sartor Resartus," made its first appearance, in book form, in this
country, with a preface by Emerson. In 1847-8 he again went to
England, and there lectured extensively, being received with cordiality
anji with a lively interest by all classes of people. After his return
home, his lecturing tours, which had been confined to New England
and the cities of New York and Philadelphia, were extended to the
West, and in 1871 he visited California.

In the summer of 1872 his house was partly burned, and although,
by the prompt assistance of his friends and neighbors, his manuscripts
and books were removed almost without injury, he received from this
disturbance of his home a shock from which he never entirely recovered.
His physical health, which, in spite of some delicacy of constitution,
had been, since his early manhood, upon the whole remarkably good,
continued unabated, but his command of words failed, and his mind
lost its spring. Henceforth he wrote little or nothing, and altliougli
upon special invitation he would occasionally read one of his old lee-

THOMAS POTTS JAMES. 405

tures, he took but little part in tlie selection or preparation of it. His
literary activity during this period was mostly confined to a revision
of his poenas for a new edition, and to a partial co-operation in the
publication of a few essays written long before. The entire sanity of
his intellect and the beautiful serenity of his disposition were untouched,
but his memory, particularly of woi'ds, faded so as to render conversa-
tion a burden to him. At the funeral of Mr. Longfellow, a few weeks
before his own death, it was remarked that he forgot the names of
familiar acquaintances. A cold, taken a short time afterwards, passed
into pneumonia, of which he died April 27, 1882, a few weeks short
of his 79th birthday.

Mr. Emerson delivered the annual oration before the <f>. B. K.
Society in 1837 and in 18G7. He received the degree of LL.D. from
Harvard College in 1867, and was chosen Overseer in the same year.
In 1878 he was chosen Foreign Associate in the Academy of Moral and
Political Sciences of the Institute of France, to fill the place left vacant
by the death of Mr. J. L. Motley.

The following is a list of his principal published works : — Nature,
183G; $. B. K. Oration, 1837; Essays, first series, 1841 ; Address
on the Anniversary of Emancipation in the West Indies, 1844 ; Essays,
second series, 1844 ; Poems, 1847 ; Miscellanies, 1849 ; Representative
Men, 1850 ; Memoir of Margaret Fuller, 1852; English Traits, 1856;
Conduct of Life, 1860 ; May-day and other Poems, 1867 ; Society and
Solitude, 1870; Letters and Social Aims, 1875; Fortune of the
Republic, 1878.

THOMAS POTTS JAMES.

Thomas Potts James died, at his residence in Cambridge,
Feb. 22, 1882, in the seventy-ninth year of his age. He had
been a Fellow of the Academy for only four years, most of his life
having been spent in Philadelphia, in the neighborhood of which city
he was born on the 1st of September, 1803. His paternal and ma-
ternal ancestors were notable persons among the earlier settlers of
Pennsylvania, For forty years he was engaged in business in Phila-
delphia as a wholesale druggist, on the relinquishment of which he
removed to Cambridge, bringing his wife and their four children to
her paternal home. From his youth he was more or less devoted to
botany ; but of late years, having more leisure for the indulgence of
his taste, and wishing to be more than an amateur, he devoted himself
exclusively and most sedulously to bryology, in which he became a

406 HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFELLOW.

proficient. After the death of Mr. SuUivant in 1873, Mr. James and
our Associate, Lesquereux, were looked to as the principal authorities
upon Mosses in this country ; aud the duty appropriately devolved upon
them of preparing the systematic work upon North American Bry-
ology which Mr. Sullivant had planned. Owing to the pre-occupation
of Mr. Lesquereux in vegetable palaeontolo2;y, the laboring oar fell to
Mr. James. He had already publislied some papers upon the subject
in the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, of which
he had long been an active member, and he had contributed to Mr.
Watson's Botany of Clarence King's Exploration on the Fortieth
Parallel a notable article on the Musci of that Survey. Our own
Academy has also published some of the results of the joint study of
these two veteran bryologists. The characters of Mosses in these
days are mostly drawn from their minute structure. Hundreds of
species and varieties in numerous specimens had to be patiently scruti-
nized under the compound microscope, the details sketched, and col-
lated, and the differences weighed. To this task Mr. James gave
himself with single and untiring devotion. He had nearly brought
this protracted labor of microscopical analysis to a conclusion, and
was actually engaged in this work, when the eye suddenly was
dimmed and the pencil dropped from his hand. Partial paralysis
was soon followed by coma, and he died within a few hours. So very
much has been done, that it is confidently hoped that his coadjutor
may soon bring the work to a completion, and give to bryological
students the Manual of North American Mosses which is greatly
needed, and to which a vast amount of faithful research has been
devoted. The name of Mr. James will thereby be inseparably asso-
ciated with the advancement of an interesting branch of botany. He
was not often seen at our meetings, but he is greatly missed by his
associates in study, and his memory is cherished by all who in tlie
various relations of life came to know this diligent and conscientious
student of nature, and most estimable, simple-hearted, kindly, aud
devout man.

HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFELLOW.

Henry Wadsworth Longfellow was born in Portland, Maine,
on the 27th of February, 1807. He died in Cambridge, IMass., on the
24th of INIarch, 1882. At the age of fourteen he entered Bowdoin
College (founded by the first President of the Academy), in a class
which his own name and that of Nathaniel Hawthorne have made

HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFELLOW. 407

illustrious. In 1826, one year after receiving his degree, he was
appointed Professor of Modern Languages at Bovvdoin, In 1834 he
was chosen to succeed the eminent scholar, Mr. George Ticknor, as
Professor of Modern Languages in Harvard University. He resigned
in 1854, and James Russell Lowell, now Minister to England, was
elected to the vacant chair. In the mean time JNIr. Longfellow had
made three long visits to Europe, accomplishing himself for his pro-
fessorial duties, and gathering rich materials for his pen. For forty-
six years he resided in Cambridge, most of the time in the historical
mansion known as Washington's headquarters.

In the removal of the name of Mr. Longfellow from the list of its
Fellows, the Academy bears its share in a great national loss. There
is DO need to give a moi-e extended account of a life so illustrious as
that of Mr. Longfellow, or to enumerate his familiar and secure titles
to fame.

For the space of a whole generation he has been the most popular
and beloved of American poets. No poet who has ever written in the
English language has addressed a wider audience among his contem-
poraries in other countries as well as in his own, and none has ever
attached his readers to himself with firmer ties of personal regard.
The distinguishing characteristic of his poetry was its simple, sincere,
and exquisite expression of sentiment and emotion common to the
hearts of men, and of the sympathy of the poet, at once strong and deli-
cate, with the deepest and the most familiar exjjeriences of human life.
His poeti-y evoked the sympathy of his readers, and it strengthened
their best feelings by giving natural, appropriate, and beautiful utter-
ance to them. The service is incalculable which Mr. Longfellow has
thus rendered in refining, purifying, and elevating the moral disposition
of his numberless readers. His broad and liberal culture, his native
sense of poetic melody, his fine and critical taste, his admirable skill
and culture as an artist in verse, all contributed to the worth and to
the success of his work. But its chief source of power lay in the
character of the man. His poems in their excellence were the true
image of the poet. It was the man speaking in them that gave to
them their force of good. Sincerity was in the very tone of their
music.

Tlie range of the subjects of his poetry was astonishingly wide. The
legends of the Old World and of the New, of the North and of the
South, deeds of patriotism and of devotion, stories of the past and of the
present, themes of household and domestic concern, of birth and death,
of joy and sorrow, were equally familiar to his lyre of many strings.

408 JOHN AMORY LOWELL.

In his volumes there was something for every age and every taste.
But in this variety, diverse as it was in motive and iu interest, there
was an essential and controlling unity of spirit. It was all inspired
with the sweet and generous nature of the poet, his faith in man, his
trust in God, his high purpose and principle, his allegiance to duty.

Modest, simple, kind, tender-hearted, beloved by all who knew him,
famous throughout the world, he has left a memory in which there
is nothing to regret, and which will forever be cherished by his
country.

JOHN AMORY LOWELL.

John Amort 'Lowell died, at his residence in Boston, on the
31st of October last, when he had almost completed the eighty-third
year of his age, for he was born on the 11th of November, 1798. A
few years of his boyhood — from 1803 to 1806 — were passed in
Paris, where he was a spectator of some of the glorifications of the
First Empire, especially on the occasion of the return from Austerlitz.
He entered Harvard College in 1811, Messrs. Sparks, Parsons, and
Palfrey being among his classmates, and after graduation he entered
a mercantile house. He was elected into this Academy on the 10th
of November, 1841, at the same time with two other Fellows assigned
to the botanical section. One was "William Oakes, of Ipswich, who
died seven years afterward ; to the other is assigned the duty of pre-
paring this memorial. When the Fellows of the Academy were ar-
ranged in classes and sections, the pronounced tastes inherited from
his father, and cultivated by his own studies, made it natural that he
should belong to the small section of botany. But he might with
equal propriety have been relegated to more than one section of the
third class. For, notwithstanding his devotion to business affairs, his
classical and linguistic knowledge were always well kept up, and his
authority upon economical and financial questions was great.

The family has always had a marked representation in this Acad-
emy. To mention only the direct line, the subject of our notice Wiis
chosen into it very shortly after the death of his father, — the John
Lowell who, after achieving distinction and a competency at the bar,
retired from active practice at the age of thirty-four, to be known
through his valuable writings as "The Norfolk Farmer," and as a
principal promoter, if not the founder, of scientific agriculture and
horticulture in New England. John Lowell — the father of John
Amory Lowell — was elected into the Academy in the year 1804,

JOHN AMORY LOWELL. 409

soon after the decease of his father, the Hon. John Lowell, first judge
of the United States District Court of Massachusetts, under a commis-
sion from Washington. This office is now held by his great grandson,
the eldest son of our deceased Associate, who has been a Fellow
since the year 1877, thus continuing the line from the very founda-
tion of the Academy, for Judge Lowell was one of the sixty-two
members incorporated by the charter in 1780. In tracing the gene-
alogy one step farther back, we come (as is almost universal in New
England families of note), upon a clergyman, the Rev. John Lowell,
of Newbury, a man of mark in his day.

Mr. Lowell was the fourth of his family to be a member of the
Corporation of Harvard University, to which he gave a continuous
and most valuable service of forty years. He was for more than fifty
years one of the directors of the Suffolk Bank, which was chartered
in his time, and whicli early established a very useful plan for the
redemption of the currency of the New England banks in Boston.
Not to mention other important public trusts, — as of the Athenaeum,
of the Massachusetts General Hospital, of the Agricultural Trustees,
of the Provident Institution for Savings, to all of which he ren-
dered assiduous and wise service, — nor to refer here to the very
important part which he has taken for a lifetime in the development
of the manufacturing interests of Massachusetts, especially as prose-
cuted in the town which was named in commemoration of similar ser-
vices by his cousin, — we proceed to speak of that most important
" corporation sole " founded by that cousin, the Lowell Institute.
This trust was specifically consigned to our late Associate and to such
successor as he should appoint, — with preference to the family and
the name of Lowell, — subject to no other than a formal visitatorial
control, mainly for auditorship. And " to him, single and alone, it
fell to shape the whole policy and take the whole diiection of this
great educational foundation," the history of which for almost half a
century has justly been said to be a " record of his own intellectual
breadth and scope, as well as of his large administrative capacity."
We all know with what good judgment, with what liberality, and with
what success this peculiar trust has been administered, and how on
the one hand a series of most distinguished men have been attracted
into its service, while on the other the eflforts of younger men have
been stimulated and rewarded at the period when such encouragement
was most important to them. Suffice it to mention the names of Lyell
and Agassiz, — the former early and also a second time brought from
England for courses of lectures at the Lowell Institute, the latter

410 JOHN AMORY LOWELL.

a permanent acquisition to us and to our country. Through Mr.
Lowell's discernment, moreover, the first encouragement to devote liis
life to scientific pursuits was afforded to Jeffries Wyman, by the offer
of the curatorship of the Institute as well as of a lectureship. The
intellectual and the financial interests of this trust have equally pros-
pered in Mr. Lowell's hands ; for while the number of lecture-courses
has been doubled, and various subsidiary lines of instruction have
been developed, the jjrincipal of the fund has been increased to thrice
its original amount.

Mr. Lowell's fondness for botany developed shortly after he left
college, and was incited by the botanical intercourse between his
father and the late Dr. Francis Boott, with whom he maintained a
lifelong friendship. But it was only in about the year 1844 or
1845 that he began the formation of an herbarium and botanical
library ; and this was actively prosecuted for several years, in evident
expectation of comparative leisure which he could devote to scientific
studies. He subscribed liberally to the botanical explorations in our
newly-acquired or newly-opened Western Territories ; and when in
Europe, in 1850 and 1851, he added largely to his store of rare and
costly botanical books. But just when he was ready to use the choice
materials and appliances which had been brought together, the financial
crisis of 1857 remanded hira to business. The grave duties and re-
sponsibilities which he resumed he carried up nearly to the age of
fourscore, — carried as it were with the vigor of early manhood and
the cheerful ease that attends "a real love of woi-k for the work's own
sake." And when it became evident that the comparatively unbroken
attention requisite for serious botanical study was not to be secured,
and as soon as a building was prepared for their reception, he pre-
sented all his botanical books which were needed to the herbarium
of Harvard University ; and the remainder, with his herbarium, to the
Boston Society of Natural History, — not giving up the while his
studious habits, but transferring his attention back to the Latin and
the French classics, and in a certain degree to German and Italian
literature.

As his father was one of the leading promoters of the establish-
ment of the Botanic Garden of Harvard University, Mr. Lowell was
also its most efficient supporter through its years of sorest need ; and,
in memory of his father, he bequeathed to it the sum of $20,000 in
order to make his annual subvention perpetual. He made a legacy
of equal amount to the general Libraiy of the University, which he
along with his father and grandfather had served iu a most respon-

THEOPUILUS PARSONS. 411

sible trust for seventy years. lie never sought or accepted any
office in city or State ; but few men were more sought for respon-
sible trusts, or ever served their day and generation more devotedly,
disinterestedly, and wisely. He seemed always to have a firm confi-
dence in his own judgment, and that confidence appears not to have
been misplaced.

THEOPHILUS PARSONS.

TiiEOPniLus Parsons was born in Newburyport on May 17,
1797, and died in Cambridge on Jan. 26, 1882. His father was the
celebrated Chief Justice of the same name. His mother, whose
maiden name was Elizabeth Greenleaf, was the daughter of Judge
Benjamin Greenleaf, of Newburyport, and the granddaughter of Dr.
Charles Cliauncy, of Boston, and through the latter she was lineally
descended from Dr. Charles Chauncy, the second President of Har-
vard College. When he was three years old his father removed from
Newburyport to Boston, where he continued to reside for thirteen
years and until his death. The son's boyhood, therefore, was spent
in Boston, and his earliest recollections must have been of that place.
During his boyhood his father procured a Mr. Elisha Clap to come to
Boston and oj^en a private school, and at this school the son was fitted
for College. At the age of fourteen — namely, in 1811 — he entered
Harvard College. His father was then Fellow of the College, and
Dr. Kirkland, his father's former pastor and most intimate and valued
friend, was President. With the latter the son went to live upon
entering College, and he continued to live with him during his entire
College course. His class at the time of its graduation numbered
sixty-six, and among his classmates were George Eustis, late Chief
Justice of Louisiana, Convers Francis, Thaddeus W. Harris, John
Jeffries, John A. Lowell, John G. Palfrey, and Jared Sparks. All
of these distinguished men he survived, the last of them, John G.
Palfrey, having died on April 26, 1881, and he was himself survived
by only two of his sixty-five class-mates.

Immediately upon graduating, he entered the office of William
Prescott, the son of the hero of Bunker Hill and the father of the
historian, and then the acknowledged leader of the Suffolk Bar, and
began the study of law. In 1818 he was admitted to the Bar ; in
1822 he removed to Taunton, and there engaged in the practice of his
profession ; in 1828 he returned to Boston, and there continued the
practice of his profession for the next twenty years. In the summer

412 THEOPHILUS PARSONS.

of 1848, on the resignation of Professor Greenleaf, he was appointed
Dane Professor of Law in Harvard University, and at the beginning
of the academic year 1848-49 he assumed the duties of his profes-
sorship, delivering the opening lecture in the Law School on Monday,
Aug. 28, 1848. About the same time he removed to Cambridge,
where he continued to reside until his death. He held his profes-
sorship and discharged its duties for more than twenty-one years ;
namely, until the middle of the academic year 1869-70, when he
resigned and retired from active pursuits.

Professor Parsons, like his father, had great versatility of talent,
and like him was distinguished for his attainments in various branches
of learning ; but, unlike him, he was a very prolific writer, not only
upon legal subjects, but upon literary and religious subjects as well.
Any notice of him, therefore, which fails to present the many-sided-
ness of his intellectual character must necessarily be incomplete ; and
yet the present notice must be confined to his professional character,
as the writer is not competent to speak of him in any other.

He had the great misfortune to lose his father just as he had nearly
reached that period of life when the latter would have been of price-
less service to him in the profession which he chose.* As it was, it
is doubtful if he derived from his father any professional advantage
whatever. Whether his choice of a profession was due in any degree
to his father's wishes or influence is not known. However that may
be, there is some reason for doubting whether the choice was a wise
one. It is clear that he never thoroughly enjoyed the practice of
law, and his talents, great and brilliant as they were, were not pre-
cisely of the kind to qualify him to excel in law as a science ; and it
is doubtful whether, under ordinary circumstances, he would have
achieved such a degree of success in the profession as would have sat-
isfied either himself or his friends. In a word, he had not what is
called a legal mind. So far as law depends merely upon principles
of right reason and abstract justice, he was fitted to excel in it, and
he liked it ; but in so far as it depends upon what is called technical
reasoning, he regarded it with aversion, and he seemed to have the
same inaptitude for that kind of reasoning that many persons of other-
wise fine talents have for mathematics, for example. Accordingly, he
always disliked the law of real property, and openly avowed his inca-
pacity for it ; and the same was true in a great measure of the com-

* Chief-Justice Parsons died Oct. 30, 1813, when Professor Parsons was six-
teen years old and in his Junior year in College.

THEOPHILUS PARSONS. 413

mon-]aw system of procedure. Indeed, the early common law of
England in general he regarded with little favor. On the other hand,
commercial law was his delight, but more especially commercial law
as resting upon the custom and practice of merchants, and as it exists
all over the commercial world ; for commercial law as administered
in the common-law courts of England and America had in it too
much of the leaven of common law to be altogether satisfactory
to him. It was for this reason, and because of the simplicity and
celerity of its procedure, that the Court of Admiralty was so great a
favorite with him. Nothing is known to the writer of his practice in
Taunton ; but it is impossible that he should have done much there,
for it was not a field in the least suited to his genius. Upon coming
to Boston, however, he must soon have made his mark as a commer-
cial lawyer, and particularly in the law of marine insurance ; for in
1838 he appears in three reported cases as counsel for as many differ-
ent marine insurance companies ; and one of these cases was the im-
portant one of Peters v. The Warren Insurance Company (14 Pet.
99), which he argued first against Mr. F. C. Loring, before Judge
Story, and afterwards against Webster before the Supreme Court at
Washington. It was after he I'etired from practice, however, that he
acquired his greatest professional reputation, partly as a professor in
the Law School and partly as an author. Before going to Cam-
bridge, his reputation was at best but local, while after that event
his name became familiar to every lawyer in the United States. Un-
doubtedly his books had the greatest agency in producing that result.
The first book which made him widely known was that upon Con-
tracts, one volume of which was published a little more than five
years after he had assumed the duties of his professorship. This was
one of the most successful law books ever published in this country.
The subject is as fundamental, as extensive, and as important as any
in the law, and this work immediately took its position as the stand-
ard American authority upon that topic, — a position which it has
maintained without question from that day to this. It has passed
through six editions; but this statement conveys no adequate idea of
the extent of its sale, for it has long been stereotyped, and the writer
has been informed that there were ten thousand copies of the fifth
edition sold.

There is no occasion to speak of Professor Parsons separately as a
professor of law and as a writer of law books. In both capacities he
was a teacher, and in both he achieved his success by the same means:
namely, by his gifts as a teacher. In a teacher of law, whether his

414 EDWARD REYNOLDS, M.D.

teaching be oral or by published writings, one of the indispensable
requisites for success is the power of making himself thoroughly and
easily understood by one who is unacquainted with the subject taught.
With this power one can scarcely fail of a fair degree of success ;
without it the greatest talents and attainments may come to naught.
It may be said, indeed, that this power is equally indispensable in a
teacher of any other subject, and literally, of course, this is true ; but
in most subjects the difficulty of making one's self understood is be-
lieved to be less great than in law, and hence the power of doing so
less rare. This power Professor Parsons possessed in a very eminent
degree. He had, indeed, a positive genius for simple and lucid state-
ments. Whatever he clearly understood himself h© seldom failed
to make perfectly intelligible to his hearers or readers, even if they
were laymen ; hence his lectures and his books were always popular.
Nor need it be wondered at that one whose genius did not specially
fit him for the law should have made so great a figure in it; for those
who have a special genius for law are seldom successful in teaching it,
except to those who have already obtained a considerable mastery of
it. Sir Edward Coke, for example, is the greatest name in the Eng-
lish law, and yet his writings are to the tyro not merely unintelligible,
but repulsive. On the other hand, Sir William Blackstone never
made a great figure in the practice of his profession, and, though he
was made a judge, he never distinguished himself in that capacity ;
and yet his Commentaries have been more read and more admired
than any other law book in the English language. The secret of
Blackstone's great success was that he excelled all other legal writers
in his style and in his mode of treating his subject; and the merits
of Professor Parsons were not unlike those of Blackstone. It may
be added that Professor Parsons was a great admirer of Blackstone,
and probably there is no legal author with whom he would have been
so proud to be compared.

EDWARD REYNOLDS, M.D.

Edward Reynolds was born the 2Sth of February, 1793, in
Hawkins Street, Boston. His father was Edward Reynolds, a mer-
chant of Boston, whose wife, his mother, was Deborah, daughter of
Samuel and Deborah Belcher. There were five other children, two
sons and three daughters.

The subject of this notice was trained for college principally at the
Boston Latin School, under Masters Hunt and William Biglow.

EDWARD REYNOLDS, M.D. 415

Among his schoolmates were Harrison Gray Otis, Nathaniel L.
Frothingham, and Edward Everett.

He entered Harvard College in 1807, at the age of fourteen, and
graduated in 1811. After graduating, he tried his father's counting-
room for a few months, but finding himself not inclined to business
pursuits, gave them up and began the study of medicine witli Dr. John
Collins Warren, From 1815 to 1818 he continued his medical studies
in London and in Paris. He worked very hard, as is shown by the
eiglit or ten manuscript volumes of lectures copied out carefully, and all
carefully indexed. He was conspicuous by his stature of six feet four
inches, and the story is told that when a Briton was expatiating on
the degeneracy and diminished size of the Anglo-Saxon in America,
he and his companion, General McNeil, also a man of very large
development, rose and introduced themselves as exam[)les of the de-
generacy spoken of

Having finished his studies in Europe and having been admitted as
Fellow of the Royal College of Surgeons, he returned to Boston in
1818, and established himself there as a practitioner. His favorite
branch was surgery, but his attention was called to one of its special-
ties by a particular circumstance. He found, on his return, that his
father, now sixty years old. was the subject of cataract in both eyes,
upon which he performed his first operation, confidently and success-
fully. This happy event naturally turned his attention to diseases of
the eye, and led others who were the subjects of them to apply to
him. Thus, though he never chose to be called an oculist, he was
largely consulted in that class of affections. Being impressed with
their frequency, and the difficulty of treating them properly among
the poor, he in conjunction with the late Dr. John Jeffries, set on foot,
and finally succeeded in permanently establishing, the Massachusetts
Eye and Ear Infirmary, now one of our most valued public institu-
tions. To this infirmary he devoted many years of faithful service,
and when, in the course of time, it passed into the care of younger
hands, he still retained all his interest in its welfare, and watched
with honest pride its growth and prosperity.

In the year 1837, during the absence of Dr. "Warren, the Professor
of Anatomy and Surgery in Harvard University, Dr. Reynolds de-
livered the course on Anatomy, having had a very limited time for
preparation, but performing the task in a most acceptable manner. At
about the same time he joined Dr. David Humphreys Storer in a
plan for giving a more complete course of private instruction than had
hitherto been known in Boston. They associated with themselves Dr.

416 EDWARD REYNOLDS, M.D.

Jacob Bigelow and Dr. 0. W. Holmes, and afterwards Dr. J. B. S.
Jackson and Dr. Henry J. Bigelow. This school had a long and suc-
cessful career, until its place was taken by the summer medical school
of Harvard University.

No one could look on Dr. Reynolds without being struck by his
majestic physical aspect. By many he was thought to resemble Wash-
ington as we see him in portraits, but Washington with almost colossal
proportions. So remarkable an outward presentment would not un-
naturally lead many to overlook other gifts, which were exceptional,
and worthy of being noted. Pie had a natural artistic talent, which
showed itself in the sketches he made in his note-books, — a talent liis
fellow-students and friends might never have susiDCCted if some accident
had not betrayed it, as he made no parade of any of his accomplish-
ments. He had a strong literary taste also, and entered upon the study
of the German language by making a careful translation of Faust into
blank verse as his first effort.

He was a man of a most cheerful and delightful disposition, full of
pleasantry, but thoughtful as well as hopeful, a friend whom it was a
happiness to meet, and from whom, on parting, one brought away the
remembrance of cheering tones and smiles that made life look brighter.
His conversation was lively and entertaining ; he was fond of anecdotes
and told them well, and his honest, hearty laugh carried with it better
credentials of goodness than many a man's confession of faith.

As I last remember him, he was on the verge of ninety years. His
ponderous frame was a great burden for such extreme old age, and his
movements were somewhat difficult and feeble. His imperfect hearing
rendered conversation with him somewhat difficult, but his talk was
vivacious and interesting to a remarkable degree.

In his early years Dr. Reynolds listened to the preaching of Mr.
Buckminster and of Dr. Channing. He joined the Episcopal Church
later in life, and remained in communion with that Church until the
time of his death, which occurred on the morning of Christmas Day,
1881.

HENRY CHARLES CAREY. 41T

ASSOCIATE FELLOWS.

HENRY CIIAKLES CAREY.

Henry Charles Caret,* born in Philadelphia, Dec. 15, 1793,
was elected an Associate Fellow of this Academy Nov. 11, 1863.
By his death, which occurred Oct. 13, 1879, in his native city,
' economic science has lost the most eminent of its American inves-
tigators.

Mr. Carey was the son of Matthew Carey, an Irish exile who in
the earlier part of this century had become a man of mark in this
country both as a publisher and as a writer on economical and politi-
cal questions. The son took an important place in his father's estab-
lishment when only twelve years old, and upon his father's retirement
in 1821 became the leading partner in the well-remembered publishing
house of Carey and Lea ; and finally, after a prosperous career, retired
from active business in 1835, and from that time devoted his leisure
to economic science and to an extensive range of collateral inves-
tigations. Beginning with the publication of an essay on the Rate
of Wages in 1835, his fertility as an author continued until his death.
Thirteen octavo volumes and three thousand pages in pamphlet form
are the visible memorials of his activity, while it is estimated that twice
this amount of matter was contributed by him to the newspaper press.
When it is added that some of his more important works have been
translated into French, Italian, Portuguese, German, Swedish, Rus-
sian, Magyar, and even Japanese, it is clear that few writers on
economic topics have had his power of commanding the attention
of readers and his opportunity for directing the course of scientific
thought.

This remarkable success as an author, in a field not usually attrac-
tive to a wide circle of readers, was no doubt due in part to the
inherited fervor with which he entered into economic discussion, but
also in part to the boldness of his undertaking, which was nothing
less than a revolution in the methods and in the doctrines of political
economy. He began his work at a time when the English school ap-
peared to have exhausted its deductions from assumed premises, and
to be reluctant in applying its conclusions under the varied condi-
tions of society as it is. The agitation of social questions was gather-

* Notice omitted in Vol. XV.
VOL. XVII. (n.s. IX.) 27

418 HENRY CHARLES CAREY.

ing strength through the whole of his literary life, while the rapid
industrial expansion which marks the century gave a new and power-
ful stimulus to inquiry as to the forces which govern the development
and well-being of nations. Our countryman announced a series of
discoveries in social science, and in political economy the leading divis-
ion of that science ; the announcement was so made as to command
universal attention, and the value of the declared discoveries became a
question of debate among students of economic theory. In Germany
especially, the question whether Mr. Carey has made a scientific revo-
lution has been discussed in several published essays by Duhring,
Held, Lange, and Wirth. The same question has attracted attention
both in France and in Italy, and it is perhaps only in England that it
has been treated with indifference.

Mr. Carey himself has stated the order in which his discoveries
were made, in the introduction to his Principles of Social Science,
his most important work. The point of departure was a new theory
of value, which he defined as the measure of the resistance to be
overcome in obtaining things required for use, or the measure of the
power of nature over man. In simpler terms, value is measured by
the cost of reproduction. The value of every article thus declines
as the arts advance, while the general command of commodities con-
stantly increases. This causes a constant fall in the value of accumu-
lated capital as compared with the results of present labor, from which
is inferred a tendency towards harmony rather than divergence of in-
terests between capitalist and laborer. This theory, which at first seems
easily reconciled with the real import of the ordinary theory of cost
of production, Mr. Carey a:pplied to every case in which value could
be predicated, — to commodities, services, and land alike. Indeed, in
passages which seem not wholly metaphorical, it is applied to man
himself. In the case of land and its products, the theory led natu-
rally to the position that their value is due solely to the cost of repro-
ducing the like, monopoly of possession having no agency, and every
gift of nature being in itself gratuitous and without value. This
theory appears in Mr. Carey's " Principles of Political Economy," pub-
lished in 1837-40, and is found in slightly different terms in Bastiat's
" Harmonies Economiques," printed in 1850, where it was made to do
effective and welcome service as a defence of property, and especially
of property in land, against the attacks of the socialists of Proud-
hon's school. The question as to Bastiat's unacknowledged indebted-
ness to Mr. Carey was discussed, but hardly settled, in a series of letters
in the "Journal des Economistes " for 1851. Of these letters that

HENRY CHARLES CAREY. 419

most unfavorable to Bastiat's literary integrity is his own unsatisfac-
tory letter of explanation.

The chief importance of this theory of value, whether in its orig-
inal form or as revised by Bastiat, will be found to consist, we believe,
in its alleged universality. It would hardly have been thought an
epoch-making contribution, had it not offered a basis on which to rest
the value of land and labor as well as of goods. But this claim to
universal applicability, it may be safely predicted, will never be made
good. The differing values of land, according to situation and qual-
ity, and the changes of value resulting from the good or bad effects
of improved communication or newly-discovered resources, present a
range of insoluble contradictions, on which forty years of effort have
made no impression. As a theory of partial application, Mr. Carey's
statement offers acknowledged attractions, but it lends itself with diffi-
culty to any precise and thorough analysis of the phenomena of ex-
change, — a branch of inquiry in which both he and Bastiat are
singularly deficient.

Ten years later, Mr. Carey tells us, he discovered a law of produc-
tion from land the exact reverse of Ricardo's, and presented it in his
" Past, Present, and Future," published in 1848. The new theory,
which is well adjusted to that of value already announced, declares
that in the progress of society men begin with the cultivation of light
and easily-worked soils, and as they accumulate capital and increase
in numbers take up the richer but less manageable lands, so that with
the advance of the community there is a progressive gain in the rate of
return from the land and an increasing cost of subsistence. Although
this statement of the historical course of settlement of new countries
was announced and subsequently relied upon as a formal refutation of
Ricardo's system, a follower of Ricardo might accept it without diffi-
culty, and yet find the essentials of the Ricardian doctrine untouched.
The real question does not relate to the order of occupation of the
soil, but to the causes which at a given time make one piece of land
more valuable than another, and the relation of these causes to dis-
tribution in a given state of the arts of production. But although
Mr. Carey's historical discovery — the validity of which he supported
by facts collected in a remarkably wide range of reading — had not
the logical results which he claimed for it, it brings to view one of the
most interesting questions connected with the evolution of human
society. It is to be said, moreover, that the order of development
which he denies had been treated as the true historical order by many
economists, and that in this as in numbers of other cases his vigorous
attack compelled the revision of some too hasty generalizations.

420 HENRY CHARLES CARET.

Closely connected with this proposed substitute for Ricardo's doc-
trine was Mr, Carey's rejection of the Malthusian law of population.
His attack upon that celebrated dogma was renewed at every oppor-
tunity and with every rhetorical weapon at command. And as the
doctrines of Ricardo and Malthus are in a sense complementary, so
Mr. Carey's own law of distribution and his theory of production
from land seemed to carry with them as a natural deduction an anti-
Malthusian conclusion of continually-increasing ability to support
increasing numbers. Logical necessity, however, forced him to seek
for some ultimate limiting principle, and this he at last found in Her-
bert Spencer's conjectured physiological law of the diminution of
human fertility.

But, after all, Mr. Carey declares, " the great and really fundamen-
tal law of the science . . . still remained to be discovered." For a
statement of this crowning discovery he refers to the second chapter
of his " Social Science," in which is ingeniously developed " the great
law of molecular gravitation as the indispensable condition of the
existence of the being known as man." This law may be better com-
prehended from the summary statement made elsewhere, that " the
laws of being [are] the same in matter, man, and communities ; "
that " in the solar world attraction and motion [are] in the ratio of
the mass and the proximity ; " and that " in the social world asso-
ciation, individuality, responsibility, development, and progress [are]
directly proportionate to each other." That there is, not analogy,
but absolute identity of law in the physical and in the social world, is
indeed laid down in a multitude of passages of the " Social Science,"
and is maintained with great vigor in Mr. Carey's latest volume, "The
Unity of Law," published when the author was in his seventy-ninth
year. It is clear that the author might well regard the discovery of a
law that should be common to the material world and to human so-
ciety as opening to view fundamental relations never before reached.
Few would now be found to maintain, however, that any such discov-
ery was really made, or that Mr. Carey did more than select from
physical science certain striking analogies, often tending to illustrate
social phenomena, but not proving any law common to subjects so
diverse as mind and matter.

Finally, it must be remarked that while Mr. Carey's conception of
social science, like Mill's, is that of a broad field, only a part of which
is occupied by political economy, he fiiiled even in his " Principles of
Social Science " to do much more tlian discuss economic forces, and
especially failed to apply his conclusions coustructi\ely in settlement

HENRY CHARLES CAREY. 421

of any of the great questions of government. The sympathetic writer
of his memoir, Dr. William Elder, declares that Mr. Carey in his
chief work consciously failed to devise a system of political govern-
ment by the application of his established principles. "His last chap-
ter, the fiftieth of that work, is a virtual and, as I happen to know,
a conscious surrender of the attempt."

Of what have been supposed to be ^Ir. Carey's greatest direct contri-
butions to science, then, it is not probable that much will be found to
hold a permanent place. This result of a life devoted to investigation
is no doubt due in part to an ardor of temperament which caused him
to tolerate with dilhculty the impartial processes of science, and even
made it hard for liim to comprehend the logical methods of opponents
and the real position of questions in dispute. It is also due in part to
his burning interest in the practical questions of his time. He saw
these questions on their economic side, not merely as phenomena
illustrating the studies of his closet, but as touching the very life of
his nation, and he bent all his powers to the discussion of them for the
practical purpose of effecting their settlement. Of the enormous mass
of his pamphlets and of his minor contributions to the press a large
part is strictly controversial, and the habit of mind thus formed is
felt everywhere in his larger works of the last thirty years. Of the
questions of the day none concerned him so deeply as that of a pro-
tective tariff. Originally a believer in free trade, in sympathy with a
local current of thought now almost forgotten, and a firm believer in
the natural harmony resulting from economic laws, he arrived at the
opinion that to secure this harmony from disturbance and to arrive at
final freedom of trade, the co-ordinating power of government must be
used in the form of high custom duties for the protection of domestic
manufactures. From this time (not far from 1845) he was a zealous
and even passionate advocate of protection. No observed fact, no
meditated theory was for him without its bearing on this controversy ;
and upon reading his chief work it is impossible to doubt that this
absorbing interest in one question destroyed his scientific equilibrium,
or indeed to see how it could well be otherwise.

But the disappearance of Mr. Carey's supposed contributions to
scientific theory will leave science still largely indebted to him for
such services as few men are qualified to render. Political economy
has no doubt shown a dangerous tendency to settle into intellectual
routine and stagnation. It was Mr. Carey's distinction that, by the
freedom of his own speculations and the power with which they were
supported, he compelled a revision of much of the ground, that he

422 EDWARD DESOR.

stimulated fresh inquiry and opened up new lines of thought. His
school is nowhere numerous : it may be doubted whether it is destined
for long life ; but it is everywhere earnest and independent, provocative
of discussion, and thus finally serviceable to the truth. It has been
well said by one of his warmest supporters that his system is an intel-
lectual ferment of the strongest kind. It is no small service to have
communicated this leavening influence to political economy at the time
when the orthodox school of economists appeared to have finished
their work.

It is also to be said that Mr. Carey rendered an important service
by the direction which he sought to give to the discussion of the pro-
tective system. In this great debate it has been the failing of the
friends of free trade to keep their attention fixed, often exclusively,
on the gain which freedom offers to the consumer. The questions of
added stimulus to producers, of more rapid societary movement, of ear-
lier diversification of pursuits, and of quickened thought, all result-
ing in fresh gain in productive power, have been little considered by
them. The <:ains thus promised by protection have seemed to its oppo-
nents to be indirect and contingent, and to lie outside of the economic
range. But it was upon such gains as these that Mr. Carey's mind
was constantly bent. The home market was to him of chief impor-
tance, because with its growth he believed would grow the power of
association, the rapidity of exchange, the intellectual capacity of indi-
viduals, and the power and harmony of the whole society. In deal-
ing with these considerations political economy rises into a higher
region of thought than that with which it is apt to content itself.
Whatever Mr. Carey's error in supposing that the logical result of
these lofty speculations must be the vindication of the policy of pro-
tection, the world is permanently the gainer by his stimulating attempt
to show where the highest truths are to be sought.

EDWARD DESOR.

Edward Desor was born in Friedrichsdorf, near Homburg, in
1811. He died on Feb. 23, 1882, at Nice, where he spent the winter.
His father was a manufacturer. The son, French by descent, though
born in Germany, united the science and literature of both nations,
and spoke both languages with facility. After studying law at Hei-
delberg and Giessen, he fled to France in 1832 on account of political
movements, and devoted himself to natural history with Eifer in Paris.
His first work was the translation of Ritter's Geography. Elie do

EDWARD DESOR. 423

Beaumont inspired him with a love for geology and the physics of
the globe. At the gathering of the Swiss naturalists in Neuchutel in
1837, he met Agassiz and Carl Vogt, and their influence determined
his future scientific hfe. He remained at Neuchatel to study with them
the geology and meteorology of Switzerland, and to take part in their
celebrated explorations on the Aar Glacier. In 1844 he published an
account of their united observations, made during six summers in the
world of glaciers.

Having visited the glaciers of Scandinavia, Desor accompanied
Agassiz to the United States in 1847, where he soon found a field
for his scientific activity in connection with the U. S. Coast Survey.
In 1847 Congress had authorized a geological survey of the Lake
Superior district, under the direction of C. T. Jackson. Wlien Dr.
Jackson resigned, at the end of two summers, the survey was put in
charge of J. W. Foster and J. D. Whitney, and Desor was one of the
first assistants. Alluvial deposits and their fauna were assigned to
him. His researches on the drift in Western Europe, on the glaciers
of Switzerland, and on the formation of shoals along the Atlantic coast
of the United States, qualified him for this work, and ensured his
success. Besides the part which he contributed to the Report of the
Survey, he published his views on the drift of Lake Superior in the
"American Journal of Science" (xiii. 93, 1852). Desor first intro-
duced the word " Laurentian " to describe geological formations in
Maine, on the River St. Lawrence, and on Lakes Champlain and
Ontario ; but the word was appropriated afterwards by the Canadian
geologists for another purpose. The earlier and the later publica-
tions of Desor appeared in European journals. But he contributed
while he was in this country to the Proceedings of the American
Academy, of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science, and of the Natural History Society of Boston, and to the
" American Journal of Science." After his return to Europe he pub-
lished papers on the " Climate of the United States, and its Effect on
Habits and Manners," and on the Falls of Niagara.

In 1852 Desor accepted an invitation to Neuchutel as professor of
geology in the Gymnasium and in the Academy, and became an attrac-
tive teacher. He took a conspicuous part in the politics of Switzer-
land. He was a member of the Grand Council of his Canton, serving
twice as its president. He was also one of the National Council, but
declined the honor of presiding over it. At the same time he was
pursuing his researches in geology and palaeontology, and publishing the
results to the world. In 1864 Desor went with Escher and Martius

424 JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER.

on a journey of exploration into North Africa, — one pregnant result
reached being the conclusion that the Sahara was a former sea-basin
elevated at a later epoch. Desor distinguished three kinds of deserts :
erosion-deserts, sand-deserts, and those of plateaux.

Desor was one of the most active pioneers in prehistorical investi-
gations. He made a costly collection of archaeological treasures, and
he published, between 1861 and 1881, eleven papers upon the subject,
the last being on the fossil man of Nice. When the first International
Congress of Anthropologists and Archaeologists met at Neuchatel, in
1866, he was chosen to preside. Desor owned a country-seat on
the summit of the Jura, which was the resort, in the summer, of the
learned from every country. The names of his famous visitors are
inscribed on a tree a century old ; among them that of Theodore
Parker. Having given the best of his life to science, progress, and
freedom, Desor bequeathed to the city of Neuchatel his rich collec-
tions in geology and archjeology, and also a large property, which he
had inherited from his brother's wife, to preserve and increase them.

JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER.

John William Draper was born at St. Helen's, near Liverpool,
on May 5, 1811. At the age of eleven he was sent to the school of
the Wesleyan Methodists, his father being a minister in that denomi-
nation. Here and under private tutors he received his elementary
education. After the University of London was opened he went there
to study chemistry under Dr. Turner. At the age of twenty-two
(1832), he was brought by his American relatives to the United
States, where he afterwards lived, and where he died on Jan. 4,
1882, in his home at Hastings, on the Hudson. In this country he
studied in the University of Pennsylvania, and in 1836 took the degree
of Doctor of Medicine. He had already published original papers in
the Journal of the Franklin Institute, — in 1834, on the Nature of
Capillary Attraction, and on the Best Form of Galvanic Batteries ; in
1835, on the Magnetic Action of Light. In 1836 the thesis presented
for his degree was published by the Faculty of the University. After
this, many contributions to science followed in rapid succession, — on
chemistry, electricity, heat, light, thermo-electricity, phosphorescence,
and kindred subjects. Fifty different papers, published in this country
or in Europe, and many of them in several places, are enumerated in
the Catalogue of the Royal Society of London which closes with the
year 1863.

JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER. 425

In 1837 Professor Draper began to publish his researches on the
light of the sun, and on the solar spectrum, — a subject to which he
often returned down to the year 1873. The discovery of Daguerre
turned his attention to photography and photo-chemistry. He antici-
pated even Daguerre in the art of taking portraits by the action of
light. But before the introduction of collodion a long exposure was
necessary. As early as 1840 he obtained a photograph of the moon,
about one inch in diameter, after an exposure of twenty minutes. In
1842 he announced the paradox of latent light ^ pi'oducing images
invisible to the eye until revealed by chemical action upon them ;
whereby a new territory was annexed to the solar spectrum at the
violet end, corresponding to the calorific extension at the red end.
He was successful in photographing the fixed lines in the solar spec-
trum, outside even of its visible limits, whether formed by the disper-
sion of a prism or by the interference of a fine grating. His paper, in
which he proved that the decomposition of carbonic acid by the leaves
of plants was produced under the influence of the yellow rays rather
than of the violet rays of the sun, which appeared originally in the
Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society for 1843, was
republished in London, Paris, and Berlin.

The results of Professor Draper's experiments on the relation of light
to heat were given to the public in 1847. He proved that all solid
bodies became incandescent at the same temperature, red hot at 977°
Fahrenheit; and that the more refrangible rays were successively added
at increasing temperatures, and the original rays became at the same
time more intense. Melloni, who may be said to have created the
science of radiant heat (so widely did he extend its area), was imme-
diately attracted to these investigations of Dr. Draper, and testified to
the ingenuity and success with which they had been conducted. When
Kirchhoff, in 18G2, published an appendix to his researches on the
solar spectrum, in which he gives a mathematical foundation for ex-
perimental deductions already known, he said : " Draper has derived
from experiment the conclusion that all solid bodies begin to glow at
the same temperature. But he has observed in his experiments that
certain bodies, as chalk, marble, and fluor-spar, shine at a lower tem-
perature than they should according to this law : he calls this light
phosphorescent, and observes that it is distinguished from the glow by
its color. But whatever name may be given to the light, it contra-
dicts the law, and a body which shows it cannot satisfy the assumption
which is made in proving the law ; it cannot remain unchanged, the
temperature remaining the same ; the phosphorescence is not the

426 JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER.

simple influence of heat, it is not exclusively conditioned on tempera-
ture, but it is caused by changes in the body : if these changes, be
they chemical or of any other kind, cease, then the phosphorescence
must also vanish." This quotation is introduced because it has been
thought that Kirchhoff did not sufficiently recognize the value and the
priority of Draper's work.

Dr. Draper's experiments on the spectra of various flames, proving
that the occurrence of lines, bright or dark, was connected with the
chemical nature of the substance producing the flame, brought him to
the threshold of spectrum analysis, as now understood. His words are
prophetic : " For this reason these lines merit a much more critical
examination than has yet been given to them, for by their aid we may
be able to ascertain points of great interest in other departments of
science. Thus, if we are ever able to acquire certain knowledge re-
specting the physical state of the sun and other stars, it will be by an
examination of the light they emit." If he did not himself fulfil the
prophecy. Angstrom and Stewart also failed, though they had come so
near as to know that a gas when luminous emits rays of light of the
same refrangibility as those which it has the power to absorb.

Dr. Draper's later papers (1872) on the Distribution of Calorific and
Chemical Activities in the Solar Spectrum reveal a mind luminous in
thought and fertile in devising experiments. His final statement is
that the different rays of the sun are only distinguished by varieties of
wave-length or rapidity of uuduliition. Whatever other differences
appear do not belong to the rays, but to the bodies on which they fall,
by which their energy is converted into other forms of energy. The
excessive heat at and beyond the red end of the spectrum is the work
of the prism, which condenses comparatively the red end and scatters
the violet end. As the heat of the diffraction-spectrum was insufficient
for experiment, he equalized the dispersion by collecting the rays in
the focus of a curved mirror. The superiority in the chemical action
at the violet end belongs to the bodies submitted to it, and disappears
when they are properly chosen.

These are the fruits, not of richly-endowed scientific research, but
of the intervals of leisure left by professional duties. In 183G Mi:
Draper was appointed Professor of Chemistry, Natural Philosophy,
and Physiology in Hampden Sidney College, Virginia. In 1839 he
was made Professor of Chemistry and Natural History in the Univer-
sity of New York. In 1841 he assisted in the establishment of the
Medical Department of the University, was Professor of Chemistry in
it, and afterwards President. A Treatise on Chemistry, first published

JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER. 427

in 184G, reached its tenth edition in 1852 ; another on Physiology,
which appeared in 185G, arrived at its seventh edition in 1875. In
18G6 he published a text-book on Anatomy, Physiology, and Hygiene.
Some of the Introductory Lectures to his courses have been published ;
also an address before the New York Academy of Medicine, in 18(i3,
on the " Historical Influence of the Medical Profession." His books
and his lectures were vivified by his own fresh explorations into the
heart of his profession : the selective action of membranes ; endos-
mosis through thin fibres ; the measure of the force of endosmosis ;
the cause of the coagulation of the blood ; the theory of the circula-
tion of the blood ; explanation of the flow of sap ; respiration of fishes;
action of the organic muscle fibres of the lungs ; allotropism of living
systems ; new observations on the action of the skin ; function of
nerve vessels and their electrical analogies ; function of the sympa-
thetic nerve ; explanation of certain parts of the auditory apparatus,
particularly of the cochlea and the semicircular canals ; the theory of
vision ; the theory of muscular contraction — all these subjects were
touched by his laborious experiments.

In 1844 Professor Draper published selections from his scientific
papers under the title of " Forces Producing the Organization of
Plants." Sir David Brewster, than whom no one of his day was
better qualified to speak for the sun, once said to Professor Draper
" that the solar spectrum is a world in itself, and that the study of it
will never be completed." We have lived to see that it not only is a
world in itself, but that it contains the seci'ets of all other worlds, and
is rapidly revealing them to the patient student. In 1875 this Acad-
emy awarded the Rumford Medals to Dr. Draper for his " Researches
in Radiant Energy." In 1878 he collected his scattered memoirs
on this subject, and published them in a single volume of nearly five
hundred pages. This publication he regarded as an autobiography of
his scientific life. That the reader may not be surprised that it em-
bodies the discoveries distilled from more than forty years of study,
he reminds him that days are often required to ascertain a fact that
may be stated in a single line. He says : " To a reader imbued with
the true spirit of philosophy, even the shortcomings easily detectable
in it are not without a charm. From the better horizon he has gained
he watches his author, who, like a pioneer, is doubtfully finding his
way, here travelling on a track that leads to nothing, then retracing
his footsteps ; and again, undeterred, making attempts until success
crown his exertions." Mr. Draper appreciated the Academy's award
as an acceptable return for all his disappointments and all his sue-

428 JOHN WILLIAM DRAPER.

cesses, inasmuch as it was " the highest testimonial of approbation that
American science has to bestow on those who have devoted themselves
to the enlargement of knowledge."

For ten years (I860- 1870) Dr. Draper relaxed in his experimental
work, and soon became a conspicuous author in the republic of letters,
addressing a much larger body of readers than are reached by purely
scientific works. The moral and intellectual condition of man is so
intimately associated with his material organization that physiology,
while dealing with the latter, cannot wholly overlook the former. By
easy journeys the scientific spirit travels from man as an individual to
man in his relation to different countries, races, and epochs. In 18G3
Dr. Draper published " A History of the Intellectual Development of
Europe." The argument of the book is that man has risen from
barbarism to the highest civilization, not by accident, but by a law of
growth or evolution, equally applicable to nations and individuals.
This book has been translated into many European languages and
Arabic, and has passed through various editions. In 1864 Dr. Draper
delivered four lectures before the Historical Society of New York,
which were afterwards expanded and published in 1865 under the title
of " Thoughts on the Future Civil Policy of America." This book
has had a large circle of readers, either in the original or in transla-
tions. It suggested a more elaborate work, viz. his '' History of the
American Civil War," which appeared in 1867 - 70, in three vol-
umes. Posterity alone, it is said, can pronounce an impartial verdict
on great national issues. Posterity has the advantage of knowing the
results, remote as well as immediate, of important events. But it
must depend for the facts on the witnesses to those events as they
gradually come to light. Dr. Draper said, " More depends on the
impartiality of the writer than on the deadening lapse of time." En-
joying the confidence of the Secretary of War, admitted to an inspec-
tion of the public documents on both sides, trusted by many who took
a conspicuous part in the military and civil crises of the period, Dr.
Draper had great advantages for writing a faithful narrative. Pos-
terity must decide whether he has recorded the dispassionate judg-
ments of a cool, scientific observer, or has written as a heated partisan.
The last work from the pen of Dr. Draper appeared in 1874, a " His-
tory of the Conflict of Religion and Science." There is no conflict
between religion and science. If he had called his subject a " History
of the Conflict between Theology and Science," it would have been
more intelligible, and would have disarmed much of the criticism upon
it. This work has had a irrcat circulation, havinir been translated into

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D. 429

more than seven languages. Dr. Draper has shared with Galileo,
Copernicus, Kepler, Locke, and Mill the honor of having his work
placed on the Index of books prohibited by the Roman Church.

With such absorbing pursuits, Dr. Draper nevertheless responded
to occasional calls made on his literary and scientific attainments. In
1870 he delivered an address before the American Union Academy of
Literature, Science, and Art. In 1876 he spoke to the American
Chemical Society of New York on " Science in America." In 1877
he addressed the Unitarian Institute at Springfield on evolution. In
1872-3 he is again in the field of scientific research, and only a
few months before his death he succeeded in photographing two of
the many comets which distinguished the year 1881. Dr. Draper's
mind was too large to be shut up within the walls of his laboratory.
To him the minutest facts were of value, but only as they furnished
the key for interpreting the universal Cosmos of nature and humanity.
In clear and graceful language the best that was in his thoughts was
shared by the world. There was a continuity in his life-work, plain
to himself, if not obvious to the superficial observer. He says: "When
I thus look back on the objects that have occupied my attention, I
recognize how they have been interconnected, each preparing the way
for its successor. Is it not true that for every person the course of
life is along the line of least resistance, and that in this the movement
of humanity is like the movement of material bodies ? "

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D.

The Hon. Lewis H. Morgan was made a Fellow of the Academy
in 18G8. His parents were of old New England stock, and of this
he often spoke with feelings of satisfaction. His father was descended
from James Morgan, who settled near Boston in 1646, and his mother
from John Steele, who had a home near Cambridge in 1641. At the
time of his birth, Nov. 21, 1818, his parents resided in the village
of Aurora, in Cayuga County, N. Y. He liad the advantage of
an excellent preliminary education, and was graduated at Union Col-
lege in 1840. He afterwards studied law, and was admitted to the
bar. Making his home at Rochester, N. Y., his zeal and honesty soon
secured him a large and profitable practice in his profession. In busi-
ness he was associated with his classmate. Judge George H. Danforth.

In 1855 he became interested in the projected railroad from Mar-
quette to the iron region on the south shore of Lake Superior, and in
the development of the iron mines. The management of these enter-

430 LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D.

prises, from which he derived a considerable property, caused him
gradually to withdraw from the practice of his profession, and induced
him to make excursions into what was then the wilderness of Northern
Michigan. It was during these explorations that he became interested
in the habits and works of the Beaver, — a study which he followed for
several years as opportunities offered, and the results of which he gave
to the world, in 1868, in an octavo volume entitled "The American
Beaver and his Works." This is a most thorough and interesting bio-
logical treatise, of which the late Dr. Jeffries Wyman remarked that
it came the nearest to perfection of any work of its kind he had ever
read.

It is however to his labors in anthropology that Mr. Morgan owes
his wide-spread flime, and it is of interest to note the probable cause
of his turning his attention to the study of Indian life. On his return
from college he joined a secret society, known as the " Gordian Knot,"
composed of the young men of the village. Chiefly by his influence,
this society was enlarged and reorganized, and became the " New Con-
federacy of the Iroquois." The society held its councils in the woods
at night. It was founded upon the ancient Confederacy of the Five
Nations ; and its symbolic council-fires were kindled upon the an-
cient territories of the Mohawks, the Oneidas, the Onondagas, the
Caj'ugas, and the Senecas. Its objects were to gather the fragments
of the history, institutions, and government of the Indians and to en-
courage a kinder feeling towards them. A friend writes that " many
of its members have since become distinguished in various walks of
life, but upon none of them was its influence so persuasive and so
permanent as upon Mr. Morgan. It gave direction to his thought,
and stimulus to his energies. In order that it might be in conformity
with its model, he visited the tribes in New York and Canada, even
then remnants, but retaining, so far as they were able, their ancient
laws and customs. These he investigated, and soon became deeply
interested in them."

On his removal to Rochester his studies of Jndian institutions were
continued, and in 1846 he attended day after day a Grand Council
of the Indians at the Tonawanda reservation ; and in April of the
same year he went to Washington to plead in behalf of the Indians
against tlie great injustice done them in taking away some of their
lands. While on this journey he attended a meeting of the New York
Historical Society, of which he had been elected a member, and read
his first public paper on the subject to which he had given so much
time and thought. This paper is not printed in the " Proceedings

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D. 431

of the Society," but is referred to as "an Essay on the Constitutional ■
Government of the Six Nations of Indians." The substance of it is
probably included in the series of fourteen " Letters on the Iroquois "
addressed to Albert Gallatin, LL.D., the president of the society,
and published in the several numbers of the " American Review," *
from February to December, 1847, under the nom de plume of Sken-
andoah.

These letters were followed by several instructive reports to the
Regents of the University of the State of New York, upon Indian
remains in that State, and on the " Fabrics of the Iroquois," all bear-
ing evidence of his great interest and activity in the study of Indian
life and institutions. These several papers were afterwards rewritten
and enlarged, and published in book form in 1851, under the well-
known title of " League of the Iroquois." This work at once at-
tracted general attention, and secured for its author a well-earned
position in literature. It contains a careful analysis of the social
organization and government of the powerful and famous confederacy,
with many details relating to Indian life.

In 18-17 Mr. Morgan again attended a council of the Iroquois,
and on Oct. 31, 1847, he was regularly adopted into the Hawk gens
of the Senecas, and given the name of Ta-yd-da-icah-hugh (one lying
acrossf), as the son of Jemmy Johnson, the interpreter, and gi-andson
of the famous Red Jacket. As a member of the Seneca tribe he was
better able than before to continue his studies of the social institutions
of the remnants of the tribes forming the ancient confederacy. Ten
years after this, at the Montreal meeting of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, he read a paper on " The Laws of
Descent of the Iroquois," which furnished the basis of one of the
most important generalizations in relation to American ethnology.
In 1858, in an encampment of Ojibwa Indians at Marquette, he found
that their system of kinship was substantially the same as that of the
Iroquois. The conclusions which he drew from this discovery are
clearly given in the paper which he read before the Academy at its
meeting on Feb. 11, 1868, entitled "A Conjectural Solution of the
Origin of the Classificatory System of Relationship." % This paper is

* The American Review : a Whig Journal of Politics, Literature, Art, and
Science, vols. v. and vi. New York, 1847.

t The meaning of this name is that he was to put himself across the path-
way of communication, and preserve friendship between the two races.

X Tills paper is printed in full in the Proceedings of the Academy, Vol. VII.
pp. 43G-477.

432 LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D.

in fact a resume of his great work which was then passing through the
press, and appeared as a thick quarto volume of the Smithsonian
Conti'ibutioDs to Knowledge, published in 1870, under the title of
" Systems of Consanguinity and Affinity of the Human Family."
This volume is literally one of facts, from which most important con-
clusions are constantly being drawn. As Mr. Morgan states, it con-
tains the systems of relationship of " four-fifths, numerically, of the
entire human family."

Duriug the years in which these materials were being collected Mr.
Morgan was not idle, but was gradually obtaining information for future
contributions, both by study in his well-stored library and by personal
expeditions among the Indian tribes of the West and of Hudson Bay
Territory. This also was the most active period of his literary life,
several of the papers which were afterwards revised and printed having
been sketched during this time. Among the most important of these
were contributions to the "North American Review," from 1869 to
1876, under the titles of "The Seven Cities of Cibola," "Indian Migra-
tions," " Montezuma's Dinner," and the " Houses of the Mound-Build-
ers." Probably the paper of 1876, entitled "Montezuma's Dinner,"
is the most characteristic of what has been called the " Morgan school "
of ethnology. In it he showed that the commonly received statements
relating to the Aztec civilization were founded on misconceptions and
exaggerations, and that the Mexican confederacy, reviewed in the
light of knowledge derived from a study of the social and tribal insti-
tutions of the Indians of America, would be found to form no excep-
tion to the democratic military and priestly government founded on
the gentile system common to the American tribes.

Mr. Morgan always chose forcible language in expressing his ideas,
and he held fast to theories which he believed to be well founded.
The recent extended investigations which have brought many addi-
tional facis to light will naturally lead to the criticism of some of the
theories which he formed, from the facts at his disposal, during the
active period of his literary work ; but while such as were constructed
of loose materials will fall, and none would have been more ready
than he to pull them down in the cause of truth, the great principles
which his researches have brought out are so apparently beyond con-
troversy that they will ever stand as the rocks against which the wild
and sensational theories will be dashed, and as foundations upon which
to build in the further study of American archaeology and ethnology-
Mr. Morgan's last excursion was to the ancient and modern pueblos
of Colorado and New Mexico in 1878, and was undertaken primarily

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D. 433

for the purpose of confirming his conceptions in relation to the devel-
opment of house life among the Indian tribes. In " House Life and
Architecture of the North American Indians," expressing his views
of communal living among the village Indians, we particularly notice
the persistency with which he clung to his early theories on this sub-
ject. This was his latest work, published only a few weeks before his
death.

While his *' Systems of Affinity and Consanguinity," " League of
the Iroquois," and paper on the Mexican civilization will ever stand
as monuments of his industry and research, and give to him enduring
fame, he will be most widely known by his more popular volume of
1877, " Ancient Society, or Researches in the Lines of Human Prog-
ress from Savagery, through Barbarism, to Civilization," which is, in
fact, the embodiment of the most important of his researches, the
grand summing up of many years of industrious labor and deep
thought. A thorough evolutionist in his treatment of the subjects of
his volume, he commences the Preface with the statement that " The
great antiquity of mankind upon earth has been conclusively estab-
lished," and goes on to state that " this knowledge changes materially
the views which have prevailed respecting the relations of savages to
barbarians, and of barbarians to civilized men. It can now be asserted
upon convincing evidence that savagery preceded barbarism in all the
tribes of mankind, as barbarism is known to have preceded civilization.
The history of the human race is one in source, one in experience, and
one in progress." He then on the second and third pages writes,
that '' Inventions and discoveries stand in serial relations along the
lines of human progress and register its successive stages, while
social and civil institutions, in virtue of perpetual human wants, have
been developed from a few primary germs of thought. They exhibit
a similar register of progress. . . . Throughout the latter part of the
period of savagery, and the entire period of barbarism, mankind in
general were organized in gentes, phratries, and tribes. . . . The
principal institutions of mankind originated in savagery, wer£ devel-
oped in barbarism, and are maturing in civilization. In like manner
the family has passed through successive forms, and created great
systems of consanguinity and affinity, which have remained to the
present time. . . . The idea of property has undergone a similar
growth and development. Commencing at zero in savagery, the pas-
sion for the possession of property, as the representative of accumu-
lated subsistence, has now become dominant over the human mind in
civilized races." He then writes that " The four classes of facts above

VOL. XVH. (N. S. IX.) 28

434 LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D.

indicated, and which extend themselves in parallel lines along the
pathways of human progress from savager}' to civilization, form the
principal subjects of discussion in this volume."

These quotations are sufficient to convey an idea of the substance
of the vohime and the principles which its author has set fortli. To
follow his scholarly statements and call attention in detail to the
important deductions he has drawn, particularly in relation to Ameri-
can ethnology, would be impossible in this brief notice of the labors
of one who has done so much.

In social life Mr. Morgan was much beloved for his kind and
genial ways, and at Rochester his house, with its large hall, in
which were his library and collections, was often the gathering place
of scholars and scientists, and there the well-known literary Club, of
which he was one of the founders a quarter of a century ago, often
met to discuss the papers which he brouglit before them. Ever active
as a citizen in all good works, he was twice honored by public offices :
in 18GI he was a member of the State Assembly, and in 18G7 he was
a Senator. In both these capacities he was distinguished as the un-
compromising foe of all vicious measures, and his fair name was never
sullied by even the insinuation of corrupt or double dealing.

From his great interest in the Indian tribes and from his knowledge
of the natural course of the development of civilization, he always took
to heart the unfortunate condition of the Indians and the unnatural
methods which were pursued by Government in relation to their
civilization, and often urged, as occasions arose, the desirability of
leading the Indians to civilization by making them self-sustaining as
a pastoral people, writing several letters to the press, particularly to
the " Nation," in which are presented forcible reasons for following
such a plan.

Mr. Morgan was a member of numerous historical and scientific
societies, and in 1879 he was elected President of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, and presided over the
meeting held in Boston the follo\nng year. At this time it was
noticed that his strength was failing, and, although he had much en-
joyment at the meeting, he remarked that it would probably be tlie
last time he should meet with the Association, and that he so much
the more appreciated the honor which had been conferred upon him.
From that time he slowly declined, and died at his home, at the age
of sixty-three, on Dec. 17, 1881.

Mr. Morgan was married in 1851 to Mary E., daughter of tlie late
Lemuel Steele, of Albany, N. Y., who, with one son, survives him.

LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D. 435

A sad calamity caused the death of his two daughters in 1862, and
at that time, as Mr. Morgan was much interested in plans for the
higher education of women, he endeavored to establish in Rochester a
college for women, to which he jjrojjosed to make a memoi'ial endow-
ment; but his efforts were not entirely successful. lie then resolved
to leave the whole of his property for the purpose after the decease
of his wife and son, hoping that others would unite in making the fund
ample for such an institution. In pursuance of this object he has left
his entire and considerable property in trust to the University of
Rochester for the final establishment of a college for women.

In the "Popular Science Monthly" for November, 1880, there is
a good portrait of Mr. Morgan as President of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, accompanied by an account
of his life written by Major J. W. Powell.

In this short sketch no attempt has been made to mention all the
publications of which Mr. Morgan was the author. A full list of his
papers is desirable, as they are widely scattered, and several are but
little known, and difficult to obtain. The following list gives the titles
of those which have come under the writer's notice : —

Letters (1-14) on the Iroquois, "by Skenantloah," addressed to Albert Gal-
latin, LL.D., President of the New York Historical Society. (The American
Review : a Whig Journal of Politics, Literature, Art, and Science. Vols, v., vi.
February-December, 1847.) New York. 8°.

Communications to the Regents of the New York State University: An
Account of Indian Pipes, Fortifications, &c., in New York, 1848. (Second
Annual Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New Y''ork.)
1849. Albany. So. Illustrated.

Report upon the Articles furnished the Indian Collection, 1849. (Third An-
nual Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New Y''ork.) 1850.
Albany. 8°. Illustrated.

The Fabrics of the Iroquois. (Reprint in part of Report to the Regents of
the New Y''ork State University. Stryker's American Register and Magazine.
July, 1850. Vol. iv.) Trenton. 8°. Illustrated.

Schedule of Articles obtained from the Indians in "Western New York and
on Grand River, Canada. Abstract of Report. (Third and Fiftli Annual
Reports of the Regents of the University on the State Cabinet of Natural
History.) Alhany, 1850, 1852. 8".

League of the Ilo-de-nosau nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, 1851. 8°. Illus-
trated.

Report on the Fabrics, Inventions, Implements, and Utensils of the Iroquois.
(Fifth Animal Report of the Regents of the State of New York, 1851.)
Albany, 1852. 8". Illustrated.

List of [198] Articles manufactured by the Indians of "Western New York
and Canada West, with their Indian names. (Catalogue of the Cabinet of
Natural History of the State of New Y'ork.) Albany, 1853. 8°.

436 LEWIS HENRY MORGAN, LL.D.

Laws of Descent of the Iroquois. (Proceedings of the American Associa-
tion for tlie Advancement of Science. Montreal Meeting, 1857.) Vol. xl.
Cambridge, 1858. 8°.

Tlie Indian Mode of Bestowing and Changing Names. (Proceedings of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science. Springfield Meeting,
1859.) Vol. xiii. Cambridge, 18G0. 8".

Circular in Reference to tlie Degrees of Relationship among Different Na-
tions. (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections. Vol. ii.) 1860. 8°.

Suggestions relative to an Ethnological Map of North America, 36 by 44
inches. (Annual Report of the Smithsonian Institution for 1861.) 1862. 8°.

A Conjectural Solution of the Origin of the Classificatory System of Rela-
tionship. (Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences,
February, 1868.) Vol. vii. Boston, 1868. 8«.

The American Beaver and his Works. Philadelphia. 1868. 8". Illustrated.

The " Seven Cities of Cibola." (North American Review. Vol. cviii. April,
1869.) Boston, 1869. 8«.

Indian Migrations. (North American Review. Vol. cix. Oct., 1869; Vol.
ex. Jan., 1870.) Boston, 1869, 1870. S".

The Stone and Bone Implements of the Arickarees. (Twenty-first Annual
Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New York on the
State Cabinet of Natural History, 1868.) Albany, 1871. 8°. Illustrated.

Systems of Consanguinity and Affinity of the Human Pamily. (Smithsonian
Contributions to Knowledge. 218 ) Washington, 1871. 4°.

Australian Kinship. From Original Memoranda of Rev. Lorimer Fison.
(Proceedings of the Americaq Academy of Arts and Sciences, March, 1872.
Vol. viii.) Boston, 1873. 8°.

Ethnical Periods. (Proceedings of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science. Detroit Meeting, 1875.) Vol. xxiv. Salem, 1876. 8°.

Arts of Subsistence. (Proceedings of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science. Detroit Meeting, 1875.) Vol. xxiv. Salem, 1876. 8°.

Houses of the Mound-Builders. (North American Review. Vol. cxxiii.
July, 1876.) Boston, 1876. 8".

Montezuma's Dinner. (North American Review. Vol. cxxii. 1876.) Boston,

1876. 8°.

Ancient Society, or Researches in the Lines of Human Progress from Sav-
agery through Barbarism to Civilization. New York, 1877. S".

On the Ruins of a Stone Pueblo on the Animas River in New Mexico : with
a Ground Plan. (Twelfth Annual Report, Peabody Museum of American
Archteology and Ethnology.) Cambridge, 1880. 8°.

Objects of an Expedition to New Mexico and Central America. (State-
ment presented to the Archsological Institute of America, March, 1880.)
Boston. 8°. ^

A Study of the Houses of the American Aborigines, with a Scheme of Ex-
ploration of the Ruins in New Mexico and elsewhere. (First Annual Report
of the Archaeological Institute of America.) 1880. 8". Illustrated.

Houses and House-life of the American Aborigines. (Contributions to Amer-
ican Ethnology. Vol. iv.) Department of the Interior. Washington. 1881.
4°. Illustrated.

ST. JULIEN RAVENEL, M.D. 437

ST. JULIEN RAVENEL, M.D.

Dk. St. Julien Raven el, whose death occurred on March 15,
1882, was no ordinary man. With large scientific knowledge and a
mind eminently qualified for scientific research, he joined the ardor of
the speculative philosopher to a patience in experiment and inquiry
which never failed. There was in the changed conditions of agricul-
ture in his native State and in the South a vast arena for the exer-
cise and application of scientific investigation. There was his chosen
work.

The origin and rapid development of the manufacture of commercial
fertilizers in South Carolina ; the simplification of the modes of manu-
facturing fertilizers so as to lessen the cost and enlarge the area of
consumption ; the discovery of a system by which small grain and hay
can be grown in profusion on the worn-out and sandy lands of the
Carolina coast ; a mode of turning to immediate account the lands
which, it was thought, must be abandoned if ever the culture of rice
should become unprofitable ; the use of artesian wells in and around
Charleston for supplying mills and factories with water at an incon-
siderable expense, — all these are inseparably connected with the name
of Dr. St. Julien Ravenel.

Dr. St. Julien Ravenel, the eldest son of the late John Ravenel,
was born in Charleston, S. C, on December 15, 1819, where be re-
ceived his early education in the grammar-schools of that city. Sub-
sequently he went to New Jersey to continue his studies, and finally
a})plied himself to medicine. He was a student with Drs. Ilolbrook
and Ogier, and was graduated at the Medical College in Charleston
in the class of 1840. Afterwards he continued the study of medicine
at Philadelphia and in Paris. Upon his return to Charleston he be-
came Demonstrator of Anatomy at the Medical College, but resigned
the position after a time. The active practice of medicine was dis-
tasteful to him, although he had the promise of a highly successful
career.

He now determined to devote his life to scientific pursuits. He
became intimate with the late Professor Agassiz, and was associated
with him in his investigations. Dr. Ravenel pursued with especial
interest the study of natural history and physiology, being particularly
skilful in microscopic researches. Chemistry, however, was his favorite
pursuit, and in chemistry as applied to agriculture he achieved his
most important results. When the war broke out he went into

438 ADMIRAL JOHN RODGERS.

service with the P]ia?nix Rifles, and was with fliat command at the
bombardment of Fort Sumter. Somewhat hiter he was assigned to duty
at Cohimhia. After the war he returned to Charleston, and upon the
discovery of the value of the phosphate deposits of South Carolina
for agricultural purposes he founded one of the phosphate companies,
and remained identified to the close of his life with various chemico-
agricultural companies in South Carolina.

It was Dr. Ravenel who some years ago raised new hopes in the
whole low country of South Carolina by the explanation of means
by which large crops of small grain and hay could be made on the
light sandy lands on the coast, and he had so demonstrated the practi-
cability of his views that a company is in progress of formation with
the object of commencing operations on the delta of the Santee River.

Dr. Ravenel took great interest in the effort to secure to Charleston
an abundant supply of pure water. He closely watched the boring
of the first artesian well, and one effect of his observations was the
boring of artesian wells of moderate depth for the use of mills
and factories.

When the yellow fever ravaged Norfolk, he was one of the band
of volunteers who went from Charleston to the relief of that unfor-
tunate city. As surgeon-in-chief of the large Confederate hospital
in Columbia, he won the admiration of the citizens not more by his
skill than by his kindness.

By the death of Dr. Ravenel Charleston loses one of her most de-
voted and eminent sons, who has perhaps done more to develop the
native resources of South Carolina than any other single individual.

ADMIRAL JOHN RODGERS.

John Rodgers, U. S. Navy, was born in Hartford County, Mary-
land, Aug. 8, 1812. His paternal grandfather was a lieutenant-
colonel in the Revolutionary War, and served with credit in command
of Maryland troops. His father was Commodore John Rodgers, the
well-known naval commander of the early part of the present cen-
tury. The subject of the present sketch was appointed a midshipman
in the Navy iu 1828, and found his first duty in the Mediterranean
squadron on board the ship Constellation. After passing his exami-
nation in 1834, he desired to obtain a better education than was practi-
cable on board ship, and therefore secured a year's leave of absence,
which he spent at the University of Virginia. During the five years
following, his life was the usual one of the naval midshipman of the

ADMIRAL JOHN RODGERS. 439

best class. He served for a short time on coast-survey duty. On
Jan. 22, 1840, he was prouioti'd to tlie grade of lieutenant, and
assigned, first to the command of the schooner Wave, i^id afterward
to that of the brig Jefferson. His station was now the coast of
Florida, where he was actively engaged in the war with the Seminole
Indians. After another tour of duty in the Mediterranean squadron,
and spending two years at Pittsburg, Pa., he was again detailed for
coast-survey service and sent to investigate the hydrography of tht; coast
of Florida. He executed this work with a skill which elicited the
warm encomiums of Professor Eache, and laid the foundation of his
subsequent reputation.

The first duty which brought him prominently before the public
was the command of the iSorth Pacific Survey Expedition. The
object of this expedition was the survey of the islands on the north-
eastern coast of Asia, from Japan to Behring Strait. The com-
mander of the expedition at the time she sailed was Ringgold ; but
on reat-hing the coast of Japan ill health obliged him to resign the
command, which then devolved upon Lieutenant Rodgers. During
the following three years his squadron was employed in the duty
assigned to it, and made the most complete survey that had ever been
attempted by an American squadron in those waters. In 1855 he
made his celebrated expedition in the Vincennes through Behring
Strait, with a view of continuing his explorations into the Arctic
Ocean. He especially desired to verify the positions of certain lands
which had been reported as north of Herald Island. The northern-
most point which he reached was 72^* 5' of latitude, and the supposed
land was not found. He then turned his course toward the west,
with a view of exploring Wi'angel Land, but ice compelled him to
retrace his steps. His return through Behring Strait was marked
by a line of soundings which had the effect of rendering navigation
safer for future expeditions. His whole conduct of this difficult ex-
pedition was marked by a skill, fortitude, and prudence which assured
him a commanding position in the public service. He reached San
Francisco on his return in October, 1855, and was immediately pro-
moted to the grade of commander.

During the five years after his return he spent most of his time in
Washington, engaged in preparing the work of his expedition for the
press. This duty was finished about the time of the outbreak of
the Civil War. The services of our colleague during the war are so
well known that little more than a brief description of their character
and of the qualities which they displayed will be necessary.

440 ADMIRAL JOHN RODGERS.

lie was first assigned to duty on the Mississippi in building and
organizing the fleet of iron-cluds which afterward did such distin-
guished service under Admirals P'oote and Davis. Before complet-
ing the work he was ordered to the Atlantic coast, and accompanied
Ailmiral Dupout as aid in the expedition against Port Royal, It
was he who there hoisted the American flag on the captured forts.
He was next placed in command of the iron-clad sloop-of-war
Galena. During the year which he spent on this ship she was sta-
tioned in or near the James River. Iler commander seems to have
had great faith in the efficiency of iron-clads as fighting ships, and to
have lost no opportunity of testing them against shore batteries. His
attack on Fort Darling was one of the most gallantly-conducted
naval engagements of the war, two-thirds of his crew being killed or
wounded.

Toward the end of 1862 he was detached from the Galena, ordered
to the comrpand of the Monitor Weehawken, and sent to the South
Atlantic blockading squadron. His capture of the Rebel irod-clad
Atlanta near Savannah, Ga., was one of the remarkable events
of the war, owing to the proof it gave of the power of heavy shot
against such armored vessels as then existed. The Atlanta was
supposed to be the most powerful iron-clad which the Confederate
Government had built, and when she put to sea for the purpose of
destroying the monitors of the blockading squadron, she was followed
by a steamer filled with spectators. But the first shot from the fifteen-
hich gun of the Weehawken, although it did not actually pass through
her side, produced a concussion w-hich so stunned and disabled the
crew that they speedily surrendered.

After the close of the war the question arose whether the monitors
were adapted to long voyages. Commodore Rodgers offered to test
the question by conducting the Monadnock to San Francisco through
the Straits of Magellan, he keeping her company in the Vanderbilt.
This duty he performed with entire success during the years 18G5 and
1866.

After three years on shore duty, he was assigned to the command
of the Asiatic squadron. Here his most noteworthy act was the
chastisement of the Coreans on account of their outrages against the
American merchant flag. Their authorities refusing to make any
satisfactory reply to his demands, he planned an attack on their forts,
which were first bombarded and then carried by assault.

After another tour of shore duty he was assigned in 1877 to the
supcrintendency of the Naval Observatory. It is here that his work

ADMIRAL JOHN RODGERS. 441

has most interest for this Academy. lie devoted himself to his new
duties with characteristic zeal and energy. It was a part of his general
policy to interest the astronomers of the country at large in the work
of the establishment, and he accordingly sought their aid and counsel
on all occasions where their co-operation was conducive to the object in
view. He took especial interest in the approaching transit of Venus,
and was president of the commission appointed to provide for observa-
tions upon it. His greatest work during his term of office was the
planning of the new observatory. Finding the locality in which the
observatory was situated so unhealthy that it was impossible to secure
the highest efficiency in its work, as well as unsuitable in other re-
spects, he immediately began to urge upon Congress the necessity for
removing it to a better locality. Such a removal had been previously
discussed, but no such energy had ever been devoted to it as was
exhibited by the new superintendent. The opinions of professors and
physicians were obtained, showing the necessity for a removal, and
the representations of the Superintendent were received with such
favorable consideration that he hoped for an immediate execution of
the plan. Obstacles, however, presented themselves at every step.
The report of the first commission appointed to select a site was re-
jected and a new commission formed. A site suitable in every respect
was at length acquired by the Government in 1881, and our colleague
had every prospect of seeing the establishment of an institution with
which his name would have been inseparably associated. But before
anything could be done towards commencing the building unmistakable
signs of failing strength began to show themselves. In the spring of
1882 his health rapidly gave way, and on May 5, he succumbed to
disease.

Admiral Rodgers possessed in a remarkable degree all those quali-
ties which have done so much to give our military and naval servii^e
its present high position in the confidence of the nation. His general
bearing was that of power in repose, and suggested the philosophic
thinker as much as the naval commander. He seemed an entire
stranger to passion or excitement of any kind. His sentences were
slow and measured, and it is stated by those who fought at his side
that in the highest excitement of battle his speech and manner were
as cool and collected as in every-day life.

442 BARNAS SEARS, D.D.

BAENAS SEARS, D.D.

In Saratoga, N. Y., July 6, 1 880, Barnas Sears * closed a long life

of pul)lic usefulness. For more than fifty years he had done distin-
guished service in various departments of education, and had won an
honorable name in literature and in the pulpit. Like many eminent
leaders in political and professional life, he was born in the country
(Sandisfield, Mass., Nov. 19, 1802) and was bred upon a farm, and
his fine physique and well-poised character owed much to the bracing
air and grand scenery of the Berkshire Hills.

The work of the farm was agreeable, and stirred an honest pride in
outdoing his older brothers ; but he early felt that he was called to a
broader life, and must follow public rather than private aims. At
fifteen years of age he bought his freedom from his father, and set up
for himself ; with characteristic energy, employing a man and a team to
assist him in building stone walls. In the winter he taught in district
schools, and industry with thrift soon gathered the resources needed
for his liberal education. lie graduated with honor at Brown Uni-
versity in 1825, but deliberately sacrificed the first place in his class
to the pursuit of studies not included in the curriculum.

After leaving college he entered Newton Theological Institution,
and was one of the three members of its first graduating class in 1827.
He was called immediately to the pastorate of the First Baptist
Church, Hartford, and in a brief term of service gave promise of
winning a foremost place among American preachers. But discerning
friends recognized in him rare gifts for teaching, and as his own tastes
inclined more to study than to pastoral work, he accepted, in 1829, the
Chair of Ancient Languages in the Literary and Theological Institu-
tion at Hamilton, N. Y. He entered on his work with enthusiasm,
but soon felt the need of broader culture and better helps than could
be furnished by American scholarship, and was one of the first
students from the United Stites to seek the advantages of German
universities. He spent two years at Berlin and Leipsic and Halle,
and was grateful to the end of life for the inspiration received from
German teachers, and especially from Tholuck and Neander. He re-
turned to Hamilton in 1835, but after a few months removed to Newton
to fill the Chair of Christian Theology to which he had been elected.
For twelve years he was connected with this institution, during the

* Notice omitted iu Volume XVI.

BARNAS SEARS, D.D. 443

larger part of the time as its president, and won the enthusiastic love
of his pupils as a teacher of singular magnetism and inspiration.

In 1848 he resigned his position to accept the secretaryship of the
Massachusetts Board of Education. It was a critical time in the edu-
cational history of the State. The Hon. Horace Mann, his predecessor,
had introduced bold and radical changes into the school system, and
by energy and decision in pushing the changes had aroused a vigorous
opposition. The success of the reforms was in great peril. But Dr.
Sears, by his conciliatory spirit, by patience in hearing ol)jections and
broad wisdom in answering them, soon silenced opposition, and intro-
duced other important changes.

In 1855 he was elected President of Brown University, and re-
moved to Providence to enter on the duties of his new office. The
difficulties encountered were many and complicated. His predecessor,
Rev. Dr. Wayland, had a national reputation as the most eminent of
American presidents, and for nearly thirty years had moulded the
character and aims of the college by his energetic will. The Faculty
and Corporation were in warm sympathy with his views and methods.
Dr. Sears had different views and methods, but could introduce them
only slowly, and with wise caution and tact. His administration, how-
ever, was eminently successful, and the growth of the college was
marked in an increase of students, in a broadening of the range of
.-tudy. and in the eidarging of its endowment. Dr. Sears was a popu-
lar president in the best sense of the word, beloved by the students
as a teacher and as an administrator, and ruling less by prescribed law
than by moral force.

After twelve years of hard labor, in which his health suffered and
his voice failed from a severe bronchial trouble, his physician prescribed
rest from teaching as an imperative duty. He had intended to spend
a year in European travel and study ; but he was urgently requested
by Mr. Peabody and the Board of Managers of the Peab'ody Fund to
assume the duties of the general agency in administering that great
trust. He had previously submitted to the board, at the request of
the Hon. Robert C. Winthrop, its president, a plan of operation in the
Southern States which commanded a unanimous ajjproval, and it was
thought he would prove the best executor of his own plan. He ac-
cepted the trust, removed to Staunton, Va., and the last thirteen years
of life were devoted to the establishment of a system of free schools
in the Southern States. This was probably the most useful part of his
life. His commanding person and genial manners and high character
brought him into pleasant relations with the leaders of Southern

444 BARNAS SEARS, D.D.

society, while his broad learning and intuitive tact gave him a control-
ling influence in removing old prejudices or introducing new measures.
He was alvvajs heard with deference by the members of State legis-
latures ; his advice was welcomed by statesmen and scholars and edu-
cators, and he was a universal favorite in social circles of every grade.
At his death the first part of his plan for administering the trust was
considered by the board as accomplished ; the system of free schools
was established in every Southern State. The board were prepared
to carry out the second part of the plan, the* elevation of the standard
of education through normal schools of a high grade. Mr. Wiuthrop,
in a tribute of rare beauty at the funeral services, which was the
more welcomed because wholly unpremeditated, said with tenderest
pathos: " I am expressing the feelings of my colleagues, no less than
my own matured judgment, when I say, that neither among the living
nor the dead do we know the man who could have discharged the
delicate and responsible duties of this important trust with more con-
scientious fidelity or greater success."

Dr. Sears was married, Feb. IG, 1830, to Elizabeth Griggs Corey,
of Brookline, Mass., wlio survives him with four children, three sons
and a daughter.

He received the honorary degree of Doctor of Divinity from Har-
vard University in 1841, and the honorary degree of Doctor of Laws
from Yale College in 1862, He was for many years the editor of the
" Christian Review," and an associate editor of the " Bibliotheca Sacra,"
contributing valuable literary and theological papers to these and other
periodicals. He published a " Life of Luther," which had a wide
circulation in this country and in England ; and in connection with
Profs. E. A. Park and B. B. Edwards prepared a volume on " Classi-
cal Studies." He edited an American edition of Nohden's German
Grammar and of Roget's "Thesaurus," with many additions for Ameri-
can students ; and prepared a volume called " Ciceronia," with ex-
tracts from Cicero and an account of the Prussian method of classical
instruction ; also " Select Treatises of Martin Luther," with philologi-
cal notes, and essays on English and German etymology. He was an
active and useful member of many learned societies, and a cordial
worker in religious and philanthropic institutions.

JOHANN KASPAR BLUNTSCHLI. 445

FOEEIGN HONORAEY MEMBERS.

JOHANN KASPAR BLUNTSCHLI.

JoHANX Kaspar BLUNTSCnLi, elected a Foreign Honorary Member
of this Academy in 18G8, was born at Zurich, March 7, 1808, and
died at Heidelberg, Oct. 21, 1881. Being unwilling to conform with
his mother's wish that he should become a minister of the gospel,
he entered the Political Institute of Zurich, where history, philosophy,
public law, and political economy were taught. After spending some
time here, he went to Germany in 1827, gained a prize at Berlin
on a question touching the Roman law of succession, and sustained
an examination at Bonn for a doctorate in 1829. Returning to his
native town, he began to teach Roman law in the Institute ; and in
1833, on the opening of the University of Ziirich, he was there
appointed a professor in that branch, and held some offices connected
with the courts. In 1837 he was chosen to be a deputy to the Grand
Council of the Swiss Confederation, and in an agitated time took the
Conservative side agjlinst the Radicals. From 1839 to 1846 he was
one of the leaders of that party, and represented its political views in
the Diet.

His career as a writer began in this fii-st period of his academical
life, while he yet remained in his native city. He made his debut by
publishing his " Staats- und Rechtsgeschichte der Stadt und Land-
schaft Zurich," which saw the light in 1838-1839, and went into a
second edition in 1856. In the year 1839 he gave to the world also
an essay entitled " Die neuere Rechtsschulen der deutschen Juristen,"
in which he strove to show the importance of uniting the historical
and philosophical methods of treating jural science. In 184G-49 he
published the first volume of his " Geschichte des schweizerischen
Bundesrechts von den ersten ewigen Bunden bis auf die Gegenwart."
The second volume, containing documents, followed in 1852. A less
important work in 1844, entitled " Psychologische Studien iiber Staat
und Kirche," compared the periods of liuman life with those of states.
The infancy of states is radicalism ; their youth, liberalism ; their
mature age is conservative ; their old age, absolute. And to this
questionable theory he returned more than once afterward.

In his public and political life, while he remained in Switzerland, he
seems to have steered a middle course between the Conservative and
the Radical parties, hoping to form a Conservative-Liberal centre able

446 JOHANN KASPAR BLUNTSCHLI.

to resist extremes in either direction. But the Radicals and Ultra-
montanes were too strong, as they had been before. He strove also
to reform the Federal pact in a centralized direction, but without
success. Meanwhile he removed to Munich, and in 1848 became
professor in tlie university there of German private law and general
public law. Here he remained fourteen years outside of politics,
devoting his life more exclusively than he had hitlierto done to the
career of an author in his department. A labor laid upon him while he
was yet at Zurich, that of codifying the Privatiechl of the canton, now
demanded his attention. The first portion of the code, which had been
finished in 1844, embraced the rights of persons, of the family and
of succession ; the part relating to property appeared in 1851 ; that
touching obligation in 1853 and afterward. This code is regarded as
one of tlie most noteworthy legislative works of our times. It served
as a model for codes in other Swiss cantons.

In 1852 M. Bluntschli published his "Allgemeines Staatsrecht
gesohichtlich gegrlindet," which, after passing through four editions,
■was transformed into a tripartite work with the titles " General Doc-
trine of the State," " General Rights of the State," and " Politics."
This he regarded as a terminal woi-k of a life consecrated to legal
science and practice. The little volumes of " Deutsches Privatrecht,"
1856, which went through three editions in German and were trans-
lated into French, show how fruitful he was at this time as an author.
Another enterprise of his was a critical review for legislation and juris-
prudence, which is still issued as the Critical Quarterly. Soon after
this undertaking he planned the " Staatsworterbuch," in which many
distinguished Germans co-operated with him. Eleven volumes of
this lexicon appeared between 1857 and 1870, and subsequently
an abridgment wos made by another hand.

In 1860 M. Bluntschli, in concert with other jurists, formed a union
called the " Juristentag," which aimed not only at objects pertaining to
juristic science, but also at cultivating the spirit of unity in the Ger-
man nation. He was twice tlie presiding officer, in 1861 and 1868.
One important matter which the jurists wished to effect was uniform
legislation throughout the German States in regard to the departments
of obligation, penal law, and civil procedure. But the States could not
be made to agree on the mode of bringing this about, and the results
did not answer to the hopes of the members.

During the years of his residence in Bavaria, ]\I. Bluntsciili trans-
ferred ins main interest from civil to public law ; and at this time also
his feelings changed from Conservatism to broader political sympathies.

JOIIANN KASPAR BLUNTSCHLI, 447

Yet he never left his first political directiou so far as to become a
Radical. He was treated with great consideration by the King of
Bavaria, and his relations were friendly to the distinguished men
around him. Still he wanted a sphere of more practical action than
Bavaria could furnish. He accordingly accepted a professorship of
political science in the University of Heidelberg, which liubert von
Mohl had just resigned in order to represent tlie Grand Duchy of
Baden in the Reichstag. This post he filled from 18G1 to his death.

From the time of his removal to Heidelberg onward there was a
new tendency given to his studies ; henceforth international law, to
which he had hitherto paid no great attention, absorbed his chief
interest. M. Alphonse Rivier, the general secretary of tlie Institut
de Droit International, — to whose obituary notice of Bluntschli in
the "Revue du Droit International" we have been very deeply
indebted in preparing this memoir, — speaks of him as he advanced in
years in terms like tiiese : " Instead of contracting himself, as so many
do, with the advance of age, this noble intellect developed itself inces-
santly in height and breadth. From the laio of Zurich he had passed
forward to Swiss laio^ then to German, then to law in general.
Henceforth international law will be his favorite stuily ; and to this
he will join a tendency to • vulgarization' in the elevated meaning of
that word [that is, the bringing of the results of his study more within
the reach of the common mind]. He has been reproached for this ;
it has been looked upon as a lowering of his talents. 1 look on it
rather fi'om a contrary point of view ; and when in the decline of
life a prince of science and of thought seeks to bring his treasures
within the reach of the small and of the weak, he seems to me to do
a work of self-denial of which a refined soul alone is capable."

The first-fruits of this new direction in his studies was his " Moderne
Volkerrecht der civilisirten Staaten, als Rechtsbuch dargestellt,"
1868, or " Modern International Law Codified." This was prefaced
by a letter to Dr. Lieber, whose rules of war, prepared in 18G3, and
entitled " Instructions for the Government of Armies of the United
States in the Field," he tliought very highly of, and has inserted in his
own woi'k as an appendix. This work of his was translated into
French, Spanish, and Chinese, and passed through three editions in
Germany between 18G8 and 1878. Being constructed in the form of
a code with occasional annotations, it was capable of condensation and
precision; but the form exposed the author occasionally to the making
of international rules of his own. A number of smaller works we
will mention here together with the years when they first came to

448 JOHANN KASPAR BLUNTSCHLI.

light: "Das moderue Kriegsrecht der civilisirten Staateu," 1868;
" Das Beuterecht im Krieg " ; " Das Seebeuterecht ins besondere,"
1878; " Geschichte des allgemeinea Staatsrecht und der Politik,"
1864; "Deutsche Staatslehre fiir Gebildete," 1875; besides many
brochures, as " The Right of War and the Usage of War," " Question,
of the Alabama," " Quality of a Citizen, from the Point of View
of International Relations " ; articles " On the Congress of Berlin,"
" On the Pope's Responsibility and Irresponsibility according to Inter-
national Law " ; a legal opinion " On the Condition of the Jews in
Roumania." A number of editions, also, of earlier works, some of
them considerably enlarged, appeared in this period.*

To M. Rolin-Jaequemyns of Belgium, and M. Bluntschli especially
belongs the credit of founding the Institut de Droit International,
which enrolls on its list of members honored names from almost all
countries where international law is studied. Bluntschli was one of
its most active members, — a learned and able reporter of subjects
referred to its committees, its president and vice-president on sev-
eral occasions. At the meeting of 1880 at Oxford he received the
Doctorate of Civil Law from that University.

Laborious studies did not prevent a man so highly esteemed from
being called to discharge public duties as a citizen ; as a member of
the legislative body in Baden ; as a delegate from the German Empire
to the (unhappily abortive) Congress at Brussels for regulating the
laws and usages of war. He also took an interest in the religious
affairs of his adopted country. And here we may say that through
life he had been a Christian believer ; and that " though he could hold
neither the doctrine of Calvin nor that of Zwingle nor that of Luther,
he often avowed his attachment to the fundamental principles of Chris-
tianity." He was an active member of the Synod of Baden ; and, as
its president, was in the act of closing the session with the words of
scripture, " Glory to God in the highest, peace on earth, and goodwill
to men," when an attack of apoplexy caused his death in his seventy-
fourth year. Few jurists, few publicists of our age have deserved so
honorable a mention as he.

* These and many others not spoken of here may be found at the end of the
catalogue of his library, which his family offers for sale en masse.

CHARLES DARWIN. 449

CHARLES DARWIN.

Charles Darwin died on the 19th of April last, a few months
after the completion of his 73rd year; and on the '26th, the mortal
remains of the most celebrated man of science of the nineteenth
centnry were laid in Westminster Abbey, near to those of Newton.

He was born at Shrewsbury, Feb. 12, 1809, and was named
Charles Robert Darwin. But the middle appellation was omitted
from his ordinary signature and from the title-pages of the volumes
which, within the last twenty-five years, have given such great renown
to an already distinguished name. His grandfather, Dr. Erasmus
Darwin, — who died seven years before his distinguished grandson
was born, — was one of the most notable and original men of his age ;
and his father, also a physician, was a person of very marked char-
acter and ability. His maternal grandfixther was Josiah Wedgwood,
who, beginning as an artisan potter, produced the celebrated Wedg-
wood ware, and became a Fellow of the Royal Society and a man of
much scientific mark. The importance of heritability, which is an
essential part of Darwinism, would seem to have had a significant
illustration in the person of its great expounder. He was educated at
the Shrewsbury Grammar School and at Edinburgh University, where,
following the example of his grandfather, he studied for two sessions,
having the medical profession in view, and where, at the close of the
year 1826, he made his first contribution to natural history in two
papers (one of them on the ova of Flustra). Soon finding the medi-
cal profession not to his liking, he proceeded to the University of
Cambridge, entering Christ's College, and took his bachelor's degree
in 1831 ; that of M.A. in 1837, after his return from South America.

It is said that Darwin was a keen fox-hunter in his youth, — not a
bad pursuit for the cultivation of the observing powers. There is good
authority for the statement — though it has nowhere been made in
print — that at Cambridge he was disposed at one time to make the
Church his profession, following the example of Buckland and of his
teacher, Sedgwick. But in 1831, just as he was taking his bachelor's
degree, Captain Fitzroy offered to receive into his own cabin any
naturalist who was disposed to accompany him in the Beagle's survey-
ing voyage round the world. Mr. Darwin volunteered his services
without salary, with the condition only that he should have the dis-
posal of his own collections. And this expedition of nearly five
years — from the latter part of September, 1831, to the close of Octo-

voL. XVII. (x. s. IX.) 29

450 CHARLES DARWIN.

ber, 183G — not only fixed the course anrl character of the young
naturalist's life-work, but opened to his mind its principal problems
and suggested the now familiar solution of them. For he brought
back with him to England a conviction that the existing species of
animals and plants are the modified descendants of earlier forms, and
that the internecine struggle for life in which these modifiable forms
must have been engaged would scientifically explain the changes.
The noteworthy point is that both the conclusion and the explanation
were the legitimate outcome of real s.cientific investigation. It is an
equally noteworthy fact, and a characteristic of Darwin's mind, that
these pregnant ideas were elaborated for more than twenty years be-
fore he gave them to the world. Offering fruit so well ripened upon
the bough, commending the conclusions he had so thoroughly matured
by the presentation of very various lines of facts, and of reasonings
close to the facts, unmixed with figments and a priori conceptions, it
is not so surprising that his own convictions should at the close of the
next twenty years be generally shared by scientific men. It is cer-
tainly gratifying that he should have lived to see it, and also have
outlived most of the obloquy and dread which the promulgation of
these opinions aroused.

Mr. Darwin lived a very quiet and uneventful life. In 1839 he
married his cousin, Emma Wedgwood, who with five sons and two
daughters survives him ; he made his home on the border of the little
hamlet of Down, in Kent, —"a plain but comfortable brick house in
a few acres of pleasure-ground, a pleasantly old-fashioned air about it,
with a sense of peace and silence ; " and here, attended by every bless-
ing except that of vigorous health, he lived the secluded but busy life
which best suited his chosen pursuits and the simplicity of his charac-
ter. He was seldom seen even at scientific meetings, and never in
general society ; but he could welcome his friends and fellow-workers
to his own house, where he was the most charming of hosts.

At his home, without distraction and as continuously as his bodily
powers would permit, Mr. Darwin gave himself to his work.
At least ten of his scientific papers, of greater or less extent, had
appeared in the three years between his return to England and his
marriage; and in the latter year (1839) he published the book by
which he became popularly known, viz., the " Journal of Researches
into the Natural History and Geology of the Countries visited during
the Voyage of the Beagle," which has been pronounced " the most
entertaining book of genuine travels ever written," and it certainly is
one of the most instructive. His work on " Coral Reefs" appeared iu

CHARLES DARWIN. 451

1842, but the substance had been communicated to the Geological
Society soon after his return to England ; his papers on " Volcanic
Islands," on the " Distribution of Erratic Boulders and Contempora-
neous Unstratified Deposits in South America," on the " Fine Dust
which falls on Vessels in the Atlantic Ocean," and some other geological
as well as zoological researches, were published previously to 1851.
Between that year and 1855 he brought out his most considerable
contributions to systematic zoology, his monographs on the Cirripedia
and the Fossil Lepadidoe.

We come to the first publication of what is now known as Dar-
winism. It consists of a sketch of the doctrine of Natural Selec-
tion, which was drawn up in the year 1839, and copied and commu-
nicated to Messi's. Lyell and Hooker in 1844, being a part of the
manuscript of a chapter in his " Origin of Species ; " also of a private
letter addressed to the writer of this memorial in October, 1857, —
the publication of which (in the Journal of the Proceedings of the
Linnean Society, Zoological Part, iii. 45-53, issued in the summer of
1858) was caused by the reception by Darwin himself of a letter from
Mr. AVallace, inclosing a brief and strikingly similar essay on the same
subject, entitled " On the Tendency of Varieties to depart indefinitely
from the Original Type." Mr. Darwin's action upon the reception of
this rival essay was characteristic. His own work was not yet ready,
and the fact that it had been for years in preparation was known only
to the persons above mentioned. He proposed to have the pajoer of
Mr. "Wallace (who was then in the Moluccas) published at once, in
anticipation of his own leisurely prepared volume ; and it w^as only
under the solicitation of his friends cognizant of the case that his
own early sketch and the corroboratory letter were printed alqjig
with it.

The precursory essays of Darwin and Wallace, published in the
Proceedings of a scientific society, can hardly have been read except
by a narrow circle of naturalists. Most thoughtful investigating
naturalists were then in a measure prepared for them. But toward
the close of the following year (in the autumn of 1859) appeared the
volume " On the Origin of Species by means of Natural Selection, or
the Preservation of Favored Races in the Struggle for .Life," the
first and most notable of that series of duodecimos which have been
read and discussed in almost every cultured language, and which
within the lifetime of their author have changed the face and in some
respect the character of natural history, — indeed have almost as
deeply affected many other lines of investigation and thought.

452 CHARLES DARWIN.

In this Academy, where the rise and progress of Darwinian evolu-
tion have been attentively marked and its bearings critically discussed,
and at this date, when the derivative origin of animal and vegetable
species is the accepted belief of all of us who study them, it would
be superfluous to give any explanatory account of these now familiar
writings ; nor, indeed, would the pages which we are accustomed to
consecrate to the memory of our recently deceased Associates allow of
it. Let us note in passing that the succeeding volumes of the series
may be ranked in two classes, one of which is much more widely
known than the other. One class is of those which follow up the ar-
gument for the origination of species through descent with modification,
or which widen its base and illustrate the modus operandi of Natural
Selection. Such are the two volumes on " Domesticated Animals and
Cultivated Plants," illustrating Variation, Inheritance, Reversion,
Interbreeding, &c, ; the volume on the " Descent of Man, and Selec-
tion in Relation to Sex," — which extended the hypothesis to its logi-
cal limits, — and that "On the Expression of the Emotions in Man and
the Lower Animals," published in 1872, which may be regarded as the
last of this series. Since then Mr, Darwin appears to have turned
from the highest to the lower forms of life, and to have entered upon
the laborious cultivation of new and special fields of investigation,
which, although prosecuted on the lines of his doctrine and vivified by
its ideas, might seem to be only incidentally connected with the general
argument. But it will be found that all these lines are convergent.
Nor were these altogether new studies. The germ of the three vol-
umes upon the Relation of Insects to Flowers and its far-reaching
consequences, is a little paper, published in the year 1858, " On the
Agency of Bees in the Fertilization of Papilionaceous Flowers, and
on the Crossing of Kidney Beans " ; the first edition of the volume
on " The various Contrivances by which Orchids are Fertilized by
Insects" appeared in 1862, thus forming the second volume of the
Avhole series ; and the two volumes " On the Effects of Cross- and
Self-Fertilization in the Vegetable Kingdom," and "The Different
Forms of Flowers on Plants of the same Species," which, along with
the new edition of " The Fertilization of Orchids," were all published
in 1876 and 1877, originated in two or three remarkable papers con-
tributed to the Journal of the Linncan Society in 1862 and 1863,
but are supplemented by additional and protracted experiments. The
volume on *' Insectivorous Plants," and the noteworthy conclusions in
respect to the fundamental unity, and therefore common source, of
vegetable and animal life, grew out of an observation which the

CHARLES DARWIN. 453

author made in the summer of 18G0, when he "was surprised by
finding how large a number of insects were caught by the leaves of
the common Sun-dew {Drosera rotundifulia), on a heath in Sussex."
Almost everybody had noticed this; and one German botanist (Roth),
just a luindred years ago, had observed and described the movement
of tlie leaf in consequence of tiie capture. But nothing came of it,
or of what had been as long known of our Dioncea, beyond a vague
wonderment, until Mr. Darwin took up the subject for experimental
investigation. The precursor of his volume on " The Movements and
Habits of Climbing Plants," published in 1875, as well as of the
recent and larger volume on " The Power of Movement in Plants,"
1880, was an essay published in the Journal of the Linnean Society
in 1865 ; and this was instigated by an accidental but capital obser-
vation made by a correspondent, in whose hands it was sterile ; but
it became wonderfully fertile when touched by Darwin's genius.*
His latest volume, on " The Formation of Vegetable Mould through
the Action of Worms," is a development, after long years, of a paper
which he read before the Geological Society of London in 1837.

These subsidiary volumes are less widely known than those of the
other class ; but they are of no less interest, and they are very char-
acteristic of the author's genius and methods, — characteristic also of
his laboriousness. For the amount of prolonged observation, watch-
ful care, and tedious experiment they have demanded is as remarkable
as the skill in devising simple and effectual modes of investigation is
admirable. That he should have had the courage to undertake and the
patience to carry on new inquiries of this kind after he had reached
his threescore and ten years of age, and after he had attained an un-
paralleled breadth of influence and wealth of fame, speaks much for

* Mr. Darwin's quickness in divining tlie meaning of seemingly unimportant
tilings, is illustrated in his study oi Dioncea. Noting that the trap upon irritation
closes at first imperfectly, leaving some room within and a series of small inter-
stices between tiie crossed spines, but after a time, if there is prey within, shuts
down close, he at once inferred that this was a provision for allowing small in-
sects to escape, and for retaining only those large enough to make the long pro-
cess of digestion remunerative. To test the surmise, he asked a correspondent
to visit the habitat of Dionma at the proper season, and to ascertain by the ex-
amination of a large number of the traps in action whether any below a certain
considerable size were to be found in them. The result confirmed the inference.
A comparatively trivial but characteristic illustration of Darwin's confidence in
the principle of utility, and a good example of the truth of the dictum, which
was by some thought odd when first made, namely, tliat Darwin had restored
teleology to natural history, from which the study of morphology had dissev-
ered it.

454 CHARLES DARWIN.

his energy antl for his devotion to knowledge for its own sake. In-
deed, having directed the flow of scientific thought into the new
channel he had opened, along which the current set quicker and
stronger than he could have expected, he seems to have taken up with
fresh delight studies which he had marked out in early years, or topics
which from time to time had struck his acute attention. To tliese
he gave himself, quite to the last, with all the spirit and curiosity of
youth. Evidently all this amount of work was done for the pure love
of it ; it was all done methodically, with clear and definite aim, without
haste, but without intermission.

It would confidently be supposed that in this case genius and
industry were seconded by leisure and bodily vigor. Fortunately
Darwin's means enabled him to control the disposition of his time.
But the voyage of the Beagle, which was so advantageous to science,
ruined his health. A sort of chronic sea-sickness, under which all
his work abroad was performed, harassed him ever afterwards. The
days in which he could give two hours to investigation or writing were
counted as good ones, and for much of his life they were largely out-
numbered by those in which nothing could be attempted. Only by
great care and the simplest habits was he able to secure even a mod-
erate amount of comfortable existence. But in this respect his later
years were the best ones, and therefore the busiest. In them also he
had most valuable filial aid. There was nothing to cause much anxiety
until his seventy-third birthday had passed, or to excite alarm until the
week before his death.

It may without exageration be said that no scientific man, certainly
no naturalist, ever made an impression at once so deep, so wide, and
so immediate. The name of Linnasus might suggest comparison ; but
readers and pupils of Linnaeus over a century ago were to those of
Darwin as tens are to thousands, and the scientific as well as the pop-
ular interest of the subjects considered were somewhat in the same
ratio. Humboldt, who, like Darwin, began with research in travel, and
to whom the longest of lives, vigorous health, and the best oppor-
tunities were allotted, essayed similar themes in a more ambitious
spirit, enjoyed equal or greater renown, but made no deep impression
upon the thought of his own day or of ours. As one criterion of
celebrity, it may be noted that no other author we know of ever gave
rise in his own active lifetime to a special department of bibliography.
Dante-literature and Shakespeare-literature are the growth of cen-
turies ; but Darwlnismus had filled shelves and alcoves and teeming
catalogues while the unremitting author was still supplying new and

CHARLES DARWIN. 455

ever novel subjects for comment. The technical term which he choso
for a designation of his theory, and several of the phrases originated
in explanation of it only twenty-five years ago, have already been
engrafted into his mother tongue, and even into other languages, and
are turned to use in common as well as in philosophical discourse,
without sense of strangeness.

Wonderful indeed is the difference between the reception accorded
to Darwin and that met with by his predecessor, Lamarck. But a
good deal has happened since Lamarck's day ; wide fields of evidence
were open to Darwin which were wholly unknown to his forerunner ;
and the time had come when the subject of the origin and connexion
of living forms could be taken up as a research rather than as a specu-
lation. Pliilosophizers on evolution have not been rare ; but Darwin
was not one of them. He was a scientific investigator, — a philoso-
pher, if you please, but one of the type of Galileo. Indeed very much
what Galileo was to physical science in his time, Darwin is to bio-
logical science in ours. This without reference to the fact that the
writings of both conflicted with similar prepossessions ; and that the
Darwinian theory, legitimately considered, bids fair to be placed in
this respect upon the same footing with the Copernican system.

An English poet wrote that he awoke one morning and found him-
self famous. When this happened to Darwin, it was a genuine sur-
prise. Although he had addressed himself simply to scientific men,
and had no thought of arguing his case before a popular tribunal, yet
" The Origin of Species " was too readable a book upon too sensitive
a topic to escape general perusal ; and this, indeed, must in some sort
have been anticipated. But the avidity with which the volume was
taken up, and the eagerness of popular discussion which ensued, were
viewed by the author, — as his letters at the time testify, — with a
sense of amused wonder at an unexpected and probably transient
notoriety.

The theory he had developed was presented by a working naturalist
to his fellows, with confident belief that it would sooner or later wiu
acceptance from the younger and more observant of these. The reason
why these moderate expectations were much and so soon exceeded are
not far to seek, though they were not then obvious to the world in
general. Although mere speculations were mostly discountenanced
by the investigating naturalists of that day, yet their work and their
thoughts were, consciously or unconsciously, tending in the direction
of evolution. Even those who manfully rowed against the current
were more or less carried along with it, and some of them unwittingly

456 CHARLES DAEWIN.

contributed to its force. Most of them in their practical studies had
worked up to, or were nearly approaching, the question of the rela-
tion of the past inhabitants of the earth to the present, and of the
present to one another, in such wise as to suggest inevitably that,
somehow or other, descent with modification was eventually to be the
explanation. This was the natural outcome of the line of thought of
which Lyell early became the cautious and fair-minded expositor, and
with which he reconstructed theoretical geology. If Lyell had known
as much at first hand of botany or zoology as he knew of geology, it
is probable that his celebrated chapter on the permanence of species in
the " Principles " would have been reconsidered before the work had
passed to the ninth edition in 1853. He was convinced that species
went out of existence one by one, through natural causes, and that
they came in one by one, bearing the impress of their immediate
predecessors ; but he saw no way to connect the two through natural
operations. Nor, in fact, had any of the evolutionists been able
to assign real causes capable of leading on such variations as are of
well-known occurrence to wider and specific or generic differences.
Just here came Darwin. When upon the spot he had perceived that
the animals of the Galapagos must be modified forms derived from
the adjacent continent, and he soon after worked out the doctrine of
natural selection. This supplied what was wanting for the condensation
of opinions and beliefs, and the collocation of rapidly accumulating facts,
into a consistent and workable scientific theory, under a principle
which unquestionably could directly explain much, and might indirectly
explain more.

It is not merely that Darwin originated and applied a new princijile.
Not to speak of Wallace, his contemporary, who came to it hiter, his
countryman. Dr. Wells, as Mr. Darwin points out, " distinctly recog-
nizes the principle of natural selection, and this is the first recognition
which has been indicated ; but he applied it only to the races of men,
and to certain characters alone." Darwin, like the rest of the world,
was unaware of this anticipation until he was preparing the fourth
edition of his " Origin of Species," in 186G, when he promptly called
attention to it, j^erhaps magnifying its importance. However this be,
Darwin appears to have been first and alone in apprehending and
working out the results which necessarily come from the interaction
of the surrounding agencies and conditions under which plants and
animals exist, including, of course, their action upon each other. Per-
sonifying the ensemble of these and the consequences, — namely, the
survival only of the fittest in the struggle for life, — under the term

CHARLES DARWIN. 457

of Natural Selection, Mr. Darwin with the instinct of genius divined,
and with the ability of a master worked out its pregnant and far-
reaching applications. He not only saw its strong points, but he fore-
saw its limitations, indicated most of the objections in advance of his
opponents, weighed them with judicial mind, and where he could not
obviate them, seemed never disposed to underrate their force. Al-
though naturally disposed to make the most of his theory, he dis-
tinguished between what he could refer to known causes and what
thus far is not referrible to them. Consequently, he kept clear of that
common confusion of thought which supposes that natural selection
originates the variations which it selects. He believed, and he has
shown it to be probable, that external conditions induce the actions
and changes in the Hving plant or animal which may lead on to the
difference between one species and another ; but he did not maintain
that they produced the changes, or were sufficient scientifically to
explain them. Unlike most of his contemporaries in this respect, he
appears to have been thoroughly penetrated by the idea that the whole
physiological action of the plant or animal is a response of the living
organism to the action of the surroundings.

The judicial fairness and openness of Darwm's mind, his penetration
and sagacity, his wonderful power of eliciting the meaning of things
which had escaped questioning by their very commonness, and of dis-
cerning the great significance of causes and interactions which had
been disregarded on account of their supposed insignificance, his
method of reasoning close to the facts and in contact with the solid
ground of nature, his aptness in devising fruitful and conclusive exper-
iments, and in prosecuting nice researches with simple but effectual
appliances, and the whole rare combination of qualities which made
\\\m. facile princeps in biological investigation, — all these gifts are so
conspicuously manifest in his published writings, and are so fully
appreciated, that there is no need to celebrate them in an obituary
memorial. The writings also display in no small degree the spirit of
the man, and to this not a little of their persuasiveness is due. His
desire to ascertain the truth, and to present it purely to his readers, is
everywhere apparent. Conspicuous, also, is the absence of all trace
of controversy and of everything like pretension ; and this is remark-
able, considering how censure and how praise were heaped upon him
without stint. He does not teach didactically, but takes the reader
along with him as his companion in observation and in experiment.
And in the same spirit, instead of showing pique to an opponent, he
seems always to regard him as a helper in his search for the truth.

458 JOSEPH DECAISNE.

Those privileged to know him well will certify that he was one of the
most kindly and charming, unaffected, simple-hearted, and lovable
of men.

How far and how long the Darwinian theory will hold good, the
future will determine. But in its essential elements, apart from a
priori philosophizing, with which its author had nothing to do, it is an
advance from which it is evidently impossible to recede. As has been
said of the theory of the Conservation of Energy, so of this : " The
proof of this great generalization, like that of all other generalizations,
lies mainly in the fact that the evidence in its favor is continually
augmenting, while that against it is continually diminishing, as the
progress of science reveals to us more and more of the workings of the
universe."

[The outlines of a portion of this memorial, written on the day of Mr. Dar-
win's funeral, were printed in " The Literary World " of May 6.]

JOSEPH DECAISNE.

Joseph Decaisne, the oldest member of the Botanical Section on
the foreign list, died at Paris, on the 8th of February last, in the
seventy-fifth year of his age. He was elected into this Academy in
Auo-ust, 1846, along with Agassiz and De Verneuil. He was born at
Brussels, March 11, 1807, the second of three brothers, one of whom
became a distinguished painter, and the other the head of the medical
department of the Belgian army. He came to Paris and entered the
Jardin des Plantes when a lad of seventeen years, and in its service
his whole subsequent life was passed. The young employe, attracted
the attention of Adrien de Jussieu, who, seeing his promise and unusual
botanical knowledge, soon placed him at the head of the seed depart-
ment, and in 1833 made him his Aide-naturaliste, thus giving the
young gardener opportunity for the studies and researches by which
he won a place among the foremost botanists of the time. For more
than forty years the administration of the Jardin des Plantes and
the duties of the cl)air of Culture at the JMuseum were in his
hands, he having supplied the place of Mirbel through the closing
years of the latter's life, and succeeded him as professor in the
year. 1851 ; and these duties he continued to fulfil to the last. He
was elected a member of the Institute in 1847, in succession to Du-
trochet ; for forty years he was one of the editors of, and since the death
of his colleague, Adolphe Bronguiart, he was the sole editor of the
botanical portion of the " Annales des Sciences Natui-elles." In the

JOSEPH DECAISXE. 459

" Annales " he had published some good botanical papers, the earliest
in the year 1831. But his first distinction was gained by his ana-
tomical and physiological researches upon the Madder-plant, a mono-
graph containing the results of which appeared at Brussels in 1837,
and was said to be " one of the most able memoirs that has ever been
published on the physiological history of plants and their bearing on
practical cultivation and manufactures." Two years later, in connec-
tion with the chemist, Peligot, he published an investigation of the
anatomical structure of the Sugar-beet. His classical memoir upon
the structure and development of the Mistletoe appeared in 1840, and
is of purely scientific interest. In the year 1841 he showed that the
Corallines, which had been wrongly carried over to the animal king-
dom with the Corals and their allies, were genuine Seaweeds, dis-
guised by the incorporation of a great amount of lime into their
tissues. And about this time, in connection with his friend and
former pupil, Thuret, he discovered and illustrated the male organs
of the Fuci, as well as the mode of impregnation and reproduction,
thus initiating the investigations which, in the hands of the late
Thuret and others, have revolutionized phycology.

Leaving these researches for his associate to complete and jiublish,
thenceforth Decaisne turned all his attention to ^phanerogamous botany,
morphological and systematic. Two orders were elaborated by him
for De Candolle's Prodronuis, Asdepiadacece and Plantaginacece, the
former demanding much minute research; he produced in 18G8
in conjunction with Le Maout, that admirable text-book, the " Trait^
General de Botanique," profusely illustrated by his own facile pencil,
which is well known in the original and in the Eno-lish translation
edited by Sir Joseph Hooker. But the works by which he will be
most widely known, and which were connected especially with his
directorship of the Jardin des Plantes, are that incomparable series of
colored illustrations of fruits, together with descriptive text, known
as "Le Jardin Fruitier du Museum," and his subsidiary investigations
and publications upon the Pomacea: and their allies. These important
publications began in the year 1858, and were comjileted only a year
or two ago.

Decaisne never married : he lived his simple and devoted life in the
house on Rue Cuvier in the Jardin des PLantes, where he died, re-
gretted and beloved, the last of the line of illustrious botanists — such
as Mirbel, Adrien de Jussien, Gaudichaud, and Adolphe Brongniart —
who were associated in the administration of this institution thirty or
fortv years ajro.

4G0 THEODOR SCHWANN.

THEODOR SCHWANN.

Theodor Schwann, the distinguished founder of the animal-cell
theory, died on the 11th of January, 1882, in the seventy-second year
of his a^e, having been a Foreign Honorary Member of this Academy
for more than thirty years. His death followed closely upon that of
Schleiden, the almost equally celebrated founder of the vegetable-cell
theory, who died on the 23d of June, 1881. Thus death has asso-
ciated the two investigators whose labors gave to biology the first im-
pulse in the direction which it has since followed with such triumphant
results.

Theodor Schwann was born in Neuss, Diisseldorf, on December 7,
1810. For five years following the completion of his medical studies,
he held the position of assistant to Johannes Miiller in Berlin. Dur-
ing the next nine years he occujiied the chair of anatomy in the
Catholic University of Louvain. In 1818 he was called to the Uni-
versity of Liege, where he remained till the time of his death, occupy-
ing in succession the chairs of anatomy and physiology. Schwann's
classical work, upon which his fame chiefly rests, was published, in
1839, under the title " Microscopical Researches into the Accordance
in the Structure and Growth of Animals and Plants." In this work
the observations of Schleiden upon vegetables were extended into the
animid kingdom, and the cell was recognized as the morphological unit
in animals as well as in plants. It is however less from a histological
than from a physiological point of view that Schwann's work is to be
regarded as marking an era in biological science. The conception of
cell life which he formed does not seem to have difi"cred much from that
of protoplasmic activity as now understood, but his views in regard to
the origin of cells have been entirely supplanted by those of more
recent investigators. The doctrine which has for its motto, " Omnis
ccllula e cellula," has taken the place of the theory of "organic crys-
tallization " of the cell from a " cytoblastema."

These researches into cell-structure and growth, though by far the
most important work of Schwann, do not constitute his only title to
fame. He also pointed out the connection between the growth of or-
ganisms and tlie processes of fermentation and putrefaction, thus mark-
ing out a line of research whicli has since been followed with so much
success by Pasteur and others. He was likewise the first to study
muscular contraction as a physical process, and to express mathemati-
cally the f )rcc manif sted by the muscular fibres at different periods of
their contraction. Among his lesser contributions to physiology are

DEAN STANLEY. 461

also to be mentioned his observations on the necessity of atmo-
spheric air for the development of the hen's egg ; his investigations
into the nature of gastric digestion ; and his experiments on the import-
ance of bile in the animal economy.

Although Schwann had thus at the age of thirty-five years made
discoveries which ])laced him in the foremost ranks of investigators of
nature, his after life was almost a blank as far as the production of
seieiitilic work was concerned. Since the year 1845 his name appears
but twice in the Royal Society's catalogue, once, in 1858, as the author
of a report to the Royal Academy of Sciences of Belgium upon the
work of Rameaux on the relation between the size of animals and
the capacity and movements of the lungs and heart ; and onee, in 1870,
as the writer of an answer to questions addressed by M. d'Omalius to
the physiological members of the Brussels Academy of Sciences in
relation to the existence of a special vital force.

No satisfactory reason can be given for Schwann's early withdrawal
from the field in which he had won such distinguished honors. The
hostility of the Church of which he was a member to biological inves-
tigations seems hardly sufficient to account for it, for we find him in
1875 publishing a most indignant denunciation of an attempt made
by the Catholic clergy to put him upon record as testifying in favor
of the miraculous nature of the phenomena manifested by the notorious
Louise Lateau. On this occasion, as Virchow says of him, " His
noble and brave heart broke through the snare that had been laid for
him, and he had no hesitation in doing honor to truth and in calling
lies, lies." His conduct in this affair is, however, scarcely a more
striking evidence of his intellectual independence than is afforded by
certain passages in his chapter on the Theory of Cells, where he dis-
cusses the adaptation to a purpose which is characteristic of organized
bodies. On reading these passages one cannot fail to be struck with
astonishment that they could have been written by a devout Roman
Catholic at a period when evolution, in its application to the organic
world, had not yet been formulated as a scientific doctrine.

DEAN STANLEY.

Arthur Penrhtn Stanley, who died in the Deanery of "West-
minster at London on the 18th of July, 1881, was born at Alderley,
Cheshire, on the 13th of December, 1815. His father was the rector
of Alderley, but early in his son's life became Bishop of Norwich,
where he died in 1849. Arthur Stanley was trained in the best spirit

462 DEAN STANLEY.

of the Church of England, full of devoutness and reverence, full also
of the earnest and broad-minded desire for truth, and of a deep sym-
Iiathy "vvilh the problems and the needs of modern English life. At
the age of fourteen he went to Rugby, where Dr. Arnold had been
made master only the year before. From his great teacher he received
the stimulus and direction of mind and character which, combined with
and modified by his natural disposition, very largely controlled his
future life. His historical enthusiasm found great encouragement at
Rugby, and his conception of the true position of the Church of Eng-
land owed much both to the teaching and example which were power-
ful there, and the pupil's life of his teacher — which must always
rank very high among English biographies — is at once a monument
to Dr. Arnold and a key to much of the writer's character and life.

In 1834: Stanley went to Oxford, whei-e his career was very bril-
liant. He gained the Ireland Scholarship, won the Newdigate prize
for his English poem, "The Gipsies," took a first class in classics,
and gained the Latin Essay prize in 18o9 and the English Essay and
Theological prizes in 1840, when he was elected a Fellow of Uni-
versity College. For twelve years he was tutor of his College. He
was select preacher in 1845-46, was secretary of the Oxford Uni-
versity Commission from 1850 to 1852, and Regius Professor of Eccle-
siastical History and Canon of Christchurch. Indeed from the time
when he first became a student his association with the University
filled a large part of his life.

In 1850 he became Canon of Canterbury, and in 1852 made his
first journey to the East, which resulted in his book on Sinai and
Palestine, which has given remarkable vividness and clearness to the
geography and associations of the Holy Land. He visited the East
again in 1862 in the company of the Prince of "Wales, and on this
journey he employed the unusual advantages of his position for the
investigation and illumination of some points of geography and
antiquity which had long been obscure.

In 1863 he was made Dean of Westminster, and held until his
death that interesting and influential place with which his name will
always be associated. He became a Foreign Honorary Member of
this Academy in 1876.

These are the chief landmarks of Dean Stanley's quiet life. The
works which he produced appear to have, as we look back upon them,
a singular unity of character and purpose. The basis of them all is
history, but nowhere is the manifoldness of history so manifest, its
value as the ground in which all present life has its roots, and from

DEAN STANLEY. 4G3

^^'hicll it must draw its inspirations and illusfrations. The most char-
acteristic works are liis '• Lectures on tlie History of tlie Jewish
Church," published from 18G3 to 18G5, his "Lectures on the History
of the Eastern Church," pubh'shed in 18G1, his " Commentary oh the
Epistles to the Corinthians," published in 18.34, his " Essays on Church
and State," published in 1870, his " Memorials of Westminster Ab-
bey," published in 1807, and his last book on "Christian Institu-
tions," published shortly before his death. In all these works there is
a wonderful vitality. No historical student of our time has surpassed
Dean Stanley in the power of realizing a period of history, of catch-
ing its spirit, of sympathizing with the feelings and motives of its men,
and of making it live in light and color on the printed stage.

But he is far more than a mere historical artist. He is always
full of an interest, which is almost painfully eager and intense, in the
present problems and conditions of the world. The past is rich to
him in suggestions, illustrations, warnings, j^recedents, which throw
remarkable illumination on his own times. The identity of human
nature in all times is the conviction which underlies all his writing.
It is, indeed, one of the first articles of his religion. It proceeds at
once from that profound belief in God and His Fatherhood which is
the substance of this teacher's creed. Hence, even so remote a book
as the " Memorials of Westminster Abbey " is full of application to
the writer's times. The dead truly speak out of their tombs. There
is hardly a political puzzle now bewildering the English brain, hardly
an exhortation now heeded by the English heart, which is not to be
found breaking forth somewhere, most unexpectedly but most natu-
rally, in his descriptions of tlie venerable London church. And his
" Commentary on the Epistles to the Corinthians " has passages which
read like a latter-day pamphlet from a prophet of the nineteenth
century.

Among our historians Dean Stanley must always be remembered
for this desire and this purpose to translate the past to the present.
He does not make the dead past live for nothing. There is a purpose
in everything which he has written. And yet he is too true an artist
and has too genuine a love for the beauty of an historic picture or a
graphic word to let his pages become dull and didactic. His literary
skill is full of charm. Sometimes involved and complicated, and
almost obscure, as if he wrote in haste and stress of thought, but gen-
erally of a crystal clearness, his style flows on, always full of life and
movement. It is perhaps too fervid for the pure historian perfectly to
approve, but it bears the best test of never growing dull.

464: DEAN STANLEY.

On the ecclesiastical life of the time the work of Dean Stanley has
had great influence. There was not a more loyal sou of the Church
of England tlian he, but no man in England saw her dangers more.
More than once it seemed as if his was the power which saved her
from some step which would have lost for her the reverence of thought-
ful men. His last work, the " Christian Institutions," is an assertion
of the place of common-sense and historical induction in religious
thought which is most valuable. In 18G6, when Convocation under-
took to pass gratuitous condemnation on Bishop Colenso, Stanley's
manly protest was the strongest voice of rebnke to the persecuting
spirit. His whole life was a perpetual enlargement and enlightenment
to his Church, and he has probably helped as much as any Churchman
of his generation to clear the ground for the great progress which the
Church of England is to make and the great work which she is to do
in the next hundred years.

It is easy to see the limitations of such a life and such a work as
his. He was supremely human. It was men, and not things, that
interested him in the world. Hence he paid little heed to the wonder-
ful discoveries of natui'al science which have illustrated our age, and
probably had little knowledge of them. And yet he reached a true
relation with them through his interest in the men who made them
and through his eagerness to complete his historic picture with the
image of the scientific man. His funeral sermons on the deaths of
Sir John Herschel and of Sir Charles Lyell are full of delight in the
higher aspects of natural science. He was a beautiful instance of the
way in which the historical genius makes all knowledges and arts its
tributaries.

It was more than a happy chance that so devout and humane a
nature should have found its home in Westminster Abbey. "While
he was Dean he himself felt so deeply that he made all men who came
there feel what a great representative value belonged to the historic
church where God had been worshipped for eight hundred years and
where so many of the greatest Englishmen were buried. His broad
treatment of the Abbey did much to keep the religion of England
broad and free.

The personal charm of Dean Stanley was felt by all who came into
his presence. It consisted of perfect simplicity and self-forgetfnlness,
ready sympathy with all who cared for truth, eager curiosity, and an
imagination which never failed and which drew out the poetry ot
every situation. His home in early days at Oxford, and of late in
Westminster, was the resort of the most earnest and cultivated men

DEAN STANLEY. • 465

of England, and foreigners from every land who came with sympathy
and love for truth found the most hospitable welcome. For the last
five years of the Dean's life a shadow rested on its brightest side, but
the cordial hospitality and hearty greeting never failed.

In the autumn of 1878 Dean Stanley made a memorable visit to
America, which served to show how truly he was honored here. Few
Englislimen have come to this country who have found so many friends
among the best and most tlioughtful men as lie. And the true, unaf-
fected interest wliicli lie liad always felt in our country — an interest
neither 2:)atronizing nor contemptuous, but frank and hearty and sin-
cere— was deepened by his short and hurried journey. The volume
of his addresses in America is the best record of how thoughtfully he
observed our country and how well he understood it.

His death was as serene and peaceful as his life. After a few short
days of sickness he passed away in the midst of the friends and the
associations that he loved. His memory remains as one of the most
brilliant and attractive in this rich generation of Englishmen, and the
Academy may well rejoice that his name will always stand on the list
of its honored members.

Since the last Report, the Academy has received an acces-
sion of twenty new Members, viz. : eleven Resident Fellows ;
eight Associate Fellows ; and one Foreign Honorary Mem-
ber. One Member has resigned his fellowship. The list
of the Academy corrected to the date of this Report is hereto
added. It includes one hundred and eighty-eight Resident
Fellows, ninety-three Associate Fellows, and sixty-nine For-
eign Honorary Members.

VOL. XVII. (n. S. IX.) 80

LIST

OF THE FELLOWS AND FOREIGN HONORARY MEMBERS.

FELLOWS. — 188.

(Number limited to two Imndred.)

Class L — Mathematical and Physical Sciences. — G6.

Section I. — G.

Mathematics.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Brookline.

Newton.

Section II. — 12.
Practical Astronomy and Geodesy.
J. Ingersoll Bowditcb, Boston.

William E. Byerly,
Benjamin A. Gould,
Gustavus Hay,
James M. Peirce,
John D. Runklc,
Edwin P. Seavcr,

Alvan Clark,
Alvan G. Clark,
George B. Clark,
John R. Edmands,
Henry ]\Iitchell,
Robert Treat Paine,

Cambridgeport.
Cambridgepoi't.
Cambridgeport.

Cambridge.

Roxbury.

Brookline.

Edward C. Pickering, Cambridge.
William A. Rogers, Cambridge.
Arthur Searle, Cambridge.

Leopold Trouvelot, Cambridge.
Henry L. Whiting, Tisbmy.

Section 111.-33.
Physics and Chemistry.

A. Graham Bell, Cambridge.

Clarence J. Blake, Boston.
Francis Blake, Auburndale.

Johii H. Blake, Boston.

Thos. Edwards Clark, Williamstown.

W. S. Clark,
Josiah P. Cooke,
James ]\I. Crafts,
Charles R. Cross,
William P. Dexter,
Amos E. Dolbear,
Charles W. Eliot,

Amherst.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Boston.

Roxbury.

INIedford.

Cambridge.

Moses G. Farmer,
Thomas Gaffield,
Wolcott Gibbs,
Frank A. Gooch,
Augustus A. Hayes,
Henry B. Hill,
N. D. C. Hodges,
Eben N. Ilorsford,
T. Sterry Hunt,
Charles L. Jackson,
Joseph Lovering,
William R. Nichols,
John M. Ordway,
Robert H. Richards,
Edward S. Ritchie,
Stephen P. Sharpies,

Newport.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Brookline.

Cambridge.

Salem.

Cambridge.

Montreal.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Francis H. Storer, Jamaica Plain.
John Trowbridge, Cambridge.
Cyrus M. Warren, BrookUne.
Charles H. Wing, Boston.
Edward S. Wood, Cambridge.

Section IV. — 15,

Technology and Engineering.
George R,. Baldwin, Woburn.
John M. Batchelder,
Charles O. Boutelle,
Henry L. Eustis,
James B. Francis,
John B. Henck,
E. D. Leavitt, Jr.,
William R. Lee,
Frederic W. Lincoln, Boston.
Hiram F. Mills, Lawrence

Alfred P. Rockwell,
Charles S. Storrow,
AVilliam R. Ware,
William Watson,
Morrill Wynran,

Cambridge.
, Washington,

Cambridge.

Lowell.

Boston.
Cambridgeport.

Roxbury.

Boston.
Boston.
New York.
Boston.
Cambridge.

468

FELLOWS.

Class II. — Natural and Physiological Sciences. — 58.

Section I. — 8.

Geologj/, Mineralogy, and Physics of
the Globe.

Thomas T. Bouve,
WilUam T. Brigham,
Algernon Coolidge,
William O. Crosby,
John L. Hayes,
William H. Niles,
Nathaniel S. Shaler,
Charles U. Shepard,

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Amherst.

Section II. — 8.

Botany.

William G. Farlow,
George L. Goodale,
Asa Gray,
H. II. Hmmewell,
Charles S. Sargent,
Charles J. Sprague,
Edward Tuckermau,
Sereno Watson,

Cambridge,

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Wellesley.

Bi'ookline.

Boston.

Amherst.

Cambridge.

Section 111.-20.

Zoology and Physiology.

Alex. E. R. Agassiz,
Joel A. Allen,
Robert Amory,
Nath. E. Atwood,
Jnmcs INI. Barnard,
rieury P. Bowditch,
Edward Burgess,
Samuel Cabot,

Cambridge.
Cambridge.
Brookline.
Provincetown.
Boston.
Boston.
Boston.
Boston.

John Dean,
Hermann A. Hagen,
Charles E. Hamlin,
Alpheus Hyatt,
Samuel Kneeland,
Theodore Lyman,
Edward S. Morse,
James J. Putnam,
Samuel H. Scudder,
D. Humphreys Storer
Henry Wheatland,
James C. White,

Waltham.

Cambridge.
Cambridge.
Boston.
Boston.
Boston.
Salem.
Boston.
Cambridge.
, Boston.
Salem.
Boston.

Section IV. — 22.

Medicine and Surgery.

Samuel L. Abbot,
Henry J. Bigelow,
Henry I. Bowditch,
Benjamin E. Cotting,
Frank W. Draper,
Thomas Dwight,
Robert T. Edes,
Calvin Ellis,
Charles F. Folsom,
Richard M. Hodges,
Oliver W. Holmes,
Robert W. Hooper,
Alfred Hosmer,
Edward Jarvis,
Francis Minot,
I John P. Reynolds,
j Wm. L. Richardson,
j George C. Shattuck,
J. Baxter Upham,
Charles E. Ware,
John C. Warren,
Henry AV. Williams,

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Roxbury.

Boston.

Boston.

Roxbury.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Watertown.

Dorchester.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

FELLOWS.

469

Class III. — Moral and Political Sciences. — 64.

Section I. — 11.
Philosophy and Jurisprudence.
James B. Ames, Cambindge.

Charles S. Bradley, Providence.
Phillips Brooks, Boston.

James F. Clarke, Jamaica PI.

Charles C. Everett, Cambridge.
Horace Gray, Boston.

John C. Gray, Boston.

Laurens P. Hicock, Northampton.
Oliver W. Holmes, Jr., Boston.
Mark Hopkins, Williamstown.

C. C. Langdell, Cambridge.

John Lowell, Boston.

Henry W. Paine, Cambridge.

James B. Thayer, Cambridge.

Skction n. — 20.

Philolorjy and Ar

Ezra Abbot,
William S. Appleton,
William P. Atkinson,
Lucien Carr,
Henry G. Denny,
Epes S. Dixwell,
William Everett,
William AV. Goodwin,
Ephraim AV. Gurney,
Henry W. Haynes,
Charles R. Lanman,
John D. Long,
Bennett H. Xash,
Frederic W. Putnam,
Chandler Ilobbius,
John L. Sibley,
E. A. Sophocles,
John W. White,
Justin Winsor,
Edward J. Young,

chcEologij.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Quincy.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Watertown.

Section HL — 19.

Political Economy and History.

Chas. F. Adams, Jr.,
Henry Adams,
Edward Atkinson,
John Cummings,
Cliarles Deane,
Charles F. Dunbar,
Samuel Eliot,
George E. Ellis,
Edwin L. Godkin,
William Gray,
Edward Everett Hale,
Henry P. Kidder,
Henry C. Lodge,
Francis Parkman,
Andrew P. Peabody,
Joseph S. Ropes,
Nathaniel Thayer,
Henry W. Torrey,
Robert C. Winthrop,

Quincy.

Boston.

Boston.

Woburn.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Bdston.

Xew York.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Brookline.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Section IV. — 11.

Literature and the Fine Arts.

Charles F. Adams,
George S. Boutwell,
J. ElUot Cabot,
Francis J. Child,
Charles G. Loring,
James Russell Lowell,
Charles Eliot Norton,
Thomas W. Parsons,
Charles C. Perkins,
H. H. Richardson,
John G. Whittier,

Boston.

Groton.

Brookline.

Cambridge.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Cambridge.

Wayland.

Boston.

Brookline.

Amesbury.

470

ASSOCIATE FELLOWS.

ASSOCIATE FELLOWS. — 93.

(Number limited to one hundred.)

Class I. — 3Iathematical and Physical Sciences. — 37.

Section I, — 8.
Mathematics.

Charles Avery, Clinton, N.Y.
E. B. Elliott, Washington,D.C.
William Ferrel, Washington, D.C.
Thomas Hill, Portland, Me.
Simon Newcomb, Washington, D.C.
H. A. Newton, New Haven, Conn.
James E. Oliver, Ithaca, N.Y.
T. H. Safford, Williamstown, Mass.

Section II. — 13.
Practical Astronomy and Geodesy.
S. Alexander, Princeton, N.J.
W.H.C.Bartlett, Yonkers, N.Y.
J. H. C. Coffin, Washington, D.C.

Henry Draper,
Wm. II. Emory,
Asaph Hall,
J. E. Hilgard,

New York.
Washington , D . C .
Washington ,D. C.
Washington, D.C.

George W. Hill, Nyack, N.Y.
Elias Loomis, New Haven, Conn.
Maria Mitchell, Poughkeepsie, N. Y.
C. H. F. Peters, CUnton, N.Y.
George M. Searle, New York.
Chas. A. Yomig, Princeton, N.J.

Section HI. — 11.

Physics and Chemistry.

F. A. P. Barnard,
J.WillardGibbs,
S. W. Johnson,
John Le Conte,
A. M. Mayer,
W. A. Norton,
Ogden N. Rood,
H. A. Rowland,
L.M.Rutherfurd,
Benj. Silliman,
J. L. Smith,

New York.
New Haven, Conn.
New Haven, Conn.
Berkeley, Cal.
Hoboken, N.J.
New Haven, Conn.
New York.
Baltimore.
New York.
New Haven , Conn.
Louisville, Ky.

Section IV. — 5.

Technology and Engineering.

Henry L. Abbot, New York.
A.A.Humphreys, Washington, D.C.
William Sellers, Philadelphia.
George Talcott, Albany, N.Y.
W.P.Trowbridge, NewHaven, Conn.

Class II. — Natural and Physiological Sciences. — 28.

Section I. — 13.

Geology, Minernlor/y, and Physics of

the Globe.
George J. Brush, New Haven, Conn.
James D. Dana, New Haven, Conn.
J. W. Dawson, Montreal, Canada.
J. C. Fremont, New York.
F. A. Gcnth, Philadelphia.

Arnold Guyot,
James Hall,
F. S. Holmes,
Clarence King,

Princeton, N.J.
Albany, N.Y.
Charleston, S.C.
Washington, D. C.

Joseph Le Conte, Berkeley, Cal.
J. Peter Lesley, Philadelphia.
R. Pumpelly, Newport, R.I.
Geo. C Swallow, Columbia, Mo.

ASSOCIATE FELLOWS.

471

Sectiox n. — 3.

Botany.

A. W. Chapman, Apalachicola, Fla.
G. Engelinann, St. Louis, Mo.
Leo Lesquereux, Columbus, Ohio.

Section IIL — 7.

Zoology and Physiology.

S. F. Bah-d, Washington, D.C.

J. C. Dalton, New York.
J. L. Le Conte, Philadelphia.

Joseph Leidy, Philadelphia.
O. C. Marsh, New Haven, Conn.
S.Weir :\Iitchell, Philadelphia.
A. S. Packard, Jr., Providence.

Section IV. — 5.

Medicine and Surgery.

Fordyce Barker, New York.
John S. Billings, Washington, D.C.
Jacob M. Da Costa, Philadelphia.
W. A. Hammond, New York.
Alfred Stille, Philadelphia.

Class HI. — Bloral and Political Sciences. — 28.

Section I. — 8.

Philosophy and Jurisprudence.

D. R. Goodwin, Philadelphia.
R. G. Hazard, Peacedale, R.I.
Nathaniel Holmes, St. Louis, Mo.
James McCosh, Princeton, N. J.
Charles S. Peirce, New York.
Noah Porter, New Haven, Conn.
Isaac Ray, Philadelphia.

Jeremiah Smith, Dover, N.H.

Section II. — 9.
Philology and Archceology.
N. Arnold, Pawtuxet, R. I.

D. C. Gilman, Baltimore.

A. C. Kendrick, Rochester, N.Y.

George P. Marsh, Rome.

A. S. Packard, Brunswick, Me.

E. E. Sahsbury, New Haven, Conn.
A. D. White, Ithaca, N.Y.

W. D. Whitney, New Haven, Conn.
T. D. Woolsey, New Haven, Conn.

Section IH. — G.

Political Economy and History.

George Bancroft, Washington, D.C.
S. G. Brown, Clinton^ N.Y.
Henry C. Lea, Philadelijhia.
J. H. Trumbull, Hartford, Conn.
M. F. Force, Cincinnati.

W. G. Sumner, New Haven, Conn.

Section IV. — 5.

Literature and the Fine Arts.

James B. Angell, Ann Arbor, Mich.
L. P. di Cesnola, New York.
F. E. Church, New York.
R. S. Greenough, Florence.
William W. Story, Rome.

472

FOREIGN HONORARY MEMBERS.

FOREIGN HONORARY MEMBERS.— 69.

(Appointed as vacancies occur.)

Class I. — Mathematical and Physical Sciences. — 24.

Section I. — 6.
Mathematics.

John C. Adams,

Sir George B. Airy,

Brioschi,

Arthur Cayley,

Liouville,

J. J. Sylvester,

Cambridge.

Greenwich.

Milan.

Cambridge.

Paris.

Baltimore.

Section II. — 5.
Practical Astronomy and Geodesy.

Arthur Auwers,

Dbllen,

H. A. E. A. Faye,

Emile Plantamour,

Otto Struve,

Berlin.

Pulkowa.

Paris.

Geneva.

Pulkowa.

Section III. — 10.

Physics and
Berthelot,
R. Bunsen,
M. E. Chevreul,
J. Dumas,
H. Helmholtz,
A. W. Hofmaun,
G. Kirchhoff,
Balfour Stewart,
G. G. Stokes,
F. Wohler,

Chemistry.
Paris.

Heidelberg.
Paris.
Paris.
Berlin.
Berlin.
Berhn.
Manchester.
Cambridge.
Gottingen.

Section IV. — 3.
Technology and Engineering.
R. Clausius, Bonn.

F. M. de Lesseps, Pai'is.
Sir Wm. Thomson, Glasgow.

Class II. — Natural and Physiological Sciences. — 24.

Section I. — G.

Geology, Mineralogy, and Physics of

the Globe.

Barrande, Prague.

Des Cloizeaux, Paris.

James Prescott Joule , Manchester.
C. F. Rammelsberg, Berlin.
A. C. Ramsay, London.

Sir Edward Sabine, London.

Section II. — 6.

Botany.

J. G. Agardh, Lund.

George Bentham, London.

Alphonse de CandoUe, Geneva.
Oswald Heer, Zurich.

Sir Joseph D. Hooker, London.
NiigeU, Munich.

FOREIGN HONORARY MEMBERS.

473

Section III.— S.
Zoology and Plujsiolofjy.

T. L. W. Bischoff,
Milne Edwards,
Albrecht KciUiker,
Rudolph Leuckart,
Richard Owen,

Munich.

Paris.

^Viirzburg.

Leipsic.
London.

C. Th. von Siebold, Muuich.

J. J. S. Steenstrup, Copenhagen.
Valentin, Berne.

Section IV. — 4.

Medicine and Surgery.

C. E. Brown- Sequard, Paris.
F. C. Bonders, Utrecht. ■

Sir James Paget, London.

Virchow, Berlin.

Class III. — Moral and Political Sciences. — 21.

Section I. — 3.

Philosophy and Jurisprudence.

Sir Henry Sumner Maine, London.
James Martineau, London.

Sir James F. Stephen, London.

Section II. — 7.

Philology and Archceology.

Georg Curtius, Leipsic.

Pascual de Gayangos, Madrid.

Benjamin Jowett, Oxford.

Lepsius, Berlin.

Max Miiller, Oxford.

H. A. J. Munro, Cambridge.
Sir H. C. Rawlinson, London.

Section III. — 8.

Political Economy and History.

Ernst Curtius, Berlin.
W. Ewart Gladstone, London.

Charles Merivale, Ely.

F. A. A. IVIignet, Paris.

Mommsen, Berlin.

Mark Pattison, Oxford.

Von Ranke, Berlin.

William Stubbs, Oxford.

Section IV. — 3.

Literature and the Fine Arts.

Gerome, Paris.

John Ruskin, Coniston.

Alfred Tennyson, Isle of ^^'ight.

INDEX.

A.

Abutilon crispum, Don, 331.

holosericeum, Scheele, 331.

hypoleucum, Gray, 331.

Texense, Torr. & Gray, 331.
Acacia ameiitacea, DC, 351.

Berlandieri, Benth., 3.j1.

constricta, Benth., 351.

crassifolia. Gray, 351.

Farnesiana, Willd.. 351.

filicina, Willd., 351.

flexicaulis, Benth., 351.

Palmeri, Watson, 350.

Wrightii, Benth., 351.
Acer grandidentatura, Nntt., 338.
Achyronychia Parryi, HemsL, 329.
Acid potassium salt, 70, 73.
Acnida Floridana, Watson, 37G.

taberculata. Gray, 376.
Acrylic and propionic acids, on the
constitution of the substitu-
ted, 1.50.
Adolphia infesta, Meisn., 336.
Air-thermometer, a new form of,

22.
Alcheniilla hirsuta, HBK., 353.

sibbaldia-folia, HBK., 353.

tripnrlita, 3.53.

velutina, Watson, 3.54.
Allium Brandegei, Watson, 380.

Farishii, Watson, 380.
Amarantus venulosus, Watson, 376.
Amniannia latifolia, Linn., 355.
Annnonic phospho-molybdate, 68.
Ammonium, phospho-molybdate of,

77.
Ammonium salt, 71, 76, 78.
Amoreuxia palmatifida, DC, 324.

Schieilcann, Planch., 324.

Wrightii, Gray, 324.

Ampelopsis pubescens, Schlecht.,

337.
Anemone Mexicana, HBK., 317.
Angelica arguta, Nutt., 374.

genuflexa, Xutt., 374.

Lyallii, Watson, 374.

Mexicana, Vatke, 361.

verticillata. Hook., 374.
Anoda crktata, Schlecht., 330.

hastata, Cav., 330.

parviflora, Cav., 330, 368.

reticulata, Watson, 368.

Wrightii, Gray, 368.
Antimonious bromide, analysis of,

16.
Antimonious sulphide, precipitation

of, 2.
Antimony, atomic weight of; addi-
tional experiments, 13.
Antimony in the atmosphere, oxida-
tion of hydrochloric acid so-
lutions of, 1.
Antimony, iodide of; its boiling

point, 22.
Apios tuberosa, Moench, 346.
Apium leptophyllum, F. Muell.,
361.

Popei, Gray, 331.
Apodanthera undulata, Gray, 359.
Aquilegia longissima, Gray, 317.
Arabis canescens, Xutt., 363.

Cusickii, Watson, 363.

furcata, Watson, 362.

Mexicana, Watson, 319.

runcinata, W^atson, 319.

suffrutescens, Watson, 362.
Arenaria alsinoides, AVilld., 327.

Californica, 367.

decussata. HBK., 327.

diffmii, Ell., 327.

lanuginosa, Rohrb., 327.

476

LMDEX.

Arenaria macradenia, Watson, 3G7.

pusilhi, Watson, 867.
Argenione fruticosa, Tliurber, 318.

kispU/a, Gray, ol8.

platyceias, Link & Otto, 318.
Argentic chloride in water, on the

solubility of, 7.
Argento-antinionious tartrate, 5.
Arizona, new plants of recent col-
lections, mainly in, 109.
Arsenic, iodide of, 59.
Arsenic, on the spectrum of, 35.
Arsenic spectrum, wave-lengths of

the princi[)al lines of, 38.
Arsenio-molybdates, 79.
Aspicarpa Ilartwegiana, Juss., 333.

hyssopifolia. Gray, 333.

lougipes. Gray, 334.
Aster and Solidago m the older her-
baria, studies of, 163.
Asters, North American, in the

older herbaria, 164.
Aster acuminatus, 171.

adulterinus, 174.

gestivus, 170.

amoenus, 168.

amplexicaulis, 168, 172, 1T3.

amygdalinus, 168.

annuus, 166.

argenteus, 171.

Artemisijeflorus, 175.

auritus, 176.

azureus, 176.

bellidiflorus, 175.

biflorus, 172.

bifrons, 176.

blandus, 171, 175.

c?crulescens, 176.

canescens, 175.

Carolinian us, 169.

ciliatus, 169, 172.

ciliolatus, 176.

concinnns, 175.

concolor, 1G5.

conyzoides, 173.

cordifolius, 165, 172, 174.

cornifolius, 172.

cvaneus, 172.

diffusus, 170, 174.

divaricatus, 164.

divergeiis, 170, 174.

diversifolius, 172.

dracunculoides, 173.

Drumniondii, 176.

dumosus, 164.

eli'gans, 173.

eminens, 175.

Aster ericoides, 165, 170.
floribundus, 173.
foliolosus, 169, 174.
tragi lis, 173.
gramiuifolius, 175.
grandiflorus, 167.
hebecladus, 176.
hirsuticaulis, 176.
Hirtellus, 176.
hispidus, 169.
humilis, 172.
hyssopifolius, 165, 173.
infirnius, 171.
junceus, 170, 174.
Isevigatus, 169, 173.
Isevis, 166.
lanceolatus, 173.
laxus, 175.
ledifolius, 175.
linariifolius, 164.
linifolius, 165.
longifolius, 169.
macrophyllus, 108.
Marilandicus, 171.
microphyllus. 176.
miser, 168, 169, 170, 174.
mrdticeps, 176.
multiflorus, 170.
mutabilis, 166, 170, 174.
nemoralis, 169, 173.
Nov£e-Anglise, 165.
Novi-Belgii, 167, 170.
pallens, 175.
paludosus, 169.
paniculatus, 168, 170, 174.
patentissimus, 176.
patens, 169.
patulus, 169.
pendulus, 170, 174.
I^ennslyvanicus, 175.
peregrinus, 176.
phlogifolius, 172.
pilosus, 172.
polyphyllus, 175.
pra^altus, 175.
priBCox, 175.
prenanthoides, 173.
puniceus, 166.
radula, 171.
recurvatus, 173.
reticulatus, 175.
retrollexus, 176.
rigidus, 165.
rubricaulis, 168.
salicifolius, 168, 170, 174.
salignus, 174.
sagittifolius, 172.

INDEX.

477

Aster scoparius, 176.

serotinus, 173.

fcjibiricus, lG-1.

simplex, 175.

solidagineiis, 171.

soliilaginoides, 173.

sparsiHonis, 172, 174.

spectabilis, 171, 174.

spurins, 172.

squarrosus, 1G9.

stenophyllus, 176.

strictus. 17."), 176.

subasper, 176.

subiilatus, 171.

surculo.siis, 172.

tardiflorns, 167, 174.

tenuifoliiis, 164, 174.

thyrsiflorus, 172.

tortifolius, 171.

tradescanti, 166, 174.

turbinellus, 176.

uinbellatus, 169.

iindulatiis, 165.

uniflorus, 171.

iirophylbis, 176.

vernus, 106.

versicolor, 173.

villosus, 172.

vimineus, 169, 174.
Astragalus Autouiaus, Watson, 343.

Arizonicus, Gray, 343.

Brazoensis, Buckl., 342.

conjunctus, AVatson, 371.

dipliacus, AVatson, 312.

giganteus, Watson, 370.

giandiflorus, AVatson, 370.

Greggii, Watson, 343.

Hartwegi, Benth., 343.

Humboldtii, (iray, 342.

leptocarpus, Torr. & Gray, 343.

Nuttallianus, DC, 343.

orthantlius, Gray, 342.

parvus, Hemsl., 343.

strigulosus, HBK., 343.

terminalis, Watson, 370.

triflorus, Gray, 343.

rnccarum. Gray, 343.

Vaseyi, Watson, 342.
Astrophyllum dumosum, Torr., 335.
Atherinichtliys notata, 277.
Atriplex fasciculata, AVatson, 377.

orbicularis, AVatson, 377.

Parishii, AA'atson, 377.
Atriplex fasciculata, Parryi, Watson,

378.
Ayenia microphylla, Gray, 332.

B.

Barcena Giianajuatensis, Duges, 336.
Batrachus tau, 279.
Bauliinia ramosissima, Benth., 318.
Berberis gracilis, Hartw., 318.

ilicina, Uemsl., 318.

pallida, llartw., 318.

ISchiedeana, Schleclit., 318.

trifoliolata, Moric, 318.
Boccouia frutescens, Linn., 319.
Boerliaaviapterocarpa, Watson, 376.
Brodia^a filit'olia, AA'atson, 381.

stellaris, AA-'atson, 381.
Bromide, antimonious, analysis of,

16.
Brongniartia intermedia, Moric, 342.

Cadmium, revision of the atomic

weight of, 28.
Cjesalpinia exostemma, DC, 347.

Mexicana, Gray, 347.
Calibrating tliermometers, simple

method for, 157.
Calliandra conferta, Benth., 351.

Coulteri, AA'atson, 352.

eriophylla, Benth., 351.
Callirrhoe involucrata, Gray, 330.

pedata. Gray, 330.
Calochortus longebarbatus, AA^'atson,

387.
Canavalia villosa, Benth., 346.
Capsella Mexicana, Hemsl., .322.

pubens, Benth. & Hook., 322.

Schaffneri, AVatson, 322.
Cardamine auriculata, Watson, 319.

Gambelii, AA'atson, 319.

Schaffneri, Hook, f., 319.
Cardiospermum lialicacabum, Linn.,
337.

molle, Linn., 337.
Casimiroa edulis, Llav. &Lex., 335.
Cassia bauhinioides. Gray, 348.

Champecrista, Linn., 348.

Greggii, Gray, 318.

leptocarpa, Benth., 348.

Lindheimeriana, Scheele, 348.

occidentalis, Linn., 348.

pumilio, Gray, 348.

Kcemeriaua, Scheele, 348.

Yogeliana, Schlecht., 348.

AA'islizeni, Gray. 348.
Castela iSTicholsoni, Hook., 335.

478

INDEX.

CauLantlms amplexicaulis, Watson,

mi.

glaucus, Watson, 364.

inflatus, Watson, 3U4.
Ceanotlius azureus, Desf., 337.

buxifolius, 337.

ccEruleus, Lag., 337.

depressus, Beuth., 337.

Greggii, Gray, 337.

Cedrela ? 335.

Cercis occidentalism 348.

reniformis, Engelm., 348.
Cercocarpus parvifolius, Xutt.,353.
Cerdia congestiflora, HemsL, 329.

glauca, Hemsl., 329.

purpuvascens, DC, 329.
Cereiis cinerascens, DC, 360.
Cevallia sinuata. Lag., 358.
Chlorbromiodacrylic acid, 99.
Chloride, argentic, on its solubility

in water, 7.
Chloride, ferrous, 2.
Chlorine and bromine by electrolysis,
an indirect determination of,
91.
Chlortribrompropionic acid, 106.
Chorizanthe cuspidata, Watson, 379.
Cladotlirix lanuginosa., 377.

oblongifolia, Watson, 376.
Claytonia ambigua, Watson, 365.

cordifolia, Watson, 365.
Clematis Drunimondii, Torr. & Gray,
316.

Jilifera, Bentli., 317.

nervata, Benth. , 316.

Pitcheri, Torr. & Gray, 317.
Cleomella brevipes, Watson, 365.
Cobalt salt, croceo — , 69.
Cocculus Carolinus, DC, 318.

diversifolius, DC, 318.

ohlongifhlius, DC, 318.
Cochlearia (?) Mexicana, Watson,

320.
Colletia (?) mul/ifora, DC, 336.
Cologania angustifolia, 345.

hnmifusa, Hemsl., 345.

longifolia, Gray, 345.

Martia, Watson, 345.

pulchella, HBK., 345.
Color and pattern of insects, on the,

234.
Colubrina glomerata, Ilemsl., 336.

Gregij;ii, Watson, 330.
Communications, —

Alexander Agassiz, 271.

Jnsiah Parsous Cooke, 1.

Wolcott Gibbs, 62.

Communications, —
Asa Gray, 164.
H. A. Ilaijen, 234.
Henry B. Hill, 125.
N. D. C. Hodges, 268.
Silas W. Holman, 1-57.
Oliver W. Huntington, 35.

Loring Jackson, \
A. E. Menke, \

110.

F. E. Kidder, 304.

Leonard P. Kinnicutt, 91.

Charles F. Mabery, 94.

W. H. Melville, So.

Charles Bingham Penrose, 39,
47.

Edward C. Pickering, 231.

Sereno Watson, 317.
Condalia Mexicana, Schlecht., 336.

obovata. Hook., 336.

spathulata. Gray, 336.
Copper and nickel below 0°, ther-

mometric line of, 47.
Corallorhiza Arizonica, Watson, 379.
Corchorus pilolobus. Link, 332.
Cotoneaster denticulata, HBK., 354.
Cottus Grcenlandicus, 285.
Cotyledon Oregonensis, AYatson, 355.

parviflora, Hemsl., 355.

Schaffiieri, Watson, 354.

yiscida, Watson, 372.

?, 355.

Council, RejDort of the, 399.
Cowania Mexicana, Don, 353.

plicata, Don, 353.
Crantzia lineata, Nutt., 361.
Crataegus Crus-galU, 354.

Mexicana, DC, 354.

pubescens, Steud., 354.
Cristatella erosa, Nutt., 323.

Jamesii, Torr. & Gray, 323.
Croceo-cobalt salt, 69.
Crotalaria anagyroides, 338.

eriocarpa, Benth., 338.

Maypurensis, HBK., 338.

puraila, Ort., 338.
Cryolite, cr3'stalline form of, 55.
Crystalline form of cryolite, 55.
Ctenolabrus c(XM-uleus, 290.
Cucumis Anguria, Linn., 359.
Cucurbita foetidissinia. HBK., 359.

percnnis. Gray, 359.
Cuphtea requipetala, Cav., 355.

lanceolata. Ait. f., 355.

Zimnpani, Roezl, 355.
Curcumin, 110.
Curcumiu, esters of, 119.

oxidation of, 121.

INDEX.

479

Curcumin, salts of, 117.

dipotassic, 117.

monopotassic, 118.
Cyclantliera dissecta, Nand., 359.

Naudiniana, Cogn., o-j9.
Cyclopterus liimpus. 280.
Cyperus serrulatus, Watson, 382.
Cypripediuin fasciculatum, Kell.,
380.

D.

Dalea alopecuroides, Willd., 340.

aurea, Nutt., 340.

Berlaudieri, Gray, 340.

citriodora, AV'illd., 330.

eriophylla, Watson, 340.

frutescens, Gray, 341.

Greggii, Gray, 341.

lasiathera, Gray, 340.

lasiostachys, Benth., 340.

leucostoma, Schlecht., 340.

Luisana, Watson, 341.

mollis, Benth., 341.

nana, Torr., 340.

nana, 369.

pectinata, Benth., 340.

pogonathera, Gray, 340.

polycephala, Benth., 341.

pulchella, 341.

rad leans, Watson, 341.

ramosissima, Benth., 340.

rubescens, AVatson, 369.

scariosa, Watson, 369.

trifoliolata, Moric, 340.

triplujlla, Schlecht., 340.

tnberculata. Lag., 340.

Wrightii, Gray, 341.

Wright li, 341.
Dauhentonia longifolia, DC, 342.
Daucus montanus, Willd., 361.
Delphinium azureum, Michx., 318.

leptophyllum, Ilemsl., 318.
Desmanthus acuminatus, Benth.,
349.

brachylobus, Benth., 349.

depressus, Humb. & Boupl.,
348, 349.

depressus, 349.

incurvus, Benth., 349.

Jamesii, Torr. & Gray, 349.

leptolobus, Torr. & Gray, 349.

obtusus, Watson, 349, 371.

reticulatus, Beuth., 348, 349.

Desmanthus velutinus, Scheele, 348,
349.

virgatus, Willd., 349.
Desmodium gracile, Mart. & Gal.,
345.

molliculum, DC, 345.

orbiculare, Schlecht., 345.

Palnieri, Ilemsl., 344.

Parryi, Ilemsl., 345.

psilophyllum, Schlecht., 344.

spirale, DC, 344.

viridiflorum. Beck, 344.

Wislizeni, Engelm., 345.

Wrightii, Gray, 344.
Deweya vestita, Watson, 374.
Dibromacrylate, baric, 127, 135,
139.

calcic, 129, 135, 139.

plumbic, 128.

potassic, 129, 136.
Dibromacrylic acid, 94, 125, 138.
Dibromacrylic acid and tribrompro-
pionic acids, on the relation
between, 133.
Dibromiodacrylic and chlorbromio-

dacrylic acids, 94.
Dichloracrylic acid, on the crystal-
line foi-m of a, 131.
Dichlorbrompropionic acid, 144.
Dichlordibrompropionate, baric a,
146.

argentic ^, 148.

baric /3, 149.
Dichlordibrompropionic acid, /3, 147.
Discopleura laciniata, Beuth. &

Hook., 361.
Dodonsea viscosa, Linn., 338.
Douglasia dentata, Watson, 375.
Draba chrysantha, Watson, 364.
Drymaria arenarioides, Willd., 329.

cordata, Willd., 327.

cordata, 328.

crassifolia, Benth., 329.

Fendleri, W^atson, 328.

frankenioides, HBK., 329.

glandulosa, Bartl., 328.

glandulosa, 328.

gracilis, Cham. & Schlecht.,
328.

nodosa, Engelm., 329.

pahtstris, Cham. & Schlecht.,
328.

polycarpoides. Gray, 329.

ra)7}osissi>na, Schlecht., 328.

snifruticosa, Gray, 328.

villosa, Cham. & Schlecht., 328.

xerophylla. Gray, 329.

480

INDEX.

E.

Echinocfictns bicolor, Gal., 360.

hoiizoiitlialonius, Lam., 3G0.

longehamatus, Gal., 300.

pilosus, Gal., 300.
Echinocystis (?) Bigelovii, Cogn.,

374.
Echinocystis parviflora, Watson, 373.
Elateriitm Bigelovii, Watson, 374.
Elatine Americana, Nutt., 329.
Electricity, Thermo-, 39.
Electrolysis, an indirect determina-
tion of chlorine and bromine
by, 91.
Eriogonum apiculatum, Watson, 378.

delicatulum, Watson, 379.

molestum, Watson, 379.

Parishii, Watson, 379.
Eruca sativa, Lam., 321.
Eryngium aquaiicum, 300.

carlinee, Delar. , 301.

Deppeanum, Cham. & Schlecht.,
300.

nasturtiifolium, Jnss., 300.

serratum, Cav., 300.

WrightU, 301.

ynccfefolium, Michx., 300.
Erysimum asperum, DC, 321.
Erythrina coralloides, DC, 346.
Ether thei'mometer, examination of,

54.
Eucnide bartonioides, Zucc, 358.

floribunda, Watson, 358.

lobata, Gray, 358.

sinnata, Watson, 358.
Eulophus peucedanoides, HBK., 301.

Texanus, Benth. & Hook., 301.
Experiments on the fatigue of small

spruce-beams, 304.
Eysenhardtia amorphoides, HBK.,
339.

orthocarj^a, Watson, 339.

Fellows, Associate, deceased, —

Henry Charles Carey, 417.

Edward Desor, 422.

John W. Draper, 424.

Lewis H. JNIorgan, 429.

St. Julien Ravenel, 437.

John Rodgers, 438.

Barn as Sears, 442.
Fellows, Associate, List of, 470.

Fellows elected, —

Clarence John Blake, 388.

Francis Blaice, 383.

Lucien Carr, 383.

Alvau Graham Clark, 383.

AVilliam Otis Crosby, 388.

John Cummings, 389.

Thomas Gaffield, 388.

Charles Rockwell Lanman, 389.

Frederic Walker Lincoln, oSb.

John Davis Long, 389.

William Harmon IS^iles, 389.
Fellows, Associate, elected, —

Fordyce Barker, 383.

John Shaw Billings, 383.

Luigi Falma di Cesnola, 393.

Jacob ]\L Da Costa, 383.

Henry Draper, 389.

Manning Ferguson Force, 383.

Alfred Still6,''383.

AVilliam Graham Sumner, 383.
Fellows deceased, —

John Bacon, 390.

Richard H. Dana, 309.

Ralph Waldo Emerson, 403.

Thomas P. James, 405.

Henry W. Longfellow, 406.

John 'a. Lowell, 4U8.

Theophilus Parsons, 411.

Edward Reynolds, 414.
Fellows, List of^ 467.
Fellow resigned, —

William James, 465.
Fish-eggs, Pelagic, 289.
Foreign Honorary Member elected :

William Stubbs, 383.
Foreign Honorary Members de-
ceased, —

J. C Bluntschli, 445.

Charles Darwin, 449.

Joseph Decaisne,.458.

Theodor Schwann, 460.

Dean Stanley, 401.
Foreign Honorary Members, List of,

472.
Fouquieria splendens, Engelm., 329.
Fragaria Mexicana, Schlecht., 353.
Frankenia grandifolia, Cham. &

Schlecht, 326.
Fumaria parviflora, Lam., 319.

G.

Gadus morrhua, 296.
Galactia bracliystachys. Benth., 346.
marginalis, Benth., 34G.

INDEX.

481

Galphimia ancfustifolia, Bentli., 333

iinifolh,, Giav. 333.
Garrya laurifulia; llartw., 3G1.

ovata, Bt'iith., 301.
Gastero.stoiis aciileatus, 288.
Gaudichaiulia filijieiidula, Juss., 333
Gaiinx cocci Ilea, Nutt., 3.38.

Drummondii, Torr. & Gray
358. •' '

parviflora, Doiig-1., 357.
Geranium Caroliiiiamun, Linn., 334
Caroliitianuin, 331.
crenatum, Watson. 334.
Hernaudezii, DC, 334.
Hernandezii, 3.{4.
Mexicanum, HBK., 334.
Schiedeanura, Cham!
Sclilecht., 334.
Glinus Cambessidesii, Fenzl, 360
Gossypium Barbadense, Linn., 33^
Greggia camporum, Gray, 32l'.

H.

Heliantheraum arenicola, Chapm
323.

argenteum, Hems]., 323.
Coulteri, Watson, 323.
glomeratum. Lag., 323.
patens, Hemsl., 323.
Helietta parvifolia, Benth. 335
Herniannia pauciflora, Watson, 368

iesana, Gray. 332, 369.
Hibiscus cardiophyllus. Gray 33^
Coulteri. Hary., 332.
denudatus, Benth., 332.
Hirsea Greggii, Watson, 333*.

hLacina, Watson, 333
Hoffraanseggia gracihs. Watson, 347.

stricta, Banth., 347.
Hosackia angustifoiia, Don, 339
puberuhi, Benth., 339.'

319"'""^ fu»iariaefolia. Sweet,
Hydrochloric acid solutions of anti-
mony in the atmosphere. Oxi-
dation of, L
Hydrocotyle in/errupta, 300.

prolifera, Kell., 360
Hypericum denticulatum, HBK. 330
JaMicjiatunu 330. '

mutihim, Linn., 329.
pauciflorum, HBIv", .330.
perforatum, Linn., 329
phi/onofis. Schlecht., 3V9
Schaffiieri, A\-atson,' 330.'
- "^OL. xyii. (n. s. IX.) 81

Ilex decidua, Walt., 335.
Lidigofeia leptosepala, Xutt., 342.

Lmdlieimeriana, Scheele, 342.

subulata, 342.
Insects, on the color and pattern of,

body colors in, 240.

change of color in, 249.

color of, 230.

color, its nature and formation

in, 259.
colors, Bezold's yiew upon the

nature of, in, 245.
dermal colors of, 242, 247.
fluorescent colors of, 247. '
hyjjodermal colors of, 243, 247
natural colors of, 242.
optical colors of, 237.
pattern of, 250.
transparent colors of, 245.
sexual selection of, 248.
surface colors of, 246.
Iodide of antimony, its boilinff-
poiut, 22. ^

Iodide of arsenic, 59.
lomdimn calceolarium, Ginfr., 324.
lineare, Torr., 324. '^ '
polygalaefolium, Vent., 324.
yerbenaceum, HBK., 324.
Iris tenuis, Watson, 380.'
lyesia Utaheusis, Watson, 371.

Janusia gracilis, Gray, 334.
JussiKa repens, Linn, 350.
suffruticosa, Linn., 356.

K.

Karwinskia Humboldtiana, Zucc,

336.
Kochia Californica, Watson, .378.
Koebeilinia spinosa, Zucc, 335.
Krameria canescens. Gray', 326.

cinerea, Schauer, 326.

cytisoides. Cay., 326.

lanceoktfa, Torr., 326.

parvifolia, 326.

pauciflora, DC, 320.

ramosissima, Watson, 326.

secundiflora, DC, 320.

482

INDEX.

Labrax lineatus, 274.

Larrea ]\Jexicaiia, Moric, 334.

Lathy rus Cusickii, Watson, 871.

parvifolius. Watson, 345.

iJenosiis, 345.
Lechea major, Michx., 323.

Skinneri, Benth., 323.
Lepidium intermedium, Gray, 322.

lasiocarpum, Mutt.. 322.

Menziesii, DC, 323.

MenzieKii, 322.

ruderale, 323.

Virginicum, 322.

Wrifjhtii, Gray, 322.
Lepigonum gracile, Watson, 367.

Mexicanum, Hemsl. 327.

rubrum. Fries, 327.
Lespedeza repens, Bart., 345.
Leucfena glauca, Benth., 350.
Liudleya mespiloides, HBK., 353.
Linuin Cvuciata, Planch., 332.

Greggii, Engehai., 332.

lecheoides, Watson, 382.

Mexicanum, Kunth, 333.

rigidum, Pursli, 382.

ruppstre, Engehn., 332.

scabrelbim, Fhinch., 333.

Schiedeau um, Cham. & Schlecht.,
333.
TJavea integrifolia, Hemsl., 336.
Lonicera c'diula, 374.

Utahensis, AVatson, 374.
Lopezia pumila, BonpL, 3.57.

trichota, Schlecht., 357.
Lophius piscatorius, 280.
Ludwigia palustris, Liiin., 3.56.
Lupinns bilineatus, Benth., 338.

Ehrenbergii, Schlecht., 338.

JlarLicer/i, Lindl., 338.

Ilavardi, Watson, 369.

Leonensis, Watson, 338.

nrnnlus, 3(50.

riattensis, Watson, 369.
Ly thrum alatnm, Linn., 355.

gracile, Benth., 355.

*Hyssopifolia, Linn., 355.
Kenncdianum, HBK., 355.

M.

Mahnnin ilicina, Schlecht., 318.

trifolin, Cham. & Schlecht., 318.
Mnlpigliia glabra, Linn., 333.
Mitica Americana, 368.

Malvastrum densiflorum, Watson,
368.

Rugelii, W^atson, 367.

tricuspidatuin. Gray, 330.
Malvaviscus Drummondii, Torr. &

Gray, 332.
Mamillaria conoidea, DC, 360.

microraeris, Engelm., 360.

radians, DC, 360.
Martia, Zucc, 346.
Maximo wiczia Liiidheimeri, Cogn.,
359.

tripartita, Cogn., 359.
Medicago minima, Lara., 339.
Melilotus parviflora, De.sf., 339.
Melochia pyramidata, Linn., 332.

serrata, 368.
Mentzelia aspera, Linn., 359.

hispida, Willd., 359.

multiflora, Kutt., 359.

strir/om. HBK., 359.

Wrightii, Gray. 359.
Microrhamnus ericoides, Gray, 337.
Mimosa acanthocarpa, Benth., 350.

biuncifera, Benth., 350.

flexnosa, Benth., 350.

Lindheimeri, Gray, 350.

malacophylla. Gray, 350.

nionancistra, Benth., 350.

strigillosa, Torr. & Gray, 350.

zj'gnphvlla. Benth., 850.

■ ■? , 3.50.

jNIirabilis tenuiloba, AYatson, 375.
Mollugo Cerviana, Ser., 360.

verticillata, Linn.. 360.
Molybdate, Amnionic phospho-, 68.
Molybdate of ammonium, Phospho-,

77.
Molybdates, Arsenio-, 79.
Molybdates, Phospho-, 62.
Molybdic and phosphoric oxides,

percentages of, 68.
Mortonia effusa, Turcz., 336.

Greggii, Gray, 386.

Paimeri, Hemsl., 336.

scahrella, Gray, 336.
Motella argentea, 294.
Myosnrns aristatns, Benth., 362.

cupnlatus, Watson, 362.

minimus. Liim., 362.

sessilis, AVatson, 362.

N.

Nasturtium tanacetifoliura, Hook. &

Arn., 819.
Negundo aceroides, Moench, 338.

INDEX.

483

Neptunia pubescens, Benth., 348.
Nesjea loiinfpipes. Gray, 3">0.

salicifolia, lUMi., .i'jC).
Nickel, copper, and their thermo-

metric line below 0°, 47.
Nissolia platycal^-x, Watson, 344.

AVislizeni, Gray, 344.
Novitia; Arizoiiica;, etc.

Acamptopa[)pus Shockleyi, 208.
^Esciilus Tarryi, 200.
Actiuella Vaseyi, 219.
Adeuocaulon, 214.
Ambrosia piuiiila, 217.
Androsace Arizoiiica, 221.
Aiiteunaria flagellaris, 212.

stenophylla, 213.
Artemisia Parishii, 220.
Aster imbricatus, 210.
Palmeri, 209.
stenomeres, 209.
Baccharis sarothroides, 211.
Barroetea Pavoiiii, 20G.

subulio-era, 20-5.
Bigelovia albida, 209.

intricata, 208.
Braya Oregonensis, 199.
Breweria minima, 22>i.
Brickellia cylindracea, 207.
frutescens, 207.
grandiflora, 207.
Lemmoni, 20G.
odontophylla, 206.
Pringlei, 200.
Bm-sera microphylla, 230.
Cnicus Rothrockii, 220.
Cordylanthus Neviuii, 229.
Coursetia microphylla, 201.
Cracca Edwardsii,'201.
glabella, 201.
sericea, 201.
Crepis pleurocarpa, 221.
Crotalaria Pringlei, 200.
Dalea Lemmoni, 200.
Ordiaj, 200.
Pringlei, 201.
Dugesia Mexicana, 21G.
Erigeron dryophyllus, 210.
Pringlei, 210.
Mnirii, 210.
Eriodictyou angustifolium, 224
Eritrichiiim intermedium, 22.3.

racemosum, 226.
Eupatorinm Coahuilense, 205.
Feudleri, 205.
pauiiercuhim, 205.
Plianerostylis, 205.
Evolvulus lajtus, 228.

Xovitine, Arizonicre, Galium Piolh-
rockii, 203.
Gilia prostrata, 223.
Gitliopsis diffusa, 221.
(iiiaplialium Wrightii, 214.
Gomphocarpus hypoleuQus, 222.
Grindelia Arizouica, 208.
costata, 208.
subdeourrens, 208.
Gymnoloinia triloba, 217.'
Hecastocleis Shockleyi, 221.
Iloustonia fasciculata, 203.
Palmeri, 202.
Wrightii, 202.
Jacquemontia Pringlei, 227.
Kuhnia Schaffneri, 207.
Lagophylla glandulosa, 219.
Leptosyne Arizouica, 218.
Lessingia glandulifera. 207.
Lithosperum glabrum, 227.
Lobelia Gattingeri, 221.
Madia Yosemitana, 219.
Micropus amphibolus, 214.
Monardella tenuiflora, 230.
Orthocarpus I'arishii, 229.
Parthenium confertum, 216.
Pentstemon brevilabris, 229.

Parishii, 228.
Phacelia platyloba, 223.

Pringlei, 223.
Plummerafloribunda, 215.
Pluchea borealis, 212.
Ribes viburnifolium, 202.
Rubus lasiococcus, 201.
Rudbeckia Mohrii, 217.

moutana, 217.
Senecio Lemmoni, 220.
Stevia Lemmoni, 204.

Plummera?, 204.
Synedrella vialis, 217.
Yernonia Gre^gii, 204.
Erveudbergii, 203.
I'almeri, 204.
Schaffneri, 204.
Yiguiera lanata, 218.
Xymphsea ampla, DC., 318.

o.

(Enothera Berlandicri, Walp., 356.
brachycarpa, Gray, 357.
(lentntn, 373.
dissecta. Gray, 357.
Drummondii, Ilook.. 356.
Ilartwegi, Bentli., 357.
heterociiroma, Watson, 373.

484

INDEX.

ffinothera hirmta, Walp., 350.

maci'osceles, Gray, 356.

refracta, AVatson, 373.

rosea, Ait., 357.

s'inuata, Michx., 356.

speciosa, Niitt., 356.

strigidosa, 373.

tetraptera, Cav., 356.

W7-ightli, Gray, 3.57.
Oligomeris glaucescens, Camb., 32.3.
Opuutia imbricata, DC, 360.

Kleinije, DC, 360.
Orthoiodbenzylbromide and its de-
rivatives, preliminary notice
of, 103.
Osseous fishes, on the young stages

of some, 271.
Oxalis corniculata, Linn., 305.

decaphylla, II BK., 335.

dichondra?folia, Gray. 335.

Wrightii, Gray, 335.
Oxybaphus linearifolius, Watson,
375.

P.

Pachystima Myrsinites, Raf., 336.
Parkinsonia aculeata, Linn., 348.

Texan a, Watson, 348.
Passiflora bryonioides, HBK., 359.
foetida, Linn., 359.

teiiuiloba, Engehn., 359.
Pattern of insects, on the color and,

234.
PauJlinia suhulata, Gray, 337.
Pavonia lasiopetala, Scheele, 332.

Wrightii, Gray, 332.
Pedicularis bracteosa, Renth., 375.

Canadensis, Linn., 375.

Furbishipe, Watson, 375.
Peganuin ]\Iexicanum, Gray, 335.
Pelagic fish eggs, 289.
Peltier and Thomson, effects of

thermoelectricity, 39.
Petalonynx crenatus, Gray, 358.
Petalostemou obovatus, Torr. &

Gray, 341.
Peteria scoparia. Gray, 342.
Peucedanum Mexicanutn, Watson,

361.
Phaseolus atropurpureus, DC, 340.

diversifolius, Pers., 346.

filiforniis, Benth., 346.

heterophyllus, Willd., 346.

multiflorus, Willd., 347.

polyuiorphus, Watson, 346.

Phaseolus retusus, Benth., 346.

scabrellus. Benth., 346.

Wrightii, Gray, 346.

-'?, 347.

Philadelphus serpyllifolius, Gray,

3.54.
Phospho-molybdate, ammonic, 68.
Phospho-molybdate of ammonium,

77.
Phospho-molybdates, 62.
Phospho-molybdic acid. Twenty-
four atom series, 05.
Phosphoric and molybdic oxides,

percentages of, 63.
Physaria didymocarpa, Xutt. , 303.

Geyeri, Gray, 363.

Newberry i. Gray, 303.

Oregona, Watson, 303.
Pistacia Alexicana, II BK., 338.
Pithecolobium brevifoliiim, Benth.,
352.

elacbistophyllum, Gray, 352.

Palmeri, Ilejnsl., 3.32.

Schaffneri, Watson, 352.
Polanisia trachysperma, Torr. &
Gray, 323.

uniglandulosa, DC, 323.
Polygala alba, Nutt., 325.

Greggii, Watson, 325.

hemipterocarpa, Gray, 326.

Lindheimeri, Gray, 324.

macradenia. Gray, 325.

Mexicana, DC, 325.

obscura, Benth., 325.

ovalifolia, DC, 324.

Palmeri, Watson, 325.

puberula, Gray, 324.

puhescens, 324.

scoparia, II BK., 325.

seniialata, AVatson, 326.

viridis, AVatson, 320.
Polygonum intermedium, Xutt.,

378.
Porlieria angustifolia, Gray, 334.
Portulaca pilosa, Linn., 329.
Potassium salt, acid, 70, 73.
Potentilla heptaphylla, Mill., 353.

Xorvegica, Linn., 3.'j3.
Propionic acids, on certain tetrasub-

stituted, 140.
Prosopis cinerascens, Gray, 348.

juliflora, DC, 348.
Prunus Capuli, Cav., 352.

glandulosa, Torr. & Gray, 352.

Mexicana, Watson, 353.
Psoralea pentaphylla, Linn., 339.

rhombifulia, Torr. & Gray, 339.

INDEX.

485

Ptelea angustifolia, BcMith., 335.
parvit'olia, Gray, 3:55.
trifoliata, Linn., 335.

R.

llanunculus delpliinifolius, IIBK.,
317.

Pfpoides, IIBK., 317.

ilooktM-i, Sclileclit., 317.

stolonit'er, Ileinsl., 317.
Rhamnus Caroliniaiui, Walt., 336.
Rhus Copnllina, Linn., 338.

luicrophylla, Eno^elni., 338.

pachynliacliis, Ilemsl., 338.

virens, Lindl., 338.
Rhynclio.sia macrocarpa, Bentli.,
347.

minima, DC, 347.

phaseoloides, DC, 347.

^enna, 347.

Toxana, Torr. & Gray, 317.
Rosa iMexicana, Watson, 354.
Rubus hu mist rat Hx, Stend., 353.

trivialis, Michx., 353.

Salt, acid potassium, 70, 73.
Salt, amnioniimi, 71, 70, 78.
Salt, croceo-cobalt, 69.
Sapindus marginatus, Willd., 337.
Sarratia Berlanrlieri, 376.
Saxifraga eriopliora, AVatson, 372.
Scha^fferia ouneifolia. Gray, 335.
Scliranlvia aculeata, Willd., 3.30.

subinerinis, Watson, 350.
Sechiopsis triquetra, Naud., 360.
Sedura divaricatum, Watson, 372.

divergens, Watson, 372.

Douglasii, Hook., 372.

ebraeteatura, DC, 355.

fuscum, Hemsl., 355.

Liebmannianum, Ilerasl., 355.

Palmeri, AVatson, 355.

parvum, Ilemsl., 355.
Sericoides Greggii, Gray, 334.
Serjania bracliycarpa. Gray, 337.

incisa, Torr., 337.

inflata, Watson, 337.

racemosa, Schum., 337.
Sesbania Cavanillesii, Watson, 342.

longifolia, DC, 342.

macrocarpa, Muhl, 342.

Slcydium Limlheimeri, Gray, 359.
Sicyos arif/itlaltis, 3-59.

Deppei, Don, 359.
Sida diffusa, IIBK., 330.

fasciculata, Torr. & Gray, 330.
flifontm, Moric, 3-30.
MI i pes. Gray, 331.
hederacea, Gray, 3-30.
Lindlieiineri, Gray, 331.
physocalyx, Gray, 331.
tragiajfolia. Gray, 331.
Silene (iir-f/f/ii, Gray, 326.
laciniata, Cav., 326.
Parisiiii, AVatson, 366.
platyota, AA'atson, 366.
plicata, AA'atson, 366.
Silver emetic, 5.

Sisymbrium auriculatinn, Gray, 321.
canescens, Xutt., 320.
Coulteri, Hemsl., 320.
Palmeri, Ilemsl., 320.
streptocar-pum, 320.
Solidago and Aster, studies of, in
the older herbai-ia, 163.
Solidago altissima, 177, 180,
184.
ambigua, 183, 185.

arguta, 180, 185.
aspera, 180, 184.

aspei-ata, 187.

asperula, 188.

bicolor, 178, 182. 18.3.

csesia, 178, 183, 185.

Canadensis, 177, 179, 184.

carinata, 189.

ciliaris, 184.

Cleliaj, 188.

conferta, 186.

confertiflora. 189.

corymbosa, 187.

decemflora, 188.

elata, 187.

elliptica, 181, 185.

erecta, 187.

flabelliformis, 188.

flexicaulis, 178, 185.

fragrans, 186.

fuscata, 188.

gigantea, 180, 184.

glabra, 186, 188.

glomerata, 183.

gracilis, 186.

grandiflora, 188.

hirta, 186.

hispida, 185.

humilis, 187, 188.

iutegrifolia, 188.

486

INDEX.

Solidago juncea, ISl, 185.
l?evigata, 181, 18.5.
lanceolata, 178, 181, 18.5.
lateriflora, 178, 180, 184.
latifolia, 178.
lepida, 189.
linoides, 182.
lithospermifolia, 186.
livida, 186.
macrophylla, 187.
Mexicana, 178, 181, 185.
multiflora, 187, 188.
multiradiata, 183. 186.
nemoralis, 180, 184.
Noveboracensis, 179.
nutans, 188.
odora, 181, 185.
patula, 185.
pauciflosculosa, 183.
petiolaris, 182, 185.
plantaginea, 188.
procera, 179, 184.
pyramidata, 187.
recurvata, 186.
reflexa, 180, 184.
retrorsa, 183.
rigida, 179, 182, 186.
rotundifolia, 189.
rugosa, 184.
sarothras, 187.
scabra, 184.
scabrida, 188.
Schraderi, 189.
sempervirens, 177, 181, 185.
serotina, 179, 184.
spathulata, 189.
stricta, 182. 185.
ulmifolia, 185.
villosa, 187.
viminea, 182, 185.
virgata, 183.
virgaurea, 179.
(§ 1) Virgaurea, —
amplexicaiilis, 194.
arguta, 195.
bicolor, 190.
Bigelovii, 190.
Boottii, 195.
Buckleyi, 190.
cfiesia, 189.
Californica, 197.
Canadensis, 196.
Chapmani, 193.
cont'crtiflora, 191.
confinis, 191.
corynibosa, 198.
Cuvtisii, 190.

Solidago discoidea, 189.
Drummondii, 198.
Elliottii, 194.
elliptica, 194.
elongata, 196.
flavovirens, 192.
glomerata, 191.
gracillima, 192.
Guirardonis, 193.
Houghtoni, 198.
humilis, 191.
juncea, 195.
lancifolia, 190.
latifolia, 190.
Leavenworthii, 196.
lepida, 196.
Lindheimeriana, 190.
linoides, 184.
macrophylla, 191.
MarshalU, 195.
Missouriensis, 195.

monticola, 190.

multiradiata, 191.
nana, 197.
negiecta, 195.

nemoralis, 197.

nitida, 198.
odora, 193.

Ohioensis, 198.

patula, 193.

petiolaris, 189.

pilosa, 193.

puberula, 192.

piunila, 108.

radula, 197.

Riddellii, 198.

rigida, 198.

rugosa, 194.

rupestris, 196.

sempervirens, 192.

serotina, 196.

Shortii, 195.

sparsiflora, 197.

spathulata, 191.

speciosa, 193.

spectabilis, 193.

spitliania>a, 191.

squarrosa, 189.

stricta, 192.

Terra'-Xovfe, 195.

tortifolia, 193.

uliginosa, 193.

ulmifolia, 194.

vcrna, 194.

virgaurea, 191.

INDEX.

487

(§2) Chrypoma, —

Solidago c^onoclada, 199.
paiiic'ulata, 199.
]iaucill<i.sciil(isa, 198.
scabiida, 199.
simplex, 199.
spatliulata, 199.
velutina, 199.
(§ 3) Eutlianiia, —
lanceolata, 198.
leptocepliala, 198.
occidentalis, 198.
tenuifolia, 198.
Sophora secnndiflora. Lag., 347.

sericea, Xutt., 317.
Sper (Jill aria, Presl, 327.

Mexicana, Ilemsl., 327.
neylecta, 327.
Sphteralcea angustifolia, St. Ilil.,
331.
hastulata, Gray, 331.
stellala, Torr. & Gray, 332.
Spira;a discolor, Pursh, 353.
Spruce-beams, experiments on the

fatigue of small, 304.
Stellaria cuspidata, Willd., 327.

prostrata, Baldw., 327.
Stenosiphon virgatus, Spach, 358.
Slipalaria, Haw., 327.
Streptanthus diversifolius, Watson,
363.
micranthus, Gray, 321.
Stromateus triacanthus, 276.
Stylosanthes mucronata, AVilld., 314.
Synthlip.sis Berlandieri, Gray, 321,
322.
Greggii, Gray, 322.
heterochroma, Watson, 321.

Talinopsis frutescens, Gray, 329.
Talinuiii aurantiacum, Engelm.,

329.
Telephoning over long distances or

through cables, 2G8.
Temnodon saltator, 275.
Tephrosia Lindheimeri, Gray, 342.

teiiella, Gray, 342.
Tetrabrompropionate, baric, 142.

calcic, 143.
Tetrabromproj^ionic acid, 110.
Thalictrum strigillosum, Ilemsl.,

317.
Tharanosma Tesanum, Torr., 335.

Thelypodium auriculatum, Watson,

321.

linearifolium, Watson; .321.

longifoliuin, Watson, 321.

micrantlium, Watson, 321.

Thermoelectric line of copper and

nickel below 0°, 47.
Thermoelectricity, 39.
Tlierniometer, a new form of air-,
22.
differential air-, 26.
etiier, examination of, 54.
Thermometers, simple method for

calibrating, 157.
Thlaspi Calii'ornicum, Watson, 365.
Tilia INIexicana, Benth., .332.
Tilhea angustifolia, Nutt., 354.
Tourmaline, white, 57.
TradescaiitiaFloridana. Watson, 381.

gracilis, HBK.,382.
Tribromacrylic acid, crystalline form

of, 154.
Tribrompropionate, argentic, 137.
Tribrompropionic acid, 137.

its relation to dibromacrylic
acid, 133.
Tribulus maximus, Linn., 334.
Trifolium amabile, Hook., 339.
involucratum, AVilld., 339.
reflexum, 339.

Schiedeanum, AYatson, 339.
Turmeric, on certain substances ob-
tained from, 110.
Turnera aphi'odisiaca, Ward, 359.

U.

Ungnadia speciosa, Endl., 337.

V.

Yauquelinia corymbosa, Corr. , 353.
Vesicaria argyrea. Gray, 319.

Fendleri, Gray, 320.

purpurea, Gray, 319.

recurvata, Engelm., 320.

Schaffneri, Watson, 320.

stenojjhylla. Gray, 320.
Yicia Americana. Linn., 345.

pulchella. HBK., 345.
Yiola Barroetana, Schaffn., 324.

cucullata, Ait., 321.

flagelliformis, Ilemsl., .323.

Hookeriana, HBK., 324.

488

INDEX.

Viola latistipula, Hemsl., 324.

pubescens, 324.
Vitis a!t.tivulis, Michx., 337.

cordifolia, Michx., 337.

incisa, Nutt., 337.

w.

Wedge photometer, the, 231.
White tourmaline, 57.

X.

Xanthoxylum Clava-Herculis, Linn.,
335.

macrophyllum, Nutt., 335.

rterota, HBK., 335.
Xylopleurum, Sx^ach, 356.

Zizyphus lycioides, Gray, 336.

obtusifolius. Gray, 336.
Zornia diphylla, Pers., 344.

tetraphylla, Michx., 344.

University Press : Jolin Wilson and Son, Cambridge.

Mlil. WHOl I.IHKAKV

WH lAfll Q

15^ (c